Networking

Rittal – IT Catalogue 

R

We have the modules to precisely solve your IT tasks 

SIMPLICITY AS THE HIGHEST LEVEL 

OF PERFECTION 

As little as possible, as much as necessary – find this balance, and you have perfection. 

Our IT technology is dynamic and innovative – but we also consciously design it to be 

simple. Simplicity is your advantage. In technical terms, this means reducing complex 

and complicated correlations to a minimum. In our relationship with you, we take care of 

everything so that you needn’t worry about a thing. 

Simply perfect, thanks to intelligent system diversity and an holistic approach – 

these are customer solutions from Rittal. 

Communication is the future. 

Rittal offers inspiring IT solutions 

from the outset.

CONTENTS 

Rittal IT catalogue 

Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 

Server racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 

Monitoring & remote management . . . . . 186 

IT infrastructure/service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 

Telecom/distributor racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 

Yet more IT solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 

System accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 

Engineering and consultancy . . . . . . . . . 400 

Innovations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 

3

Curiosity creates new paths for us to follow. 

● Rittal’s permanent innovation achievements are the result 

of global dialogue with our customers. 

● Our own accredited laboratories guarantee quality and 

cost efficiency in accordance with ambitious international 

standards, leading to internationally recognised approvals 

for global use. 

4 Rittal IT catalogue

We give pioneering answers 

DETERMINATION IS THE ENGINE 

OF PROGRESS 

Fascinating future – we see this as much more than just a slogan. We are born to inno- 

vate. We live our passion, which is what makes us truly convincing. This is the only way 

for us to be credible, and to achieve lasting success with you. 

We realise the importance of continuously building on our outstanding position in order 

to rank among the technological leaders in a global market. Wireless, biometrics and 

energy-efficient protection are just some of the dynamic technologies we are pursuing 

with exceptional commitment and expertise. We are keen to be measured by these 

developments in future. 

International Rittal research teams are working for the future with clear objectives in mind: 

Exceptional benefits for the user, enhanced energy efficiency, and conservation of our 

natural resources. 

Wireless Energy efficiency Personal identification

We offer system integration – for industry and all sections of the company 

COMMUNICATION AS THE BASIS 

We live in an information society. Information and data are productivity factors. 

Every company and every individual is reliant on information. Those with better, faster 

information are able to secure a competitive lead. We ensure that modern IT technology 

has the best framework and meets your requirements to perfection. 

The Rittal system platforms are called rack, cooling, power, security and monitoring. 

Rittal solutions for the physical IT infrastructure are based on an holistic approach, 

combined with an exceptional determination to drive progress forwards at every oppor- 

tunity. Our philosophy has made us a much sought-after partner. 

Talk to us. 

Thoroughly modern, scalable and efficient 

system solutions – that’s Rittal. 

6 Rittal IT catalogue 

R


People are at the heart of all communications. They plan 

and organise, initiate and control. The IT infrastructure also 

has a decisive effect on his efficiency and success. Rittal 

offers holistic solutions which embrace all sections of the 

company, whatever the industry! 

Rack – power – cooling – security – monitoring for 

● Data centres 

● IT infrastructure 

● Data and network technology 

● Decentralised computer systems 

● Building distribution 

● Indoor and outdoor communication 

● Industrial Ethernet 

7

Expertise, customer proximity, quality, deliverability, 

product diversity and global service – these are Rittal’s 

great strengths. 

Around 10,000 Rittal employees around the globe with production 

and logistical expertise are working on customised 

developments and in modification centres, at: 

● 19 production sites 

● 60 subsidiaries 

● 70 agencies and 

● 150 distribution and logistics centres. 


We hold face-to-face meetings . . . at countless national and international trade fairs . . . and at 300 Rittal sites – worldwide. 


We are there for you, whenever and wherever you need us 

GLOBAL PROXIMITY 

To offer customer proximity, you need to be mobile. The desire to keep moving is in 

our blood. We are totally and globally customer-oriented. This is a large part of our 

attraction, which translates into a genuine added value for you. 

We are there for you. We are local. Anywhere in the world. However, for us, customer 

proximity is not just geographical; it is also a question of seeking out face-to-face 

meetings wherever possible. Because for us, a meeting is the starting point of our 

“customer-based” developments, in the most literal sense of the word. We show you 

the most innovative, most cost-efficient path. 

Requirement analysis, planning, development, prototype construction, modifica- 

tions, tests, production, assembly, service and support – that’s Rittal service. 

9

Extensive technical expertise, well-established structures, and a complete 

service chain 

EFFICIENCY AS STANDARD 

Efficiency is a combination of efficacy plus cost-effectiveness. It sounds easy, and it is, 

but only provided all parts work together with optimum interaction between individual 

modules. Rittal sets new standards: TBU – Total Benefit of Usership – considers all the 

benefits arising from the use of a product. In order to achieve the aspired levels of 

availability and reliability (efficacy), the sum total of all purchase and operating costs 

(cost-efficiency) must be reduced to a minimum, a process that we have perfected to 

a fine art. Energy efficiency comes as standard with Rittal, particularly when it is a 

question of supplying complete solutions for optimum reliability and maximum avail- 

ability with an appropriate level of investment. This demands integrated solutions, such 

as those supplied by Rittal worldwide on every scale. Furthermore, Rittal is distinguished 

by the innovative strengths we derive from our relentless curiosity and fascination. 

Tailor-made systems, no over-sizing, no unnecessary fixed costs, and where 

necessary, simple expansion with the system operational – this is the 

“pay-as-you-go” concept from Rittal. 

RimatriX5 IT infrastructures Business continuity management Physical IT security


Rittal International, compromising of – Rittal – Litcos – Lampertz –, 

offers its customers holistic IT infrastructures from a single source. 

High standards of reliability and availability are achieved costeffectively, 

with perfect results. 

● With RimatriX5, Rittal offers a comprehensive range of services 

and a full choice of modules for your rack-based IT infrastructure. 

● Litcos: Analytical advice and holistic planning of data centre 

structures. 

● Lampertz: Modular IT security rooms (room-within-a-room concept) 

and IT security cabinets, with an emphasis on fire and theft 

protection. 

11

A complete network of 

enclosure solutions 

Rittal produces innovative, cost-effective solutions for all 

types of IT enclosure systems. Compact, stylish, pre-con- 

figured, and in a wide range of sizes. Moreover, Rittal has 

a range of system accessories to suit every enclosure, and 

therefore offers a suitable enclosure solution for every app- 

lication. Rittal networking always means accessing the 

holistic solution; the integrative Rittal system. From power 

management, to security and monitoring, through to cooling. 

Rittal enclosure solutions are far more than just the width, 

height and depth of the enclosure. Instead, they are a 

complementary network of versatile ideas for adapting to 

practical requirements and the needs of the future. 

TE 7000 network enclosures 

Two depth-variable 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting levels provide a solid framework 

(load capacity 400 kg) for all 

fixed and patching tasks. 

In keeping with the principle “as little 

as possible, as much as necessary”, 

this rack does not require an 

enclosure frame. Benefits: Optimum 

accessibility and simple assembly. 

A practical, cost-effective solution for 

distributors in office environments. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Networking 

TS 8 network enclosures 

A diversity of applications and variability, 

both as a distributor and in combination 

with installed servers. 

Regardless of how demanding your 

requirements may be, unrestricted 

mounting diversity and a comprehensive 

range of system accessories 

means that a solution with TS 8 always 

offers excellent value for money. 

Reliability and availability may be 

tailored precisely to requirements, 

using modular lock, climate control 

and monitoring solutions. 

Networking from page 14 

System comparison of enclosures....................................................14 

System comparison of wall-mounted enclosures .............................16 

Installation examples ........................................................................18 

Network enclosures, based on Rittal TE 7000..................................26 

Network enclosures, based on Rittal TS 8........................................32 

Network enclosures, based on Rittal flexRack(i) ..............................48 

RNC enclosures................................................................................53 

Accessories for RNC enclosures......................................................55 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal QuickBox ......................57 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal AE .................................60 

Wall mounted enclosure, based on Rittal AE, with pull-out frame....61 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part ......................62 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 2-part ......................66 

EMC wall-mounted enclosure, based on Rittal EL, 3-part................67 

Small fibre-optic distributors.............................................................68 

Small fibre-optic distributors, based on Rittal AE .............................69 

Fibre-optic marshalling enclosure ....................................................70 

Small fibre-optic distributor, polycarbonate .....................................71 

Wall-mounted enclosures 

The Rittal wall-mounted range has something 

for everyone. 

Tailored to IT distribution applications, 

they are distinguished by optimum 

accessibility, high production 

quality, and a comprehensive range of 

system accessories. 

13 

Networking

Networking 


System comparison of enclosures 

Plan with the best network enclosure for your require- 

ments! 

Customers’ requirements of IT enclosures can be 

extremely varied. With this in mind, Rittal offers three 

different system platforms with outstanding design 

features for a variety of applications. 

Rittal system comparison TE 7000 TS 8 FR(i) 

One platform for all requirements 

in the IT market 

Load capacity 

up to 400/700 kg 

up to 1000 kg 

Baying 

 

Side to side 

In all levels 

Dismantling 

Climate control 

 

Fans 

Cooling unit 

Air/water 

heat exchanger 

 

CPU liquid cooling 

Cabling 

 

Cable space 

Cable management 

Lock system 

 

2-point 

4-point 

Security 

 

Access control 

Thermal management 

Interior installation 

 

Depth-variable 

Partial installation 

2-level principle 

Aesthetics 

Standards 

 

IEC 60 297-1-2 

Protection 

categories 

Note: 

IP 20 

IP 40 

IP 55 

 

 

 

 

 

The more the greater the compatibility. 

TE 7000 

TE 7000 – Top efficiency, the global IT rack 

Ready to use for network distribution. As little as possible, 

as much as necessary – the rack for rational, costeffective 

cabling. 

● At its core is the robust frame comprising two 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting levels. 

● Two-point locking rod, optionally with Ergoform-S 

handle system. 

● System accessories ensure fast, versatile configuration. 

Network enclosures TE 7000, see page 26. 

14 Rittal IT catalogue/Networking

Rittal TS 8 Rittal flexRack(i) 

TS 8 – the Top enclosure system 

This offers diversity and protection for your network, 

based on the ingenious rack profile. With two levels, it 

facilitates unlimited interior installation. 

● Suitable for one or two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

levels, partial or full installation. 

● The ingenious symmetry concept of the frame offers 

baying on all sides. 

● A high level of security, thanks to lock systems with 

a comfort handle and 4-point locking. 

● Perfect integration of climate control components. 

● Protection category up to IP 55. 

Network enclosures TS 8, see page 32. 



System comparison of enclosures 

flexRack(i) – The high-end designer rack 

A stylish design, a high degree of stability, plus futuristic 

technology – with the hollow aluminium section. 

● Cables may be routed and system accessories 

integrated within the hollow chamber of the frame 

section. 

● Power management integrated directly into the frame 

section. Three-phase infeed using the plug & play 

system, with no loss of enclosure volume. 

Network enclosures flexRack(i), see page 48. 

15 




System comparison of wall-mounted enclosures 

RNC enclosure 

RNC universal enclosure 

Prepared for the installation of 

1 /219″ components. 10″ components 

may also be installed by 

using an adaptor. 482.6 mm 

(19″) variant for vertical populati 

The universal enclosure, vertical 

for 19″ installation, horizontal for 

1 /219″ or 10″ installation. 

Cut-outs in the mounting 

bracket for access to the rear 

of the patch panels or active 

components. 

The configuration of decentralised network units is extremely 

important for small and medium-sized companies. Rittal has 

high-quality solutions to meet virtually every requirement of a 

growing network. 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal QuickBox 

Side panels with integral vent 

slots. 

Bayed for 482.6 mm (19″) configuration, 

vertical and horizontal. 

Slide rails to support heavy 

assemblies. 

The floor-standing enclosure 

may also be used as a wallmounted 

enclosure with additional 

support brackets. 

Passive ventilation 

To accommodate a prepared 

fan, cable entry with brush strip. 

Vent slots for passive ventilation. 


Whether fibre-optic or copper distributors, 1 /219″ or 19″ enclo- 

sures, high protection category or passively vented wall-mounted 

enclosures, the IT wall-mounted distributor range covers every 

conceivable requirement and is available off the shelf. 

Wall-mounted and distribution enclosures 


Wall-mounted enclosure 

based on AE with pull-out frame 

or depth-adjustable 482.6 mm 

(19″) level. 

Fibre-optic marshalling 

enclosure 

Two access areas: 

1. For splicing cassette mounting 

2. For the patching chamber. 

Optimum accessibility thanks to 

3-part or 2-part vertically hinged 

configuration. 


System comparison of wall-mounted enclosures 

Small fibre-optic distributor 

As a corridor and intermediate 

distributor of fibre-optic cables. 

Small fibre-optic distributors, 

polycarbonate, for extreme 

conditions with a high protection 

category of IP 66 to 

EN 60 529/10.91. 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part/2-part 

Equipped with Mini comfort handle 

(3 – 15 U), comfort handle 

(18 and 21 U) and replaceable 

cable gland plates. 

Small fibre-optic distributor, 

based on AE 

The ideal enclosure for breakout 

applications. 

2-part enclosure with swing 

frame. Facility for installing subracks 

and electronic components. 

17 


TE 7000 

Network enclosures 


1 

2 

3 

4 

This is what TE Top Efficiency looks like! 

The rack for rational, cost-effective cabling, ready to use in 

network distribution: 

At its core is the robust frame comprising two 482.6 mm (19″) 

attachment levels. Add to this a host of useful accessories 

from Rittal’s comprehensive modular system, and you will 

arrive at the precise configuration which meets your require- 

ments to perfection, quickly and cost effectively. 

5 

Example: System accessories for perfect configuration of a TE 7000 network enclosure 

Use these examples to help you. Socket strips, lights, cable management 

devices and other system accessories are 

all available from Rittal, in a wide range of 

variants suitable for different applications. 

7 

1 Light, 1 U 

2 Fan unit, active 

3 Fibre-optic cable management panel, 

1U 

4 Cable routing bar, 1 U 


Note: 

TE 7000 network enclosures, see page 26. 

Parts list with model numbers for this example, 

see page 22. 

6 

8 

9 

14 

15 

10 

11 

6 Socket strip TE, 8-way 

7 Cable management panel, 1 U 

8 Cable gland panel 

9 Cable routing bar, cranked, 4 U 

10 Component shelf, static installation 

11 Distributor clip, small 

12 Earth rail 

13 Distributor clip, large 

14 Drawer, 2 U 

15 UPS, single-phase 

13 

12 

19 


TS 8 


3 

4 


1 

6 

2 

Customised from the modular system – the fast route to a 

Top solution! Stylish glazed door, maximum installation varia- 

bility, and exceptional security thanks to the lock system and 

protection category (up to IP 55) – these are the distinguishing 

features of the TS 8 Top enclosure system. The symmetrical 

layout and two-level principle of the TS 8 section facilitate opti- 

mum space utilisation in every level. 

At the same time, the TS 8 is extremely resilient (load capacity 

up to 1000 kg) and offers various options for system integra- 

tion (power supply, climate control, access protection and 

monitoring). 

5 

Example: System accessories for perfect configuration of a TS 8 network enclosure 

Rittal system accessories are available 1 System light (Linestra) 

in many different variants, tailored to the 

intended application. 482.6 mm (19″) 

2 Fan tray 

partial configuration and the use of com- 3 Power cable, light 

ponent shelves across the entire enclosure 

width are likewise easily achieved. 


Use these examples to help you. 

5 C rails 

6 Fibre-optic cable management panel, 

1U 

7 Cable gland panel 

8 Socket strip, 5-way with overvoltage 

protection and RFI suppressor filter 

10 

12 

Note: 

TS 8 network enclosures, see page 32. 


see page 23. 

9 

11 

7 

8 

15 

18 

13 

14 

9 Socket strip, 7-way 

10 Component shelf, 482.6 mm (19″) 

installation 

11 Telescopic slides for component shelf 




15 Drawer, 2 U 

16 Blanking panel, 482.6 mm (19″), 2 U 

17 Distributor clip, large 


16 

17 

21 




Parts list for the configuration example TE 7000 

No. Name Packs of Model No. Page 

TE 7000 network enclosure, pre-configured 

W = 800 mm, H = 2000 mm, D = 800 mm 

Accessories 

1 DK 7000.850 26 

1 Light, 1 U 1 DK 7109.200 335 

2 Fan unit, active 1 DK 7000.670 128 

3 Fibre-optic cable management panel, 1 U 1 DK 7256.035 363 

4 Cable routing bar, 1 U 10 DK 7111.212 360 

5 Cable routing bar, 4 U 4 DK 7111.222 360 

6 Socket strip TE, 8-way 1 DK 7000.630 331 

7 Cable management panel, 1 U 1 DK 7257.035 361 

8 Cable gland panel 1 DK 7140.535 363 

9 Cable routing bar, cranked, 4 U 4 DK 7111.220 360 

10 Component shelf, static installation 1 DK 7000.620 320 

11 Distributor clip, small 4 DK 7111.250 360 

12 Earth rail, vertical 1 DK 7113.000 338 

13 Distributor clip, large 4 DK 7111.252 360 

14 Drawer, 2 U 1 DK 7282.035 385 

15 UPS, single-phase 1 DK 7857.430 433 

Optional accessories 

A Power: Single-phase UPS 433 

B Security: Monitoring system CMC-TC 158 

C Cooling: Fan systems 123 

D Lock systems 282 

E Lock cylinder 282 

F Cable routing, cable routing bars 360 

A 

Single-phase UPS 

B Monitoring system CMC-TC C 

Fan systems 

D Lock systems 

E Lock cylinder 

F Cable bars 




Parts list for the configuration example TS 8 


TS 8 network enclosure, pre-configured 

W = 800 mm, H = 2000 mm, D = 800 mm 

Accessories 

DK 7930.200 32 

1 System light (Linestra) 1 PS 4103.350 335 

2 Fan tray 1 DK 7988.035 127 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

Power cable, light 5 PS 4315.100 336 

Cable routing bar, cranked, 4 U 4 DK 7111.220 360 

C rails DK 7828.080 307 

Fibre-optic cable management panel, 1 U 1 DK 7256.035 363 

Cable gland panel 1 DK 7140.535 363 

Socket strip, 5-way with overvoltage protection and interference 

suppressor filter 

1 DK 7240.230 328 

Socket strip, 7-way 1 DK 7240.210 328 

Component shelf, 482.6 mm (19″) configuration 1 DK 7145.035 319 

Telescopic slides for component shelf 2 DK 7081.000 326 

Cable management panel, 1 U 1 DK 7257.035 361 

Cable routing bar, 4 U 4 DK 7111.222 360 

Cable management panel, 1 U 1 DK 7159.035 361 

Drawer, 2 U 1 DK 7282.035 385 

Blanking panel, 482.6 mm (19″), 2 U 2 DK 7152.035 392 

17 Distributor clip, large 4 DK 7111.252 360 



A Voltage supply: Energy-Box 332 

B Security: Monitoring system CMC-TC 158 

C Cable management 350 

D 19″ installation system 364 

E Doors 277 

F Interior installation 295 

A Energy Box 

B 

Monitoring system CMC-TC 


D 19″ installation system 

E Designer glazed door 

F Interior installation 

C 

23 


Wall-mounted enclosure, 3-part 

1 

2 

3 

2 

1 

Shunting ring with cable shunting ring, 

polyamide (DK 7159.035) 

2 outlet filters (SK 3322.207), 

included in supply 

Junction box (DK 7280.035) 

A high protection category and optimum accessibility thanks to a 3-part, vertically hinged configuration – the EL 

wall-mounted enclosure with 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles is ideally suited for small, decentralised networks, 

as a corridor distributor, or for all “Ethernet goes factory” applications. The EL enclosure proves that a protection 

category of up to IP 55 is no barrier to an attractive design, making Note: 

Wall-mounted enclosure, 3-part, 

it particularly suitable for use even in tough industrial environments. see page 62. 

3 

System accessories for pre-configured wall-mounted enclosure, 3-part (DK 7715.735), W x H x D mm = 600 x 746 x 572.5, 15 U: 

Mini Comfort handle (DK 7705.120), 

included in the supply 

24 Rittal IT catalogue/Networking 

4 

4 5 Socket strip, 7-way (DK 7240.210) 

6 

7 

6 

Component shelf 2 U, static installation 

(DK 7119.400) 

Earth rail with star earthing (DK 7113.000), 

included in the supply 

5 

7

QuickBox wall-mounted enclosure 


2 

Installations that are accessible from all sides are extremely advantageous in day-to-day handling. 

The removable cover of the QuickBox complements this to perfection. Other consistent design 

features, such as large cut-outs in the mounting 

brackets, brush strips and vent slots, make the QuickBox 

a universal office distributor. 

1 

3 

System accessories for QuickBox wall-mounted enclosure (DK 7502.046), W x H x D mm = 600 x 762 x 600, 15 U: 

1 Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″) 

4 Socket strip, 7-way (DK 7240.210) 

6 

Brush strip top and bottom. 

(DK 7502.204) 

5 Component shelf 2 U, static installation 

2 Cable panel with cable shunting ring, 

polyamide (DK 7255.035) 

(DK 7119.400) 

3 Junction box (DK 7280.035) 

5 

4 

Note: 

QuickBox wall-mounted enclosures, 

see page 57. 

6 

25



Network enclosures TE 7000, pre-configured 

Benefits: 

● 19″ mounting angles front and 

rear always included 

● No frame structure, 

optimum accessibility 

● Load capacity up to 400 kg 

● Pre-configured solution, 

including extensive accessory 

kit. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Surface finish: 

Mounting frame: 

Electrophoretic dipcoat-primed 

Enclosure panels: 

Powder-coated, RAL 7035. 

T1 

B 


H 

T1 

B 

H 

Pre-configured Pre-configured Page 

U 24 42 

Width (B) mm 1) 800 800 

Height (H) mm 1) 1200 2000 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 800 800 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels in its delivered state mm 495 495 

Model No. TE 7000.840 7000.850 

Model No. TE as bayed enclosure without side panels, including baying kit – 7000.852 

Supply includes 

Self-supporting 482.6 mm (19″) frame structure, depth-variable at the front and rear 

Glazed door at the front, including 130° hinge, two-point locking rod, recessed handle and 

security lock 3524 E 

 

Sheet steel door at the rear, including 130° hinge, two-point locking rod, recessed handle and 

security lock 3524 E 

 

Pluggable weight-reduced side panels, including security lock 3524 E (7000.850 only) 

Base frame with maximum cut-out (for optional population with modular panels, solid, 

with passive ventilation or for cable entry) 

 

Roof plate including brush strip for cable entry and concealed cut-out for population via the active fan plate 

4 levelling feet (including base/plinth adaptor) supplied loose 

Spacers, 20 mm, supplied loose to raise the roof 

Base/plinth 100 mm, vented 

Tested frame earthing to EN 60 950, fitted 

Accessory kit 

 

4 C rails, for cable clamping in the enclosure depth via cable clamps, supplied loose 

10 cable shunting rings made of plastic, 105 x 70 mm, supplied loose 

50 captive nuts, M6, conductive, supplied loose 

50 multi-tooth screws, M6, with plastic washers, supplied loose 

Premium accessories TE, for direct mounting in the delivered state 

 

Ergoform S handle for semi-cylinder, to exchange for the existing lock 2435.000 2435.000 284 

Fan module, with 2 fans and thermostat, pre-wired ready for connection 7000.670 7000.670 128 

Slide rail for TE, for attachment between the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames, length 424 mm 7963.410 7963.410 384 

19″ component shelf for static installation, for direct screw-fastening without an installation kit, 412 mm deep, 

load capacity 30 kg, static 

7000.620 7000.620 320 

Punched section with mounting flange 17 x 73 mm, for mounting installation components, attached in the 

enclosure depth between the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames 

8612.040 8612.040 299 

C rail, for cable clamping in the enclosure depth via cable clamps 

C rail, for cable clamping in the enclosure width via cable clamps, 

on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame at the rear 

7828.060 7828.060 307 

Cable clamp rail, depth-variable 325 – 575 mm, for cable attachment in the enclosure depth via cable ties 7858.160 7858.160 354 

Cable clamp rail for cable attachment in the enclosure depth using cable ties, 


7828.062 7828.062 354 

Earthing kit for TE 

Economy socket strip, 8-way for earthing-pin plugs 7000.630 7000.630 331 

Included with the supply. 1) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing on the Internet.

Benefits: 

● Accessories configured to 

order for fast installation 

● No frame structure, optimum 

accessibility 


Material: 

Sheet steel 

495 mm – This is the distance 

between the two 482.6 mm 

(19″) levels for all enclosure 

formats in their delivered state. 

Complies with TS 8 nominal 

depth 400 mm, inner level. 

Pitch spacing 50 mm. 

The distance between the two 

482.6 mm (19″) levels may be 

varied in increments of 50 mm 

(445 to 695 mm). 

Distance from door: 

52.5 mm for depth 600 


The mounting distance in a 

rear mounting frame, horizontal, 

corresponds to the frame 

mounting dimensions of a 

600 mm wide TS 8 (inner level, 

512 mm). 






Powder-coated, RAL 7035/ 

RAL 9005 

Supply includes: 

Self-supporting 482.6 mm (19″) 

frame structure, 

E = A – 120 mm 

Accessories Page 252 Monitoring Page 187 Climate control Page 113 


Network enclosures, based on Rittal TE 7000, width 600 

Choose the distance between 

levels completely freely via the 

slot fastening. All key mounting 

components – punched sections 

with mounting flanges, installation 

kits, slide rails, component 

shelves – are also available in a 

depth-variable version. 

600 

600 

A 

D 

800 

600 

A 

glazed door at the front, 

two-point locking rod, recessed 

handle and security lock 3524 E, 

sheet steel door at rear, 


handle and security lock 

3524 E, plug-in side panels 

with security lock 3524 E, 

base frame with maximum 

German registered design 

no. 403 07 489 

D 

C 

E 

T 

B 

A 

H 

HE = U 

HE 

19˝ 

cut-out (for optional population 

with module plates), roof plate 

for cable entry with concealed 

cut-out for fan, levelling feet, 

spacers for raising the cover 

plate. 

Detailed drawing, 

available on the Internet. 

U 11 11 24 24 42 42 47 47 

Width (B) mm1) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H) mm 1) 600 600 1200 1200 2000 2000 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 600 800 600 800 600 800 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels 

as delivered A mm 

495 495 495 495 495 495 495 495 

Model No. TE, RAL 7035 7000.390 7000.410 7000.430 7000.440 7000.500 7000.510 7000.560 7000.570 

Model No. TE as a bayed enclosure 

without side panels, incl. baying kit, RAL 7035 

– – – – 7000.502 – 7000.562 – 

Model No. TE including side panels, RAL 9005 – – – – 7000.505 2) 7000.515 2) – – 

1) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, refer to detailed drawings on the Internet. 2) Delivery times on request. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

B 

D 

A 

A 

= Defined mounting 

distance for Premium 

accessories, see below. 

27 





U 11 11 24 24 Page 

Width (B) mm 1) 600 600 600 600 

Height (H) mm 1) 600 600 1200 1200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 600 800 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels in its delivered state A mm 495 495 495 495 

Model No. TE, RAL 7035 7000.390 7000.410 7000.430 7000.440 

Model No. TE as a bayed enclosure without side panels, 

incl. baying kit, RAL 7035 

– – – – 

Model No. TE including side panels, RAL 9005 

Doors 

– – – – 

Glazed front door/sheet steel rear door 

Sheet steel front door/sheet steel rear door on request on request on request on request 

Ergoform-S handle for semi-cylinder, 

in exchange for the existing lock 

Side panel 

2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 284 

Side panel, plug-type, 

including security lock 3524 E 

 

Baying kit 

Roof 

7000.640 7000.640 7000.640 7000.640 276 

Roof plate with brush strip for cable entry, 

prepared to accommodate an active fan unit 

 

Fan unit, 2 fans (max. 3) including thermostat 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 128 

Fan expansion kit 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 127 

Spacers 20 mm to raise the cover plate above 

the fan cut-out 

Base/plinth 

 

Roof frame with maximum cut-out for individual population 

with module plates, levelling feet M10 

 

Module plate variants for individual population from page 264 from page 264 from page 264 from page 264 

Base/plinth components solid, front and rear 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 255 

Base/plinth components, vented, front and rear 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 255 

Base/plinth trim, side 8601.065 8601.085 8601.065 8601.085 255 

Base/plinth adaptor for levelling feet M12 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 262 

Levelling feet M12 4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 260 

Base/plinth installation accessories 

Interior installation/Premium accessories 

from page 254 from page 254 from page 254 from page 254 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames front and rear 

Punched section with mounting flange 17 x 73 mm, for mounting 

 

installation components, attached in the enclosure depth between 

the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames 

8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 299 

Cable clamp rail, depth variable 325 – 575 mm, 

for cable attachment in the enclosure depth using cable ties 

7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 354 

Cable clamp rail, for cable attachment in the enclosure width via 

cable ties, on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame at the rear 

7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 354 

C rail, for cable clamping in the enclosure depth via cable clamps 7828.040 7828.040 7828.040 7828.040 307 



7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 307 

Earthing kit for TE 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 339 

TE socket strip, 8-way with earthing-pin plug 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 331 

Power accessories from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 

Slide rail for TE, for attachment between the 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frames, length 424 mm 

482.6 mm (19″) component shelf for static installation, 

7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 384 

for direct screw-fastening wtihout installation kit, 412 mm deep, 


7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 320 

Cable management from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 

CMC-TC monitoring system 

Included with the supply. 


1) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing on the Internet. 






U 42 42 47 47 Page 

Width (B) mm 1) 600 600 600 600 

Height (H) mm 1) 2000 2000 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 600 800 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels in its delivered state A mm 495 495 495 495 

Model No. TE, RAL 7035 7000.500 7000.510 7000.560 7000.570 



7000.502 – 7000.562 – 

Model No. TE including side panels, RAL 9005 7000.5052) 7000.5152) Doors 

– – 


Sheet steel front door/sheet steel rear door on request on request on request on request 



Side panel 

2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 284 



(7000.500, 

7000.505 only) 

(7000.560 only) 266 

Baying kit 

Roof 

(7000.502 only) 7000.640 (7000.562 only) 7000.640 276 



 

Fan unit, 2 fans (max. 3) including thermostat 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 128 

Fan expansion kit 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 127 

Spacers 20 mm to raise the cover plate above the fan cut-out 

Base/plinth 

 

Base frame with max. cut-out for individual population with module 

plates, levelling feet M10 

 

Module plate variants for individual population from page 264 from page 264 from page 264 from page 264 

Base/plinth components solid, front and rear 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 255 

Base/plinth components, vented, front and rear 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 255 

Base/plinth trim, side 8601.065 8601.085 8601.065 8601.085 255 

Base/plinth adaptor for levelling feet M12 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 262 

Levelling feet M12 4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 260 

Base/plinth installation accessories 





 



8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 299 



7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 354 



7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 354 

C rail, for cable clamping in the enclosure depth via cable clamps 7828.040 7828.040 7828.040 7828.040 307 



7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 307 

Earthing kit for TE 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 339 

TE socket strip, 8-way with earthing-pin plug 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 331 

Power accessories from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 




7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 384 

for direct screw-fastening without an installation kit, 412 mm deep, 


7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 320 






2) Delivery times available on request. 


29 





Benefits: 

● Accessories configured to 

order for fast installation 

● No frame structure, optimum 

accessibility 


Material: 

Sheet steel 

495 mm – This is the distance 

between the two 482.6 mm 

(19″) levels for all enclosure 

formats in their delivered state. 



Pitch spacing 50 mm. 

The distance between the two 

482.6 mm (19″) levels may be 

varied in increments of 50 mm 

(445 to 695 mm). 

Distance from door: 



The mounting distance in a 

rear mounting frame, horizontal, 

corresponds to the frame 

mounting dimensions of a 

600 mm wide TS 8 (inner level, 

512 mm). 





Powder-coated, RAL 7035/ 

RAL 9005 




E = A – 120 mm 

Choose the distance between 

levels completely freely via the 

slot fastening. All key mounting 

components – punched sections 

with mounting flanges, installation 

kits, slide rails, component 

shelves – are also available in a 

depth-variable version. 


600 

800 

A 

D 

800 




sheet steel door at rear, 


handle and security lock 

3524 E, plug-in side panels 

with security lock 3524 E, 

base frame with maximum 


T1 


no. 403 07 489 

800 

A 

D 

C 

E 

A 

B 

H 

HE = U 

HE 

19˝ 

cut-out (for optional population 

with module plates), roof plate 

for cable entry with concealed 

cut-out for fan, levelling feet, 

spacers for raising the cover 

plate. 



U 24 24 42 42 47 47 

Width (B) mm1) 800 800 800 800 800 800 

Height (H) mm 1) 1200 1200 2000 2000 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 600 800 600 800 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels in its delivered state A mm 495 495 495 495 495 495 

Model No. TE, RAL 7035 7000.450 7000.460 7000.520 7000.530 7000.580 7000.590 

Model No. TE as bayed enclosure without side panels, including baying 

kit, RAL 7035 

– – – 7000.532 – 7000.592 

Model No. TE including side panels, RAL 9005 – – 7000.525 2) 7000.535 2) – – 

1) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, refer to detailed drawings on the Internet. 2) Delivery times on request. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

A 

= Defined mounting 

distance for Premium 

accessories, see below. 

B 

D 

A




U 24 24 42 42 47 47 Page 

Width (B) mm 1) 800 800 800 800 800 800 

Height (H) mm 1) 1200 1200 2000 2000 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 600 800 600 800 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels in its delivered state A mm 495 495 495 495 495 495 

Model No. TE, RAL 7035 7000.450 7000.460 7000.520 7000.530 7000.580 7000.590 



– – – 7000.532 – 7000.592 

Model No. TE including side panels, RAL 9005 – – 7000.5252) 7000.5352) Doors 

– – 


Sheet steel front door/sheet steel rear door on request on request on request on request on request on request 



Side panel 

2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 2435.000 284 



 

( 7000.530, 

7000.535 

only) 

 

(7000.590 

only) 

Baying kit 

Roof 

7000.640 7000.640 7000.640 

(7000.532 

only) 

7000.640 

(7000.592 

only) 

276 



 

Fan unit, 2 fans (max. 3) including thermostat 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 7000.670 128 

Fan expansion kit 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 7980.000 127 

Spacers 20 mm to raise the cover plate above the fan cut-out 

Base/plinth 

 

Base frame with max. cut-out for individual population with module 

plates, levelling feet M10 

 

Module plate variants for individual population from p. 264 from p. 264 from p. 264 from p. 264 from p. 264 from p. 264 

Base/plinth components solid, front and rear 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Base/plinth components, vented, front and rear 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 255 

Base/plinth trim, side 8601.065 8601.085 8601.065 8601.085 8601.065 8601.085 255 

Base/plinth adaptor for levelling feet M12 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 8800.220 262 

Levelling feet M12 


4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 4612.000 260 



 



8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 8612.040 299 



7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 7858.160 354 



7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 354 

C rail, for cable clamping in the enclosure depth via cable clamps 4943.000 4943.000 4943.000 4943.000 4943.000 4943.000 307 



7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 307 

Earthing kit for TE 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 339 

TE socket strip, 8-way with earthing-pin plug 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 331 

Power accessories from p. 328 from p. 328 from p. 328 from p. 328 from p. 328 from p. 328 




7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 7963.410 384 

for direct screw-fastening without an installation kit, 412 mm deep, 


7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 7000.620 320 

Cable management from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 



from p. 158 from p. 158 from p. 158 from p. 158 from p. 158 from p. 158 




266 

31 




Network enclosures, based on Rittal TS 8, pre-configured 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Enclosure frame: 

Dipcoat-primed 

Doors, roof and base/plinth: 

Dipcoat-primed, 

powder-coated in RAL 7035 

Gland plates, punched sections 

with mounting flanges and 

mounting angles: 

Zinc-plated, passivated 


Enclosure frame with doors or 

rear panel, roof plate, vented 

base/plinth 100 mm, 

earthing of all enclosure panels; 

Supplied loose: 

Levelling feet incl. base/plinth 

adaptor, 

4 spacers, for raising the roof, 

4 cable clamp rails for the inner 

frame level, 

10 cable shunting rings 

(105 x 70 mm, plastic, for 

DK 7930.100 in 44 x 70 mm), 

50 captive nuts, M6, conductive, 

50 multi-tooth screws M6. 



T1 

T2 

H3 

B2 

B1 

H1 

H2 

Version 1 

Designer glazed door at the 

front, 180°, with comfort handle 

for semi-cylinder and security 

lock 3524 E; 

Sheet steel door at the rear, 

130°, with swivel handle and 

security lock 3524 E. 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles, front, fitted approx. 

150 mm behind the frame front 

edge, screw-fastened to the TS 

punched sections with mounting 

flange as depth stays. 

Gland plate, one-piece, vented, 

with cable entry. 

T1 

H3 

B1 

H1 

H2 

Version 2 




lock 3524 E; 





angles 

at the front and rear, distance 

between levels pre-configured 

at 498 mm. Cranked mounting 

angles screw-fastened to installation 

brackets approx. 150 mm 

behind the frame front edge. 

Gland plate at the front, fitted as 

an infill panel. 



Version 1 Version 2 Version 2 Version 2 

U 24 38 42 47 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 800 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm 1) 1200 + 100 1800 + 100 2000 + 100 2200 + 100 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 800 800 

Clearance width (B2) mm 512 712 712 712 

Clearance height (H3) mm 1112 1712 1912 2112 

Clearance depth (T2) in mm 512 712 712 712 

Model No. DK including 2 plug-in side panels, 

with security lock 3524 E 

Model No. DK as a bayed enclosure without side panels, 

incl. baying kit TS 8800.500 

7930.100 3) 7930.800 3) 7930.200 3) 7930.220 3) 



3) Aluminium glazed door, delivery times available on request. 

– 7930.850 2)3) 7930.250 3) 7930.270 2)3)




Version 1 Version 2 Version 2 Version 2 Page 

U 24 38 42 47 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 800 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm1) 1200 + 100 1800 + 100 2000 + 100 2200 + 100 

Depth (T1) mm1) 600 800 800 800 



7930.100 7930.800 7930.200 7930.220 

Model No. DK as bayed enclosure without side 

panels, including baying kit TS 8800.500 

– 7930.8502) 7930.250 7930.2702) Doors 

Designer glazed front door/sheet steel rear door 

Various door options from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 

180° hinges for sheet steel rear door 

Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 

Side panel, plug-in, IP 20 (7930.800 only) (7930.200 only) (7930.220 only) 

Lock for side panel, plug-in, 3524 E 

Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8170.235 8188.235 8108.235 8128.235 265 

Baying 

Roof 


Roof plate for cable entry 

Roof plate, vented 7826.766 7826.788 7826.788 7826.788 293 

Roof plate, vented, for cable entry 7826.669 7826.889 7826.889 7826.889 293 

Fan roof, modular see page 128 see page 128 see page 128 see page 128 

Fan mounting plate, active, with controller 7966.035 7988.035 7988.035 7988.035 127 

DC fan mounting plate with FCS speed control – 7858.488 7858.488 7858.488 124 

Spacers, 50 mm 

Base/plinth 

7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 

Base/plinth components, solid, 

front and rear 

8601.605 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Gland plate, multi-piece – 7825.382 7825.382 7825.382 263 

Gland plate variants from page 263 from page 263 from page 263 from page 263 

Castors 


see page 256 see page 256 see page 256 see page 256 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, cranked 

 

 

 

 

(for network technology) 

(front) 

(front and rear) (front and rear) (front and rear) 

Punched section with mounting flange, interior 

installation rail systems 


Cable clamp rails, C rails see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 

Earthing/potential equalisation 

Socket strips, power management from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 

Component shelves from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 

19″ installation system from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 


CMC-TC system monitoring 






33 





Material: 

Sheet steel 












System frame with doors or rear 

panel, roof plate, 

vented base/plinth 100 mm, 




adaptor, 



frame level, 


(105 x 70 mm, plastic), 




Version 3 Version 3 Version 3 Version 3 Version 3 

U 24 42 42 47 47 

Width (B1) mm 1) 800 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm 1) 1200 + 100 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 2200 + 100 2200 + 100 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 900 900 1000 900 1000 

Clearance width (B2) mm 712 712 712 712 712 

Clearance height (H3) mm 1112 1912 1912 2112 2112 

Clearance depth (T2) in mm 812 812 912 812 912 





7830.120 7830.300 7830.330 7830.320 2) 7830.340 2) 



– 7830.350 7830.335 7830.370 2) 7830.380 2) 


T1 

T2 

H3 

B2 

B1 

H1 

H2 

Version 3 

Glazed front door, vented, 180°, 

with comfort handle for semicylinder 

and security lock 

3524 E; 





angles 


between levels pre-configured 

at 745 mm. 

L-shaped mounting angles 

screw-fastened to 2 or 3 depth 

stays respectively. 

Gland plate, one-piece, vented, 

with cable entry. 

T1 

H3 

B1 

H1 

H2 


available on the Internet.




Version 3 Version 3 Version 3 Version 3 Version 3 Page 

U 24 42 42 47 47 

Width (B1) mm 1) 800 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm 1) 1200 + 100 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 2200 + 100 2200 + 100 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 900 900 1000 900 1000 



Model No. DK as bayed enclosure without side 

panels, including baying kit TS 8800.500 

7830.120 7830.300 7830.330 7830.320 2) 7830.340 2) 

– 7830.350 7830.335 7830.370 2) 7830.380 2) 

Doors 

Glazed front door/sheet steel rear door, vented 

Various door options 

Side panel 

from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 

Side panel, plug-in, IP 20 (7830.300 only) (7830.330 only) (7830.320 only) (7830.340 only) 


Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 – 8109.235 8100.235 8129.235 – 265 

Baying 

Roof 


Roof plate for cable entry 

Roof plate, vented 7826.789 7826.789 7826.780 7826.789 7826.780 293 

Roof plate, vented, for cable entry 7826.899 7826.899 7826.809 7826.899 7826.809 293 

Fan roof, modular see page 128 see page 128 see page 128 see page 128 see page 128 

Fan mounting plate, active, with controller 7988.035 7988.035 7988.035 7988.035 7988.035 127 

DC fan mounting plate with FCS speed control 7858.488 7858.488 7858.488 7858.488 7858.488 124 


Base/plinth 

7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 



8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Gland plate variants from page 263 from page 263 from page 263 from page 263 from page 263 

Castors 


see page 256 see page 256 see page 256 see page 256 see page 256 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, L-shaped 

(for server technology) 

(front and rear) (front and rear) (front and rear) (front and rear) 

Punched section with mounting flange, interior 

installation rail systems 


Cable clamp rails, C rails see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 


Socket strips, power management from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 

Component shelves from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 

19″ installation system from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 

Cable management from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 







35 





Material: 

Sheet steel 












System frame with doors or rear 

panel, roof plate, 

vented base/plinth 100 mm, 




adaptor, 

4 spacers for raising the roof or 

vent panel, 


frame level, 





Version 4 




lock 3524 E; 




Empty enclosure for individual 

configuration, 482.6 mm (19″)/ 

metric partial installation or a 

combination of mounting angles/ 


frames supported. Gland plate 

at the front, fitted as an infill 

panel. 


Version 4 Version 5 Version 6 

U 42 42 40 

Width (B1) mm 1) 800 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm, (H1 + H2 + H4) mm 1) 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 + 25 2000 + 100 + 25 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 800 800 800 

Clearance width (B2) mm 712 712 712 

Clearance height (H3) mm 1912 1912 1912 

Clearance depth (T2) in mm 712 712 712 







3) Aluminium glazed door, delivery times available on request. 

7930.400 3) 7930.500 3) 7930.660 3) 

– 7930.550 2)3) 7930.670 2)3) 


T1 

T2 

H3 

B2 

B1 

H1 

H2 

Version 5 




lock 3524 E; 





angles at the front and rear, distance 

between levels 598 mm. 


screw-fastened to depth stays in 

the centre. Roof plate with cutout 

for fan insert and vent panel 

on spacers. Gland plate at the 

front, fitted as an infill panel. 

T1 

H3 

H4 

B1 

H1 

H2 

Version 6 




lock 3524 E. 

Sheet steel rear panel. 

Swing frame, large, with side 

trim panel for the installation of 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting components 

whilst utilising the full 

enclosure height (130°, 150 kg). 

Full installation at the front, rear 

panel, including swing frame 

installation kit SR 1995.825 up to 

150 kg total load capacity, 

static. Roof plate with cut-out for 

fan insert and vent panel on 

spacers. Gland plate, onepiece, 

vented, with cable entry. 


available on the Internet.




Version 4 Version 5 Version 6 Page 

U – 42 40 

Width (B1) mm1) 800 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm, (H1 + H2 + H4) mm1) 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 + 25 2000 + 100 + 25 

Depth (T1) mm1) 800 800 800 



7930.400 7930.500 7930.660 



– 7930.5502) 7930.6702) Doors 

Designer glazed front door/sheet steel rear door – 

Designer glazed front door/sheet steel rear panel – – 

Various door options from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 


Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 – 288 

Side panel, plug-in, IP 20 (7930.500 only) (7930.660 only) 


Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8108.235 8108.235 8108.235 265 

Baying 

Roof 

from page 270 from page 270 from page 270 

Roof plate for cable entry 7826.885 7826.885 292 

Roof plate, vented 7826.788 7826.788 7826.788 293 

Roof plate, vented, for cable entry 7826.889 7826.889 7826.889 293 

Fan roof, modular see page 128 

 

(without fan insert) 

 

(without fan insert) 

Fan mounting plate, active, with controller 7988.035 – – 127 

DC fan mounting plate with FCS speed control 7858.488 7858.488 – 124 


Base/plinth 

7967.000 – – 293 



8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Gland plate, multi-piece 7825.382 7825.382 – 263 

Gland plate variants from page 263 from page 263 from page 263 

Castors 


see page 256 see page 256 see page 256 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, L-shaped 

(for server technology) 

from page 364 

 

(front and rear) 

19″ large swing frame 

(40 U) 

Punched section with mounting flange, interior installation rail systems from page 295 from page 295 from page 295 

Cable clamp rails, C rails see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 


Socket strips, power management from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 

Component shelves from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 

19″ installation system from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 

Cable management from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 







37 




Network enclosures, based on Rittal TS 8, types 1 and 2 

Type 1 


front (180°), with 3 mm singlepane 

safety glass, comfort 

handle for semi-cylinder and 

security lock 3524 E; 

sheet steel door at the rear 

(130°) with handle and security 

lock 3524 E. 

Type 2 

Sheet steel door at front (180°), 



3524 E; 



lock 3524 E. 


T1 

H2 

B2 

T2 

B1 

H1 

Material: 

Sheet steel 




Doors and roof: Dipcoat-primed, 


Base plates and punched 

sections with mounting flanges: 



Enclosure frame with doors, 

roof plate, multi-piece gland 

plate, 2 punched sections with 

mounting flanges in the enclosure 

depth. 

T1 

B1 

H1 

Approvals, 

see page 402. 



U 15 20 20 24 24 24 24 24 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 600 800 600 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 800 1000 1000 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 600 600 600 600 800 900 1000 

Clearance width (B2) mm 512 512 712 512 712 712 712 712 

Clearance height (H2) mm 712 912 912 1112 1112 1112 1112 1112 

Clearance depth (T2) mm 512 512 512 512 512 712 812 912 

Model No. DK, 

type 1 with designer glazed door 

at the front 

Model No. DK, 

type 2 with sheet steel door 

at the front 

7920.100 3) 7920.200 3) 7920.240 2)3) 7920.300 3) 7920.340 2)3) 7920.350 3) 7920.355 3) 7920.360 2)3) 

7821.100 7821.200 7821.240 2) 7821.300 7821.340 – 7821.355 – 

U 29 29 29 33 33 33 38 38 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 600 800 600 600 800 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1400 1400 1400 1600 1600 1600 1800 1800 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 600 600 800 600 600 800 

Clearance width (B2) mm 512 512 712 712 512 712 712 512 

Clearance height (H2) mm 1312 1312 1312 1512 1512 1512 1512 1712 

Clearance depth (T2) mm 512 712 512 512 712 512 512 712 

Model No. DK, 


at the front 

7920.4002)3) 7920.4103) 7920.4402)3) 7920.5003) 7920.5103) 7920.5402)3) 7920.6003) 7920.6103) Model No. DK, 


at the front 

7821.4002) 7821.410 7821.4402) 7821.500 7821.510 7821.5402) 7821.600 7821.610 

1) All sizes given are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing on the Internet. 


3) Glazed aluminium door, delivery times available on request. 

Accessories Page 252 Monitoring Page 187 Climate control Page 113

Type 1 


front (180°), with 3 mm singlepane 

safety glass, comfort 

handle for semi-cylinder and 

security lock 3524 E; 



lock 3524 E. 


Type 2 

Sheet steel door at front (180°), 



3524 E; 



lock 3524 E. 



T1 

H2 

B2 

T2 

B1 

H1 

Material: 

Sheet steel 




Doors and roof: Dipcoat-primed, 


Base plates and punched 




Enclosure frame with doors, 

roof plate, multi-piece gland 

plate, 2 punched sections with 

mounting flanges in the enclosure 

depth. 

T1 

B1 

H1 

Approvals, 

see page 402. 



U 38 38 38 38 42 42 42 42 42 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 800 800 800 600 600 600 600 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1800 1800 1800 1800 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 900 600 800 1000 600 800 900 1000 600 

Clearance width (B2) mm 512 712 712 712 712 512 512 512 512 

Clearance height (H2) mm 1712 1712 1712 1712 1912 1912 1912 1912 1912 

Clearance depth (T2) mm 812 512 712 912 512 712 812 912 512 

Model No. DK, 


at the front 

Model No. DK, 


at the front 

7920.620 3) 7920.640 3) 7920.650 3) 7920.670 3) 7920.700 3) 7920.710 2)3) 7920.720 3) 7920.730 3) 7920.740 3) 

7821.620 2) 7821.640 2) 7821.650 7821.670 2) 7821.700 7821.710 2) 7821.720 7821.730 7821.740 

U 42 42 42 47 47 47 47 47 47 

Width (B1) mm1) 800 800 800 600 600 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 2000 2000 2000 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 800 900 1000 600 800 600 800 900 1000 

Clearance width (B2) mm 712 712 712 712 512 512 712 712 712 

Clearance height (H2) mm 1912 1912 1912 2112 2112 2112 2112 2112 2112 

Clearance depth (T2) mm 712 812 912 512 712 512 712 812 912 

Model No. DK, 


at the front 

7920.7503) 7920.7603) 7920.7703) 7920.8003) 7920.8103) 7920.8403) 7920.8503) 7920.8603) 7920.8703) Model No. DK, 


at the front 

7821.750 7821.760 7821.770 7821.800 7821.810 7821.8402) 7821.850 7821.8602) 7821.870 



3) Glazed aluminium door, delivery times available on request. 


39 




Network enclosures, based on Rittal TS 8, 15 – 20 U 

Accessories Page 252 

Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Page 

U 15 20 20 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 600 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 800 1000 1000 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 600 600 

Model No. DK 7920.100 7821.100 7920.200 7821.200 7920.240 2) 7821.240 2) 

Doors 

Designer glazed front door/ 

sheet steel rear door 

– – – 

Sheet steel front door/sheet steel rear door – – – 

Various door options from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 


Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 

Side panel, plug-in, IP 20 7824.086 7824.106 7824.106 266 

Lock for side panel, plug-in, 3524 E 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 266 

Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8173.235 8174.235 8174.235 265 

Baying 

Roof 


Solid roof plate 

Roof plate, vented 7826.766 7826.766 7826.786 293 

Roof plate for cable entry 7826.665 7826.665 7826.865 292 

Roof plate, vented, for cable entry 7826.669 7826.669 7826.869 293 

Fan mounting plate, active, with controller 7966.035 7966.035 7986.035 127 

Fan roof, modular see page 128 see page 128 see page 128 

Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 


Base/plinth components, vented, 

front and rear, H = 100 mm 

7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 255 



8601.605 8601.605 8601.805 255 

Base/plinth trim panels, side, H = 100 mm 8601.065 8601.065 8601.065 255 

Gland plate variants from page 263 from page 263 from page 263 

Castors 





7827.080 7827.100 7827.100 364 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, 

L-shaped (for server technology) 

7827.081 7827.101 7827.101 364 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame 

(for server and network technology) 

– – – 

Depth stays for mounting angles 8612.060 8612.060 7827.600 299/369 

Installation brackets for mounting angles – – 7827.480 369 

Cable clamp rails see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 

Earthing/potential equalisation from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 

Socket strips/power management from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 

Component shelves from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 

19″ installation system from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 

Cable management from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 

CMC-TC system monitoring from page 158 from page 158 from page 158 








Network enclosures, based on Rittal TS 8, 24 U 

Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Page 

U 24 24 24 24 24 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 600 800 900 1000 

Model No. DK 7920.300 7821.300 7920.340 2) 7821.340 7920.350 7920.355 7821.355 7920.360 2) 

Doors 



– – – 

Sheet steel front door/sheet steel rear 

door 

– – – – – 

Various door options from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 from page 277 


Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 

Side panel, plug-in, IP 20 7824.126 7824.126 7824.128 7824.129 7824.120 266 

Lock for side panel, plug-in, 3524 E 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 – 266 

Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 – 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8170.235 8170.235 8175.235 – 8176.235 265 

Baying 

Roof 




Roof plate for cable entry 7826.665 7826.865 7826.885 7826.895 7826.805 292 

Roof plate, vented, for cable entry 7826.669 7826.869 7826.889 7826.899 7826.809 293 

Fan mounting plate, active, with controller 7966.035 7986.035 7988.035 7988.035 7988.035 127 


Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 




7825.601 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 255 



8601.605 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Base/plinth trim panels, side, H = 100 mm 8601.065 8601.065 8601.085 8601.095 8601.015 255 


Castors 





7827.120 7827.120 7827.120 7827.120 7827.120 364 


L-shaped (for server technlogy) 

7827.121 7827.121 7827.121 7827.121 7827.121 364 



7856.713 7856.725 7856.725 7856.725 7856.725 366 

Depth stays for mounting angles 8612.060 7827.600 7827.800 7827.900 7827.000 299/369 

Installation brackets for mounting angles – 7827.480 7827.480 7827.480 7827.480 369 

Cable clamp rails see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 

Earthing/potential equalisation from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 

Socket strips/power management from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 




CMC-TC system monitoring from page 158 from page 158 from page 158 from page 158 from page 158 




41 







U 29 29 29 33 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 600 800 600 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1400 1400 1400 1600 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 600 600 

Model No. DK 7920.400 2) 7821.400 2) 7920.410 7821.410 7920.440 2) 7821.440 2) 7920.500 7821.500 

Doors 



– – – – 


door 

– – – – 



Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 

Side panel, plug-in, IP 20 7824.146 7824.148 7824.146 7824.166 266 

Lock for side panel, plug-in, 3524 E 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 266 



Baying 

Roof 




Roof plate for cable entry 7826.665 7826.685 7826.865 7826.665 292 




Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 




7825.601 7825.601 7825.801 7825.601 255 



8601.605 8601.605 8601.805 8601.605 255 

Base/plinth trim panels, side, H = 100 mm 8601.065 8601.085 8601.065 8601.065 255 


Castors 





7827.140 7827.140 7827.140 7827.160 364 



7827.141 7827.141 7827.141 7827.161 364 



– – – – 

Depth stays for mounting angles 8612.060 8612.080 7827.600 8612.060 299/369 

Installation brackets for mounting angles – – 7827.480 – 369 

Cable clamp rails see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 see page 307 

Earthing/potential equalisation from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 

Socket strips/power management from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 




CMC-TC system monitoring from page 158 from page 158 from page 158 from page 158 










U 33 33 38 38 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 800 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1600 1600 1800 1800 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 800 600 600 800 

Model No. DK 7920.510 7821.510 7920.540 2) 7821.540 2) 7920.600 7821.600 7920.610 7821.610 

Doors 



– – – – 


door 

– – – – 



Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 





Baying 

Roof 








Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 




7825.601 7825.801 7825.601 7825.601 255 



8601.605 8601.805 8601.605 8601.605 255 

Base/plinth trim panels, side, H = 100 mm 8601.085 8601.065 8601.065 8601.085 255 


Castors 





7827.160 7827.160 7827.180 7827.180 364 



7827.161 7827.161 7827.181 7827.181 364 



– – 7856.716 7856.716 366 


Installation brackets for mounting angles – 7827.480 – – 369 











43 







U 38 38 38 38 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 800 800 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1800 1800 1800 1800 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 900 600 800 1000 

Model No. DK 7920.620 7821.620 2) 7920.640 7821.640 2) 7920.650 7821.650 7920.670 7821.670 2) 

Doors 



– – – – 


door 

– – – – 



Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 





Baying 

Roof 








Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 




7825.601 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 255 



8601.605 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Base/plinth trim panels, side 

H = 100 mm 

8601.095 8601.065 8601.085 8601.015 255 


Castors 





7827.180 7827.180 7827.180 7827.180 364 



7827.181 7827.181 7827.181 7827.181 364 



7856.716 7856.728 7856.728 7856.728 366 


Installation brackets for mounting angles – 7827.480 7827.480 7827.480 369 
















Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Page 

U 42 42 42 42 42 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 600 600 600 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 900 1000 600 

Model No. DK 7920.700 7821.700 7920.710 7821.710 7920.720 7821.720 7920.730 7821.730 7920.740 7821.740 

Doors 



– – – – – 

Sheet steel front door/ 


– – – – – 



Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 


Lock for side panel, plug-in, 3524 E 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 266 

Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8106.235 8108.235 8109.235 8100.235 8106.235 265 

Baying 

Roof 





Roof plate, vented, 

for cable entry 

7826.669 7826.689 7826.699 7826.609 7826.869 293 

Fan mounting plate, active, 

with controller 

7966.035 7968.035 7968.035 7968.035 7986.035 127 


Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 




7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.801 255 



8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.805 255 


H = 100 mm 

8601.065 8601.085 8601.095 8601.015 8601.065 255 


Castors 




cranked (for network technology) 

7827.200 7827.200 7827.200 7827.200 7827.200 364 



7827.201 7827.201 7827.201 7827.201 7827.201 364 



7856.719 7856.719 7856.719 7856.719 7856.731 366 


Installation brackets 

for mounting angles 

– – – – 7827.480 369 










45 






Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Page 

U 42 42 42 47 47 

Width (B1) mm 1) 800 800 800 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 1) 2000 2000 2000 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 800 900 1000 600 800 

Model No. DK 7920.750 7821.750 7920.760 7821.760 7920.770 7821.770 7920.800 7821.800 7920.810 7821.810 

Doors 



– – – – – 

Sheet steel front door/ 


– – – – – 


180° hinges 

for sheet steel rear door 

Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 


Lock for side panel, plug-in, 3524 E 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 266 

Internal latch 

for side panel, plug-type 

7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8108.235 8109.235 8100.235 8126.235 8128.235 265 

Baying 

Roof 





Roof plate, vented, 


7826.889 7826.899 7826.809 7826.669 7826.689 293 

Fan mounting plate, active, 

with controller 

7988.035 7988.035 7988.035 7966.035 7968.035 127 


Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 




7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.601 7825.601 255 



8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.605 8601.605 255 


H = 100 mm 

8601.085 8601.095 8601.015 8601.065 8601.085 255 


Castors 




cranked (for network technology) 

7827.200 7827.200 7827.200 7827.220 7827.220 364 



7827.201 7827.201 7827.201 7827.221 7827.221 364 



7856.731 7856.731 7856.731 7856.722 7856.722 366 


Installation brackets 

for mounting angles 

7827.480 7827.480 7827.480 – – 369 
















U 47 47 47 47 

Width (B1) mm 1) 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 2200 2200 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 600 800 900 1000 

Model No. DK 7920.840 7821.840 2) 7920.850 7821.850 7920.860 7821.860 2) 7920.870 7821.870 

Doors 



– – – – 


door 

– – – – 



Side panel 

8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 8800.190 288 





7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 7824.510 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8126.235 8128.235 8129.235 – 265 

Baying 

Roof 








Spacers, 20 mm 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 2423.000 293 

Spacers, 50 mm 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 7967.000 293 


Base/plinth 




7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 255 



8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 


H = 100 mm 

8601.065 8601.085 8601.095 8601.015 255 


Castors 





7827.220 7827.220 7827.220 7827.220 364 


L-shaped (for server technlogy) 

7827.221 7827.221 7827.221 7827.221 364 



7856.734 7856.734 7856.734 7856.734 


Installation brackets for mounting angles 7827.480 7827.480 7827.480 7827.480 369 











47 




Network enclosures, based on Rittal flexRack(i), pre-configured 

Material: 

Vertical frame sections: 

Extruded aluminium section 

Base, roof frame, base/plinth, 

panels: Sheet steel 



Spray-finished in RAL 7035 

Frame sections and doors: 

RAL 9006 

Lock panels: RAL 7035 

Viewing window: Tinted, grey 

Gland plates, 482.6 mm (19″) 





T1 

T2 T2 

B2 B2 H1 

H2 

B1 

H2 


Multi-platform frame FR(i) with 

designer glazed door at front 

(130°), TS sheet steel door at 

rear (130°). 

Roof plate, side panels, vented 

base/plinth, gland plate, interior 

installation depending on 

design, see table on page 49. 

Earthing of all enclosure panels, 

comfort handle for semi-cylinders 

at the front, swivel handle 

at the rear, with security lock 

3524 E. 

Property rights: 

German patent no. 103 11 376 

German Registered Design 

no. 403 04 312 

British Registered Design 

no. 301 54 31 



U 11 11 24 42 42 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 600 600 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm 1) 600 600 1200 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 805 1005 1005 805 1005 

Depth absolute, including handles and roof curvature 

(T1) mm + 74.5 mm 

879.5 1079.5 1079.5 879.5 1079.5 

Model No. FR(i) as single enclosure including 2 side panels 

Model No. FR(i) as bayed enclosure without side panels, 

including baying kit 

7855.480 7855.500 7855.510 7855.550 7855.570 

– – – 7855.540 7855.560 2) 


2) Delivery times available on request.



Network enclosures, based on Rittal flexRack(i), pre-configured 

U 11 11 24 42 42 Page 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 600 600 800 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm1) 600 600 1200 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 

Depth (T1) mm1) 805 1005 1005 805 1005 

Depth absolute, including handles and roof curvature 

(T1) mm + 74.5 mm 

879.5 1079.5 1079.5 879.5 1079.5 

Model No. FR(i) as single enclosure 

including 2 side panels 

7855.480 7855.500 7855.510 7855.550 7855.570 

Model No. FR(i) as bayed enclosure 

without side panels, including baying kit 

– – – 7855.540 7855.5602) Doors 

Designer glazed front door/TS sheet steel rear door 

Side panel 

 

Side panel, plug-type 


 

 

(7855.550 only) 

 

(7855.570 only) 

266 

Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 266 

Baying 

Roof 


Designer roof plate, solid – – 

Designer roof plate for cable entry, two-piece – – – 

Various roof plate options, based on TS 8 

Base/plinth 


Base/plinth components solid, front and rear 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Base/plinth components, vented, front and rear 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 255 

Base/plinth trim, side 8601.085 8601.015 8601.015 255 

Base/gland plate, mounted at front as infill panel, 

rear part open 

– – – 

Gland plate, one-piece, vented – – 263 

Gland plate variants, based on TS 8 



482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, L-shaped at front – – 364 

Additional 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, L-shaped 7856.800 7856.800 7856.803 7856.809 7856.809 364 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames, front and rear – – – 366 

Additional 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame 7856.710 7856.710 7856.713 7856.719 7856.719 366 

System punched section, interior installation of rail systems from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 






4 hammerhead rails including system adaptor, 

supplied loose, for cable clamping in the enclosure depth 

– – – 

10 cable shunting rings 105 x 70 mm, supplied loose – – – 355 

50 cage nuts and hexagon socket screws, supplied loose – – – 314 








49 




Network enclosures based on Rittal flexRack(i) 

Material: 



Base, roof frame, panels: 

Sheet steel 




Frame sections and doors: 

RAL 9006 

Lock panels: RAL 7035 

Viewing window: Tinted, grey 

Gland plates: Zinc-plated, 

passivated 


T1 

B1 

H1 


Multi-platform frame FR(i) with 

designer glazed front door 

(130°), TS sheet steel rear door 

(130°), solid roof plate, multipiece 

gland plate, levelling feet, 

comfort handle for semi-cylinder 

at the front, swivel handle 

at the rear, with security lock 

3524 E. 



German Registered Design 

no. 403 04 312 

British Registered Design 

no. 301 54 31 



U 11 11 24 24 38 42 42 47 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 1) 600 600 1200 1200 1800 2000 2000 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 605 1005 605 1005 605 605 1005 1005 

Depth absolute, including 

handles and roof curvature 

(T1) mm + 74.5 mm 

679.5 1079.5 679.5 1079.5 679.5 679.5 1079.5 1079.5 

Model No. FR(i) 7855.6102) 7855.6202) 7855.6302) 7855.6402) 7855.6502) 7855.6602) 7855.6702) 7855.6802) U 24 38 42 42 47 47 

Width (B1) mm 1) 800 800 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1200 1800 2000 2000 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 805 805 805 1005 805 1005 



(T1) mm + 74.5 mm 

879.5 879.5 879.5 1079.5 879.5 1079.5 

Model No. FR(i) 7855.6902) 7855.7002) 7855.710 7855.720 7855.7302) 7855.7402) 1) All sizes given are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing on the Internet. 2) Delivery times available on request. 

Accessories Page 252 Monitoring Page 187 Climate control Page 113




U 11 11 24 24 38 42 42 47 Page 

Width (B1) mm 1) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 1) 600 600 1200 1200 1800 2000 2000 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 605 1005 605 1005 605 605 1005 1005 



(T1) mm + 74.5 mm 

679.5 1079.5 679.5 1079.5 679.5 679.5 1079.5 1079.5 

Model No. FR(i) 7855.6102) 7855.6202) 7855.6302) 7855.6402) 7855.6502) 7855.6602) 7855.6702) 7855.6802) Doors 


TS sheet steel rear door 

Side panel 

 



7856.660 7856.663 7856.666 7856.672 7856.675 7856.681 7856.687 7856.696 266 



7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 266 

Baying 

Roof 

from p. 270 from p. 270 from p. 270 from p. 270 from p. 270 from p. 270 from p. 270 from p. 270 

Designer roof plate, solid 

Various roof plate options, 

based on TS 8 

Base/plinth 




8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 8601.605 255 



7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 7825.601 255 

Base/plinth trim, side 8601.065 8601.015 8601.065 8601.015 8601.065 8601.065 8601.015 8601.015 255 

Gland plate, multi-piece 

Gland plate variants, 

based on TS 8 




L-shaped 

7856.800 7856.800 7856.803 7856.803 7856.806 7856.809 7856.809 7856.812 364 


Punched sections with mounting 

7856.710 7856.710 7856.713 7856.713 7856.716 7856.719 7856.719 7856.722 366 

flanges, interior installation, 

rail systems 


Cable clamp rails from p. 307 from p. 307 from p. 307 from p. 307 from p. 307 from p. 307 from p. 307 from p. 307 

Earthing/potential equalisation from p. 337 from p. 337 from p. 337 from p. 337 from p. 337 from p. 337 from p. 337 from p. 337 

Socket strips/ 

power management 


Component shelves from p. 316 from p. 316 from p. 316 from p. 316 from p. 316 from p. 316 from p. 316 from p. 316 

19″ installation system from p. 364 from p. 364 from p. 364 from p. 364 from p. 364 from p. 364 from p. 364 from p. 364 

Cable management from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 from p. 341 







51 





U 24 38 42 42 47 47 Page 

Width (B1) mm 1) 800 800 800 800 800 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 1200 1800 2000 2000 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 805 805 805 1005 805 1005 

Depth absolute, including handles and 

roof curvature (T1) mm + 74.5 mm 

879.5 879.5 879.5 1079.5 879.5 1079.5 

Model No. FR(i) 7855.690 2) 7855.700 2) 7855.710 7855.720 7855.730 2) 7855.740 2) 

Doors 

Designer glazed front door/TS sheet steel rear door 

Side panel 

 



7856.669 7856.678 7856.684 7856.687 7856.693 7856.696 266 

Internal latch for side panel, plug-in 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 7856.700 266 

Baying 

Roof 

from page 270 from page 270 from page 270 from page 270 from page 270 from page 270 

Designer roof plate, solid 

Various roof plate options, based on TS 8 

Base/plinth 


Base/plinth components solid, front and rear 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 8601.805 255 

Base/plinth components, vented, front and rear 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 7825.801 255 

Base/plinth trim, side 8601.085 8601.085 8601.085 8601.015 8601.085 8601.015 255 

Gland plate, multi-piece 

Gland plate variants, based on TS 8 



482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame 7856.725 7856.728 7856.731 7856.731 7856.734 7856.734 366 

System punched section, interior installation of rail 

systems 


Cable clamp rails from page 307 from page 307 from page 307 from page 307 from page 307 from page 307 

Earthing/potential equalisation from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 from page 337 

Socket strips/power management from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 from page 328 

Component shelves from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 from page 316 

19″ installation system from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 from page 364 

Cable management from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 from page 341 








Rittal-Net.com is the passive 

platform for the fast, futureproof 

assembly of communications 

networks in the small 

office sector. 

Three enclosures, for installation 

of connection cables, patch 

cables and distributor panels, 

are tailored to the specific criteria 

of the SOHO market. Work 

groups may be set up quickly 

and easily. 



Material: 

1.5 mm sheet steel 

Smoked grey acrylic glazing 

Corner sections, aluminium 

Corner feet made from thermoplastic 

foam 

Colour: 

Enclosure panels: RAL 7035 

Corner sections: RAL 7030 

T1 

T2 



B 

H 


RNC enclosure 

U Packs of 4 8 6 Page 

Width (B) mm 342 342 342 

Height (H) mm 215 390 490 

Depth (T1) mm 280 280 400 

Max. installation depth (T2) mm 250 250 335 

Model No. DK empty enclosure, individual 1 7870.100 7870.200 7870.300 

Design 

42 HP 

( 1 /2 19″) 

42 HP 

( 1 /2 19″) 

Installation position horizontal horizontal vertical 

Accessory kits 

Data distributor, including patch cable 

VF Cat 5, 8 ports, STP, LSA, including 8 patch cables with RJ 45 connector 

on both sides, extruded insulation, cable design in yellow, cable length 0.25 m 

VF Cat 6, 24 ports, STP, LSA, including 12 patch cables with RJ 45 connector 

on both sides, extruded insulation, cable design in yellow, cable length 0.6 m 


84 HP 

(19″) 

1 7870.822 1) 7870.822 1) – 388 

1 – – 7870.830 388 

53 




RNC universal enclosure 

A compact contemporary 

design in black, with integral 

glazed door (tinted safety 

glass). Centered lock, the side 

panels cannot be removed 

whilst the front door is latched. 

Suitable for use as a stand-alone 

model and for wall mounting. 

The plug-in side panels ensure 

rapid access and plenty of 

scope when mounting. Optional 

1 

/2 19″, 10″ or 19″ components 

RNC can be bayed, both horizontally 

and vertically, using the 

connector kit (supplied loose). 

Data distributors Page 57 

Passive ventilation via openings 

in the rear frame, roof and the 

gland plate. Fan expansion kit, 

optional (DK 7980.100). 

Cable entry optionally via the 

rear panel, roof or base. 

All frame parts and panels are 

prepared for earthing. 


T1 

T2 

Material: 

Sheet steel, single-pane safety 

glass 

Colour: 

Black, similar to RAL 9011 


Enclosure with glazed door, 

baying kit, 

brush strips for cable entry, 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting level 

at front. 

B 

H 


German patents 

No. 10 210 481 

No. 10 210 482 



U 269.2 mm ( 1 /2 19″) Packs of 10 Page 

U 482.6 mm (19″) 5 

Width (B) mm 350 

Height (H) mm 500 

Depth (T1) mm 350 

Max. installation depth (T2) mm 270 

Model No. DK 1 7870.350 

Accessories 

Socket strip 3-way, without switch 1 7240.110 328 

Socket strip 7-way, without switch, for 482.6 mm (19″) level 1 7240.210 328 

Socket strip 7-way, with switch, for 482.6 mm (19″) level 1 7240.220 328 

1 /2 19″ component shelf, 1 U 1 7502.600 323 

1 /2 19″ cable management panel, 1 U 1 7502.610 56 

1 /2 19″ blanking panel, 1 U 2 7870.720 55 

1 

/2 19″ cable entry panel, 1 U 2 7870.730 56 

19″ blanking panel, 1 U 2 7151.035 392 



Combination rail, length 200 mm 6 7502.302 352 

Adaptor for 10″ system, 1 U 1 7870.760 56 

Adaptor for 10″ system, 4 U 1 7870.765 56 

Phillips-head screw M5, with plastic washer 100 2099.500 382 

Phillips-head screw M6, with plastic washer 100 2089.000 382 

Captive nuts M5, with contact 50 2094.500 381 

Captive nuts M6, with contact 50 2094.200 381


Base/plinth 

for RNC 

To accommodate a maximum of two 3-way socket 

strips DK 7240.110 and also as storage space for 

cables. 

Height: 60 mm. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


4 levelling feet and 2/4 cable shunting rings. 

Angle bracket 

for RNC 

With space for optimum cable routing behind the 

RNC. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Assembly parts 

Blanking panel 1 U, 

42 HP ( 1 /2 19″) 

for RNC and RiCase 

As an extension cover. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Accessories for RNC enclosures 

For RNC enclosures 

42 HP ( 1 /2 19″) Model No. DK 

Width mm Depth mm 

342 280 7870.7101) For RNC tower enclosures 

84 HP (19″) vertical Model No. DK 


342 400 7870.7151) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Accessories: 

Socket strip, 

see page 328. 

For RNC enclosures 

42 HP ( 1 /2 19″) Packs 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

of 

Model No. DK 

342 280 2 7870.701 

For RNC tower enclosures 

84 HP (19″) vertical Packs 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

of 

Model No. DK 

342 400 2 7870.706 

Packs of Model No. DK 

2 7870.720 

55 




Accessories for RNC enclosures 

Cable management panel 1U 

42 HP ( 1 /2 19″) 

for RNC 

For horizontal cable routing. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Tray and 5 shunting rings. 

Entry panel 1 U 

42 HP ( 1 /2 19″) 

for RNC 

For entry of patch cables. Cut-out approximately 

227 x 30 mm. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Adaptor 

for RNC 

For installing 10″ components in 296.2 mm 

( 1 /2 19″) enclosures. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

U Model No. DK 

1 7502.610 


2 7870.730 


1 7870.760 

4 7870.765 


Perfect access during installation 

and servicing, thanks to a 

removable cover. 

Material: 

Wall mounting plate with 

mounting brackets: 


Enclosure cover: 


Door: Sheet steel door or glazed 

door with sheet steel frame and 

single-pane safety glass, 3 mm 


Enclosure: Powder-coated, 

RAL 7035 



Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal QuickBox, 6 – 12 U 


Wall section: 

Pre-configured mounting 

bracket, 

brush strip for cable entry at the 

bottom/top, 

cable clamp rail 


consisting of base and cover 

tray with vent slots, brush strip 

for cable entry at the top/bottom, 

2 side security locks, sheet steel 

door/glazed door with security 

lock, 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles, infinitely depth-variable. 

T1 

B1 

T2 

H1 


German patent 

No. 198 11 711 

German utility model 

No. 298 23 843 

European patent no. 1 064 709 

with validity for BE, ES, FR, GB, 

IT, NL, SE 

Taiwanese patent 

No. NI 123 288 

Russian patent no. 2190912 

Australian patent 

No. 733078 

South Korean patent 

No. 10-0375062 

US patent no. 6,435,364 

Accessories Page 252 Mounting angles Page 364 Wall mounting Page 290 Earthing Page 337 

B2 

H2 

T1 

B1 

H1 



U P. of 6 6 6 9 9 12 12 12 Page 

Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Enclosure cover Height (H1) mm 362 362 362 495 495 628 628 628 

Depth (T1) mm 300 400 600 400 600 400 500 600 

Width (B2) mm 595 595 595 595 595 595 595 595 

Wall section Height (H2) mm 355 355 355 488 488 621 621 621 

Max. installation depth (T2) mm 247 347 547 347 547 347 447 547 

Model No. with glazed door 1 7502.013 7502.014 7502.016 7502.024 7502.026 7502.034 7502.035 7502.036 

Model No. with sheet steel door 

Accessories 

1 – 7502.114 – 7502.124 7502.126 – – 7502.136 

Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″) 2 7502.201 7502.201 7502.201 7502.202 7502.202 7502.203 7502.203 7502.203 365 

Solid gland plate 2 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 346 

Wall mounting bracket, 10 mm 4 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 294 

Wall mounting bracket, 40 mm 4 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 294 

Combination rails for enclosure width 6 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 352 

Combination rails 

for enclosure depth 

300/400 mm 

500/600 mm 

6 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

352 

352 

Slide rails 


300 mm 

400 mm 

500/600 mm 

10 

2 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

1962.200 

7492.300 

7492.400 

377 

383 

383 

Earthing kit 1 7502.240 7502.240 7502.260 7502.240 7502.260 7502.240 7502.260 7502.260 339 

Quick-release fastener 


2 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 288 

Cable clamps 

Splicing box 

for clamping to C rails and 

for fibre-optic termination or 

combination rails, 

fibre-optic distributor, 

see page 352. 

see page 394. 

57 




Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal QuickBox, 15 – 21 U 

Perfect access during installation 

and servicing, thanks to a 

removable cover. 

Material: 






Door: Sheet steel door or glazed 

door with sheet steel frame and 

single-pane safety glass, 3 mm 



RAL 7035 


Wall section: 

Pre-configured mounting 

bracket, 

brush strip for cable entry at the 

bottom/top, 

cable clamp rail 


consisting of base and cover 

tray with vent slots, brush strip 

for cable entry at the top/bottom, 

2 side security locks, sheet steel 

door/glazed door with security 

lock, 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles, infinitely depth-variable. 

Accessories Page 252 Cable routing Page 341 Lock systems Page 281 Patch panel Page 388 


T1 

B1 

T2 

H1 


German patent 

No. 198 11 711 

German utility model 

No. 298 23 843 


with validity for BE, ES, FR, GB, 

IT, NL, SE 

Taiwanese patent 

No. NI 123 288 

Russian patent no. 2190912 

Australian patent 

No. 733078 

South Korean patent 

No. 10-0375062 


B2 

H2 

T1 

B1 

H1 



U P. of 15 15 15 18 18 21 21 Page 

Enclosure cover 

Wall section 

Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 762 762 762 895 895 1028 1028 

Depth (T1) mm 400 500 600 400 600 400 600 

Width (B2) mm 595 595 595 595 595 595 595 

Height (H2) mm 755 755 755 888 888 1021 1021 

Max. installation depth (T2) mm 347 447 547 347 547 347 547 

Model No. with glazed door 1 7502.044 7502.045 7502.046 7502.054 7502.056 7502.064 7502.066 

Model No. with sheet steel door 1 7502.144 – 7502.146 – – – 7502.166 

Accessories 

Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″) 2 7502.204 7502.204 7502.204 7502.205 7502.205 7502.206 7502.206 365 

Solid gland plate 2 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 346 

Wall mounting bracket, 10 mm 4 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 294 

Wall mounting bracket, 40 mm 4 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 294 

Combination rails for enclosure width 6 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 7502.304 352 



300/400 mm 

500/600 mm 

6 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

7502.302 

7502.304 

352 

352 

Slide rails 

400 mm 2 7492.300 7492.300 7492.300 7492.300 7492.300 7492.300 7492.300 383 


500/600 mm 2 7492.400 7492.400 7492.400 7492.400 7492.400 7492.400 7492.400 383 

Earthing kit 1 7502.240 7502.260 7502.260 7502.240 7502.260 7502.240 7502.260 339 



2 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 7502.220 288 

Cable management panel 

for all QuickBoxes from a height 

of 15 U, 

see page 358. 

Earthing kit 

for standardised earthing 

of the QuickBox. With fast-on 

connections, 

see page 339.


Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal QuickBox with vertical 482.6 mm (19″) level 

Optimum use of the interior 

space 

via side installation of the 

482.6 mm (19″) components. 

Status monitoring via side 

viewing window. 


Material: 





1.0 mm sheet steel with 

toughened safety glass, 

3 mm at the side 



RAL 7035 

T1 

B1 

T2 

H1 

B2 

H2 


Wall section: 

with pre-configured 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting brackets for side 

accommodation of mounting 

components and brush strip for 

cable entry from the bottom and 

top. 


with side vent slots to support 

passive climate control. The 

enclosure is secured via two 

security locks positioned at the 

sides. 

Accessories Page 252 Cable management Page 341 Gland plates Page 342 Earthing Page 337 



U vertical Packs of 3 6 Page 

Enclosure cover 

Wall section 

Width (B1) mm 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 631 631 

Depth (T1) mm 210 360 

Width (B2) mm 595 595 

Height (H2) mm 621 621 

Depth (T2) mm 198 348 

Model No. DK 1 7502.630 1) 7502.660 1) 

Accessories 

Gland plates, solid 2 7502.3101) 7502.3101) 346 

Wall mounting bracket, 10 mm 4 2508.010 2508.010 294 

Wall mounting bracket, 40 mm 4 2503.010 2503.010 294 

Combination rails for vertical mounting on the wall section QB 6 7502.304 7502.304 352 

Combination rails for horizontal mounting 6 7502.304 7502.304 352 

Mounting and cable management panel 

for cable routing and the attachment of small equipment 

1 7502.270 7502.270 358 

Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″) for front mounting, 12 U 2 7502.203 7502.203 365 


Blanking panel 

for toolless quick assembly 

see page 392. 

Wall mounting bracket 

at a distance of 10 mm or 

40 mm, 

see page 294. 

59 




Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal AE 

Wall-mounted distributor with 

infinitely depth-variable 


at the front. The ideal solution for 

small networks or corridor distributors. 

Max. achievable protection 

category of up to IP 55 (to 

EN 60 529/10.91) by replacing 

the cable entry brush with a 

gland plate. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 



RAL 7035 

Accessories Page 252 Socket strips Page 328 Cage nuts Page 314 Glazed doors Page 280 


T1 

T2 

B 

H 


1 wall-mounted distributor 

enclosure with sheet steel door, 

cam lock and double-bit insert. 

Brush strip for cable entry at the 

bottom, 

2 mounting angles, 482.6 mm 

(19″), depth-adjustable 

1 C rail for cable routing, 

1 metal bracket for optional 

accommodation of an earth rail 

or 482.6 mm (19″) socket strip. 

Available on request: 

● Fully modified wall-mounted 

distributors 

● Special designs 

Approvals, 

see page 402. 




Width (B) mm 600 600 600 

Height (H) mm 380 600 760 

Depth (T1) mm 350 350 350 

Max. installation depth (T2) mm 310 310 310 

Model No. DK 1 7641.000 7643.000 7645.000 

Accessories 

Plastic cable gland plates with pre-punched PG holes 5 2563.000 2563.000 2563.000 342 

Metal gland plates with pre-punched metric holes 1 2563.100 2563.100 2563.100 344 

Wall mounting bracket, 10 mm 4 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 294 


Glazed door, 34 mm profile depth 1 2730.000 2731.000 2732.000 280 

Glazed door, 60 mm profile depth 1 2760.000 2761.000 2762.000 280 

Component shelf 2 U, static installation, 250 mm 1 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 323 

Earth rail 

Lock systems 

Plastic handle, version B, see page 286. 

1 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 338 

Standard double-bit lock insert may be exchanged for 27 mm lock inserts, type A, see page 285, 

Earth rail 

for attaching to the rear bracket, 

see page 338. 

High protection category 

by exchanging the brush strip 

for metal gland plates, 

see page 344.

Wall mounted distributor with 

482.6 mm (19″) pull-out frame. 

Side and front installation with 

482.6 mm (19″) components in 

a vertical mounting position. 

Horizontal installation also 

optionally supported at the front. 

Status monitoring via side viewing 

window. Pull-out frame may 

be removed for population via 

snap fastenings. Passive cooling 

via pre-configured outlet filter, 

may be upgraded to active. 

Optional accommodation of 

earth rail DK 7113.000 in a vertical 

position on the pull-out 

frame. 



Wall mounted enclosure, based on Rittal AE, with pull-out frame 

Material: 

Sheet steel 



RAL 7035 

Pull-out frame zinc-plated, 

passivated. 

210 

520 

350 

450 

525 

600 

600 


1 wall-mounted distributor 

enclosure with sheet steel door, 

cam locks and double-bit insert. 

Pull-out frame attached to 

telescopic slides. 

Outlet filter in enclosure base 

and on left-hand side. 

Viewing window on right-hand 

side. 

Combination rail for cable 

clamping behind the cable 

entry. Additional cable clamp 

rail for mounting on the pull-out 

frame. 

Accessories Page 252 Component shelf Page 324 Touch-up pens Page 269 Telecoms mounting bracket Page 230 

Protection category: 

IP 43 to EN 60 529/10.91 



distributors 




Width mm Packs of 600 Page 

Height mm 600 

Depth mm 350 

Model No. DK 1 7644.000 

Side 482.6 mm (19″) level, vertical 4 U 

Front 482.6 mm (19″) level, vertical and horizontal 10 U 

Accessories 

Plastic cable gland plates with pre-punched PG holes 5 2563.000 342 

Wall mounting bracket, 10 mm 4 2508.010 294 


Shelf 1 7644.4001) 324 

Component shelf, 1 U 1 7119.140 322 

Earth rail, horizontal 1 7113.000 338 

Fan expansion kit 230 V AC (only for use at the bottom) 1 set 7980.100 127 

Fan expansion kit 48 V DC (only for use at the bottom) 

Lock systems 

Plastic handle, version B, see page 286. 

1 set 7980.148 127 

Standard double-bit lock insert may be exchanged for 27 mm lock inserts, type A, see page 285. 


Active ventilation 

with the fan expansion kit in 

230 V AC or 48 V DC versions, 

see page 127. 

Shelf 

a support surface for small 

equipment, 

see page 324. 

61 




Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part, pre-configured, depth 573 

Material: 

Wall and hinged part: 

Sheet steel, 1.5 mm 

Viewing window: 

Toughened safety glass 3 mm 

Colour: 


Powder-coated, RAL 7035 

Glazed door: RAL 7035/7015 

(slate grey) 


IP 43 to EN 60 529/10.91 when 

using solid gland plates. 


Wall section: 

with vertical punched rails and 

C rail mounted horizontally for 

cable clamping, top cable gland 

plate solid, bottom cable gland 

plate with brush strips, 

earthing rail with star earthing, 

wall mounting bracket 10 mm. 

Accessories Page 252 Cable shunting ring Page 355 Slide rails Page 384 

T1 

T3 T2 


B2 

T4 

H2 

B1 

H1 

Hinged part: 

with 25 mm pitch pattern of 

holes in the front and rear frame, 

two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles mounted on C rails, 

infinitely depth-variable, 

one outlet filter each on the left 

and right side. 

Designer glazed door: 

with 3 mm toughened safety 

glass pane, 

9 + 15 U with mini comfort 

handle for lock inserts, 

21 U with comfort handle and 

2-point locking, 

including lock 3524 E. 



distributors. 

● Glazed door with aluminium 

frame 

● Sheet steel door, solid 

● Perforated door 

Approvals, 

see page 403. 




Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 478 746 1012 

Depth (T1) mm 573 573 573 



Depth of wall section (T2) mm 135 135 135 

Depth of hinged part (T3) mm 416 416 416 

Maximum installation depth (T4) mm 520 520 520 

Model No. DK 1 7709.735 7715.735 7721.735 

Load capacity, hinged part (kg) 45 75 75 

Accessories 

Solid gland plate 1 2235.135 2235.135 2235.135 346 

Gland plate with brush insert 1 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 346 

Gland plate for metric cable glands 1 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 346 

Fan expansion kit, 230 V 1 7980.100 7980.100 7980.100 127 

Spare filter mats 5 3322.700 3322.700 3322.700 149 


Lock inserts see page 285 

Component shelf 2 U, static installation or 

fully extendible, 300 mm deep 

1 7148.035 7148.035 7148.035 321 

Component shelf 2 U, static installation, 

250 mm deep 

1 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 323 

Fans 

230 V AC or 48 V DC, 

see page 135. 

Socket strips 

for mounting in the wall section 

or on the 482.6 mm (19″) profile, 

see page 328.


Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part, with punched rails, depth 473 

Material: 





Colour: 




(slate grey) 


IP 55 to EN 60 529/10.91 



Wall section: 

with vertical punched rails and C 

rail mounted horizontally for 

cable clamping, solid cable 

gland plate top and bottom, 

wall mounting bracket 10 mm. 

Hinged part: 

with 25 mm pitch pattern of 

holes in the front and rear frame, 

Two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles mounted on C rails, 

infinitely depth-variable. 

T1 

T3 T2 

B2 

T4 

H2 

B1 

H1 


6 – 15 U with mini comfort 


18 – 21 U with comfort handle 

and 2-point locking, 




distributors 

● Special sizes 

(D = 373 mm, 573 mm) 


frame 


Accessories Page 252 Socket strips Page 328 LSA connection system Page 397 Wall mounting Page 294 

Approvals, 

see page 403. 



U Packs of 6 9 12 15 18 21 Page 

Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 345 478 612 746 878 1012 

Depth (T1) mm 473 473 473 473 473 473 

Clearance width (B2) mm 502 502 502 502 502 502 

Clearance height (H2) mm 284 417 551 684 817 951 

Depth of wall section (T2) mm 135 135 135 135 135 135 

Depth of hinged part (T3) mm 316 316 316 316 316 316 

Maximum installation depth (T4) mm 420 420 420 420 420 420 

Model No. DK 1 7706.135 7709.135 7712.135 7715.135 7718.135 1) 7721.135 

Load capacity, hinged part (kg) 30 45 60 75 75 75 

Accessories 

Gland plate with brush insert 1 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 346 

Gland plate for metric cable glands 1 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 346 

Base/plinth 1 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 259 

Wall mounting bracket, 40 mm 4 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 2503.010 294 


Earth rail, horizontal 1 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 338 

Component shelf 2 U, static installation and fully 

extendible 

1 7148.035 7148.035 7148.035 7148.035 7148.035 7148.035 321 

Component shelf 2 U, static installation, 250 mm deep 1 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 323 

Component shelf 1 U, static installation, 140 mm deep 


1 7119.140 7119.140 7119.140 7119.140 7119.140 7119.140 322 

Slide rails 

to support heavy components 

on the 482.6 mm (19″) profile, 

see page 384. 

Semi-cylinder 

for individual locks in the comfort 

or mini comfort handle, 

see page 287. 

63 




Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part, with punched rail, depth 373 

Material: 



Mounting plate: 

2.5 mm sheet steel, zinc-plated, 

passivated 



Colour: 




(slate grey) 


IP 55 to EN 60 529/10.91 


Wall section: 

with 2 cable gland plates, 

1 mounting plate supplied loose, 

assembly parts. 

Hinged part: 

with 2 mounting angles, 

482.6 mm (19″), fitted at the 

front, assembly parts. 







T1 

T3 T2 


B2 

T4 

H2 

B1 

B3 

H1 

H3 


● Special sizes and colours 


frame 


Accessories Page 252 Earthing Page 337 Cable management panel Page 362 Component shelf Page 318 

Approvals, 

see page 403. 



U Packs of 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 Page 

Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 212 345 478 612 746 878 1012 

Depth (T1) mm 373 373 373 373 373 373 373 

Clearance width (B2) mm 502 502 502 502 502 502 502 

Clearance height (H2) mm 151 284 417 551 684 817 951 

Depth of wall section (T2) mm 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 

Depth of hinged part (T3) mm 216 216 216 216 216 216 216 

Maximum installation depth (T4) mm 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 

Width of mounting plate (B3) mm 485 485 485 485 485 485 485 

Height of mounting plate (H3) mm 165 299 432 565 699 832 965 

Model No. EL 1 2243.605 2246.605 2249.605 2252.605 2255.605 2258.605 1) 2261.605 

Load capacity, hinged part (kg) 15 30 45 60 75 75 75 

Accessories 

Wall mounting bracket 10 mm 4 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 2508.010 294 


Gland plate with brush insert 1 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 346 

Gland plate for metric cable glands 1 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 346 

Cable glands see page 348 


Slide rails 10 2240.000 2240.000 2240.000 2240.000 2240.000 2240.000 2240.000 384 

C rails 4 2238.000 2238.000 2238.000 2238.000 2238.000 2238.000 2238.000 307 

Blanking plates 


3 see page 393 

Blanking panels 

for filling in empty “U” space, 

see page 392. 

Gland plates 

for PG segments for cable 

routing with a high protection 

category, 

see page 347.


Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part, with mounting plate, depth 473 

Material: 




2.5 mm sheet steel, zinc-plated, 

passivated 



Colour: 




(slate grey) 


IP 55 to EN 60 529/10.91 



Wall section: 

with 2 cable gland plates, 

1 mounting plate supplied loose, 


Hinged part: 

with 2 mounting angles, 

482.6 mm (19″), fitted, 








T1 

T3 T2 

B2 

T4 

H2 

B1 

B3 

H1 

H3 




frame 


Accessories Page 252 Socket strip Page 328 Wall mounting Page 294 Cable clamps Page 352 

Approvals, 

see page 403. 



U Packs of 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 Page 

Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 212 345 478 612 746 878 1012 

Depth (T1) mm 473 473 473 473 473 473 473 

Clearance width (B2) mm 502 502 502 502 502 502 502 

Clearance height (H2) mm 151 284 417 551 684 817 951 

Depth of wall section (T2) mm 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 

Depth of hinged part (T3) mm 316 316 316 316 316 316 316 

Maximum installation depth (T4) mm 420 420 420 420 420 420 420 

Width of mounting plate (B3) mm 485 485 485 485 485 485 485 

Height of mounting plate (H3) mm 165 299 432 565 699 832 965 

Model No. EL 1 2253.605 2256.605 2259.605 2262.605 2265.605 2268.6051) 2271.605 

Load capacity, hinged part (kg) 

Accessories 

15 30 45 60 75 75 75 




Gland plate with brush insert 1 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 7705.035 346 

Gland plate for metric cable glands 1 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 7705.235 346 

Base/plinth 1 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 7505.300 

Cable glands see page 348 

Slide rails 10 2250.000 2250.000 2250.000 2250.000 2250.000 2250.000 2250.000 384 

C rails 4 2239.000 2239.000 2239.000 2239.000 2239.000 2239.000 2239.000 307 



3 see page 393 

Base/plinth 

The 1 U component shelf can 

can be fitted with castors, 

be secured in the centre sec- 

see page 259. 

tion to support non 19″ mountable 

components, 

see page 322. 

65 




Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 2-part, with swing frame, depth 369 

Material: 

Enclosure: 1.5 mm sheet steel 

Swing frame: Sheet steel 

Front door: Extruded aluminium 

section, 3 mm acrylic glazing 


Enclosure and swing frame: 

Primed and powder-coated, 

RAL 7035 

Front door: 

Dark brown anodised 


IP 55 to EN 60 529/10.91 


Enclosure, front door, 

fitted swing frame, 

including assembly parts. 


T1 

T2 T3 

B2 

B1 

H2 

H1 



Accessories Page 252 Cage nuts Page 314 Patch panel for copper transmission cables Page 389 Socket strips Page 328 

Approvals, 

see page 404. 




Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 380 600 760 

Depth (T1) mm 369 369 369 



Distance from glazed door to swing frame (T2) mm 67 – 97 67 – 97 67 – 97 


Model No. EL 1 1919.500 1920.500 1926.500 

Accessories 



Gland plates with hole 5 2563.000 2563.000 2563.000 342 

Blanking plates 3 see page 393 

Standard swing frame with double-bit lock insert may be exchanged for 27 mm lock inserts, type A, see page 285. 


for mounting the enclosure 

either 10 mm or 40 mm away 

from the wall, 

see page 294. 


for securing cables to the 

T-heads or the C section, 

see page 352.

The Rittal EMC concept 

Rittal offers excellent standard 

sheet steel enclosures, EMCshielded 

enclosures and a practical 

range of EMC accessories. 

Even the standard enclosures 

offer good shielding against 

electrical fields which is generally 

sufficient for many applications. 

Depending on the individual 

application, anything is possible, 

be it closely intermeshed 

potential equalisation in a standard 

enclosure to prevent conducted 

interference, or extra 

shielding to protect against 

high-frequency electromagnetic 

fields. 

Rittal EMC enclosures have a 

high level of shielding, excellent 

attenuation levels and are valuefor-money 

products. This is 

achieved by zinc-plated metal 

surfaces in conjunction with lowresistance 

EMC shields. 

According to EMC legislation, 

CE labelling is only compulsory 

for (active) equipment and systems. 

Empty enclosures are not subject 

to the EMC Directive 

because these are passive components 

which cannot be furnished 

with a declaration of conformity 

with regard to EMC 

standards. 



EMC wall-mounted enclosure, based on Rittal EL, 3-part 

dB 

120 

100 

Material: 

Wall unit and centre part: 




Front door: 

Extruded aluminium section, 

die-cast aluminium corner 

connectors, 4 mm polycarbonate 

window, 

with EMC mesh. 


Powder-coated, 

enclosure RAL 7035, 

door frame RAL 7033. 


IP 55 to EN 60 529/10.91 


1 wall unit, solid, 

2 gland plates, solid, 

1 centre part, vertically hinged, 

2 mounting angles, 482.6 mm 

(19″), fitted, 

1 mounting plate, zinc-plated, 

1 front door with EMC polycarbonate 

window. 

80 

60 

40 

20 

1 

2 

3 

4 

0 

0.01 0.05 0.1 0.5 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000 5000 

MHz 

MHz = Frequency 

dB = RF attenuation 

1 E field = Electrical field 

[V/m] EMC enclosures 

2 E field standard 

enclosures 

3 H field = Magnetic field 

[A/m] EMC enclosures 

4 H field standard 

enclosures 

Approvals: 

● TÜV 

● Norske Veritas 

● Russian Maritime 

U 

Width mm 

Height mm 

6 

600 

345 

Register of Shipping 

Depth mm 515 

● Lloyds Register of Shipping 

● VDE 

● UL – Underwriters Laboratories 

Inc. 

Model No. EL 2256.705 

Delivery times available on request. 

for USA and Canada Further information, 


67 




Small fibre-optic distributors 

Material: 




RAL 7035 


1 enclosure, two-part, to accommodate 

a maximum of 48 or 96 

optical fibres, 

1 wall section: 

with mounting holes for wall 

mounting, 

11 or 16 shunting rings: 

for patching cables/fibre stock, 

1 or 2 splicing cassette holders: 

To accommodate a maximum of 

8 or 16 splicing cassettes, 

2 comb strips: 

for cable clamping, and brush 

inserts to provide protection 

against dust, 

1 cover: 

with suspension device and two 

cam locks. 

Accessories Page 252 Lock systems Page 281 Nylon loop Page 353 


T2 

B1 

B2 

H 

Note: 

When the small fibre-optic distributor 

is used without a patch 

panel, 1 or 2 splicing cassette 

holders may be retrofitted (maximum 

splicing cassette accommodation 

16 or 32). 





T1 



Width (B1) mm Packs of 500 500 Page 

Height (H) mm 500 900 

Depth (T1) mm 120 120 

Width of cable entry (B2) mm 395 395 

Depth of cable entry (T2) mm 29 29 

Model No. DK 1 7452.035 7453.035 

Number of fibres (when using patch panels) 1 – 48 1 – 96 

Accessories 

Patch panels with 12/24 locations for fibre-optic couplings 

Maximum population 

2 patch panels 

Maximum population 

4 patch panels 

F-SMA 6.5 mm, 24 locations 2 7456.0351) 7456.0351) – 

F-SMA 7.5 mm, 24 locations 2 7457.0351) 7457.0351) – 

ST, 24 locations 2 7458.035 7458.035 – 

DIN 47 256, 24 locations 2 7459.0351) 7459.0351) – 

SC, E-2000, E-2000 duplex, 24/12 locations 2 7460.0351) 7460.0351) – 

SC duplex, 12 locations 2 7460.1351) 7460.1351) – 

Splicing cassette holder for retrofitting 

Lock systems 

1 7450.035 7450.035 394 

T handle without lock insert 1 2572.000 2572.000 285 

T handle with lock insert no. 3524 E 1 2575.000 2575.000 285 

Plastic handle with lock no. Nr. 3524 E 1 2576.000 2576.000 286 

Plastic handle 1 2533.000 2533.000 286 



Splicing cassette holder 

incl. cassette cover, 

see page 394. 

Blanking cover 

for unused cut-outs in patch 

panels, 

see page 395.

Layout of the small fibre-optic 

distributor: 

Basic enclosure: 

With cable shunting rings to 

accommodate the fibre stock 

and a strain relief system for 

incoming and outgoing cables. 


With accommodation for 

4 splicing cassettes and 

4 patch panels. 

Patch panels: 

There are 4 patch panels available 

with varying cut-outs. 


Other special versions available 

on request. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 



RAL 7035 


IP 55 (to EN 60 529/10.91) 

when using suitable cable gland 

plates. 


Small fibre-optic distributors, based on Rittal AE 

T1 

B1 

H1 

B2 

H2 


1 enclosure of sheet steel with 

2 gland plates of sheet steel, 

sides, 

1 gland plate, bottom 


70 x 44 mm, 

2 strain relief clips, 

1 cable clamp rail, double, 

1 door of sheet steel, 

with double-bit locks, with 

2 hinges on the right, 

1 mounting plate of sheet steel 

with 6 cable shunting rings 

70 x 44 mm, 

4 recesses for patch panels, 

1 splicing cassette holder. 



Width (B1) mm Packs of 400 Page 

Height (H1) mm 500 


Mounting plate width (B2) mm 355 

Mounting plate height (H2) mm 455 

Model No. DK 1 7454.000 

Number of fibres (when using patch panels) 1 – 48 

Accessories 

Patch panel, maximum population with 4 patch panels Locations 

Patch panel for ST couplings 12 2 7462.000 

Patch panel for SC, E-2000, E-2000 duplex couplings 12/6 2 7463.100 

Patch panel for SC duplex couplings 6 2 7463.200 

Cable gland with 2 half-shells, cable diameter from 8 – 36 mm, for mounting at the bottom, 

reduced protection category 

1 2400.000 349 

Plastic cable gland plates, PG size 13.5, for side mounting 5 1581.000 342 

Plastic cable gland plates, PG size 13.5 /16/21, for side mounting 5 1582.000 342 


Wall mounting bracket, 10 mm 

Lock systems 

4 2508.010 294 

Plastic handle 1 2533.000 286 

Plastic handle with lock cylinder insert 1 2576.000 286 

Lock cylinder insert no. 3524 E 


1 2571.000 286 

Connector gland 

for pre-assembled cables, 

see page 349. 

Accessories Page 252 Plastic cable gland plates Page 342 Wall mounting Page 294 

Plastic handle 

with a lock cylinder, 

see page 286. 

69 




Fibre-optic marshalling enclosure 

Patch panels are easily fastened 

within the apeture. A door 

is provided to cover and lock the 

splicing cassette accommodation. 

A second door covers and 

locks the secondary chamber/ 

splicing cassette accommodation. 

Both doors are provided 

with different locks. 


Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 



RAL 7035 


T 


1 enclosure to accommodate a 

maximum of 24 optical fibres, 

wall section with mounting holes 

for wall mounting, 

2 doors with different locks, 

for separate access, 

4 shunting rings, 70 x 44 mm, 

2 splicing cassette holders 

each for 2 splicing cassettes, 

4 rubber seals for cable entry, 

4 comb strips for cable clamping. 

800 

B 

60 

H 

Note: 

If the marshalling enclosure is 

used without patch panels, 

4 splicing cassettes, 

2 per side, may be integrated. 


German patent 

No. 195 47 135 


with validity for NL 


with validity for DE, FR, GB, IT 


● Other variants 



Width (B) mm Packs of 400 Page 


Depth (T) mm 120 

Model No. DK 1 7247.000 


Accessories 

Patch panel for 24 ST couplings 1 7247.010 

Patch panel for 24 SC, E-2000 couplings1) 1 7247.020 

Patch panel for 12 SC duplex couplings 1 7247.030 

1) 12 E-2000 duplex couplings may be accommodated.

Configuration 

Small fibre-optic distributor: 


With accommodation for one or 

two splicing cassettes, the width 

of the cassettes may vary from 

92 to 120 mm. 

Dividing plate: 

Covers the splicing cassettes 

and separates them from the 

patch cables. Aperture for patch 

panels and a cable clamp are 

also integrated. 

Patch panels: 

Patch panels for 

F-SMA, E-2000-ST couplings, 

E-2000 duplex and SC and 

SC duplex couplings are 

available. 

Other special variants available 

on request. 



Cable entry: 

For cable entry, there are prepunchings 

for PG cable glands 

integrated into the small fibreoptic 

distributor. 

The cable glands (12 x PG 7 

and 1 x PG 16) are included with 

the supply. Pre-assembled connectors 

will also fit through the 

knockout apertures (for diameters, 

see below). Depending on 

diameter, the cable can either 

be held in the knockouts by a 

2-part cable entry gland or cable 

entry sleeves. The two-part 

cable entry and the grommets 

are not included with the supply, 

due to the different cable 

diameters. 

Diameter of the pre-punched 

knockouts: 

12 x 12.5 mm 

2 x 22.5 mm 


Small fibre-optic distributor, polycarbonate 

H 

T 

B 

145 

170 

169.5 

Material: 

Enclosure and cover: 

Fibreglass-reinforced polycarbonate 

Cover screws: Polyamide 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 66 to EN 60 529/10.91. 

244 


1 enclosure and lid of fibreglassreinforced 

polycarbonate to 

accommodate splicing cassettes 

and patch panels, 

1 enclosure lid with 2 hinges, 

knockouts for PG glands are 

integrated into the enclosure, 

12 x cable gland PG 7, 

1 x cable gland PG 16, 

1 mounting plate with variable 

accommodation of 2 splicing 

cassettes and integral anti-twist 

guard, 

1 dividing plate to cover the 

splicing cassette, accommodation 

for 2 patch panels and 

comb strip for cable clamping, 

2 lid screws of polyamide with 

option of preparing for a lead 

seal, polyamide insulating bungs 

for wall mounting screws. 

All-round foamed-in PU seal. 



Width (B) mm Packs of 180 Page 


Depth (T) mm 90 

Model No. DK 1 7451.000 


Accessories 

Locations 

per patch panel 

Locations 

per enclosure 

Patch panel for 7.5 mm F-SMA couplings 12 24 2 7461.000 

Patch panel for ST couplings 12 24 2 7462.000 

Patch panel for SC, E-2000, 

E-2000 duplex couplings 

12/6 24/12 2 7463.100 

Patch panel for SC duplex couplings 6 12 2 7463.200 

Wall mounting brackets 40 9583.000 

Wall mounting brackets 

Attach securely to the enclosure 

simply by clipping in. 

71 


As different 

as our customers 

Rittal offers a range of server racks which are sure to 

impress, thanks to their versatility, innovative technology and 

stylish performance. 

We have the perfect rack for your application – i.e. data 

centres, server rooms or as stand-alone solutions. 

Functionality and assembly-friendliness are basic require- 

ments. Depending on the various conditions and objectives 

of our clients modern server racks must also meet exacting 

standards in terms of power supply, climate control and 

access protection for the system, depending on the various 

conditions and objectives of our clients. 

Every application is different. Rittal is designed for this. 

TE 7000 server racks 

The functional and economic server 

rack – for applications where only 

482.6 mm (19″) equipment is 

installed, and optimum accessibility 

is important. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Server racks 

TS 8 server racks 

Whether 482.6 mm (19″), metric or 

across the entire width, as a server 

rack the TS 8 offers ingenious installation 

diversity with innovative technology. 

This is complemented by a 

high load capacity of up to 1000 kg, 

an optimum airflow with 78 % free ventilation 

area, plus optimum opportunities 

for combining with liquid cooling 

and other climate control concepts. 

TS 8 – A genuine all-rounder with 

exceptional strengths in demanding 

IT environments. 

Server racks 74 

System comparison of racks ............................................................74 

Installation example of the TE 7000 server rack...............................76 

Installation example of the TS 8 server rack.....................................78 

Parts list for the configuration example TE 7000 ..............................80 

Parts list for the configuration example TS 8 ....................................81 

Based on Rittal TE 7000/TS 8 in RAL 9005.......................................82 

Based on Rittal TE 7000, 1000 mm deep .........................................84 

Based on Rittal TS 8, pre-configured ...............................................85 

Based on Rittal flexRack(i), 1000 and 1200 mm deep, 

pre-configured ..................................................................................87 

Based on Rittal TS 8, High Performance Cooling systems HPC ......88 

Smart Package, based on Rittal TS 8, pre-configured .....................89 

Smart Package 

For common practical requirements – 

pre-configured server racks based on 

TS 8. Ready to plug & play. 

Depending on your chosen design, climate 

control components, multi-phase 

power supply including UPS, CMC-TC 

monitoring system and various accessory 

components are already integrated. 

73 

Server racks

Server racks 

Server racks 

System comparison of racks 

Rittal server rack solutions are as versatile as your require- 

ments! Three system platforms with various strengths 

in terms of security, interior installation, climate con- 

trol and design provide the basis for server racks with 

carefully selected configurations to meet your require- 

ments precisely. 

Rittal system comparison TE 7000 TS 8 FR(i) 

One platform for all requirements 

in the IT market 

Load capacity 

up to 700 kg 

up to 1000 kg 

Baying 

 

Side to side 

In all levels 

Dismantling 


 

Fans 

Cooling unit 

Air/water heat exchanger 

CPU liquid cooling 

Cabling 

 

Cable space 


Lock system 

 

2-point 

4-point 

Security 

 

Access control 

Thermal management 


 

Depth-variable 

Partial installation 

2-level principle 

Aesthetics 

Standards 

 

IEC 60 297-1-2 

Note: 

 

The more the greater the compatibility. 

Rittal TE 7000 

TE 7000 – the Top Efficiency server rack 

With two depth-variable 482.6 mm (19″) frames (without 

enclosure frame), the practical rack for the server room. 

● Optimum accessibility. 

● Fully vented front and rear door, 

> 63 % free ventilation area. 

● 2-point locking rod, 

optionally with Ergoform-S handle system. 

Server racks based on Rittal TE 7000, see page 84. 

74 Rittal IT catalogue/Server racks

Rittal TS 8 

TS 8 – The server rack with no limitations 

Rittal TS 8 server racks offer the ideal conditions to combine 

all the relevant technologies into complete IT infrastructure 

solution. 

Each rack makes an important contribution to the physical 

security of your IT infrastructure and forms the interface to 

pioneering climate control concepts. 

● Ventilation via perforated front and rear ventilated door with 

open area of 78 %. 

● Lock system with comfort handle and 4-point locking. 

● The ingenious symmetry concept of the frame offers baying 

on all sides. 

● Frame section with unlimited mounting diversity. 

● High load capacity up to 1000 kg. 

Server racks based on Rittal TS 8, see page 85. 


Rittal flexRack(i) 

Server racks 

System comparison of racks 

flexRack(i) – Smart design, exceptional technology 

The server rack with a highly individual touch. The curved 

designer door unites functionality with aesthetics, while the 

aluminium system channel in the frame sections accommodates 

redundant socket strips, cabling or even rising mains 

from liquid cooling systems with no loss of space. 

● Aluminium vertical sections with multi-functional system 

channel. 

● Screw-fastened enclosure system, may be dismantled. 

● Vented front and rear door 

with open surface area of 64 % in the perforated plate. 

● 2-point locking. 

● Stabilisers for optimum operational safety. 

Server racks based on Rittal flexRack(i), see page 87. 

75 

Server racks

TE 7000 server rack 

4 


3 

1 

5 

Top Efficiency – The TE 7000 as server rack! 

In depths of up to 1000 mm, the TE offers a rational, cost- 

effective solution to your server room and data centre require- 

ments with a stable, depth-variable 482.6 mm (19″) frame. 

Optimum installation access with the doors and walls 

removed. 

Rittal offers everything needed to configure a plug & play 

rack: Compatible modules for power supply, cooling, 

security, monitoring, and a comprehensive range of system 

accessories. 

2 

Example: System accessories for perfect configuration of a TE 7000 server rack 


6 Plug-in module, PSM, earthing-pin 

1 Blanking panel, 482.6 mm (19″), 2 U 7 Plug-in module, PSM, earthing-pin, red 

2 Cable management panel 

8 PSM busbar, 2000 mm 


9 Plug-in module, PSM, IEC 320 


10 Plug-in modules, PSM, IEC 320, red 

5 Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U 


12 KVM switch SSC view 8 

8 

6 

7 

9 

10 

Note: 

TE 7000 server racks, see page 84. 


see page 80. 

11 

12 

21 

20 

19 

15 

14 

18 

13 Component shelf, heavy-duty 

14 Mounting kit, depth-variable, 

for 482.6 mm (19″) component shelves 

15 Socket strip, 7-way 

16 Distributor clip 


18 Slide rail, depth-variable, 1 U 

19 Base/plinth trim, side 

20 Connection cable, single-phase 

21 Connection cable, three-phase 

22 Base/plinth components, front and rear 

13 

16 

22 

17 

77 

Server racks

TS 8 server rack 

4 5 


1 

With TS 8 your requirements are precisely met. 

The decisive TS 8 feature is its symmetrical enclosure frame. 

Each vertical section has 4 rows of mounting holes for 

unlimited installation opportunities. The section is also the 

key for baying on all sides. A high level of access protection 

is provided by the comfort handle (with security lock) and 

4-point locking. Outstanding stability (load capacity up to 

1000 kg). The doors have 78 % free ventilation area plus 

innovative Rittal climate control concepts offer operational 

reliability through cooling. 

2 

3 

Example: System accessories for perfect configuration of a TS 8 server rack 

Rittal system accessories are available in 3 Cable routing bar, 1 U 

many different variants, tailored to the 

intended application. 482.6 mm (19″) par- 


tial configuration and the use of compo- 5 Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U 

nent shelves across the entire enclosure 

width are likewise easily achieved. 

6 Plug-in module, PSM, IEC 320 


7 Plug-in module, PSM, earthing-pin, red 

1 Blanking panel, 482.6 mm (19″), 2 U 

8 PSM busbar, 2000 mm 

2 Cable management panel 

9 Plug-in module, PSM, earthing-pin 

10 KVM switch SSC view 8 

11 Plug-in module, IEC 320, red 

12 Cable bar, 1 U 

8 

6 

7 

9 

11 

Note: 

TS 8 server racks, see page 85. 


see page 81. 

10 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

17 

18 

12 

16 

19 

13 

Mounting kit, depth-variable, 


Component shelf, heavy duty 

Side panels, plug-type 

Slide rail, depth-variable, 1 U 

Connection cable, three-phase 

Connection cable, single-phase 

Base/plinth trim, side 

Base/plinth components, front and rear, 

vented 

UPS, single-phase 

20 

14 

21 

15 

79 

Server racks

Server racks 

Server racks 

Parts list for the configuration example TE 7000 


TE 7000 Server rack 

W = 800 mm, H = 2000 mm, D = 1000 mm 

System accessories 

1 DK 7000.892 84 

1 Blanking panel, 19″, 2 U 2 DK 7152.035 392 

2 Cable management panel 1 DK 7257.035 361 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 



Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U 1 DK 9055.100 190 

Plug-in module, PSM, earthing pin 1 DK 7856.100 100 

Plug-in module, PSM, earthing-pin, red 1 DK 7856.240 100 

PSM busbar, 2000 mm 1 DK 7856.020 99 

Plug-in module, PSM, IEC320 1 DK 7856.080 100 

Plug-in module, PSM, IEC320, red 1 DK 7856.082 100 


KVM switch SSC view 8 1 DK 7552.000 191 

Component shelf, heavy duty 1 DK 7063.897 321 

Mounting kit, depth-variable, for 482.6 mm (19″) component shelves 1 set DK 7063.890 324 

Socket strip, 7-way 1 DK 7240.210 328 

Distributor clip 4 DK 7111.252 360 

UPS, single-phase 1 DK 7857.430 433 

Slide rail, depth-variable, 1 U 2 DK 7063.883 384 

Base/plinth trims, side 1 set TS 8601.015 255 

Connection cable, single-phase 1 DK 7856.026 102 

21 Connection cable, 3-phase 1 DK 7856.025 102 

22 Base/plinth components, front and rear 1 set TS 8601.085 255 


A Power: Power System Module PSM Plus 103 

B Security: CMC-TC monitoring system 158 

C Monitoring: KVM switches 191 

D Side panels 265 

E 19″ installation system 364 

F Power strips 328 

A Power System Module 

PSM Plus 

B Monitoring system CMC-TC C 

KVM switches, SSC premium 

D Side panels 

E 19″ installation system 

F Power strips 

80 Rittal IT catalogue/Server racks


Server racks 

Parts list for the configuration example TS 8 


TS 8 server rack 

W = 600 mm, H = 2000 mm, D = 1000 mm 


1 DK 7831.438 85 

1 Blanking panel, 19″, 2 U 2 DK 7152.035 392 

2 Cable management panel 1 DK 7257.035 361 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 



Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U 1 DK 9055.100 190 

Plug-in module, PSM, IEC320 1 DK 7856.080 100 

Plug-in module, PSM, earthing-pin, red 1 DK 7856.240 100 

PSM busbar, 2000 mm 1 DK 7856.020 99 

Plug-in module, PSM, earthing pin 1 DK 7856.100 100 

KVM switch SSC view 8 1 DK 7552.000 191 

Plug-in module, IEC320, red 1 DK 7856.082 100 


Mounting kit, depth-variable, for 482.6 mm (19″) component shelves 1 set DK 7063.890 324 

Component shelf, heavy duty 1 DK 7063.897 321 

Side panels, plug-type 2 DK 7824.200 266 

Slide rail, depth-variable, 1 U 2 DK 7063.883 384 

Connection cable, 3-phase 1 DK 7856.025 102 

Connection cable, single-phase 1 DK 7856.026 102 

Base/plinth trims, side 1 set TS 8601.015 255 

Base/plinth components, front and rear, vented 1 set TS 8601.065 255 



A Power: Power Modular Concept 200 104 

B Power: Power Distribution Rack PDR/Power Distribution Module PDM 97 

C Cooling: Liquid cooling package 129 

D Security: CMC-TC monitoring system 158 

E Monitoring: KVM switches 191 

F Base/plinth 254 

A 

D 

Power Modular Concept 

PMC 200 


B 

E 

Power Distribution Module 

PDM 

KVM switch, SSC premium 

C 

F 

Liquid cooling package 

Stabiliser, pull-out 

81 

Server racks

Server racks 

RAL 9005 

82

TS 8 server rack, 

see page 85. 

Everything under control in a 

single U. With the Rittal monitor/ 

keyboard unit in an attractive, 

ergonomic design. Available 

in various country versions. 

For TS 8 enclosure series with 

comfort handle, an opening 

angle of 180° may be achieved 

with a sheet steel door. 


TE 7000 server rack, 

see page 84. 

Modular base/plinth diversity – 

in a variety of sizes and designs. 

The comfort handle. The fold-up 

system eliminates the need for a 

swivel range. 

Plug & play side panel. 

With two options: Lockable, 

with optional additional internal 

latching. 

Server racks 

RAL 9005 

The colour black conveys aesthetics and style, understatement and 

perfection for server racks in data centres and office environments. 

An extensive range of accessories is available for a consistent, 

integrated design. Numerous server rack variants on the platforms of 

TS 8 and TE 7000 plus a wide range of accessory components are 

available off-the-shelf immediately. 

Customised enclosure population 

or extension cover. 

Component shelf for attaching 

to the 482.6 mm (19″) frame or 

to L-shaped mounting angles – 

with an area load of 50 kg and 

100 kg. 

Slimline, compact long-stroke 

keyboard with a high-quality 

trackball. Available in various 

country layouts. 

83 

Server racks

Server racks 

Server racks 

Based on Rittal TE 7000, 1000 mm deep 

Benefits: 

● No frame structure, 

optimum accessibility 

Material: 

Sheet steel 





Powder-coated, RAL 7035/9005 

84 Rittal IT catalogue/Server racks 

T1 

B 

H 

HE 




vented sheet steel door front 

and rear, two-point locking rod, 

recessed handle (front) and 

security lock 3524 E, roof plate 

19˝ 

HE = U 

T2 

with brush strip for cable entry 

and concealed cut-out for fan 

integration, levelling feet. 



U 42 42 42 42 

Width (B) mm1) 600 600 800 800 

Height (H) mm 1) 2000 2000 2000 2000 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 1000 1000 1000 1000 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels in its delivered state (T2) mm 745 745 745 745 

Model No. TE 

RAL 7035 7000.882 – 7000.892 – 

as bayed enclosure without side panels, including baying kit 

Doors 

RAL 9005 – 7000.885 – 7000.895 

Sheet steel door front and rear, fully vented, 

open surface area 67 % perforated 

Roof 

 

Roof plate including brush strip for cable entry and 

with an optional fan 

Floor 

 

Base frame with maximum cut-out for cable entry or passive ventilation, 

can be fitted with optional blanking panels 


 


Accessories 

 

Side panels, pluggable, including security lock 3524 E 7000.653 7000.663 7000.653 7000.663 

Ergoform-S handle for semi-cylinder, in exchange for the existing lock 2435.000 2452.0002) 2435.000 2452.0002) Fan unit, with 2 fans and thermostat, prewired ready for connection 7000.670 7000.6713) 7000.670 7000.6713) Transport castors, 4 castors including assembly parts 7000.672 7000.672 7000.672 7000.672 

C rail, for cable clamping in the enclosure width 

via cable clamps, on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame at the rear 

7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 7828.060 



7858.162 7858.162 7858.162 7858.162 

Cable clamp rail for cable attachment in the enclosure width 

via cable ties, on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame at the rear 

7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 7828.062 

Earthing kit for TE 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 7000.675 

TE socket strip, 8-way for earthing-pin plugs 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 7000.630 

Included with the supply. 1) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, refer to detailed drawings on the Internet. 

2) Matt nickel-plated 3) Delivery times on request. 

Cable routing Page 341 Power management Page 328 CMC-TC system monitoring Page 158

Material: 

Sheet steel 






Dipcoat-primed, powder-coated 

in RAL 7035 or RAL 9005 

Mounting angles and punched 



T1 

1 

Server racks 

Based on Rittal TS 8, pre-configured 

B1 

H1 


Enclosure frame TS 8 with 

sheet steel doors front and rear, 

vented, with 130° hinges, 

L-shaped, depth-variable fitted 

mounting angles and/or 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame, 

levelling feet, comfort handle 

with security lock and 4-point 

lock. 



1 Optimised air flow 

Number of front and rear doors 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

U 24 24 42 42 42 47 47 47 

Width (B1) mm2) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 2) 1200 1200 2000 2000 2000 2200 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm2) 900 1000 900 1000 1200 900 1000 1200 

Model No. DK as bayed enclosure 

RAL 7035 7831.431 7831.433 

without side panels, without baying kit 

3) 7831.436 7831.438 7831.481 7831.440 7831.442 7831.483 

RAL 9005 7831.4323) 7831.4343) 7831.437 7831.439 7831.482 7831.441 7831.443 7831.4843) Model No. DK with side panels, 

RAL 7035 – – – – 7831.491 – – 7831.493 

plug-type 

RAL 9005 – – – – 7831.492 – – 7831.4943) Doors 

Sheet steel doors, vented, front and rear1) Roof 

 

Roof plate for cable entry, two-piece 

Floor 

 

Levelling feet 

Open base, without base frame 


 

482.6 mm (19″) levels, front and rear 

L-shaped mounting angles 

Mounting angles attached to depth stays 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames, front and rear – – – – – – – – 

Panel earthing, fitted 

Individual compartments, shielded/separate cable rout. p. comp. 

Accessories 

–/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/– –/– 

Plug-in side panels 

with T lock, IP 20 

RAL 7035 7824.129 7824.120 7824.209 7824.200 (7831.491 

only) 

RAL 9005 7816.129 7816.120 7816.209 7816.200 (7831.492 

only) 

7824.229 7824.220 

7816.229 7816.220 

(7831.493 

only) 

(7831.494 

only) 

Security lock for side panels 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 

Base mounting bracket 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 

Depth-variable slide rail, 1 U 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 

Stabiliser, pull-out 7825.200 7825.250 7825.200 7825.250 7825.260 7825.200 7825.250 7825.260 

Included with the supply. 1) Vented surface area 78 % perforated. 2) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed 

drawing on the Internet. 3) Delivery times on request. 

Accessories Page 252 Liquid cooling Page 129 Baying system Page 270 

Design features 

● Robust frame structure 

● Front and rear door fully 

vented; vented surface area 

78 % perforated 

● 4-point locking, 

2-point locking with multiple 

door versions and 

H = 1200 mm 

● Door hinge may be swapped 

to opposite side 

● Cable entry via the roof and 

base 

● Bayable at all levels 


85 

Server racks

Server racks 

Server racks 


Material: 

Sheet steel 






in RAL 7035 or RAL 9005 

Mounting angles and punched 




Enclosure frame TS 8 with sheet 

steel doors front and rear, 


T1 

1 

B1 

H1 

vented, with 130° hinges, 

L-shaped, depth-variable fitted 

mounting angles or 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting frame, levelling 

feet, comfort handle with security 

lock and 4-point lock. 



1 Optimised air flow 

Number of front and rear doors 1 1 1 2 4 

U 42 42 47 2 x 21 4 x 10 

Width (B1) mm2) 800 800 800 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 2) 2000 2000 2200 2200 2200 

Depth (T1) mm2) 1000 1200 1200 900 900 

Model No. DK as bayed enclosure 

RAL 7035 7831.446 7831.485 7831.487 

without side panels, without baying kit 

3) 7831.450 7831.460 

RAL 9005 – 7831.4863) 7831.4883) 7831.4513) 7831.4613) Model No. DK with side panels, 

RAL 7035 – 7831.495 

plug-type 

3) 7831.4973) – – 

RAL 9005 – 7831.4963) 7831.4983) Doors 

– – 

Sheet steel doors, vented, front and rear1) Roof 

 

Roof plate for cable entry, two-piece – – 

Roof plate with cable entry openings in the corners 

Floor 

– – – 

Levelling feet – – 



 

482.6 mm (19″) levels, front and rear – – 

L-shaped mounting angles – – – – – 

Mounting angles attached to depth stays – – – 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames, front and rear – – 

Panel earthing, fitted 

Individual compartments, shielded/separate cable routing per comp. 

Accessories 

–/– –/– –/– / / 

Plug-in side panels 

RAL 7035 7824.200 (7831.495 only) (7831.497 only) 7824.229 7824.229 

with T lock, IP 20 

RAL 9005 – (7831.496 only) (7831.498 only) 7816.229 7816.229 

Security lock for side panels 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 7824.500 

Base mounting bracket 8800.210 8100.235 8100.235 8800.210 8800.210 

Depth-variable slide rail, 1 U 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 

Stabiliser, pull-out 7825.250 7825.260 7825.260 7825.200 7825.200 

Included with the supply. 1) Vented surface area 78 % perforated. 2) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed 

drawing on the Internet. 3) Delivery times available on request. 

Accessories Page 252 Liquid Cooling Page 129 




vented; vented surface area 

78 % perforated 

● 4-point locking, 

2-point locking with multiple 

door versions 




base 


● Load capacity up to 1000 kg


● Enclosure system may be dismantled 

because the vertical 

sections are screw-fastened 

to the roof and base frame 

● Aluminium vertical section 

with multi-functional system 

channel 

● Vented front and rear door 

with vented surface area 67 % 

perforated 

● 2-point locking 


base 


Server racks 

Based on Rittal flexRack(i), 1000 and 1200 mm deep, pre-configured 

● Pull-out stabiliser 

● Bayable 


Material: 



roof frame 

Panels: Sheet steel 


Enclosure panels/door trim 

panel: 


T1 

T3 

T2 

B1 

H1 

Frame sections, perforated plate 

of front/rear door: RAL 9006 


angles, mounting frame: 



System frame section FR(i) 1) with 

designer door, vented, TS sheet 

steel door at rear, vented, levelling 

feet, stabiliser, earthing of 

all enclosure panels, 

comfort handles for semi-cylinder 

and/or knob handle with 





no. 403 04 312 

British registered design 

no. 301 54 31 



U 24 42 24 42 

Width (B1) mm3) 600 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 3) 1200 2000 1200 2000 

Depth (T1) mm 3) 1005 1005 1205 1205 

Depth absolute, including handles and curvature (T1) mm + 75 mm 3) 1080 1080 1280 1280 

Maximum distance between levels (T2) mm 3) 829 829 1029 1029 

Distance between the 482.6 mm (19″) levels (T3) mm 3) 750 750 850 850 

Model No. FR(i) as bayed enclosure without side panels, without baying kit 

Doors 

7855.310 7855.330 7855.312 7855.332 

Designer door, front, vented2) 

TS sheet steel door, rear, vented2) Roof 

 

Roof plate, solid – – 

Roof plate with cable entry openings in the corners 

Floor 

– – 


Stabiliser, pull-out 



 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, front 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame, rear 

Earthing of all enclosure panels on the enclosure frame 

Central earthing point fitted at the rear of the base frame 

Accessories 

 

2 designer side panels IP 20, including security lock 3524 E 7856.672 7856.687 7856.673 7856.688 

Transport kit, 4 castors including assembly parts 7825.900 7825.900 7825.900 7825.900 

Included with the supply. 1) The system frame FR(i) is generally suitable for the installation of TS 8 accessories. 

2) Vented surface area 67 % perforated. 3) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing on the Internet. 

Accessories Page 252 Liquid cooling Page 129 Baying system Page 270 

87 

Server racks

Server racks 

Server racks 

Based on Rittal TS 8, High Performance Cooling systems HPC 

High Performance Cooling 

Systems HPC: 

Glazed door at the front, (180°), 

with 3 mm single-pane safety 

glass, sheet steel door at the 

rear, (130°), comfort handle for 

semi-cylinder and security lock 

3524 E on both sides. 


front and rear, distance between 

levels pre-configured 740 mm, 

free space to front door approx. 

100 mm, max. load capacity of 

the interior installation 1000 kg 

per rack. 

Roof plate, two-piece, 

for cable entry via sliding plate. 

Multi-divided base/gland plate. 

Maximum attainable protection 

category IP 55, in conjunction 

with solid roof (bayed solution) 

and additional screw-fastened 

side panels with stand-alone 

siting. 


T1 

H2 

B2 

T2 

B1 

H1 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Dipcoat-primed, panels additionally 

powder-coated, 

RAL 7035. 

Gland plates and 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting frame zincplated, 

passivated. 


Enclosure frame with doors and 

rear panel, roof plate, gland 

plate, 482.6 mm (19″) interior 

installation, earthing of all panels, 

levelling feet, fitted. 

U 42 42 42 42 

Width (B1) mm1) 600 800 600 800 

Height (H1) mm 1) 2000 2000 2000 2000 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 1000 1000 1200 1200 



Clearance depth (T2) mm 512 712 512 712 

Model No. DK as bayed enclosure without side panels, without baying kit 7931.810 7931.800 7931.812 7931.802 

Model No. DK with side panels, screw-fastened 

Doors 

– – 7931.813 7931.803 

Designer glazed front door, sheet steel rear door 

Roof 

 

Roof plate for cable entry, two-piece 

Floor 

 


Base frame with multi-piece gland plate 


 

482.6 mm (19″) levels, front and rear 

L-shaped mounting angles – – – – 

Mounting angles attached to depth stays – – – – 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames, front and rear 

Panel earthing, fitted 

Accessories 

 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 55 8100.235 8100.235 

 

(7931.813 only) 

 

(7931.803 only) 

Depth-variable slide rail, 1 U 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 

482.6 mm (19″) heavy duty base, 700 mm deep, 100 kg load capacity1) 7063.897 7063.897 7063.897 7063.897 

Installation kit for heavy-duty component shelf, depth-variable 7063.890 7063.890 7063.890 7063.890 

Included with the supply. 1) All sizes are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing on the Internet. 

Accessories Page 252 Baying system Page 270

Smart Package A1 

The solution for climate-controlled rooms 

The perforated sheet steel doors at the front and 

rear provide for reliable ventilation of the racks, 

with 78 % of the door surface area available for air 

throughput. 

A brush strip in the plinth and the sliding panel in 

the base frame permits simple cable entry even 

with pre-assembled plug connectors. 


The solution for the office sector 

Quiet-running roof-mounted fans with speed control 

functionality achieve active rack cooling at 

exceptionally low noise levels. Heat losses of up 

to 2.0 kW can be dissipated. 


The server rack to IP 54 

With the cooling unit at the rear, a glazed front 

door, a sheet steel rear door and screw-fastened 

side panels, this rack represents a closed system 

and 


Power supply 

The integrated PSM busbar with 6 x IEC 320 PSM 

modules is a VDE-approved power distribution 

system. 

As IEC 60 320 modules are used, it is not possible 

to transpose the phase and neutral conductors. 

The two infeeds to the PSM busbar permit both 

the mains voltage and a UPS voltage to be made 

available in the rack. The colour-coding of the C13 

modules serves for differentiation (UPS = red). 

Technical specifications: 

● Cooling output for a 10 K temperature difference: 

1.5 kW 

● Nominal UPS output: 2 kVA 

● UPS input voltage: 160 – 276 V AC 

● Autonomy time at 100 % load: 7 min. 

● Infeed: 400 V AC, 3 x 16 A, CEEkon 

● Protocols: HTTP, SNMP, Telnet, SMTP 

Benefits at a glance: 

● Built-in 2 kVA UPS VFI-SS-111 

● VDE-approved power distribution 

● Mains and UPS voltage available on the PSM 

busbar 

A glazed front door and a sheet steel rear door, 

together with a vented plinth, ensure that the prescribed 

air routing is maintained. A brush strip in 

the plinth and the sliding panel in the base frame 

permits simple cable entry even with pre-assembled 

plug connectors. 

Technical specifications 

● Cooling output for a 10 K temperature difference: 

2.0 kW 





● Monitoring: Temperature, smoke, access 

● Protocols: HTTP, SNMP, SSH, Telnet, PPP, SMTP 


● Optimised air routing for servers and PCs 

● Quiet roof-mounted fan, supplied ready-wired: 

Noise level 40 dB (A) 

● 3 kVA UPS VFI-SS-111 

● Mains and UPS voltage available on the PSM busbar 

● Temperature monitoring, smoke alarm and 

access control 

permits IT infrastructures to be installed at locations 

subject to high levels of contamination or high 

ambient temperatures. This Smart Package server 

rack is able to dissipate heat losses of up to 3 kW 

at an ambient temperature of 35°C. 


● Cooling output at 35°C ambient temperature: 

3kW 





● Monitoring: Temperature, smoke, access 

● Protocols: HTTP, SNMP, SSH, Telnet, PPP, SMTP 


● Optimised air routing for servers and PCs 

● IP 54 

● 3 kVA UPS VFI-SS-111 

● Mains and UPS voltage available on the PSM 

busbar 

● Temperature monitoring, smoke alarm and 

access control 

Smart Package 


T 

Width (B) 800 mm 

Height (H1) 2000 mm 

Overall height (H2) 2100 mm 

Depth (T) 1000 mm 

H2 

H1 





H2 

H1 

T2 

T 





Overall depth (T2) 1350 mm 

T 

B 

B 

B 

H1 

H2 

89 

Smart Package

Smart Package 

Smart Package 


1 

A1 A2 A3 

Model No. DK 7337.100 7337.200 7337.300 

Description Cooling by convection Cooling using a roof-mounted fan Cooling using a cooling unit 

Available U 36 35 33 

Width (B) mm 1) 800 800 800 

Height (H) mm 1) 2100 2340 2100 

Depth (T1) mm1) Technical specifications 

1000 1000 1350 

Cooling output 

for a temperature difference of 

10 K: 1.5 kW 

for a temperature difference of 

10 K: 2.0 kW 

at 35°C ambient temperature: 

3 kW 

Nominal UPS output 2 kVA 3 kVA 3 kVA 

UPS input voltage 160 – 276 V AC 160 – 276 V AC 160 – 276 V AC 

Autonomy at 100 % load approx. 7 min 5 min 5 min 

Three-phase infeed 400 V AC, 16 A, CEE 400 V AC, 16 A, CEE 400 V AC, 32 A, CEE 

Monitoring – Temperature, smoke, access Temperature, smoke, access 

Protocols 

Assembled supply 

HTTP, SNMP, Telnet, SMTP HTTP, SNMP, Telnet, SSH, PPP, SMTP HTTP, SNMP, Telnet, SSH, PPP, SMTP 

1 Sheet steel door, vented 

2 2 U drawer 

3 PSM busbar 

4 UPS, 2 kVA, with battery 

2 

3 

4 

1 

Roof-mounted fan 

(not pre-installed) 

Glazed door 

Sheet steel door 

2 U drawer 

PSM busbar 

UPS, 3 kVA, with battery 

CMC-TC PU II 

CMC-TC I/O Unit 

1 Cooling unit 

2 Comfort handle 

3 Glazed door 

4 Sheet steel door 

5 2 U drawer 

6 PSM busbar 

7 UPS, 3 kVA, with battery 

8 CMC-TC PU II 

CMC-TC I/O Unit 

9 Air routing tunnel, 2 U 

Optional accessories, not pre-installed Packs of Model No. DK Page 

Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U, 17″ TFT display, German 1 9055.300 190 

SSC view 8 (KVM switch in conjunction with monitor/keyboard unit) 1 7552.000 191 

CPU cable 2 m (server connection cable for Rittal SSC KVM switch) 1 7552.120 196 

CPU cable 4 m (server connection cable for Rittal SSC KVM switch) 1 7552.140 196 

Depth-variable slide rails, 1 U, length 590 – 930 mm 2 7063.884 384 

Component shelf 1 /2 U, depth-variable 1 7063.720 322 

Component shelf, heavy duty, depth 500 mm 1 7063.895 321 

Installation kit, depth-variable, for component shelf, heavy duty 1 7063.890 324 

Telescopic slides for component shelf, heavy duty 1 7065.000 326 

Component shelf, static installation for 19″ level (depth 250 mm) 1 7119.250 323 

Component shelf, static installation for 19″ level (depth 400 mm) 1 7119.400 323 

Shunting rings 300 x 90 mm 4 7220.600 355 

Light 1 U (for 482.6 mm (19″) installation) 1 7109.200 335 

PSM plug-in module IEC 60 320 4 x C19 (max.16 A) 1 7856.230 100 

Light module PSM 1 7856.210 100 

Active Power System Module 8-way, individually switchable 1 7856.201 101 

Additional RCCMD licence (for server shutdown) 1 7857.421 434 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

2 

7 

4 

1 

5 

6 

3 

2 

3 

5 

9 

8 

6 

7 

4 

1


Smart Package 


A1 A2 A3 Page 

Model No. DK 7337.100 7337.200 7337.300 

Available U 38 37 34 

Width (B) mm 1) 800 800 800 

Height (H2) mm 1) 2100 2340 2100 

Depth (T or T2) mm 1) 1000 1000 1350 


Doors 

Sheet steel door, vented, with comfort handle, front – – 279 

Glazed door with comfort handle, front – 278 

Sheet steel door, vented, with swivel handle, rear – – 279 

Sheet steel door with swivel handle, rear 

Side panels 

– 277 

Side panel, plug-in, IP 20 – 266 

Lock for side panel, plug-in (3524 E) – 266 

Side panel, screw-fastened, IP 54 

Roof 

– – 265 

Roof plate, solid – 

Roof plate, vented 

Base 

– – 293 

Base/plinth, solid with brush strip for cable entry at the rear – 255 

Base/plinth, vented with brush strip for cable entry at the rear – – 255 

Gland plate, multi-piece – 263 

Gland plate, one-piece, vented, for TS – – 263 

Filter mat for gland plate, one-piece 


– – 263 

482.6 mm (19″) level, front and rear 316 

Drawer, 2 U 

Power 

385 

PSM busbar, installation height 2000 mm, 

including mounting kit for a maximum of 7 standard modules 

99 

Plug-in module PSM 6 x C13 (IEC 320 appliances, black) 2 2 2 100 

Plug-in module PSM 6 x C13 (IEC 320 appliances, red) 

Cooling 

2 2 2 100 

Roof-mounted fan (low-noise, speed-controlled), supplied ready wired – – 126 

Cooling unit with adjusted airflow 

UPS 

– – 138 

Double conversion UPS, classification: VFI-SS-111 104 

2 kVA including battery and SNMP card – – 434 

3 kVA including battery and SNMP card 

Security/monitoring 

– 434 

CMC-TC PU II including power pack and mounting kit (1 U) – 158 

Programming cable – 169 

CMC-TC I/O unit – 160 

Temperature sensor, smoke alarm and access sensor – 172 

Digital sensor input module (cooling unit monitoring) – – 174 

Cable kit/mounting kit 

Standard accessories, supplied loose 

– 169 

Connection cable (3-phase) 16 A 16 A 32 A 167 

IEC 320 appliances extension 0.5 m and 1 m, each 5 5 5 167 

Cable lock C13 20 20 20 100 

Nylon loop cable tie 20 20 20 353 

RCCMD licence (server shutdown software) 1 1 1 434 


1) All sizes given are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing. 

91 

Smart Package

Powering ahead 

to innovative ideas 

Rittal offers maximum system reliability when it comes to 

developing future-oriented solutions for power supply and all 

aspects of power management. Rittal’s teams of engineers 

and technicians are forever developing new, integrative com- 

plete solutions for reliable, cost-effective IT power supply 

and distribution. Miniaturisation and the escalating perform- 

ance of hardware components pose particular challenges for 

a modern energy management concept. Innovative Rittal 

power concepts for energy distribution and protection 

accommodate all requirements in terms of redundancy, 

scalability and availability. No loss of production, no break- 

down in communications. Rittal takes care of it. 

Power Modular Concept PMC – 

the guaranteed safe option 

For reliable power supply: Power 

Modular Concept PMC – the innovative 

UPS concept from Rittal. 

Modularity and decentralised parallel 

architecture (DPA) ensure a high level 

of availability for critical applications, 

together with scalable, requirementoriented 

investments. Rittal offers 

single-phase UPS systems for the 

output range from 1 – 12 kVA and 

3-phase UPS systems for up to 

200 kW. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Power 

Power Distribution Rack PDR – 

Power Distribution Module PDM 

The use of ever more powerful servers 

in confined spaces places ever 

higher demands on safe, flexible 

power management. 

With the Power Distribution Rack PDR/ 

Module PDM, Rittal offers innovative 

solutions for centralised power supply 

to IT systems – cascadable, highly 

flexible components which grow along 

with your power requirements. 

Power from page 94 

Rittal IT power concept.....................................................................94 

Power System Module PSM..............................................................96 

Power Distribution Rack PDR ...........................................................97 

System network analysis...................................................................98 

Power System Module PSM..............................................................99 

Power System Module PSM Plus ....................................................103 

UPS, Rittal Modular Power Concept – PMC 200 ............................104 

Static transfer switch.......................................................................110 

Software ..........................................................................................111 

Power System Module PSM – 

power solutions that connect 

The Power System Module PSM is a 

fully contact hazard-proof busbar with 

several circuits for a redundant power 

supply. It is simply mounted in the rack. 

Plug-in modules – in various connector 

and country variants – may be inserted or 

exchanged with the system operational. 

93 

Power

Power 

Power 

Rittal IT power concept 

7 

1 

1 Modular Power Concept PMC 200 

2 Power Distribution Rack PDR 

3 Power Distribution Module PDM 

4 Power System Module PSM 

5 Circuit A 

6 Circuit B 

7 Power distribution, 

further information 


2 

Rittal Power Distribution 

Energy-efficient security, 

optimum IT performance 

The miniaturisation and increasing performance of hardware components 

places particular requirements on modern energy management 

concepts. As energy demands escalate, so do the requirements 

placed on the energy supply to racks and data centres and 

on the management of power distribution. 

Rittal’s response to this challenge is a flexible IT power concept. 

It combines the requirements of redundancy, scalability and availability 

in one system, with due regard for power distribution and 

back-up, and boasts exceptional energy efficiency. 

The result? 

● High availability of the entire system 

● Increased energy efficiency of the RimatriX5 power components 

● Lasting positive effect on the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) 

● High level of investment certainty 

● Minimal MTTR (Mean Time to Repair) 

3 

Rittal IT solutions 

94 Rittal IT catalogue/Power 

z 

4 

5 

6 

z 

4 

z 

4

Rittal IT solutions 

1 Power Modular Concept PMC 200 – 2 Power Distribution Rack PDR – 

the guaranteed safe option 

central power management for IT racks 

The efficient Power Modular Concept PMC 

is the scalable UPS concept from Rittal for 

a protected power supply. Its modularity, 

coupled with the unique Decentralised 

Parallel Architecture (DPA), ensure a high 

degree of availability for critical applications 

and requirement-based investments. 

The adaptive Rittal UPS concept accommodates 

versatile data centre requirements 

and is easily expanded with additional, 

safe-swappable UPS modules. 

High initial investments for first-time instal- 

● Accommodation of up to eight PDM 

systems 

● Sub-distribution up to 250 A per phase 

● PDM may be retrofitted whilst operational 

● A maximum of 32 racks may be fitted to 

the sub-distributor 

● Fully shock-hazard-protected 

● VDE-certified 

● Cable connection in the PSM rail for 

maximum planning flexibility 

lation are avoided, thanks to the modular 3 Power distribution module PDM 

design concept, since UPS capacities may 

be upgraded at any time as and when 

required. The adaptive concept allows you 

to invest as your requirements grow. 

Power management between IT racks 

Plug & play installation of a power supply 

in the IT rack with complete shock-hazardprotection 

means significantly reduced 

This modular rack-mounted concept keeps assembly costs plus a high level of invest- 

the purchasing and operating costs of ment confidence. 

redundant solutions low. As your performance 

requirements grow, the UPS grows 

with you, thanks to its flexible scalability – 

even in the most confined spaces, and with 

the system operational. Your benefits: Less 

capital tie-up, inexpensive expansion, and 

minimal space requirements. The high 

efficiency of the UPS of 95 % load, and in 

the partial load range from just 25 % load, 

ensures that operating costs in the data 

centre are kept to a minimum. 

Convincing benefits: 

● Cabled expansion 

● Shock-hazard protected plug & play 

system 

● Keyable connection 

● Modules may also be replaced by 

trained staff 

● Modules may be retrofitted with the 

system operational 

● VDE-certified 

● 19″ modules for sub-distribution of 40 


kW into server and network enclosures 

● “N+1” technology in a single rack ● 4 individually fused, 3-phase outlets 

● True rack-mounted modularity 

● Service-friendly, thanks to the modular 

layout, plus short MTTR 

● High level of efficiency 

● 8 – 40 kW modules 

● 200 kW per rack 

● Classification VFI-SS-111 

● Connected load 400 V/3~, max. 63 A 


Power 

Rittal IT power concept 

4 Power System Module PSM – 

intelligent power distribution inside the rack 

Power System Module PSM – 

power solutions that connect 

● Contact hazard-proof busbar 

● Redundant configuration thanks to two 

separate circuits 

● Load capacity up to 32 A with single-phase 

infeed, and up to 192 A with 3-phase infeed 

● Modules may be retrofitted with the system 

operational 

● Active modules feature individual slot 

switching with SNMP/HTTP and user 

management 

● Max. 42 slots in one 2 m system 

● Optimised cable management 


● Flexible and redundant layout 

● Installation without loss of U 

● Modules may be retrofitted with the system 

operational 

● Remote monitoring via web browser and 

SNMP 

95 

Power

Power 

Power 

Power System Module PSM 

4 

3 

3 

A 

B 

A 

C 

2 

D 

B 

1 

z 

A 

3 

C 

z 

Power System Module PSM up to 96 A 

Bar and plug-in modules 

Busbar shock-hazard-protected, 

fully wired, with two circuits, 

redundant, load capacity up to 

48 A or 96 A respectively. 

PSM – Installation without loss of U 

TE 7000 

The PSM busbar is secured 

between the base and roof 

frame of the TE 7000 using an 

adaptor. 

3 

z 

3 

The three principal IT power distribution components are extended 

with Rittal UPS components. Here is an overview: 

1 Power Distribution Rack 

PDR 

The sub-distributor rack to 

accommodate 4 PDM with 

1200 mm rack height and 8 PDM 

with 2000 mm. 

PDM and PDR, see page 97. 

2 Power Distribution Module 

PDM 

Power distribution for 482.6 mm 

(19″) racks. 3 U size, for connecting 

4 racks with 10 kW 

output each, 

see page 97. 

Power System Module PSM Plus, up to 192 A 

The benefits at a glance: 

● Dimensions and installation as 

with earlier PSM bars. 

● Double the current with the 

same dimensions. 

● 2 m busbar with four independent 

infeeds (A, B, C, D 

each 400 V/3~, 50/60 Hz, 

3x16A). 

● 6 slots per 2 m rail for plug-in 

modules. 

● Four integral connection 

cables. 

● Directly suitable for connecting 

to Rittal PDM. 

● Standard connection cable for 

CEEkon sockets. 

TS 8 

For attaching the busbar to the 

TS 8 enclosure frame, users can 

choose between an adjustable 

and a fixed installation kit. 

3 Power System Module PSM 

and PSM Plus 

Power distribution in the rack, 

with a three-phase, redundant 

configuration, see page 96. 

4 Modular Power Concept 

PMC 200 

The scalable UPS concept for 

a protected power supply, 

see page 104. 

Plug-in modules for busbars, in 

various country versions. May be 

retrofitted whilst the system is 

operational. 

Active design supports remote 

administration via HTTP and 

SNMP plus local current measurement 

and display in the rack. 

Redundancy or higher 

load capacity 

Circuits A and B are each supplied 

with three phases (2 x 3 x 

16 A). To change the circuit, 

rotate the plug-in module. 

Plug-in modules with two 

infeeds 

Modules with two infeeds are 

used on the busbar PSM Plus. 

This means that redundancy can 

now be achieved at module level. 

flexRack(i) 

Simply snap the busbar into the 

rack section, and it’s done. 

96 Rittal IT catalogue/Power

● Power Distribution Rack to 

accommodate a maximum of 

8 PDMs 

● Height 1.20 m for 4 PDMs and 

2 m height for 8 PDMs 

● PDM may be retrofitted whilst 

operational 

● A maximum of 32 racks may 

be fitted to the sub-distributor 

● Fully shock-hazard protected 

● Main switch in various 

options 1) : 

− Isolator switch 

− On-load isolator 

− Power circuit-breakers 

− RC circuit-breaker 


● Low-voltage distribution up to 

250 A 

1) Depending on the standards 

of the local power supply company 

Note: 

Observe the standards of the 

local power supply companies. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 




1 Power Distribution Rack PDR 

2 Power Distribution Module PDM 

Power Distribution Module 

PDM 

● 482.6 mm (19″) Power Distribution Module 

mechanically locked in the PDR 

● Scalable 

● Including master switch, optional RC circuitbreaker 

● 4 fused 3-phased outlets to the rack 

● 3 x 230 V/16 A per outlet 

● Connected load 400 V/3~, max. 63 A 


482.6 mm (19″) module, 3 U 

1 

2 



in RAL 7035 






Enclosure frame with door 

(without tubular door frame), 

rear panel, side panels and roof 

plate, levelling feet including 

base/plinth adaptor, earthing of 

all enclosure panels, busbars 

shock-hazard-protected, main 

switch integrated. 

Extended delivery times. 

Power 

Power Distribution Rack PDR 

2 Design Model No. DK 

PDM 482.6 mm (19″), 

4 outlets per 10 kW 

7857.320 

PDM 19″, 4 outlets, project-specific 7857.350 

Connection cable 

with 32 A CEEkon connector 

7857.321 

Also required: 

Plug & play connection cable 

to the server racks. 


Power Distribution Module PDM, 

see page 97. 



Power Distribution Rack PDR Packs of 

Possible number of PDM modules 4 8 

Dimensions mm1) 1 

2 

W 

800 

800 

H 

1200 

2000 

D 

500 

500 

Model No. DK 

Accessories 

1 7857.310 7857.300 

Base/plinth components 

Height 100 mm 1 set 8601.800 8601.800 


Height 200 mm 1 set 8602.800 8602.800 

Base/plinth trims 

Height 100 mm 1 set 8601.050 8601.050 

side 

Height 200 mm 1 set 8602.050 8602.050 


Length Packs of Model No. DK 

3 m 1 7857.130 

5 m 1 7857.150 

8 m 1 7857.180 

9 m 1 7857.190 

97 

Power

Power 

Power 

System network analysis 

System network analysis 

The quality of the energy supply is an important 

component of a functioning IT system. There are 

UPS protection systems available which can help. 

The quality of the energy supply from different 

power supply companies in conjunction with different 

IT applications may vary extremely widely. 

Rittal offers the network analysis system. It may be 

integrated into the Power Distribution Rack (PDR), 

where it will analyse the power infeed. 

The system performs network quality measurements 

to EN 50 160. It has a large illuminated 

display for the direct retrieval of measurement 

results. Furthermore, all information is available 

in the network via the integrated Web server. 

Evaluation software is also included with the 

supply, and is capable of reading the measurements 

via the network and analysing them to 

DIN EN 50 160 and EN 61 000-2-4. 

The electronic measuring device, which is 

equipped with 4 current and voltage inputs, 

records and digitises the effective values (RMS) 

of currents and voltages in a 15 – 75 Hz network. 

Based on the scanned values, the built-in microprocessor 

calculates the electric variables. For 

measurement in the three-phase system, the relevant 

voltage may be defined as a conductor-zero 

or conductor-conductor voltage. This voltage is 

used by the Rittal network analysis system to 

measure harmonics and to log transients and 

events, and for the flickermeter. 

Measurement functions: 

● Automatic adjustment to a network frequency 

of 15 … 75 Hz 

● Measurement intervals of 10 (50 Hz) or 12 

(60 Hz) period (200 ms) 

● Contiguous scanning and calculation of the 

following measurements: Voltage L-N, neutralpoint 

displacement voltage and asymmetry 

L1...L3, voltage L-L, frequency, current, aggregate 

current L1..L3 and L1...L3+N, active 

power, reactive power, apparent power, power 

factor, distortion reactive power, fundamental 

power, cosphi, phase shift, work of main and 

auxiliary system, reactive power demand 

(capacitive and inductive) 1..50 harmonic of 

current and voltage, distortion factor (THD) of 

current and voltage, short- and long-term flickermeter 

readings, level of ripple-control signals. 


Dimensions W x H x D: 144 x 144 x 90 mm 

Auxiliary voltage: 

95..265 V AC; 100..370 V DC; 25 VA 

Voltage measurement: 

L-N 0..500 V AC; 0.2 VA; 15 – 75 Hz 

L-L 0..870 V AC; 0.2 VA; 15 – 75 Hz 

Current measurement: 

5 A (1 A), (larger values via converter) 

Operating temperature range: –10 to +55°C 

I/O: 

Digital inputs: 8 

Digital outputs: 5 


IP 20 

Measurement in the four-conductor network, with main and auxiliary measurement 

PE 

N 

L1 

L2 

L3 

Voltage 1 – 3 

N L1 L2 L3 

Measurement 

Current 1 – 3 

1k 1l 2k 2l 3k 3l 

System network analysis Available on request. 

Current 4 

4k 4l 

Voltage 4 

PE N 


A 

B 

1 1 



Busbar, current carrying capacity up to 96 A 

per rack 

The ever-expanding power requirements of modern 

IT infrastructures demand refined solutions for 

power distribution inside the racks. This leads to 

an associated requirement for additional sockets. 

The new “intelligent power distribution system” 

from Rittal significantly reduces cabling and 

assembly work. 

The modular system facilitates basic configuration 

of the racks, thanks to a vertical support rail 

with 3-phase infeed. The various insert modules to 

supply the active components may be snap-fitted 

into the support rail. This can even be done whilst 

the system is operational, because the support 

section is shock-hazard protected. 

The various modules, earthing pins, IEC 320 etc. 

may be inserted into the support rail in any combination. 

This is easily achieved, even by non-electricians, 

thanks to the shock-hazard-protected 

plug & play system. 

Technical specifications/benefits: 

● 3-phase construction with a maximum current 

of 3 x 16 A. 

● A redundant three-phase infeed with 3 x 16 A 

may also be added. 

● The redundant circuit is completely separate 

from the 3 phases of the support rail. 

● Each plug-in module picks off a phase on the 

support rail, either from infeed A or from the 

redundant infeed B, depending on the direction 

of connection. 

Busbar 

Power 


● Modules may be retrofitted whilst the system is 

operational. 

● Plug-in modules may be equipped with integral 

overcurrent protection, so that only the affected 

module is deactivated in the event of an excessively 

high current. The other modules remain 

operational. 

● Overvoltage protection may be integrated into 

the supply line. 

● Support rail may be integrated into the vertical 

frame section of the flexRack(i) without additional 

equipment. 

The vertical support rail allows the slots to be 

used flexibly across the entire enclosure height, 

and configured in a redundant manner via separate 

power infeed to the individual modules. 


Busbar with connection socket, assembly parts 

and operating instructions. Without cable. 


Connection cable, see page 102. 

Plug-in modules, see page 100. 

Note: 

Observe the country-specific connection data. 

Reg No. A592 

For enclosure height mm Number of modules 

EU type 

Model No. DK 

US type 

1200 4 7856.010 7856.0501) 2000 7 7856.020 7856.0601) Also required: 

Mounting kit 

For static installation 7856.022 

For TS 

Adjustable, 

for open 19″ level 

7856.023 

For TE For static installation 7000.684 


PSM rail with measurement 

Busbar with integral output measurement 

Display and monitoring of the complete threephase 

connection current and the power per rail. 

The display is local. 

In conjunction with CMC, the rail may be remotely 

administered and configured using standard protocols 

(SNMP, HTTP). 

The following active functions are provided: 

● Local display, legibility is independent from the 

installation position. 

● Measurement and monitoring of the current per 

phase. Min./max. limits may be set. Measurement 

range 0 – 16 A. 

● Measuring and monitoring of the voltage per 

phase. Min./max. limits may be set. Measurement 

range 0 – 250 V. 

● Alarm notification via a flashing display. 

● Remote administration of the PSM rail, editing 

and monitoring of remote limits, SNMP trap 

message in case of alarm. 

1 Simple connection via RJ connector 

For enclosure height 

mm 

Maximum no. 

of modules 

2000 6 

Model No. DK 

7856.016 


Busbar with connection socket, assembly parts 

and operating instructions. Without cable. 

Note: 


Accessories: 

Recommended CMC-TC accessories, 

see page 166. 


Connection cable, see page 102. 

Plug-in modules, see page 100. 

Mounting kit, see page 99. 

In stand-alone mode without CMC-TC, a separate 

power pack DK 7201.210 with connection cables 

is required, see page 167. 

99 

Power

Power 

Power 


PSM rail for 120/208 V 

With coded circuits 120/208 V, 50/60 Hz, for 

applications in North America. 

The circuits are preset. 

Circuit 1 may be used for 208 V/3~ and only with 

the coded C19 PSM modules in the table. 

Circuit 2 may be used for 120 V/1~ and only with 

the coded C13 modules in the table. 

Plug-in modules PSM 

for busbar version EU and US. 

Length 250 mm. 


Design 

Length 

mm 

Model No. 

DK 

PSM busbar 

with coded circuits 

2000 7856.051 

PSM module C13 coded 7856.052 

PSM module C19 coded 7856.053 

Plug-in modules 

Plug-in module Number of sockets Without overcurrent protection With overcurrent protection 

EN 60 320 C13 6 7856.080 7856.070 

EN 60 320 C13 4 – 7856.2202) D/NL/A earthing-pin 4 7856.100 7856.090 

F/B 4 7856.1201) 7856.1101) USA 5 7856.1401) 7856.130 

UK 3 7856.1601) 7856.1501) CH 5/4 7856.1901) 7856.1801) EN 60 320 C19 4 7856.230 – 

EN 60 320 C13 red 6 7856.082 – 

Earthing-pin socket red 4 7856.240 – 

1) Extended delivery times. 

Other modules available on request. 

2) With individual overcurrent fusing. 

Cable lock PSM 

for all modules with EN 60 320 C13 connector 

configurations 

The bar, developed especially for the PSM 

system, can hold two connection cables. 

In this way, all connection cables of the terminal 

equipment are protected against accidental 

disconnection of the power supply. 

Two bars are needed for two cables. 

Light module PSM 

for use as a portable lamp 

The PSM light module is compatible with all PSM 

busbars. Equipped with a powerful NiMH battery, 

the module may be removed and used as a 

portable lamp. Thanks to the integral magnet, the 

module is easily attached to any metallic surface 

inside the rack. 

The light module is equipped with an electricitysaving 

LED lamp to allow a long illumination time 

of up to 4 h. 

To recharge, the module is inserted into a free slot 

in the PSM bar. 

Applicable to DK 7856.230: 

E 215 843 

Design 

Length 

m 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

Bar 


20 7856.013 

C13/C14 

Connector/jack 

0.51) 2 7856.014 

1) Other lengths available on request. 

Note: 

Optimum locking function only occurs with 

connection cable DK 7856.014. 

Design Model No. DK 

Light module PSM 7856.210 

Note: 

Please observe the connection voltage (230 V) 

of the busbar.


Active PSM, 4-way 

The module has 4 x IEC 320 C13 sockets and an 

integral overload tripping device. 

The following active functions are additionally 

achieved: 

● 2-digit local LED 7-segment current display on 

the module. Legibility is independent from the 


● Measuring and monitoring of the current per 

module. Min./max. limits may be set. 

Measurement range 0 – 16 A. 

● Alarm indication via a flashing 7-segment 

display. 

● Monitoring of the overload fuse. 

● Modules may be combined via the bus system, 

thereby enabling sequential activation. 

● In conjunction with the CMC-TC, the modules 

may be activated and deactivated via HTTP 

and SNMP. The 4 jacks are always activated 

and deactivated together. 

The 4 free channels of the Processing Unit II 

(PU II) DK 7320.100 can be switched with up to 

4 active PSM systems in each case. 

The active PSM does not require any separate 

power pack in conjunction with PU II. 

Active PSM 8-way, 

individually switchable 

The module has 8 current outlets with IEC 320 

C13 slots. Each of the 8 slots is individually 

switchable (via the CMC-TC system). Furthermore, 

a current indicator, circuit display and thermal 

overload protection are integrated into the 

module. The module is twice the length of a 

standard PSM module, so that a maximum of 

2 modules may be inserted into a 1200 mm long 

PSM rail, and a maximum of 3 modules into a 

2000 mm long PSM rail. 

Operate the module without CMC-TC: 

For operation of the module, power pack 

DK 7201.210 and a connection cable are needed. 

Up to 2/3 modules may be operated in one PSM 

rail (1200/2000 mm) with one power pack. 

Available functions: Current display, circuit display 

and automatic selective activation 

Operate the module with CMC-TC: 

No additional power pack is needed; the module 

is supplied with power via the CMC-TC system. 

Up to 4 x 4 modules may be connected to one 

Processing Unit II (DK 7320.100). 

Available functions: Current display, circuit display, 

automatic selective activation, via CMC-TC 

in the network: Individual switching of the 

8 current outlets, current limit monitoring, delayed 

switching of the individual current outlets, status 

display of the module. 

Recommended accessory list CMC-TC: 

● DK 7320.100 CMC-TC Processing Unit II 

● DK 7320.425 CMC-TC power pack 24 V, 

input 100 – 230 V AC 

● DK 7320.440 CMC-TC 1 U mounting unit 

● DK 7320.472 CMC-TC connection cable 

sensor unit 2 m 

● DK 7200.210 CMC-TC connection cable D 

230 V AC (depending on country version) 

● DK 7200.221 CMC-TC programming cable 

Power 


Design Packs of Model No. DK 

4-way 1 7856.200 

● Remote administration of the power supply, 

editing and monitoring of remote limits, SNMP 

trap message in case of alarm. 

● 4 IEC 320 C13 sockets per module. 

Material: 

Aluminium section with plastic cover 


1 module (max. 10 A per module), 

10 A integral overload tripping device, 

1 bus cable, 

1 infeed cable 24 V DC, 

1 adaptor for power pack 24 V DC. 


A separate power pack (100 – 240 V AC/24 V DC) 

is required for stand-alone operation without 

CMC-TC (DK 7201.210) and the relevant 

connection cables, see page 167. 


8-way 7856.201 

Description of functions: 

● 2-digit local LED 7-segment current display on 

the module. Legibility is independent from the 



module. Min./max. limits may be set. 


● Alarm messages are indicated via a flashing 

7-segment display. 

● Monitoring of the thermo-fuse. 

● Modules may be combined via the bus system, 

to enable selective activation. 

● In conjunction with the CMC-TC, the 8 individual 

current outlets of the modules may be 

activated and deactivated individually via HTTP 

and SNMP. 

● Remote administration of the power supply, 

editing and monitoring of remote limits, SNMP 

trap messages in case of alarm. 

● 8 IEC 320 C13 sockets per module. 

● User administration. 

Material: 




1 bus cable, 


1 adaptor for power pack 24 V DC. 




CMC-TC (DK 7201.210) and the relevant 

connection cables, see page 167. 

101 

Power

Power 

Power 


Measurement module PSM 

For power measurement of existing PSM or for 

new installations. 

Suitable for for PSM busbar: 

DK 7856.010, DK 7856.020, DK 7856.050, 

DK 7856.060. 

Note: 

Detailed information, see PSM rail with measurement, 

page 99. 

Overvoltage protection PSM 

Is connected upstream of the busbar. 

● Fine fuse 

● Connection: 

Socket Wago X-Com 

Plug Wago X-Com 

Connection cable for PSM rail 


1 7856.019 

Overvoltage protection Packs of Model No. DK 

With adaptor connector 1 7856.170 

Connection cable, 3-phase 


CEEkon 5-pole/16 A 

US type NEMA 

3 m 

1 

1 

7856.025 

7856.0551) Connection cable, single-phase 

CEEkon 3-pole/16 A 

Connection cable, UPS, single-phase 

3 m 1 7856.026 

C14/X-Com 

Connection cable C19/C20 

3 m 1 7856.027 

16 A 

Connection cable C13/C14 

2 m 1 7200.217 

16 A 0.5 m2) 2 7856.014 

1) Delivery times on request. 2) Other length available on request. 



Power System Module 

PSM Plus 

Current carrying capacity up to 192 A per rack 

The successful Rittal PSM concept, comprising a 

busbar with redundant configuration and threephase 

infeed, now offers an additional variant. 

The external dimensions remain the same, as do 

the familiar attachment options. 

By integrating two further three-phase circuits the 

PSM now has four independent three-phase 

infeeds. Each of the feeds can be supplied with 

up to 3 x 16 A. In total, this produces a maximum 

of 192 A. 

This PSM is used particularly in applications with 

highly-integrated blade server applications. 

Thanks to the design with four independent 

infeeds, it is possible to configure a redundant, 

high-availability power supply system for IT racks. 

With all the benefits of the familiar PSM: Shockhazard-protected; 

may be retrofitted whilst the 

system is operational. 

The benefits at a glance: 

● 2 m PSM rail with four independent infeeds, 

400 V/3~, 50/60 Hz, 3 x 16 A. 

● With four integral connection cables, 

5 x 2.5 mm and Wieland GST connectors. 

● Directly suitable for connecting to Rittal PDM. 

● Easily integrated into existing applications with 

standard extension cables. 

● 6 slots per 2 m rail. 

● Attachment with no loss of U in the rack. 

Power 

Power System Module PSM Plus 

Note: 

There are modules with two infeeds for use of the 

new PSM Plus rail. This means that redundancy 

can now be achieved at module level. 

PSM modules DK 7856.070 to DK 7856.240 may 

also be used. The second infeed option of the rail 

is not used. 

The following modules are available: 

● 6-way C13, 

two infeeds with max. 16 A per 3 x C13 

● 4-way C19, 

two infeeds with max. 16 A per 2 x C19 

● 2-way earthing-pin, 

two infeeds with max. 16 A per earthing-pin 

socket 

Busbar 


mm 

Number of modules Model No. DK 

2000 

Mounting kit 

6 7856.015 

Model No. DK 

For TS For static installation 

Adjustable, 

7856.022 

for freely accessible 482.6 mm (19″) 

level 

7856.023 

For TE For static installation 7000.684 

Plug-in modules (each half of the modules is supplied with one infeed) 

Number of sockets Without miniature fuse 

EN 60 320 C13 

6 

3 x per infeed 

4 


7856.081 

– 

EN 60 320 C19 

4 


2 


7856.231 

– 

Earthing-pin socket 


2 


7856.101 

Type Length Model No. DK 

3-phase 

Three-phase connector EN 60 309 

mains connection cable, 

on Wieland GST socket, 

7856.018 

EN 60 309 

length 5 m 

Extension cable 

Wieland GST socket 

on Wieland GST 18 connector, 

length 5 m 

7856.017 

103 

Power

Power 

Power 

UPS, Rittal Modular Power Concept – PMC 200 

Maximum availability, 

modularity and 

a compact design! 

Rittal PMC 200 ensures optimum availability for critical app- 

lications by combining modularity (flexible, unlimited scala- 

bility and redundancy) with decentralised parallel architec- 

ture or DPA (redundant protection without “single point of 

failure”). The UPS modules are transformerless, genuine 

online, double-conversion UPSs with static bypass and clas- 

sification code VFI-SS-111. 

This modular concept keeps the purchasing and operating 

costs of redundant solutions low. As your performance 

requirements grow, the UPS grows with you, thanks to its 

flexible scalability – even in the most confined spaces, and 

with the system operational. Your benefits: Less capital tie-up, 

inexpensive expansion, and minimal space requirements. 

The new UPS generation: Rittal PMC 200 

20 

20 

20 

UPS rack UPS module Battery packs PMC 200 

Your individual UPS based on 

standard modules 

Rack plus UPS modules plus 

battery packs produce a customised 

UPS to suit your current 

requirements. 

The best UPS concept for you is an “individual concept” 

The uninterrupted power supply 

to your data centre and all your 

IT is more than just a question of 

kilowatts, autonomy and UPS 

redundancy. 

Output density up to 200 kW 

(160 kW redundant) in one rack. 

For this reason, we consider 

your individual UPS requirements 

in great depth in order to 

offer you optimum protection at 

an attractive price. 


20 

20 

20 

Might you need more in 

future? 

No problem: The system supports 

modular expansion of performance 

and autonomy whilst 

operational! 

Thanks to the cost benefits 

afforded by mass production of 

the UPS modules, individual 

configuration produces a highly 

beneficial symbiosis for you.


Power 


N + 1 = Perfect redundancy in a rack with PMC 200 

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 

40 

40 

Example 1 

● 1 + 1 (40 kW + 40 kW) 

Advantage: Just two UPS 

modules, minimal space 

requirements. 

Disadvantage: 100 % of the 

required output must be provided 

as redundancy. 

20 

20 

20 

Three examples of a 40 kW UPS with redundancy: 

All modules operate in parallel mode. In all cases, one module may fail without impairing the connected 

load. 

 

Example 2 

● 2 + 1 (2 x 20 kW + 20 kW) 

Advantage: Compact and 

energy-efficient. 

Extremely small installation space with PMC 2000 

Maximum energy efficiency with PMC 200 

Redundancy 

Power 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

Example 3 

● 4 + 1 (4 x 12 kW + 12 kW), 

an additional battery rack is 

needed for batteries. 

Advantage: Only 12 kW needs 

to be buffered for redundancy. 

Disadvantage: Greater space 

Energy saving 

requirements. 

We will be happy to work with you to project-plan the exact solution best-suited to your 

individual requirements. 


PMC 200 

120 120 

40 40 40 40 

Maximum performance density in one free-standing enclosure! 

In examples 1 and 2 we compare 

the space requirements of 

two non-modular systems for 

120 kW output plus redundancy 

with the modular UPS system 

Rittal PMC 200 (example 3), 

which is configured according 

to the 4 + 1 concept with five 

32 kW modules. 

Benefits thanks to minimised construction size and modular design. 


32 

32 

32 

32 

32 

The minimised construction size 

of the Rittal PMC 200 concept 

allows three modules plus battery 

packs or five modules each 

with up to 40 kW in one Rittal 

482.6 mm (19″) TS 8 UPS enclosure. 

Minimal energy requirement means low costs and minimal pollution: 

With the PMC 200 concept, you not only protect the critical load, but also safeguard the operating ratio of 

the UPS. Let us advise you to find the most suitable concept. 

Example 1 

This 120 kVA + 120 kW solution 

requires the most output for 

redundancy. 

Example 2 

This variant with three 40 kVA 

modules only requires 1 /3 of the 

output compared with example 

1 for redundancy purposes. 

PMC 200 is an excellent solution with regard to energy and space requirements 

and also with a view to future expansion. 

Example 3 

With five 32 kW modules only 1 /4 

is required for the buffer output 

of redundancy, compared with 

a single redundant 120 kW UPS. 

However, there is no space left 

in the rack for battery packs, 

i.e. an additional battery enclosure 

is needed. 

105 

Power

Power 

Power 


Flexible scalability with PMC 200 

20 

Super-fast service with PMC 200 

20 

20 

20 

20 

20 

Simple expansion 

while operational 

Output may be expanded from 

2 to 3, 4 or 5 UPS modules via 

“hot swap” with the system operational, 

without having to switch 

to bypass mode. 

Extremely short MTTR 

(Mean Time To Repair) 

If servicing is required, a 12 kW 

or 20 kW module may be 

20 

replaced with a 20 kW module, 

and a 32 kW or 40 kW module 

with a 40 kW module. This simplifies 

the logistics and ensures 

fast, flexible, cost-effective 

servicing. 


20 

20 

20 

20 

For four modules or more, an 

additional battery rack will be 

needed. The autonomy may also 

be flexibly modified to suit your 

requirements. 

PowerDecider 

To obtain maximum benefits from the scalability of 

the modular Rittal PMC 200 UPS system and to 

avoid incorrect sizing and thus unnecessary 

additional costs, Rittal offers a professional power 

determination service. 

PowerDecider 

Service includes: 

● Measurement of the power supply (voltage, 

current, frequency, apparent power, effective 

power and reactive power, asymmetries and 

harmonics, etc.) 

● Recording of voltage drops and increases, 

transients, interruptions and fast voltage 

changes 

● Determination of your precise kVA and kW 

requirements 

● Execution within ten days after receiving the 

order 

● Data acquisition period: 2 hours 

● Report with results/evaluations: 

within five working days 

The Rittal PMC 200 modular 

system combines flexible adaptation 

to customer-specific 

requirements with investment 

reliability and a high level of 

availability. 

PowerDecider 

Model No. DK 

on request 

PowerDecider Plus on request 

PowerDecider Plus 

Service includes: 

● Measurement of the power supply (voltage, 

current, frequency, apparent power, effective 

power and reactive power, asymmetries and 

harmonics, etc.) 

● Recording of voltage drops and increases, 

transients, interruptions and fast voltage 

changes 

● Determination of your precise kVA and kW 

requirements 

● Execution within five days after receiving the 

order 

● Data acquisition period: at least three days 

● Report with results/evaluations: 

within three working days

20 

20 

20 

UPS racks: 

Battery racks: 

UPS racks: 

Battery racks: 

Note: 

This table contains only sample configurations. 

We would be happy to work with you to project plan your individual solution. 


W 600 x H 2000 x D 1000 mm 

W 600 x H 2000 x D 1000 mm 

W 800 x H 2000 x D 1000 mm 

W 600 x H 2000 x D 1000 mm 

Minimum floor space is required 

by a rack with three modules 

(2 + 1 redundancy) and batteries 

with autonomy integrated into 

a single rack. 

Power 


The Rittal PMC 200 allows the 

integration of up to 5 modules 

(4 + 1 redundancy) in one rack. 

For this configuration, an additional 

battery rack is always 

Examples of 12 and 20 kW module configurations 

and autonomies 

Redundancy without with without with without with without with without with 

UPS rack/battery rack 1/– – 1/– 1/– 1/– 1/– 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 

Number of UPS modules 1 – 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 

PMC 12 module type, power in kW 12 – 24 12 36 24 48 36 60 48 

Battery autonomy1) 60 – 14 14 14 14 24 24 24 24 



40 

40 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

40 

40 

40 

40 

20 

20 

20 

UPS rack UPS module Battery packs PMC 200 

Examples of 32 and 40 kW module configurations 

and autonomies 

required. The autonomy may be 

flexibly adapted to suit your 

requirements. 

Redundancy without with without with without with without with without with 

UPS rack/battery rack 1/– – 1/– 1/– 1/– 1/– 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 

Number of UPS modules 1 – 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 



PMC 40 module type, power in kW 40 – – – – – 160 120 200 160 

Battery autonomy1) 15 – – – – – 9 9 9 9 

1) Minutes/modules with cos ϕ 1.0/Autonomy may be extended to order. 


20 

20 

20 

107 

Power

Power 

Power 


1. Rectifier data 

Module range Up to 100 kW Up to 200 kW 

Module types 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 

Output per module kVA 10 15 20 25 30 40 45 

Output per module kW 8 12 16 20 24 32 40 

Nominal input voltage V 3 x 380/220 V+N, 3 x 400/230 V+N, 3 x 415/240 V+N 

Input voltage tolerance V 

3 x 306/177 V to 3 x 464/264 V for < 100 % load 



Input frequency Hz 35 – 70 

Power factor input PF = 0.99 100 % load 

Start-up current A limited by soft start/max. IN 

Distortion factor, THDI Sine-wave THDI = < 3 % 100 % load 

Input with charged battery 

and rated output 

kW 8.4 12.6 17.4 21 26 34 42 

Input with battery charging 

and rated output 

kW 9.3 13.8 19.2 22.9 28.2 38 45.8 

2. Battery data 


Module types 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 

No. of 12 V batteries No. 30 – 50 40 – 50 40 – 50 30 – 50 40 – 50 

Maximum charging current A 6 A standard 10 A standard 

Battery charging curve Ripple free; IU (DIN 41 773) 

Temperature-controlled battery charging Standard (temp. sensor optional) 

Battery test Automatic and periodic (adjustable) 

Battery type Maintenance-free lead and NiCd 

3. Output data 


Module types 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 

Output per module kVA 10 15 20 25 30 40 45 

Output per module kW 8 12 16 20 24 32 40 

Output current IN at cosphi 1.0 (400 V) A 11.6 17.4 23.2 29 35 46.5 58 

Output voltage V 3 x 380/220 V or 3 x 400/230 V or 3 x 415/240 V 

Output voltage stability 

Static: < ± 1 % 

Dynamic (step load 0 % – 100 % or 100 % – 0 %: < ± 4 % 

Output voltage distortion 

With linear load: < ± 2 % 

With non-linear load (EN 62 040-3:2001) < ± 4 % 

Output frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 

Output frequency tolerance 

Synchronous to input, network-led: < ± 2 % 

or: < ± 4 % 

Asynchronous quartz oscillator: ± 0.1 % 

Bypass mode Nominal input voltage at 3 x 400 V or 190 V – 264 V ph-N: ± 15 % 

Admissible load unbalance 

(all 3 phases are controlled independently) 

% 100 

Phase angle tolerance 

(with 100 % unbalanced load) 

Deg. ± 0 

Overload capacity in inverter mode 

125 % load: 10 min. 

150 % load: 60 sec. 

Short-circuit capacity A 

Inverter: 2 x IN during 250 ms 

Bypass: 10 x IN during 10 ms 

Crest factor 3 : 1 

Efficiency AC – AC 

at 100 %/75 %/50 %/25 % load (cosphi 1.0) 

% 96/95/95/95 

Eco-mode efficiency at 100 % load % 98 


Output characteristics at various power factors 

kW/kVA 

50 

45 

40 

35 

30 

25 

PMC 200: (40 kW) 

– 0.85 


– 0.90 

cap. 

Power 


– 0.95 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75 

cosphi. ind. 

4. Standards 

Safety EN 62 040-1-1: 2003, EN 60 950-1: 2006 

EMC 

2006, EN 61 000-3-2: 2000, EN 61 000-3-3: 2006, 

EN 61 000-6-2: 2006, EN 61 000-6-4: 2002 

Classification code VFI SS 111 EN 62 040-3: 2002 

Product conformity CE 

Protection rating IP 20 

5. General technical specifications 


Module types 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 

Noise level at 100 %/50 % load dB (A) 55/49 57/49 57/49 57/49 59/51 63/53 63/53 

Ambient temperature UPS °C 0 – 40 

Ambient temperature for batteries (recommended) °C 20 – 25 

Storage temperature °C –25 to +70 

Battery storage time at ambient temperature Max. 6 months 

Max. height (above sea level) 1000 m (3300 ft) without de-rating (max. 3000 m (10000 ft)) 

Relative humidity Max. 95 % (non-condensing) 

Accessibility 

Total accessibility from the front for servicing and maintenance 

(side, no access required from the roof or rear) 

Siting Min. 20 cm spacing from the wall (required for cooling) 

Input and output wiring. From the front, below 

Efficiency AC – AC 

at 100 %/75 %/50 %/25 % load (cosphi 1.0) 

% 96/95/95/95 

Eco-mode efficiency at 100 % % 98 

kVA 

kW 

109 

Power

Power 

Power 

Static transfer switch 

Source 1 

Source 2 

Load 

Static Transfer Switch (STS) 

The use of a static transfer switch allows “singlecorded 

devices” (devices that have only one 

power pack) to be operated with a redundant 

power supply. STS has two infeeds that are 

switched automatically. The switching time is 

< 5 ms. This ensures that sensitive devices can be 

operated without interference. The “Break before 

Make” transfer ensures that the load is 

not fed concurrently from two sources. 

Operation: 

The operating panel mounted on the housing front 

shows all central functions and messages of the 

Static Transfer Switch. All messages may also be 

evaluated with floating contacts. The STS may 

optionally be supplemented with a quick-change 

frame equipped with an external bypass. This 

function allows the load to be switched manually 

onto the mains for servicing purposes. 


STS 16 A without serial interface 7857.070 

STS 16 A with serial interface 7857.080 

STS 16 A with serial interface 

and quick-change frame 

7857.090 

STS 20 A with serial interface 

and quick-change frame 

7857.100 

Connectivity: 

The optional SNMP card makes it possible for the 

Static Transfer Switch STS to be integrated into a 

network management system. The web server 

integrated in the SNMP card provides passwordprotected 

access to the STS using a web 

browser. 


STS with superior switching load, 

quick-change frame with external bypass. 

Note: 

Up-to-date information such as operating instructions, 

software update and product information 

may be found at www.rimatriX5.com 


Nominal current strength 16 A and 20 A 

Voltage 1-phase 120/220/230/240 V 

Tolerance of input voltage Adjustable (±15 % as standard) 

Frequency 50 or 60 Hz 

Short-circuit resistance up to 20/15 IN according to the nominal current strength 

Admissible Crest factor up to 4 

Changeover Phase/zero conductor 

Transfer mode Synchronous/asynchronous without overlapping the current sources 

Switch-over time < 5 ms 


Supported protocols of the 

Ethernet interface: 

● HTTP/Java/UPSMON interface 

● WAP 

● Remote Program Start 

● SNMP 

● SMTP/SMS 

● Mod Bus over IP 

● Telnet/FTP 

● Log file 

● Snap-in for HP Open View 


Monitoring of UPS and 

Static Transfer Switch (STS) 

This monitoring and management software can be 

used to manage all active components and power 

from RimatriX5. One interface for all single and 

3-phase UPSs and for the Static Transfer Switch is 

typical of an integrated operating concept. If an 

emergency generating unit is being used, it too 

may be monitored with the SNMP adaptor. 

SNMP functionality 

May easily be integrated into an existing SNMP 

monitoring system. 

An additional MIB, in addition to the standard 

MIB RFC1628, handles the display of all parameters. 

An optional “snap-in” for HP Open View 

is additionally available. 

E-mail functionality 

The integrated mail client can be used to send 

status e-mails to the administrator. The configured 

event/alarm management provides a tool 

that allows the filtering of messages. 

Web functionality 

The integrated web interface shows all relevant 

information for the UPS or STS at a glance. Password 

protection prevents unauthorised access to 

the SNMP card. The integrated NTP client handles 

the synchronous operation of all plants. 

Functional diagram of the SNMP card 

Single-phase UPS 

3-phase UPS 

STS 

Optional generator 

UNIX 

AS400 

Windows 

Mac OS 

OS/2 

Novell 

Linux 

Power 

Software 

The optional PPP interface allows you to access 

the SNMP card from outside the intranet or supports 

access to the SNMP card if the network 

infrastructure is not available. 

In addition to the web interface, the UPSMON 

program can also be used to monitor the UPS. 

UPSMON is available for the following operating 

systems: 

Windows, Unix, Novell Netware, OS/2, MacOSX. 

The servers connected to the UPS may be shut 

down with the aid of a service controlled by the 

UPS. All standard operating systems are supported. 

An optional software solution supports 

targeted shutdown of the servers to give greater 

autonomy to key services. 

SNMP adaptor 

TCP/IP 

Intranet 

Shutdown + 

Messaging 

Fire extinguishing 

system 

Fire reporting 

system 

Air-conditioning 

system 

Relay in 

Relay out 

Terminal (setup) 

PPP (modem) 

Mod Bus RS 485 

(Facility Management) 

RS 232 

Smart Protocol 

111 

Power

112

Cool arguments 

against climate stress 

Rittal high performance cooling and liquid cooling packages 

are important links in the IT security chain. As packaging 

densities continue to rise, active rack control is indispensa- 

ble. Added to this is the fact that IT racks are often posi- 

tioned in rooms without adequate air conditioning. This 

means stress for the sensitive electronics. Consequently, 

active and direct enclosure climate control is the optimum 

cooling choice. The benefits are twofold: When climate 

control and ventilation are ideal, computing processes are 

able to run efficiently. This means an uninterrupted data flow, 

which in turn translates into non-stop productivity. 

Passive cooling 

The perforations in the doors or openings 

in the base/plinth and roof ensure 

maximum air throughput via convection 

in conjunction with the equipment 

fans. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Cooling 

Active cooling (room) 

The fans built into the rack ensure a permanent 

through-flow. In this way, heat 

energy is emitted directly to the ambient 

air. Specifically for low and medium output 

ranges. 

Active cooling (rack) 

This variant allows reliable climate control 

of sealed racks even in difficult 

ambient parameters such as heat and 

dust. Ideal for medium output ranges. 

Cooling 114 

Passive cooling ..............................................................................114 

Active cooling ................................................................................115 

High-performance cooling .............................................................116 

Applications ...................................................................................117 

Examples .......................................................................................118 

Rack-mounted cooling units ..........................................................120 

Rack-mounted fans.........................................................................121 

Centrifugal fans...............................................................................122 

Fan systems ...................................................................................123 

Rittal Liquid Cooling Package ........................................................129 

Recooling systems..........................................................................133 

Fan-and-filter units ..........................................................................135 

Roof-mounted cooling units............................................................138 

Air/water heat exchangers .............................................................139 

Accessories ....................................................................................141 

Filter mats .......................................................................................148 

Climate control checks ..................................................................150 

High-performance cooling 

High heat losses resulting from high 

packaging densities (e.g. blade 

server technology) are reliably and 

efficiently dissipated on a rack-specific 

basis using products from the 

liquid cooling package (LCP) family. 

113 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 



(use of the ambient 

air) 

The air cooled via the regular 

ambient air or via the building’s airconditioning 

system is routed into 

the raised floor for rack cooling. 

Doors with 78 % open surface 

area (diagram 1) or openings 

in the base/plinth and roof (diagram 

2) ensure maximum air 

throughput via convection in 

conjunction with the fans. 

1 

Horizontal ventilation 

A high air throughput, stylish 

design and outstanding security 

are provided by the doors (with 

78 % free surface area per door) 

of the server racks. 

2 

Vertical ventilation 

Ventilation base/plinth, roof vent 

and slotted component shelves 

ensure heat dissipation. 

1 Horizontal ventilation 

2 Vertical ventilation 

3 Air baffle system (raised floor) 

4 Computer room 

air conditioner (CRAC) 

Air baffle system 

Cool air from the hollow base is 

routed over the base/plinth and 

distributed via the door in a targeted 

manner. 

114 Rittal IT catalogue/Cooling 

3 

4

Active cooling 

(use of the ambient 

air) 

Fan systems for active cooling 

amplify the air exchange inside 

the rack and use ambient air for 

cooling. 

Active, rack-related 

cooling 

By contrast, rack-specific, active 

cooling is capable of reducing 

the interior temperature of the 

rack to below the ambient temperature. 

This cooling technique 

is very effective with an 

appropriate room volume and in 

industrial environments. 


6 

3 

5 

Fan roofs 

Various designs and outputs, 

extendible with fan kits. Fast 

assembly tailored to racks. 

Roof-mounted cooling unit 

(office application) 

Useful cooling output 1100 W 

at an extremely low noise level. 

4 

2 

1 


Quiet performance (1500 m 3 /h) 

for office applications 

Centrifugal fan/rack-mounted 

fan 

Rack-mounted cooling units 

482.6 mm (19″) 

Useful cooling output 1000 W, 

simple installation in the 

482.6 mm (19″) level. 

Cooling 

Active cooling 

1 Fan roof 

2 Roof-mounted fan 

3 Fan cross-member 

4 Roof-mounted cooling unit 

5 Rack-mounted cooling unit 19″ 

6 

Air/water heat exchanger 

Fan cross member 

For the perforated door of TS 8 

server racks. 

Air throughput up to 1200 m 3 /h. 

Air/water heat exchangers 

These prevent the installation 

room from heating up. A link to a 

recooling system as cold water 

supply is essential. 

115 

Cooling

Cooling 

4 

Cooling 

High-performance cooling 

3 

12 

7 

11 


9 

8 

Everything from a single 

source: 

RimatriX5 IT cooling systems 

offer the high performance of 

comprehensive system integration. 

This also includes a complete 

pipeline network. 

1 Recooling systems in a 

redundant design 

2 Distributor and (where applicable) 

pump station 

3 Data centre 

4 LCP air/water heat exchangers 

for dissipating high heat 

loads 

2 

1 

1 

5 

10 

5 Twin pump unit for redundant 

operation 

6 Free cooling – saves energy 

by using cool winter air 

7 Cooling medium buffer store 

8 Water/water heat exchanger 

9 Emergency water supply 

10 Use of the waste heat 

(district heat, process heat) 

11 Computer room 

air conditioner (CRAC) 

12 

Central control and monitoring 

of all components 

6 

0˚

Emergency 

water supply 

Free 

cooling 

Heat use 


LCP Plus 

LCP Extend 

Recooling system 

Control 

Distribution 

LCP Standard 

Water/water 

heat 

exchanger 

Bayable with TS 8 server racks 

As the height and depth are 

identical, it may be bayed either 

in the middle of an enclosure 

suite or at the end, for added 

assembly and service friendliness. 

Up to 40 kW useful cooling 

output 

Useful cooling outputs of 30 kW 

(rack height 2000 mm) or 40 kW 

(rack height 2400 mm) are 

achieved with 6 or 8 high-per- 

Installation while operational 


(12 kW) to support climate control 

of the room. 

Cooling 

Applications 

Modular climate control concepts – to your specific require- 

ments! 

Rittal solves the problem of climate control for high heat 

losses per rack with liquid cooling components. Extremely 

high heat loads are dissipated from the enclosures, IT and 

server racks via air/water heat exchangers. Additionally, 

data centres may be extended in a temperature-neutral way. 

H 

Up to 20 kW useful cooling 

output 

The useful cooling output is 

achieved with a modular configuration 

(1 – 3 modules) or with 

the complete LCP Plus systems. 

Active condensate management 

supports inlet temperatures 

from +6°C to +20°C. 

formance fans, which may be 

exchanged without the need for 

tools. Overall, the LCP Plus has 

been optimised for use in data 

centres. Even with the enclosure 

doors open, e.g. during 

Water connection variants 

Water connection either at the 

bottom or top. Connection to the 

existing cooling circuit (optionally 

via water/water heat exchanger) 

or to recooling systems. 

Safe insertion, 

simple assembly 

The separation of cooling and 

rack prevents water from penetrating 

the server rack. A recooling 

system supplies the required 

cooling fluid. 

servicing work on servers, 

climate control is guaranteed. 

Ideal water supply: Rittal recooling 

systems. 

117 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Examples 

Example: Passive and hot-spot cooling 

Room climate control 

via raised floor 

Room climate control may be 

supported both with passive 

systems (air baffle systems, 

perforated doors) and with 

active components (fans, fan 

cross members). 

Fan cross member 

Support of horizontal air routing 

of the servers in the rack. 

Perforated doors 

Access protection coupled with 

a high air throughput are the 

clear benefits of this application. 

Example: High-performance cooling via LCP standard/LCP Plus 

Combined climate control via 

a raised base and LCP Standard/LCP 

Plus 

In order to reliably control high 

heat loads within individual 

racks, we offer solutions which 

facilitate reliable, efficient hot 

spot climate control with the 

LCP Standard and LCP Plus. 

Recooling system 

Recool recycles the hot water 

that exits the LCP and LCP Plus 

therefore providing maximum 

efficiency. 

Air baffle system 

For even distribution of cold air 

in front of the 482.6 mm (19″) 

level. Air is infed directly via the 

twin base of the data centre. 


Ensures efficient through-flow 

of the enclosure in a vertical 

direction. 

LCP Standard/LCP Plus 

Whether you require scalability 

or maximum output: Simple, safe 

handling of heat loads up to 

40 kW per server enclosure with 

LCP Standard and LCP Plus. 

118 Rittal IT catalogue/Cooling

Example: LCP Extend and rack climate control 

Combined climate control via 

raised floor and LCP Extend 

(up to 12 kW per rack) 

The LCP Extend is used to 

relieve existing room climate 

control systems. Temperatureneutral 

expansion becomes 

possible with the LCP Extend. 

1 2 3 10 

Rack climate control in 

IT rooms and data centres 

The design layout and side 

bayability means that redundant 


As with all of the products in the 

LCP family, this unit is connected 

to a cold water system 

such as a Rittal recooling 

system for high-performance 

cooling. 

1 2 3 500 

1 

2 

systems are easily configured 

with the LCP Standard and 

LCP Plus providing maximum 

uptime. 

1 

2 

LCP Extend 

The LCP Extend draws the warm 

air away from the rear of the 

server enclosure and cools it 

down to room temperature. The 

Example: Redundant systems with LCP Standard/LCP Plus 

LCP Standard/LCP Plus 

High heat loads of up to 40 kW 

per server enclosure are effectively 

dissipated from the rack 

and from the room via the heat 

1 Water circuit A 

2 Water circuit B 

1 

Cooling 

Examples 

powerful, easily replaceable 

fans ensure maximum reliable 

flow of the air from the server 

enclosure, which is equipped 

with a perforated door at the 

front. 

exchanger. Horizontal routing of 

the cold air ensures optimum 

cooling performance at any 

height in the rack. 

119 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Rack-mounted cooling units for 482.6 mm (19″), useful cooling output 1000 W 


Ready wired for immediate connection 

(3 m), includes drilling 

template. 


For installation in a closed 

enclosure: 

Adaptor for front air supply 

and air duct for waste air, 

see Accessories. 

Accessories Page 141 Configuration software Page 151 


T 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

B 

H 



Performance diagrams, 


Model No. SK 3278.134 1) 3292.134 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 115, 50/60 230, 50/60 

Dimensions in mm 

Useful cooling output 

as per DIN 3168 

. 

QK 

W 

H 

D 

L 35 L 35 

L 35 L 50 

445 

265.9 (6 U) 

542 

1000 W/1050 W 

660 W/770 W 

Max. current rating 8.4 A/10.8 A 3.8 A/4.5 A 

Start-up current 21.0 A/22.0 A 10.0 A/11.8 A 

Pre-fuse T 10.0 A/16.0 A 6.0 A/6.0 A 

Power consumption Pel 

L 35 L 35 615 W/710 W 

585 W/650 W 


. 

Refrigeration factor ε = QK/Pel 

L 35 L 50 

L 35 L 35 

680 W/800 W 

1.6 

650 W/720 W 

1.7 

Refrigerant R134a, 700 g 

Permissible operating pressure p. max. 25 bar 

Temperature and setting range +20°C to +55°C 

Protection category to EN 60 529/10.91 

External circuit 

Internal circuit 

IP 34 

IP 54 

Duty cycle 100 % 

Type of connection Connection cable 3 m 

Weight 38 kg 35 kg 

Colour RAL 7032 

Air throughput of fans 

External circuit 620 m3 Internal circuit 

/h 

460 m3 /h 

Temperature control Internal thermostat (factory setting +35°C) 

Accessories Packs of Page 

Filter mats 3 3286.000 148 

Adaptor for front air supply 1 3259.000 142 

Air duct 10 3220.000 142 

Temperature indicator 1 3114.115 3114.100 143 

Door-operated switch 1 4127.000 336 


Special voltages available on request. Technical modifications reserved.

Rack-mounted fan/ 

Vario rack-mounted fan 

supply includes: 

Ready wired for immediate connection, 

including terminal strip 

and assembly parts. 

2 fans 

Distance between axes 85 mm 

3 fans 


3 fans 



Cooling 

Rack-mounted fans for 482.6 mm (19″), air throughput 320/480 m 3 /h 

200 

180 

Guide frame supply includes: 

Guide frame including connector 

and fitted connection cable 

(3 m), bracket for optional 

attachment to the 482.6 mm 

(19″) system, assembly parts. 


482.6 (19˝) 

410 

73 

1HE 

100 

214 

206 

1 2 


HE = U 

Remember to order the 

appropriate guide frame for your 

chosen application. 

426 

482.6 (19˝) 

1 Rack-mounted fan module 2 Vario rack-mounted fan 

Model No. SK Model No. SK 

1HE 

432 

55 

Approvals, 

see page 404/405. 





3340.024 1) 3340.115 1) 3340.230 – – 3350.024 1) 3350.115 1) 3350.230 – 

3341.024 1) 3341.115 3341.230 – 9769.002 1)2) 3351.024 1) 3351.115 1) 3351.230 – 

3342.024 3342.115 1) 3342.230 3342.500 2)3) – 3352.024 1) 3352.115 1) 3352.230 3352.500 1)3) 

Rated operating voltage V 24 V (DC) 115 V (AC) 230 V (AC) 

24 V (DC) 

115 – 230 V 

(AC) 

36 V (DC) 

up to 

72 V (DC) 

24 V (DC) 115 V (AC) 230 V (AC) 

120 

24 V (DC) 

115 – 230 V 

(AC) 

Model No. SK 

matching guide frame 

– – – – – 3356.1001) 3355.100 3355.100 3357.1001) Accessories Page 

Temperature indicator 

230 V (AC) 

143 3114.100 3114.115 3114.100 3114.024 – 3114.100 3114.115 3114.100 3114.024 

Thermostat 144 3110.000 

Speed control 145 3120.000 3120.115 3120.000 – – 3120.000 3120.115 3120.000 – 


Model No. SK/CS 

Rated operating voltage 

V, Hz 

3340.230 

3350.230 

AC 230 V 

3340.115 

3350.115 

AC 115 V 

3340.024 

3350.024 

DC 24 V 

3341.230 

3351.230 

3342.230 

3352.230 

AC 230 V 

3341.115 

3351.115 

3342.115 

3352.115 

AC 115 V 

3341.024 

3351.024 

3342.024 

3352.024 

DC 24 V 

3342.500 2) 

3352.500 2) 

DC 24 V 

AC 115 – 230 V 

50/60 Hz 

9769.002 

36 V (DC) 

up to 

72 V (DC) 

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz – 

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz – 

Max. current rating 

0.24 A/ 

0.22 A 

0.46 A/ 

0.46 A 

0.49 A 

0.36 A/ 

0.33 A 

0.69 A/ 

0.69 A 

0.74 A 0.85 A 0.28 A 

Pre-fuse T 6 A 6 A 

Number of fans 2 3 3 

Air throughput, unimpeded air flow 320 m3 /h 480 m3 /h 250 m3 /h 

Temperature range –10°C to +55°C 

–33°C to 

+55°C 

Noise level 


51 dB (A) 52 dB (A) 51 dB (A) 51 dB (A) 52 dB (A) 51 dB (A) 52 dB (A) 

2) Rack-mounted fan for metric mounting angles available on request. 

3) Version with monitoring 

121 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Centrifugal fans, air throughput 320 m 3 /h 


Fully assembled and wired, 

ready for connection, 

including filter mat. 







88 

163 

17 

482.6 (19˝) 

Model No. SK 3145.000 3144.000 



W 

H 

D 

482.6 (19″) 

88 (2 U) 

158 

Air throughput, unimpeded air flow 320 m 3 /h 

Max. current rating 0.32 A 0.16 A 

Power 37 W 


Speed 2245 rpm –1 


Maximum static pressure difference 65 – 70 Pa 


Temperature indicator 1 3114.115 3114.100 143 

Thermostat 1 3110.000 144 

Filter mats 5 3177.000 149 

Front outlet grille 2 U 1 3176.000 148 

Roof vent 1 3148.007 123 

Speed control 1 3120.115 3120.000 145 

Special voltages available on request. Technical modifications reserved. 

380

125 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

370 

500 


B 

550 

290 

T 

Roof-mounted fan and 

vent attachment 

for TS 

The active roof-mounted fan and the passive vent 

attachment (TS 8801.380) integrate perfectly into 

the system-wide mounting concept of Rittal system 

climate control. They fit precisely onto the 

cut-outs of the small and medium performance 

category of TopTherm roof-mounted cooling units. 

Of course, they may also be mounted on any 

sufficiently large roof surface. 

Cooling 

Fan systems for TS 

TS roof plates with prepared mounting cut-outs 

are additionally available. 

Roof-mounted fan supply includes: 

Unit ready to connect with built-in radial fan, 

sealing material and assembly parts. 

Vent attachment: 

see page 146. 


IP 43 as per EN 60 529/10.91 



Model No. SK 3149.410 3149.420 3149.440 3149.810 3149.820 3149.840 8801.380 Page 


400, 3~, 50/60 

460, 3~, 60 

115, 50/60 230, 50/60 

400, 3~, 50/60 

460, 3~, 60 

Roof vent 

Air throughput, unimpeded air flow 400 m3 /h 800 m3 /h 

Without 

motor 

Required mounting cut-out W x D mm 475 x 260 490 x 390 

Power consumption of fan 120 W/170 W 95 W/140 W 170 W/225 W 180 W/310 W 

Rated current of fan 1.1/1.6 A 0.55/0.88 A 0.35/0.35 A 1.5/2.2 A 0.75/1.1 A 0.35/0.55 A 


Noise level 68/69 dB (A) 69/70 dB (A) 


Colour shade 

Accessories 

RAL 7035 

Roof plate 600 x 600 mm for TS 8 with cut-out 8801.300 8801.310 146 

Roof plate 600 x 800 mm for TS 8 with cut-out 8801.320 8801.330 146 

Roof plate 1200 x 600 mm for TS 8 with cut-out – 8801.350 146 

Temperature indicator 3114.115 3114.100 – 3114.115 3114.100 – – 143 

Speed control 3120.115 3120.100 – 3120.115 3120.100 – – 145 

50 

340 

345 

420 

265 


● The roof-mounted fan is easily installed using 

6 screws. The sealing tape supplied can be 

used to seal it against the enclosure. 

● The assembly screws are invisible from the 

outside. 

● The roof-mounted fan casing has a large air 

outlet surface and labyrinthine air ducting. 


IP 43 to EN 60 529/10.91. By additionally installing 

the filter holder with filter mat SK 3175.000, 

with roof vent SK 3148.000 a protection category 

of IP 44 is achieved. 

Fully wired unit ready for connection with built-in 

radial fan, sealing material and assembly parts, 

connection cable (3 m), drilling template. 

Accessories: 

Filter holder, 

see page 148. 



Model No. SK 3149.007 3169.007 3148.007 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 Without fan motor 

Air throughput 360 m3 /h 

Max. current rating 0.2 A 0.55 A 

Power consumption 42 W 65 W 



Weight 7.8 kg 

Colour1) RAL 7035, textured enamel 

1) To order the version in RAL 7032, please add extension .000 to the Model No. 

Special voltages available on request. We reserve the right to make technical modifications. 

123 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Fan systems for TS 

Fan mounting plate DC 

for TS 

Exceptionally low-noise thanks to FCS speed 

control, fully fitted 

Suitable for TS 8 enclosures with a raised roof 

(> 20 mm) or TS 8 roof plate, vented. The fan 

mounting plate may be used as an alternative to 

fan mounting plate 7988.035. It is installed from 

above. Cable entry is prepared in the rear section 

of the plate. 

Not suitable for combination with 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frame. 

Advantages of the DC fan mounting plate with 

FCS technology: 

● Exceptionally low-noise thanks to speed 

control. 

● All fans are individually monitored for failure. 

● High air throughput thanks to DC technology 

(unimpeded air flow 6 x 175 m3 /h = 990 m3 /h). 

● EMC-compatibility. 

● Temperature monitoring and control. 

● High level of safety (low safety voltage with 

24 V DC power supply). 

● Visual and acoustic alarm messages, 

plus relay alarm output. 

● Freely selectable installation location for the 

FCS control unit (included with the supply of 

the fan mounting plate, in 482.6 mm (19″) with 

7320.440 or on the frame with 7320.450). 

● Suitable for international use, thanks to widerange 

power supply 100 – 240 V AC and socket 

to IEC 320. 

● Pre-configured. 

● Network-compatible via CMC-TC processing 

unit II 7320.100 (all relevant data such as 

temperature etc. are displayed in the web 

browser, or alarms are sent in the form of an 

SNMP trap). 

For 

enclosures 

width 

mm 

For 

enclosures 

depth 

mm 

Number of 

DC fans 


Power supply rated voltage: 

100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 

Power supply rated current: max. 1.5 A 

Power supply secondary range: 24 V DC, 3 A 

Temperature range: +5°C to +40°C 

Total air throughput (unimpeded air flow): 

6 x 175 m3 /h = 990 m3 /h 

Technical specifications per fan: 

Rated voltage: 24 V DC 

Rated current: max. 0.28 A 

Rated output: max. 6.72 W 

Air throughput (unimpeded air flow): 175 m3 /h 

Speed: 2650 rpm 

Noise level: up to 45 dB (A) 

at maximum speed activation 


Connection cable 230/115 V. 

Example D version, Model No. 7200.210, 

see page 167. 

Accessories: 

1 U mounting unit, Model No. 7320.440, 

see page 170. 

Mounting module, Model No. 7320.450, 

see page 170. 

Model No. 

DK 


800 

800 

900 

1000 

6 7858.488 

Note: 

For more information on the FCS system, 

see page 162.


Door mounted fan 

for server enclosures TS, TE 

Specifically for installing in perforated doors. 

The growing packaging density in data communications 

and network enclosures make active, 

direct ventilation of the enclosure indispensable. 

The door mounted fan, which is attached to the 

rear or front door, supports horizontal air routing 

via the servers and therefore facilitates faster heat 

dissipation from active components. 


● Standard assembly with two fans. 

● Air throughput, unimpeded air flow 600 m3 /h. 

● By adding two fan expansion kits, the air 

throughput may be increased to 1200 m3 /h. 

● The direction of air flow is easily reversed by 

rotating the fan. 

● Several units may be positioned in a cascade 

arrangement. 

● Simple mounting on the tubular door frame. 

H 

B 

T 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

Cooling 

Fan systems for TS/TE 


Wired ready for connection with 2.5 m connection 

cable, including assembly parts. 

Accessories: 

Fan expansion kit, 

see page 125. 

Note: 

Only for mounting on the tubular door frame! 

Door configuration for installation in 2 and 4-door 

ISP racks available on request. 

552 

27 

9 

Ø 4.5 

230 (350) 

475 (675) 

493 (693) 

Model No. SK 3165.6241) 3165.6481) 3165.6151) 3165.6301) 3165.8241) 3165.8481) 3165.8151) 3165.8301) Page 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 24 (DC) 48 (DC) 115, 50/60 230, 50/60 24 (DC) 48 (DC) 115, 50/60 230, 50/60 

Air throughput (unimpeded air flow) 600 m3 /h 

Power consumption for two fans 40 W 48 W 70 W/64 W 70 W/70 W 40 W 48 W 70 W/64 W 70 W/70 W 

Rated current of fan 1.5 A 1.0 A 0.76 A/0.72 A 0.38 A/0.36 A 1.5 A 1.0 A 0.76 A/0.72 A 0.38 A/0.36 A 


W 

H 

D 

493 

606 

64.5 

For doors with width (mm) 600 800 


Temperature range +20°C to +55°C 

Colour 

Accessories 

RAL 7035 

Temperature indicator 3114.024 – 3114.115 3114.100 3114.024 – 3114.115 3114.100 143 

Thermostat 3110.000 144 



Fan expansion kit 

for door mounted fan 

To increase the air throughput of the door 

mounted fan. 

693 

606 

64.5 

606 

59.5 

To fit 

door mounted fan 

Model No. SK 

SK 3165.624, SK 3165.824 3165.024 

SK 3165.648, SK 3165.848 3165.048 

SK 3165.615, SK 3165.815 3165.115 

SK 3165.630, SK 3165.830 3165.230 

5 

125 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Fan systems for TS/FR(i) 

H 

511 

B 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

511 

T 


for TS/FR(i) for the office sector 

This new roof ventilation concept offers a wealth 

of performance, assembly and cost benefits associated 

with the use of integrated ventilation systems. 

This roof-mounted fan may be ordered with 

and without a roof plate. Another outstanding feature 

is the enormous volumetric flow in proportion 

to exceptionally low noise levels, making it ideal 

for use in sensitive office areas. 

H 

T 

410 

450 

B 

13.5 

410 

450 


● Fitted onto a roof plate based on TS. 

● Easy assembly; mounting cut-outs have been 

provided. 

● Radial fan. 


Wired ready for connection, including assembly 

parts. 

Model No. SK 3164.610 3164.620 3164.810 3164.820 3164.115 3164.230 Page 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 115, 50/60 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 230, 50/60 

Air throughput (unimpeded air flow) 1500 m3 /h1) Design with roof plate without roof plate 


W 

H 

D 

800 

240 

800 

Power consumption 68 W/81 W 

Rated current 0.6 A/0.7 A 0.3 A/0.35 A 0.6 A/0.7 A 0.3 A/0.35 A 0.6 A/0.7 A 0.3 A/0.35 A 

Radial fan – 



Colour 

Accessories 

RAL 7035 

Temperature indicator in 1 U patch panel 7109.035 143 

Temperature indicator 3114.115 3114.100 3114.115 3114.100 3114.115 3114.100 143 

Thermostat 3110.000 144 

1) 800 m 3 /h at 40 Pa counterpressure using two integrated louvres, type DK 7580.500, in the enclosure base/plinth. 

Special voltages available on request. Technical modifications reserved. 


800 

240 

900 

TS 8 air baffle system 

The system has an air inlet nozzle in the base 

frame. In this way, cold air may be drawn in from 

below. The air is routed into the twin-walled door. 

The cold air can then be distributed inside the 

rack with special covers. 15 covers are supplied 

with every door. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

511 

227 

511 

Mounting cut-out 

only required for fans without roof plate 


TS 8 sheet steel door, 

twin-walled 

W 600 x H 2000 mm 

TS 8 sheet steel door, 

1 7766.520 

twin-walled 

W 600 x H 2200 mm 

1 7766.522 

Air inlet nozzle 

W 600 mm 

1 7766.500 

Delivery times available on request.


Fan mounting plate 

for TS 

The fan mounting plate may be retro-fitted in all 

TS 8 network enclosures from above. The plate is 

mounted at the front of the enclosure, whilst the 

rear section is left free for cable entry. A rubber 

cable clamp strip is supplied loose for optional 

sealing at the rear. 

The following combinations are also possible: 

● Solid roof plate raised with 20 or 50 mm roof 

spacers. 

● Roof plate for cable entry raised with 20 or 

50 mm roof spacers. 

● Vented roof plate for cable entry. 

In conjunction with the large swing frame, 

usage is only possible from an enclosure depth of 

800 mm, in conjunction with a roof plate for cable 

entry from 900 mm. 

Note: 

Not suitable for crane transportation (lifting eyes)! 

Not suitable for combination with 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frame. 

525/725 

30 

385/585 


For retro-fitting various fan units or to supplement 

the fan mounting plate and modular fan roof. 

Technical specifications DK 7980.000: 

Rated operating voltage: 230 V~ 

Power consumption: 15/14 W at 50/60 Hz 

Air throughput (unimpeded air flow): 

160/180 m3 /h, 50/60 Hz 

Noise level (unimpeded air flow): 37 dB (A) 

Temperature range: –10°C to +55°C 


Rated operating voltage: 230 V~ 



108/120 m3 /h, 50/60 Hz 




Rated operating voltage: 48 V (DC) 

Power consumption: 7.7 W 

Air throughput (unimpeded air flow): 184 m3 /h 



40 

Cooling 

Fan systems for TS/FR(i) 

For enclosures No. 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

of 

fans 

Max. 

no. of 

fans 

Model No. 

DK 

600 600 2 4 7966.035 

600 

800 

900 

1000 

1200 

2 6 7968.035 

800 600 2 6 7986.035 

800 

800 

900 

1000 

1200 

2 6 7988.035 

The air throughput can be increased with the fan 

expansion kit DK 7980.000. 

Technical specifications for one fan: 

Rated operating voltage: 230 V 



160/180 m3 /h, 50/60 Hz 


Technical specifications of thermostat: 



Colour: 

RAL 7035 


2 fans, 2/4 cut-outs to extend to 

4/6 fans, thermostat, 

rubber cable clamp strip. 

Thermostat and fan fully wired to connection 

cable (2.5 m). 

Accessories: 


see page 127. 

Rubber cable clamp strip SZ 2573.000 for sealing 

at the sides and targeted air routing when bayed, 

see page 341. 

Dimensions 

W x H x D mm 


119 x 119 x 38 1 set 7980.000 

119 x 119 x 25 1 set 7980.100 

119 x 119 x 25 1 set 7980.148 


Fan, including assembly parts and connection 

cable (0.61 m). 

127 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Fan systems for TS/FR(i)/TE 

1 

2 

5 

3 4 

1 2 

Fan roof, modular, 

two-piece 

for TS, FR(i) 

The modular roof plate consists of individual components 

and can be configured for the ventilation 

of the enclosures in various ways. 

The modules consist of: 

Roof plate, two-piece with cut-out 

For fan mounting and cable entry at the rear via 

a sliding angular bracket with rubber cable clamp 

strip. Replacing the existing roof plate. The twopiece 

design allows convenient retrofitting of 

cables at any time. 

Cover plate 

To cover the cut-out, optionally solid or vented 

options. The top-mounted cover plate may be 

raised for extra air throughput using the supplied 

spacers. 

Fan insert 

For active ventilation: 

A fully pre-wired fan tray including 2.5 m connection 

cable, with two fan motors and additional 

cut-outs. The air throughput may be increased 

with a fan expansion kit. 

For enclosures 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Roof plate 

FR(i) 

with 

cut-out 

Roof plate 

TS 

Model No. DK 

Material: 

Sheet steel, spray-finished 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 





160/180 m3 /h at 50/60 Hz 




Accessories: 

Fan expansion kit DK 7980.000, 

see page 127. 

Thermostat SK 3110.000, 

see page 144. 

Speed control SK 3120.000, 

see page 145. 

Cover plate 

1 2 4 5 3 

with 

cut-out Solid Vented Fan insert 

Fans 

pre-wired 

Fan insert 

Maximum 

no. of 

fans 

600 600 7856.3661) 7826.366 2102.1801) 2102.400 2102.320 2 2 

600 800 7856.3681) 7826.368 2102.1901) 2102.410 2102.490 2 6 

600 900 – 7826.369 2102.1901) 2102.410 2102.490 2 6 

600 1000 7856.3601) 7826.360 2102.1901) 2102.410 2102.490 2 6 

600 1200 7856.3621) – 2102.1901) 2102.410 2102.490 2 6 

800 600 – 7826.486 7885.100 7885.200 7885.000 2 3 

800 800 7856.3881) 7826.488 7886.100 7886.200 7886.000 2 8 

800 900 – 7826.489 7886.100 7886.200 7886.000 2 8 

800 1000 7856.3801) 7826.480 7886.100 7886.200 7886.000 2 8 


Design panel FR(i) already included with the supply of the standard roof plate. 

Fan unit, active 

for TE 

For active ventilation of the TE 7000. The fan unit 

is installed in the prepunched cut-out. An additional 

fan may optionally be integrated. 


Fan unit including assembly parts, 2 fans, 

1 thermostat and connection cable. 


Fan extension kit 7980.000, see page 127. 

Technical specifications of thermostat: 



Active kit 

for TE 

consisting of fan unit including thermostat, complete, 

wired ready for connection, socket strip 

(DK 7000.630) for up to 8 earthing pin plugs, 

version D and connection cable (DK 7200.210). 


W x D 

mm 

All 

dimensions 


Connection cable, country-specific, 

see page 167. 

Accessories: 


see page 127. 

Number of 

pre-wired 

fans 

Possible 

number of 

fans 

Model No. 

TE 

2 3 7000.670 


1 set 7000.680 



Cooling 

Rittal Liquid Cooling Package, useful cooling output 10 kW – 40 kW 

LCP Extend 

Air/water heat exchanger for retrofitting to racks 

while operational. 

The stand-alone unit replaces the rear door 

(for other brands on request). 


● Up to 12 kW useful cooling output 

● Max. air volume 3000 m3 /h 

● Water connection either at the bottom or top 

LCP Standard 

Air/water heat exchanger, bayable with server 

racks based on TS 8 (H x D 2000 x 1000/1200 mm). 

The useful cooling output of max. 20 kW can be 

achieved by installing additional modules. 

The separation of cooling and rack prevents water 

from penetrating the server rack, and makes it easy 

to assemble and very service-friendly. 

LCPs are easy to handle (max. 2 m) and may be 

transported in lifts and through doors. The low 

weight means a minimal load area. 




● TÜV GS, UL/CUL, DIN 3168 

Approvals, 

see page 405. 

LCP Plus 

Air/water heat exchanger, bayable with server 

racks based on TS 8 (H x D 2000 x 1200 mm). 

Complete unit with 30 kW useful cooling output. 

The separation of cooling and rack prevents water 

from penetrating the server rack, and makes it easy 

to assemble and very service-friendly. 

LCPs are easy to handle (max. 2 m) and may be 

transported in lifts and through doors. The low 

weight means a minimal load area. 




T 

B 

H 


Height (H) 1910 mm 



Height (H) 2000 mm 

Depth (T) 1000/1200 mm 

T 

T 

B 

H 


Height (H) 2000/2400 mm 


B 

H 

129 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Rittal Liquid Cooling Package, useful cooling output 10 kW – 40 kW 

Model No. SK 3301.4901) 3301.2302) 3301.420 3301.4801) Available on request. 

Description LCP Extend LCP Standard LCP Plus LCP Plus 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 230, 50/60 230, 50/60 230, 50/60 

W 520 

300 300 300 

300 


H 1910 

2000 2000 2000 

2400 

D 160 

1000 1200 1200 

1200 

Usable U 42 42 42 51 

Useful cooling output 12 kW Up to 20 kW Up to 30 kW Up to 40 kW 

Rated current 2.4 A/3.0 A 3.8 A/4.4 A 9.3 A/10.4 A 

Pre-fuse 6 A/6 A 10 A/10 A 16 A/16 A 

Cooling medium Water (for specifications see Internet) 

Water inlet temperature +15°C +6°C to +20°C 

Permissible operating pressure p. max. 6 bar 6 bar 6 bar 

Protection category to EN 60 529/10.91 – IP 30 



Electrical connection Connection cable 

available on request. 

Water connection 3 /4″ external thread 1″ external thread 

Weight 130 kg max. 170 kg 150 kg 


Air throughput of fans 3000 m3 /h 4800 m3 /h 

Temperature control 

Additional module 

Fan control 

Electronically controlled magnetic valve 

and 4-way fan control 

Useful cooling output max. 6.6 kW – 3301.250 – – 

Special voltages and sizes available on request. We reserve the right to make technical modifications. 

Rack heights of 2200 mm are achieved with an optional add-on cover. 


2) Also available with 115 V, Model No. 3301.210. 

To ensure proper use of LCP Standard and LCP Plus, the racks being 

cooled should be sealed against the ingress of ambient air wherever 

possible: 

Description Dimensions in mm Packs of Model No. 

Side panel, screw-fastened H x D 2000 x 1000 2 8100.235 

Glazed door W x H 

Sheet steel door, solid W x H 

Divided partitioning plate for 

retrospective sealing in the 

base area 

Divided roof plate 


W x D 

W x D 


2) Retrospective installation is not possible. 

600 x 2000 1 8610.6001) 800 x 2000 1 8610.8001) 600 x 2000 1 7824.2051) 800 x 2000 1 7824.2071) 600 x 1000 1 7825.300 

800 x 1000 1 7825.302 

600 x 1000 1 7826.6052) 800 x 1000 1 7826.8052) Accessories Page 131 Recooling systems From page 133 Server enclosures From page 73 

Other accessories: 

Recooling systems, 

see page 133. 

Quick-release fastener, 

see page 132. 

Base/plinth, 

see page 254. 

Service, 

see page 150. 

Water/water heat exchanger, 




Vertical shielding 

To block the airflow on the left and right of the 

482.6 mm (19″) level. 

Length: 1900 mm, self-adhesive on one side. 

Material: 

Cellular PU foam, 

flame-inhibiting to UL 94 (HF1) 

Horizontal shielding 

Allows horizontal shielding of the airflow with a 

partially configured 482.6 mm (19″) rack. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, spray-finished in RAL 7035 

Covers 

For sealing any air inlet and outlet openings of the 

LCP that are not required. 

Material: 


Vent valve 

For effective cooling of individual LCP modules 

(SK 3301.250). With quick-release system for 

simple installation in the water inlet of the LCP, 

including stop valve. 

Cooling 

Accessories for Rittal Liquid Cooling Package 

For sealing between 

For 

enclosure width 

mm 

Model No. SK 

Side panel and 

600 3301.380 

482.6 mm (19″) level 800 3301.390 

LCP and 

600 3301.370 

482.6 mm (19″) level 

Packs of 1 

800 3301.320 

For 


mm 

Packs of Model No. SK 

600 1 3301.330 

800 1 3301.340 


2 3301.310 


1 3301.400 

131 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Accessories for Rittal Liquid Cooling Package 

Connection hose 

1 m long, flexible connection hose, may be shortened, 

including union nuts on both sides for connecting 

the LCP to existing pipe work. 


The shut-off quick-release fasteners on both sides 

facilitate easy disconnection of the LCP to the 

existing pipe work ( 3 /4″ external thread) and connection 

hose SK 3301.350. 

Add-on cover 

For height compensation with 2200 mm high 

racks in conjunction with the LCP (H = 2000 mm). 

Material: 


For LCP Thread Model No. SK 

SK 3301.230/.420 3 /4″ 3301.350 

SK 3301.480 

Packs of 2 

1″ 3301.351 


1 connector 

1 coupling 

3301.360 

For LCP Model No. SK 

SK 3301.210 

SK 3301.230 

3301.221 

SK 3301.420 

SK 3301.480 

3301.421 



Technical design: 

● Compact design with control 

components on the front and 

air intake via the right-hand 

side panel, air outlet via the 

left-hand side panel. 

● Pressure-sealed system. 

● Digital thermostat for temperature 

control with setpoint and 

actual value display. 

● Integral automatic bypass 

valve. 

● Flow monitor. 

● Roof plate of stainless steel 

1.4301 (AISI 304), 

spray-finished in RAL 7035. 

● Integration of applicationspecific 

special equipment on 

request. 


Cooling 

Recooling systems for IT cooling, cooling output 4000 to 36000 W 


Recooling system wired and 

plumbed ready for connection, 

with multilingual documentation 

including functional diagram 

and wiring plans. 

Note: 

The illustration shows a unit with 

customer-specific options. 

H 

T 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

Options: 

● Aluminium filter 

● Contamination monitoring for 

aluminium filter 

● Reinforced pump 

● Double pump unit 

● Heat recovery 

● Vibration components 

● Free cooling 

● Buffer store for separate siting 

● Control unit for redundancy 

operation 

● Emergency cooling with 

mains water infeed 

● Special voltages 

● Special spray-finish 

B 

Layout diagram, 


Characteristic curves of pump, 


Model No. SK 3300.900 3300.901 3300.902 3300.905 3300.910 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 400, 3~, 50 

W 670 

750 

900 


H 1220 

1600 

1970 

D 720 

880 

1450 

Base/plinth height mm 100 

Cooling output at Tw = 15°C/Tu = 32°C 4000 W 8000 W 12000 W 24000 W 36000 W 

Power consumption 2300 W 3900 W 6100 W 10500 W 16000 W 

Max. current rating 5.2 A 8 A 12 A 20 A 29 A 

Refrigerant R407C 

Pmax. of cooling circuit 28 bar 

Temperature range 

Environment 

Liquid media 

–20°C to +43°C 

+10°C to +20°C 

Pump capacity See characteristic curve 

Number of cooling circuits 1 

Tank with 10 mm condensate insulation Steel 

Tank capacity 60 l 130 l 300 l 

Water connections 3 /4″ external thread 1 1 /4″ external thread 

Weight 160 kg 195 kg 380 kg 740 kg 860 kg 


Protection category (electrics) IP 54 

Air throughput of fans 2400 m3 /h 2800 m3 /h 6000 m3 /h 10000 m3 /h 11000 m3 /h 


Electronic control with digital display, setting range +10°C to +20°C 

(factory setting +15°C) 

Delivery times available on request. We reserve the right to make technical modifications. 

Accessories Page 141 Configuration software Page 151 Additives Page 147 

133 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Recooling systems for IT cooling, cooling output 48000 to 150000 W 

Technical design: 

● Compact design with control 

components on the front and 

air intake via the right-hand 

side panel, air outlet via the 

left-hand side panel. 

● Pressure-sealed system. 

● Digital thermostat for temperature 

control with setpoint and 

actual value display. 

● Integral automatic bypass 

valve. 

● Flow monitor. 

● Roof plate of stainless steel 

1.4301 (AISI 304), 

spray-finished in RAL 7035. 

● Integration of applicationspecific 

special equipment 

on request. 


Recooling system wired and 

plumbed ready for connection, 

with multilingual documentation 

including functional diagram 

and wiring plans. 

Note: 

The illustration shows a unit with 

customer-specific options. 


H 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

T 

Options: 

● Aluminium filter 

● Contamination monitoring for 

aluminium filter 

● Reinforced pump 

● Double pump unit 

● Heat recovery 

● Vibration components 

● Free cooling 

● Buffer store for separate siting 

● Control unit for redundancy 

operation 

● Emergency cooling with 

mains water infeed 

● Special voltages 

● Special spray-finish 

B 

Layout diagram, 


Characteristic curves of pump, 


Model No. SK 3300.912 3300.915 3300.920 3300.925 3300.930 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 400, 3~, 50 

W 900 

900 

900 

1000 


H 2000 

2000 

2000 

2400 

D 2400 

2400 

2800 

3300 

Base/plinth height mm 100 

Cooling output at Tw = 15°C/Tu = 32°C 48000 W 60000 W 84000 W 120000 W 150000 W 

Power consumption 20500 W 24500 W 37000 W 50000 W 62000 W 

Max. current rating 38 A 41 A 63 A 81 A 103 A 

Refrigerant R407C 

Pmax. of cooling circuit 28 bar 

Temperature range 

Environment 

Liquid media 

–20°C to +43°C 

+10°C to +20°C 

Pump capacity See characteristic curve 

Number of cooling circuits 2 

Tank with 10 mm condensate insulation Steel 

Tank capacity 600 l 750 l 

Water connections 1 1 /2″ external thread 2″ external thread 2 1 /2″ external thread 

Weight 1350 kg 1400 kg 1950 kg 2500 kg 2700 kg 


Protection category (electrics) IP 54 

Air throughput of fans 22000 m3 /h 40000 m3 /h 44000 m3 /h 


Electronic control with digital display, setting range +10°C to +20°C 

(factory setting +15°C) 

Delivery times available on request. We reserve the right to make technical modifications. 

Accessories Page 141 Configuration software Page 151 Additives Page 147


Fan-and-filter unit ready for 

installation, including filter mats. 



no. M 93 04 846 


Cooling 

Fan-and-filter units, air throughput 180 m 3 /h 

T1 

T2 

B1 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

H1 

Approvals, 

see page 405. 



Model No. fan-and-filter unit SK 3323.107 3323.117 3323.027 3323.047 1) 3324.107 3324.117 3324.027 3324.047 1) 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 24 (DC) 48 (DC) 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 24 (DC) 48 (DC) 


B1/H1 204 255 

B2/H2 177 2) 224 2) 

T1 12.5 12.5 

Max. installation depth mm T2 82.5 105 

Air throughput, unimpeded air flow 105/120 m 3 /h 105 m 3 /h 180/160 m 3 /h 180 m 3 /h 

Air throughput with outlet filter 

including standard filter mat 

Axial fan 

1 x SK 3323.207: 71/82 m 3 /h 

2 x SK 3323.207: 85/98 m 3 /h 

1 x SK 3325.207: 78/90 m 3 /h 

self-starting shaded pole 

motor 

DC motor 

B2 

H2 

1 x SK 3325.207: 115/95 m 3 /h 

2 x SK 3325.207: 165/140 m 3 /h 

1 x SK 3326.207: 155/130 m 3 /h 

self-starting shaded pole 

motor 

DC motor 


0.12 A 

0.11 A 

0.24 A 

0.23 A 

0.35 A 90 mA 0.19 A 

0.20 A 

0.38 A 

0.40 A 

0.3 A 0.34 A 

Power 19.0 W/18.0 W 8.0 W 4.3 W 30.0 W/35.0 W 7.2 W 14.0 W 

Noise level 46/49 dB (A) 46 dB (A) 52/48 dB (A) 52 dB (A) 


Colour RAL 70353) Protection category to EN 60 529/10.91 

IP 54 standard 

IP 55 when using an additional fine filter mat 

IP 56 when using an additional fine filter mat and hose-proof hood 

Model No. outlet filter SK 3323.207 3325.207 


Spare filter mats 5 3171.100 3172.100 149 

Fine filter mats 5 3181.100 3182.100 149 

Thermostat 1 3110.000 144 

Temperature indicator 1 3114.100 3114.115 3114.024 – 3114.100 3114.115 3114.024 – 143 

Speed control 1 3120.000 3120.115 – – 3120.000 3120.115 – – 145 

Hose-proof hood 1 3323.800 3324.800 


2) For metal thickness > 2.5 mm, the cut-out B2/H2 must be 1 mm larger. 

3) RAL 7032 on request. 


Cat. 31, 

p. 666 

135 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Fan-and-filter units, air throughput 230 m 3 /h 





no. M 93 04 846 



T1 

T2 

B1 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

H1 

Approvals, 

see page 405. 



Model No. fan-and-filter unit SK 3325.107 3325.117 3325.027 3325.047 1) 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 24 (DC) 48 (DC) 


B1/H1 255 

B2/H2 224 2) 

T1 12.5 

Max. installation depth mm T2 105 

Air throughput, unimpeded air flow 230/265 m 3 /h 230 m 3 /h 



1 x SK 3325.207: 170/205 m 3 /h 

2 x SK 3325.207: 200/230 m 3 /h 

1 x SK 3326.207: 190/215 m 3 /h 

Axial fan self-starting shaded pole motor DC motor 


0.28 A 

0.24 A 

0.53 A 

0.49 A 

0.59 A 0.31 A 

Power 41.0 W/38.0 W 14.0 W 15.0 W 

Noise level 54/56 dB (A) 54 dB (A) 






Model No. outlet filter SK 3325.207 


Spare filter mats 5 3172.100 149 

Fine filter mats 5 3182.100 149 

Thermostat 1 3110.000 144 

Temperature indicator 1 3114.100 3114.115 3114.024 – 143 

Speed control 1 3120.000 3120.115 – – 145 

Hose-proof hood 


1 3324.800 Cat. 31, p. 666 




B2 

H2






no. M 93 04 846 


Cooling 

Fan-and-filter units, air throughput 550/700 m 3 /h 

T1 

T2 

B1 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

H1 

Approvals, 

see page 405. 



Model No. fan-and-filter unit SK 3326.107 3326.117 3327.107 3327.117 3327.147 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 400/460, 3~, 50/60 


B1/H1 323 

B2/H2 292 1) 

T1 12.5 

Max. installation depth mm T2 125 145 

Air throughput, unimpeded air flow 550/600 m 3 /h 700/720 m 3 /h 



1 x SK 3326.207: 360/390 m 3 /h 

2 x SK 3326.207: 440/495 m 3 /h 

B2 

H2 

1 x SK 3326.207: 525/575 m 3 /h 

Axial fan Capacitor motor Rotary current motor 


0.29 A 

0.35 A 

0.58 A 

0.70 A 

0.65 A 

0.95 A 

1.5 A 

2.0 A 

0.27 A 

0.37 A 

Power 64.0 W/80.0 W 115.0 W/212.0 W 167.0 W/230.0 W 146.0 W/220.0 W 

Noise level 59/61 dB (A) 75/76 dB (A) 






Model No. outlet filter SK 3326.207 


Spare filter mats 5 3173.100 3327.700 149 

Fine filter mats 5 3183.100 149 

Thermostat 1 3110.000 – 144 

Temperature indicator 1 3114.100 3114.115 3114.100 3114.115 – 143 

Speed control 1 3120.000 3120.115 3120.000 – – 145 

Hose-proof hood 1 3326.800 Cat. 31, p. 666 




137 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Roof-mounted cooling units, useful cooling output 1100 W 

Especially for office applications. 

Low noise level (considerably 

quieter than cooling units 

for industrial applications). 


Nano-coated condenser and 

integral electronic condensate 

evaporation. Ready wired for 

simple connection, includes 

drilling template and assembly 

parts. 


490 

597 

Accessories: 

Roof plate for TS 8 with 

mounting cut-out, 

see page 146. 

Model No. SK with Comfort controller 3273.500 3273.5151) Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 1~, 50/60 115, 1~, 50/60 

W 597 


H 415 

. 

Useful cooling output QK 


D 

L 35 L 35 

L 35 L 50 

475 

1100 W/1200 W 

850 W/870 W 

Max. current rating 5.2 A/5.4 A 11.0 A/11.5 A 

Start-up current 15.5 A/16.5 A 32.0 A/35.0 A 

Pre-fuse T 10.0 A 20.0 A 


L 35 L 35 890 W/910 W 

920 W/940 W 


. 


L 35 L 50 

L 35 L 35 

960 W/1100 W 

1.2 

990 W/1140 W 







IP 34 

IP 542) Duty cycle 100 % 

Type of connection Plug-type connector terminals 



475 

390 

415 







/h 

440 m3 /h 

Temperature control Basic or Comfort controller (factory setting +35°C) 


Filter mats 3 3286.500 148 

Metal filters 1 3286.510 Cat. 31, p. 669 


SK bus system for Comfort controller 1 3124.100 145 

RiDiag II including cables for Comfort controller 1 3159.100 Cat. 31, p. 1063 

Interface card for Comfort controller 1 3124.200 145 

Air ducting system 1 3286.870 141 

Cover stoppers for interior air outlet 2 3286.880 141 

Condensate hose 1 3301.612 147 


2) In order to avoid increased condensation, we recommend enclosures with a protection category of at least IP 54. 





no. 402 02 324 


no. 402 02 325


Ready wired for simple connection, 

with connector, includes 

drilling template, sealing mat 



Cooling water system such 

as Rittal recooling systems, 

from page 133. 


Cooling 

Air/water heat exchangers, roof-mounted, useful cooling output 2500 W 

Condensate discharge 

(flexible) 

Cooling water connection 1 1 

2 

/ 

2″ (flexible; hose connection) 





475 

390 

597 

490 

415 


German registered designs 

no. 402 02 324 and 

no. 402 02 325 

US design patent 

no. US D 492,319S 

Chinese registered design 

no. ZL 0330 6415.6 

Model No. SK Basic controller 

Water-carrying parts 

CuAL 3209.100 3209.110 3209.1401) Model No. SK Comfort controller CuAL 3209.500 3209.510 3209.5401) Useful cooling output CuAL L 35 W 10, 400 l/h 2500 W 

Model No. SK Basic controller V4A (stainless steel) 3209.104 1) 3209.114 1) 3209.144 1) 

Model No. SK Comfort controller V4A (stainless steel) 3209.504 1) 3209.514 1) 3209.544 1) 

Useful cooling output V4A L 35 W 10, 400 l/h 1875 W 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 400, 2~, 50/60 


W 

H 

D 

597 

415 

475 

Max. current rating 0.40 A 0.85 A 0.25 A 

Pre-fuse T 4.0 A 

Cooling medium Water (refer to specifications on the Internet; assembly instructions chapter 13) 

Water inlet temperature >+1°C to +30°C 

Permissible operating pressure p. max. 1 to 10 bar 


Protection category to EN 60 529/10.91 IP 552) Duty cycle 100 % 


Weight 23.5 kg 27.5 kg 27.5 kg 


Air throughput of fans (unimpeded air flow) 1030 m3 /h 









Flow regulator valve 1 Cat. 31, p. 667 


2) IP 65 available on request. 


Accessories Page 141 Recooling systems Page 133 Configuration software Page 151 

2 

1 

139 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Air/water heat exchangers, roof-mounted, useful cooling output 4000 W 


Ready wired for simple connection, 

with connector, includes 

drilling template, sealing mat 



Cooling water system such 

as Rittal recooling systems, 


Condensate discharge 

(flexible) 

Cooling water connection 1 1 

2 

/ 

2″ (flexible; hose connection) 





Accessories Page 141 Recooling systems Page 133 Configuration software Page 151 


475 

390 

597 

490 

415 


German registered designs 

no. 402 02 324 and 

no. 402 02 325 

US design patent 

no. US D 492,319S 

Chinese registered design 

no. ZL 0330 6415.6 

Model No. SK Basic controller 

Water-carrying parts 

CuAL 3210.100 3210.110 3210.1401) Model No. SK Comfort controller CuAL 3210.500 3210.510 3210.5401) Useful cooling output CuAL L 35 W 10, 400 l/h 4000 W 

Model No. SK Basic controller V4A (stainless steel) 3210.104 1) 3210.114 1) 3210.144 1) 

Model No. SK Comfort controller V4A (stainless steel) 3210.504 1) 3210.514 1) 3210.544 1) 

Useful cooling output V4A L 35 W 10, 400 l/h 3000 W 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 115, 50/60 400, 2~, 50/60 


W 

H 

D 

597 

415 

475 

Max. current rating 0.44 A 0.9 A 0.25 A 

Pre-fuse T 4.0 A 

Cooling medium Water (refer to specifications on the Internet; assembly instructions chapter 13) 

Water inlet temperature >+1°C to +30°C 

Permissible operating pressure p. max. 1 to 10 bar 


Protection category to EN 60 529/10.91 IP 552) Duty cycle 100 % 


Weight 25.5 kg 29.5 kg 29.5 kg 


Air throughput of fans (unimpeded air flow) 925 m3 /h 









Flow regulator valve 


2) IP 65 available on request. 

1 Cat. 31, p. 667 


2 

1


Air duct system 

for TopTherm roof-mounted cooling units 

It is possible to route the cold air directly to specific 

areas of the enclosure using the air duct 

system. The risk of “short circuits” in the air circulation 

due to self-ventilated installed devices is 

therefore eliminated. 

The length of the shallow duct is 1500 mm, and it 

may be cut to any required length. 

Material: 

Flame-resistant plastic as per DIN 4102/B1. 


Shallow duct, compensating hose. 

Note: 

Do not direct cold air straight at active components. 

When using the ducting system, the performance 

of the cooling unit may be reduced, 

depending on the application in question. 

Cooling 

Accessories – Air routing 

Accessories: 

90° deflector, 

see page 141. 

Sealing bungs, 

see page 141. 

For cooling unit Packs of 

Model No. 

Air duct system SK 

SK 3209. . . ./SK 3210. . . ./SK 3273. . . ./SK 3359. . . ./SK 3382. . . ./ 

SK 3383. . . ./SK 3384. . . ./SK 3385. . . . 

1 3286.870 

SK 3386. . . ./SK 3387. . . . 1 3286.970 

90° deflector 

for air duct system 

For targeted air deflection at the end of the 

shallow channel. 

Material: 

Flame-resistant plastic as per DIN 4102/B1. 

Cover bungs 


To cover unneeded cold air outlets in TopTherm 

roof-mounted cooling units. 


1 3286.990 

Material: 

Polyurethane foam 

For cooling unit Packs of Model No. SK 

SK 3359. . . ./SK 3382. . . . 2 3286.780 

SK 3209. . . ./SK 3210. . . ./SK 3273. . . ./SK 3383. . . ./SK 3384. . . ./SK 3385. . . . 2 3286.880 

SK 3386. . . ./SK 3387. . . . 2 3286.980 

141 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Accessories – Air routing 

15 

62 

327 

232 

Adaptor 

for front air infeed 

When using rack-mounted cooling units 

SK 3278.134/SK 3292.134 in enclosures with front 

doors (sheet steel or acrylic), this adaptor must be 

used. It enables ambient air to be extracted 

unhindered from outside, which is essential for the 

correct operation of the cooling unit. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Adaptor, sealing gasket, foamed plastic gasket, 


Air duct 

for discharge of waste air 

For use of rack-mounted cooling units 

SK 3292.134/SK 3278.134 in enclosures with a 

depth > 600 mm. 

The heated ambient air is blown backwards out 

of the enclosure through the air duct. The air duct 

may be extended as required. 

Material: 

ABS plastic 


Air duct including attachment clamps. 


1 3259.000 


22 

b x 44.45 = c 

35 31.75 

12.7 

63 

62 

Air duct, extendible to any length 

50 27.5 

100 190 


10 3220.000


Digital enclosure internal 

temperature display and 

thermostat 

For installing on the enclosure door or wall and in 

a cooling unit or heat exchanger. 


● Small dimensions. 

● Depth: 100 mm. 

● The 3-digit 7-segment display is 13 mm high 

and clearly legible. 

● Can be switched from °C/°F. 

● The display can be used in a temperature 

range from +5°C to +70°C. 

● With 1500 mm long NTC sensor. 

● Two relay outputs as change-over contact and 

normally open contact (maximum contact load 

230 V, 6 A). 

● Freely selectable switching difference. 

● The freely adjustable setpoint values can be 

adjusted via the membrane keyboard at the 

front. 

Setting range: +5°C to +55°C. 

● Display and switching accuracy +/– 2 K. 

● Mounting cut-out 68 x 33 mm. 

● Storage of the minimum and maximum 

recorded temperature until resetting is next 

carried out. 

Digital enclosure internal 

temperature display and 

thermostat 

Integrated into a patch panel 1 U. 

Including cable attachment for connection cable 

and label holder. 

Rated operating voltage: 230 V (AC) 

Special voltages available on request. 


● Small dimensions. 

● Depth: 100 mm. 

● The 3-digit 7-segment display is 13 mm high 

and clearly legible. 

● Can be switched from °C/°F. 

● The display can be used in a temperature 

range from +5°C to +70°C. 

● Includes 1500 mm long NTC sensor. 

● Two relay outputs as change-over contact and 

normally open contact (maximum contact load 

230 V, 6 A). 

● Freely selectable switching difference. 

● The freely adjustable setpoint values can be 

adjusted via the membrane keyboard at the 

front. 

Setting range: +5°C to +55°C. 

● Display and switching accuracy +/– 2 K. 

● Mounting cut-out 68 x 33 mm. 

● Storage of the minimum and maximum 

recorded temperature until resetting is next 

carried out. 


Panel, temperature indicator and thermostat, identification 

strip. 

Cooling 

Accessories – Control/regulation 

Rated operating voltage Model No. SK 

230 V (AC) 3114.100 

115 V (AC) 3114.1151) 24 V (DC) 3114.0241) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Special requirements available on request. 

Colour Model No. DK 

RAL 7035 7109.035 

143 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 


Enclosure internal thermostat 

Especially suitable for controlling fan-and-filter 

units, heaters and heat exchangers, this thermostat 

can also be used as a signal generator for 

monitoring the enclosure internal temperature. 


● Bi-metal sensor as a temperature-sensitive 

element with thermal feedback. 

● Contact population: Single-pole change-over 

contact as a quick-break contact. 

● Permissible contact load: 

Category 5 – 3 (heating) 

AC 10 (4) 1) A, 

DC = 30 W 

Category 5 – 4 (cooling) 

AC 5 (4) 1) A, 

DC = 30 W 

( 1) ) = Inductive load at cos ϕ = 0.6 

● Setting range +5°C to +60°C 

● Weight approx. 105 grams 

● Dimensions 71 x 71 x 33.5 mm 

● Switching difference approx. 1 K ± 0.8 K. 

Hygrostat 

The hygrostat switches on the heater and/or fan 

when a preset relative humidity in the enclosure is 

exceeded. 

In this way, the relative humidity is raised above 

the dew point, and condensation on assemblies 

or electronic components is avoided. 


● Contact population: Single-pole change-over 

contact as a quick-break contact. 

● Permissible contact load: 

AC ~ 5 (0.2) 1) A 

DC = max. 20 W 

( 1) ) = Inductive load at cos ϕ = 0.6 

● Setting range 50 – 100 % relative humidity 

● Weight approx. 100 g 

● Dimensions 71 x 71 x 33.5 mm 

● Switching difference approx. 4 % 

Bottom-mounted adaptor 

for enclosure internal thermostat SK 3110.000 

and hygrostat SK 3118.000 

Bottom-mounted adaptor with mounting option for 

screwed cable glands, for targeted cable infeed 

from appropriate equipment such as SK fan-andfilter 

units and enclosure heaters. In conjunction 

with screwed cable glands, it is also suitable for 

use as strain relief. 


230/115/60/48/24 V (AC) 

60/48/24 V (DC) 

3110.000 

● A broad voltage spectrum, i.e. just one model 

covers 24 to 230 V. 

● Time-saving connection technique using a terminal 

strip with a screw connection from the 

outside. 

● Flexible mounting on a vertical or horizontal 

35 mm support rail to EN 50 022, and snap 

fastening in the TS/ES enclosure section using 

the supplied adaptor. 


24 – 230 V (AC/DC) 3118.000 

● A broad voltage spectrum i. e. just one model 

covers 24 to 230 V. 

● Time-saving connection technique using a 

terminal strip with a screw connection from the 

outside. 

● Flexible mounting on a vertical or horizontal 

35 mm support rail to EN 50 022, and snap 

fastening in the TS/ES enclosure section using 

the supplied adaptor. 


1 3110.200 


35C 

30C 

25C 

20C 

20C 

40C 

35C 


Speed control 

Temperature-dependent speed control for Rittal 

fan-and-filter units and air/air heat exchangers 

with a rated operating voltage of 230 V AC, for 

noise reduction and to save energy in part-load 

operation. 


● For mounting on a 35 mm support rail 

DIN EN 50 022 

● Dimensions (W x H x D): 

94 x 57 x 180 mm 

● Rated operating voltage: 

230 V (AC)/115 V (AC) 

● Setting range: +20°C to +55°C 

● Phase cross-over with microcontroller 

● Maximum fan output 250 W or 1.2 A 

at 230 V (AC) 

● Maximum fan output 100 W or 1.2 A 

at 115 V (AC) 

Mounting adaptor 

for speed control 

The mounting adaptor enables direct attachment 

of the speed control SK 3120.000/.115 to the vertical 

frame sections of network enclosures. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, zinc-plated, passivated. 

Interface card 

for TopTherm cooling units with 

Comfort controller 

The interface card is an extension for TopTherm 

cooling units with Comfort controller. It is possible, 

e.g. to monitor a master/slave combination of 

up to 10 cooling units. Control is achieved via 

standardised interfaces: RS 232 (DB9) or RS 485, 

one PLC interface (DB9). RS 422 (RJ 45 jack) is 

the connection to the Rittal CMC-TC. Remote 

monitoring via TCP-IP, graphical interfaces. Connection 

of additional sensors for access control, 

monitoring is also possible. The extension card is 

built into a 1 U plastic housing. A voltage supply 

of 24 V DC is needed. This may be supplied from 

the CMC-TC via a wide-range power pack 

DK 7320.425 (100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz) or 

externally via a Kycon connector. 

SK bus system 

The SK bus system facilitates communications 

between several enclosure cooling units, Rittal 

TopTherm .500/.510/.540, production date 05/02 

or later, via a master/slave construction such as 

that required e.g. in complex bayed enclosure 

systems for optimum operating conditions. 


The master/slave construction facilitates common 

activation and deactivation via door limit switches, 

parallel activation and deactivation via a temperature 

setpoint, and common collective fault signals 

and temperature logging, thereby eliminating the 

need for intricate wiring. 

Cooling 



230 V (AC) 3120.000 

115 V (AC) 3120.1151) 1) Delivery times available on request. 


Speed control, built into a PK enclosure 9512.100, 

NTC sensor, length 1.80 m. 


1 set 7526.964 


Mounting adaptor including assembly parts. 


1 3124.200 


Interface card integrated into a plastic box 

W x H x D (mm): 136 x 44 (1 U) x 129. 

Serial SUB-D cable, 1.5 m. 

For Model No. SK 

TopTherm 3124.100 

Climate controlled 

enclosures 

3124.000 


3 m shielded interface cable, including operating 

manual on programming the cooling units. 

Note: 

nB = nK – 1 

nB: Number of order units (SK bus system) 

nK: Number of cooling units to be linked 



145 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

General accessories 

13 

= 

B1 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

B2 

= 

T2 T3 

Note: 

In conjunction with roof-mounted 

cooling unit SK 3301.800, see 

page 435, the roof plate must be 

rotated through 90°. 

37.5 

595 

T1 

495 

Roof plates TS 

For mounting on: 

● TopTherm roof-mounted cooling units 

● Vent attachment TS 

The cut-outs in the roof plate are arranged so that 

the TopTherm roof-mounted cooling units are 

positioned centrally on the enclosure. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


W x D mm 

To fit the mounting of 

TopTherm 

Model No. 

TS 

600 x 600 

SK 3382. . . ./SK 3359. . . . 8801.3001) 

800 x 600 8801.320 

600 x 600 

SK 3209. . . ./SK 3210. . . ./ 

8801.310 

SK 3273.5 . ./SK 3383. . . ./ 

SK 3384. . . ./SK 3385. . . . 

1) 

800 x 600 8801.330 

1200 x 600 8801.350 

800 x 600 

SK 3386. . . ./SK 3387. . . . 8801.3402) 

1200 x 600 8801.360 

600 x 900 

8801.410 

600 x 1000 

800 x 900 

SK 3209. . . ./SK 3210. . . ./ 

SK 3273.5 . ./SK 3383. . . ./ 

SK 3384. . . ./SK 3385. . . . 

8801.420 

8801.430 

800 x 1000 8801.440 

For mounting TopTherm B1 B2 T1 T2 T3 Model No. TS 

SK 3382. . . ./SK 3359. . . . 

SK 3209. . . ./SK 3210. . . ./ 

SK 3383. . . ./SK 3384. . . ./ 

SK 3385. . . . 

SK 3386. . . ./SK 3387. . . . 

SK 3209. . . ./SK 3210. . . ./ 

SK 3273.5 . ./SK 3383. . . ./ 

SK 3384. . . ./SK 3385. . . . 

567.5 475 567.5 260 129.3 8801.300 

767.5 475 567.5 260 129.3 8801.320 

567.5 490 567.5 390 61.3 8801.310 

767.5 490 567.5 390 61.3 8801.330 

1167.5 490 567.5 390 61.3 8801.350 

767.5 692 567.5 392 57.8 8801.340 

1167.5 692 567.5 392 57.8 8801.360 

567.5 490 867.5 390 211.3 8801.410 

767.5 490 967.5 390 261.3 8801.420 

567.5 490 867.5 390 211.3 8801.430 

767.5 490 967.5 390 261.3 8801.440 

1) When mounting the cooling units, there may be a contact with the eyebolts of the enclosure; for this reason, 

roof fastening screws are supplied loose with the roof plates. 

2) Attachment is from the inside using metal brackets and retaining clamps. 

Vent attachment TS 

For passive ventilation with labyrinthine air flow 

routing, to match the roofs for TopTherm roofmounted 

cooling units. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 43 


Assembly parts. 

Quick-change frame 


The quick-change frame is more than just an alternate 

frame. Together with the seal, the lower part 

of the frame is screw-fastened to the enclosure, 

making it possible to attach or remove the plug-in 

cooling unit to/from the top part of the quickchange 

frame. In case of servicing, this means 

minimal assembly times and hence minimal downtime. 

The quick-change frame offers effective protection 

against the ingress of oil into the enclosure 

in oily atmospheres, thanks to its integral 

drainage trough. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

For roof plates 

with cut-out 

Model No. TS 

490 x 390 mm 8801.380 

For 

TopTherm cooling unit 


Quick-change frame, seal, 

quick-release fasteners. 



French patent no. 2 675 317 

GB patent no. 2 254 735 

Model No. 

SK 

SK 3359. . . ./SK 3382. . . . 3286.700 

SK 3209. . . ./SK 3210. . . ./ 

SK 3383. . . ./SK 3384. . . ./ 3286.800 

SK 3385. . . . 

SK 3386. . . ./SK 3387. . . . 3286.900 


239 

66 


Ø 73 

1 

2 

3 

Electronic condensate 

evaporator 

For external mounting on enclosures. 

For use with all enclosure cooling units and air/ 

water heat exchangers. 

Evaporation performance: 

1) 2.4 l/d 

2) 4.2 l/d 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Electronic condensate evaporator, 

ready for connection. 

Condensate collecting bottle 

For mounting on the enclosure. 

For use with all enclosure cooling units and air/ 

water heat exchangers. 

Safety overflow at the side. 

Capacity approximately 0.75 l. 

1 Condensate discharge tube 

2 Membrane grommet 

3 Max. 70 mm 

Condensate hose 

For removing and forwarding condensate. 

For connecting to enclosure cooling units. 

Material: 

PVC, transparent 


10 m hose. 

Additives for recooling 

systems 

When filling the systems for the first time, water 

from the existing supply line is generally suitable, 

although care should be taken to ensure a consistent 

water quality. 

However, as satisfactory results are only rarely 

achieved without water treatment, additives 

should always be added to the cooling water, 

irrespective of the installation site. As well as protecting 

against frost, these also serve to impair 

bacterial growth and achieve optimum corrosion 

protection. 

Rated operating 

voltage 



Cooling 

General accessories 

For 

SK 3302. . . ./ 

SK 3303. . . . 

Model No. SK 

For 

400 mm wide 

cooling units 

230 V, 50/60 Hz 3301.5601) 3301.5702) 115 V, 50/60 Hz 3301.5801) 3301.5902) Packs of Model No. SK 

1 3301.600 


Condensate collecting bottle, bottle holder 


For devices 

Material 

thickness 

Ø 

Model No. 

SK 

SK 3302. . . ./SK 320. . . . . 8 x 1.5 mm 3301.608 

SK 3303. . . ./SK 3361. . . . 

SK 3273. . . ./SK 3304. . . ./ 

SK 3305. . . ./SK 3328. . . ./ 

SK 3329. . . ./SK 3332. . . ./ 

10 x 1.5 mm 3301.610 

SK 3359. . . ./SK 3366. . . ./ 

SK 3377. . . ./SK 3382. . . ./ 

SK 3383. . . ./SK 3384. . . ./ 

SK 3385. . . ./SK 3386. . . ./ 

SK 3387. . . . 

12 x 2 mm 3301.612 

Rifrost 

Glycol/ 

water mixture 

Outdoor 1 : 2 

Standard 1 : 4 


Container Model No. SK 

10 l 3301.950 

25 l 3301.955 

200 l 3301.9571) 10 l 3301.960 

25 l 3301.965 

200 l 3301.9671) Supply includes: 

10 l canister, 25 l canister or 200 l barrel. 

147 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

General accessories/filter mats 

Front outlet grille 2 U 

for centrifugal fans 

This front outlet grille is required if a 482.6 mm 

(19″) cross-flow blower (SK 3144.000/ 

SK 3145.000) is used in the lower section of the 

electronic enclosure and the hot air is to be 

expelled to the outside from the upper section of 

the enclosure. 

The design of the grille matches that of the intake 

grille in the cross-flow blower. 

These grilles can also be used as simple inflow 

and outflow grilles with natural convection. 

Filter holder 

for roof ventilation 

The use of a filter mat is required in order to 

increase the protection category of the roof vent 

(SK 3148.000). 

Protection category IP 43 to EN 60 529/10.91 is 

achieved. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Filter holder including filter mat. 

Filter mats 

Rittal cooling units are low-maintenance and are 

supplied without filter mats. Filter mats may be 

used for extreme conditions. 

Accessories: 

Filter mat, 

see page 149. 


1 3176.000 

W x H x D mm Model No. SK 

340 x 244 x 15 3175.000 

Accessories: 

Spare filter mat, 

see page 149. 

Material: 

Open-celled polyurethane foamed plastic with 

excellent physical and mechanical properties. 

Temperature-resistant from –40°C to +80°C. 

Thickness: 10 mm. 

For TopTherm cooling units W x H x D mm Packs of Model No. SK 

SK 3302.300/SK 3302.310 190 x 95 x 10 3 3286.110 

SK 3302. . . ./SK 3303. . . ./SK 3361. . . . 265 x 200 x 10 3 3286.300 

SK 3304. . . ./SK 3305. . . ./SK 3328. . . ./SK 3329. . . ./ 

SK 3332. . . ./SK 3366. . . . 

344 x 268 x 10 3 3286.400 

SK 3273. . . ./SK 3382. . . ./SK 3383. . . ./SK 3384. . . ./ 

SK 3385. . . ./SK 3359. . . . 

530 x 255 x 10 3 3286.500 

SK 3386. . . ./SK 3387. . . . 720 x 300 x 10 3 3286.600 

SK 3377. . . . 205 x 210 x 10 3 3253.010 

For discontinued cooling units W x H x D mm Packs of Model No. SK 

SK 3296. . . ./SK 3272.100/SK 3290. . . ./SK 3280.100/ 

SK 3299. . . ./SK 3261. . . . 

539 x 332 x 10 3 3286.100 

SK 3265.100/SK 3266.100 270 x 332 x 10 3 3267.100 

SK 3256. . . . 

SK 3293. . . ./SK 3281.100/SK 3298. . . ./SK 3279.100/ 

395 x 300 x 10 3 3254.000 

SK 3260. . . ./SK 3269. . . ./SK 3262.100/SK 3393. . . ./ 

SK 3381.100/SK 3391. . . . 

334 x 313 x 10 3 3294.100 

SK 3255. . . ./SK 3395. . . . 350 x 245 x 10 3 3253.000 

SK 3394. . . . 315 x 200 x 10 3 3285.000 

SK 3292.134/SK 3278.134 325 x 250 x 10 3 3286.000 



Filter mats 

Made of chopped-fibre mat with a progressive 

structure. Temperature-resistant to 100°C, 

self-extinguishing category F1 to DIN 53 438. 

Dust-laden air side: Open structure. 

Clean air end: Closed structure. 

Reliable filtering of virtually all types of dust from a 

particle size of 10 µm. 

Material: 

Chemical fibre 

Cooling 

Filter mats 

For centrifugal fans/front outlet grilles 2 U W x H x D mm Packs of Model No. SK 

SK 3144.000/SK 3145.000/SK 3176.000 425 x 85 x 8 5 3177.000 

Filter mat 

for one-piece gland plate 

To conceal the slotted area inside the one-piece 

vented gland plates for TS, FR(i). The filter mat 

is easily cut to the required cut-out and conveniently 

slides into position from the front via 

the guide rails of the gland plate. 

Spare filter mats 


structure. 

Temperature-resistant to 100°C, self-extinguishing 

category F1 to DIN 53 438. 



Reliable filtering of virtually all types of dust from a 

particle size of 10 µm. 


1 7825.620 

Material: 

PPI 35-5/polyamide 

Material: 


For fan-and-filter units W x H x D mm Packs of Model No. SK 

SK 3321. . . . 89 x 89 x 10 5 3321.700 

SK 3322. . . . 120 x 120 x 12 5 3322.700 

SK 3323. . . . 173 x 173 x 17 5 3171.100 

SK 3324. . . ./SK 3325. . . . 221 x 221 x 17 5 3172.100 

SK 3326. . . . 289 x 289 x 17 5 3173.100 

SK 3327. . . . 289 x 289 x 10 5 3327.700 

For filter holders W x H x D mm Packs of Model No. SK 

SK 3175.000 338 x 242 x 20 3 3174.000 

Fine filter mats 


structure. Temperature-resistant to 100°C, 

self-extinguishing category F1 to DIN 53 438. 



Reliable filtering of virtually all types of dust from 

a particle size of 10 µm. 

Material: 


For fan-and-filter units/outlet filters W x H x D mm Packs of Model No. SK 

SK 3323. . . . 173 x 173 x 12 5 3181.100 

SK 3324. . . ./SK 3325. . . . 221 x 221 x 12 5 3182.100 

SK 3326. . . ./SK 3327. . . . 289 x 289 x 12 5 3183.100 

149 

Cooling

Cooling 

Cooling 

Climate control checks 

Load tests as the optimum basis for 

planning. 

With sensor technology for 

3D analyses. 

Perfect dimensioning of pipe networks. 

Forward planning with CFD. 

Localisation of hotspots 

via thermography. 

Rittal climate checks – Service 

packages for every aspect of 

IT cooling 

Load test 

482.6 mm (19″) slide-in equipment which simulates 

the thermodynamic response of servers 

allows you to determine in advance whether your 

cooling system is adequate for any planned 

extensions. Furthermore, after installing the 

LCP family, the cooling response can be tested 

directly, without the presence of a server. 

Intelligent wireless sensor 

technology 

Sensors the size of a button record the temperature 

and humidity at specified locations in the 

rack. The location and time-dependent readings 

are extracted and displayed. The result is a 3D 

analysis of the data centre’s cooling response. 

Piping network calculation 

The Rittal specialists use a software package to 

design and dimension the pipe networks of liquid 

cooling systems, taking into consideration the 

architectural conditions. Specifications can be 

prepared for the local engineer. 

CFD (Computational Fluid 

Dynamics) 

A 3D computer simulation is used to visualise the 

thermodynamic response of the planned data 

centre with server racks and climate control system. 

Predicting the temperature, speed, pressure 

and hence flow conditions in the data centre facilitates 

fast reaction times. 

Thermography 

Using a thermal imaging camera illustrates the 

temperature conditions (surface) inside the data 

centre with colour coding, hotspots can be 

located and eliminated. 

Order number for an individual 

climate check. 

Model No. SK 3300.001 



Therm Software 

Rittal Therm is a calculation program for 

climate control of enclosures. 

All electrical and electronic components have a 

certain power loss which is dissipated to the environment 

in the form of heat. Because an increasing 

number of components are now being housed 

in ever smaller spaces, the heat produced can 

soon reach levels which are harmful to electronic 

components and may severely curtail their useful 

lives. 

The Therm software package takes care of the 

complex calculation of climate control requirements. 

A user-friendly interface guides the operator 

to the most suitable, correctly dimensioned 

climate control component. All evaluations are 

closely based on the requirements of IEC/ 

TR 60 890 AMD 1/02.95 and DIN 3168 for 

enclosure cooling units. 

Rittal Therm contains 15 languages. 

Advice, calculation, planning 

● Software Rittal Therm 

Simple calculation of heat 

loss, calculation of dissipation 

via the surface, device 

selection. 

● CFD (Computer Fluid Dynamics) 

offers system reliability, 

because the temperature, 

pressure and flow speed at 

every point of the calculated 

space are simulated at the 

planning phase. 

● Eliminate risks through 

thermography. Even with the 

prototype of your plant or 

machine, the Rittal thermography 

service offers precise 

imaging of the real temperature 

conditions on site. 

Cooling 


CD-ROM 

Model No. SK 3121.000 

Software 

System requirements (minimum): 

● Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP 

● Adobe Acrobat Reader version 4.x or above 

Note: 

Your 30-day trial version may be downloaded 

free of charge from www.rittal.com 

● Support 

Project planning, 

tests and measurements 

in the Rittal climate laboratory, 

commissioning, 

maintenance. 

151 

Cooling

152

Everything well 

under control 

The Computer Multi Control concept (CMC-TC) from Rittal 

provides security for every individual rack. In short, CMC-TC 

offers complete all-round protection from consequential 

costs; individual security which translates into general avail- 

ability. Preventive and, above all, flexible. Thanks to the 

extensive choice of models, individual monitoring functions 

may be freely selected and combined. Because it is 

designed for maximum modularity, the CMC-TC expands to 

keep pace with your company’s requirements. Benefits 

include plug & play installation with patch cables and the 

automatic detection of sensors. At the same time, the 

CMC-TC is the central organisational unit for connecting to 

facility management – and to the future. 


Everything the operator of climate 

control components needs to know is 

monitored by the CMC-TC system. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Security 

Access monitoring 

Monitoring of access control ensures 

regulated access to the rack. Personalised 

access is reported via SNMP 

and registered with the date/time. In 

addition to the coded lock, smart 

cards, magnetic cards or transponder 

systems may also be used. 

Security from page 154 

Monitoring system CMC-TC............................................................154 

Monitoring components ..................................................................155 

Basic module ..................................................................................158 

Optional basic module....................................................................159 

Sensor units ....................................................................................160 

Accessory modules ........................................................................164 

Connection/mounting accessories ................................................166 

Rack sensors ..................................................................................172 

Universal sensors/actuators ...........................................................174 

Power sensors ................................................................................175 

Access systems..............................................................................177 

Software ..........................................................................................183 

Rack extinguisher system...............................................................444 

Note: 

Processing Unit II, the basis of the system, see page 158. 

Long-range power supply, see page 96. 

Network management software, see page 183. 

Power supply 

Comprehensive monitoring and control – 

from the active PSM to intelligent subdistribution 

of electricity. Current, voltage 

and power may all be monitored. 

Individual sockets may be switched manually 

or on a function-dependent basis. 

153 

Security

Security 

Security 


Security – individual and flexible 

The CMC-TC offers a new dimension in flexibility, efficiency, 

technology and cost-effectiveness. The modular master/ 

slave system uses network technology as its communication 

system. In the past, bus systems were used for this purpose, 

but the CMC-TC system uses TCP/IP and SNMP for commu- 

Processing Unit 

PU II 

Sensor unit 

Sensor unit 

Racks with 

sensors/actuators, 

access, climate and 

power 


PU II 

LAN 

Sensor unit 

nication between the Master and Processing Unit II. This 

gives users the option of working with high performance, 

i.e. the CMC-TC master, or only with the Processing Unit II. 

The standardised interface on the Processing Unit II (PU II) 

allows even small individual applications to be achieved 

cost-effectively. The Master II may also be used. 


PU II 

Central monitoring 

and administration 

Sensor unit 

Master II 

Now with wireless 

sensor technology 

2.4 GHz! 


PU II 

The new wireless sensor technology 

unites the popular CMC-TC 

system with radio sensors. This 

transports the modular concept into 

a new dimension of flexibility. 

Existing IT infrastructures can also 

be easily retrofitted with the wireless 

sensor network. 

For detailed information, 

see page 436. 

154 Rittal IT catalogue/Security

Security: Access Rack 

Access Vandalism 

Magnetic card Numerical code 

Transponder Smart card 

Biometric Legic 

Monitoring of 

icing 

Temperature 

control 

Monitoring of 

filter mat 


Airflow monitoring 

Speed control Leakage 

detection 

Protection against data misuse 

is one of the most vital 

security factors in any company. 

The CMC-TC system 

regulates access to the 

server racks and records 

access. 

Any deviation from the setting 

is logged. The CMC-TC 

monitors the climate control 

components. 

Temperature 

monitoring 

Individual, analog 

input 

Individual, open, 

digital input 

Cooling Power 

Monitoring of 

humidity 

Monitoring of 

smoke 

Individual relay 

output 

Power supply Power control 

Overvoltage 

protection 

Voltage 

measurement 

Current 

measurement 

Security 

Monitoring components 

CMC-TC logs all safetyrelevant 

parameters on the 

inside and the outside of the 

rack using various sensors. 

The CMC-TC monitors voltages 

and currents, and 

controls the power supply for 

individual network components. 

155 

Security

Security 

Security 


The availability of IT systems is a critical factor for most 

companies. The security of the IT infrastructure begins with 

a single rack. 

The CMC-TC monitoring system is the complete security 

management concept for preventive protection, to guard 

against follow-on costs. At the same time, it is also the cen- 

tral organisational unit for connecting to facility management. 

Systematic planning 

In RiGetIT, Rittal offers a planning tool for the RimatriX5 data 

centre. The planner receives a parts list and an overview 

plan of the room and the rack. 

CMC-TC systematic software 

Software for setting and visualisation is already included in 

the basic CMC-TC components from Rittal. Users can view 

all key data and make settings via the integral Web server. 

Systematic monitoring 

With the network management systems 

● CMC-TC manager 

● RiWatchIT 

all safety-relevant information may be centrally visualised. 

This freeware software is available for downloading at 

www.rimatrix5.com. 


Automation is vital for managing complex IT systems efficiently. 

0° 


Security 


The CMC-TC Processing Unit II (PU II) forms the basis of any application and provides a direct interface to the user network. 

The sensor units are linked to the PU II with various sensors. The function of the CMC-TC monitoring system is determined 

by the selection of sensor units and sensors. 

Electronic systems with 

monitoring of temperatures, 

fans and DC voltages may 

be found on the Internet. 

I/O unit wireless 

Up to 16 sensors may be 

wirelessly incorporated into 

the CMC-TC system via this 

unit. 

Active Power System Module 

PSM, Power Control Unit PCU 

The sockets may be activated 

directly by the Processing Unit II, 

combined with an ammeter 

(max. 4 x 4 x 8 sockets). 

Access unit 

The doors of buildings, rooms 

and enclosures may be monitored, 

activated and opened via 

the network. 

RTT I/O unit 

LAN COM 

PLC X2 

RS-485 RS-232 

G + - 

RTT I/O unit 

Up to 10 climate control devices 

with Comfort controller may 

be connected via one unit in 

master/slave mode. 

LAN (SNMP/WEB) 

GSM (SMS) 

ISDN (SMS) 

ISDN/analog modem point 

to point (SNMP/WEB) 

Climate unit, Fan Control 

System FCS 

Fans are controlled via temperature 

sensors. Airflow monitors 

report any contamination of the 

filter mat, for example. The fan 

speed is controlled and monitored 

via the FCS. 

0˚ 0˚ 

Liquid Cooling Package LCP 

The professional LCP water 

cooling system for data centres 

may be linked directly to the 

Processing Unit II. 

Processing Unit II (PU II): the nerve centre 

of the monitoring system CMC-TC 

The PU II serves as a coordinator between 

the sensor unit and the network. It is configured 

via the integral Web server. 

Universal I/O unit 

This measurement and alarm 

module indicates motion, vibrations, 

doors being opened, 

temperatures exceeded, and 

much more besides. 

The sensors may be selected for 

the application. 

157 

Security

Security 

Security 

Basic module 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

IOIOI 

C 

1 2 3 4 

CMC-TC 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

1 2 

1 

P-I 

3 4 

2 C 

IOIOI 

Power 

24 V DC 

max. 2 A 

8 9 10 11 12 

Control key 

The “C” key is used for 

sensor/actuator detection, 

set-up of the system and 

acknowledgement. 

Alarm LED 

The LED signals alarms or 

configuration changes. 

Link/Traffic LED 

The LED indicates the status 

of the 10BaseT/100BaseT 

network interface. 

RS232 interface RJ 10 

For programming via a serial 

PC interface. 

LEDs for channels of 

sensor units 

The LEDs indicate the status 

of the connected sensor units. 

Audio alarm 

There is an audio alarm signalling 

device integrated into 

the PU II. 

Mounting attachment 

For attachment with individual 

bracket DK 7320.450 or 1 U 

mounting units DK 7320.440. 


Processing Unit II 

The Processing Unit II forms the basis of the 

CMC-TC system. This unit is required for every 

monitoring application. 

Benefits: 

● Freely selectable monitoring functions 

● Sensor/actuator ports extendible 

● TCP/IP SNMP network connection 

● Integral web server for configuration 

● Automatic menu generation 

● Simple installation based on the plug & play 

system 

● Alarm continues to record even in the event of 

a network failure 

● Built-in real-time clock with NTP 

● May be used with a power pack for 

100 – 240 V AC or 48 V DC 

● Choice of mounting on the enclosure frame or 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 

● The protocol for the master/slave system is 

TCP/IP SNMP 

● May be used for large data centres or small 

individual applications 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

Inputs for the RJ 45 sensor units 

Up to 4 sensor units may be connected to the 

PU II via the 4 inputs. The sensor units determine 

the function of the PU II. There is a 

choice of 12 sensor units: 

– I/O Unit DK 7320.210 

– Access Unit DK 7320.220 

– Climate Unit DK 7320.230 

– FCS DK 7320.810/DK 7858.488 

– RTT I/O Unit DK 3124.200 

– RLCP DK 3301.230/.420 

– Active PSM DK 7856.200/.201 

– RPCU DK 7200.001 

– MPS Monitoring 

Connection cable DK 7320.470. 

Power I2C bus RJ 45 

With the Power-I2C bus, up to 2 voltage extension 

units DK 7200.520 may be connected. 

Up to three AC voltages may be monitored 

with every extension unit. 


Alarm relay RJ 12/RS232 

The upper RJ 12 jack provides a change-over 

contact for the PU II alarm relay. 


The lower RJ 12 jack provides a serial interface 

(display unit/GSM module/ISDN unit/ 

Legic transponder handle/analog modem). 

Ethernet 10/100BaseT RJ 45 

Integral Ethernet interface to 

IEEE 802.3 via 10/100BaseT full-duplex 

10/100 Mbit/s. 

Voltage supply 

The rated voltage of the PU II is 24 V DC. 

There is a choice of power packs with varying 

primary voltages. AC power pack 

DK 7320.425. 

Interface to the customer: 

The PU II can be incorporated directly into the 

user network via 10/100BaseT. The PU II can also 

be linked to the master DK 7320.005 via this interface 

(TCP/IP, SNMP). 

Interface to the sensors/actuators: 

The PU II provides 4 open ports for sensor units. 

The sensor units determine the function of the 

PU II. There is a choice of 12 sensor units with different 

functions. In this way, the monitoring functions 

may be freely combined. 

Fast, easy programming and installation: 

The sensors/actuators are set up via an automatic 

electronic ID system. Installation is via a 

flexible plug & play system. This eliminates the 

need for time-consuming programming and wiring. 

Power supply: 

Power is supplied centrally via a power pack in 

the PU II. The connected sensor units and all 

connected sensors are supplied with power in 

this way. There is a choice of two input voltages 

(AC power pack DK 7320.425 and DC power 

pack DK 7320.435). 

Model No. DK 7320.100 

W x H x D mm 136 x 44 (1 U) x 129 

Network interface 

Protocols 

Ethernet to IEEE 802.3 

via 10/100BaseT full-duplex 

10/100 Mbit/s 

TCP/IP, SNMP V1.0, Telnet, 

Secure Shell SSH, FTP, HTTP, 

HTTPS with SSL, Network Time 

Protocol NTP, DHCP, PPP 

Rated voltage 24 V DC 

Serial interfaces RS232 

Ports for sensor 

units 

4 jacks RJ 45, shielded 

Bus system 

Power I2C for extension unit voltage 

AC DK 7200.520 

Alarm relay Change-over contact 

output 

max. 24 V DC 1 A 

Audio display Piezo signal generator 

Time function Real-time clock 

Temperature 

application range 

+5°C to +45°C 

Humidity appli- 5 % to 95 % relative humidity, 

cation range non-condensing 

IP protection 

category 

IP 40 to EN 60 529 


Sample configuration, 

see page 154. 

Connection cable DK 7320.470, 

see page 169. 


USB webcam available on request. 


3 

3 

2 

2 


Master II 

Benefits: 

● Centralised administration 

● Network connection 10/100BaseT 

● Central web server for configuration 

● Local administration via console VGA/PS/2 

● Logging function for alarm messages 

● Link for USB web camera 

● Free function selection for monitoring 

● Ideal for large data centres 

● Web access via SSL 3.0 

128 bit encryption 

● Remote administration via SSH 

● Monitoring functions may be linked together 

● E-mail function via SMTP 

● Video monitoring may be linked to the 

CMC-TC monitoring functions 

The CMC-TC Master II is an optional component 

in the CMC-TC system. The master allows the 

alarm data of up to 10 PU II systems to be linked 

and displayed. Special features of this system 

include its superior flexibility and performance. Up 

to 10 PU II systems may be distributed directly in 

the customer’s intranet. Like the PU II, the Master 

II can be placed at any position within 

the network. 

LAN 

1 

2 

3 

1 Master II 

2 Processing Unit II 

(PU II) 

3 Sensor unit 

Component shelf 

for attachment of the CMC-TC Master II 

The 2 U component shelf serves to accommodate 

the CMC-TC Master II in a 482.6 mm (19″) 

rack. 

Depth: 

400 mm 

Load capacity: 

25 kg surface load, static 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Security 

Optional basic module 

Users may directly access the web pages of the 

PU II or the web page of the Master II, where all 

data is combined and linked. The PU II transmits 

all monitoring-related data and messages to the 

master system via TCP/IP, SNMP. The master unit 

has a 10BaseT/100BaseT network interface for 

network integration. 

All monitoring data is provided in a separate MIB 

via TCP/IP, SNMP. The system may be configured 

remotely via the integral web server. Basic 

settings can also be implemented serially via 

RS232 or Telnet. A Telnet routing function to the 

individual Processing Units II is also pre-integrated, 

providing users with a clear central monitoring 

facility. For example, up to 160 temperature 

sensors may be accessed or up to 80 

enclosure doors may be monitored and activated 

via one IP address. Combined applications are 

also possible, and may be compiled individually 

from PU II and sensor units. Functional upgrades 

for the CMC-TC Master II are available on request 

in the form of a software update. Images may be 

archived on the hard drive via an optional web 

camera. Up to two USB cameras may be connected. 

USB webcam available on request. 



Network interface via 10BaseT/100BaseT, 

10/100 Mbit/s 

TCP/IP, SNMP V1.0, TELNET, SSH, 

Protocols 

TFTP, HTTPS 

Rated voltage 100 – 240 Volt AC, 50/60 Hz 

Serial interfaces 2 D-SUB 9 jacks RS232 

USB 

Standard 2.0 for Rittal USB 

webcams 

Time function Real-time clock 

Temperature 

application range 

+5°C to +35°C 

Humidity 

5 % to 80 % relative humidity, 

application range non-condensing 


A component shelf must also be ordered for each 

CMC-TC Master II, see page 159. 

Component shelf Model No. DK 

2 U 7119.400 

159 

Security

Security 

Security 

Sensor units 

1 

2 

3 

C 

CMC-TC 

I/O Unit 

1 2 3 

1 2 3 4 

I/O 

4 5 

CMC-TC sensor units 

Description 

I/O unit: 

The alarm and measurement module 

Access unit: 

For controlling door systems 

Climate unit: 

For fan control and monitoring 

Fan Control System FCS: 

For DC fan 

Benefits: 

● Choice of functions thanks to twelve sensor 

units 

● Open to customer-specific sensors/actuators 

● Automatic sensor detection 

● Simple installation based on the plug & play 

system 

● No additional power pack required 

● Choice of mounting on the enclosure frame or 


● I/O unit: Freely selectable sensors/actuators 

● Access unit: Personalised access detection 

● Climate unit: Fan control with airflow monitoring 

1 Interface for the sensor unit and processing 

unit connection. Used for data communication 

and power supply. Cable DK 7320.470 

2 Just one press of the button, and the system 

automatically reconfigures itself. 

3 Up to 3 systems may be integrated into the 

1 U mounting unit DK 7320.440 

I/O unit 

This allows alarm messages, status messages 

and measurements to be forwarded or remote 

actions to be executed via relay output modules. 

The I/O unit has 4 universal inputs/outputs. The 

sensors/actuators listed below can be operated 

here. 

The interface to the user network is via the PU II 

(processing unit), which is always required to 

operate the system. 

1 

2 

3 

Control key for detection/set-up of the 

sensors/actuators 

Alarm LED signals alarms or configuration 

changes 

Mounting fixture for DK 7320.440 or 

DK 7320.450 

4 RJ 12, 4 inputs for sensors/actuators 

(see table) 

5 RJ 45, connection to PU II DK 7320.100 via 

connection cable DK 7320.470 (The unit is 

also supplied with power via this connection.) 

Note: 

For selection aid, see page 166. 


The sensors/actuators are set up via an automatic 

electronic ID system. Because it is installed 

using a flexible plug & play system, there is no 

need for time-consuming programming and 

wiring. Power is supplied centrally via the connection 

cable to the PU II. 


W x H x D: 136 mm x 44 mm (1 U) x 129 mm 

Temperature application range: +5°C to +45°C 

Humidity application range: 

5 % to 95 % relative humidity, 

non-condensing 


IP 40 to EN 60 529 


Connection cable DK 7320.470, 

see page 169. 

I/O unit Model No. DK 

4 universal inputs or outputs 7320.210 


Sensors/actuators Max. 

Model No. 

DK 

Page 

Temperature sensor 4 7320.500 172 

Humidity sensor 4 7320.510 172 

Analog sensor input 

module “4 – 20 mA” 

4 7320.520 174 

Access sensor1) 4 x 5 7320.530 177 

Vandalism sensor 4 7320.540 177 

Airflow monitor 4 7320.550 173 

Smoke alarm 4 7320.560 173 

Motion sensor 4 7320.570 177 

Digital input module 4 7320.580 174 

Digital relay output module 4 7320.590 174 

Voltage monitor 4 7320.600 175 

Voltage monitor with 

10 A switch output 

2 – 4 7320.610 175 

Voltage monitor with 

16 A switch output 

2 – 4 7320.611 176 

48 V voltage monitor 4 7320.620 176 

Leakage sensor 4 7320.630 172 

Connection cable 7320.470 197 

1) Up to a maximum of 5 sensors may be connected in 

series. 


C CMC-TC 

Access Unit 

1 2 3 

4 


1 

2 

5 6 7 

C CMC-TC 

Climate Unit 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 

Access unit 

With this sensor unit, one or two doors may be 

released for access via the network, or personalised 

opening via a read system (e.g. smartcard 

reader) may be initiated. The system also monitors 

the status of the door, handle or latch. Authorised 

access codes can be set up via HTTP. The 

sensors/actuators/readers listed below can be 

operated here. 

In order to operate the unit, at least one access 

sensor and at least one latch (e.g. handle) per 

door system must always be used. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Control key for detection/set-up of the sensors/actuators 


changes 


DK 7320.450 

Inputs for access sensor, handles 

Latch system 1 (see table) 

Inputs for access sensor, handles 

Latch system 2 (see table) 

I2C bus for reader units Door system 1 and 2 

(see table) 

RJ 45 connection to PU II DK 7320.100 via 



Climate unit 

A temperature control circuit is installed with this 

sensor unit. Temperature setpoints are set via the 

PU II, and these are compared with the actual 

temperature. Depending on the result, the fan system 

is activated. Additional functions of the fans 

can also be monitored with an airflow sensor. 

Monitoring is only active whilst the fan is operational. 

Other sensors may optionally be connected 

to the unit. 

In order to operate the unit as a temperature fan 

control circuit, at least one temperature sensor 

must always be used. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Control key for detection/set-up of the 

sensors/actuators 


changes 


DK 7320.450 

Input for fan supply 115/230 V AC, cable 

7200.210 – .215 

Output to fan with cable DK 7200.215 

RJ 12, 2 inputs for sensors/actuators 

(see table) 

RJ 45 connection to PU II DK 7320.100 via 



Note: 


Security 

Sensor units 

Access unit Model No. DK 

Control of 2 door systems 7320.220 


Sensors/actuators Max. 

Model No. 

DK 

Page 


Digital input module 

for door release 

Latch/reader 

2 7320.580 174 

Ergoform-S handle 

FR/PS/TC/TE 

2 7320.700 179 

Electromagnetic 

Ergoform-S QR 

2 on request 179 

Comfort handle TS 8 with 

master key function 

2 7320.721 178 

Universal lock unit 2 7320.730 180 

Digital relay output module 

for room door 

2 7320.740 178 

Universal handle 2 7320.950 179 

Smart card reader 


2 7320.750 182 

Magnetic card reader 


2 7320.760 182 

Coded lock 


2 7320.770 182 

Connection cable 7320.470 197 


series. 

Climate unit Model No. DK 

Control of a fan system 7320.230 


Sensors Max. 

Model No. 

DK 

Page 

Temperature sensor 2 7320.500 172 


Airflow monitor 2 7320.550 173 

Smoke alarm 2 7320.560 173 

Motion sensor 2 7320.570 177 

Digital input module 2 7320.580 174 

Voltage monitor 2 7320.600 175 

48 V voltage monitor 2 7320.620 176 


Note: 


7320.470, 

7200.210 

197 

167 


series. 

161 

Security

Security 

Security 

Sensor units 

5 

Fan Control System FCS 

Speed-controlled fan system 

The Fan Control System regulates and controls 

the speed of up to 6 fans DK 7320.812, 24 V DC. 

This helps to save energy and reduce the noise 

level of the fans, as well as extending the service 

life. The failure of one or more fans is detected 

and notified in the form of a collective fault signal 

via LED display, beeper and integral alarm relay 

(floating change-over contact). 

Control is temperature-based using an external 

temperature sensor DK 7320.500. The temperature 

setpoint is set via a switch on the front. The 

system may also optionally be set and monitored 

via the network (Web/SNMP). It is connected 

directly to the CMC-TC – Processing Unit II – 

DK 7320.100. 

3 

4 

2 

1 

24 V DC 

Speed-monitored/ 

controlled fan system/DC 

Benefits: 

● Excellent air throughput at a high operating 

ratio 

● Monitoring of fan speed 

● Plug and play compatibility system 

● Easily installed in Rittal fan roofs 

● Long service life 

● Noise minimisation/speed control 

● Alarm message via the CMC-TC in the network 

optionally possible 

● Open supply system 

24/48 V DC/100 – 230 V AC. 

● EMC compatibility via DC fan systems 

FCS 

To fit 


Model No. DK 

Without fan 7320.810 

Functions: 

● Speed-regulated speed control 

● Fan speed monitoring 

● Optional connection via Web/SNMP 

● Redundant fan control; the air throughput of all 

fans is automatically increased in the event of 

a system failure. 

● Plug & play installation via RJ 12 connector 

system 

● 482.6 mm (19″) mounting is possible via 

DK 7320.440 

Note: 

Supplied pre-configured on request: 

The FCS system may be fitted in all Rittal fan 

roofs. 

FCS fitted in fan roof, 

see page 124. 

1 Supply with 24 V DC via 

– Supply connection cable (direct) 

DK 7320.813 

– CMC 24 V power pack 100 – 230 V AC 

(input) DK 7320.425 

– CMC 24 V power pack 48 V DC (input) 

DK 7320.435 

2 RJ 45 jack for connecting to Processing 

Unit II DK 7320.100 (optional) 

(Cat 5 cable) 

3 CMC-TC temperature sensor DK 7320.500 

4 Alarm relay output 

24/48 V DC, 1 A (floating change-over contact) 

5 Fan with speed control 

DK 7320.812 (24 V DC) 

Equipment 

Properties 

Model No. FCS 

DK 7320.810 

Fan speed monitoring 

Pre-selectable speed 

Non-temperature-dependent 

speed 

 

Speed increase 

in the event of a fan failure 

 

Collective fault signal 

Floating change-over contact 

LAN connection via PU II 

Configurable via LAN 

Alarm output 

Beeper, LED, relay, 

RJ 45 output for PU II 

FCS sample order list: 

Control system with fan control and monitoring of 6 fans 

Description Packs of 

Model No. 

DK 

Page 

Fan Control System FCS 1 7320.810 162 

CMC-TC power pack 24 V, input 100 – 230 V AC 1 7320.425 167 

CMC-TC temperature sensor 1 7320.500 172 

Fan 24 V DC (packs of 2) with speed monitoring 3 7320.812 163 

RJ 12 extension for DC fan, 1 m (packs of 2) 3 7320.814 169 

CMC connection cable D 230 V AC 1 7200.210 167 



Fan 24 V DC for FCS 

with speed monitoring 

Fan with integral speed monitoring with RJ 12 

connector/connection cable 0.6 m for connecting 

to FCS DK 7320.810. 



Rated current: 0.28 A (max.) 

Rated output: 6.72 W (max.) 

Air throughput (unimpeded air flow): 165 m 3 /h 

Speed: 2650 rpm 

Noise level: 41 dB (A) 

RTT I/O unit 

for TopTherm cooling units with 

Comfort controller 

The interface card is an extension for TopTherm 

cooling units with Comfort controller. In this way it 

is possible, e.g. to monitor a master/slave combination 

of up to 10 cooling units. Control is via 

standardised interfaces: RS232 (DB9) or RS485, 

one PLC interface (DB9). The RTT I/O unit may 

also be connected to the Processing Unit II. This 

means that remote monitoring can be achieved 

via the network. The extension card is built into a 

1 U plastic housing. A voltage supply of 24 V DC 

is needed. This may be supplied from the CMC- 

TC via a wide-range power pack DK 7320.425 

(100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz) or externally via a 

Kycon connector. 


Interface card integrated into plastic box 

W x H x D (mm): 136 x 44 (1 U) x 129. 

Serial sub-D cable 1.5 m. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

RTT I/O unit 

PLC X2 

LAN COM 

RS-485 

G+ - 

RS-232 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

PLC X2 Optocoupler alarm 

Outputs for SPS 

LAN LED Internal communication 

COM LED Status of serial interfaces 

RJ 45 for connecting to Processing Unit II 

DK 7320.100 

RS485 interface 

RS232 for set-up with serial PC interface 

(e.g. Hyperterm) 


DK 7320.450 

Security 

Sensor units 


2 7320.812 


1 3124.200 

Functions/settings: 

● Setpoint temperature for enclosure 

● Alarm temperature value for enclosure 

● Warning temperature value for enclosure 

● Filter mat monitoring 

Warnings/alarms: 

● Internal temperature too high 

● Icing 

● High-pressure sensor 

● Leakage 

● Condenser/fan defect 

● Evaporator coil/fan defect 

● Compressor defect 

● Sensor failure, condenser temperature 

● Sensor failure, ambient temperature 

● Sensor failure, icing sensor 

● Sensor failure, condensate level 

● Sensor failure, internal temperature 

● Phase missing or incorrect 

● EEPROM defect 

Power 

24 V DC 

max. 160 mA 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

RES MEM 

1234 

8 9 10 11 12 

Other products from the cooling/power range 

with integral sensor unit for connecting to the CMC-TC system 

The ISDN unit may optionally be supplied with 

24 V DC, 160 mA via this input. For applications 

with the PU II, this is not necessary. 

RES Reset key 

MEM EEPROM fault 

Changeover switch Serial interface 

LAN Connection to the master cooling unit 

with comfort control 

Description Topic Model No. DK Page 

LCP Standard, D = 1000 mm Cooling 3301.230 130 

LCP Standard, D = 1200 mm Cooling 3301.420 130 

Power Control Unit PCU Power 7200.001 330 

Active PSM, 4-way Power 7856.200 101 

Active PSM, 8-way Power 7856.201 101 

LAN 

163 

Security

Security 

Security 

Accessory modules 

CMC-TC Display Unit II 

ISDN 

C 

1 2 3 4 

Power 

24 V DC 

max. 2 A 

5 6 

1 2 

3 

ISDN 

4 

IOIOI 

CMC-TC 

ISDN UNIT 

Power 

24 V DC 

max. 80 mA 

5 6 

Display Unit II 

The new Display Unit II may be linked directly to 

the PU II (DK 7320.100). CMC alarms, status messages, 

temperatures, voltages, currents etc. may 

be displayed on the screen, depending on the 

monitoring application. Additionally, the TCP/IP 

network settings of the PU II may be made using 

the three keys. 

The new LCD graphics module (122 x 32 pixels) 

is very easy to read, with good contrast and a 

modern design. The display is blue and white. 

It is illuminated via an LED. 

It is mounted in the 1 U component support 

DK 7320.440 or with the individual mounting unit 

DK 7320.450. 

Power supply is via the processing unit PU II. 

Power supply and data communication to the 

PU II is via the supplied patch cable. 

1 LCD display illuminates (122 x 32 pixels) 

2 “Change” for selection 

3 “Enter” to confirm 

4 “Clear” to delete/acknowledge 

5 

6 

RJ 12 jack for connecting to the serial 

interface of the PU II 

The GSM unit may optionally be supplied with 



ISDN unit 

In order to configure a redundant transmission 

channel or if there is no network infrastructure 

available, the unit may be used for alarm forwarding. 

The alarm signal is designed in SMS format. 

The ISDN unit is linked to the processing unit II 

DK 7320.100 via a serial interface. Power is likewise 

supplied via the connection cable. An ISDN 

connection is required in order to operate the 

module (see the requirements for an ISDN connection). 

Up to four target call numbers may be 

set and allocated to the various events. This variant 

of alarm reporting may also be used in countries 

with “SMS in the fixed network”. Furthermore, 

with “SMS in the fixed network”, it is also 

possible to control switch outputs via an SMS. 

Power is supplied via the Processing Unit II. 

CMC data may also be retrieved via the Web, 

Telnet or SNMP with the PPP protocol. In such 

cases, the SMS function cannot be used. 

Other functions, where offered by the provider: 

● Voice mail 

1 Alarm LED 

2 Status ISDN-LED 

3 Mounting fixture for DK 7320.440 or 

DK 7320.450 

4 RJ 45 ISDN jack 

5 RJ 12 jack for connecting to the serial 

interface of the PU II 

6 The ISDN unit may optionally be supplied with 




1 7320.491 


● Plug and play compatibility system with 

RJ 12 connector 

● 122 x 32 pixel graphical display 

● Colours blue and white 

● LED lights up 


Display module, cable for connecting to the PU II 

Note: 

The serial interface RS232 of the PU II may only 

be assigned to one accessory module. 


Component Model No. DK 

Processing Unit II 7320.100 

Components Model No. DK 

ISDN unit 7320.830 

Requirements for the ISDN connection: 

● DSS1 (Euro-ISDN) must also be provided when 

connecting to the ISDN system 

● Point-to-multi-point configuration 

Note: 







C CMC-TC 

GSM Modul 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 


Power 

24 V DC 

max. 2 A 

GSM unit 

In order to configure a redundant transmission 

channel or if there is no network infrastructure 

available, the unit may be used for alarm forwarding. 

The alarm signal is designed in SMS format. 

The GSM unit is linked to the Processing Unit II 

DK 7320.100 via a serial interface. Power is likewise 

supplied via the connection cable. The only 

other thing needed to operate the module is a SIM 

card. These may either be “data only” cards or 

conventional SIM cards. 

The GSM unit operates in the 900/1800 MHz frequency 

range – in other words, either D or E network 

cards may be used. Up to four target call 

numbers may be set and allocated to the various 

events. 

Other functions, where offered by the provider: 

● Voice mail 

1 Alarm LED 

2 GSM LED 

3 Mounting fixture for DK 7320.440 or 

DK 7320.450 

4 SIM card rack mount 

5 Aerial connection 

6 RJ 12 jack for connecting to the serial interface 

of the PU II 

7 The GSM unit may optionally be supplied with 



Adaptor cable 

for analog modems, PPP application 

The Processing Unit II supports the PPP protocol, 

making it possible to operate the CMC-TC application 

outside of LAN networks. The PU II may be 

connected via adaptor DK 7320.831 to an analog 

modem with AT-HAYES instruction set to the telephone 

network. Alternatively, the ISDN unit 

DK 7320.830 may be used. The adaptor cable is 

not required for the ISDN unit. 

The tools 

– CMC menu program 

– CMC Web server 

– SNMP 

may be used in the WAN. Suitable computers 

must be available for monitoring. 

The CMC menus may be displayed via the dial-in 

PPP functions integrated into the software. SNMP 

alarm traps, for example, may be sent from the 

PU II via dial-out. The security concept is established 

using the call-back function. 

Suitable analog modem available on request. 

Security 

Accessory modules 

GSM unit Model No. DK 

SMS function 7320.820 

To activate CMC-TC switch outputs, an SMS message 

may be sent to the modem via any standard 

mobile phone, so as to execute the actions via 

this route. The aerial included with the supply has 

a connection cable of 2.8 m. Voltage supply is 

achieved via the Processing Unit II. 

A standard SIM card for D or E networks must be 

provided by the customer. 

Note: 







1 7320.831 

Technical specifications, adaptor: 

● D-Sub9 connection for analog modem 

● RJ 12 connector for PU II 


Adaptor for analog modem, 


Note: 




Component Model No. DK 


165 

Security

Security 

Security 

Connection/mounting accessories 

Examples 

The basic system 

The Processing Unit II (PU) forms 

the basis of any CMC-TC application. 

Connectivity is offered by the 

network interface (10/100BaseT, 

TCP/IP, SNMP, Web) which connects 

directly into the user network 

or to the CMC-TC master. 

The following products are required 

for each CMC-TC application: 

● Processing Unit II 

(DK 7320.100) 

● Power pack 100 – 240 V 

50 – 60 Hz (DK 7320.425) 

or power pack 48 V DC 

(DK 7320.435) 

● Connection cable for power 

pack, country-specific 

(DK 7200.210 – .215) 

● Connection cable for sensor 

unit (DK 7320.470) 

● At least one sensor unit 

(DK 7320.210/.220/.230 etc.) 

● Programming cable 

(DK 7200.221) 

Example of a rack 

Functions: 

Temperature, humidity, smoke, access monitoring 

(doors/side panels) 


for sensor units 

Up to 4 sensor units 


Programming cable 

Alarm routes: 

Via the network and GMS/SMS 

Power supply: 

German network 230 V, 50 Hz 

Power pack 


for power pack 

Components Qty. Model No. DK 

CMC-TC Processing Unit II 1 7320.100 

CMC-TC I/O unit 1 7320.210 

CMC-TC GSM unit 1 7320.820 

CMC-TC power pack 24 V, input 100 – 230 V AC 1 7320.425 

CMC-TC 1 U mounting unit 1 7320.440 

CMC-TC connection cable, sensor unit, length 0.5 mm (packs of 4) 1 7320.470 

CMC-TC temperature sensor 1 7320.500 

CMC-TC humidity sensor 1 7320.510 

CMC-TC smoke alarm 1 7320.560 

CMC-TC access sensor (packs of 2) 4 7320.530 

CMC-TC connection cable D 230 V AC 1 7200.210 

CMC-TC programming cable 1 7200.221 

Example of a TS 8 rack 

Functions: 

Fan with speed control, monitoring and access 

control remote + coded lock 

Note: 

Fan mountings must be ordered according to the 

specific enclosure size. 

Alarm routes: 

Via the network and Display Unit II 

Power supply: 

US network 110 V, 60 Hz, redundant with A/B 

supply monitored 

Components Qty. Model No. DK 


CMC-TC I/O Unit 1 7320.210 

CMC-TC Access Unit 1 7320.220 

CMC-TC Fan Control System FCS 1 7320.810 

CMC-TC Display Unit II 1 7320.491 

CMC-TC power pack 24 V, input 100 – 230 V AC 2 7320.425 

CMC-TC redundant power supply 1 7320.426 

CMC-TC second supply connection cable 24 V 1 7320.813 


CMC-TC connection cable, sensor unit, length 0.5 mm (packs of 4) 3 7320.470 

CMC-TC temperature sensor 1 7320.500 

CMC-TC access sensor (packs of 2) 4 7320.530 

CMC-TC comfort handle TS 8 with master key function 2 7320.721 

CMC-TC coded lock 1 7320.770 

CMC-TC fan 24 V DC with speed monitoring (packs of 2) 6 7320.812 

CMC-TC RJ 12 extension for DC fan, 1 m (packs of 2) 6 7320.814 

CMC-TC connection cable US 115 V, 60 Hz 2 7200.215 

CMC-TC programming cable 1 7200.221 



Connection cable/extension 

The cable is used to connect to: 

● CMC-TC Master II 

● 24 V power pack for PU II 

● Active fan unit for TE 

● Climate unit (connected fan) 

● Voltage monitor 

● Voltage expansion unit 


PVC cable, 3-pin, with IEC cable coupling (nonheating 

appliances) with contact protection CEE22. 


1 connection cable, length min. 1.8 m. 

Connection/ 

extension cable C19/C20 

The earthing pin/C19 connection cable 

DK 7200.216 is needed in order to supply power 

to the voltage monitor with 16 A C19/C20 switch 

output DK 7320.611. 

The C19/C20 extension cable DK 7200.217 is 

needed for the voltage monitor with 16 A C19/C20 

switch output DK 7320.611 in order to connect a 

device. 


3-pole PVC cable with IEC cable coupling 

C19/C20/earthing pin. 


1 connection cable/extension cable, 

length: 2 m. 

Power pack for PU II, FCS 

A 24 V DC power pack is required to supply the 

Processing Unit II with power. There are two 

variants available: 

● The 100 – 240 V AC power pack requires an 

IEC connection cable to supply the voltage. 

● An alternative power pack is designed for the 

telecommunications sector (48 V battery voltages) 

and is connected at the input end via a 

terminal block. 

Both power packs contain an output cable, 

1.65 m long. 


Rated voltage: 100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 


Secondary range: 24 V DC, 3 A 


Rated voltage: 20 – 72 V DC 


Secondary range: 24 V DC, 1.3 A 

Supply connection cable 

for PU II/FCS 

If the customer is able to provide 24 V DC, the 

systems PU II/FCS may be supplied wtih power 

via the supply connection cable. No power packs 

are then required for the application. The cable is 

also used to extend the redundant power supply 

of the CMC-TC. 

Security 


Country 

Version 

Voltage 

V 

Model No. 

DK 

D/F/B 230 7200.210 

GB 230 7200.2111) CH 230 7200.2131) USA/CDN 230/115 7200.2141) IEC 320 extension 230/115 7200.215 



D/C19 


C19/C20 

Primary 

input voltage 

100 – 240 V AC/ 

50/60 Hz 


Output voltage 

1 7200.216 

1 7200.217 

Model No. 

DK 

24 V DC 7320.425 

48 V DC 24 V DC 7320.435 


Connection cable for power pack DK 7320.425, 

see page 167. 

Packs of Length Model No. DK 

1 2 m 7320.813 

167 

Security

Security 

Security 


Redundant power supply 

The Y-adaptor supports a redundant design of the 

power supply to the CMC-TC system. 

System supply inputs: 

The Y-adaptor has two 24 V DC inputs. This 

allows the connection of two 230 V AC power 

packs DK 7320.425 or two 48 V DC power packs 

DK 7320.435. The input therefore has a dual 

design. If one input fails, the second supply input 

will supply the required power. The system operates 

without interruption. 

Alarm display: 

There are two LEDs on the front of the device 

which display the status of the two supply inputs. 

At the rear there are two RJ 12 jacks which may 

be connected to the I/O unit DK 7320.210 of the 

CMC-TC system and indicate the status of the 

supply inputs. 

System supply output: 

The system has one 24 V DC output which is 

accessed via terminals at the rear of the enclosure. 

The terminals may be connected to the 

power input of the PU II (DK 7320.100) and FCS 

(DK 7320.810) using the supply connection cable 

DK 7320.813. The terminals have a 3-way design, 

allowing the connection of up to 3 cables. 

A supply connection cable is included with the 

supply. 


Example: 

1 Connection cable DK 7200.210 

2 Power pack DK 7320.425 

3 Redundant power supply 

DK 7320.426 

4 Supply connection cable 

5 Alarm outputs U1/U2 

6 Processing Unit II DK 7320.100 

7 Connection cable DK 7320.470 

8 I/O unit DK 7320.210 

C CMC-TC 

I/O-Unit 

C CMC-TC 

I/O-Unit 

Installation: 

May be mounted in the 1 U component support 

DK 7320.440 or with the individual mounting unit 

DK 7320.450. 

Technical specifications, adaptor: 

● Rated voltage 24 V DC 

● Max. output current 3 A 


Y-adaptor, 1 supply connection cable, 

two RJ 12 connection cables for I/O unit. 

Note: 

If several items of equipment are connected, 

a maximum of 3 A may be taken in total. 

Input 1 Input 2 

C CMC-TC 

Y-Adapter 

IOIOI 

1 2 3 4 

C CMC-TC 


C CMC-TC 

I/O-Unit 

C CMC-TC 

I/O-Unit 

168 Rittal IT catalogue/Security 

7 

3 

6 

1 

U1 U2 

230 V AC 

1 

2 2 

24 V DC 

4 

8 8 8 8 

230 V AC 

24 V DC 

24 V DC 


1 7320.426 

Description No. of packs Required Optional Model No. DK Page 

AC power pack 230 V or 

DC power pack 48 V 

Connection cable D/F/B or 

Connection cable GB or 

Connection cable CH or 

Connection cable USA/CDN or 

Connection cable C13 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

5 

7320.425 1) 

7320.435 

7200.210 1) 

7200.211 1) 

7200.213 1) 

7200.214 1) 

7200.215 1) 

Supply connection cable (additional) 1 – 2 – 7320.813 167 

1 U mounting unit 1 – 7320.440 170 

Mounting module CMC 1 – 7320.450 170 

I/O unit 1 – 7320.2102) 160 

1) A connection cable is required for a power pack 

2) A complete CMC-TC system is required to operate the I/O unit 

167 

167 

167 

167 

167 

167 

167



The interface cable is used to configure the network 

parameters in the Processing Unit II and the 

Master Unit. 

The RJ 10 connector is connected to the front 

jack of the PU/Master, whilst the 9-pole SUB-D 

connector is connected to a serial PC interface. 

Connection cable RJ 45 

This cable is for data exchange and power supply 

to a sensor unit via the Processing Unit II. There is 

an RJ 45 connector at each end of the shielded 

cable. Additionally, the cables are used for applications 

with the CMC-TC Master II, extension unit 

DK 7200.520 and SSC applications. 


RJ 10, RJ 12 

The RJ 12 connection cable allows the alarm relay 

output of the Processing Unit II to be used for individual 

alarm lights/indicators. The RJ 10 connection 

cable facilitates connection to the CMC 

socket strip in conjunction with the digital input 

module. The cable is equipped with an RJ 10/12 

connector at one end. The other end is open. 


RJ 12 

The cable is used to extend the sensor supply 

cables (RJ 12) and individual actuator cables. The 

cable is equipped at the end with an 

RJ 10/12 connector. There is an RJ 10/12 jack at 

the other end. 

Example: RJ 12 

6 1 

Security 



1 7200.221 

Length m Packs of Model No. DK 

0.5 4 7320.470 

2 4 7320.472 

5 4 7320.475 

10 1 7320.481 

15 1 7320.485 

Connector Length m Packs of Model No. DK 

RJ 10 5 4 7200.420 

RJ 12 5 4 7200.430 

Connector/jack Length m Packs of Model No. DK 

RJ 12 5 4 7200.450 

RJ 12 1 2 7320.814 

169 

Security

Security 

Security 


Mounting unit, 1 U 

The mounting unit can accommodate up to 

3 sensor units or Processing Units II and is used 

for accommodation in the 482.6 mm (19″) attachment 

level. Cable clamp straps DK 7610.000 or 

DK 7611.000 can be used for cable clamping. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Single cover 

for 1 U mounting unit 

For CMC-TC applications the CMC-TC modules 

are attached to the 482.6 mm (19″) system of the 

enclosures via the 1 U mounting unit 

DK 7320.440. Up to 3 modules may be attached 

in one unit. Depending on the application, 1 or 2 

installation openings will be left free. With a ventilated 

application, there is the risk of an air shortcircuit. 

The free spaces may be covered with this 

single cover. The single cover consists of a film 

which is attached with adhesive and which may 

be removed again if necessary. 


2 single covers. 

Mounting module CMC 

The mounting module is used to accommodate 

individual sensor units or processing units, for 

attaching to the frame section. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 


1 7320.440 

Accessories: 

Cable clamp straps, 

see page 356. 


2 7320.441 


1 7320.450 



Fixture unit, 1 U 

for CMC-TC sensors 

The fixture unit offers the option of accommodating 

up to 22 CMC-TC sensors. Depending on the 

design, there is a choice of 9 types (see table). 

This produces a patch front with 22 RJ 12 jacks. 

For sensors such as the digital input, the connection 

to external systems may be made at the rear 

of the fixture unit. Incoming cables may still be 

clamped at the rear with cable ties. With this 

application, a height of 1 U is maintained. 

Alternatively, the fixture unit can also accommodate 

up to 6 voltage monitors DK 7320.600. In this 

case, the installation height of 1 U is exceeded 

due to the large sensor height. 

This provides CMC-TC sensors such as the digital 

input with a fixture unit in the 482.6 mm (19″) 

section of IT enclosures, ensuring professional 

accommodation of several sensors with neat 

cable clamping. 


1 U fixture unit, trim panel. 

Alarm signal lamp CMC 

The alarm signal lamp serves as a collective fault 

signal for all alarms in the CMC-TC. 

For example: Temperature exceeded, fan defect, 

smoke alarm etc. The CMC-TC provides a userfriendly 

menu allowing the operator to select 

which message will affect the CMC-TC alarm 

relay. 

The alarm signal lamp is activated via the alarm 

relay. 

The lamp may be attached to the network enclosure 

or any other desired position, e.g. in the 

corridor. 

The RJ 12 connection cable is needed for 

connecting to the PU II. 

Interference suppression 

capacitors 

for fans 

The capacitors are used for the interference suppression 

of fans with self-starting shaded pole 

motors. One capacitor should be connected 

directly parallel to the mains voltage for each fan 

unit. The capacitors are equipped with a terminal, 

which means that they are easily fitted to the fan 

cable. 

Security 



1 7320.445 

Matching sensors/identification unit: 

Description 

Max. 

(qty.) 

Model No. 

DK 

Temperature sensor 22 7320.500 

Analog input 4 – 20 mA 22 7320.520 

Vandalism sensor 22 7320.540 

Digital input 22 7320.580 

Relay output 22 7320.590 

48 V voltage sensor DC 22 7320.620 

Identification unit, universal lock 22 7320.730 

Room door output module 22 7320.740 

Voltage monitor 6 7320.600 

Item Model No. SZ 

LED steady light component 

24 V DC red 

2372.000 

Connection component 2368.010 

To fit Processing Unit II, see page 158. 


Rated operating voltage: 24 V DC 

Rated current: 60 mA 


Connection cable RJ 12 (K 7200.430), 

see page 169. 


100 nF 20 7200.490 


Dielectric strength: 275 V AC 

Capacity: 100 nF 

Type: X2 

171 

Security

Security 

Security 

Rack sensors 

Temperature sensor 

The sensor assumes the function of a temperature 

monitor and contains an ID so that it is automatically 

detected and set up by the CMC-TC 

system. It is connected to a sensor unit via the 

connection cable supplied loose. The sensor can 

also control a fan on the climate unit or fan control 

system (FCS). 

Humidity sensor 

The sensor measures relative air humidity and 

converts it into a frequency signal. It contains an 

ID so that it is automatically detected and set up 

by the CMC-TC system. Power supply and data 

evaluation is performed by the I/O sensor unit via 

the connection cable supplied loose. 

Leakage sensor 

The leakage sensor is equipped with an optical 

sensor head. If this sensor head becomes wet it 

reports a leakage alarm. 

The sensor head may be mounted facing the 

floor. If water collects there and comes into contact 

with the sensor head, the alarm is triggered. 

The sensor contains an identifier allowing it to be 

automatically detected and set up by the CMC-TC 

system. The connection cable, supplied loose, 

should be used for connection to the sensor unit. 

To fit sensor unit: 


1 7320.500 

I/O unit Access unit Climate unit FCS 

 


Type: NTC 

Resistance: 10 kOhm at 25°C 

Tolerance: ±2° C 

Connection: RJ 12 jack, 6-pole 

Connection cable: Length 2 m, 

RJ 12 connector 6/6 on both sides 




1 7320.510 

I/O unit 

 

Access unit Climate unit 


Sensor: with humidity/frequency converter 

(50 kHz at 76 % rel. humidity) 

Sensor measurement range: 

Relative humidity 10...90 % rel. humidity ±3 % 

(at 20°C) 







1 7320.630 

I/O unit 

 



Monitoring: Visual 






IP 40 



Airflow monitor 

The airflow monitor determines whether the fan is 

achieving its full operating capacity. 

Storage damage, dirty filter mats or jammed fan 

blades are promptly detected and reported by the 

sensor. The sensor contains an identifier allowing 

it to be automatically detected and set up by the 

CMC-TC system. Its switch point is adjustable. 


Connection: RJ 12 jack, 6-pole on the cable 

Connection cable: Length 2 m 


Smoke alarm 

The smoke alarm is based on an opto-electronic 

smoke particle evaluation within a measurement 

chamber. The alarm contains an ID so that it is 

automatically detected and set up by the CMC-TC 

system. The power supply and alarm relay to the 

sensor unit occurs via the supplied connection 

cable. 


Security 

Rack sensors 


1 7320.550 

I/O unit Access unit Climate unit 

 

Note: 

The sensor can be operated with temperaturecontrolled 

fan via the climate unit sensor unit. 



1 7320.560 


 


Alarm type: Combustion product alarm (smoke) 

Sensor/transmitter: Silicon PIN photodiode/ 

GaAs infr. LED 

Measurement frequency: Once every ten seconds 

Power consumption: Max. 61 mA 




Dimensions (alarm with base/plinth): 

D = 100 mm, H = 50 mm 


173 

Security

Security 

Security 

Universal sensors/actuators 

Analog sensor input module 

The input module facilitates the connection of individual 

external analog sensors (4 – 20 mA) 

to the I/O sensor unit. As an adaptor, it performs 

the function of identification, so that an external 

sensor is automatically identified and set up by 

the CMC-TC system. 

Sensors with 4 – 20 mA signal output and 24 V DC 

operating voltage (max. 50 mA) may be connected. 

The CMC-TC makes its internal power 

source available. 

It is connected to a sensor unit via the connection 

cable supplied loose. 

Digital sensor input module 

The input module facilitates the connection of individual 

external digital sensors to a sensor unit. As 

an adaptor, it performs the function of identification, 

so that an external sensor is automatically 

identified and set up by the CMC-TC system. 

External sensors or detectors must have a floating 

contact (normally-closed or normally-open). 


cable supplied loose. 

In conjunction with the access unit, any given 

door release system (e.g. transponder) with a 

floating relay contact may be connected via the 

input module. 

The input can be used as either “Normally Open” 

or “Normally Closed”. 

Relay output module 

The output module allows individual, external 

extra-low voltage actuators to be switched via a 

change-over contact. As an intermediate relay, 

it performs the function of identification and isolation, 

so that an actuator is automatically identified 

and set up by the CMC-TC system. 

It is connected to the I/O sensor unit via the connection 

cable supplied loose. At the output end, 

the module contains a pull-off terminal strip for 

assignment with actuator cables. External power 

supply to the actuator must be provided. 

The output relay may be switched remotely via 

SNMP or HTTP. Alternatively, alarm links can also 

be created with alarm inputs. 



1 7320.520 

I/O unit 

 



Analog input: 4 – 20 mA at 24 V DC 

Maximum current output of the module: 50 mA 

Sensors without GND may also be used. 




Sensor connection: 

Pull-off clamping strip, 3-pole 



1 7320.580 


 


Floating external sensor contact: 

Voltage min. 24 V DC load capacity 

Current: Min. 10 mA load capacity 








1 7320.590 

I/O unit 

 



Condition of the actuator: cosphi = 1 

Max. load of the switch contact: 

1 A, 30 V DC and 0.5 A, 48 V AC 

Max. switching voltage: 48 V AC; 48 V DC 

Max. switched current: 1 A 

Max. switching load: 30 W, 62.5 VA 

Min. switched current: 1 mA at 5 V DC 








Extension unit CMC-TC 

Three-phase voltage 

The CMC-TC extension unit picks off three independently 

monitored mains voltages via network 

cables and forwards the measurements to the 

Processing Unit II. It is linked to the PU II via the 

RJ 45 connection cable on the P-I 2 C port (sep. 

accessory). Up to two extension units may be 

connected serially to one PU. A separate power 

pack is not required. Alarm limits may be preset 

for all voltages. 


Voltage inputs: 

3 x 100 – 230 V AC, IEC connector 

Interface: P-I2C, max. cable length 2 m 

Temperature application range: 

+5°C to +45°C 

Tolerance: ±5 % at 20 – 30°C 


IP 40 

Voltage monitor 

The voltage monitor picks up a mains voltage to 

be monitored via the mains cable, and reports its 

status to a sensor unit: 

Voltage ON or voltage OFF. The monitor contains 

an ID so that it is automatically detected and set 

up by the CMC-TC system. The connection cable, 

supplied loose, should be used for connection to 

the sensor unit. 


Monitored rated voltage: 

230 V AC 50/60 Hz 

Connections: 

IEC connector, RJ 12 jack, 6-pole 




+5°C to +45°C 


with 10 A IEC switch output 

This sensor is used in conjunction with the CMC- 

TC to monitor voltage limits. The limits may be set 

via the WEB interface or SNMP. As an additional 

option, this voltage may also be switched on and 

off via the module, in order to reboot connected 

equipment via Ethernet. 

It is connected via standard, commercially available 

IEC 320 connectors as the input signal, and 

an IEC 320 socket to connect the equipment. 


● Plug and play compatibility system 

● Initiation of the switching operation may be 

manually or event-based via SNMP or WEB 

● The min./max. limits of voltage measurement 

are freely selectable 

● Measurement range 100 – 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz 

● Max. switching load 250 V AC and 10 A 

at cosphi = 1 

● Tolerance: ±5 % at 20 – 30°C 

Note: 

To fit Processing Unit II DK 7320.100, 

see page 158. 

For applications with SMS functions, 

voltage monitors must be used. 

Security 

Power sensors 

Max. number per PU II Packs of Model No. DK 

2 1 7200.520 


3 x IEC connection cable DK 7200.210, 

see page 167. 

Accessories: 

RJ 45 connection cable, 

see page 169. 



1 7320.600 


 


IP 40 


IEC connection cable DK 7200.210, 

see page 167. 



1 7320.610 

I/O unit 

 


Note: 

The system has two functions. Each function 

occupies one input of the I/O unit. 

1st function: Voltage measurement 

2nd function: Relay switching (at zero current, 

with normally open contact) 


IEC connection cable DK 7200.210, 

German version, 

IEC extension cable DK 7200.215 

for connecting the equipment, 

see page 167. 

175 

Security

Security 

Security 

Power sensors 


with 16 A C19/C20 switched output 

This sensor is used in conjunction with the CMC- 

TC to monitor voltage limits. The limits may be set 

via the WEB interface or SNMP. As an additional 

option, this voltage may also be switched on and 

off via the module, in order to reboot connected 

equipment via Ethernet. It is connected via a C19 

connector as the input signal, and a C20 socket to 

connect the equipment (connection cable/extension 

cable DK 7200.216/.217). 


● Plug and play installation 

● Initiation of the switching operation may be 

manually or event-based via SNMP or WEB 

● The min./max. limits of voltage measurement 

are freely selectable 

● Voltage input 230 Volt ±10 %, 50/60 Hz 

● Max. switching load 250 V AC and 16 A at 

cosphi = 0 – 1 

● Tolerance: ±5 % at +20°C to +30°C 

Voltage monitor 48 V DC 

The voltage monitor picks off a mains voltage to 

be monitored via the 3-pole jack, and reports its 

status to a sensor unit: Voltage ON or voltage 

OFF. The monitor contains an ID so that it is automatically 


system. The connection cable, supplied loose, 

should be used for connection to the sensor unit. 


Monitored rated voltage: 

48 V DC (12 – 60 Volt DC/12 – 25 Volt AC 

50/60 Hz) 

Connections: 

3-pole IEC connector, RJ 12 jack, 6-pole 




+5°C to +45°C 

Socket strip CMC-TC 

With integral 

● Interference suppressor filter 

● Overvoltage protection 

● Alarm contact 

In the event of interference caused by overvoltage, 

the connected active network components 

are protected. With the relay message contact, 

undervoltage and any malfunctions caused by 

overvoltage can be reported via the CMC-TC in 

the network (SNMP trap). A green light on the strip 

indicates that the device is operational. The second 

protective device is the interference suppressor 

filter which protects valuable equipment as a 

passive component. 


Number of sockets: 9 

Length of strip: 650 mm 

Rated voltage: 

230 V AC, 50/60 Hz 

Rated current: 16 A 

Relay alarm output: RJ 10 jack 

Relay load capacity: 50 Volt DC 100 mA 



1 7320.611 

I/O unit 

 


Note: 

The system has two functions. Each function 

occupies one input of the I/O unit. 

1st function: Voltage measurement 

2nd function: Relay switching (at zero current, 

with normally closed contact) 

To fit sensor unit > I/O unit. 


Components Model No. DK Page 

Connection cable D/C19 7200.216 167 

Extension cable C19/C20 7200.217 167 



1 7320.620 


 


IP 40 



1 7200.630 


 

Technical specifications, 

overvoltage protection: 

Arrester application category: D 

Surge current resistance per conductor: 2.5 kA 

Maximum surge strength: 8 kA 


A digital input module DK 7320.580 and an RJ 10 

connection cable DK 7200.420 is needed to link 

the CMC socket strip to the CMC-TC system. 



Access sensor 

The access sensors monitor doors, side panels or 

windows in the enclosure. The magnet is secured 

to the moving part (e.g. side panel), whilst the 

reed contact is fastened to the immobile part 

(enclosure frame). 

The permanent magnet holds the reed contact in 

a closed position. When the door is opened or the 

side panel removed, the reed contact releases 

and opens the circuit. This triggers an alarm in the 

CMC-TC. 

The sensor contains an ID so that it is automatically 

detected and set up by the CMC-TC system. 


cable supplied loose. Up to five access 

sensors may be connected in series to one monitoring 

line, if necessary in conjunction with extension 

cable RJ 12. The jumper plug forms the end. 

Motion detector CMC-TC 

The motion detector may be used in enclosures or 

in rooms. Any modifications to the enclosure, such 

as opening a door or side panel, are indicated. 

The motion detector can also detect persons in 

the room or in front of the data cabinet. 

The alarm contains an ID so that it is automatically 


The power supply and data exchange to the 

sensor unit occurs via the connection cable, 

supplied loose. 

Vandalism sensor 

The sensor contains a position-insensitive alarm 

contact and an ID so that it is automatically 


It is connected to the I/O sensor unit via the 

connection cable supplied loose. 

The sensitivity of the sensor may be set using the 

PU software. 


Security 

Access systems 


2 7320.530 


 


2 magnets 

(mounted on the moving part, directly adjacent) 

2 sensors with reed contact 

(mounting on the enclosure frame) 

Connection 1: RJ 12 jack, 6-pole 

(connection to the sensor unit) 

Connection 2: RJ 12 socket, 6-pole (series connection 

with other access sensors, or finished with 

the jumper plug) 

2 jumper plugs RJ 12 at the end 





1 7320.570 


 


Alarm type: Infrared (IR) detector 

Range: Max. 7 m 

Power consumption: Max. 30 mA/24 V DC 




Dimensions: W x H x D: 59 x 102 x 32 mm 



1 7320.540 

I/O unit 

 



Mercury-free contact, position-insensitive 




177 

Security

Security 

Security 


Room door output module 

The room door output module allows external door 

opener systems to be switched via a change-over 

contact. As an intermediate relay, 

it performs the function of identification and isolation, 

so that a door opener is automatically identified 

and set up by the CMC-TC system. 

It is connected to the access unit via the connection 

cable supplied loose. At the output end, the 

module contains a pull-off terminal strip for 

assignment with actuator cables. Power supply to 

the door opener must be provided externally. 

Comfort handle TS 8 

with master key function 

The handle assumes the function of a door lock 

and lever handle monitoring. 

Master key means that the handle can always be 

opened with the master key, independently of the 

control system. A semi-cylinder (lock insert, lock 

no. 3524 E) is supplied loose, but a semi-cylinder 

40 mm overall length to DIN 18 254 may also be 

used. 

An access sensor (DK 7320.530) must be connected 

to the corresponding door for each handle. 

If the lever handle is closed, the locking mechanism 

integrated into the handle latches automatically. 

The handle may be released via the CMC- 

TC system in the network or via optional add-on 

systems, such as smartcard readers etc. The 

handle is locked in a de-energised manner (without 

electrical connection). The push-button may 

be depressed following electrical release and 

then opens the lever automatically. The opening 

process must be completed within 15 seconds. 

Opening via the key is always superordinate, i.e. 

the enclosure may always be opened with the key 

in the case of electrical locking and in the event of 

a power failure (emergency opening). 



1 7320.740 

I/O unit Access unit 

 

Climate unit 


Condition of the actuator: cosphi = 1 

Max. load of the switch contact: 

1 A, 30 V DC and 0.5 A, 48 V AC 

Max. switching voltage: 48 V AC; 48 V DC 

Max. switched current: 1 A 

Max. switching load: 30 W; 62.5 VA 

Min. switched current: 1 mA at 5 V DC 






Note: 

One access sensor DK 7320.530 is always 

needed for each output module. 

Handle system Model No. DK 

Comfort handle TS 8 

with master key function 

7320.721 



 

Climate unit 



Rated current: Max. 100 mA 

Connection cable: Length 3 m, RJ 12 connector 

Connection cable: 

Length 2 m, RJ 12/RJ 12 connector 

Copuling for extension: 

RJ 12/RJ 12 jack 


+5°C to +40°C 


IP 40 


Access sensor DK 7320.530, 

see page 177. 


50 

50 

87 


1 

6 

42 

8 

42 

79.2 + 0.1 

18 ± 0.1 

Note! 

The handle only fits into the cutout 

shown in the drawing. For 

other hole patterns, additional 

adaptors are needed, and/or 

machining of the door. Solutions 

provided on request. 


with electromagnetic locking 

The lock unit consists of a Rittal handle system 

whose handle is electromagnetically locked. It 

contains an identifier so that it is automatically 

detected and set up by the CMC-TC system. The 

power supply and data exchange to the access 

unit occurs via the attached connection cable. An 

access sensor (DK 7320.530) is always required 

for door monitoring. With the door closed and the 

clip-down handle locked home, latching is activated 

by switching on the lock magnet. The CMC- 

TC enables the handle to be pulled out by deactivating 

the lock magnet, thereby allowing the door 

to be opened. This deactivation can be initiated 

via an access unit such as a smartcard reader, 

magnetic card reader, coded lock and/or network 

management systems. The handle system likewise 

contains handle monitoring. The CMC-TC 

reports an alarm if the handle is not swung in and 

locked home after closing the door. 

The push-button insert supplied can also be 

exchanged for lock inserts. 

Note: 

An additional hole is always required. 

1 Additional hole for electronic lock 

(PS/FR/QR/VR/TC/TE) 

Universal handle 

with electromagnetic locking 

for the CMC-TC monitoring system 

The universal handle is equipped with a pitch pattern 

of mounting holes which will fit many existing 

door systems. This handle is ideal for retrofitting to 

projects with varying enclosure types and variants. 

The handle may be connected to the CMC-TC 

system via plug & play. 

Additionally, an access sensor (DK 7320.530) 

should always be used to enable polling of the 

door status. The handle is equipped wtih a connection 

cable and an RJ 12 connector, which may 

be plugged into the access unit DK 7320.220 of 

the CMC-TC system. The handle is equipped with 

a push-button insert which may be depressed 

when the electromagnetic lock is released. 





Note: 

The handle is also available on request with 

integral Legic transponder. 


see page 181. 


Security 


Handle system Model No. DK 


for FR, PS, TC, VR, TE 

7320.700 

Ergoform-S handle for QR on request 


 

Climate unit 

Note: 

For PS and FR glazed doors, the locking bars 

listed below are required: 

Locking bars 


Lower door locking bar 

7200.371 

for 2000 mm high PS enclosures 

Lower door locking bar 

7200.372 

for 2000 mm high FR enclosures 

Other sizes available on request. 






Connection cable: 

Length 2 m, RJ 12/RJ 12 connector 

Copuling for extension: 

RJ 12/RJ 12 jack 


+5°C to +40°C 


IP 40 



see page 177. 

Type Model No. DK 

Universal handle 

Extended delivery times 

CMC-TC 7320.950 



 

Climate unit 

50 50 

239 

36 

112 

33.5 

z 

50 + 0.2 

50 

50 + 0.2 

25 + 0.2 

z 

7 

7 

179 

Security

Security 

Security 


Transponder handle TS 8 

with integral transponder release system from 

Simons & Voss. 

The electromagnetic transponder handle TS 8 

may be retrofitted in the doors of TS 8/FR(i) enclosures. 

The handle is equipped with an integral 

radio transponder solution. The transponder 

receiver with battery is integrated into the handle 

housing. Apart from the transponder transmitter, 

no additional accessories, such as additional 

electronics, cables, power pack etc., are 

required. The handle is easily exchanged without 

the need for wiring. 

If battery servicing is required, this is indicated 

acoustically. 

The handle is supplied in the zero state, so that it 

may be opened with any transponder transmitter. 

Use with hand-held transmitter: 

The transponder transmitter is actuated from the 

handle, as a result of which the latter is unlatched 

for a specified time window and may be opened 

by pressing the push-button. 

Use with the CMC-TC transmitter: 

The transponder transmitter is linked to the CMC- 

TC system via the room door output DK 7320.740 

and the access unit. The transmitter is placed 

in the enclosure frame, near the handle. In this 

way, the door may be released via the CMC-TC 

system. Additionally, an access sensor 

(DK 7320.530) should always be used to enable 

polling of the door status. 

Use of the programmable transponder: 

The programmable transponder allows the individual 

transponder transmitters to be allocated to 

individual handles. Matrix programming is supported. 

Universal lock unit 

The security lock consists of a base unit and a 

lock counterpart. The base unit is attached to the 

enclosure frame. The lock counterpart is attached 

to the door. 

A mechanical setting allows you to choose 

between two states: at zero current when open, 

or at zero current when closed. 

In order to identify the operating mode used, one 

of the two identifier modules (supplied loose) 

should be used, so that it is automatically identified 

and set up by the CMC-TC system. Power 

supply and data exchange is via the access unit, 

using the identifier modules and connection 

cables supplied loose. 

An access sensor (DK 7320.530) is always 

required for door monitoring. 



Rated current: 140 mA 


+10°C to +40°C 


1 base unit with connection cable 0.1 m, 

RJ 12 connector, 

1 lock counterpart, 

2 identifier modules with RJ 12 jack, 6-pole (connection 

to access unit), 

RJ 12 jack, 6-pole (connection to universal lock), 

1 connection cable for identifier modules, 

2 m, RJ 12/RJ 12 connector without mounting kit. 

Electromagnetic 

handle 

Transponder 

transmitter 

Transponder 

transmitter 

Programmable 

transponder 

Type Model No. DK 

Transponder, 

stand-alone 

application 

Hand-held 

transmitter 

CMC-TC 

transmitter 

7320.960 

7320.961 

7320.962 

Programming 7320.963 

Extended delivery times 

Benefits: 

● No cables on the handle, because the electronics 

and battery are integrated into the 

handle. 

● Several users may be set for one handle. 

● Plug & play installation both mechanical and 

electrical. 

● Individual control of the transponders and the 

set-up of each transponder is possible for up to 

3 locking systems. 

● With additional overlay to automatically block 

the old transponder in the event of reprogramming. 

● Counterfeit-proof data communication is 

achieved via radio using crypto-codes. 

● The “challenge response procedure” ensures 

protection against surveillance. 

● The standard interface means that connections 

to other access and monitoring systems are not 

a problem. 

The lock and organisation sytem is graded in the 

highest category with respect to unlocking protection 

to BSI 7500. 

Note: 

Systems with extra electronics and access control 

from Simons & Voss available on request. 



1 set 7320.730 


 

Climate unit 

Note: 

Mounting kits depending on enclosure/door type 




see page 177. 



Transponder comfort handle 

TS 8 

with Legic Unit 

With the CMC-TC system, Rittal offers an access 

system for racks. One form of access control is 

the release of the enclosure doors with Legic 

transponder technology. The popular Legic system 

is often used for access control in buildings. 

With the transponder handles, Rittal offers the 

option of opening the enclosure doors via Legic 

transponder cards. In this way, doors in buildings 

and Rittal enclosure doors may be opened via a 

transponder card. 

The new TS 8 transponder handle has a similar 

design to the comfort handle TS 8 with master key 

function DK 7320.721. In the transponder handle, 

the master key function is replaced by the Legic 

system. 

The handle may be connected as usual to the 

access unit DK 7320.220 of the CMC system and 

activated. 

Additional transponder function in the handle: 

Additionally, the handle contains a transponder 

receiver aerial, an LED and an acoustic signal 

generator. The functions are linked to the Legic 

unit B-Net 9106 – the control electronics for the 

transponder signals – via an integral connection 

cable. 

Legic Unit B-Net 9106: 

The Legic unit is integrated into a CMC-TC enclosure 

and may be mounted in the 1 U component 

support DK 7320.440 or with the individual 

mounting unit DK 7320.450. 

In order to create a complete access system, the 

Legic unit must be connected to the serial interface 

of the PU II. Optionally this may also be 

connected to the P-I2C bus (input for reader units) 

of the corresponding access unit DK 7320.220. 



Interface: RS232/P-I2C Transmission system: Legic transponder 

Carrier frequency: 13.56 MHz 

Protection category: IP 40 



– TS 8 handle with transponder antenna and 

acoustic/optic display 

– Legic Unit B-Net 9106 with RS232/P-I2C interface 

– 3 transponder cards 

Note: 

When using the handle, an access sensor 

DK 7320.530 must always be used. 


be assigned to one accessory module/Legic Unit. 

In example 2 only the last 4 transponder digits are 

processed. 

For the RS232 application, the connection cable 

(PU II/Legic Unit) DK 7320.814 is required. 


TS 8 

Application: 

Security 


Packs 

of 

Legic Unit B-Net 9106 


1 

Model No. DK 

7320.781 

Example 1: Connection via the RS232 of the PU II 

4 enclosures (front and rear) with one Legic reader: 

Description Qty. Model No. DK 


CMC-TC access unit 4 7320.220 

CMC-TC power pack 24V, 

input 100 – 230 V AC 

1 7320.425 


Cable clamp strap 

CMC-TC connection cable, 

2 7611.000 

sensor unit, 0.5 m long 

(Packs of 4) 

4 7320.470 

CMC-TC access sensor 

(Packs of 2) 

CMC-TC electro-magnetic 

8 7320.530 

TS 8 handle with master key 

function 

7 7320.721 


TS 8 with Legic Unit 

1 7320.781 

CMC connection cable D 

230 V AC 

1 7200.210 

Programming cable 1 7200.221 

Connection PU II/Legic Unit 1 7320.814 

Example 2: Connection via P-I 2 C of the Access Unit 

4 enclosures (front and rear) with 8 Legic readers: 

Description Qty. Model No. DK 


CMC-TC access unit 4 7320.220 

CMC-TC power pack 24V, 

input 100 – 230 V AC 

1 7320.425 


Single mounting unit 8 7320.450 


CMC-TC connection cable, 

2 7611.000 

sensor unit, 0.5 m long 

(packs of 4) 

4 7320.470 


(packs of 2) 

8 7320.530 


TS 8 with Legic Unit 

8 7320.781 

CMC connection cable D 

230 V AC 

1 7200.210 

Programming cable 1 7200.221 

181 

Security

Security 

Security 


Smartcard reader/ 

Magnetic card reader/ 

Coded lock 

The door handle is released to authorised persons 

who have identified themselves with a smartcard/magnetic 

card/combination code. Smartcard 

readers/magnetic readers/coded locks are 

installed above the enclosure handle and can also 

function as a central unit for releasing several 

doors. 

The entire access procedure can also be registered 

with the CMC-TC where there is network 

connection. 




Smartcard type: I 2 C chip 

Magnetic card type: 

Magnetic strip card with data on track 2. 

The read system is designed for cards with both 

a high and a low level of magnetism. 

190 

50 

83 

25 

4 

8.5 

120 

166 

Mechanical lock systems 

can be found under system accessories from 

page 252. 


Note: 

Smartcard readers/magnetic card readers/coded 

locks may only be used in conjunction with the 

CMC-TC and an electric lock. 3 cards are supplied 

with the smartcard reader/magnetic card 

reader. Each card contains a four-digit code, 

which is different on all three cards. All cards are 

access-authorised. The code may be input 

directly on the coded lock. 

Authorised codes may be set in the CMC-TC via 

Web. The input code is transmitted to the CMC- 

TC and, where applicable, to the network management 

system, via the I 2 C bus. A mounting 

adaptor for a TS aluminium glazed door is supplied 

loose with every reader. 

182 Rittal IT catalogue/Security 

190 

50 

83 

35 

Read system Model No. DK 

Smart card reader 7320.750 

Magnetic card reader 7320.760 

Coded lock 7320.770 

4 

8.5 


 

Climate unit 

120 

166 

190 

50 

83 

25 

4 

8.5 

120 

166


Network management systems 

By using SNMP network management systems 

(NMS) such as HP Open View or Novell Manage 

Wise, it is possible to incorporate and address the 

CMC-TC system via SNMP. The required MIB is 

included with the supply. 

The MIB is easily incorporated by simply copying. 

Standard MIB-II (RFC 1213) is also supported. 

It is included with the supply of the NMS. 

The private MIB contains all the required system 

variables, and is easily linked to the functions of 

the software HP Open View, Novell Manage Wise 

etc. 

Management system 

Spectrum Enterprise Manager 

The graphical user interface for the Spectrum 

Enterprise Manager covers every conceivable 

requirements. The MIB variables have been conveniently 

arranged on the interface. This professional 

software package combines the highlights 

of the CMC-TC monitoring system with the CA 

product. 

The management module for Rittal CMC-TC, 

developed by DICOS, facilitates the integration of 

all information sent out by the CMC-TC agent into 

the Spectrum management platform. It also allows 

the configuration of threshold values to be monitored. 

The Spectro Server receives all the information 

from the CMC-TC and provides users with an 

opportunity to visualise, control and configure 

Rittal network enclosures direclty via the central 

Spectrum console. Integration into the enterprise 

management system supports central processing 

of alarms, so that these may be forwarded, e.g. 

via a voice mail system, or used as the basis for 

the automatic generation of a trouble ticket. 

CMC-TC configurator 

The CMC-TC configurator automatically compiles 

all the modules and accessories required for a 

CMC-TC project. The user simply enters the monitoring 

requirements and the ambient conditions. 

The result is a list containing all the item numbers 

required for the project. In this way a project can 

be compiled quickly and effectively. The prerequisite 

for working with this software is MS Excel, 

Version 97 or above. 

Security 

Software 

Note: 

The MIB is also available for downloading from 

the Internet at www.rimatrix5.com 

and is included on CD with the supply of every 

CMC-TC system. 

Note: 

Further information can be found on the Internet at 

www.dicos.de 

or by sending an order by e-mail to 

sales@dicos.de 

Note: 

The CMC-TC configurator may be downloaded 

free of charge from the Internet at 

www.rimatrix5.com. 

183 

Security

Security 

Security 

Software 

CMC-TC Manager 

The new CMC-TC Manager allows all Rittal SNMP 

agents to be managed in a single software package. 

● CMC I/II (DK 7200.100) 

● CMC-TC Processing Unit II (DK 7320.100) 

The graphical interface reproduces information 

from the system and offers the opportunity of 

configuring systems via SNMP. 

Only the Java Runtime Environment JRE 1.4 (or 

higher version) must be installed on the relevant 

PC system. Java may be downloaded from the 

Internet at www.sun.com. 

The various products (PCU, CMC II, CMC-TC) 

may be sorted on the basis of type or location. All 

important alarm messages enter the built-in trap 

receiver, and can be recorded with the logging 

function. Alarm messages may be forwarded 

directly using the e-mail function. The search 

function is used to distinguish and automatically 

list the SNMP agents. 

Plug-in for HP Open View 

Thanks to its integration into HP Open View NNM, 

StableNet TM CMC-TC is centrally and permanently 

available. The management functions of 

HP Open View have been extended to optimum 

effect: NNM monitors the traps occurring in 

CMC-TCs and forwards them to StableNet TM 

CMC-TC. The MIB of the CMC-TC system 

processing unit (DK 7320.100) has been incorporated. 

Functions: 

● Integral trap manager 

● Various alarm functions, e.g. e-mail, SMS etc. 

● Integral MIB browser 

● Graphical display of the monitored values with 

diagrams and tables 

● Individual representation and organisation of 

the monitoring tools 

● Pre-configured graphical interface for the 

CMC-TC 

● Microsoft ® Outlook ® “look and feel” 

● Non-platform-dependent (JAVA) 

SNMP-OPC server 

The OPC Server allows all variables in the CMC- 

TC MIB to be integrated into control desk interfaces. 

For all applications in industrial automation 

technology and building automation, with OLE for 

process control (OPC) “OLE: Object Linking and 

Embedding” provides the ideal interface between 

your control desk software and the CMC-TC 

system. 

Other software 

see page 198. 

Benefits: 

● Open to operating systems via Java 

(Windows/Linux). 

● Graphical information and operator interface 

for: 

− CMC II 

− CMC-TC/Processing Unit (I/II). 

● Full integration of the management information 

base (MIB) of Rittal systems. 

● Trap receiver with logging function. 

● E-mails are sent in the event of trap alarm 

messages. 

● User-oriented system listing according to 

locations. 

Note: 

The software is available free of charge from the 

Internet at www.rimatrix5.com 

Other products from the StableNetTM suite with 

the option of integrating the StableNetTM CMC-TC manager: 

StableNetTM ARC 

Advanced Router Configuration 

● Management of all network components and 

CMC-TCs from within HP Open View NNM 

● Efficient management of routers and switches 

StableNetTM PME 

Performance Management Engine 

● Evaluation of the data obtained with 

StableNetTM CMC-TCs by means of comprehensive 

reporting functions 

● Diverse opportunities for measuring network 

performance 

Note: 

Further information can be found on the Internet 

at: 

www.infosim.net 

or by sending an e-mail enquiry to: 

info@infosim.net 

Note: 

Software available on request. 

www.rimatriX5.com 


at: 

www.obermeier-software.de 

or by sending an e-mail enquiry to: 

info@obermeier-software.de 



Security 

CMC-TC wireless sensor network 

The new wireless sensor technology 

unites the popular CMC-TC 

system with radio sensors. This 

transports the modular concept into 

a new dimension of flexibility. Existing 

IT infrastructures can also be 

easily retrofitted with the wireless 

sensor network. 


see page 436. 

185 

Security

186

“Teamwork” for 

comprehensive IT security 

Rittal is the competent partner for all companies for whom 

effective protection from data loss or network failure is abso- 

lutely essential. Like good teamwork, the IT monitoring 

concept provides comprehensive IT security by ensuring 

optimum interaction between all safety components. 

Everything is centrally monitored, organised and controlled. 

The name of this winning formula is Rittal SSC. Thanks to 

the use of Rittal SSC (Server Switch Control), the number of 

keyboards, monitors and mice is reduced to a single control 

point. In this way, Rittal SSC ensures a stable information and 

production flow, which in turn leads to an improved cash 

flow. 

Monitor/keyboard unit 

Everything under control in 1 U with 

the Rittal monitor/keyboard unit in an 

attractive, ergonomic design. Available 

in various country variants and 

2 colour variants, depending on your 

requirements. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Monitoring/Remote management 

KVM switches 

For reliable server administration, 

Rittal has a suitable SSC (Server 

Switch Control) switch for every application. 

Thanks to its modularity, the 

SSC premium is ideal for use in a 

heterogeneous, constantly changing 

IT server infrastructure. 

Monitoring & 

remote management from page 188 

Features of KVM switches ..............................................................188 

Connection example for KVM switches ..........................................189 

Monitor/keyboard unit .....................................................................190 

KVM switches .................................................................................191 

Software planning tool RiGetIT .......................................................198 

Software Service RiWatchIT............................................................200 

Video technology ............................................................................445 

Software 

RiGetIT: 

Free planning tool for entire enclosure 

suites and racks. 

RiWatchIT: 

Monitoring software for the RimatriX5 

components built into the data centre. 

187 

Monitoring & Remote Management

Monitoring 

Monitoring 

Features of KVM switches 

Monitor/keyboard 

unit 

Compact administration 

The compact 1 U monitor/keyboard 

unit from Rittal ensures 

reliable, space-saving, on-site 

server administration. The 1 U 

console is easily combined with 

the Rittal KVM switch series 

SSC view, allowing access to 

8 or 32 servers respectively. 

● 15″ or 17″ TFT display 

● Variants with trackball or 

touchpad 

● VGA connection 

● Compatible with all Rittal SSC 

KVM systems 

Full control in 1 U 

The SSC view line, with the 

Rittal monitor/keyboard unit, 

forms a compact console/ 

switching solution which only 

occupies 1 U in the rack. The 

Rittal solution may be combined 

as required between a choice of 

two different console types with 

15″ and 17″ TFT display, offering 

country-specific keyboard 

layouts and two different KVM 

switches. It is easily upgraded 

at a later date, or exchanged for 

a more powerful system. 

● Compact stand-alone console/switching 

solution. 

● The SSC view utilises the 

space behind the monitor/ 

keyboard drawer and 

● is supplied with power via the 

integral power pack. 

● With the 8-way KVM switches, 

the servers are connected 

using standard VGA/PS/2 

cables. 

Space-saving server administration and perfect KVM 

technology 

Rittal KVM switches have the right solution to suit every 

customer requirement, from stand-alone solutions for 8 to 

32 servers, to complex multiuser systems for data centre 

applications with up to 2048 computers. The location of 

these computers is irrelevant. They may be accessed and 

administered directly, either at local level or via TCP/IP 

networks – worldwide! 

SSC view SSC compact SSC premium 

The new compact class 

The SSC compact offers top 

performance in a small space 

at an inexpensive price. The 

integral long-range power pack 

makes it ideally suited for standalone 

operation or as an upgrade 

to an existing installation. 

With the SSC compact 8, standard 

VGA cables locked to the 

PS/2 sockets ensure reliable 

operation. With the SSC compact 

32 Cat, connection to the 

computer is made using Cat 5 

cables and an SSC converter. 

● Space-saving ultra-compact 

server administration in standalone 

mode. 

● Option of cascading or retrofitting 

(SSC Compact 32 Cat). 

● For connecting the computers, 

there are two variants 

available with VGA/PS/2 and 

Cat connection. 

● SSC Converter PS/2 signal 

converter to Cat, to reduce 

the cabling work/space 

requirements inside the rack. 

Modular and future-proof 

The modular SSC premium is 

the first choice for medium-sized 

to large installations or in cases 

where modern features such as 

multi-user and/or IP access 

(KVM over IP) are required. 

Almost all system requirements 

may be met with just a few system 

components. The modularity 

ensures that this KVM is 

future-proof, as the SSC premium 

system is easily expanded 

to keep pace with your server 

installation as it grows. 

● Highly integrated KVM matrix 

based on Cat technology. 

● New switching technology 

which adapts flexibly to your 

future requirements via cascading. 

● Multiuser operation is supported, 

both locally and via 

IP access (KVM over IP). 

● Three different converter 

types support the operation of 

a wide range of server platforms. 

188 Rittal IT catalogue/Monitoring/Remote management

Connection example SSC view 8 

see page 191 

(behind monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U) 

Compact switching solution for up to 8 servers. 

8 x VGA, PS/2 

combination cable 

7552.000 

Connection example SSC compact 8 

see page 192 

Economy KVM technology. Ideal for retrofitting into existing 

installations. 

7552.010 

Connection example 

SSC premium 8/32 

see page 193 

Modular KVM solution for data centres. Up to 

8 users may access the connected servers 

in parallel and independently from one 

another. Remote access via “KVM over IP” 

is also supported. Furthermore, the Rittal 

sockets may also be switched via the OSD of 

the SSC premium. This facilitates a “hardreboot” 

of the servers from anywhere in the 

world. 


SSC Converter 

SSC local 

console 

Cat cable 

SSC local console 

with monitor/ 

keyboard unit in 

rack 

Remote control with two local 

workstation computers 

Monitoring 

Connection examples for KVM switches 

Connection example SSC view 32 cat 

see page 191 

(behind monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U) administer 32 servers in 1 U. 

The most powerful 1 U console/switch solution. 

SSC Connect 

Connection example SSC compact 32 cat 

see page 192 

1 user KVM solution for 32 servers. 

Extendible up to a maximum of 125 connected servers. 

SSC Connect 

SSC Console 

Cat 5 

SSC Converter 

7552.110 

32 x cat connection cables 

7552.100 

32 x cat connection cables 

Monitor/keyboard 

32 x conn. cables 

SSC premium 8/32 

(matrix switch, 1 U/19″) 

Cat cable 

5 free users 

SSC console IP 

TCP/IP 

Remote IP console, 

computer in network 

with client software 

189 

Monitoring

Monitoring 

Monitoring 

Monitor/keyboard unit 

Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U 

with 15″ and 17″ TFT display 

This compact 1 U console in a 2-colour design 

was developed for secure, space-saving server 

administration. In order to access other servers, 

this monitor/keyboard unit is easily combined with 

the Rittal KVM switches SSC view 8 and SSC view 

32 Cat. This makes it possible to connect up to 

32 servers to one unit in 1 U. The peculiarity of 

this compact solution is that a 482.6 mm (19″) 

keyboard including number pad and keypad may 

be integrated, in spite of its small size. The minimal 

depth of the unit, at just 510 mm (680 mm 

with 17″ TFT display, each without SSC extension), 

makes it suitable for installation in enclosures 

of depth from 800 mm. The installation kits 

supplied allow it to be adapted to an existing 

difference between levels of 680 – 850 mm for 

the 482.6 mm (19″) levels. 

When closed, the drawer can be locked for protection 

against unauthorised operation. 

In order to prevent heat accummulation when 

folded, the backlight is deactivated automatically. 

The unit has a English keyboard layout. Versions 

in German and French, as well as other countryand 

customer-specific versions available on 

request. 


Complete monitor/keyboard unit in colour version 

RAL 7035 (light grey) or RAL 9005 (black) with 

design elements and handle in RAL 9006 (silver) 

including assembly parts and all the required connection 

cables (approx. 1.6 m) for: 

● Power supply 

● VGA video 

● Keyboard connection (PS/2 and USB) 

● Mouse connection (touchpad or trackball, 

PS/2, USB) 

Note: 

KVM switch, SSC view 8/view 32 Cat, 

see page 191. 

RAL 7035/ 

RAL 9006 

15″ 17″ 

RAL 9005/ 

RAL 9006 

RAL 7035/ 

RAL 9006 

RAL 9005/ 

RAL 9006 

German 9055.100 9055.200 

Touchpad 

1) 9055.300 9055.4001) English 9055.102 9055.2021) 9055.302 9055.4021) French 9055.1031) 9055.2031) 9055.3031) 9055.4031) International 9055.1512) 9055.2512) 9055.3512) 9055.4512) Trackball German 9055.150 9055.2501) 9055.3501) 9055.4501) Technical design3) TFT screen with anti-reflection coated security glass 15″ (381 mm) 17″ (432 mm) 

Max. resolution 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 

Colours 16.7 million 

Brightness approx. 280 cd/m2 Contrast ratio approx. 400 : 1 

Mains voltage 100 – 240 V AC, 50 – 60 Hz 

Dimensions (W x H x D) 448 mm x 1 U x 510 mm 448 mm x 1 U x 680 mm 

Ambient temperature +5°C to +45°C (operating) 

Certifications 

Connections at rear 

CE 

Mains voltage IEC 320 connection 

Video input analog (D-SUB 15-pole, jack) 

Keyboard PS/2, jack, USB-A 

Mouse PS/2, jack, USB-A 

Power out 


2) International version: 

(12 V DC) for SSC view 8/view 32 Cat 

Please state the required language on the order. Extended delivery times. 

Versions: French/Spanish/Portuguese/Italian/Danish/Norwegian/Finnish/Swedish/Belgian/Russian/UK English/ 

US English with EURO/Swiss/German. Other country-specific versions available on request 

3) We reserve the right to make changes in line with technical progress. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 


SSC view 8/SSC view 32 Cat 

8 or 32-port KVM switch 

for monitor/keyboard unit, see page 190. 

This compact SSC view optionally extends the 

Rittal monitor/keyboard unit to include the function 

of an 8 or 32-port KVM switch, without requiring 

an additional U in the server rack for mounting. 

The switch may be mounted behind the 

existing monitor unit, and voltage is supplied via 

the power pack integrated into the drawer. The 

SSC has a password-protected OSD menu, but 

server selection may also be made via hotkeys. 

Monitoring 

KVM switches 

The SSC view 32 Cat may be extended (cascaded) 

with up to three SSC compact 32 Cat if 

more than 32 servers need to be administered. In 

this way, up to 125 servers may be administered 

by one user in the final configuration. 

This means that the Rittal SSC switching system 

is able to grow flexibly in line with requirements. 

With the SSC view 32 Cat, the computers are connected 

via Cat cables and SSC Connect (PS/2 or 

USB). In this way, the signals for video, keyboard 

and mouse are transmitted via a shared cable. 

This cuts down on cabling work considerably, 

particularly in fully populated racks. One SSC 

Connect is required for each computer. Processor-controlled 

keyboard and mouse emulation 

for each channel ensures fault-free booting and 

reliable switching between the connected computers. 

Connection example see page 189. 

Rittal SSC 1 SSC view 8 2 SSC view 32 Cat 

Model No. DK 

Equipment 

7552.000 7552.100 

Number of computers in stand-alone mode 8 32 

Password protection 

Cascading with SSC compact 32 Cat 

(with OSD transfer) 

– 

OSD menu with mouse operation (English) 

OSD superimposed on computer screen (may be de-activated) 

OSD display of channels used 

Hotkeys for computer selection 

Autoscan 

Autoskip (skip over unused channels) 

Cable type to computer (view 8) or to SSC converter (view 32) VGA/HD15, PS/2 Cat 5, 6 

Maximum cable length, SSC to computer (depending on cable quality) 4 m 15 m (30 m) 1) 

Port and system support PS/21) PS/2, USB, SUN-USB 

Automatic cable alignment (manually readjustable) – 2) Maximum video resolution (depending on cable length) 1280 x 1024@85 Hz 1920 x 1440@75 Hz 

Bandwidth 

Connections 

200 MHz 250 MHz 

Computer SUB-HD15/PS/2 RJ 45 

Console SUB-HD15/PS/2 SUB-HD15/PS/2 

Service (for Firmware update) – Jack 2.5 mm 

Power supply 12 V from monitor/keyboard unit Hollow connector Hollow connector 

External power supply 12 V/approx. 0.8 A 12 V/approx. 1.0 A 

Power consumption (approx.) 9 W 12 W 

Operating temperature +5 to +45°C +5 to +45°C 

Protection rating IP 30 IP 30 

Enclosure 

Sheet steel, 

powder-coated 

Sheet steel, 

powder-coated 

Colour RAL 9006 RAL 9006 

Dimensions (excluding protruding parts) approx. W x H x D mm 325 x 44 x 85 325 x 44 x 85 

Dimensions (with rack installation) approx. W x H x D 19″ x 1 U x 140 mm 19″ x 1 U x 140 mm 

Conformity 

Accessories 

CE CE 

3 SSC Connect PS/2 – 7552.421 

4 SSC Connect USB – 7552.422 

5 

CPU cable 2 m (with interlocking PS/2 connectors) 

CPU cable 4 m (with interlocking PS/2 connectors) 

7552.120 

7552.140 

– 

– 

Cat 5 cable 0.5 m – 7320.470 

Cat 5 cable 2 m – 7320.472 

Cat 5 cable 5 m – 7320.475 

Cat 5 cable 10 m – 7320.481 

Cat 5 cable 15 m – 7320.485 

1) Adaptor for SUN/MAC server available on request. 

2) With a cable length of max. 15 m, there is no need for any manual readjustments. 

Above and beyond this, the maximum permissible cable length is approximately 30 m 

(depending on the cable quality). Here, manual readjustment may be required. 

191 

Monitoring

Monitoring 

Monitoring 

KVM switches 

1 

2 

SSC compact 8/ 

SSC compact 32 Cat 

Economy 8/32-port KVM switch 

These ultra-compact KVM switches for 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting facilitate space-saving server 

administration in any IT rack. The SSC has a password-protected 

OSD menu for server selection, 

but selection may also be made via hotkeys. 

The SSC compact 32 Cat may be extended (cascaded) 

with up to three additional SSC compact 

32 Cat if more than 32 servers need to be administered. 

In this way, up to 125 servers may be 

administered by one user in the final configuration. 

Rittal SSC 

The Rittal SSC switching system grows flexibly 

with your requirements. With the SSC compact 

32 Cat, the computers are connected via Cat 

cables and SSC Connect. In this way, the signals 

for video, keyboard and mouse are transmitted via 

a shared cable. This cuts down on cabling work 

considerably, particularly in fully populated racks. 

Processor-controlled keyboard and mouse emulation 

for each channel ensures fault-free booting 

and reliable switching between the connected 

computers. 


1 2 

SSC compact 8 SSC compact 32 Cat 

Model No. DK 

Equipment 

7552.010 7552.110 

Number of computers in stand-alone mode 8 32 

Password protection 

Cascading3) to SSC view/compact 32 Cat 

(with OSD transfer) 

– 





Autoscan 

Autoskip (skip over unused channels) 

Cable type to computer (view 8) or to SSC converter (view 32) VGA/HD15 and PS/2 Cat 5, 6 

Maximum cable length, SSC to computer (depending on cable quality) 4 m 15 m (30 m) 1) 

Port and system support PS/22) PS/2, USB, SUN-USB 

Automatic cable alignment (manually readjustable) – 1) LED displays (front) Power Power 

Maximum video resolution (depending on cable length) 1280 x 1024@85 Hz 1920 x 1440@75 Hz 

Bandwidth 

Connections 

200 MHz 250 MHz 

Computer SUB-HD15/PS/2 RJ 45 

Console SUB-HD15/PS/2 SUB-HD15/PS/2 

Cascading port (connection for SSC view/compact 32 Cat) – RJ 45 

Service (for Firmware update) – Jack 2.5 mm 

Mains connection (IEC 320 connection) EN 60 320 EN 60 320 

Power supply 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz (internal power pack) 

Power consumption (approx.) 6 W 11 W 

Operating temperature +5 to +45°C +5 to +45°C 

Protection rating IP 30 IP 30 

Enclosure 

Sheet steel, 

powder-coated 

Sheet steel, 

powder-coated 

Colour RAL 7035 RAL 7035 

Dimensions (excluding protruding parts) approx. W x H x D mm 448 x 44 x 150 448 x 44 x 150 

Conformity CE CE 

1) With a cable length of max. 15 metres, there is no need for any manual video readjustments. 

Above and beyond this, the maximum permissible cable length is approximately 30 metres 

(depending on the cable quality). Here, manual readjustment may be required. 

2) Adaptor for SUN/MAC server available on request. 

3) Up to 3 SSC compact 32 Cat may be cascaded to one master (max. 125 servers on 1 user). 

Accessories 

Mains connection cable (earthing-pin) 7200.210 7200.210 

CPU cable 2 m (with interlocking PS/2 connectors) 7552.120 – 

CPU cable 4 m (with interlocking PS/2 connectors) 7552.140 – 

SSC Connect PS/2 – 7552.421 

SSC Connect USB – 7552.422 

Cat 5 cable 0.5 m – 7320.470 

Cat 5 cable 2 m – 7320.472 

Cat 5 cable 5 m – 7320.475 

Cat 5 cable 10 m – 7320.481 

Cat 5 cable 15 m – 7329.485 


By cascading type-identical SSC 

premiums, the maximum number 

of administrable computers may 

be flexibly extended. 

SSC premium 2/16 4/32 8/32 

Level Number of computers 

1 16 32 32 

2 128 256 128 

3 1024 2048 512 

Various SSC premiums may also 

be cascaded among one another. 


SSC premium 2/16, 4/32, 8/32 

Highly integrated KVM matrix based on 

Cat technology 

With the SSC premium, Rittal offers a KVM switching 

technology which can adapt flexibly to your 

future requirements. By using Cat technology 

(i.e. transmission of signals for keyboard, video 

and mouse via a Cat cable), the required cabling 

work inside the rack may be reduced considerably; 

what is more, highly compact 1 U systems 

with up to 32 server ports are supported. The SSC 

premium are full-matrix switches which support 

simultaneous, unrestricted access to the chosen 

computer system for each of the connected users. 

Various console types are available for administration 

purposes, via which all computer systems 

may be conveniently activated via OSD or 

hotkeys. 

By separating the hardware switch and operating 

console, the systems may be adapted to any 

required computer environment. On the computer 

side, conversion to standard PC interfaces is 

achieved via separate converters which optimise 

all signals (keyboard, video, mouse) for transmission 

via the Cat cable. Needless to say, all SSC 

premium have comprehensive configuration and 

management functions, and additional functions 

may be added in the future via flash upgradability. 

The full matrix may be flexibly extended via 

cascading with type-identical SSC premiums in 

up to 3 levels. The structure of the cascaded system 

right down to the individual computer level 

may be graphically depicted in a tree structure, 

thus facilitating an overview of the entire system. 

The new SSC Power Control (DK 7552.420) 

also facilitates control of the Rittal 8-way PSM 

modules (DK 7856.201) or 8-way Rittal PCU 

(DK 7200.001) with the SSC premium. In this 

way, any of the connected servers may be hardrebooted 

if necessary – worldwide! 

To this end, up to 3 IEC 320 sockets in the SSC 

premium are allocated to each individual server. 


Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 



IP 30 

Monitoring 

KVM switches 


SSC converter (depending on the number of 

computers) and at least one operator console, 

see page 195/197. 

Mains connection cable (DK 7200.210), 

see page 167. 

193 

Monitoring

Monitoring 

Monitoring 

KVM switches 

SSC premium 

2/16 

SSC premium 

4/32 

SSC premium 

8/32 

Rittal SSC premium 

Model No. DK 

Equipment 

7552.020 7552.030 7552.040 

Number of computers in stand-alone mode 16 32 32 

Number of computers with cascading as full matrix 

(max. 3 levels, type-identical SSC premium) 

1024 2048 512 

Number of users (local, remote, IP), mixed and simultaneous 2 4 8 

Number of users that may be administered 

(with allocation of rights) 

128 128 128 

Integral user/computer administration 

Support of central directory services and authentication systems – – 


Display of system structure in the OSD per computer (path) 




Type of cable to SSC Converter and SSC Console Cat 5, 6 Cat 5, 6 Cat 5, 6 

Maximum cable length console – computer 

(depending on cable quality) 

300 m 300 m 300 m 

Port and system support (SSC converter) 

PS/2, USB, PS/2, USB, PS/2, USB, 

SUN-USB/VT100 SUN-USB/VT100 SUN-USB/VT100 

Automatic video alignment (manually readjustable) 

Automatic cable alignment (manually readjustable) 

LED displays (front): 

 

Power/Power Redundant 

System Ready (illuminates as soon as the system booting 

process has been completed without error) 

 

Status Switch (illuminates when the SSC is operational) 

LED displays (rear): 

 

Computer port busy/connected yellow/green yellow/green yellow/green 

Console port busy/connected yellow/green yellow/green yellow/green 

Network port full duplex/half duplex – – yellow/flashing 

Network port connection status/activity – – green/flashing 

Maximum video resolution (depending on cable length) 

1920 x 1440@ 

75 Hz 

1920 x 1440@ 

75 Hz 

1920 x 1440@ 

75 Hz 

Bandwidth 250 MHz 250 MHz 250 MHz 

Activation of switchable socket strip (on/off) 

Connections 

Computers/consoles RJ 45 RJ 45 RJ 45 

Service (front) for Firmware update Jack 2.5 mm Jack 2.5 mm Jack 2.5 mm 

RS232 (front) RJ 11 RJ 11 RJ 11 

Network – – 2 x RJ 45 

Power supply via IEC 320 connection (IEC320 C13) 

Redundant power supply (with SSC power pack) 4-pole mini-DIN 4-pole mini-DIN 4-pole mini-DIN 

Power supply (internal power pack) 

90 – 264 V/ 

47 – 63 Hz 

90 – 264 V/ 

47 – 63 Hz 

90 – 264 V/ 

47 – 63 Hz 

External power supply, redundant 12 V/approx. 1 A 12 V/approx. 1 A 12 V/approx. 1 A 

Power consumption (approx.) 12 W 13 W 16 W 

Dimensions (excluding protruding parts) 

approx. W x H x D mm 

435 x 44.4 x 286 435 x 44.4 x 286 435 x 44.4 x 286 

Conformity CE CE CE 



Console local 

for SSC premium 

For installation in 

● 482.6 mm (19″) 

● at the rear of 15″/17″ monitor unit (9055.XXX) 

This local console forms the link between the keyboard, 

monitor, mouse (or the Rittal monitor/keyboard 

unit) and the SSC premium. Via the console, 

the computer systems connected to the 

switch may be conveniently selected and administered 

via OSD. The signals are converted to Cat 

cables with a length of up to 10 m and forwarded 

to the KVM matrix. Power supply is optionally via 

the Rittal monitor/keyboard unit or, in the case of 

stand-alone 482.6 mm (19″) installation, via the 

SSC Power Pack (DK 7552.220). 

Supplied complete with assembly parts. 


Video resolution: Max. 1920 x 1440 @ 75 Hz 

(depending on the cable length) 

Video bandwidth: 250 MHz 

Voltage supply: 12 V DC (from monitor/keyboard 

unit) or via SSC Power Pack DK 7552.220 

Dimensions: 

W x H x D mm: 325 x 44 x 85 (stand-alone) 

W x H x D mm: 465 x 44 x 140 

(built into 482.6 mm/19″) 

Console Cat 5 


This remote console forms the link between the 

keyboard, monitor, mouse and the SSC premium. 

Via the console, the computer systems connected 

to the switch may be conveniently selected 

and administered using the OSD. The signals are 

forwarded via Cat cable, depending on the cable 

quality up to 300 m, via the KVM matrix to the connected 

computers. Additionally, if required, 

2 local PCs and the corresponding converters 

may be connected to the console via Cat cables. 

Switchover to these two computers is achieved 

via keys on the front. The console is designed as 

a compact desktop enclosure with integral widerange 

power pack (482.6 mm (19″) versions on 

request). 


Video resolution: Max. 1920 x 1440 @ 75 Hz 

(depending on the cable length) 

Video bandwidth: 250 MHz 

Power supply (internal power pack): 

100 – 280 V, 50 – 60 Hz/0.2 A 

Dimensions: W x H x D mm: 270 x 44 x 220 

Connections (jack): 

PS/2 (keyboard/mouse) 

USB-A (keyboard/mouse) 

HD15 (VGA video RGB & Sync.) 

RJ 45 (KVM matrix connection) 

Mini-DIN 4 (12 V power supply) 

Monitoring 

KVM switches 

Type Packs of Model No. DK 

Console local 1 7552.200 


Only for 482.6 mm (19″) installation without 

monitor/keyboard unit: 

SSC Power Pack DK 7552.220, see page 197, 

Cat 5 patch cable, see page 197. 


Console Cat 5 1 7552.212 



USB-A (keyboard/mouse) 

SUB-HD15 (VGA video RGB & Sync.) 

2 x Cat (RJ 45) to connect 2 local PCs via SSC 

converters (VGA, PS/2 or USB) 


IEC320 C13 (power supply) 

Mini-DIN 4 (redundant power supply) 


Cat 5 patch cable, see page 197, 

SSC converter for local PCs, see page 196. 

Mains connection cable (e.g. DK 7200.210). 

195 

Monitoring

Monitoring 

Monitoring 

KVM switches 

Console IP 

for SSC premium (KVM-over-IP) 

With the IP remote console, computers connected 

to the KVM matrix may be accessed via any 

given TCP/IP network. The Console IP is a hardware 

solution requiring no software installation on 

the target computer. This ensures independence 

from the type and status of the operating system 

used, and facilitates remote monitoring of the 

computers at BIOS level even during the boot 

phase. Precise operation of the remote computer 

can only be achieved via the original mouse 

pointer. A browser-based Web interface is available 

for configuration of the SSC Console IP. With 

the system operational, the target computers may 

be accessed at any time via Web browsers and 

Java applets (irrespective of the operating system), 

or if Java is not supported, via optimised client 

software for common operating systems. This 

client has extended functions (e.g. a setup mode) 

and can be used throughout the company without 

restriction. Installation of the client software is 

not necessary, as it may also be launched e.g. 

from a USB stick. In addition to remote access via 

IP, the SSC Console IP also has an integral local 

console port (competing with IP access) for connecting 

the keyboard, mouse and monitor. 

With the Rittal KVM-over-IP solution, security is a 

top priority. For this reason, access to the console 

is additionally password-protected. KVM 

access to the Web interface may be encrypted via 

HTTPS (SSL 128 bit). This may optionally encrypt 

the control channel only, or additionally the video 

channel and/or the keyboard/mouse channel. In 

order to further increase protection from failure, 

the SSC console IP may also be extended with a 

redundant power pack via the SSC Power Pack 

(DK 7552.220). 

SSC converter 


The SSC converters convert the signals for keyboard, 

video and mouse from the connected 

computer to the CAT cable. 

There is a choice of three different variants for 

connecting a PC with PS/2 or USB ports, and a 

separate version for use with SUN computers with 

a USB port. One converter is required for each 

computer. Every SSC converter has a unique 

identification number (Unique-ID). When the converter 

is connected to a server, it can be located 

at any time in the overall system (even in the event 

of rewiring), without needing to know the physical 

connection. This is the main difference from simple 

converter solutions. 

CPU cable 

for SSC view 8/SSC compact 8 

Combination connection cable between 

SSC view 8 and the individual servers, each with 2 

HD 15 connectors for video, plus lockable PS/2 

connectors at both ends for the keyboard and 

mouse, colour-coded. 


Console IP 1 7552.214 

Note: 

The supply includes the client software for current 

Windows operating systems (MS Windows 2000, 

XP Professional, 2003 Server) as well as Linux 

Distribution (RedHat, Suse) in German and 

English. 


Video resolution: Max.1280 x 1024 @ 75 Hz 

Network: 10/100 MBit/s 

Power pack: 100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 

Dimensions: 

W x H x D mm: approx. 440 x 44 x 380 



SUB-HD15 (VGA video, RGB and Sync.) 


RJ 45 (Ethernet) 

Sub-D (RS232) 

IEC320 C14 (power supply) 

Mini-DIN 4 (redundant power supply). 


Mains connection cable (DK 7200.210), 

see page 167. 

Cat 5 patch cable, 

see page 197. 

SSC converter Packs of Model No. DK 

PS/2 1 7552.201 

USB 1 7552.202 

SUN-USB (German) 1 7552.203 

SUN-USB (US English) 1 7552.204 

Cable length Model No. DK 

2 m 7552.120 

4 m 7552.140 



SSC converter VT100 

(RS232) 


This SSC adaptor makes it possible to integrate 

active network components (such as an Ethernet 

switch) with a serial management port which 

support the VT100 terminal mode into the SSC 

premium KVM system and administer them 

remotely. The serial output signals (ASCII character 

set) are converted into a video signal which 

is transmitted via the KVM matrix. Conversely, 

incoming keyboard inputs are reconverted to 

serial. 

Connections: 

Sub-D 9-pole (RS232), 

RJ 45 (KVM matrix connection), 

Mini-DIN 4 (power supply). 

Cat 5 patch cable 

Flexible, preconfigured Cat 5 STP patch cable 

with shielded RJ 45 connectors for connecting the 

SSC Converter and SSC Console to the SSC 

premium switch. The cables are connected 1 : 1 

wired to AT&T 258A/T568B and comply with 

ISO/IEC 11801, UL E151955. 

Colour: 

Grey 

SSC Power Control 


With this adaptor, the Power Control Unit socket 

strips (DK 7200.001) and the active PSM module 

(DK 7856.201) may be switched individually or in 

pairs (for servers with redundant power supply). 

Control is via the OSD integrated into the SSC 

premium. 

Up to 8 PSM and PCU modules may be switched 

(max. 64 EN 60 320 C13 slots). Up to 3 sockets 

may be allocated per server. 

This facilitates a hard reboot of each individual 

server via the connected user consoles, also via 

IP networks in conjunction with the SSC Console 

IP. 

Note: 

The connection cable between the SSC premium 

and the SSC Power Control with a length of 2.5 m 

is included with the supply. 

SSC Power Pack 

In order to increase reliability, we recommend 

configuring a redundant power supply to the SSC 

premium and the connected user consoles. 

This compact long-range power pack (AC: 100 – 

240 V, 50/60 Hz, DC: 12 V/5 A) with IEC 320 

socket (EN 60 320) and Mini-DIN 4 connector is 

ideal for this purpose. Should the first power supply 

of the internal power pack fail, the functionality 

of the KVM switch is maintained. 



Monitoring 

KVM switches 


SSC converter VT100 1 7552.205 


Power pack (100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz/s 

secondary, 12 V/0.7 A, 

mains connection cable DK 7200.210). 



see page 197. 

Length m Packs of Model No. DK 

0.5 4 7320.470 

2 4 7320.472 

5 4 7320.475 

10 1 7320.481 

15 1 7320.485 


SSC Power Control 1 7552.420 


Mounting module (DK 7320.450), 

Power pack (DK 7201.210), 

Mains cable (DK 7200.210), 

At least 1 active PSM/PCU module, 

see page 101. 


see page 197. 

SSC Packs of Model No. DK 

SSC Power Pack 1 7552.220 


Connection cable for power pack, 

see page 167. 

197 

Monitoring

Monitoring 

Monitoring 

Software planning tool RiGetIT 

This configuration software from Rittal offers a planning tool 

for modern IT infrastructures. Key data on the mechanics, 

power supply, power protection, climate control and security 

may be set using a catalogue of questions. 

The result is a professionally planned IT infrastructure which 

may also be output to a (graphical) IT room plan. 

RiGetIT – Complete configuration of the 

IT infrastructure 

This configuration software from Rittal is an efficient planning 

tool for a modern IT infrastructure. A wizard guides users 

automatically and logically through a catalogue of questions 

to the correct RimatriX5 components. The result is a professionally 

planned IT infrastructure which may be output in 

the form of an IT room plan (graphical representation). 

Combined with detailed parts lists, this provides an excellent 

source of information on which to base individual quotations. 

The IT room plan and the generated parts lists may be 

processed in the remote management software RiWatchIT, 

which means that a central management system is directly 

available for the RimatriX5 IT system. 

198 

Planning of IT infrastructures: 

● Design of climate control, UPS systems, power distribution 

and security systems 

● IT rack configurator with viability checks 

● Technical information and data sheets 

● Product catalogue 

● Parts list for different projects 

● Interface to the remote management software RiWatchIT 

● Current version available to download free at: 

www.rimatrix5.com

RiGetIT 

the RimatriX5 configuration software 

This configuration software from Rittal offers a planning tool 

for a modern IT infrastructure. The planning tool contains 

a wizard which automatically and logically guides the user 

through a catalogue of questions. Key data on the mechanics, 

power supply, power protection, climate control and 

security may be set. The result is a professionally planned IT 

infrastructure which may generate an IT room plan (graphic). 

Individual product selections may also be made. Naturally, 

the software also shows a detailed parts lists. Based on this 

information, individual quotations with RimatriX5 products 

may be requested and executed. The parts lists may be individually 

modified and adjusted retrospectively. 

Another highlight is the interface to the RiWatchIT software. 

The IT room plan (graphic) and the generated parts lists may 

be processed in the remote management software, which 

means that a central management system is directly available 

for the RimatriX5 IT system. 

Projects may be saved, modified and loaded. The system is 

scalable and hence extendible. Small IT applications as well 

as medium-sized and large data centres may be planned 

using this software. 

CD-ROM version of RiGetIT (German/English) 


Free! 

Or via the Internet at www.rimatrix5.com 

Benefits: 

● Design of the climate control for the IT infrastructure 

● Design of the UPS systems 

● Design of the power distribution 

● Design of the security systems 

● IT rack configurator with plausibility checks 

● Technical information about the products 

● Product catalogue 

● Graphical output of the IT room 

● Parts list for different projects 

● Interface to the remote management software RiWatchIT 

System requirements: 

(minimum): 

● Windows XP/2000 

● Internet Explorer Version 6.0 

● Pentium lll processor 

● Required minimum storage space: 150 MB 

● CD-ROM drive 


Enclosure configuration with RiGetIT. 

Monitoring 

Software planning tool RiGetIT 

Preparation of room plans with export function to RiWatchIT. 

User-friendly planning tools make it easier to select RimatriX5 

components. 

199 

Monitoring

Monitoring 

Monitoring 

Software service RiWatchIT 

In conjunction with the configuration software RiGetIT, the 

IT room, each individual rack plus UPS, power and cooling 

systems are graphically displayed, together with the moni- 

toring functions. Using the information forwarded, the 

RiWatchIT V2.1 software generates the basis for monitoring 

display. 

RiWatchIT – 

effective monitoring & 

remote management 

RiWatchIT, the monitoring software for RimatriX5, operates in 

conjunction with RiGetIT. RiGetIT supplies a graphical representation 

of the IT room with monitoring function data integrated 

into the individual rack/UPS/power/cooling systems. 

The RiWatchIT software uses this information to generate a 

graphical representation of the room with allocated alarm 

messages as the basis for monitoring display. Any malfunctions 

are displayed automatically. RiWatchIT is a network 

management system tailored to RimatriX5. Data exchange 

occurs in the Ethernet via SNMP. 

Server module/SNMP module 

The server module and SNMP module may 

be installed on any given computer as a 

service. All key data relating to the security 

of the data centres is collated and 

documented. The applications run permanently 

in the background and are visible to 

the user. 

RiWatchIT allows you to monitor 

the on-going operation of a 

data centre. 

Extended options with RiWatchIT modules 

Admin module 

The Admin module allows individual 

structuring of the alarm system. 

The various alarms may be linked to the 

different locations. 

Monitoring of the data centre: 

● Trap alarm message system 

● Storage of the alarms in a log file 

● In the event of an alarm, e-mail notification is sent via 

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP 

● Monitoring and display of the status of RimatriX5 components 

● Setting of monitoring levels and limits 

● Graphical representation of temperature variation 

● Auto-discovery function for simple set-up of the system 

● Open to different operating systems, thanks to Java 

(Windows/Linux) 

● System alarms may be processed, annotated and archived 

● Current version available to download free at: 

www.rimatrix5.com 

View module 

The View module may be launched from 

up to ten computers in parallel. Monitoring 

of the data centre may be implemented 

from here. The View module receives the 

information via the server/SNMP module. 


RiWatchIT V2.1 

The RiWatchIT V2.1 software is the Rittal monitoring software 

for RimatriX5. 

It operates in conjunction with the configuration software 

RiGetIT. RiGetIT supplies a graphical representation of the 

IT room with monitoring function data integrated into the individual 

rack/UPS/power/cooling systems. Using the information 

forwarded, the RiWatchIT V2.1 software generates the 

basis for monitoring visualisation: A graphical representation 

of the room with fixed, allocated alarm messages. 

Alarm representation may also be supplemented with individual 

JPEG images. In this way, for example, a company 

site may be integrated into the management interface and 

linked together. The user in RiWatchIT V2.1 always has an 

overview of alarm management and is able to see the alarms 

originating from the rack in the overview image. 

The RiWatchIT V2.1 software has a scan function which 

searches the network for all available systems (UPS, PSM, 

LCP, CMC, sensors etc.). These components may be allocated 

to the actual positions in the room plans of RiGetIT or 

the incorporated JPEG images. Data exchange with the CMC 

and UPS systems occurs in the IP network via the Simple 

Network Management Protocol (SNMP). 

Available to download at: www.rimatrix5.com 

Free! 

Benefits: 

● Trap alarm message system with workflow 

● Storage of the alarms in a log file 

● Multi-stage alarm management with the option of adding 

comments to alarms that have been processed 

● Alarm links may be made on the basis of conditions 

● Traps may be forwarded to superordinate NMS 

● In the event of an alarm, an e-mail is sent via Simple Mail 

Transfer Protocol (SMTP) 

● Other software tools may be activated in the event of an 

alarm 

● Monitoring and display of the status of the extinguisher 

systems, UPS, power distribution, cooling systems, fan 

speed, access systems, rack security etc. 

● Setting of monitoring levels and limits 

● Graphical representation of temperature/humidity development, 

with the data recorded in log files 

● Auto-discovery function for simple set-up of the system 

● Open to operating systems, thanks to Java (Windows/ 

Linux) 

● The software is installed as a service (server and SNMP 

module) 

● The entire system may be set up and configured via the 

Admin module 

● Up to 10 View modules may be activated from various 

points in the network. User monitoring may be implemented 

from these points 

System requirements: 

(minimum): 

● Java Runtime Environment JRE 1.4 

(we recommend 1.5 or above) 

● Available to download at: java.sun.com 


Monitoring 

Software service RiWatchIT 

Monitoring of rack installations such as UPS systems, 

power distribution and CMC-TC sensors. 

All key active components such as UPS, CMC-TC sensors and 

power system module PSM may be visualised via the View module. 

Status display of fitted components. 

201 

Monitoring

IT infrastructure – complete 

from Rittal International 

The performance and availability of your IT system is at the 

heart of everything Rittal thinks and does, because ultima- 

tely, we are concerned with protecting continuous business 

processes. Business continuity is the key, as opposed to 

data losses and system failures. Specifically, this translates 

into a comprehensive service, integrated complete solu- 

tions, and holistic security concepts for maximum opera- 

tional reliability and cost-effectiveness. 

Rittal IT catalogue/IT infrastructure 

Rittal 

IT intrastructure and system 

integration under RimatriX5: 

● Rack 

● Power 

● Cooling 

● Security 

● Monitoring & 

Remote Management 

● Services 

Litcos 

Business continuity 

management 

● Analysis 

● Planning 

● Implementation 

● Support 

● Disaster recovery 

management 

Lampertz 

Physical IT security 

Priority areas: 

● Fire 

● Gases 

● Water used for fire-fighting 

● Break-ins 

Rittal International comprised of the companies 

Rittal, Litcos and Lampertz offers competent advice, 

innovative concepts and individual solutions. A powerful 

alliance for sure. 

IT infrastructure 204 

RimatriX5 – Modules .......................................................................204 

RimatriX5 – Your requirements – Our solutions ..............................205 

RimatriX5 – Holistically efficient ......................................................206 

RimatriX5 – Customised solutions with modular system technology ...207 

RimatriX5 – Comprehensive services .............................................209 

Litcos – Your partner for successful IT security management .......210 

Lampertz – Complete physical security .........................................212 

Lampertz – Risk minimisation is a management task.....................214 

Lampertz Modular Safe ..................................................................216 

Lampertz Basic Safe.......................................................................219 

Perfect global system 

solutions for data centres 

with Rittal RimatriX5. 

One of the leading companies 

in Europe for the 

analytical consultancy and 

holistic planning of data 

centre structures. 

One-stop suppliers of 

security-critical computer 

centre structures. Modular 

IT security solutions for IT 

security rooms, functional 

reliability, maintenance and 

repair. 

203 

R 

IT infrastructure



RimatriX5 – The modules 

Rack 

As the world’s leading manufacturer 

of server and network 

enclosures, Rittal offers a comprehensive 

product range with 

an optimum accessory portfolio. 

This helps you to create the ideal 

requirements for individual configuration 

of your IT infrastructure. 

The consequence: Greater 

freedom, greater flexibility, 

greater reliability. 

Cooling 

Climate control concepts from 

Rittal help to minimise investment 

costs and maximise investment 

reliability. 

With scalable climate control 

concepts such as the Liquid 

Cooling Package or direct CPU 

cooling, data centres may be 

extended in a temperatureneutral 

way, without needing 

to modify the room. 

Monitoring & 

Remote Management 

Simple to operate and a perfect 

overview: Monitoring & remote 

management help to permanently 

reduce maintenance and 

operating costs with the system 

operational, and increase availability. 

For example, comprehensive 

monitoring, measurement and 

control tasks via the CMC-TC 

(Computer Multi Control Top 

Concept) reduce the risk of failure 

to a minimum and facilitate 

preventive intervention. 

Rack, Power, Cooling, Security, Monitoring & Remote 

Management – the modules for your success. 

Five infrastructure modules for an optimum IT performance. 

The complete, integral solution from Rittal with individual 

all-round support, complemented by a comprehensive range 

of services for maximum operational reliability and efficiency. 

Power 

This module ensures a constant, 

uninterrupted power supply. 

It includes power distribution 

inside the rack and data centre 

with the Rittal Power System 

Module PSM and power protection 

with the UPS Power Modular 

Concept PMC 200. 

Security 

Physical security is one of the 

principal elements of high availability 

of the entire IT infrastructure. 

Temperature, smoke and vibration 

sensors coupled with 

modern access control and fire 

protection solutions provide reliable 

protection against external 

influences. 

Services 

We have no time for system 

failures: Maximum operational 

reliability, high availability and 

excellent cost-effectiveness are 

supported by innovative, pioneering 

technology, individual 

advice, a complete system 

architecture, and comprehensive 

service. In short, Rittal 

modular services. 

Take us at our word. 

204 Rittal IT catalogue/IT infrastructure

Your 

requirements 

● Efficient, powerful 

systems for cooling, 

power supply and 

distribution 

● Optimised space 

utilisation in the data 

centre 

● Maximum 

availability 

● High level of 

investment certainty 

● Comprehensive 

advice and holistic 

solutions 



Your requirements – our solutions: RimatriX5 at a glance 

Our solution with RimatriX5 

● IT cooling with the LCP improves cost-effectiveness and grows along with your 

requirements for enhanced cooling performance. 

● The pressure on room cooling is relieved, thanks to this rack-based, 

scalable cooling solution 

● Power protection with the modular UPS (PMC 200) ensures optimum availability 

and reduces electricity costs, thanks to the improved efficiency and intelligent 

redundancy. 

● Comprehensive range of racks and accessories 

● Technical concepts which support an optimum performance density for power 

supply and cooling (e.g. with PMC 200, PSM Plus, LCP Plus) 

● Rack-mounted modularity reduces mean time to repair, and system modules may 

be individually exchanged via safe swap. This principle improves the availability of 

your IT (the principle behind RimatriX5). 

● Their scalability and adaptability allow individual system modules (e. g. LCP, 

PMC 200) to be modified at any time in line with changing technical and spatial 

requirements – both now and in the future. We call it “pay-as-you-grow”, thanks to 

RimatriX5 modularity. 

● Efficient management ● Monitoring of the operating states in the data centre via IP-based monitoring and 

extensive remote management functions. 

● A powerful alliance: Rittal International, with the companies Rittal, Litcos and 

Lampertz. 

205 

IT infrastructure



RimatriX5 – Holistically efficient 

Low energy, rental and 

fixed costs 

● The temperature-neutral 

expansion of the data 

centre with the LCP keeps 

energy costs constant for 

climate control of the 

building, even when 

expanding and configuring 

with hardware. 

● The rack-optimised design 

of the RimatriX5 infrastructure 

saves space, which 

in turn saves rental and 

energy costs. 

● Energy-efficient systems 

reduce electricity costs. 

Example: High level of 

efficiency of UPS and 

rack-based liquid cooling 

improves the energy balance. 

Low investment costs 

● Standardised modules are 

transformed into costeffective,customer-specific, 

individual solutions. 

● Modularity means scalable 

and adaptive holistic 

solutions – this not only 

reduces the overall costs, 

but also increases investment 

security; cost-effectiveness 

is assured, thanks 

to the “pay-as-you-grow” 

principle. Only retrieve and 

pay for the performance 

you need right now; but at 

the same time, be prepared 

for the future. 

TCO – Total Cost of Ownership: 

Top marks for Rittal RimatriX5. 

Every investment in your IT systems must be worthwhile! 

It is therefore advisable to consider all the costs and what 

you get in exchange. With some investments, the products 

may appear cheap, but there are hidden costs associated 

with on-going operation. RimatriX5 puts you on the right 

financial track. 

The basic idea behind RimatriX5 is based on a simple 

principle: Performance up – costs down! 

Short MTTR = 

Mean Time To Repair, 

for maximum availability 

● Integrated, intelligent 

redundancy for UPS and 

climate control help to cut 

costs and safeguard availability. 

● The modular concept of 

the three-phase UPS plant 

and the liquid climate control 

system LCP ensure the 

shortest repair times. 

● The system may be serviced 

and extended while 

operational. 

Maintenance – cost-effective 

through prevention 

● The proactive security 

packages monitor and 

control hardware via a 

uniform system interface, 

and report on status. Any 

problems that may emerge 

are detected and rectified 

early on, before damage 

can occur. 

● Service and maintenance 

work optimise the operating 

parameters of your 

systems. 


Capacity 

100 % 

80 % 

60 % 

40 % 

20 % 

0 % 

0 



RimatriX5 – Customised solutions with modular system technology 

Efficient IT infrastructure 

Blade servers with their superior computing performance are 

very resource-hungry and therefore incur high heat losses. 

As a result, the requirements of IT infrastructure solutions are 

rising dramatically: For example, there is a demand for 

energy-efficient UPS and cooling systems which are distinguished 

by low power consumption coupled with minimal 

heat loss. 

On top of this, we aim to keep the so-called total cost of 

ownership (TCO), i.e. the sum total of purchase and acquisition 

costs, at the lowest possible level, which ensuring 

absolute availability and security. 

Impossible? Certainly not. The “pay-as-you-grow” concept 

from Rittal is pivotal to our solution. This means that the user 

selects the exact IT infrastructure solution which is most 

efficient for him. Both current and future requiremenets are 

taken into account. The benefits for the user include: No 

overdimensioning, no unnecessary fixed costs, and, if necessary, 

easy extendibility even with the system operational. 

Time 

Max. space capacity 

Installed space capacity 

1 2 3 4 5 

All the costs at a glance with RimatriX5 

Cost-effectiveness analyses must be comprehensive, and 

include everything from the initial acquisition, to operation, 

through to maintenance. With this in mind, Rittal offers decisive 

cost benefits on all criteria: 

● Lower investment costs coupled with investment security 

thanks to maximum flexibility 

● Lower operating costs through energy-efficient systems 

for cooling and power supply plus cost-effective adaptation 

to your requirements 

RimatriX5 from Rittal combines holistic IT infrastructure solutions 

with superb know-how. Thanks to our comprehensive 

range of services, individual connections are made between 

the module racks, power, cooling, security, monitoring & 

remote management. 

Generally speaking, RimatriX5 modules are designed to be 

system-integrated – all areas are superbly coordinated with 

one another to ensure maximum energy efficiency, optimum 

space utilisation, plus cost-effective servicing and expansions. 

As a manufacturer of holistic IT infrastructures, Rittal supplies 

its customers with everything from a single source. 

In this way, the required levels of security and availability are 

implemented to perfection in harmony with the principle of 

cost-effectiveness. 

Pay-as-you-grow 

The “pay-as-you-grow” concept from Rittal: The user only purchases 

the IT infrastructure solution he actually needs. If his requirements 

grow, the infrastructure grows with him. Efficiency through 

modularity. 

● Reduced downtime and hence lower costs, thanks to 

a high level of availability plus remote maintenance and 

administration 

● Reduced planning costs thanks to modular, scalable 

components 

● Minimal installation and expansion costs through 

plug & play technology and technical modifications with 

the system operational 

3 

2 

1 

1 

2 

3 

Current performance 

requirement 

Scalable, requirementoriented, 

gradual adaptation 

of requirements with 

RimatriX5 

Installed excess capacity 

without RimatriX5 

207 

IT infrastructure



RimatriX5 – Customised solutions with modular system technology 

Whether you are a small, medium-sized or large company, 

the optimised interactions between the innovative modules 

of RimatriX5 guarantee system solutions tailored precisely to 

your current requirements. What is more, they are versatile 

and scalable should your requirements grow. Highly com- 

plex applications, escalating computer performance, plus 

Analysis: Your requirements 

form the starting point 

Rittal will visit you on site to discuss the various technical solutions and future-safe technology trends. 

The RimatriX5 safety checks and Rittal climate checks (see page 150) provide IT managers with a professional 

analysis of their IT structure and climate control technology. 

RimatriX5 safety checks – Professional advice for maximum efficiency 

Check 1: Structural design 

● Location in the environment and building 

● Design of IT rooms in line with the relevant standards 

(to DIN 4102, EN 1047) 

● Structural design of the IT room 

● Room height, raised access floor 

● Structural fire protection, separate fire lobbies 

● Computer arrangement in the IT room 

● Interior installations 

Check 2: Power supply 

● Schematic diagram from the utility supply 

to the consumer 

● Logging of the rated output and hardware data 

● Network configuration check 

● Installation design of server 

● UPS/emergency generator check 

● Redundancy 

● Visual check of earthing/potential equalisation 

and lightning & overvoltage protection 

Check 3: Climate control technology 

● Climate control equipment concept 

● Coolant 

● Logging of the required cooling output 

● Distribution of incoming air in the room 

● Redundancy 

● Limit value monitoring 

● External equipment 

● Maintenance contracts 

the demand for round-the-clock information and communi- 

cation – all this necessitates an IT infrastructure featuring 

the ultimate in security and availability. 

Rittal provides a tailor-made solution to your require- 

ments – with RimatriX5! 

Check 4: Security/fire alarm systems 

● Site monitoring 

● Building monitoring 

● Room monitoring 

● Window/door protection, block padlock device 

● Intruder alarm centre 

● Fire alarm concept 

● Fire extinguisher concept 

Check 5: Operational/emergency organisation 

● Data protection 

● Use of electrical equipment 

● Paper/data carrier disposal 

● Plant cleaning 

● Disaster manual 

● Restart plan 

Check 6: PowerDecider 

● Measurement of the power supply (voltage, current, 

frequency, apparent power, effective power and reactive 

power, asymmetries and harmonics, etc.) 

● Logging of voltage drops and rises, transients, interruptions 

and fast voltage changes 

● Determination of your exact kVA and kW requirements 

● Report with results/evaluations 


In RimatriX5, Rittal offers its customers an integrated, 

complete solution for outstanding IT performance with 

a comprehensive range of services and five perfectly 

coordinated IT infrastructure modules: 

Analysis Advice and 

planning 

● Data capture, assessment 

of structural 

design, power supply, 

security technology, fire 

alarm and extinguisher 

systems, climate control 

technology, company 

organisation, document 

management 

● Climate checks with load 

tests, wireless sensor 

technology, pipeline 

calculation, CFD and 

thermography 


● Concept development, 

draft planning, 

detailed planning, 

accompaniment of 

the building phase, 

organisation of 

IT operations, 

IT emergency plan 

● Project and room 

planning 

● Complete project 

organisation 

Implementation 

and logistics 

● Configuration, production, 

delivery, 

pre-assembly 

● Accompaniment of 

the on-site installation 

process 

● Special logistics 

(e.g. vibration-damped 

HGVs) 

Rittal service packs – individual for optimum availability 

Business hours 


RimatriX5 – Comprehensive services 

Installation 

and commissioning 

● Creation of a functioning 

complete system – 

From power supply, 

to climate control, 

through to holistic 

security concepts 

● Installation, functional 

tests, operational 

training for your staff 

Certification 

and maintenance 

● Depending on your 

requirements, we also 

offer services such as 

service packs, maintenance 

contracts, 

remote management, 

automated escalation 

management, and a 

central hotline (up to 

24/7/365) 

Basic Comfort Advanced Full Customised 

Reachability 

24/7/365 

Next working day 

Response times 

Next day 

8 hours 

Standard 

Spare parts availability 

24 hours 

Individual concept 

1/year 

Maintenance 

2/year 

Individual (min. 2/year) 

No 

Warranty extension 

Yes 

Talk to our experts in holistic IT infrastructures! Speak to your direct point of contact. 

209 

IT infrastructure



Litcos – Your partner for successful IT security management 

The entire IT system is a vital part of the business-critical processes in your company, and has a very 

decisive influence on your success. In order to stabilise and build on your success, Litcos is at your 

side with a clear set of principles. As an experienced and competent pilot, we are able to work with you 

to steer your IT processes into safe and successful waters. 

The complete value-added chain in the field of business-critical 

IT processes: 

The building, securing and further development of mission-critical IT 

processes are part of today’s critical-success factors in the management 

of modern companies and IT managers in particular are faced 

with huge challenges in this regard specifically in relation to: 

Business-process security 

Initiation Analysis 

● Basic 

workshops 

● Facilitation 

Self-assessments 

● Business process analysis 

● Risk/security analysis 

● Energy efficiency analysis 

● IT operating organisation 

analysis 

● Preparation for security 

certification 

Training 

● On-going cost-pressure 

● Increased liability risks for those responsible 

● Rising data security requirements 

● A greater degree of merging of the application level, systems 

engineering and the IT infrastructure 

Security management, 

design study Solution consultancy 

● IT security strategy 

● IT process monitoring 

● Disaster recovery 

● Documentation 

● Security organisation 

● Security processes 

● Comprehensive 

security solutions 

● Network and 

system security 

● Physical protection 

● Total monitoring 

● Business process documentation 

according to ITIL 


Strategy 

Control 

Your targets are met in four steps: 


Implementation 

Efficiency 

Business continuity 

With four integrative modules for the 

continuous operation of IT infrastructures. 


Litcos – Your partner for successful IT security management 

Costs of the IT infrastructure 

Total cost 

Cost of failure 

Availability cost 

Break-even point 

Optimum ratio of IT availability to 

failure costs. 

1. Holistic IT analysis and the correct strategy 

With our pragmatic, targeted approach we identify IT weak 

points and create the basis for a joint strategy development 

and expedient risk-minimising investment decisions. 

2. Planning of a high-efficiency concept 

Target achievement with consideration of all cost-relevant IT 

factors – never absolute and isolated, but always within an 

interlinked system – describes our approach. We place particular 

focus on energy efficiency for long-term cost optimisation. 

Break-even point 

Availability 

Holistic concepts 

for your IT security in business 

processes. 

3. Perfect implementation with comprehensive know-how 

All the required stages for the successful implementation of 

your data centre are mastered to perfection by our experienced 

specialists. Be it conversion, redevelopment, optimisation, 

new construction, outsourcing strategies, security 

solutions or disaster management, you can rest assured that 

Litcos has the quality, deadlines and costs reliably under 

control. 

4. Service safeguards availability and cost-effectiveness 

Efficient IT controlling means avoiding incidents and at the 

same time, optimising costs. Preventive service will identify 

any emerging deficiencies before they become a risk and 

cost problem. 

Only in this way can we achieve the high level of operational 

reliablity that your company needs for efficient organisational 

and production operations. 

Note: 

Further information may be found on the Internet at 

www.litcos.com 

211 

IT infrastructure



Lampertz – Solutions for complete physical security 

Lampertz specialises in protecting information, communications and supply systems from physical 

threats such as fire, smoke, water and unauthorised access. 

Thanks to consistent and continuous advancement on the basis of our comprehensive expertise, 

we achieve high-end technical solutions which stand out in the market as trend-setters. The benefits 

to the customer are the main focus of everything we do. With this in mind, we develop and supply 

protection which is precisely tailored to the requirements of your data centre. 

Our aim is to reliably protect the information and telecommunications systems of your company or institution from failure. 

In this way, we ensure continuity and an enhanced level of security from the considerable financial risks associated with the 

destruction or impairment of your IT systems and data. 

Protection 

from a single 

source. 

RACK PROTECTOR 

Lampertz Security Safe 

LSS 9.6 E 

Mini data centre for IT structures. 

Certified high-availability protection 

for decentralised IT system 

sites. 


Lampertz Modular Safe 

LMS 9.3 

Physical hardware protection for 

racks at a high level of security. 

The modular design facilitates 

optimum flexibility. 


Lampertz Basic Safe 

LBS 9.9/9.0 C 

Physical hardware protection for 

IT components. 90 minutes of fire 

resistance, also suitable for use in 

escape and rescue areas. 


RISK PROTECTOR 

Lampertz Security Room 

LSR 18.6 E 

ECB S certified high-availability 

protection for IT systems and 

network components. 

Lampertz Media Safes 

You should never leave your 

data security to chance. Use the 

well-proven Lampertz safe for 

your documents and data. 




LSR 9.3 

Extended basic protection for 

IT and communications systems 

and their infrastructure. 

Climate control concepts 

Lampertz climate control systems 

are ideally suited to complex 

IT and network applications 

such as the Lampertz risk 

and rack protector solutions. 

Lampertz Functional 

Safeguard 

Solution concepts for structural 

protection against fire. Functional 

safeguard and protection 

against fire and corrosive gases. 


Lampertz – Solutions for complete physical security 



LSR 9.0 

The basic protection solution 

according to the FSIT for IT, technical 

and archive rooms, and for 

important supply modules. 

Lampertz UPS systems 

Lampertz uninterruptible power 

supplies ensure a constant 

power supply to the IT infrastructure. 

SPECTRO-DATA Vision 

The multi-functional furnishing 

system, used to create flexible 

standard and technological 

workplaces. 


Lampertz Security Wall 

LSW 9.0 

The Lampertz Security Wall 9.0 is 

an easy-to-install, flexible and 

modular wall system. 

Network enclosures and 

accessories 

Specified network enclosures and 

precisely tailored accessories create 

a suitable space for the structured 

accommodation of your IT 

components. 

Services 

Scalable service packages 

guarantee first-class escalation 

management. 

213 

IT infrastructure



Lampertz – Risk minimisation is a management task 

Avoid your worst nightmare! 

Information and communication systems are essentially comprised 

of highly sensitive microelectronic components. These electronics 

react sensitively to excessive temperatures and extreme humidity. 

In case of fire (which unfortunately can happen anywhere and 

everywhere), important systems are liable to failure or destruction. 

Here, Lampertz offers protection in a variety of categories – right up 

to data protection rooms to EN 1047-2. Even if the surrounding 

rooms are engulfed by flames for 60 minutes, the temperature inside 

will not exceed 70°C, while humidity will not exceed 85 %. Standing 

water from extinguisher systems and sprayed water will not ingress 

for a minimum of 72 hours. 

By way of comparison, in conventionally designed IT rooms, the 

temperature will rise to above 70°C in just 20 minutes, and after just 

15 minutes the humidity will have risen to 100 %! 

Keep smoke and lightning out! 

Studies of fires in companies have revealed that smoke and gases 

cause the greatest damage. These can be highly toxic, spread 

rapidly throughout the entire building, penetrate everything, and 

solidify. This then also affects ITC systems, which may need to be 

discarded if contaminated. 

Lampertz offers smoke-proof solutions which reliably protect your 

systems from fire. 

Other potential risks are associated with lightning strikes on the 

electricity supply. This creates voltage peaks, to which your systems 

will react sensitively. Depending on the strength of the lightning 

strike, you systems may fail or even be destroyed. 

Here, Lampertz offers security concepts with integral UPS (uninterruptible 

power supply). These reliably filter out overvoltage – such 

as that caused by lightning – and continue to supply your systems 

with power in the event of a power failure. 

This helps to avoid expensive system downtime. 

The right temperature and voltage, around 

the clock 

If ITC systems are subjected to severe stresses and demands, the 

temperature in computer and telecommunications rooms and data 

centres can soon rise. This is particularly true of so-called hot spots, 

where heat generation is above average. If critical values are 

reached, this can lead to overheating of the electronic components, 

and ultimately to the failure of servers, computers or even the entire 

ITC infrastructure. 

Lampertz has developed a range of intelligent climate control systems 

to selectively and reliably prevent such scenarios from occurring. 

These are extremely flexible and adapt to the situation, ensure 

the correct temperatures in a controlled fashion, and provide reliable 

protection for your investments. Moreover, they are extremely 

compact, low-noise and, thanks to their high level of efficiency, 

convincingly energy-efficient. 

Apart from heat, overvoltage is another sensitive topic for computers, 

servers and other IT components. Fluctuations in the electricity 

grid from a variety of causes can influence the function of memory 

chips, processors etc. or even destroy them in a flash. Before you 

know it, nothing is working! 

Lampertz UPS modules (uninterruptible power supply) ensure 

permanent, consistent voltage, even during regular operation. 


1 

1 RISK PROTECTOR Lampertz Security Room LSR 18.6 E 

2 RISK PROTECTOR Lampertz Security Room LSR 9.3 

3 

RISK PROTECTOR Lampertz Security Room LSR 9.0 


3 


Lampertz – Risk minimisation is a management task 

2 

Security rooms – Risk Protector 

Lampertz develops and supplies solutions that are precisely tailored 

to your company’s requirements. 

For example, what effect would downtime of one minute, one hour 

or one day have on your operations? How great would the financial 

damage or loss of image be? 

Lampertz offers a range of modular IT strong rooms with basic protection 

(LSR 9.0), extended protection (LSR 9.3) or high-availability 

protection (LSR 18.6 E). 

These systems may be upgraded at any time and adapt flexibly to 

the structural situation. Because they can be combined with modular 

Lampertz infrastructure solutions such as UPS, climate control, 

fire alarm and extinguisher systems, video and remote monitoring, 

access controls etc., risk potential is convincingly minimised. The 

components may be used individually, or integrated into a complete 

system. 

Security safes – Rack Protector 

You do not need to invest in a complete security data centre in order 

to protect your IT from the various potential threats. With the modular 

safe LMS 9.3, Lampertz offers a security solution which is tailored 

to your small to medium-scale 482.6 mm (19″) hardware. 

The Modular Safe LMS 9.3 may be fitted with the system operational, 

extended at any time – by removing a partition – by adding 

extra modules, and is easily assembled and dismantled. The system 

may be combined with all additional features such as climate 

control, fire alarm and extinguisher systems and independent power 

supplies. 

Media safes 

The loss of important data can prove extremely costly, since in a 

worst-case scenario, there is a risk of information such as development 

expertise being lost forever. 

Because data loss can threaten a company’s very existence, 

governments require that it is stored securely. 

Lampertz media safes protect against fire and theft, and meet the 

high requirements for ECB·S certification. 

Thanks to a wide range of different sizes, in conjunction with special 

configuration variants for the storage of magnetic tapes, CDs, DVDs, 

floppy disks etc. you can choose the exact media safe to meet your 

company’s requirements. 

215 

IT infrastructure




The autonomous mini-data centre for your IT systems and components 

A company’s IT systems are not always housed in a secure data centre. Decentralised system are particularly at risk. Protect 

your server racks and network systems from threats such as fire, water, smoke gases and theft with a Lampertz modular safe 

LMS 9.3. 

The main benefit is that the LMS can be built around the existing rack with the system operational. 

Consequently, there is no “downtime”, and the location of the Lampertz Modular Safe is easily changed at any time. 

Benefits of the Lampertz Modular Safe LMS 9.3: 

● 90 minutes’ fire protection subject to compliance with 

the temperature and humidity limits for IT systems over 

30 minutes 

● Theft protection (WK 2) based on EN 1627 

● Impermeability to water used for fire-fighting IP 56 to 

DIN VDE 0470/EN 60 529 

● Modular enclosure structure – Installation with the IT 

systems operational 

Optional: 

● Internal room monitoring 

● Early fire detection 

● Extinguisher system 

● Uninterruptible power supply 

● PSM busbar 

Summary: 

The modular safe is a mini-data centre including the required IT infrastructure! 

Fire 

Water used for 

fire-fighting 

Corrosive gases Unauthorised 

access 

Vandalism Falling debris Explosion Dust 


External dimensions 

mm 


Description 

of standards: 

The basic models (42 U 

and 47 U) are equipped as 

follows: 

● Modular case construction 

● Suite may be extended to 

the right and left 

● Operator door and servicing 

door 

● Tested cable entry systems 

in both side panels 

● Climate control up to 

1200 W 

Internal dimensions 

mm 

42 U 47 U 42 U 47 U 

Height 2210 2410 2030 2230 

Width 1100 1100 920 920 

Depth 1200 1200 1030 1030 



Active protection of your systems in various sizes 


Weight: Approx. 760/800 kg 

Colour: 

Enclosure: RAL 7035 (pale grey), 

Operator door: RAL 3020 (traffic-light red) 

Available in: 

42 U or 47 U, 

as a single safe or as a suite of 2, 3 or 4 

Compatible configuration: 

● Climate control solutions 

up to 12 kW 

● Climate redundancy 

● Bifold door 

● Electronic combination 

lock 

● Cable entry in the top and 

base unit 

● Available as a single 

modular safe or multi-suite 

● Rittal TS 8 rack 

● Rittal CMC monitoring unit 

(network-capable and 

Web-based) 

● Fire alarm and extinguisher 

system 

● Early fire detection 

● Uninterruptible power 

supply from 1 – 3 kVA 

217 

IT infrastructure




Want to extend in line with your growing requirements? 

These days, almost all IT sectors have large numbers of 

racks with 482.6 mm (19″) equipment. 

These servers and 482.6 mm (19″) units are often interconnected 

with patch cables. But these days, even these highly 

sensitive hardware units can enjoy reliable protection from 

fire and unauthorised access: thanks to modular safe suites 

from Lampertz! 

Modular safe units can be effortlessly connected with the 

computer operational. Each element is equipped with an 

operator and servicing door plus customer-specific accessories. 

One product – versatile opportunities – complete 

reliability for your 482.6 mm (19″) system. 

Lampertz Modular Safe LMS 9.3 SP – 

Compact, flexible, secure 

The LMS 9.3 SP “Solution Package” is a variant of the 

LMS 9.3. 

The standard configuration includes: 

● Lampertz Modular Safe LMS 9.3 

The Solution Package variant is like a full “suit of armour” for 

racks in SMEs. 

Standardised complete solution with comprehensive security 

features, consisting of: 

● Lampertz Modular Safe LMS 9.3 

● 19″ rack (TS 8) 

● Redundant climate control 

● UPS power supply (PMC) 

● Early fire detection (EFD) 

● Prevention through active extinguishing (DET-AC Plus) 

● Modular power distribution (PSM) 

● Network-capable monitoring (CMC) 


Lampertz Basic Safe – The right decision for your IT systems 



Lampertz Basic Safe 

Many threats such as fire, smoke, water and vandalism are “lying in wait” for your systems and data, but these can be relia- 

bly averted with a Lampertz Basic Safe. Both the small Basic Safe LBS 9.0 C (Compact) and the flexible Modular Safe 

LMS 9.3 meet very high security standards. The LBS 9.0 C supports the installation of 15 U in the popular 482.6 mm (19″) 

system, while the LMS 9.3 can accommodate up to 47 U. The Lampertz Basic Safe LBS 9.0 C is a compact micro-data 

centre offering a high level of flexibility in the various configuration variants, and is designed primarily for small and medium- 

sized IT installations with a small number of servers. 


Weight: Approx. 560/620 kg 

Colour: 

Enclosure: 

RAL 7035 (pale grey) 

Operator door: 

RAL 3020 (traffic-light red) 

External 

dimensions 

mm 

Internal 

dimensions 

mm 

Height 1540 850 

Width 760 650 

Depth 

950 820 

1150 1020 

Fire Unauthorised 

access 

Description 

of standards: 

● Security enclosure with 

operator door and servicing 

door 

● Cable entry in both side 

panels 

● Full climate control 1.3 kW 

● Base/plinth to slide underneath, 

height 100 mm 

Compatible configuration: 

● Early fire detection – EFD 

● Monitoring – CMC-TC 

● Uninterruptible power 

supply – PMC 

● 19″ network rack 

Applications: 

● Micro-data centre for 

SMEs 

● Protection for servers, 

storage applications and 

network components 

● Also suitable for integration 

into smaller office 

rooms 

● Storage of personal data, 

e.g. doctors’ surgeries or 

tax consultants 

Note: 

Further information may be found on the Internet at 

www.lampertz.com 

219 

IT infrastructure

220

Enormous flexibility 

for a wide range of tasks 

Rittal is more familiar with this development than virtually any 

other player on the market: For years, the demands placed 

by modern telecommunications and data transfer on distribu- 

tor racks, enclosures and accessories have been escalat- 

ing, with no end in sight. There is a wide variety of standards 

that must be met. At the same time, the IT sector and indus- 

try demand the utmost flexibility to allow enclosures and 

racks 

to be adapted in line with the local technical, spatial and 

climatic conditions. Rittal combines these two apparently 

conflicting requirements to develop new ideas. The use of 

even the smallest creative scope is always the greatest 

challenge for Rittal. Even something which appears perfect 

on the surface can still be modified and improved, be it a 

rack or a mobile workstation. 

TC rack 

Top quality, torsionally stiff aluminium 

sections provide the basis for the 

open frame, which may be individually 

designed with panels. Compliance 

with standard ETS 300 119-3 is 

guaranteed. 

FM small and wall-mounted 

distributors 

Ideally suited for the configuration of 

transit, intermediate and main distributors. 

The protection category of 

IP 55 makes it suitable for use in 

tough industrial environments. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Telecom/Distributor racks/Mobile workstations 

Modular FM distribution racks 

The TS 8 baying system for main distributors 

simply grows as your volume 

expands. The modular concept even 

supports the combination of different 

telecoms systems in the same enclosure. 

Data Rack 

The solution for flexible networks, open 

distributors and mobile 482.6 mm 

(19″) laboratory applications. The torsionally 

stiff, highly resilient frame is 

infinitely depth-variable in one or two 

levels on the stable base/plinth. 

Telecom/distributor racks/ 

mobile workstations from page 222 

Rittal TC rack ..................................................................................222 

Accessories for Rittal TC rack ........................................................223 

CS Indoor Rack...............................................................................225 

Small FM distributors ......................................................................226 

FM wall-mounted distributors, modular ..........................................227 

FM distributor racks, modular.........................................................228 

Accessories for FM distribution racks, modular .............................229 

LSA connection system ..................................................................397 

Rittal Data Rack ..............................................................................231 

Acessories for Rittal Data Rack ......................................................232 

Rittal RiLab II...................................................................................234 

Accessories for Rittal RiLab II.........................................................235 

RiLab II 

The mobile workstation is sure to 

impress, with its high level of stability, 

flexible applications, hygiene-friendly 

design and intelligent cable management, 

concealed inside the chassis. 

221 

Telecom/distributor racks/mobile workstations

Telecom 

Telecom 

Rittal TC rack 

Material: 

Roof/base frame: 

Sheet steel, 2 mm 

Frame: 

Aluminium 



Powder-coated in RAL 7035 

Frame: 

Natural, zinc-plated, passivated 


Frame: 

4 supporting aluminium 

uprights, the two front uprights 

are prepared to accommodate 

doors whilst the two rear uprights 

are prepared to accommodate 

a rear panel and a 

ceiling fastening. 


to accommodate roof/base 

cover modules. 

Fitted as standard with cover 

plate (D = 300 mm) or sliding 

covers (D = 600 mm), 

4 levelling feet. 

222 Rittal IT catalogue/Telecom/Distributor racks/Mobile workstations 

T 

B 

H3 H2 

H3 

H1 




with validity for FR, GB, IT, NL 


Jap. patent no. 233373/94 

Note: 

Used in conjunction with metric 

(535 mm) mounting angles, the 

Telecommunication Rack meets 

the requirements of ETS standard 

300119-3. 


● TC rack fully fitted with 

all-mounting parts 

● Divided front doors 

● Special sizes 



Width (B) mm 3) Packs of 600 600 Page 

Height (H1) mm 3) 2200 2200 

Depth (T) mm 3) 300 600 

Height or mounting dimension (H2) mm 2050 (46 U/82 SU) 2050 (46 U/82 SU) 

Height roof/base frame (H3) mm 75 75 

Model No. DK 1 7723.035 7726.035 2) 

Door 

Sheet steel door, front, solid 1 7720.0352) 7720.0352) 223 

Sheet steel door, front, with vent slots 1 7722.0352) 7722.0352) 223 

Sheet steel door, front, with safety glass insert 1 7725.0352) 7725.0352) Rear/side panel 

223 

Rear panel 1 7729.2352) 7729.2352) 223 

Side panels 2 7713.235 7716.2352) Roof 

223 

Ceiling fastening 1 set 7719.000 7719.000 223 

Roof insert for cable entry 1 – 1) 7701.0352) 223 

Roof insert with vent slots 1 7702.0352) 7702.0352) 223 

Active fan insert 1 7703.0352) 7703.0352) Base/plinth 

223 

Base insert for cable entry 1 – 1) 7701.0352) 223 

Base insert with vent slots 1 7702.0352) 7702.0352) 223 

Active fan insert 1 7703.0352) 7703.0352) Interior installation 

223 

Component shelves for 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 1 7119.250 7119.400 323 

Component shelves for metric mounting angles (530 mm) 1 7119.255 7119.455 323 

Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″), 46 U 2 7758.000 7758.000 224 

Metric mounting angles (535 mm), 82 SU 2 7760.0002) 7760.0002) 224 

Support strips 6 7128.0002) 7129.0002) 224 

Cable clamp rails for installation in the enclosure width 4 7101.0002) 7101.0002) 224 

Cable clamp rails for installation in the enclosure depth 4 7090.0002) 7107.0002) 224 

Earthing set 1 set 7277.000 7277.000 339 

1) Special designs available on request. 2) Delivery times available on request. 

3) All sizes given are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing.


Door 

For front mounting, with 180° hinges, locking rod, 

double-bit lock insert (may be exchanged for 

Ergoform-S lock system). 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Rear/side panel 

To finish off a complete enclosure unit, 

including assembly material. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

For side panels DK 7713.235 and DK 7716.235: 



Ceiling fastening 

Infinitely height-adjustable for ceiling fastening of 

fee-standing Rittal TC racks and for cable routing. 

Max. mounting height of vertical stays: 550 mm. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, zinc-plated, passivated 

Roof and base/plinth insert 

The inserts may be fitted in the roof or base/plinth 

as required. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Telecom 

Acessories for Rittal TC rack 

Sheet steel door at front Model No. DK 

Solid 7720.0351) With vent slots 7722.0351) With safety glass insert 7725.0351) Lock system Model No. SZ 

Ergoform-S handle RAL 7035 2435.000 

Lock no. 3524 E 2467.000 


Available as a rear door on request. 

For 

enclosure 

depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

Side panel 300 2 7713.235 

Side panel 600 2 7716.2351) For 


mm 

Model No. DK 

Rear panel 600 7729.2351) 1) Delivery times available on request. 



2 vertical stays, 

1 horizontal rail, 

2 cable shunting rings, 


Roof and base/plinth insert Model No. DK 

For cable entry1) 7701.035 

With vent slots 7702.035 

With active fan insert 7703.035 


1) For Rittal TC rack DK 7726.035. 

Special design for DK 7723.035 available on request. 

223 

Telecom

Telecom 

Telecom 

Acessories for Rittal TC rack 

Mounting angles 

Mounting angles on a U/SU pitch pattern and 

T channel mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″)/ 

metric (535 mm). 

The mounting angles are simply screwed to the 

rack upright; a combination of 482.6 mm (19″) 

and metric (535 mm) mounting angles is also 

possible. Also available in a T channel version. 

The mounting angles are depth-adjustable. 


Mounting angles, 


Support strips 

For infinitely variable adjustment of metric 

(535 mm) or 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 

across the entire enclosure depth, or for attachment 

of a second pair of 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles at the rear. 

Material: 



Depth stays, including assembly parts. 

Cable clamp rails 

For installation in the enclosure width and depth. 

Fully height-adjustable for cable clamping with 

rear or side cable routing. 

Material: 



Cable clamp rails, 


Clip-on nuts 

For variable interior installation of TC racks. Simply 

clip onto one of the two channels, for infinitely 

variable component mounting. 



Japanese patent no. 28 91 779 


Material: 

Aluminium, clear-chromated 

Accessories: 

Captive nuts M5 /M6, 

spring nuts, 

screws M5 /M6, 

see page 314. 


Packs 

of 

U pitch 

pattern 

mounting 

angles 

Model No. DK 

SU pitch 

pattern 

mounting 

angles 

T channel 

mounting 

angles 

46 U 2 7758.000 – 7758.100 

82 SU 2 – 7760.0001) 7760.100 


Enclosure depth mm Packs of Model No. DK 

300 6 7128.000 

600 6 7129.000 


Enclosure width 

mm 


600 4 7101.000 


Enclosure depth 

mm 


300 4 7090.000 

600 4 7107.000 


Packs of Model No. FR 

50 2102.500 

Accessories: 

M6 assembly screws, 

see page 315.

Material: 

Side panels, roof and base 

frame: 


Mounting angles: 



Powder-coated in textured 

RAL 7035 

Mounting angles: 

Natural aluminium, 

clear-chromated 


Screw-fastened frame, 

consisting of 

2 side panels, 

roof and base frame, 

front plinth trim, 

2 mounting angles, 

ceiling attachment, 

4 levelling feet, 

4 rear panel struts, 

enclosure panels, earthed. 

Accessories Page 252 Component shelves Page 316 482.6 mm (19″) installation system Page 364 LSA connection systems Page 397 


2050 

600 

232 

2200 

2600 - 2755 

300 

Note: 

The screw-fastened rack will 

accommodate metric or 

482.6 mm (19″) installed equipment 

(to IEC 907 or IEC 297 and 

DIN 41 494). In addition to the 

basic rack, which satisfies the 

requirements of ETSI standard 

300119-3, customised solutions 

can be designed in next to no 

time and implemented costeffectively. 

Width mm 1) Packs of 600 

Height mm 1) 2200 

Depth mm 1) 300 

Clearance width mm 500 

Clearance height mm 2050 

Clearance depth mm 232 

Model No. CS with mounting angles 482.6 mm (19″) 1 9790.042 2) 

Model No. CS with mounting angles, metric 1 9790.0432) Accessories 

Rear panel for screw-fastening, sheet steel 2.0 mm 1 9790.0032) 1) All sizes given are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing. 


Energy-Box 

for DC and AC distribution. 

Model No. see page 332. 

Telecom 

CS Indoor Rack 

The following variants of the 

Indoor rack are available, 

amongst others: 

● Size variants 

● Solid front door 

● Vented front door 

● Horizontally divided doors 

● Folding doors 

● Overlapping doors 

● Roof modules 

● Cut-outs in the enclosure 

panels 

● Interior installation with system 

accessories 




250 mm deep, for 482.6 mm 

(19″) or metric mounting levels. 


225 

Telecom

Telecom 

Telecom 

Small FM distributors 

Material: 





Two-part enclosure 

Wall section: 

With mounting holes for wallmounting, 

2 comb strips for 

cable clamping and brush insert 

for cable entry, shunting ring for 

system-compatible routing of 

telecommunications cables. 

Cover: 

Retaining device and two cam 

locks with double-bit lock insert. 


T2 

B1 

B2 

H 

T1 


German patent 

no. 44 10 795 



Width (B1) mm 1) Packs of 300 500 500 900 Page 

Height (H) mm 1) 500 500 700 700 

Depth (T1) mm 1) 120 120 120 120 

Width of cable entry (B2) mm 195 395 395 795 

Depth of cable entry (T2) mm 29 29 29 29 

Model No. DK 1 7052.035 2) 7053.035 2) 7054.035 2) 7055.035 2) 

Max. number of adjacent cable retainers or mounting troughs (LSA) 1 2 2 4 

Max. accommodation when using cable retainers (LSA) 100 paired wires 200 paired wires 400 paired wires 800 paired wires 

Shunting ring, plastic, 70 x 44 mm 2 3 3 5 

Accessories 

FM universal mouting brackets, L = 275 mm, LSA-Plus 

Lock systems 

1 set 7031.100 7031.100 7031.100 7031.100 230 

T handle without lock insert 1 2572.000 2572.000 2572.000 2572.000 285 

T handle with lock insert no. 3524 E 1 2575.000 2575.000 2575.000 2575.000 285 

Plastic handle with lock no. Nr. 3524 E 1 2576.000 2576.000 2576.000 2576.000 286 

Plastic handle 1 2533.000 2533.000 2533.000 2533.000 286 




FM universal mounting 

bracket 

for the connection of LSA-Plus 

strips. 


Accessories Page 252 Handle systems Page 281 Cable routing Page 350 

T handle 

of die-cast zinc with security 

lock. 

Model No. see page 285.

Material: 


Door: 2.0 mm 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 55 as per EN 60 529/10.91 


Enclosure: based on Rittal AE 

with gland plate at bottom, 

swappable door hinge, 

double-bit lock inserts 

(DK 7014.535 with 3-point locking 

rod and double-bit lock), 

earth rail, cable clamp rail, 

2 punched rails to accommodate 

FM system strips, 

FM system rods and 

FM cable shunting strips 

Top horizontal punched rail to 

accommodate cable shunting 

rings. 


H2 

T1 

Telecom 

FM wall-mounted distributors, modular 

B2 

B1 

H1 


● FM wall-mounted distributor 

configured with Rittal standard 

accessories (FM system 

strips, FM system rods, FM 

cable shunting strips etc.) 

to order. 

● Cable entry with brush strips 

top/bottom. 

Approvals, 

see page 406. 



Width (B1) mm 3) Packs of 600 760 800 800 Page 

Height (H1) mm 3) 600 760 1000 1200 

Depth (T1) mm 3) 350 300 300 300 



Model No. DK 1 7011.535 1) 7012.535 1) 7013.535 1) 7014.535 1) 

Maximum accommodation when using FM system strips 

or FM rods 

Installation of 

340 paired wires 500 paired wires 990 paired wires 1170 paired wires 

FM system strips 

FM system rods 

Accessories 

2 sets 2 sets 3 sets 3 sets 

Plastic handles with lock cylinder insert 1 2439.000 2439.000 2439.000 2439.000 286 

Ergoform-S handle 1 – – – 2435.000 284 

FM system strips2) 1 set 7032.5001) 7033.5001) 7034.5001) 7035.5001) 229 

FM system rods 1 set 7533.0001) 7534.0001) 7535.0001) 7536.0001) 230 

FM cable shunting strips 1 set 7233.0001) 7234.0001) 7235.0001) 7236.0001) 230 

Plastic cable gland plates 5 2563.000 2563.000 2563.000 2563.000 342 

Wall-mounting bracket, 10 mm 1 2508.000 2508.000 2508.000 2508.000 294 

Wall-mounting bracket, 40 mm 


1 2503.000 2503.000 2503.000 2503.000 294 

2) FM universal mounting bracket, VS standard, DIN strips, 71 dividing strip and distributor system series 5000 may be fitted. 


Wall-mounting bracket 

for 10 or 40 mm distance to wall. 


Accessories Page 252 Handle systems Page 281 Gland plates Page 342 

Nylon loop 

for simple attachment of cables. 


227 

Telecom

Telecom 

Telecom 

FM distributor racks, modular 

Material: 

Sheet steel, 

Enclosure frame, roof, rear panel 

and gland plates: 

1.5 mm 

Door: 2 mm 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 55 as per EN 60 529/10.91 


Enclosure frame with door or 

2 doors, without side panels, 

comfort handle with security 

lock, three-piece gland plate, 

rear panel and roof plate, 

3 punched rails to accommodate 

FM system strips, FM system 

rods, FM cable shunting 

strips, 1 top horizontal punched 

rail to accommodate cable 

shunting rings, cable clamp rail, 

earth rail. 


T1 

H2 

B2 

T2 

B1 

H1 


● FM distributor racks configured 

with Rittal standard 

accessories (FM system 

strips, FM system rods, FM 

cable shunting strips etc.) to 

order. 

● FM distributor racks in special 

sizes. 

● FM distributor racks with roof 

plate for cable entry. 



Width (B1) mm 3) Packs of 600 800 1200 Page 

Height (H1) mm 3) 2000 2000 2000 

Depth (T1) mm 3) 400 400 400 



Clearance depth (T2) mm 312 312 312 

Model No. DK 1 7834.060 1) 7834.080 1) 7834.120 1) 

Maximum accommodation when using FM system strips or FM rods 1300 paired wires 1950 paired wires 3250 paired wires 

Installation of 



Accessories 

2 sets 3 sets 5 sets 

FM system strips2) 1 set 7038.500 7038.500 7038.500 229 

FM system rods 1 set 7538.000 7538.000 7538.000 230 

FM cable shunting strips 1 set 7238.000 7238.000 7238.000 230 

Cable shunting ring 

external dimensions 

125 x 85 mm 

125 x 65 mm 

85 x 43 mm 

10 

10 

10 

7111.900 

7111.000 

7112.000 

7111.900 

7111.000 

7112.000 

7111.900 

7111.000 

7112.000 

355 

355 

355 

Side panels 2 8104.235 8104.235 8104.235 265 

Quick-fit baying clamps 6 8800.500 8800.500 8800.500 272 

Roof plate for cable entry 1 7826.6451) 7826.8451) 7826.2451) 292 

Height 100 mm, base/plinth components front/rear 1 set 8601.600 8601.800 8601.200 255 

Height 100 mm, base/plinth components sides 400 mm 1 set 8601.040 8601.040 8601.040 255 

Height 200 mm, base/plinth components front/rear 1 set 8602.600 8602.800 8602.200 255 

Height 200 mm, base/plinth components sides 400 mm 


1 set 8602.040 8602.040 8602.040 255 

2) FM universal mounting bracket, VS standard, DIN strips, 71 dividing strip and distributor system series 5000 may be fitted. 


Accessories Page 252 Handle systems Page 265 Roof variants Page 290 Handle systems Page 281



For user-specific solutions or modular FM enclosure 

assembly. The following connection systems 

may be mounted on the FM system strips: 

● DIN connector strips to DIN 47 614, type B; 

soldering lugs to DIN 41 499, LSA-Plus connector 

strips 1/20 to DIN 47 608 with 170 mm 

mounting dimension, vertical (with 2 system 

strips, horizontal mounting is also supported). 

● Cable retainers or mounting troughs for LSA 

connection technology. 

● Dividing strip 71. 

● Series 5000 distributor system (Corning). 

The FM system strip features a 25 mm DIN pitch 

pattern (DIN 43 660) at the side. Shunting rings of 

plastic or metal may be fitted here for cable routing. 

Alternatively, FM cable shunting strips may 

also be used. 

Telecom 

Accessories for FM distribution racks, modular 

Design: 

Installation height: 120 mm 

Installation width: 75 mm 

Material: 



1 FM system strip, 

2 shunting rings (105 x 70 mm), 


Accessories: 

FM universal mounting bracket DK 7031.100, 

see page 230. 

Shunting rings (plastic) DK 7218.035, 

DK 7219.035, 

see page 355. 

Shunting rings (metal) DK 7111.000, 

DK 7111.900, DK 7112.000, 

see page 355. 

FM cable shunting strips, 

see page 230. 

Population opportunities for DIN, LSA and dividing strips 

Model No. DK 

FM system strips 7032.5001) 7033.5001) 7034.5001) 7035.5001) 7038.500 7039.500 

Length mm 425 625 825 975 1625 1825 

Connection system Maximum population2) paired wires 

DIN connector strip 20 60 80 100 160 180 

LSA connector strip 170 250 330 390 650 730 

Dividing strip 71 100 200 200 300 500 600 

2) Based on the following mounting dimensions: 

– DIN connector strip: 170 mm 

– LSA connector strip: 25 mm 

– Dividing strip 71: 290 mm 

Population opportunities for distributor system series 5000 (Corning) 

Model No. DK 


Length mm 425 625 825 975 1625 1825 

No. of blocks per FM system strip 

Block 128 p. wires, L = 218 mm 1 

1 

1 

2 

3 

3 

Block 100 p. wires, L = 152 mm 1 

2 

3 

2 

5 

6 

Block 384 p. wires, L = 640 mm – 

– 

– 

– 

1 

1 

Block 600 p. wires, L = 925 mm – 

– 

– 

– 

1 

1 

Block 104 p. wires, L = 180 mm 2 3 4 5 8 9 



Block 1000 p. wires, L = 1690 mm – – – – – 1 

Population opportunities for FM universal mounting bracket 

Model No. DK 


Length mm 425 625 825 975 1625 1825 

Max. packs of mounting brackets 1 2 2 3 5 6 

Vertical bracket distance in mm – 50 50 50 50 35 

Connection system 

Pitch 

spacing 

mm 

No. of strips per system strip 

LSA-Plus 22.5 12 24 24 36 60 72 

VS-Standard 25 11 22 22 33 55 66 

Other 

connection systems 

22.5 

17.5 

16 

12 

15 

17 

24 

30 

34 

24 

30 

34 

36 

45 

51 

60 

75 

85 

72 

90 

102 


229 

Telecom

Telecom 

Telecom 

Accessories for FM distribution racks, modular 


For user-specific solutions or modular FM distributor 

assembly. LSA-Plus profile modules 2/10 may 

be mounted on the FM system rods. The rod 

diameter is 12 mm and the rod spacing 95 mm. 

The FM system rods may be supplemented with 

FM cable shunting strips, to permit the accommodation 

of patching cables. 

Design: 



Material: 

Round steel, clear-chromated 


2 rods, 

2 rod holders and (with 650 paired wires and 

above) an additional rod spacer, 


For items 7538.000 and 7539.000 

plus 2 shunting rings (105 x 70 mm). 

FM cable shunting strips 

For user-specific solutions or modular FM distributor 

assembly. 

The FM cable shunting strips facilitate cable 

management between the connection systems. 

FM cable shunting strips are supplementary to 

FM system strips and FM system rods, and are 

designed for routing patch cables. They are 

mounted on the sides, next to the FM system 

strips or FM system rods. 

Design: 



Shunting ring: 105 x 70 mm 

Material: 



1 punched rail, 

shunting rings, 


FM universal mounting bracket 

The universal mounting bracket for LSA-Plus 

strips (8 or 10 paired wires) and other connection 

systems are comprised of 2 brackets, which may 

be combined with different systems depending 

on their position in relation to one another. The 

brackets slide flexibly in relation to one another 

so that strips with different lengths can be used. 

The mounting brackets can be mounted in FM 

distribution enclosures or on FM system strips. 

Length 

mm 

Connection system 

LSA-Plus 1) 

section 

module 2/10 


LSA 

Plus 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

170 p. wires 425 1 set 7533.000 

250 p. wires 625 1 set 7534.000 

330 p. wires 825 1 set 7535.000 

390 p. wires 975 1 set 7536.000 

650 p. wires 1625 1 set 7538.000 

730 p. wires 1825 1 set 7539.000 

1) Refers to LSA strip pitch pattern: 25 mm. 

Shunting ring 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

2 425 1 set 7233.0001) 3 625 1 set 7234.000 1) 

4 825 1 set 7235.000 1) 

5 975 1 set 7236.000 1) 

7 1625 1 set 7238.000 

8 1825 1 set 7239.000 


Material: 



2 mounting brackets, support strips, including 


Other 

connection systems Packs of Model No. DK 

Pitch pattern in mm 22.5 17.5 

275 No. of strips 12 15 1 set 7031.100


1 torsionally stiff section frame 

welded from 2 mm sheet steel 

with 482.6 mm (19″) punchings, 

spray finished in RAL 7035, 

trim in RAL 5018, 

1 stable base/plinth of folded 

sheet steel and integral die-cast 

zinc feet (RAL 5018) with the 

option of floor anchoring, 

including mounting accessories. 

Alternatively, levelling feet 

(DK 7493.000) or castors 

(DK 7495.000) may be fitted. 


H1 

B3 

B1 

H2 

T3 

T1 

Distributor racks 

B2 T2 


● Metric (535 mm) version 

● Side panels 

● Special versions and special 

sizes 


Max. 150 kg/level 

Accesories Page 252 Monitoring Page 187 482.6 mm (19″) installation system Page 364 Patch panels Page 388 

Rittal Data Rack 



M 9201859 

German patent no. 4207282 



U Packs of 31 36 40 45 Page 

Width (B1) mm 550 550 550 550 

Height (H1) mm 1499.5 1721.8 1899.5 2121.8 

Depth (T1) mm 750 750 750 750 


Clearance height (H2) mm 1381.5 1603.8 1781.5 2003.8 

Distance from the second mounting level 

(T2) mm1) min. 150 – max. 350 min. 150 – max. 350 min. 150 – max. 350 min. 150 – max. 350 

Max. total depth with second 482.6 mm (19″) level T2 + 79.4 T2 + 79.4 T2 + 79.4 T2 + 79.4 

Mounting dimension for 

B3 475 475 475 475 

levelling feet and castors 

T3 680 680 680 680 

U x 44.45 mm = 1377.95 1600.2 1778 2000.25 

Model No. DK 

Accessories 

7391.000 7396.000 7400.000 7445.000 

Second mounting level1) 1 7296.000 7297.000 7298.000 7299.000 232 

Baying clamp 3 7494.000 7494.000 7494.000 7494.000 232 

Levelling feet 4 7493.000 7493.000 7493.000 7493.000 233 

Cable duct 1 7827.333 7827.338 7827.342 7827.347 357 

C rails, 482.6 mm (19″) 6 7016.100 7016.100 7016.100 7016.100 363 

Cable clamp rail, 482.6 mm (19″) 6 7016.110 7016.110 7016.110 7016.110 363 

Cable clamp strap D = 250 mm 6 7016.120 7016.120 7016.120 7016.120 363 

Twin castors 4 7495.000 7495.000 7495.000 7495.000 261 

Support strips 2 7401.000 7401.000 7401.000 7401.000 233 

Component shelf 2 U for one pair of 

mounting angles D = 250 mm 

1 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 7119.250 323 


mounting angles D = 400 mm 

1 7119.400 7119.400 7119.400 7119.400 323 


mounting angles D = 300 mm3) 1 7148.035 7148.035 7148.035 7148.035 321 

Drawer 2 U for one pair of mounting angles 1 7281.035 7281.035 7281.035 7281.035 386 

Component shelf D = 300 mm2) 3) 1 7143.035 7143.035 7143.035 7143.035 319 



Slide rails D max. < 190 mm 10 1962.200 1962.200 1962.200 1962.200 377 

Slide rails D max. > 190 mm 10 1963.200 1963.200 1963.200 1963.200 377 

Slide rails for pairs of mounting angles1) 2) 4) 2 7402.000 7402.000 7402.000 7402.000 233 

1) Second mounting level may be positioned on a 50 mm pitch pattern. 

2) A second pair of mounting angles is required for assembly. 

3) Stationary installation or full withdrawal, telescopic slides see page 326. 

4) Distance between levels (T2) 350 mm, can be combined with component shelf D = 500 mm. 

231 

Distributor racks



Accessories for Rittal Data Rack 

Second mounting level 

In order to accommodate 482.6 mm (19″) network 

components or for the attachment of component 

shelves, slide rails and telescopic rails. 

The mounting level may be positioned on a 

50 mm pitch pattern. 

Minimum distance between levels 150 mm, 

maximum distance between levels 350 mm. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, 2 mm 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


1 torsionally stiff section frame including assembly 

parts. 482.6 mm (19″) punched profile at the 

front, hole centre distance 465 (470 mm at the 

rear), tailored to the attachment of patch panels 

and cable routing rails. 

Baying connector 

For assembling rows of distributor frames, 

or for cable routing between data racks. 


Length: 53 mm 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Roof plate with cable route 

For optimised use of the Data Rack as a corridor 

distributor or cable management rack. By moving 

the guide plates, the individual cableways can be 

separately sized, thus enabling structured cable 

routing in data highways, even in the roof area. 

On all Data Racks, the roof plate can be attached 

with two mounting levels and a distance between 

the levels of 350 mm. 


31 7296.000 

36 7297.000 

40 7298.000 

45 7299.000 



50 mm pitch pattern 

min. 150 – max. 350 


3 7494.000 


1 7411.000 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Roof plate including assembly parts. 

232 Rittal IT catalogue/Telecom/Distributor racks/Mobile workstations


Depth stays 

For securing and stabilising two pairs of 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles in the Data 

Rack. The length of the depth stay is adjustable, 

and can accommodate the following spacings of 

mounting angles: 250, 300 and 350 mm. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Continuous slide rail 

for two pairs of mounting angles, 

482.6 mm (19″) 

The continuous slide rail is used to support heavy 

installed equipment in the Data Rack. 

The mounting dimensions of the slide rails were 

selected to enable them to be combined with 

500 mm deep, 482.6 mm (19″) component 

shelves. The mounting distance of the 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting angles is 350 mm. 

Requirements: 

Second pair of mounting angles 

Material: 


Levelling feet 

To compensate for height differences with floor 

irregularities. 

The levelling feet are attached to the die-cast 

zinc feet of the base/plinth. 


4 levelling feet M12, 

levelling range 40 mm. 


Accessories for Rittal Data Rack 

Depth stays 


2 7401.000 


2 7402.000 

Accessories: 

Component shelf, 500 mm deep, DK 7145.035, 

see page 319. 


4 7493.000 

233 

Distributor racks

Mobile workstation 


Rittal RiLab II 

The mobile workstation offers 

ideal opportunities for the 

secure positioning of sensitive 

equipment whilst remaining 

flexible in terms of location. 

An expedient range of installation 

accessories allows the 

RiLab II to adapt, chameleonlike, 

to a wide range of applications, 

both in the medical and 

network technology sectors, and 

in office and industrial environments. 

It can be used as a 

mobile laboratory or test stand, 

a flexible measurement station, 

computer support point, transport 

trolley or assembly worksta- 


tion. The versatile opportunities 

are almost unlimited. 

The hygiene-friendly surface 

finish is resistant to scratches 

and bumps, as well as being 

insensitive to disinfectant. 

Cable routing concealed as 

standard inside the vertical 

support columns helps to avoid 

messy cables. The routing 

system may be horizontally 

extended if required. 

Practically designed for 

482.6 mm (19″) systems, the 

mobile workstation can also be 

combined with Rittal RiCase 

enclosures. 


B 

T 

H 

B 

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 


Base frame 225 kg in total, 

stowage shelves max. 50 kg per 

shelf 

Material: 

Sheet steel, 

support pillars extruded aluminium 

section, powder-coated 

in RAL 9002, 

wall guard, handles, trim panels 

RAL 5018 

T 

H 

B 

T 

H 


Base frame with cable duct 

inside the support pillars, 

twin castors, 

2 lockable, 

1 shelf with 3 operator handles, 

depending on the design, 

1 or 2 stowage shelves without 

handle, 

fully assembled. 

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Page 

Width (B) mm 700 700 700 

Height (H) mm 796 1076 1426 

Depth (T) mm 660 660 660 

Model No. DK 7602.100 7602.200 7602.300 

Accessories Load capacity 

1 shelf, W x H x D: 630 x 35 x 480 mm 50 kg 7602.5001) 7602.5001) 7602.5001) 235 

1 shelf, with extension, W x H x D: 630 x 35 x 480 mm 20 kg 7602.5101) 7602.5101) 7602.5101) 235 

1 pull-out shelf, with integral mouse pad, 

W x H x D: 630 x 35 x 480 mm 

20 kg 7602.512 7602.512 7602.512 235 

1 monitor support for flat screens, centrally positioned 20 kg 7602.5501) 7602.5501) 7602.5501) 237 

1 monitor support for flat screens, positioned on the r/h side 10 kg 7602.5521) 7602.5521) 7602.5521) 237 

1 monitor support for flat screens, positioned on the l/h side 10 kg 7602.5541) 7602.5541) 7602.5541) 237 

1 basic drawer, W x H x D: 630 x 140 x 480 mm 10 kg 7602.5401) 7602.5401) 7602.5401) 235 

1 externally mounted drawer 10 kg 7602.5421) 7602.5421) 7602.5421) 236 

1 adaptor set for installing Rittal RiCase enclosures, tiltable 7602.5901) 7602.5901) 7602.5901) 237 

1 6-way socket strip, with switch, 16 A, 250 V 7600.600 7600.600 7600.600 237 

1 cable duct 7602.5301) 7602.5301) 7602.5301) 236 

1 ring handle 7602.5201) 7602.5201) 7602.5201) 236 


Smooth-running twin castors, 

combined with colour-coordinated 

wall guard, 2 of them 

lockable. 

Intelligent cable routing, 

concealed inside the torsionally 

stiff vertical aluminium section. 

Horizontal cable ducting 

optional.


RiLab II shelf 

Flat surface, fully usable up to the edge, with 

seamless, rounded edges, hygiene-friendly, 

smooth surface. 


50 kg 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Impact- and scratch-resistant, 

resistant to disinfectant, 




RiLab II shelf, 

with extension piece 

Guide rails mounted on ball bearings with fixing in 

both end positions, the large maximum extension 

of 380 mm facilitates ergonomic working, with an 

operating handle in a contrasting colour. 


20 kg 

Material: 

Sheet steel 




powder-coated in RAL 9002, handle RAL 5018 



Basic drawer unit RiLab II 

Top serves as a useful shelf, extension piece on 

castors with catch, robust removable drawer for 

easy cleaning, with operating handle in a contrasting 

colour. 


Shelf 50 kg, 

Drawer 10 kg 

Material: 

Sheet steel 




powder-coated in RAL 9002, 

handle RAL 5018 




Accessories for Rittal RiLab II 

W x H x D mm Packs of Model No. DK 

630 x 35 x 480 1 7602.500 


W x H x D mm 

Packs 

of 

Without 

mouse pad 

Model No. DK 

With 

mouse pad 1) 

630 x 35 x 480 1 7602.510 7602.512 


1) Mouse pad extendible sideways from below. 


630 x 140 x 480 1 7602.540 


235 

Mobile workstation




Add-on drawer unit for RiLab II 

Drawer unit open at the top, for mounting beneath 

the basic drawer, extension piece on castors with 

catch, robust removable drawer for easy cleaning, 

with operating handle in a contrasting colour. 


Drawer max. 10 kg 

Material: 

Sheet steel 





handle RAL 5018 



Tubular handle RiLab II 

An ideal addition for managing heavy mobile 

workstations. For mounting on the chassis on the 

front T-slot of the vertical section, infinitely positionable 

in the height, operation from the front or 

from the side. 


RAL 5018 



Cable duct for RiLab II 

For concealed horizontal routing at the rear, a 

useful addition to vertical cable routing inside the 

support section, removable cover for unimpeded 

access, variable cable entry via sealing lips, construction 

height 60 mm. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 








630 x 125 x 480 1 7602.542 


For chassis W mm Packs of Model No. DK 

700 


1 7602.520 


700 


1 7602.530 

236 Rittal IT catalogue/Telecom/Distributor racks/Mobile workstations


Holder for flat screen RiLab II 

Holder VESA 75/100 on support rail, for mounting 

on the chassis between the support pillars, 

rotatable and tiltable VESA fixture pushes on to 

the support rail. 

Extension: 

110 mm from support rail 


20 kg 


Support rail, holder, 


Holder for flat screen RiLab II 

Support arm 2 x 305 mm with fixture VESA 75/100, 

for mounting at the side of a chassis support pillar, 

infinitely positionable in the height. Screen fixture 

may be rotated, vertically hinged and tilted. 

Extension: 

Max. 575 mm 


Max. 10 kg 



6-way socket strip, 

with switch 

Mounting option at the back rear of the chassis 

or on the T-slot of the support pillar. 


6-way socket strip with switch, 

3 m connection cable, manufactured to 

CEI 884-1, tested to VDE 

Material: 

Aluminium section with polycarbonate cover, 

self-extinguishing to UL 94-V0 



Adaptor kit 

For Rittal RiCase enclosures, 600 mm wide 

The adaptor kit facilitates the mounting of enclosures 

type RiCase W = 600 mm on the base 

frame of the RiLab II. This achieves optimum 

synergy between the flexibility of the mobile workstation, 

and the versatile mounting opportunities 

of the RiCase enclosure. The forward tilt angle is 

lockable in 5 increments within the range of ± 15°. 


50 kg 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


RAL 9002 






700 


1 set 7602.550 

For chassis side Packs of Model No. DK 

Right 1 7602.552 

Left 


1 7602.554 


1 7600.600 


700 


1 set 7602.590 

237 

Mobile workstation

238

Complete, systematic 

know-how 

Indoors and out. Tailor-made individuality and cost-effective- 

ness. Take electronic packaging, for example. Rittal’s com- 

plete know-how is available worldwide; the product range 

is sure to impress, with its super-fast backplanes and maxi- 

mum availability. 

Three letters are synonymous with perfect interactive commu- 

nications systems: ITS. Rittal ITS is the optimum link between 

form and function at the PoS, PoI and information centre. 

As you would expect, the full range of Rittal benefits also 

extends to the outdoor sector: Rittal Communication 

Systems (abbreviated to CS) have been developed for 

extreme outdoor use, completely independently of the 

weather. What is more, they are also independent from the 

power supply, because the use of fuel cells ensures an 

autonomous emergency supply. 

Interactive Terminal Systems ITS – 

Fast information, fit for business, 

individual system solutions 

In the supermarket, at the petrol 

station, on the platform, on the street, 

in the showroom – customer service 

wherever the customer needs it, 

helping to maximise your earnings. 

The perfect solution for all your information, 

selling and distribution tasks 

using a self-service kiosk. 

Rittal IT catalogue/EL/ITS/Fuel cell 

Rittal electronic systems – 

Electronic packaging at a high level 

Reliable, customised solutions demand 

in-depth knowledge of every detail. 

Rittal makes this claim, and meets all 

electronic packaging requirements, for 

telecommunications, industrial automation, 

medicine, traffic guidance and 

security systems. 

Product spectrum: Subracks, desktop 

enclosures and microcomputer 

systems (tested and ready to use). 

EL, ITS, CS, fuel cell from page 240 

Electronic Packaging 

The complete know-how.................................................................240 

RiTCA..............................................................................................242 

Integration services ........................................................................243 

Interactive Terminal Systems 

Information and service anytime, anywhere ...................................244 

Plug & play compatbility system supplied as standard .................246 

The platform for customer-specific solutions .................................247 

Communication Systems 

Outdoor enclosures with system integration ..................................248 

Overview of outdoor enclosures ....................................................249 

CS fuel cell 3 and 5 kW, 48 V DC ...................................................250 

Note: 


Outdoor enclosures and climate 

control components 

Rittal outdoor systems for extreme outdoor 

use: A high level of corrosion resistance, 

earthquake protection, protection 

against vandalism, and perfect configuration 

for maximum availability. 

Innovative fuel cell technology 

The autonomous emergency power 

supply for the outdoor sector! The advantages 

over UPS or accumulators include 

temperature independence, flexibly scalable 

backup times, a long service life, 

and an impressive TCO (Total Cost of 

Ownership). 

239 

EL/ITS/CS/fuel cell

Electronic packaging 

The complete know-how 

240

Rittal’s Electronics Division: 

Rittal Electronic Systems – the complete know-how 

As one of the leading system suppliers, Rittal Electronic 

Systems caters for all requirements in the field of profes- 

sional electronic packaging. This includes an extensive 

product spectrum, from subracks, to desktop enclosures, 

through to fully operable microcomputer packaging systems 

for VME, VME64x, CompactPCI, AdvancedTCA and 

MicroTCA. The modular design of the components means 

that individual market requirements such as telecommuni- 

RiTCA: 

AdvancedTCA/MicroTCA/AMC 

Architecture based on standard 

modules for fast, complex communications 

solutions. Rittal is 

actively involved in standardisation 

and offers an extensive 

range of standard system solutions, 

face plates and AMC/ 

ATCA carriers. 

MPS systems for 

CompactPCI and VME 

Complete plug & play solutions 

for VME and CompactPCI as 

well as CompactPCI-Express 

applications up to Level 5. 



Complex climate control solutions 

protect the sensitive electronics, 

even with high heat 

losses. We offer a comprehensive 

range, from liquid-based 

board cooling, to system cooling 

with RiCool blowers, through 

to system-led enclosure cooling 

with air/water heat exchangers. 

Subracks 

Standardised subracks in 5 

basic versions, fully fitted and 

wired on request. Individually 

configured, EMC-upgradable. 

Instrument cases/system 

enclosures 

Extensive range of enclosures 

for measurement, medical, 

laboratory and safety technology 

through to EMC-upgradable 

enclosure solutions suitable 

for configuration as microcomputer 

systems which meet the 

most discerning requirements 

in terms of ergonomics and 

design. 

Monitors, keyboards 

19″ TFTs and keyboards for 

ergonomic operation at the 

human/machine interface, for 

installation in cases or racks. 


The complete know-how 

cations, automation, medical technology or traffic guidance 

and safety systems are easily achieved. As you would 

expect, all products conform to international standards and 

meet high quality standards. The global Rittal distribution 

network, combined with centres of electronic expertise in 

Asia, Europe and America, offer customer proximity with glo- 

bal service and on-site project support. 

Note: 

Detailed product information 

can be found in Catalogue 31, from page 423. 

Industrial PCs 

Robust rack-mounted or desktop 

enclosure solutions, for AT or 

ATX applications, EMC-ready. 

Both self-assembly systems and 

preconfigured, prewired systems 

are available. 

Backplanes 

The full spectrum of high-speed 

backplanes for ATCA, VMEbus, 

CompactPCI and CompactPCI- 

Express applications. 

241 

Electronic packaging


RiTCA: 

The trend towards “standardisation of computing platforms” is becoming increasingly significant, not only in the 

telecommunications sector but also in industrial automation, medicine, traffic guidance and security systems. The 

benefits of system standards include the fact that they are more cost-effective for use, enable more flexible compo- 

nent design, are independent from specific manufacturers, and facilitate a faster market launch. This requirement 

profile is met by the Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture Standard (ATCA) in every respect. ATCA is sure 

to impress with its high availability of 99.999 percent, compatibility, maximum speed, consistent redundancy 

and high data throughput, coupled with a high level of fail-safeness. Enjoy the benefits of this standard! 

242 Rittal IT catalogue/EL/ITS/Fuel cell

Rittal Electronic Systems 

Integration services 

LEVEL 1: Components 

(e.g. guide rails, connectors, etc.) 

LEVEL 2: 

LEVEL 3: 

LEVEL 4: 

LEVEL 5: 

Pre-configuration, population 

(e.g. backplane, subrack etc.) 

Integration (e. g. MPS systems 

including backplane, PSU), 

wiring of various components 

Level 3 with integral boards, 

tested 

Level 4 with I/O and 

application software, tested 

PROJECT PLANNING 

APPLICATION 

ENGINEERING 

PROTOTYPING 

TESTS/CHECKS 

SERIAL PRODUCTION 

AFTER SALES 

SERVICE 



Integration services 

Rather than individual components, there is a growing demand 

for fully integrated plug & play system solutions. In order to 

ensure individual, high-quality solutions, Rittal subjects every 

product to a defined service process. Particularly during the 

development phase, the result is optimised through continu- 

ous contact and exchange. 

1. PROJECT PLANNING 

Precise analysis of requirements according to relevant factors such as 

location, function and technical status – the basis for sound advice. 

2. APPLICATION ENGINEERING 

Our application consultants will guide you to the most efficient solution. All key 

questions relating to the system and components, as well as specific market 

conditions, are clarified. 

Simulations for the areas of climate control, mechanics and backplane help to 

highlight any problem areas and enable their solution. 

3. PROTOTYPING 

Once the electronic packaging concept has been agreed, a prototype is 

prepared. In intensive dialogue with you, the prototype is optimised to your 

precise requirements. 

4. TESTS/CHECKS 

A comprehensive test and check programme is carried out at our accredited 

Rittal test laboratory. Mechanical load capacity, dust and humidity protection 

are exhaustively tested, as are other factors such as extreme climate conditions. 

Your advisor will notify you immediately of the outcome of all these tests and 

checks. Any optimisation requirements are defined, implemented and then 

subjected to retesting. 

5. SERIAL PRODUCTION 

Once a suitably high level of functional reliability has been achieved, serial 

production can begin. Prior to delivery, every system undergoes the full range 

of functional and safety checks. The test seal is a guarantee of Rittal quality. 

6. AFTER SALES SERVICE 

We continue to assist you with on-site advice and support. In this way, you can 

draw on our expertise, and we are happy to answer your questions at any time. 

243 

Electronic packaging


Information and service anytime, anywhere 

244

Every Interactive Terminal System ITS (kiosk) is the com- 

bined result of Rittal’s comprehensive spectrum of expertise, 

skilfully uniting outstanding benefits, top quality and cost 

efficiency. Whether from our standard range or custom- 

designed for you, regardless of order quantities. Rittal’s 

specialist advisors give you the confidence to go online with 

kiosks that have been perfectly tailored to both your market 

and your functional requirements. 

Multimedia: Suitable information 

for visitors – 

ITS Multimedia Kiosks 

Interactive and omnipresent whatever 

the weather, 24 hours a day, 

7 days a week. Keeping visitors 

informed about what’s new, what’s 

worth seeing, what’s important, what’s 

useful. 

Kiosks are available in any preferred 

design as a nodal and coordination 

point for up-to-date information and 

knowledge. 



Benefit: Totally fit in business – 

ITS Benefit Kiosks 

In the supermarket, at the petrol 

station, on the platform, on the street, 

in the showroom – customer service 

wherever you need it, helping to 

maximise your yield. 

The perfect solution for all your information, 

advice and selling tasks using 

a self-service kiosk. 

Information and service anytime, anywhere 

Note: 

See our full range of kiosks on the Internet 

System Solutions: Design Follows 

Function – ITS System Solutions 

Special tasks and special functions 

demand special solutions: Personal 

identification for the police, laboratory 

technology for the pharmaceutical 

industry, final inspection on car production 

lines – we specialise in individually 

designed kiosks, integrated into technical 

operations. 

Based on our system platforms and 

modules, they are also amazingly efficient. 

245 

Interactive Terminal Systems



Plug & play compatibility system supplied as standard 

ITS Arc-Line II 

Modern communications and 

technology in a robust enclosure. 

ITS Alpha-Line 

The terminal gives a dynamic, 

stylish impression thanks to its 

curved lines. 

ITS Opti-Line II 

Stylish elegance in a combination 

of stainless steel and aluminium. 

ITS Out-Line Wall 

The Out-Line Wall was developed 

for protected outdoor 

applications (semi-outdoor). 

New markets, new application areas, new opportunities! 

Kiosks are on hand 24/7 to provide up-to-the-minute infor- 

mation, attract interest, and receive requests, messages, 

reservations and orders. Sports, arts, entertainment, adminis- 

tration, transport, industry, trade and hotels – suitable appli- 

cations are everywhere! Located directly at the point where 

they are needed, offering a high standard of quality and a 

stylish design, kiosks represent valuable “partners” for infor- 

mation and business. 

Note: 

See our full range of kiosks on the Internet 

ITS Opti-Desk 

Stylish stand-up workstation for 

the office environment, with 

generous worktop. 

ITS Out-Line Pro 

This aluminium terminal was 

developed on the basis of 

Rittal’s outdoor expertise. 

ITS Opti-Wall 

This wall section was developed 

for internal administrative 

applications. 


Ingenious – the PC flap 

Install, secure, and flip up – 

service-friendly, space-saving 

accommodation for the PC. 

Modular diversity 

The Multi-Line modular panel 

offers a diverse range of applications 

with various function 

modules. 


ITS Multi-Line 

Without a stainless steel 

designer tube, but with the “flair” 

of the Opti series. The stylishly 

integrated enclosure offers 

plenty of space for your individual 

configuration. 

Optimum access 

Two doors, unrestricted access 

for configuration and servicing 

work at the rear of the Multi-Line. 

Stylishly integrated 

Protected beneath the keyboard 

section: Speaker and 

printer tray. 


The platform for customer-specific solutions 

TFT touch screen or keyboard 

Or even both, depending on the 

requirements of your specific 

application. 

Any given combination: 

● Display 

● Touch screen 

● Keyboard 

● Speaker 

● PC systems 

● WLAN 

● Printer 

● Telephone/microphone 

ITS Opti-Line L 

The model with the large technical 

enclosure within the 

successful Opti-Line range. 

Flexible configuration 

Opti-Line L and Multi-Line: 

Freely configurable mounting 

plate as the nodal junction of 

your kiosk equipment. 

● Barcode scanner 

● Card reader 

● PinPad 

● Webcam 

● Coin checker 

● Climate control 

● etc. 

247 

Interactive Terminal Systems


Outdoor enclosures with system integration 

Fully assembled and integrated systems 

Rittal offers complete system integration for outdoor enclosures. Alongside the mechanical components, climate control and 

power supply, we also install customer hardware and software. High quality standards guarantee an immediately ready-to- 

use system. Building upon existing platforms, designs are adapted to project-specific requirements in next to no time. Rittal’s 

integration services relieve customers from routine configuration tasks, leaving them free to concentrate fully on their core 

areas of expertise. Allowance is made for both international standards such as ETS, Bellcore or IEC, as well as individual 

factory standards and specifications. 


CS modular enclosures 

Standard enclosures 

● 4 x size variants, 

available off-the-shelf 

● Twin-walled 

● Aluminium (AlMg3) 

CS basic enclosures 




● Single-walled 



Individual 

● Installation service from our 

modular range with 12 basic 

sizes 

● Customised solutions – Level 4 

system integration 

● Configuration with climate 


Individual 

● Installation service with system 

accessories 


● Colour variants 


Overview of outdoor enclosures 

Communication Systems – Perfect protection for all weath- 

ers! 

Rittal’s expertise in the fields of enclosure technology, cli- 

mate control, security management and system integration 

is combined in standard solutions and customised outdoor 

systems. The specific requirements of mobile communica- 

tions, IT technology, environmental technology and power 

distribution are implemented on a project-specific basis. 

High-quality materials such as aluminium and sheet steel, 

zinc-plated and powder-coated, combine corrosion resist- 

ance and protection from vandalism with UV stability and a 

high Note: level of RF attenuation. 

Detailed information and climate control components 

for outdoor applications may found in our 

CS Outdoor Solutions brochure. 

Toptec CR 




● Twin-walled 

● Doors and side panels: 

Sheet steel, zinc-plated 

● Enclosure frame: 

Stainless steel 

CS wall-mounted enclosures 




● Twin-walled concept (an 

enclosure within an enclosure) 


Individual 


● Baying variants 

● Customised solutions – Level 4 

system integration 

● Configuration with climate 


Individual 


● 19″ rotating frame, fitted 

● System integration up to 

Level 4 

249 

Communication Systems


CS fuel cell 3 and 5 kW, 48 V DC 

Fuel cell systems from Rittal – independent and powerful 

Reliable redundancy in the form of emergency power supply systems must be established in critical applications demanding 

high-availability. From the field of cellular phones via telematics and remote measuring stations, through to the primary 

energy source for information kiosk systems – for all these the fuel cell represents the convincing “energy supplier”. Rittal 

uses its expert know-how in outdoor enclosure technology, climate control and system integration to supply complete sys- 

tems. And when you consider the Total Costs of Ownership (TCO), there are many factors in favour of using this innovative 

technology. 


Application: 

Outdoor emergency power 

supply unit, e.g. for mobile 

phone base stations. 


Material: 


Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304) 

Doors, side panels, 

climate control cover, roof: 

Aluminium AlMg3, 

powder-coated 

in RAL 7035 


T2 

T1 

CS fuel cell 3 and 5 kW, 48 V DC 

B 

H 


Ready-to-connect fuel cell system 

including climate control. 

Hydrogen supply not included. 

Width (B) mm 694 694 

Height (H) mm 1403 1403 

Depth (T1) mm 675 675 

Overall depth (T2) mm 992 992 

Weight (kg) 219 226 


● Cascadable up to 3 systems 

● Non-standard input/output 

voltage 

● Use as primary supply unit 

(but not for continuous 24 h 

operation) 

● Reformer system, e.g. infeed 

of methanol instead of hydrogen 

● Housing for gas cylinders 

● Further protocols: 

S-Bus, Profibus, Modbus, 

MPI, EIB, LON, BacNet, 

GENIbus 

Approvals, 

see page 406. 

Model No. CS 

Fuel cell 

9782.030 9782.050 

Scalable output 1000 – 3000 W 1000 – 5000 W 

Input voltage in standby mode 230 V, 50/60 Hz 230 V, 50/60 Hz 


Hydrogen supply 

–48 V DC (–42 V DC to –55 V DC) –48 V DC (–42 V DC to –55 V DC) 

Gas type Hydrogen, purity at least 3.5 (99.95 %) Hydrogen, purity at least 3.5 (99.95 %) 

Pressurised gas bottles e.g. 50 litre or 10 litre bottles, 200 bar e.g. 50 litre or 10 litre bottles, 200 bar 

Consumption at full load 45 slpm (standard litres per minute) 75 slpm (standard litres per minute) 

Stored energy time 

Freely scalable via bottle batteries, 

50 l, 200 bar hydrogen produces around 10 kWh 

electrical output, i.e. at 3 kW full load an autonomy of 

3.5 hours 

Freely scalable via bottle batteries, 

50 l, 200 bar hydrogen produces around 10 kWh 

electrical output, i.e. at 5 kW full load an autonomy of 

2 hours 

Ambient conditions 

Temperature range –40°C to +50°C1) –40°C to +50°C1) Relative humidity 0 % to 95 %, no condensate 0 % to 95 %, no condensate 

Height above mean sea level 

Monitoring 

0 to 1800 m 0 to 1800 m 

Interface Ethernet-IP, RS232 Ethernet-IP, RS232 

1) From 43°C: approx. 2.5 % reduction in output per degree of temperature increase. 

251 

Communication Systems

252


Base from page 254 

Rittal IT catalogue/System accessories 

Base/plinth TS ....................................254 

Base/plinth..........................................259 

Base ...................................................260 

Walls from page 265 

Side panels.........................................265 

Divider panels ....................................268 

Baying system from page 270 

For TS 8 ..............................................270 

Baying at the installation site..............271 

Baying for transport............................274 

Baying ................................................275 

Doors/locks from page 277 

Door variants ......................................277 

Lock systems......................................281 

Hinges ................................................288 

Roof/wall mounting from page 290 

Roof ....................................................290 

Wall mounting.....................................294 

Interior installation from page 295 

Rail systems........................................295 

Assembly components.......................310 

Component shelves............................316 

Installation kits for component 

shelves ...............................................324 

Accessories for component shelves....326 

Power supply......................................328 

Lights..................................................333 

Earthing ..............................................337 

Interface flaps.....................................398 

Cable management from page 341 

Cable entry/gland plates ....................341 

Gland plates .......................................342 

Cable gland........................................348 

Cable routing .....................................350 

Cable routing 482.6 mm (19″) ............360 

Mounting angles.................................364 

Installation kits for mounting angles ...368 

482.6 mm (19″) installation from page 371 

Swing frame........................................371 

Pull-out frame......................................378 

482.6 mm (19″)/metric installation......379 

Slide rails ............................................383 

Drawers ..............................................385 

Server integration ...............................387 

Patch panels.......................................388 

Splicing boxes....................................394 

LSA connection system......................397 

253 

System accessories

Base/plinth TS 

Base 


One Model No. 

for the 

base/plinth components 

front and rear. 

Base/plinth 

height 

100 mm 

200 mm 

One Model No. 

for the 

base/plinth trims 

at the sides. 

Basic form Cable gland options 

A complete 

base/plinth TS. 

Function and cost benefits 

Fewer parts, more opportunities, lower purchasing, 

storage and assembly costs – the formular for 

the new modular base/plinth system. 

Sample solutions New supply includes Functional benefits 

3 packs of base/plinth components 

1 pack of base/plinth trim panels 

200 mm high 



200 mm high 


100 mm high 

1 pack of base/plinth baying bracket 

TS 8601.100 (packs of 20) 

4 units are required for this solution 


2 packs of base/plinth trim panels 

200 mm high 



200 mm high 

1 pack base/plinth trim panels 100 mm 

high 

Continuous 

cable chamber 

Additional stabilisation 

for transportation purposes with 

base/plinth trim rotated through 90° 

Shielding of the base/plinths 

from one another 

Additional connection 

of the base/plinth 

Other options: 

● Cable entry at the side by mounting a 100 mm 

base/plinth trim panel (top or bottom). 

● Cable entry from the rear by dismantling one 

or more trim panels of the base/plinth components. 

● Cable clamp rail fitted on the 100 mm high trim panel. 

Modular base/plinth diversity 

Regardless of the enclosure depth: 

The base/plinth components at the front and rear, 

pre-configured with corner pieces, are always the 

same for the chosen width. 

Only the side trim panels are selected according 

to the enclosure depth and the required base/ 

plinth configuration. The modular concept produces 

exceptional advantages in terms of cost 

and function. 

Assembly to the enclosure is conveniently carried 

out from the outside. The base/plinth interior offers 

diverse opportunities for mounting levels for cable 

management. 

Stabilisation of bayed base/plinth 

The following table shows three bayed base/ 

plinths in 200 mm height illustrating a wide range 

of possible solutions and the potential savings 

with trim panels compared with the previous 

200 mm base/plinth system each with two trim 

panels of 100 mm height at the sides. 

Savings potential compared with 

twelve 100 mm trim panels 

2 trim panels 200 mm 






254 Rittal IT catalogue/System accessories




Sheet steel 

for TS, CM, PC-TS, IW, FR(i), TE 

Base/plinth component consisting of one trim 

panel and two pre-configured corner pieces. 

In 200 mm high base/plinth components, one 

trim panel is divided into two for cable entry. 

Material: 


Cover caps plastic RAL 9005/7035 


1 set = 

2 base/plinth components, 4 cover caps, 

4 screws and captive nuts M12 

for attachment to the enclosure. 

Base/plinth trim, side 

Sheet steel 

for TS, CM, PC-TS, IW, FR(i), TE 

For mounting between the base/plinth components. 

At 200 mm height, two 100 mm base/plinth 

trims may be used. Base/plinth trim panels 

(100 mm high) may be installed rotated through 

90° in order to stabilise bayed base/plinth components. 

Material: 



1 set = 

2 base/plinth trim panels, including parts for 

attaching to the base/plinth components. 

Accessories: 

Base assembly plate SO 2817.000, 

see page 257. 

Filter mats for vented versions, 

see page 258. 


see page 256. 


Base 


For enclosure width 

mm 

Design 

Colour 

RAL 7022 RAL 7035 

Model No. TS 

100 mm high 200 mm high 

300 Solid – 8601.905 8602.905 

400 Solid – 8601.400 8602.400 

500 Solid – 8601.500 8602.500 

600 

Solid – 8601.600 8602.600 

Solid – 8601.6051) 8602.605 

Vented – 7825.6012) – 

Vented 

with designer cover 

– 7825.603 – 

Solid – 8601.800 8602.800 

Solid – 8601.805 

800 

3) 8602.805 

Vented – 7825.8014) – 

Vented 

with designer cover 

– 7825.803 – 

850 Solid – 8601.850 8602.850 

1000 Solid – 8601.000 8602.000 

1100 Solid – 8601.300 8602.100 

1200 Solid – 8601.200 8602.200 

1) Design in RAL 9005: TS 8601.602 

2) Design in RAL 9005: DK 7825.605 


4) Design in RAL 9005: DK 7825.805 


Base/plinth baying brackets TS 8601.100, 

see page 257, 

when base/plinth components are fitted by 

rotating through 90°. 

Accessories: 

Fastening bolts for baying base/plinth trim, 

see page 257. 


see page 256. 

For enclosure depth 

Colour Model No. TS 

mm 

RAL 7022 RAL 7035 100 mm high 200 mm high 

300 – 8601.030 8602.030 

400 – 8601.040 8602.040 

500 – 8601.050 8602.050 

600 

– 8601.060 8602.060 

– 8601.065 8602.065 

800 

 

– 

– 

 

8601.080 

8601.085 

8602.080 

1) 8602.085 

900 – 8601.0952) 8602.095 

1000 – 8601.0153) 8602.015 

1200 – 8601.0254) 8602.025 





255 

Base/plinth TS


Base 



Sheet steel 

T1 

T2 

32.5 

T3 

T4 

92.5 

80 

62.5 

14 

B5 

B4 

B3 

B2 

B1 

T5 

30 

15 x 10 

18 x 14 

Base/plinth components front/rear 

Width 

mm 

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 

Page 

300 300 235 175 115 270 255 

400 400 335 275 215 370 255 

500 500 435 375 315 470 255 

600 600 535 475 415 570 255 

800 800 735 675 615 770 255 

850 850 785 725 665 820 255 

1000 1000 935 875 815 970 255 

1100 1100 1035 975 915 1070 255 

1200 1200 1135 1075 1015 1170 255 

B = Width 

Ø 9.4 

47.5 

50 

30 

62.5 

22 

100 

200 

Plinth, 100 mm high 

Plinth, 200 mm high 

Base/plinth trims, side 

Depth 

mm 

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 

Page 

300 269 235 175 144 268 255 

400 369 335 275 244 368 255 

500 469 435 375 344 468 255 

600 569 535 475 444 568 255 

800 769 735 675 644 768 255 

900 869 835 775 744 868 255 

1000 969 935 875 844 968 255 

1200 1169 1135 1075 1044 1168 255 

T = Depth 

Transport castors 

for base/plinth TS 

For locating onto the base/plinth corner piece 

100 or 200 mm high by raising or tilting. 


Maximum permissible load per twin castor: 

static: 100 kg 


1 set = 

4 twin castors, 

2 with, 2 without brakes. 

Colour: 

RAL 7022 

Note: 

Base/plinth trims, side, must be fitted in a freestanding 

position. 

Description of the hole patterns 

B1/T1 = External dimensions 

B2/T2 = For screw-fastening in 

the thread of the enclosure 

corner piece from 

below 

B3/T3 = For screw-fastening 

with captive nuts to the 

enclosure base from 

below or above 

All holes (B2 – B4/T2 – T4) may 

be used for screw-fastening to 

the base. 

256 Rittal IT catalogue/System accessories 

B3 

Ground clearance 

mm 

Model No. TS 

100 8800.390 


Base/plinth trim, side, 

see page 255.


Base assembly plate 

for base/plinth TS and base/plinth, complete 

For fastening the plinth to the floor without moving 

the enclosure or the bayed enclosure suite. For 

assembly screws up to 12 mm Ø. 

Material: 


Fastening bolts 

for 

● Base/plinth TS 

● Base/plinth, complete 

● Base/plinth, stationary 

For mounting on base/plinth trim panels, side. 

The lockable assembly bolt allows the installation 

of cable clamp rails and standard C rails. 

Material: 

Hexagon steel, zinc-plated, passivated, 

19 mm across flats 

Base/plinth baying brackets 


Essential if the trim panels are mounted rotated 

through 90° for additional stabilisation during the 

transportation of bayed enclosures. 

Additionally required for each trim panel: 2 units. 

Material: 



Screws M8 x 16 mm. 

Cover cap 

for base/plinth components TS 

As a replacement. 

Material: 

Plastic ABS 

Colour: 

RAL 9005 

Base 


Packs of Model No. SO 

10 2817.000 

For base/plinth 

trim panel 

height mm 

Packs of Model No. SZ 

100 10 2819.000 

200 10 2819.200 

1) only for height 200 mm 

67 

117 1) 

167 1) 

Packs of Model No. TS 

20 8601.100 

For base/plinth height 

mm 


100 4 8601.130 

200 4 8601.140 

257 

Base/plinth TS


Base 


Version A Version B 

Base/plinth trim 

with brush strip 

for TS base/plinth 

The supplement to the modular base/plinth 

concept (see page 254). 

May also be exchanged retrospectively for the 

front or rear trim panel of the base/plinth components 

100 or 200 mm high. 

Material: 


Version A: 

By rotating the trim panel, the hammer-head strip 

for cable attachment may optionally be positioned 

at the top or bottom, sealed all-round for 

a high level of stability. 

Version B: 

Open on one side for retrospective mounting if 

cables have already been inserted. 

Connecting plinth trim 


For covering gaps in the case of back to back or 

corner enclosure suites. Simply push in between 

the trim panel and the corner piece before tightening 

the screws. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Filter mat 

for 

● Base/plinth component, vented 

● Base/plinth component, vented with 

designer trim 

To cover the trim panel in the base/plinth component. 

The mounting frame slides into position 

behind the filter mat in the base/plinth trim panel. 

Filter class G3 to DIN EN 779. 


Assembly frame. 

Spare filter mat 


Filter mat without mounting frames for base/plinth 

trim panels up to 800 mm wide. 

Version A 

Width Height 

Model No. TS 

mm mm RAL 7022 RAL 7035 

600 100 8601.610 8601.615 

800 100 8601.810 8601.815 

Accessories: 

Cable tie SZ 2597.000, 

see page 353. 

Version B 

Width Height 

Model No. TS 

mm mm RAL 7035 RAL 9005 

600 100 7825.607 7825.608 

800 100 7825.807 7825.808 

For 

base/plinth height 

mm 


Colour 

RAL 

Packs of 

Model No. 

TS 

100 7022 2 8601.110 

200 7022 2 8601.120 

100 7035 2 8601.115 

200 7035 2 8601.125 

For 


mm 


600 1 7561.500 

800 1 7581.500 


Spare filter mats 5 7582.500


Base/plinth 

for EL 

The base/plinth can be fitted onto all EL enclosures 

with a centre part depth of 316 or 416 mm. 

Holes must be made for attaching to the centre 

part. A drilling template is supplied. These may 

additionally be fitted with castors for use as a 

mobile base/plinth. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7044 


4 levelling feet 


Under-floor frame 

for DK-TS, FR(i) 

For siting the enclosure on a false floor when 

heavy equipment is installed. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



and base mounting bracket. 

Stabiliser bracket 


The stabiliser bracket may be retrospectively 

screw-fastened to the outside of the base/plinth 

corner pieces. 


Up to a maximum of 80 kg static load. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035, warning markings RAL 2002 



For centre part depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Base 

Base/plinth 

Height 

mm 

Model No. 

DK/VR 

316 1 50 7505.3001) 416 1 50 7505.4001) Additional castors 

for base/plinth 

4 50 3805.500 


Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

600 400 1000 

Model No. DK 

7855.340 

800 400 1000 7855.342 


Note: 



2 7825.150 

259 

Base/plinth

Base/plinth 

Base 

Base/plinth 

Stabiliser 

for server racks DK-TS, FR(i) 

The pull-out stabiliser is quickly and easily retrofitted 

to the lower frame of the server racks and 

only extended when necessary. May be used in 

combination with levelling feet and/or transport kit 

for DK-TS (DK 7825.900), see page 261. 


Up to a maximum of 150 kg static load. 

Material: 





18 – 43 mm high 

To compensate for height differences with floor 

irregularities. Thread length 40 mm. 

Assembly thread M12. 

Maximum permissible static load: 

approx. 300 kg per levelling foot. 

For: 

● Baying system TS 8 

● PC enclosure system 

● Pedestal base plate 

CP 6137.035 – CP 6137.535 

● Pedestal CP 6141.XXX 

● Industrial workstations 

● flexRack(i) 


85 – 115 mm high 

For mounting on TS, ES and PC enclosures, for 

easier floor cleaning and to compensate for floor 

irregularities of ±15 mm. 

Height 100 mm. 


350 kg per levelling foot. 

Enclosure depth mm Model No. DK 

900 7825.200 

1000 7825.250 

1200 7825.260 

Note: 

The stabiliser cannot be used with base plates, 

base frame or base/plinths. 



150kg 

Packs of Model No. PS 

4 4612.000 

For mounting on the TS base/plinth: 

Base/plinth adaptor TS 8800.220, 

see page 262. 

SW 19 

Ø 47 

M12 

40 

18 

58 

Packs of Model No. SO 

4 2859.000 

Material: 

Feet: Brass, nickel-plated 

Threaded bolts and mounting plates: 

Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304) 


Assembly parts to the enclosure.

1 

2 

3 

4 


Twin castors 

Mounting thread M12 x 20. 

Maximum permissible 

static load 

(per castor) kg 

Ground 

clearance 

mm 

For: 

● Baying system TS 8 

● PC enclosure system 

● Pedestal base plate 

CP 6137.035 – CP 6137.535 

● Pedestal CP 6141.XXX 

● Industrial workstations 

● flexRack(i) 

● Data Rack 



Base/plinth adaptor for twin castors 

TS 8800.290, 

see page 262. 

Base 

Base 

Lock Packs of Colour Model No. 

40 50 4 without 1 set 1 Black 4611.000 

75 85 

120 125 

2 with, 

2 without 

2 with, 

2 without 


for TE 

For easy transportation between sites. The castors 

may be screw-fastened in the corner areas 

within the base frame in place of the levelling feet. 

Ground clearance: 58 mm, 

mounting thread M10 x 20 

Permissible static load: 

300 kg per enclosure 

Transport kit 

for DK-TS 

For convenient movement of the network enclosures 

or as a mobile rack. Ground clearance 

approx. 40 mm. 


750 kg per enclosure 


1 set = 4 castors (2 steerable ones) 


1 set 

2 

Black 

with grey 

running surface 

3 

1 set Black 

4 


1 set = 4 castors 


6148.000 

4634.500 

7495.000 

Packs of Model No. TE 

1 set 7000.672 


1 set 7825.900 

Note: 

Only for enclosures without gland plates or gland 

plate frames. 

For 800 mm wide enclosures with 19″ mounting 

frame, special installation dimensions must be 

observed (see drawing). 

min. 

79.5 

261 

Base

Base 

Base 

Base 

Base/plinth adaptor 

for levelling feet 

Connection component for fastening M12 levelling 

feet PS 4612.000 to the TS base/plinth. 

Material: 



for twin castors 

Connection component for mounting twin castors 

to the TS base/plinth. 

Material: 


Base assembly bracket 

for TS, ES, AR universal console, FR(i) 

For anchoring the enclosure at any position of the 

base frame, particularly in cases where the existing 

holes in the frame or base tray cannot be used 

due to the installed equipment or because the 

substructure prevents them from being used. 

Material: 



4 8800.220 


Levelling feet, PS 4612.000, 

see page 260. 


4 8800.290 


Base/plinth trim, side, 

see page 255, 

in all situations where a twin castor is mounted. 


4 8800.210 

Note: 

Additional holes in the base are required for 

mounting. 



One-piece gland plate 

vented, for DK-TS, FR(i) 

The slotted gland plate has a cut-out in the rear 

for cable entry, which is concealed with brush 

strips. 

Material: 




Filter mat 

for one-piece gland plate 

To conceal the slotted area inside the one-piece 

vented gland plates for TS, FR(i). The filter mat is 

easily cut to the required cut-out and conveniently 

slides into position from the front via the 

guide rails of the gland plate. 

Gland plate modules 

for DK-TS 

For use in the base frame of the network enclosure. 

Used in exchange for an existing gland 

plate of the same depth or in conjunction with a 

multi-piece gland plate for pre-configured TS 8 

enclosures, see page 263. 

Gland plate depth: 

237.5 mm 

Design for cable entry: 

With brush strip 

Vented design: 

With filter mat for concealing the holes and nylon 

tape for securing from the inside or outside. 

Gland plate, multi-piece 

for DK-TS, pre-configured 

Gland plates including sliding panel for cable 

entry and foam rubber cable clamp strip for 

optional sealing. 

Material: 




Note: 

For the size variant 800 x 800 mm, the gland plate 

included with the supply for pre-configured network 

enclosures should be additionally used. Also 

suitable for combined use with vented gland plate 

modules and those for cable entry. 

Accessories: 

Filter mat for gland plate, 

see page 263. 

Base 

Base 



Model No. DK 

600 600 7825.660 

600 800 7825.680 

600 900 7825.690 

600 1000 7825.610 

800 600 7825.860 

800 800 7825.880 

800 900 7825.890 

800 1000 7825.810 


1 7825.620 

Material: 


For 

Model No. DK 

enclosure 

width 

mm 

Design 

for cable entry vented 

600 7825.361 7825.360 

800 7825.381 7825.380 

Material: 


Width 

mm 


Depth 

mm 

Accessories: 

Gland plate modules, 

see page 263. 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

800 800 1 set 7825.382 

800 900 1 set 7825.383 

800 1000 1 set 7825.384 

263 

Base

Base 

Base 

Base 

T 

B1 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

B 

T1 

Module plates 

for TE 

The base area of the TE may be varied as 

required using the module plates. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 



Enclosure dimensions 

mm 

Base cut-out dimensions 

mm 


For a completely sealed base assembly, the 

module plates should be combined with the 

compensating panels. 


Design 

Solid 

With 

brush strip 

Vented 

Compensating 

panel 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Model No. TE 

450 200 7526.760 

450 550 7526.770 

450 750 7526.780 

650 550 7526.785 

650 200 7526.800 

650 750 7526.820 

450 200 7526.850 

650 200 7526.860 

450 200 7526.829 

650 200 7526.834 

450 50 7526.750 

450 150 7526.755 

650 50 7526.790 

650 150 7526.795 

B 600 600 600 800 800 800 

T 600 800 1000 600 800 1000 

B1 450 450 450 650 650 650 

T1 550 750 950 550 750 950

The TS side panel provides new 

dimensions in convenient 

access to the TS interior, thanks 

to the option of hinging. 

Automatic potential equalisation 


Important: 

Red areas (side panels), hinged 

and unhinged, must always be 

opposite one another. Blue 

areas (doors/rear panels) must 

always be opposite one another. 

Side panels, screw-fastened, 

sheet steel 

for TS 

Easy positioning on the frame with the location 

aid. Six or eight enclosure panel holders with 

earthing insert ensure automatic potential equalisation 

and higher EMC protection. Earthing bolts 

with contact surface are integrated. 

Material: 




powder-coated in textured RAL 7035 on the 

outside. 


IP 55 as per EN 60 529/10.91 



Note: 

Enclosure panel holders may optionally be fitted 

from the inside or outside of the enclosure. 

Area available for population: 

External dimension – 100 mm. 

Accessories: 

Earth straps, 

see page 337. 


Only one surface on each vertical 

enclosure section may be 

hinged. 

Hinges 

for 

TS side panels, screw-fastened, sheet steel 

TS side panels, asymmetrical 

The 180° opening angle allows unhindered 

access. May be installed optionally from the 

inside or outside of the enclosure: Simply replace 

3 enclosure panel holders with hinges. Despite 

the hinge, the protection category of the enclosure 

is retained. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


Assembly screws. 

Walls 

Side panels 

Note: 

Climate control side panels with 

integral cooling module may be 

retrofitted instead of an enclosure 

side panel, see Cat. 31, 

page 589. 


Height mm Depth mm 


800 600 2 8173.235 

1000 600 2 8174.235 

1200 500 2 8115.235 

1200 600 2 8170.235 

1200 800 2 8175.235 

1200 1000 2 8176.235 

1400 500 2 8145.235 

1400 600 2 8146.235 

1400 800 2 8148.235 

1600 500 2 8165.235 

1600 600 2 8166.235 

1600 800 2 8168.235 

1800 400 2 8184.235 

1800 500 2 8185.235 

1800 600 2 8186.235 

1800 800 2 8188.235 

1800 900 2 8189.235 

1800 1000 2 8180.235 

2000 400 2 8104.235 

2000 500 2 8105.235 

2000 600 2 8106.235 

2000 800 2 8108.235 

2000 900 2 8109.235 

2000 1000 2 8100.235 

2200 600 2 8126.235 

2200 800 2 8128.235 

2200 900 2 8129.235 

For RAL 7032 version, use order extension .200; 

to order primed version, use extension .300. 


Design Packs of Model No. TS 

RAL 7035 6 8800.110 

RAL 7032 6 8800.010 

German utility model no. 298 20 604 


Note: 

Side panel and door hinges may only be installed 

on the same enclosure section when using a 180° 

door hinge (see page 288). 

265 

Side panels

Side panels 

Walls 

Side panels 


for TS 

Side panel, lockable with 3 options: 

● lockable 

● internal latch 

Plug-and-play compatibility system: insert side 

panel into the base, press upwards and rotate the 

two toggle locks – there is no faster way of finishing 

off an entire enclosure suite at the side. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, powder-coated 

Colour: 

RAL 7035/RAL 9005 


IP 20/NEMA 1 


2 side panels with toggle locks. 

Note: 

These side panels must be notched centrally in 

conjunction with punched sections with mounting 

flange for the external level. 

Lock 


With security lock insert no. 3524 E, in exchange 

for the existing toggle locks. 


4 locks, 2 keys. 



Additional security is achieved via the option of 

latching the side panel from the inside. 

The side panels on the frame section are screwfastened 

from the inside with latching brackets. 



For enclosures Model No. DK 

Height mm Depth mm RAL 7035 RAL 9005 

800 600 7824.086 – 

1000 600 7824.106 – 

1200 600 7824.126 – 

1200 800 7824.128 – 

1200 900 7824.129 7816.129 

1200 1000 7824.120 7816.120 

1400 600 7824.1461) – 

1400 800 7824.148 – 

1600 600 7824.166 – 

1600 800 7824.168 – 

1800 600 7824.186 – 

1800 800 7824.188 – 

1800 900 7824.189 – 

1800 1000 7824.1801) – 

2000 600 7824.206 – 

2000 800 7824.208 – 

2000 900 7824.209 7816.2091) 2000 1000 7824.200 7816.200 

2200 600 7824.226 – 

2200 800 7824.228 – 

2200 900 7824.229 7816.2291) 2200 1000 7824.220 7816.2201) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Accessories: 

TS punched section with mounting flange, 

17 x 73 mm, notched, 

see page 299. 

Internal latch DK 7824.510, 

see page 266. 

For 

enclosure 

system 


4 7824.500 


Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

Model No. 

FR 

TS 4 7824.510 – 

FR(i) 4 – 7856.700



for DK-TS 

The ideal, universal routing aid for network enclosures 

where large quantities of cables and lines 

are managed. Cut-outs for for the attachment of 

cable shunting rings and nylon loop fasteners. 

Cable ties are available from the accessories 

range. With bayed enclosures, the panel may also 

be used as a partition with cable management 

facilities. 

By attaching to the inner level, cables may be 

secured inside and out, and may also be used 

when a single panel is fitted. 

The panel is secured to the inner mounting level 

of TS 8 enclosures using the assembly parts 

supplied. The cable management panel may be 

screwed to the outer mounting level on punched 

sections with mounting flanges. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 




for FR (i) 

The lockable side panel is simply plugged in and 

secured via two security locks. The integral 

beading gives the side panels a special touch. 

Additional security is achieved via the option of 

latching the side panel from the inside. The side 

panels may be screw-fastened to the frame 

section from the inside using locking brackets 

FR 7856.700 . 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 20 


Security lock 3524 E. 

Side panels 

for TE 

To finish of individual racks or entire bayed suites 

of racks at the sides. 

The side panels are simply located and secured 

with the integral padlock. 

The super-lightweight design means that it is 

easily handled by one person. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 20 


Security lock 3524 E. 

Width/depth 

mm 


Note: 



Accessories: 

Nylon loops, 

see page 353. 

Cable route, 

see page 356. 

Cable ties, 

see page 353. 

Height 

mm 

Walls 

Side panels 

Model No. DK 

600 2000 7824.560 

800 2000 7824.580 




Packs 

of 

Model No. FR 

600 600 2 7856.6601) 600 1000 2 7856.6631) 1200 600 2 7856.6661) 1200 800 2 7856.6691) 1200 1000 2 7856.672 

1200 1200 2 7856.6731) 1800 600 2 7856.6751) 1800 800 2 7856.6781) 2000 600 2 7856.6811) 2000 800 2 7856.684 

2000 1000 2 7856.687 

2000 1200 2 7856.688 

2200 800 2 7856.6931) 2200 1000 2 7856.6961) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Accessories: 

Internal latch FR 7856.700, 

see page 266. 



Packs 

of 

Model No. TE 

1200 600 2 7000.642 

1200 800 2 7000.644 

2000 600 2 7000.650 

2000 800 2 7000.652 

2200 600 2 7000.654 

2200 800 2 7000.656 

267 

Side panels

Divider panels 

Walls 


Divider panel 

for TS 

For shielding individual enclosure cells. Thanks 

to the symmetry of the frame system, the divider 

panel can also be used at the rear. All-round, 

double fold for stability and to hold the seal. 

Notches in the corners and half-way up the sides 

permit the use of angular baying brackets and 

baying brackets, even with a divider panel fitted. 

For mounting on the outer mounting level. This 

leaves the inner level free for further population. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, 1.5 mm, zinc-plated, passivated 


IP 54 as per EN 60 529/10.91 



Accessories: 

Cover with door, 

see Cat. 31, page 860. 

Baying bracket TS 8800.470 for enclosures 

with fitted divider panel, 

see page 275. 

Note: 

The divider panel may also be fitted to the rear. 

This allows, e.g. frequency converters for heat 

dissipation to be installed in a divider panel with 

the cooling units facing outwards and protected/ 

finished off with a cover (see Cat. 31, page 860). 



Model No. TS 

1400 500 8609.450 

1600 500 8609.650 

1800 400 8609.840 

1800 500 8609.850 

1800 600 8609.860 

2000 400 8609.040 

2000 500 8609.050 

2000 600 8609.060 

2000 800 8609.080 

2200 600 8609.260 

302/402/502/702 

289/389/489/689 

247/347/447/647 


1302/1502/1702/1902/2102


Partition 

for TS 

For rack mounting, suspended between two TS 8 

enclosures. 

With three M40 holes in all 4 corner areas for the 

insertion of cable sections, conduit etc. 

The holes may be sealed with the stepped collars 

supplied loose. For cable entry, simply cut off at a 

suitable level to match the required cross-section. 

Material: 

Partition: Sheet steel, zinc-plated, 

Stepped collar: Plastic to UL 94-HB 


12 stepped collars M40. 

Note: 

Use baying connector TS 8800.490. 

Not for use in conjunction with a baying seal. 

Any existing seals must be removed prior to 

installation. 

Primer/paint 

For touching up and repairing powder-coated and 

wet-painted surfaces, air-drying. 

Accessories: 

Baying connector TS 8800.490, 

see page 273. 

Walls 




Model No. DK 

2000 900 7831.721 

2000 1000 7831.723 

2000 1200 7831.724 

2200 1200 7831.726 

Colour 

Model No. SZ 

RAL 

Touch-up pen 12 ml Spray can 150 ml Spray can 1000 ml 

7022 – 2581.000 – 

7032 2436.732 2437.000 2438.000 

7035 2436.735 2440.735 2438.735 

9005 2436.905 2440.905 – 

Partition 

for DK-TS 

For side partitioning of bayed TS server enclosures. 

Up to 8 cable glands to the adjacent rack are 

possible, covered with blanking plates. 

Material: 




Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

2200 900 1 7831.715 

Note: 

Only available on request for direct mounting on 


269 

Divider panels

for TS 8 

Baying system 

for TS 8 

Versatile door and side panel concept 

Door with lock Rear panel 

Adjacent door 

The versatile door and side panel concept 

also applies to the following baying variants: 

. . . infinite possibilities 

Side panel Hinged 

side panel 

Important: 

● Red areas (side panels, hinged and 

unhinged) must always be opposite 

one another. 

● Blue areas (doors/rear panels) must 

always be opposite one another. 

Side panel, 

asymmetrical 


door 


side panel 

TS 8 standard enclosure TS 8 climate control enclosure TS 8 corner enclosure 


6 


3 

1 

2 

4 

5 

1 

Baying system 

Baying at the installation site 

Bayable on all sides 

Whether around corners, 

forwards, backwards, to the 

left or right or even upwards if 

required, the baying possibilities 

are unlimited. 

For baying at the installation site 

or for provisional siting in the workshop 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Quick-fit baying clamps, 

one-piece 


three-piece 

Baying clamp, horizontal 

Baying clamp, vertical 

for TS/TS 


for TS/PS 

Baying connector, external 

Notes on the transport of 

bayed enclosures, 

see page 273. 

271 

Baying at the installation site


Baying system 



1 Packs of Model No. TS 

6 8800.500 

one-piece 

for TS/TS and FR(i)/FR(i) 

Simply attach the screws, insert the quick-fit 

baying clamp, tap in with a hammer and lock. 

Material: 





Note: 

Only for mounting on vertical enclosure sections 

of FR(i). 


three-piece 

for TS/TS 

Simply locate, connect with the lock plate, and 

secure. 

Material: 




6 8800.590 


for TS/TS, TS/PS and FR(i)/FR(i) 

For mounting on the horizontal enclosure sections. 


4 8800.400 

Material: 

Cast steel, zinc-plated, passivated 




for TS/TS 

For mounting on the vertical enclosure sections. 

Material: 






Jap. patent no. 2 965 975 


6 8800.410 







for TS/PS 


Material: 

Cast steel, zinc-plated, passivated 



Baying system 



6 8800.420 

Baying connectors, external 

for TS/TS 


Simply position on the outside and screw-fasten 

either from the inside or outside. 

Material: 


or stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304) 



Note on the transport of bayed enclosures 

Individual enclosures are reliably transported 

using the eyebolts included with the 

supply. 

For symmetrical loads, the following maximum 

permissible loads apply: 

at 45° sling angle 4,800 N, 

at 60° sling angle 6,400 N, 

at 90° sling angle 13,600 N. 

Note: 

For larger baying combinations, we recommend 

the use of a transport base/plinth, 




European patent no. 104 8098 

with validity for FR, GB, IT 

6 Design Packs of Model No. TS 

Sheet steel 6 8800.490 

Stainless steel 6 8700.000 

For the enclosure combination with angular 

baying brackets, quick-fit baying clamps 

and combination angles shown here, the 

load capacity with a sling angle of 60° is as 

follows: 

for the left enclosure: 7,000 N, 

for the middle enclosure: 14,000 N, 

for the right enclosure: 7,000 N. 


The sling angle between the roof plate and 

the sling has a significant influence on the 

total permissible load. 

The sling angle must not be less than 45°, 

and where possible, should be less than 

60°. 

273 

Baying at the installation site

Baying for transport 

Baying system 

Baying for transport 

A 

8 

B 

A 

B 

8 

7 

2 quick-fit baying clamps 

TS 8800.500 

(see page 272). 

4 baying brackets 

TS 8800.430 


Angular baying brackets 

for TS/TS 

The robust connection when transporting bayed 

enclosure suites. 

Screw-fastening may be optionally 

● Horizontally and vertically with 8 screws 

● Horizontally with 2 screws and M8 threaded 

blocks, vertically with 4 screws 

Material: 




When transporting bayed enclosures 

7 Baying bracket for TS/TS 

8 Baying bracket for TS/TS 

and for TS/PS 

2 quick-fit baying clamps 

TS 8800.500 



TS 8800.430 



TS 4582.500 

(see page 274) 

if the angular baying 

brackets cannot be fitted 

in the foremost installation 

position due to installed 

equipment such as large 

swing frames. 


A 

C 

B 

Note: 

● In addition, the outer baying 

connector (see page 273), 

can be used. 

● When transporting large, 

heavy enclosure combinations 

by crane, we additionally 

recommend the use of 

combination angles 

TS 4540.000, 

see page 275. 


For protection category IP 55: 

One connector/clamp is 

required half-way up the 

enclosure height, 

see page 272. 

Baying clamp, 

see page 272 – 273. 

Notes on the transport of bayed 

enclosures, 

see page 273. 


4 8800.430 

8 Baying brackets 


for TS/TS and TS/PS 

For additional stabilisation, or in cases where: 

● Mounting plate brackets 

4 4582.500 

● Swing frame 

● Busbar support 

Accessories: 

prevent the installation of angular baying 

brackets. 

For mounting on the vertical TS enclosure section: 

Snap-on nut M8, TS 8800.808, 

Material: 




see page 310. 

A 

B 

C


Angular baying brackets 

The alternative to baying bracket TS 4582.500 

and for individual interior installations. 

Material: 



Screws M8 x 16 mm. 

Combination angle 

For optimum distribution of tensile forces during 

transportation of bayed enclosures by crane. 

Material: 




Baying attachment, vertical 

for TS/TS with divider panel 

Only suitable for mounting in conjunction with the 

angle brackets of the divider panel (included with 

the supply). 

Material: 




Baying attachment, vertical 

for TS/TS 

For baying two populated enclosures on the 

vertical enclosure section. 

Simply locate into the vertical TS punchings, 

secure and connect both brackets by using the 

hex screws (supplied loose). 

Using the fastening bolts, the enclosure is pulled 

into a defined end position, with a height or side 

offset of up to ± 2 mm. 


for back-to-back mounting 

Two-piece, for in situ assembly of enclosures 

with mounting plate in the rearmost installation 

position. 

Material: 




Baying system 


4 4582.000 

Baying 



horizontal TS enclosure section 

Captive nut/threaded block M8, see page 314, 

vertical TS enclosure section 

Snap-on nut M8, TS 8800.808, see page 310. 


4 4540.000 

Accessories: 

Baying cover, 

see page 276. 

Notes on the transport of bayed enclosures, 

see page 274. 


8 8800.470 

Note: 

May also be used for side or wall attachment/fastening 

of enclosures. In such cases, additional 

holes must be drilled in the side or rear panel. 


6 8800.670 

Material: 

Sheet steel 3 mm, zinc-plated, passivated. 




4 8800.170 


275 

Baying

Baying 

Baying system 

Baying 

Baying cover, top 

A cover with two end caps may additionally be 

clipped over the seal between the two enclosures. 

This prevents dirt and liquid from collecting 

on the baying seal. 

Material: 

Cover section: sheet steel, spray-finished 

or stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304) 

End caps: Plastic 

Note: 

May also be fitted in the width with enclosure 

suites bayed back-to-back. 

May also be used in conjunction with dust guard 

trim, see page 290. 

Baying connector, external 

for DK-TS/DK-TS with side panels 

For retrospective baying of enclosures with screwfastened 

or plug-type side panels. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Compensating panel 

for TS 

The panel is screw-fastened to the outside of the 

enclosure frame and serves as an infill panel 

when baying 2000 mm high enclosures of varying 

depths. 

No seal between the enclosures. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Baying kit 

for FR(i)/FR(i) 


Material: 




Baying kit 

for TE/TE 

For connecting individual enclosures into bayed 

suites at the sides. The enclosures are connected 

between the base and roof frame. 

Material: 




For 

Model No. TS 

enclosure 

depth 

mm 

Packs 

of RAL 7032 RAL 7035 Stainless 

steel 

400 1 8800.440 8800.840 8700.140 

500 1 8800.450 8800.850 8700.150 

600 1 8800.460 8800.860 8700.160 

800 1 8800.480 8800.880 – 

900 1 – 8800.890 – 

1000 1 – 8800.892 – 




with validity for FR, IT 


4 7824.540 

Note: 

Plug-type side panels only in conjunction with lock 

DK 7824.500, see page 266. 

Depth difference 

mm 

Model No. DK 

100 7067.1001) 200 7067.200 


Packs of Model No. FR(i) 

4 7856.752 


4 7000.640 



Designer glass door, 180° 

for TS 

● Facilitates monitoring of on-going processes. 

● Door opening angle when bayed 180° – 

optimised design of escape routes. 

● Rear all-round cable duct integrated inside the 

frame section. 

● Concealed cable routing to the installed 

electronic equipment. 

● Form-fit hinges integrated into the frame 

section. 

● A high standard of security thanks to 

− Four-point locking 

− Lock handle for semi-cylinder 

− Optional electronic lock and sensor systems 

Material: 

Aluminium frame section, 

3 mm single-pane safety glass 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Lock system with security lock insert no. 3524 E 



for DK-TS 

To replace existing doors. With 180° hinges and 

swivel handle with security lock no. 3524 E, in 

exchange for comfort handle. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 55 as per EN 60 529/10.91 



Door/locks 

EU registered design no. 000578661 

Accessories: 

Door variants 


Width mm Height mm 

Model No. DK 

600 800 7824.628 

600 1000 7824.630 

600 1200 7824.632 

600 1400 7824.634 

600 1600 7824.636 

600 1800 7824.638 

600 2000 7824.640 

600 2200 7824.642 

800 1000 7824.830 

800 1200 7824.832 

800 1400 7824.834 

800 1600 7824.836 

800 1800 7824.838 

800 2000 7824.840 

800 2200 7824.842 

Cover section for cable duct DK 7824.850, 

see page 457. 

Width 

mm 


Height 

mm 

Model No. DK 

600 2000 7824.205 

800 2000 7824.207 

600 2200 7824.225 

800 2200 7824.227 

Accessories: 

Comfort handle, 

see page 282. 

180° hinge for bayed TS enclosure suites with 

comfort handle, see page 289. 

277 

Door variants

Door variants 

Door/locks 

Door variants 

Glazed door 

for TS 

Instead of a sheet steel door or rear panel. 

Design: 

Frame: 


die-cast zinc corner pieces, 

powder coated 

RAL 7035 

Single-pane safety glass, 

3 mm thick, 

printed mask on the inside 

RAL 7015 

Locking rod with double-bit insert 

180° hinges (4) 

Visible area: 

W – 140 mm, 

H – 160 mm. 


IP 55 as per EN 60 529/10.91 

German registered design no. M 98 03 844 

IR reg. design no. DM/045 440 

with validity for BE, FR, NL, HU, LU 

UK reg. design no. 2 076 673 

South Korean reg. design no. 0 240 621 

Russian reg. design no. 46 300 

Japanese reg. design no. 1 056 165 

US design patent no. 418 608 

Handle adaptor 

The handle adaptor compensates for the design 

chamfer in the door profile to enable installation of 

the comfort handle. 

Material: 

Plastic 


1 adaptor plate, 

1 extension for drive, 

2 assembly screws. 

Lock components 

for frame TS 

For retrofitting a glazed door or sheet steel door in 

place of a rear panel. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 





When mounting instead of the rear panel: 

Lock components for frame TS 8800.040, 

see page 278. 

Accessories: 

Lock inserts, 

see page 282. 


see page 281. 

Model No. TS 


Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

600 1800 8610.680 

800 1800 8610.880 

600 2000 8610.600 

800 2000 8610.800 

600 2200 8610.620 

800 2200 8610.820 

for glazed door TS 

Colour Model No. TS 

RAL 7035 8611.080 

RAL 8019 8611.090 

for designer door IW and PC-TS, bottom door 

Colour Model No. PC 

RAL 7035 8611.300 

for glazed door IW 

Colour Model No. IW 

RAL 7035 6903.170 


4 8800.040

101 

500 

115 


Sheet steel door, vented 

for DK-TS 

With 180° hinges and swivel handle with security 

lock no. 3524 E, in exchange for comfort handle. 

For optimum air throughput in network enclosures 

with a high proportion of active components. 

Slotted surface (SW6-6.7 hexagon) with air inlet 

openings >78 %. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Glazed door, vented 

for DK-TS 

With 180° hinges and comfort handle with security 

lock no. 3524 E. For optimum air throughput in 

network enclosures with a low proportion of active 

components. 

Material: 


Viewing window of 3 mm single-pane safety glass, 

side slotted surfaces (SW6-6.7 hexagon) for air 

inlet. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Adaptor door 

for DK-TS 

With 180° hinges and comfort handle with security 

lock no. 3524 E. To extend the enclosure 

depth by 100 mm. This creates the necessary free 

space at the rear for retro-fitting deep-build active 

components or space for system-compatible 

cabling at the front. Retro-fitting with deeper components 

is therefore easily achieved whilst in 

operation. The adaptor door is vented across the 

surface. Slotted surface (Ø 5 mm), air inlet opening 

>60 %. 

Simple cable routing via brush strips top and bottom. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Width 

mm 


Door/locks 

Height 

mm 

Door variants 

Model No. DK 

600 1200 7824.123 1) 

600 1800 7824.183 

800 1800 7824.184 

600 2000 7824.203 

800 2000 7824.204 

600 2200 7824.223 

800 2200 7824.224 


Accessories: 


see page 281. 



Width 

mm 


Height 

mm 

Model No. DK 

600 1200 7824.121 1) 

600 1800 7824.181 1) 

800 1800 7824.182 1) 

600 2000 7824.201 

800 2000 7824.202 

600 2200 7824.221 

800 2200 7824.222 


Accessories: 



Width 

mm 


Height 

mm 

Model No. DK 

800 2000 7824.780 

Note: 

Other sizes and side adaptor available on 

request. 

279 

Door variants

Door variants 

Door/locks 

Door variants 

Sheet steel door, vertically 

divided 

for TS 

With 130° hinges and locking rod including comfort 

handle for semi-cylinder with security lock 

no. 3524 E. Thanks to the minimal rotation radius 

of the individual doors, the distance between individual 

bayed enclosure suites may be reduced. 

The extensive door perforations additionally support 

climate control of the installed equipment. 

Slotted surface with air inlet opening >78 %. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


IP 55 to EN 60 529/10.91 (unvented) 

IP 20 to EN 60 529/10.91 (vented) 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



All-glass door, vertically 

divided 

for TS 

With 180° hinges and locking rod including comfort 

handle with security lock no. 3524 E. Thanks 

to the minimal rotation radius of the individual 

doors, the distance between individual bayed 

enclosure suites may be reduced. 

Material: 

5 mm single-pane safety glass, frame of aluminium 

frame elements. 

Colour: 

Frame elements, RAL 7035 

Viewing windows tinted, parsol grey 



Viewing panel 

For mounting on 

● AE instead of door 

● Surfaces 

Material: 

Frame: Aluminium, natural-anodised. 

Glass panel: Acrylic 


IP 54 as per EN 60 529/10.91 


Plastic handle with lock insert no. 3524 E. 


Accessories: 

180° hinge TS 8800.190, 

see page 288. 


Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Vented Unvented 1) 

600 2000 7824.360 7816.360 

600 2200 7824.362 7816.362 

800 2000 7824.380 7816.380 

800 2200 7824.382 7816.382 

1) Without tubular door frame. Tubular door frame available 

on request. 


Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Rotation 

range 1) 

Model No. DK 

800 2000 180° 7824.490 

1) Stand-alone siting 

Note: 

Not to be used in conjunction with a swing frame. 

For use 

as door variant 

with AE 

1039.500 

1339.500 

1009.500 

7641.000 

1050.500 

1350.500 

1007.500 

1010.500 

1060.500 

1360.500 

7643.000 

1012.500 

1076.500 

1376.500 

7645.000 

Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Max. installation depth: (depth – 4 mm) 

Visible area: 

(width – 60 mm) x (height – 60 mm) 

Note: 


Model No. FT 

Depth = 

34 mm 

Depth = 

60 mm 

599 377 2730.000 2760.000 

499 497 2733.000 2763.000 

599 597 2731.000 2761.000 

599 757 2732.000 2762.000 

for 3 U subrack 599 197 2734.000 –


Trim frame 

for TS 

To conceal the TS 8 front frame in enclosures 

without a door. Can be combined with large swing 

frame. 

Possible application areas include, for example: 

● Studio technology 

● Electronic configuration 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



The Rittal comfort handle 

As the handle does not take up any swing space, 

due to its folding mechanism, the door surface 

area may be maximised for installed equipment. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


Powder-coated 


German registered design no. M98 00 539 

IR reg. design no. DM/045 065 

with validity for BE, CH, ES, FR, IT, NL, HU, LU 

Austrian design no. 32290 

Czech design no. 28278 

UK reg. design no. 2 075 910 

Comfort handle 

for lock inserts 

Prepared for the installation of lock inserts, safety 

and push-button inserts, see page 282. 

Length: 295 mm. 


for padlock and lock inserts 

Prepared for the installation of lock inserts, safety 

and push-button inserts, and with additional 

shackle (hole diameter 8 mm) for a padlock. 


Door/locks 

Door variants/lock systems 


Width mm Height mm 

Model No. DK 

600 2000 7824.130 

800 2000 7824.132 

Note: 

The trim frame conceals the system punchings 

at the sides in the inner mounting level. 

The TS punched sections with mounting flange 

23 x 73 mm (see page 300) may be used for 

installation. 

Swedish design no. 64 750 

South Korean design no. 241 505 

Israel. design no. 30 123 

Slovenian design no. 98 500 73 

Russian design no. 46307 

South African design no. 98/0865 

Finnish design no. 20461 

Chinese design no. 983 03439 

Australian design no. 13887 

US design patent no. 428,322 

Brazilian design no. DI 5801235-4 

Jap. design no. 1 081 561 

Taiwanese design no. 68683 


with validity for FR, GB, IT 



Design Model No. TS 

RAL 7032 8611.010 

RAL 7035 8611.020 

RAL 8019 8611.250 

RAL 9005 8611.350 

Matt nickel-plated 8611.330 


Handle adaptor for mounting on a TS glazed door, 

PC-TS bottom door, IW designer door, 

see page 278. 


RAL 7032 8611.030 

RAL 7035 8611.290 

RAL 8019 8611.260 




see page 278. 

281 

Door variants/lock systems

Lock systems 

Door/locks 

Lock systems 

Lock inserts 

For comfort handles and standard TS lock (in 

exchange for the standard double-bit lock insert). 

Lock and push-button inserts 

For installation in the comfort handles for lock 

inserts. 


With security lock insert E1 

Only for use with VW, Audi, 

SEAT, SkodaAuto. 

Supplied without key. 


Other VW locks available on request. 


for semi-cylinder 

Prepared for the installation of commercially available 

semi-cylinders, 40 or 45 mm total length, to 

DIN 18 254, see page 287, as well as lock and 

push-button inserts, see page 282. 


Lock and push-button inserts 

For installation in 

● comfort handle for semi-cylinder, 

see above. 

● Ergoform-S standard 

see page 284 

● CM folding lever handle 


7 mm square 8611.100 

8 mm square 8611.110 

6.5 mm triangular 8611.220 

7 mm triangular 8611.120 


Screwdriver 8611.140 

Daimler 8611.150 

3 mm double-bit 8611.160 

Fiat 8611.170 


Lock insert 

lock no. 3524 E 

8611.1801) Push-button insert 

Push-button and 

8611.190 

lock inserts, 

lock no. 12321; 

No other lock is possible 

8611.2001) 1) with 2 keys 


RAL 7032 8611.040 

RAL 7035 8611.045 




see page 278. 


RAL 7032 8611.060 

RAL 7035 8611.070 

RAL 8019 8611.270 

RAL 9005 8611.360 





see page 278. 

Design Model No. SZ 

Lock insert 


2467.0001) Push-button insert 

Lock and 

2468.000 

push-button insert, 

lock no. 2123 E; 

No other lock is possible 

2469.0001) 1) with 2 keys 

Possible 

alternative: 

Semi-cylinder, 

see page 287. 


120° 

64 

Position for 

door opening 


90° 

69.7 

Max. projection 

of the upper 

handle part 


Prepared for ASSA lock system 


Security handle 

with code 

Flexible access opportunities with 

● individual 3-digit code without key 

or 

● with the master key function via an additional 

semi-cylinder of 40 or 45 mm to DIN 18 254, 

irrespective of the code. 

Swivel handle 

for sheet steel door TS 

With lock insert, lock no. 3524 E. 

The use of semi-cylinders is not possible. 


Note: 

When used in a bayed enclosure suite, the hinges 

must be on the same side. 

Door/locks 

Lock systems 


RAL 7032 8611.050 

RAL 7035 8611.280 




see page 278. 

Design with Model No. DK 

Comfort handle TS, FR(i) 7200.800 

Ergoform-S handle for TE 7200.810 

Accessories: 

Lock and push-button inserts, 

see page 282. 


see page 287. 


RAL 7035 7829.300 

283 

Lock systems

Lock systems 

Door/locks 

Lock systems 

Spring washer 

When dismantling the TS locking rods the spring 

washers cannot be used again. 

Material: 

Spring steel, zinc-plated, passivated 

Assembly tool 

for spring washers 

For simple pressing-on of the spring washers via 

inlet ring magnets. 

Mini-comfort handle 

for 3-part EL enclosures 

Prepared for the installation of lock inserts and 

for the installation of commercially available 40 or 

45 mm semi-cylinders, and of lock and pushbutton 

inserts. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

The Ergoform-S 

lock system 

for TE 

The unlocked handle folds down forwards and is 

swivelled to open the lock. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


Powder-coated 

Ergoform standard 

Prepared for the installation of semi-cylinders with 

a total length of 40 or 45 mm (to DIN 18 254), 

see page 287, all 27 mm lock inserts, version A, 

see page 285, as well as lock and push-button 

inserts, see page 282. 


100 8800.070 


1 8800.270 


For lock inserts1) 7705.110 

For semi-cylinder2) 7705.120 

Accessories: 

1) Lock inserts, 

see page 285. 

2) Lock and push-button inserts, 

see page 282. 

2) Semi-cylinders, 

see page 287. 


RAL 7032 

With brown handle 

2450.000 

Brown 2451.000 


RAL 7032 2454.000 

RAL 7035 

RAL 7032 

2435.000 

1) 

With brown handle and 

bracket 

2455.000 

1) Hole diameter = 7 mm for padlock 



Lock inserts 

Note: 

The universal lock systems allows the installation 

of a suitable lock to suit almost any application or 

customer specification. 

Version A 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

Version D 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

T handles 

Version B 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc, chrome-plated 


Seal and 2 keys. 

Cam locks 

Housing made of fibre-glass reinforced polyamide, 

also as a replacement for compact 

enclosures AE. 

Door/locks 

Lock systems 

The relevant product ordering page shows which 

handles can be fitted into each particular assembly. 

Length 27 mm Model No. SZ 

7 mm square 2460.000 

8 mm square 2461.000 



Screwdriver 2464.000 

Daimler insert 2465.000 


Fiat 2307.000 

6.5 mm triangular 

(CNOMO) 

2460.650 

Length 47 mm Model No. SZ 



7 mm square 2557.000 

8 mm square 2558.000 

Daimler insert 2554.000 



With lock insert, 


2575.000 

Without cylinder insert 2572.000 

Model No. SZ 

With double-bit insert1) 2420.000 

With lock insert, lock no. 3524 E 2430.000 

1) exchangeable for cylinder inserts, 

version B, see page 286 and 27 mm lock inserts, 

version A, see page 285. 

285 

Lock systems

Lock systems 

Door/locks 

Lock systems 

Plastic handles 

with cylinder insert. 

Lock no. 3524 E including assembly parts, seal 

and 2 keys. 

Version C, 

but without cylinder insert. 

Note: 

The universal lock systems allows the installation 

of a suitable handle to suit almost any application 

or customer specification. The relevant product 

ordering page shows which handles can be fitted 

into each particular assembly. 

Version B Colour Model No. SZ 

RAL 9011 2576.000 

RAL 7030 2439.000 

Version B, 

but without cylinder insert. 

Colour Model No. SZ 

RAL 9011 2533.000 

Version C Colour Model No. SZ 

RAL 9011 2485.000 

Cylinder inserts 

Version B 

Lock no. 3524 E with 2 keys. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

Version C 

Lock no. 3524 E with 2 keys. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

Colour Model No. SZ 

RAL 9011 2485.100 


1 2571.000 


1 2525.000 



Semi-cylinder 

to DIN 18 252 

40 mm, alternative closure, for individual locks in 

handle systems with cylinder insert. 


3 keys. 

Semi-cylinder lock 

for compact enclosures AE 

For retro-fitting to single-door enclosures with cam 

lock. 

The cover plate is locked by semi-cylinders with a 

total length of 40/45 mm (to DIN 18 254). An additional 

cover protects the cylinder against dirt. The 

protection category of the enclosure is not 

impaired. 

Supplied without semi-cylinder. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

49 

91.5 

55 

Enclosure key 

For lock inserts (one double-bit key is supplied 

with every enclosure). 

Universal key 

For inserts: 

● Double-bit 

● Rectangular 6 mm 

● Rectangular 7 – 8 mm 

● Triangular 7 – 9 mm 

With bit adaptor and reversible bit for: 

● Multi-tooth size 25 

● Philips-head (Ph 2) 

90 

Door/locks 

Lock systems 

Packs of Model No. CS 

1 set 9785.040 

DesignModel No. SZ 

90 

70 

RAL 7035 2534.100 

RAL 7032 2534.000 

Nickel-plated (matt) 2534.500 

Accessories: 


see page 287. 


European patent no. 0778 913 

with validity for GB, FR, IT 


Jap. patent no. 3.088.465 

55 28.5 

27.5 


Double-bit key no. 5 2531.000 

Security key no. 3524 E 2532.000 



7 mm square 2547.000 

8 mm square 2548.000 

Daimler key 2521.000 

Fiat key 2308.000 


1 2549.500 

287 

Lock systems

Lock systems/hinges 

Door/locks 


Universal enclosure key 

Double-bit, 8 mm square, 8 mm triangular (also 

for 7 mm inserts), with integral screwdriver. 

Spare key 

for standard lock 12321 or 3524 E. 


for QuickBox 

The quick-release fastener provides optimum 

access, even when used in problem areas. To 

facilitate locking, the quick-release fastener is 

screw-fastened to the mounting bracket at the 

front. This enables the QuickBox to be locked 

even when the fasteners of the sides are opened, 

allowing the enclosure cover to be attached and 

removed easily. 

Hinges 130° 

for TS 

For retrofitting a sheet steel door instead of the 

rear panel. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 



Hinges 180° 

for TS 

For retrospective conversion of sheet steel doors 

with 130° hinges. 

One-person assembly: 

● Exchange the hinge parts on the frame side for 

180° hinges (4 screws). 

● Drill the door at the pre-marked points. 

● Screw-fasten the hinge parts onto the door. 

● Locate the door. 

● Press in the captive hinge pins. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 




1 2549.000 

Design Packs of Model No. QB/SZ 

12321 2 7526.050 

3524 2 2532.000 

Packs of Model No. QB 

2 7502.220 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 


2 mounting brackets, mounting material and 

quick-release fasteners. 


4 8800.020 


Lock components for frame TS 8800.040, 

see page 278. 


RAL 7035 4 8800.190 

RAL 7032 4 8800.030 

RAL 8019 4 8800.230 

Matt nickel-plated 4 8701.180 

Note: 

Door assemblies such as the comfort handle may 

restrict the door opening angle. 

The hinge pins may only be actuated and the 

door removed with the door open. 

The hinge cannot be dismantled from the outside 

with the door closed (access protection). 



Hinges 180° 

for TS bayed enclosure suites with comfort 

handle 

In TS bayed enclosure suites with comfort handle 

for semi-cylinder, the following door opening 

angles may be achieved: 

Sheet steel door: max. 180° 

Glazed door: max. 140° 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

Colour: 

RAL 7035/RAL 9005 



Door stay 

To secure the door in the open position. 

Ride-up roller 

for TS, ES, PC 

Lifts the door with heavy installed equipment 

(e.g. cooling unit) as a closing aid. For attaching 

to the tubular door frame. 

Door/locks 


Design Packs Model No. TS 

for 

of RAL 7035 RAL 9005 

Sheet steel door 4 7824.520 7824.522 

Glazed door 4 7824.525 – 

Note: 

● The protection category of the enclosure may 

be reduced. 

● Not for divided doors. 

● Door hinge remains the same within a bayed 

enclosure suite. 

● Not suitable for use with TS designer glazed 

doors. 

For Packs of Model No. 

TS, ES, PC 5 4583.000 

AP pedestals 

(not illustrated) 

AE (except AE 1032.500 

and AE 1035.500) and all 

5 2518.000 

AE stainless steel 

enclosures1) can only be 

mounted at the top 

(not illustrated) 

5 2519.000 

AE IP 69K 1 1101.800 

1) With AE stainless steel, only in conjunction with 

perforated mounting strip, see Cat. 31, page 896. 


10 4538.000 

289 

Lock systems/hinges

Roof 

Roof/wall mounting 

Roof 

Dust guard trim 

for AE, EB, KL and BG 

To protect against deposits on the upper edge of 

the door and between the enclosure and the door/ 

lid. Cut the door protection strip to length according 

to the enclosure width. Drill the enclosure and 

mount the strip using the adhesive strips and 

screws. 

Material: 

Plastic, UV-resistant 

Colour: 

Similar to RAL 7024 

Dust guard trim 

for TS, ES 

To protect against dust deposits on the upper 

edge of the door and between the door and upper 

horizontal enclosure section. The dust guard trim 

provides space to accommodate texts or company 

logos. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Clear plastic strip for text labels 

(height 29.5 mm). 

For 

Enclosures 

AE 


Length 

mm 

60 

A 

A 

mm 

25 

1200 

KL, EB, BG 20.5 

Ø 5 

6 

Model No. 

SZ 

2426.500 

Length mm Model No. SZ 

600 2424.100 

800 2425.100 

1000 2427.100 

1200 2426.100 

Note: 

Also suitable for use in conjunction with baying 

cover top, 

see page 276.

200 

606 

B - 88 

B - 3 

512 

150 


Top module 

for TS, FR(i) 

As a cable chamber for cable infeed from above 

or for power distribution with busbar systems 

across bayed enclosures. The TS cover plate is 

used as standard to finish off at the top. The 

enclosure height is increased by 200 mm with 

the top mounting module fitted. 

The top baying cover cannot be fitted. Installation 

accessories for top and bottom, see diagram and 

explanations below. 

Material: 



Spray-finished in textured RAL 7035/RAL 7032 


IP 55 as per EN 60 529/10.91 

Complies with NEMA 12 

(in conjunction with side panel for top mounting 

module, see page 291). 

11 

1 

2 3 4 5 

1 6 7 8 9 

Side panel 

for top mounting module 

To finish off the side of a top mounting module or 

bayed suite. 

Material: 



Spray-finished in textured RAL 7035/RAL 7032 


2 side panels, 

8 holders 

with automatic potential equalisation. 

10 


For enclosures Model No. TS 

Width (B) 

mm 

Depth 

mm 


1 frame module, 

2 trim panels (front and rear), 

8 holders 

with automatic potential equalisation, 

4 tapped rods with eyebolts. 

Roof 

RAL 7032 RAL 7035 

400 600 8801.7201) 8801.725 

600 600 8801.7301) 8801.735 

800 600 8801.7401) 8801.745 

1000 600 8801.7501) 8801.755 

1200 600 8801.7601) 8801.765 


Accessories: 

Description Page 

TS punched rail 18 x 38 mm 302 

PS punched rail 23 x 23 mm 

with angle bracket 

304 


with support bracket PS 

304 

PS punched section without mounting 

flange, 23 x 73 mm 


304 

PS punched section with mounting 

flange 23 x 73 mm 

304 

Support rail 305 

System support rails 305 

C rail 30/15 

with support bracket or spacer 

306 

Cable clamp rail 9791) 1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 TS punched rail 25 x 38 mm 302 

11 TS punched section without mounting 

flanges, 45 x 88 mm 

301 

1) Catalogue 31 


RAL 7035 2 8801.775 

RAL 7032 2 8801.7701) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

291 

Roof

Roof 


Roof 

Roof plate 

for cable entry, two-piece 

for TS, FR(i) 

In exchange for the standard roof. Equipped with 

a sliding angular bracket in the rear section. Rubber 

cable clamp strip on both sides for attaching 

cable bundles and bunched cables. 

Thanks to the symmetrical design of the TS 8 

frame, side cable entry can also be achieved by 

rotating the roof plate. 

The two-piece design additionally allows easy 

retro-fitting, by simply removing the front part of 

the plate for retrospective cable entry. 

For active ventilation, a fan mounting plate may be 

fitted in the front section of the enclosure (only 

with TS, not in conjunction with 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frames). To this end, the roof plate must 

be raised by at least 20 mm using spacers. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Roof plate 

for cable entry on all sides 

for TS, FR(i) 

The roof plate has sliding plates for cable entry on 

all four sides, and therefore allows individual 

selection of cable routing tailored to the specific 

requirements. After cable entry, the sliding plate 

is closed again as far as possible, and the rubber 

cable clamp strips supplied loose then seal the 

cable entry area. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Cable management roof plate 

for TS, FR(i) 

In exchange for the standard roof plate. Thanks 

to the rounded side cut-outs, large quantities of 

cables may be routed into the rack whilst preserving 

the bend radii. The roof has system 

punchings for the attachment of cables with 

nylon tape or cable ties. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Accessories: 

Fan mounting plate, 

see page 293. 

Spacers, 

see page 293. 



Model No. DK 


Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

600 400 7826.6451) 600 600 7826.665 

600 800 7826.685 

600 900 7826.695 

600 1000 7826.605 

600 1200 7826.625 

800 400 7826.845 

800 600 7826.865 

800 800 7826.885 

800 900 7826.895 

800 1000 7826.805 

800 1200 7826.825 

1200 400 7826.245 


Width 

mm 


Depth 

mm 



Model No. DK 

800 800 7826.588 


Width 

mm 


Depth 

mm 

Model No. DK 

800 800 7826.884 





Note: 

Combination with a 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frame is not possible.

Roof-mounted fan for TS, 

FR(i) 

For the office sector, 

see page 126. 


Roof plate, vented 

for TS, FR(i) 

In exchange for the standard roof. 

Variant 1: 

72 mm high roof plate, all-round vent slots, optionally 

with clamp strip for cable entry. The two-piece 

design with cable entry allows easy retro-fitting, 

by simply removing the front part of the plate. The 

cables are held in position via a guide at the side. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Variant 2: 

Ventilation holes (Ø 5 mm) are incorporated allround 

into the 97 mm high roof plate. In conjunction 

with the vented glazed and sheet steel door, 

the roof plate matches the door design to perfection. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Fan roof, modular, two-piece 

for TS, FR(i) 

see page 128. 

Spacers 

for roof plate TS 

To raise the TS 8 roof for ventilation purposes, 

in three different heights. 

Not suitable for crane transportation! 

Material: 

Hexagonal sectional steel, zinc-plated, 

passivated. 





Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

One-piece 

without 

cable entry 

Roof 

Two-piece 

with 

cable entry 

600 600 7826.766 7826.669 

600 800 7826.768 7826.689 

600 900 7826.7691) 7826.699 

600 1000 7826.7601) 7826.609 

800 600 7826.786 7826.869 

800 800 7826.788 7826.889 

800 900 7826.7891) 7826.899 

800 1000 7826.780 7826.809 


Width 

mm 

Roof plates TS 

for TopTherm roof-mounted 

cooling units, roof-mounted fans 

and vent attachments TS, 

see page 146. 


Depth 

mm 

Accessories: 

Fan mounting plate for active ventilation. 

see page 293. 



Model No. DK 

800 600 7826.866 

800 800 7826.886 

800 900 7826.8961) 800 1000 7826.8061) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Cooling components 

for the entire IT sector, 


Height mm Packs of Model No. SZ/DK 

10 4 2422.000 

20 4 2423.000 

50 4 7967.000 

293 

Roof




Spacers 

for cover plates TE 

To assist passive ventilation, spacers may be 

used to raise the cover plates. 

Material: 

Hexagonal sectional steel, zinc-plated, 

passivated. 



Eyebolts 

for TS, ES 

For crane transportation of enclosures, may 

already be included in the supply. 

Thread: M12 


For the attachment of KL, EB, BG, AE, CM and EL 

enclosures as well as DK, FM wall-mounted distributors 

and small fibre-optic distributors. 


Assembly parts for mounting on the enclosure. 

Note: 

For hygiene reasons, and in view of the protection 

category, the stainless steel enclosures do 

not have any drilled holes for the wall mounting 

brackets. 

Wall bracket 

For wall attachment of TS and ES enclosures at 

the roof, e.g. with heavy components on the door. 

Material: 


Height mm Packs of Model No. TE 

20 4 7526.963 

Note: 

Spacers are already included with the supply of 

the TE enclosures. 


4 4568.000 


Material 

Sheet steel 

zinc-plated, 

passivated 


1.4301 

Wall distance 

(A) mm 

40 

10 

1) Without assembly parts. 

20 

15 


1 2503.0001) 4 2503.010 

1 2508.0001) 4 2508.010 

10 4 2433.000 

29 

54 A 

Possible 

alternative: 

With TS 8 inside the enclosure 

(without mounting plate), 

baying bracket TS 8800.470, 

see page 275. 

20 

Ø 10.2 


4 4595.000 

15

Overview of TS installation systems 

Clearance width 

Depending on attachment, the following values apply to the 

clearance between the mounting levels: 

● Outer mounting level = 

Enclosure width and depth minus 42 mm 

● Inner mounting level = 

Enclosure width and depth minus 88 mm 

Cover installation 

TS 8 rails 

for the outer level 

TS 8 rails, PS rail 

for the inner level 

With adaptor rail 

for PS compatibility 

With adaptor rail 


Base installation 

Installation with: 

● PS punched section with mounting flange 

● PS punched section without mounting flange 

● PS punched rail in three mounting variants 

● TS punched rails 

● TS punched sections without mounting flanges 

● TS punched sections with mounting flanges 


● TS mounting bar 

● TS punched rail 

Benefits: 

● Largest clearance width 

● May be installed directly, on one level all round 


● TS mounting bar 

● PS punched section without mounting flange, 

with support bracket TS 

Benefits: 

● Use of a second level 

● Height-offset mounting all-round 

On one level all round with: 



● PS punched rail with angle bracket, 

mounting bracket or support bracket PS 

Height-offset in the width and depth with: 

● PS punched section with mounting flange 

● PS punched rail with mounting bracket 

● TS punched rail 

Installation with: 

● Cable clamp rails 

● C rails 30/15 with bracket/spacer 

● System support rails 

● Support rail 

● TS punched rails 



External level Internal level External and 

internal level 

Rail systems 

PS-compatible 

installation 

295 

Rail systems

Rail systems 


Rail systems 

18 3 10 13 11 

18 3 17 16 15 14 

9 

12 

1 

2 

3 

20 

18 

18 

4 

5 

19 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

Cover installation 

Punched sections and rails may 

be mounted on the horizontal 

enclosure sections in both the 

width and depth. 

Installation accessories Page 


17 x 73 mm for the outer level 

299 

TS support strip for the outer level 303 

TS punched rail 18 x 38 mm1) 1 

2 

3 

for the 

● outer level 

● horizontal enclosure sections 

● adaptor rail for PS compatibility 

302 

4 TS punched section with mounting flange, 

17 x 73 mm for the inner level 

299 

5 TS support strip for the inner level 303 



300 

7 PS punched section without mounting 

flange 23 x 73 mm with support bracket TS 

(alternatively with one or two punched rails 

23 x 23 mm) 

304 

8 Adaptor rail for PS compatibility 303 

9 Punched section without mounting flange, 

23 x 73 mm with support bracket PS 

304 

10 PS punched rail 23 x 23 mm 


304 

11 PS mounting rails 23 x 23 mm 

with support bracket PS (alternatively with 

one or two punched rails 23 x 23 mm) 

304 

12 PS punched section with mounting flange, 

23 x 73 mm 

304 


with mounting bracket PS 

304 

14 Cable clamp rail 354 

15 C rails 30/15 

with support bracket or spacer 

306 

16 System support rails 305 

17 Support rail 305 

TS punched sections without mounting 

18 

flanges, 45 x 88 mm 

301 

19 TS punched rail 25 x 38 mm 

with snap-on nut 

302 

20 


with mounting bracket TS 

304 

1) Two TS punched rails 18 x 38 mm are included 

in the supply of enclosures with a mounting 

plate. After installing the mounting plate, the 

TS punched rail may be inserted, as shown here. 

Base installation 

Punched sections and rails may 

be mounted on the horizontal 

enclosure sections in both the 

width and depth. 


Attachment may be made at any point in the 

TS 8 enclosure space. Not only with horizontal 

rail installations directly between the TS sec- 

11 

13 

9 9 


9 

tions, but by combining vertical and horizontal 

rails, any given mounting level in the width, 

height and depth may be achieved. 

7 

12 

6 

8 

9 

10 

11 

13 


Rail systems 

Vertical mounting levels – 

PS-compatible 

The basis for a second mounting level 

across the entire enclosure height is 

quickly achieved, e.g. with two PS 

punched sections without mounting 

flanges 23 x 73 mm 9. Between these 

two sections, configuration may be achieved with 

PS punched rails 10, 11 and 13, with PS punched 

sections without mounting flanges 9 and PS 

punched sections with mounting flanges 12. 

When using the adaptor rail for PS compatibility 8, 

installation is easily achieved across a suitable 

sub-height, or with suitable enclosure dimensions, 

across a sub-width or sub-depth. 

Installation accessories 

(Consecutive numbering in accordance with 

diagram on page 296) 



7 Punched section without mounting flange, 

23 x 73 mm with support bracket TS 

(alternatively with one or two punched rails 

23 x 23 mm) 

8 Adaptor rail 



flange, 23 x 73 mm with support bracket 

PS 



11 PS mounting rails 23 x 23 mm 

with support bracket PS (alternatively with 

one or two punched rails 23 x 23 mm) 

12 PS punched section with mounting flange, 

23 x 73 mm 


with mounting bracket PS 

If PS punched rails or PS 

punched sections without 

mounting flanges are installed 

vertically on roof or base 

frames, a PS rail is also required 

for horizontal sub-division. 

Page 

300 

304 

303 

304 

304 

304 

304 

304 

297 

Rail systems

Rail systems 


Rail systems 

4 

1 

1 

3 

4 

5 

2 

4 

1 

9 

9 

Vertical outer 

mounting level 

Optimum space utilisation and superfast 

assembly by mounting the TS 

punched section with mounting flange 

directly onto the outer level of the TS 8 

vertical section. Simply snap into position 

and secure! 




Page 



299 

TS support strip for the outer level 303 

TS punched rail 18 x 38 mm1) 1 

2 

3 

for the 

● outer level 

● horizontal enclosure sections 

● adaptor rail for PS compatibility 

302 





4 

299 

1) Two TS punched rails 18 x 38 mm are included in the 

supply of enclosures with a mounting plate. After installing 

the mounting plate, the TS punched rail may be 

inserted, as shown here. 

Vertical inner 

mounting level 

Separate utilisation of the inner level of 

the TS 8 vertical section, irrespective 

of the outer level, creates additional 

opportunities. Even in one enclosure, 

all installation systems may complement 

one another perfectly for brand new, customer-specific 

solutions. Endless possibilities! 

Simply snap into position, secure, and voila! 

Super-fast assembly by mounting the TS punched 

section with mounting flange directly onto the 

inner level of the TS 8 vertical section. 




Page 



299 



299 

5 TS support strip for the inner level 303 


flange, 23 x 73 mm with support bracket 

PS 

304 

German patent no. 196 47 802


TS punched section with 

mounting flange, 17 x 73 mm 

Variable, with 5 rows of holes for universal skeleton 

structures or partial assembly. Simply locate 

into the TS punchings and secure. 

Installation options: 

● On the vertical TS enclosure section 

− On the outer mounting level, all-round, 

at the same height 

− On the inner mounting level, all-round, 

height-offset 

● In CM via rail for interior installation 

− In the depth, for outer mounting level 

− In the width, for inner mounting level 

Material: 






For installation in CM: 

Rail for interior installation, 


Accessories: 

Screws, 

see page 315. 

Cable tie for quick assembly SZ 2597.000, 

see page 353. 



notched version 

For enclosures with plug-in side panels. 

Variable, with 5 rows of holes for universal skeleton 

structures or partial assembly. Simply locate 

into the TS punchings and secure. 



− On the outer mounting level, all-round, at the 

same height 

Material: 







depth-variable for mounting frames 

for DK-TS, FR(i), TE 

For designing flexible interior installation, and/or to 

accommodate additional built-in components. 

The punched sections with mounting flanges may 

be located in the enclosure depth between two 

mounting frames. An additional screw-fastening 

secures the unit. 

The depth-variability of the rails facilitates flexible 

adaptation of their length to the prescribed attachment 

distance between the two 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frames. An additional punched section 

centre piece may be slid flexibly along the rail in 

the depth and secured to slots. This facilitates 

flexible attachment at any point between the 

mounting frames in the enclosure depth. 


For the outer mounting level 1) 

For the inner mounting level 

Rail systems 

For 

enclosure width/depth 

mm 


300 4 8612.130 

400 4 8612.140 

500 4 8612.150 

600 4 8612.160 

650 4 8612.165 

800 4 8612.180 

1000 4 8612.100 

1200 4 8612.120 

1) Note: 

In conjunction with plug-in side panels, notched punched 

sections are required. 

For 


mm 


400 4 8612.040 

500 4 8612.050 

600 4 8612.060 

650 4 8612.065 

800 4 8612.080 

900 4 8612.090 

1000 4 8612.000 

1200 4 8612.020 

For the outer mounting level; 

notched version 

For 


mm 


600 4 7828.064 

800 4 7828.084 

900 4 7828.094 

1000 4 7828.104 

1200 4 7828.124 

Accessories: 

Screws, see page 315. 


see page 353. 

Length 

mm 


300 – 4701)2) 2 7000.676 

530 – 7001) 2 7000.678 

1) Distance between 19″ levels = length + 120 mm 

2) L < 420 mm, without centre piece 

Material: 



2 variable punched sections with mounting 

flanges, 

including one sliding centre part each, 


299 

Rail systems

Rail systems 


Rail systems 



with slot fastening 

The slot fastening facilitates fully depth-variable 

attachment of installation components or system 

accessories. In this way, any required 482.6 mm 

(19″) distance between levels may be implemented 

in the field of server integration. 

The sections are simply suspended from the inner 

TS mounting level and secured. 

Material: 



1 set = 

4 punched sections with mounting flange including 

mounting accessories for rack mounts and 

mounting angles. 



The alternative to the TS punched section with 

mounting flange 17 x 73 mm, see page 299, 

with punchings for captive nuts/threaded blocks 

instead of the slotted holes top and bottom. 

Simply locate and secure. 



Material: 





For 

enclosure depth 

mm 


900 4 7828.095 

1000 4 7828.105 

1200 4 7828.125 


For 


mm 


500 4 8612.550 

600 4 8612.560 

800 4 8612.580 

900 4 8612.590 

1000 4 8612.500 

1200 4 8612.520 

Accessories: 

Screws, 

see page 315. 

Threaded blocks, captive nuts, 

see page 314. 



TS punched section without 

mounting flange 45 x 88 mm 

Heavy top-mounted equipment mounted directly 

on the internal surfaces (e.g. roof) is supported. 

Mounted on the side or rear, the enclosure can 

then be screw-fastened securely to the machine. 

The twin profile with 11 rows of holes offers 

numerous additional opportunities for interior 

installation. 


● On the vertical and horizontal TS enclosure 

section 

Material: 




11.5 


Rail systems 

For 

enclosure width/ 

depth mm 


500 2 8612.650 

600 2 8612.660 

800 2 8612.680 

Side punchings 

11.5 

10.5 

1.5 

4.5 12.5 

23 23 

88 

41 

44.5 

25 

11.5 

11.5 11.5 

25 

C 

B 

A 

For 


mm 

A B C 

500 398 375 350 

600 498 475 450 

800 698 675 650 

301 

Rail systems

Rail systems 


Rail systems 

TS punched rail 

25 x 38 mm 

For heavy installations, with attachment holes. 



With 9 mm round holes on a 25 mm pitch pattern 

on all sides, for mounting: 

● Support rails, see page 305 

● System support rails, see page 305 

● C rails 30/15, see page 306 

● Cable clamp rails (right angle section), 

see page 354 

● Own assemblies 

Material: 

Sheet steel 3.0 mm, zinc-plated, passivated 



TS punched rail 18 x 38 mm 

Simply locate and secure with a screw. The location 

system makes assembly and dismantling easier. 

It only needs to be secured on one side, but 

may be secured on both sides if required. 



− On the outer mounting level 

● On the horizontal TS enclosure section 

Material: 




Note: 

In enclosures with a mounting plate, 2 punched 

rails are already included with the supply. 

For 


mm 


400 2 8612.740 

500 2 8612.750 

600 2 8612.760 

800 2 8612.780 



see page 310. 

Note: 

In conjunction with the snap-on nut, particularly 

well-suited for dynamic connections. 

For 


mm 


400 4 8612.240 

500 4 8612.250 

600 4 8612.260 

800 4 8612.280 



with validity for FR, GB, IT, SE 


Chinese patent no. ZL 971 995 32.X 

Australian patent no. 725 979 

Accessories: 

Screws, 

see page 315. 


see page 353. 

Cable clamps, 

see page 352. 



TS support strips 



section 

− On the outer mounting level, all-round, 

at the same height 

− On the inner mounting level, all-round, 

height-offset 

● On the tubular door frame TS, ES 

● On the perforated door strip CM 

● On the ES system punchings, in the enclosure 

depth 

Material: 




For the inner mounting level and for mounting on doors 

For 


mm 

For 

door width 

mm 


For the outer mounting level 

For 


mm 

Accessories: 

Length 

mm 

Rail systems 

Packs 

of 

Screws, 

see page 315. 


see page 353. 

Length 

mm 

Model No. TS 

400 340 20 4694.000 

500 440 20 4695.000 

600 540 20 4696.000 

800 740 20 4697.000 


– 400 290 20 4594.000 

400 500 390 20 4309.000 

500 600 490 20 4596.000 

600 – 590 20 8800.130 

– 800 690 20 4598.000 

800 900 790 20 4579.000 

– 1000 890 20 4599.000 

Adaptor rail 


Installation in the vertical TS enclosure sections 

(across the entire enclosure height or in subsections) 

to create compatibility with: 

● PS punched rail, 23 x 23 mm 


23 x 73 mm 

● PS punched section with mounting flange, 

23 x 73 mm 

Material: 






with validity for FR, GB, IT, SE 


Australian patent no. 727 880 

Chinese patent no. ZL 971 997 31.4 

TS assembly block 

Installation in the vertical TS enclosure sections 

for mounting PS-compatible individual components. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 



For 

enclosure height 

mm 


1800 4 8800.380 

2000 4 8800.300 

2200 4 8800.320 

Accessories: 

Screws, 

see page 315. 

Possible 

alternative: 

Snap-on nut, 

see page 310. 


4 8800.310 

Possible 

alternative: 

Snap-on nut, 

see page 310. 

303 

Rail systems

Rail systems 


Rail systems 

PS punched rails 23 x 23 mm 


● On the vertical enclosure section 

− Directly via support brackets TS 

− Via adaptor rail for PS compatibility in 

conjunction with angle brackets, mounting 

brackets or support brackets PS 

● On the horizontal enclosure section 

− Directly via angle brackets, mounting 

brackets or support brackets PS 

Material: 


PS punched section without 

mounting flange 23 x 73 mm 


● On the vertical enclosure section 

− Directly via support brackets TS 

− Via adaptor rail for PS compatibility in 

conjunction with support brackets PS 

● On the horizontal enclosure section 

− Directly via support brackets PS 

Material: 



U nuts, 

see page 314. 

Mounting brackets TS/PS, 

see page 311 

or 

Angle brackets, support brackets TS/PS, 

see page 312. 

Accessories: 

Cable attachment, 

see page 353. 

Screws, 

see page 315. 


see page 353. 


Length 

mm 

For WHD 

mm 


295 400 12 4169.000 

395 500 12 4170.000 

495 600 12 4171.000 

695 800 12 4172.000 

895 1000 12 4173.000 

1095 1200 6 4174.000 

1295 1400 6 4393.000 

1495 1600 6 4175.000 

1695 1800 6 4176.000 

1895 2000 6 4177.000 

2095 2200 6 4178.000 

Length 

mm 

For WHD 

mm 


295 400 4 4374.000 

395 500 4 4375.000 

495 600 4 4376.000 

695 800 4 4377.000 

895 1000 4 4382.000 

1095 1200 4 4378.000 

1695 1800 4 4379.000 

1895 2000 4 4380.000 

2095 2200 4 4381.000 


Support brackets PS/TS, 

see page 312. 

Accessories: 

Screws, 

see page 315. 


see page 353. 

U nuts, 

see page 314.


System support rails 

For heavy installed equipment such as transformers. 

T-head screw and slot in the support rail for 

any mounting position. 



− Via snap-on nut TS 8800.808 (Fig. left) 

− Via adaptor rail for PS compatibility 

− Offset in the height, via TS punched rail 

25 x 38 mm (Fig. right) 


− in the width 

− In the depth (without mounting plate) 


depth 

Material: 



2 system support rails (45 x 25 mm), 

4 T-head screws M12 x 60 mm, 


Support rails 

For heavy installations. Particularly suitable for the 

installation of base isolators. 





− Offset in the height, via TS punched rail 

25 x 38 mm (Fig. right) 


− In the width 

− In the depth 


depth 

Material: 




Support rail 65 x 42 mm 

Benefits: 

● For heavy assemblies up to 5000 N per support 

rail. 


10000 N per enclosure 

Material: 

Steel 






Rail systems 

For 


mm 


600 2 4361.000 

800 2 4362.000 

1000 2 4347.000 

1200 2 4363.000 

Accessories: 

Width divider e.g. for the installation of 

2 system support rails (for 600 mm width) in 

1200 mm wide enclosures, 



see page 310. 

Adaptor rail, 

see page 303. 

TS punched rail 25 x 38 mm, 

see page 302. 

For enclosure 

width/depth 

mm 

Model No. PS 

Packs 

of slotted 

Model No. TS 

unslotted 

400 4 4394.000 4394.500 

500 4 4395.000 4395.500 

600 4 4396.000 4396.500 

800 4 4398.000 4398.500 

Accessories: 


see page 310. 

Adaptor rail, 

see page 303. 


see page 302. 

For 


mm 


600 2 8612.960 

800 2 8612.980 

20 

28.5 

535/735 

575/775 

305 

Rail systems

Rail systems 


Rail systems 

Support rails TS 35/15 

to EN 50 022 

for TS, ES 

Mounting on the TS vertical section via 

snap-on nut M8, TS 8800.808, see page 310, 

assembly block see page 303 or 

adaptor rail, see page 303. 

Support rails TS 35/7.5 

and TS 35/15 

to EN 50 022 

for KL, AE 

Length sized to the enclosure width 

Support rails 

to EN 50 022 

Fixed length 2 m 

Mounting clip 

for support rails 

For fast, secure attachment of: 

● Cable trunking 

● Mounting plates 

● Mounting angles 

on support rail TS 35/7.5 and TS 35/15 to 

EN 50 022. 

Simply pre-assemble the mounting clip on the 

part to be installed, then snap into position on the 

support rail. 

C rails 30/15 

to EN 60 715 

for TS, ES 






(Fig. right) 

● On the ES system punchings 

Material: 


For 

enclosure width/ 

depth mm 

For 

enclosure 

width 

mm 

Support rails 

length 

mm 


Packs 

of 

Model No. 

PS 

500 455 6 4933.000 

600 555 6 4934.000 

800 755 6 4935.000 

1200 1155 6 4937.000 

Support 

rails 

length 

mm 

Design 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

SZ 

150 137 

10 2314.000 

200 

300 

187 

287 

TS 35/7.5 

10 

10 

2315.000 

2316.000 

400 387 10 2317.000 

500 

600 

487 

587 

TS 35/15 

10 

10 

2318.000 

2319.000 

Design Length Packs of Model No. SZ 

TS 35/15 2 m 6 2313.150 

TS 35/7.5 2 m 6 2313.750 


30 2309.000 



with validity for ES, FR, IT, SE 

For 


mm 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

PS 

500 455 6 4943.000 

600 555 6 4944.000 

800 755 6 4945.000 

1000 955 6 4946.000 

1200 1155 6 4947.000 

Accessories: 

Cable clamps, see page 352. 

Support bracket or spacer, see page 313. 

Quick-assembly block, see page 313. 

Snap-on nut M8, TS 8800.808, see page 310. 

Adaptor rail, see page 303. 

Possible 

alternative: 

Rail for EMC shielding bracket and strain relief, 

see Cat. 31, page 957.


C rails 

for TS 

For direct mounting on the vertical enclosure 

section. 

Thanks to the universally designed attachment 

piece, the C rails may optionally be attached to 

the inner or outer level of the TS 8 frame. 

Material: 




C rails 

for TS, ES 


● On the horizontal enclosure sections 

● On the vertical TS enclosure section via 

adaptor rail for PS compatibility 

Material: 




C rails 

for EL 

For infinite adjustment of the mounting angles in 

the depth. 

Material: 





For 


mm 

Accessories: 

Cable clamps, 

see page 352. 

Length 

mm 

Rail systems 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

400 298 4 7828.040 

500 398 4 7828.050 

600 498 4 7828.060 

800 698 4 7828.080 

900 798 4 7828.090 

1000 898 4 7828.100 

1200 1098 4 7828.120 

For 


mm 


Adaptor rail for PS compatibility 

(when mounting on the vertical TS enclosure 

section), see page 303. 

Accessories: 

Cable clamps, 

see page 352. 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

400 284 6 7091.000 

500 384 6 7092.000 

600 484 6 7095.000 

800 684 6 7096.000 

1000 894 6 7100.000 

1200 1094 6 7102.000 

For 

centre part depth 

mm 

Packs of Model No. EL 

216 4 2238.000 

316 4 2239.000 

416 4 2237.000 

Accessories: 

Cable clamps, 

see page 352. 

307 

Rail systems

Rail systems 


Rail systems 

Mounting plates 

Locatable 

on 

● the vertical TS enclosure section 

● the TS punched section with mounting flange, 

17 x 73 mm 

● at the rear on the TE 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frame 

Material: 





Screw-fastened, large 

On all enclosures and mounting parts with system 

punchings on a 25 mm pitch pattern. 

Material: 





Screw-fastened, small 

Material: 





4 8612.400 


100 = 8 x 12.5 

12.5 

12.5 

t = 2 

100 = 8 x 12.5 

118 

125 

100 = 8 x 12.5 

Ø 6.5 

Ø 4.6 

Ø 4.6 

t = 2 

Ø 6.5 

5.6 

5.6 

12.5 

100 = 8 x 12.5 

118 

10 

Ø 7 

12.5 

60 

5.6 

110 

120 


4 8612.410 


4 4532.000 

60 

50 

25 

12.5 

110 

100 

4.6 6 

t = 1.5 6 (5 x) 12.5 10.5 

40

1 

2 


Mounting bracket 

Screw-fastened on all enclosures and mounting 

parts with system punchings on a 25 mm pitch 

pattern. 

Material: 




System adaptor 

for FR (i) 

By using the system adaptor, the principle of 

two TS 8 attachment levels within this enclosure 

system is easily achieved. This supports the integration 

of all rail systems which are attached to 

the outer enclosure level, and therefore offers a 

diverse choice of installation options. The inner 

attachment level may be emulated by simply 

rotating the system adaptor, and therefore creates 

the requirements for perfect cable management 

and completely flexible interior installation. 

Rail systems attached between the front and rear 

frame section must be 200 mm shorter than the 

external enclosure dimensions. 

1 Installation position, outer level 

2 Installation position, inner level 


Rail systems 


4 4597.000 

Accessories: 

Screws, 

see page 315. 


see page 353. 

53 

25 

28 

12.5 

1.5 

16.5 

18 

12.5 

6 

25 

100 

110 

4.6 

12.5 

Material: 




6 (3 x) 

10.5 

40 

16.5 

Packs of Model No. FR(i) 

8 7856.760 

309 

Rail systems

Assembly components 



1 2 

3 4 

5 

Snap-on nut TS 

Metric thread for vertical TS enclosure section. 

To install, insert into slot and clip into position. 

The snap-on nut is then secure. By tightening the 

screw, it is securely tightened against the section, 

and potential equalisation is automatically 

created. 



− with metric thread M6 or M8 

− the alternative to metal screws 

− particularly well-suited for dynamically loaded 

connections 

Material: 

Precision-cast stainless steel 

Accessories for interior installation 

1 Support rails, 

see page 305 

2 Cable clamp rails, 

see page 354 

3 C rails 30/15, 

see page 306 

4 System support rails, 

see page 305 

5 TS punched rail 25 x 38 mm, 

see page 302 

Adaptor bracket TS 

For external mounting of 

● System lights 

● Cable duct 

on the vertical TS enclosure section. 

Material: 




Thread Packs of Model No. TS 

M6 20 8800.806 

M8 20 8800.808 


Accessories: 

Multi-tooth screw M6 x 12 or M8 x 12, 

see page 315. 


6 8800.360 



Mounting bracket TS 

Offers variable mounting opportunities for the 

mounting angle 23 x 23 mm. 

e.g. for supporting external surfaces or creating 

an additional internal level. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


24 screws 5.5 x 13 mm. 

1 

2 

3 

Mounting bracket PS 

For variable attachment of punched rails 

23 x 23 mm. 


● Optionally flush with: 

− Outer enclosure edge or 

− Enclosure clearance width 


− Adaptor rail for PS compatibility, 

see page 303 


● On enclosures and rails with square system 

punchings 12.5 x 10.5 mm. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


1 set = 

1 mounting bracket, 

1 screw M6 x 12 mm, 

1 cage nut M6. 




24 8800.370 

Accessories: 

U nuts (recommendation: M6), 

see page 314. 



− flush with the outer edge of the enclosure or 

− flush with the enclosure clearance width. 

1 

Support of the external surfaces with two 

mounting options: 

● Without mounting plate (photo) 

● With mounting plate (drawing) 

Two installation options for the inner mounting 

level: 

2 If there is no divider panel fitted. 

3 

With a divider panel fitted, without or with 

mounting plate in a set forward position. 


24 sets 4182.000 


U nuts for punched rails (recommended: M6), 

see page 314. 

Multi-tooth screws M6 x 12 mm, 

see page 315. 

311 

Assembly components




Angle bracket PS 

For quick attachment of punched rails 

23 x 23 mm. 




see page 303 


● On enclosures and rails with square 

system punchings 12.5 x 10.5 mm 

Material: 



1 set = 

1 angle bracket, left, 

1 angle bracket, right, 

2 screws 5.5 x 13 mm. 

Support bracket TS 

For fastening 

punched sections without mounting flanges 

23 x 73 mm or 

punched rails 23 x 23 mm. 



section 

− on a 25 mm pitch pattern 

− in 2 mm increments 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


1 set = 

1 support bracket, 

1 stay, 

3 screws 5.5 x 13 mm. 

Support bracket PS 

For fastening 

punched sections without mounting flanges 

23 x 73 mm or 

punched rails 23 x 23 mm. 



− Snap-on nut TS 8800.806, 

see page 310, or 


see page 303 




Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


1 set = 

1 support bracket, 

2 csk-screws, 

2 serrated lock washers. 


12 sets 4181.000 



see page 314. 


see page 315. 


6 sets 8800.330 




see page 314. 


see page 315. 


24 sets 4183.000 



see page 314. 


see page 315. 

Adaptor rail for PS compatibility 

(when mounting on the vertical enclosure section), 

see page 303. 



Support bracket or spacer 

For fastening C rails, punched rails or cable 

clamp rails (angle section). On the sides, to 

accommodate square sections or tubes 

(Ø 20 mm). 

Attachment points with M8 thread. 






see page 303 




Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


1 set = 

1 bracket or spacer, 

2 screws M8 x 16 mm, 

2 spring lock washers, 

2 captive nuts M8, 

2 serrated washers, 

2 screws. 

Quick-assembly block 

For a variety of installation options. 






see page 303 




Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


12 quick-assembly blocks, 

12 threaded blocks M8, 

24 screws M8 x 12 mm, 

24 square nuts M8. 

Angle piece 

For assembling punched rails and mounting surfaces 

with a 45° incline. 






see page 303 




Material: 

Angle pieces: Die-cast zinc 

Insulating pieces: Plastic 


1 set = 

1 angle piece, 

1 insulating piece, 

1 insulating screw and 

2 assembly screws, 

1 threaded block M6. 


Accessories: 

Angle piece TS 4134.000, 

see page 313. 



6 sets 4199.000 


12 4133.000 



12 sets 4134.000 

313 

Assembly components




U nuts 

for 

● Punched rail 23 x 23 mm 

● Punched section without mounting flange, 

23 x 73 mm 

● Punched section without mounting flange, 

45 x 88 mm 

● Punched section with mounting flange, 

23 x 73 mm 

For mounting punched rails and punched sections 

without mounting flanges on angle brackets, 

mounting brackets and support brackets, we 

recommend U nuts with M6 thread (PS 4179.000). 

Cage nuts/threaded blocks 


On enclosures and rails with square system 

punchings 12.5 x 10.5 mm, 

for example on: 

● TS enclosure section 

− vertical, via adaptor rail for PS compatibility 

− horizontal, direct 

● ES enclosure body, all-round 

● Punched rails 23 x 23 mm 

● Punched sections without mounting flanges, 

23 x 73 mm 

● Punched sections without mounting flanges, 

45 x 88 mm 

● Punched sections with mounting flanges, 

23 x 73 mm 

Cage nuts 

The compression spring designed as an insertion 

aid ensures reliable, mechanical and electrical 

connection in the system punchings. 

Threaded blocks 

With snap-off insertion aid, die-cast zinc. 

Cage nuts 

The nuts are inserted from the same side as 

screw-fastening takes place. Consequently, 

attachment points in the same height or width may 

also be used around corners. 

The spring cage also ensures electrical connection 

in the system punchings. 

Thread Packs of Model No. PS 

M4 20 4119.000 

M5 20 4157.000 

M6 20 4179.000 

M8 20 4180.000 

Accessories: 


(for PS 4179.000), 

see page 315. 

Possible 

alternative: 

On the vertical TS enclosure section 

TS snap-on nut, 

see page 310. 


M6 50 4164.000 

M8 50 4165.000 


M6 50 4162.000 

M8 50 4163.000 


M6 50 8800.340 

M8 50 8800.350 




Multi-tooth screws 

M6 x 12 to fit: 

● Snap-on nut (TS 8800.806) 

● U nuts for punched rails (PS 4179.000) 

● Cage nuts (PS 4164.000) 

● Threaded blocks (TS 4162.000) 

M6 x 12 to fit: 

● Snap-on nut (TS 8800.808) 


For the round holes 4.5 mm diameter in the enclosure 

section, punched rails and punched sections 

without mounting flanges. 

Self-tapping screws 

For the round holes 4.5 mm diameter in the enclosure 

section, punched rails and punched sections 

without mounting flanges. 

Self-tapping screws 

Mark, drill and tighten in a single operation using 

electric or pneumatic tools. 

For metal thickness: 0.8 – 3 mm 

Length: 16 mm 

Usable length: 9.5 mm 

Width across flats: 8 mm 

Kit 

for separate frame TS 

Every TS 8 frame is easily converted to a rack 

suitable for dismantling. The frame sections in the 

roof and base frame are separated, optionally in 

the width or depth. The four connection components 

are inserted into the frame section and 

screw-fastened. The external dimensions of the 

frame remain unchanged. 



Note: 

The IP water protection of the enclosure system 

is lost once the frame is separated. 



Multi-tooth drive for optimum transmission of 

torques, an extended tool life and increased 

safety and reliability when tightening and 

loosening screw connections. 

Type of screw 


Dimensions 

mm 

M6 x 12 

M8 x 12 

Packs of 

300 

300 

Model No. 

SZ 

2504.500 

2504.800 

Multi-tooth screws 5.5 x 13 300 2486.500 


for stainless steel 

Self-tapping 

screws: 

5 x 13 300 2486.300 

● Hex screws 

● Posidrive raised 

countersunk 

screws 

● Pan head screws, 

posidrive 

● Pan-head screws, 

multi-tooth 

M5 x 10 

M5 x 12 

M5 x 12 

M5 x 12 

500 

500 

500 

500 

2504.000 

2488.000 

2489.000 

2489.500 

Self-tapping screws ST 4.8 x 16 300 2487.000 


4 7829.400 

315 

Assembly components

Component shelves for frame attachment 



3 

Mounting A 

Mounting B 

2 

4 

1 


for frame attachment 

Enclosure width 600 mm on the enclosure 

frame or between two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles 

Maximum depth of component shelves with enclosure 

frame attachment = Enclosure depth minus 

100 mm. 


Mounting bolts or mounting rails may be installed 

on a 25 mm pitch pattern in the enclosure depth. 

Mounting hole for handles provided. 


50 kg/100 kg surface load, static 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



1 Fastening bolts 

2 Mounting rails 

3 Installation kit 

4 Telescopic slides 



17 x 73 mm, as installation kit for component 

shelves, 

see page 324. 

For FR(i) plus system adaptor, 

see page 309. 

Load capacity kg 50 100 

Component shelf depth mm 400 500 600 700 400 500 600 700 

Component shelf height mm 29 45 

Model No. DK, slotted 7164.035 7165.035 7166.035 7166.735 7464.035 7465.035 7466.035 7466.735 

Model No. DK, unslotted 7264.035 7265.035 7266.035 – – – – – 

Mounting on a 600 mm wide enclosure frame, installation A , for TS, FR(i) 

Additionally 

required: 

For TS 

TS punched sections 

with mounting flanges 

17 x 73 mm as installation 

kit for enclosure depth mm 

For FR(i) 

System adaptor and 

TS punched section 

with mounting flange 

17 x 73 mm as installation 

kit for enclosure depth mm 

Accessories: 

600 8612.060 

800 8612.080 

900 8612.090 

1000 8612.000 

System adaptor 7856.760 

600 8612.140 

800 8612.160 

1000 8612.180 

1200 8612.100 

Telescopic slides see p. 326 7061.000 7081.000 7161.000 7161.700 7064.000 7065.000 7066.000 7066.700 

Handles for component shelves see p. 327 3636.010 

Mounting on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame1) , installation B , for TE, TS, FR(i) 

Distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels, 

minimal 

495 595 695 895 495 595 695 895 

Additionally 

required: 

1) Note: 

Not suitable for combination with telescopic slides. 

TS punched sections 

with mounting flanges 17 x 73 mm 

as installation kit in the enclosure depth 

between the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frames 

8612.040 8612.050 8612.060 8612.080 8612.040 8612.050 8612.060 8612.080 


3 


2 

4 

1 



Enclosure width 800 mm 

for TS, FR(i) 

For installation in enclosures without 482.6 mm 

(19″) accommodation. 

Maximum depth of component shelves with enclosure 

frame attachment = Enclosure depth minus 

100 mm. 


Mounting bolts or mounting rails may be installed 

on a 25 mm pitch pattern in the enclosure depth. 

Mounting hole for handles provided. 


50 kg/100 kg surface load, static 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 





3 Installation kit 






17 x 73 mm, as installation kit for component 

shelves, 

see page 324. 

For FR(i) plus system adaptor, 

see page 309. 

Load capacity kg 50 100 

Component shelf depth mm 400 500 600 700 400 500 600 700 

Component shelf height mm 29 45 

Model No. DK, slotted 7184.035 7185.035 7186.035 7186.735 7484.035 7485.035 7486.035 7486.735 

Additionally 

required: 

For TS 


mounting flange, 17 x 73 mm as 

installation kit for enclosure depth 

mm 

For FR(i) 

System adaptor and TS punched 

section with mounting flange, 

17 x 73 mm as installation kit 


mm 

Accessories: 

600 8612.060 

800 8612.080 

900 8612.090 

1000 8612.000 

System adaptor 7856.760 

600 8612.140 

800 8612.160 

1000 8612.180 

1200 8612.100 

Telescopic slides see page 326 7061.000 7081.000 7161.000 7161.700 7064.000 7065.000 7066.000 7066.700 

Handles for component shelves see page 327 3636.010 

317 

Component shelves for frame attachment




Component shelf, 

static installation 

for TS 

Locate the mounting pieces in the frame and 

attach the component shelf. Attachment in the 

TS enclosure section offers the greatest possible 

support surface. 

Dimensions: 

Height: 25 mm 

Width: Enclosure width minus 44 mm 

Depth: Enclosure depth minus 44 mm 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 





Model No. DK 

600 600 7828.660 

600 800 7828.680 

600 900 7828.6901) 600 1000 7828.6001) 800 600 7828.680 

800 800 7828.880 

800 900 7828.890 

800 1000 7828.800 


Note: 

Combined use with vertically divided doors is not 

possible. 

Not suitable for combination with telescopic 

slides. 


1 Spacers 


3 Adaptor 

4 Installation kit, depth-variable 

X 

Distance between levels 



Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6 mm (19″) frame 


482.6 mm (19″) installation 

Enclosures with two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

levels for TE, TS, FR(i), 482.6 mm (19″) system 

punchings 

Depending on their depth, the component shelves 

have several attachment points, so the distance 

between the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles is 

variable within certain limits. Each component 

shelf secured in this way can be retrospectively 

upgraded to full withdrawal using telescopic 

slides. For this purpose, the telescopic slides are 

screw-fastened in place of the spacers. 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035/RAL 9005 



Note: 

For installation in one 482.6 mm (19″) level: 

In conjunction with 3 U side parts, mounting on 

only one 482.6 mm (19″) level is possible. 

30 kg surface load, static. 


Adaptor for L-shaped mounting angles TS, 

see page 325. 

Installation kit, depth-variable, for installation on 

mounting frames and L-shaped mouning angles, 

see page 324. 

Accessories: 

Telescopic slides, see page 326. 

Cable support, hinged, see page 326. 

Side parts 3 U, see page 325. 

Possible 

alternative: 

Component shelf, heavy duty, for 482.6 mm (19″) 

population, see page 320 – 321. 

29 

50 

T 

200 (T ≥ 500) 

Component shelf width mm 409 Page 

Component shelf depth mm 300 400 500 600 700 

Distance between levels (X) 298 348/398 348/448/498 448/548/598 548/648/698 

Model No. DK RAL 7035 7143.035 7144.035 7145.035 7145.635 7145.735 

Model No. DK RAL 9005 – – 7145.005 7145.605 7145.705 

Accessories: 

Telescopic slides for 50 kg 7051.000 7061.000 7081.000 7161.000 7161.700 326 

Handles for component shelf 3636.010 3636.010 3636.010 3636.010 3636.010 327 

For TS: 

Note for installation in network enclosures 

based on TS, cranked mounting angle: 

The component shelves are mounted on the sides 

of the 482.6 mm (19″) cranked mounting angle 

with spacers on a U pitch pattern. 

X 

1 

2 

For TE, TS, FR(i), 19″ system punchings: 

Note for installation between two mounting 

frames or L-shaped mounting angles: 

May be mounted directly on the 482.6 mm (19″) 

system punchings using the depth-variable 

installation kit. 

2 

4 

For TS: 

Note for installation in network enclosures 

based on TS, L-shaped mounting angle: 

If L-shaped mounting angles are used, 

adaptor DK 7827.300 is required. 

3 

X 

1 

2 

For TS, FR(i): 

Note for installation between mounting angles 

and mounting frames: 

May be mounted directly on the 482.6 mm (19″) 

system punchings using the depth-variable 

installation kit. 

4 

100 

50 

319 

Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6 mm (19″) frame




X 



on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 

for TE, TS, FR(i) 

The component shelf is attached directly to the 

front and rear 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles. 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 




for network enclosures TS with cranked 

mounting angles 

For static installation between two 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting levels. 

The component shelf is located directly onto the 

cranked mounting angles. 

Zinc-plated version: 



Material: 




Spray-finished version: 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Note: 


slides. 


Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Distance 

between 

19″ levels 

mm 

Model No. 

DK 

511 22 413 495 7000.620 

Zinc-plated version: 

Dimensions Distance 

Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

between 

levels 

(X) mm 

Model No. 

DK 

452.5 20 478 498 7828.950 

452.5 20 578 598 7828.960 

452.5 20 678 698 7828.970 

Spray-finished version: 

Width 

mm 


Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

between 

levels 

(X) mm 

Note: 


slides. 

Model No. 

DK 

453 44 470 498 7145.535 

Possible 

alternative: 


population, see page 321, 

may be combined with telescopic slides, 

see page 326.


Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6 mm (19″) frame/system punchings 

X 



for network enclosures TS with L-shaped 


For static installation between two 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting levels. 

The component shelf is located directly onto the 

L-shaped mounting angles. 



Material: 




Note: 


slides. 


482.6 mm (19″) 

for TE, TS, FR(i) 

● L-shaped mounting angles 

● Mounting frame 482.6 mm (19″) 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035/RAL 9005 



Component shelf 2 U 

482.6 mm (19″) 

for TE, TS, FR(i), 19″ system punchings 

Suitable for installation in all enclosures with only 

one 482.6 mm (19″) recess and all swing frames 

with flange mounting, 482.6 mm (19″). 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Width 

mm 


Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

between 

levels 

(X) mm 

Model No. 

DK 

507.5 20 480 498 7828.951 

507.5 20 580 598 7828.961 

507.5 20 680 698 7828.971 

Possible 

alternative: 


population, see page 321, 

may be combined with telescopic slides, 

see page 326. 

Width 

mm 

Dimensions Model No. DK 

Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

RAL 7035 RAL 9005 

409 45 500 7063.895 7063.8351) 409 45 700 7063.897 7063.837 



Installation kit, depth-variable DK 7063.890, 

see page 324. 

Accessories: 

Telescopic slides (100 kg) for 482.6 mm (19″) 

component shelf, see page 326. 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

390 300 

Model No. DK 

7148.035 

Accessories: 

Telescopic slides for component shelves, 

see page 326. 

Handles, 

see page 327. 

321 

Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6 mm (19″) frame/system punchings

Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6 mm (19″) system punchings 



Component shelf 1 U, 

depth-variable 

482.6 mm (19″) 


For mounting between the front and rear 

482.6 mm (19″) levels. The component shelf is 

infinitely depth-adjustable from 488 mm to 

750 mm. 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Component shelf 1 /2 U, 


482.6 mm (19″) 


This space-saving component shelf is screw-fastened 

to the front and rear 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles. It is infinitely depth-adjustable and 

may be fitted independently from the enclosure. 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



482.6 mm (19″)/535 mm (metric) 


The ideal support surface for small active components 

such as modems or mini-hubs in 482.6 mm 

(19″) or metric levels. 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


mm 

Model No. VR 

488 – 750 3861.580 

Note: 


slides. 


mm 

Model No. DK 

400 – 600 7063.710 

600 – 900 7063.720 

Note: 


slides. 


Model No. DK 

depth 

mm 482.6 mm (19″) Metric 

140 7119.140 7119.1551) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Note: 


slides. 


Captive nuts, 

see page 381. 

Screws, 

see page 382. 







42 HP ( 1 /2 19″) 

The ideal support surface for small active components 

such as modems or mini-hubs. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Note: 


slides. 



482.6 mm (19″)/535 mm (metric) 

for 482.6 mm (19″)/metric system punchings 

If only one 482.6 mm (19″) or metric mounting 

level is available for mounting a component shelf, 

this variant offers a particularly cost-effective solution. 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Note: 


slides. 

Utility table 

for location in the 482.6 mm (19″) level 

for 482.6 mm (19″) system punchings 

The utility table may be attached directly 

between the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 

without any additional assembly work. The utility 

table has a height of 3 U and a support area of 

450 x 295 mm; it can be used as a support for 

measuring devices or splicing equipment during 

maintenance and wiring work. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Component shelf depth 

mm 

Model No. DK 

140 7502.600 


Captive nuts, 

see page 381. 

Screws, 

see page 382. 


Model No. DK 

depth 

mm 482.6 mm (19″) Metric 

250 7119.250 7119.255 

400 7119.400 7119.455 


Captive nuts, 

see page 381. 

Screws, 

see page 382. 

Support surface mm Model No. DK 

450 x 295 7183.100 

Note: 

Installation in enclosures with a TS trim frame is 

not possible. 

323 

Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6 mm (19″) system punchings

Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6mm(19″) systempunchings/installation kits 


Component shelves for attachment to the 482.6mm(19″) systempunchings/ 

Shelf 

for AE with pull-out frame 

The vented shelf is inserted into the pull-out frame 

of wall-mounted distributor DK 7644.000 and may 

additionally be screw-fastened. In this way, an 

additional support surface can be created with 

very little effort. Cage nuts may be clipped into the 

punchings of the frame, even after the shelf has 

been inserted. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 





as installation kit for component shelves 

Simply locate and secure. One pack is sufficient 

for 2 component shelves. 



Material: 




Installation kit, depth-variable 

for 482.6 mm (19″) component shelf 

In conjunction with 

● L-shaped mounting angles or 

● Mounting frame 482.6 mm (19″) 

Infinitely adjustable to the spacing between the 

two 482.6 mm (19″) levels. 

Suitable for all 482.6 mm (19″) component 

shelves in 409 mm width. 

Material: 



1 set = 

2 mounting rails including assembly parts. 

Width mm Depth mm Model No. DK 

430 195 7644.400 


Installation in 


mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. TS 

for TS for FR (i) 

500 4 8612.050 – 

600 4 8612.060 8612.140 

800 4 8612.080 8612.160 

900 4 8612.090 – 

1000 4 8612.000 8612.180 

1200 4 8612.020 8612.100 

Length mm Load capacity Model No. DK 

390 – 590 50 kg 7063.858 

590 – 790 50 kg 7063.860 

706.5 – 1006.5 100 kg 7063.890 

Accessories: 

Telescopic slides, 

see page 326. 



Adaptor for L-shaped 


for TS network enclosures 

For mounting component shelves and slide rails 

on L-shaped mounting angles. 

Material: 




Side parts 3 U 

for static installation of component shelves, 

482.6 mm (19″) 

For the attachment of component shelves to a 

single pair of 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles. 

The component shelves are screw-fastened to 

the 3 U side part. 

Either one or two component shelves may be 

secured. 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


2 side parts. 

Note: 


slides. 

Installation kit 

for component shelves and drawers, 

482.6 mm (19″) installation in TS 

For installation between the front and rear adaptor 

sections or adaptor pieces, 482.6 mm (19″) in 

600 mm wide enclosures. 

Material: 





Installation kits for component shelves 

Depth 

of 

side parts 

mm 


4 7827.300 

For 

component 

shelves 

DK 

Accessories: 

Component 

shelf 

depth 

mm 

400 7143.035 300 

400 7144.035 400 

400 7145.035 500 

Component shelves, 482.6 mm (19″), 

see page 319. 


Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″), 

see page 367. 

Adaptor pieces, 482.6 mm (19″), 

see page 366. 

Model No. DK 

7147.035 

For 


mm 


600 1 set 8800.560 

800 1 set 8800.580 

Max. depth of component shelves = 

Enclosure depth minus 100 mm 

325 

Installation kits for component shelves

Accessories for component shelves 



1 

2 

3 

Telescopic slides 

for component shelves 

Fixed component shelves are easily retro-converted 

to full withdrawal. For this purpose, the 

existing fastening bolts or mounting rails (heavyduty 

version) are exchanged for the telescopic 

slides. 


For installation and locking on a 25 mm pitch 

pattern in the enclosure depth. 


50 kg/100 kg per set 

Material: 


Cable support 

hinged, with clamp 

For secure routing of connection cables from the 

component shelf to the clamping point. 

The attachment may be released on both sides 

thanks to clamps. 

Material: 




Cable support 

hinged, with anti-kink device and clamp 

For secure routing of connection cables from the 

component shelf to the clamping point. Kink-free 

cable routing in the central part via mobile chain 

links. The attachment may be released on both 

sides, thanks to clamps. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, zinc-plated, passivated, 

Centre part: plastic 



For 

component shelf 

depth 

mm 


Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

50 kg 100 kg 

300 2 7051.000 – 

400 2 7061.000 7064.000 

500 2 7081.000 7065.000 

600 2 7161.000 7066.000 

700 2 7161.700 7066.700 




For enclosure depth mm Model No. DK 

< 600 7163.500 

> 600 7163.550 

For enclosure depth mm Model No. DK 

< 600 7163.560 

> 600 7163.565


Handles 

for pull-out component shelves 

The component shelves are prepared for the 

attachment of handles. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


Spray-finished, silver-grey 




for slotted component shelves 

For non-slip attachment of your components. 

The bolts are screwed into the slots of the component 

shelf support surface. Consequently, they 

are infinitely adjustable and can be adapted to 

suit any appliance. 



Packs of Model No. RP 

2 3636.010 


4 7115.000 

327 

Accessories for component shelves

Power supply 


Power supply 

Socket strips 

The socket strips in the aluminium 

channel are available in 

various lengths with different 

functional elements. Special 

attention has been devoted to 

practical, universal fastening: 

With a bracket which may be 

used in four positions, there is 

a range of attachment options. 

Hence, for example, the 482 mm 

long socket strip may optionally 

be mounted on 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting angles, 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting frame, on the 

enclosure frame, or in the rear 

section of the wall-mounted 

distributor. Without additional 

mounting accessories, the 

socket strip may be inserted into 

all sections with a 25 mm pitch 

Design 

pattern. This makes selection 

much easier, as well as providing 

additional flexibility and saving 

on warehousing. Provision 

has also been made for the 

cable routing of the infeed, and 

when mounting in the 482.6 mm 

(19″) section there is adequate 

space to route the infeed 

between the socket strip and the 

mounting angle without kinks. 

The arrangement of the sockets 

at a 45° angle allows unrestricted 

use of angular connectors. 

No. of 

sockets 

Frame 


44 

31.75 

44 


Rated voltage: 250 V 

Rated current: 10/16 A 

Connection cable: 2 m long 

H05VV-F3G1.5 

Material: 

Aluminium section natural 

anodised, 

socket inserts polycarbonate. 


Socket strip, 

two mounting brackets, 


Attachment 

Wall-mounted 

distributor, 

horizontal 

482.6 mm 

(19″) level 

T2 

T1 

Length (T1) 

mm 

Standards: 

Sockets: 

E DIN VDE 0620-1/A1 

(VDE 0620 part 1/A1): 2003- 

E DIN VDE 0620-1/A2 

(VDE 0620 part 1/A2): 2004- 

Sockets B/F: 

UTE NFC 61-303, CEE 7/NV 

Overvoltage protection for low 

voltage: 

DIN EN 61 643-11 

(VDE 0675 part 6-11): 2002: 12 

EMC interference suppression 

filter: EN 1332000: 1994 


see page 329. 

Mounting 

dimension (T2) 

mm 1) 

Model No. 

DK 

3 262.6 232.5 7240.110 

Without rocker switch 

7 482.6 452.5 7240.210 

12 658.6 628.5 7240.310 

With rocker switch 

3 

7 

 

 

 

 

306.6 

482.6 

276.5 

452.5 

7240.120 

7240.220 

Overvoltage protection and interference 

5 482.6 452.5 7240.230 

suppression filter 


9 658.6 628.5 7240.330 

suppression filter, with RJ 10 connector for 

CMC connection 

9 812.6 782.5 7200.630 

10 A circuit-breaker 5 482.6 452.5 7240.240 

Master/slave 1 + 3 482.6 452.5 7240.250 

UPS strip 7 482.6 452.5 7240.260 

RCCB 5 482.6 452.5 7240.280 

RCCB and line protection 5 482.6 452.5 7240.290 

For IEC 320 connector 10 A 12 482.6 452.5 7240.200 

For IEC 320 connectors with IEC 320 input, 

10 A 

For IEC 320 connectors with overvoltage 

9 482.6 452.5 7240.201 

protection and interference suppressor filter, 

10 A 

6 482.6 452.5 7240.205 

With 2 circuits 6 + 6 720.6 690.5 7240.370 

B/F sockets (Belgium, France) 7 482.6 452.5 7240.510 

B/F sockets (Belgium, France) 12 658.6 628.5 7240.512 

1) Variable attachment distance within a range of 5 mm, the distance given is hole centre – hole centre of mounting bracket.

Technical properties depending on 

variant: 

Rocker switch 

Illuminated, 2-pole switch. The safety bars 

prevent accidental contact. 

Master/slave 

2-pole electronic switching unit. The operating 

point may be set from 9 W to 35 W. 

Equipment which switches to energy-saving 

or stand-by mode when switched on cannot 

be used as the master device. In the ON 

state, the master device must draw 9 W, and 

must not draw more than 35 W in the OFF 

state. 


suppression filter 

The connected equipment is protected from 

voltage peaks in the mains and spikes. The 

EMC interference suppression filter provides 

protection from high-frequency interference 

voltage from both directions – the 

mains and the connected equipment. 

The green ready light is extinguished in the 

event of disconnection or malfunctions. Connected 

equipment remains disconnected. 

DK 7240.110 

262 

232.5 

31.75 

44 

DK 7240.200 – DK 7240.290 

DK 7240.370 

DK 7240.200 

482.6 

452.5 

482.6 

452.5 


720.6 

691.5 

(32.3) 97 88 88 88 57 

DK 7240.205 

482.6 

452.5 

Overvoltage protection device (SPD), 

type 3 

Maximum continuous voltage Uc: 280 V AC 

Rated load current IL: 16 A 

Maximum overvoltage protection at the 

mains end: 

LS:B16A or 16AgL/gG 

Protection level Up: 1.5 kV 

Combined surge Uco (L-N): 5 kV 

Combined surge Uco (L/N-PE): 6 kV 

Rated discharge current In (L-N): 3.0 kA 

Rated discharge current In (L/N-PE): 6.5 kA 

Arrester disconnector: Permanently disconnects 

SPD and equipment from the mains. 

Status display: Green ready light is extinguished 

upon disconnection. 


suppression filter, with RJ 10 connector 

for connection to the CMC. 

With the relay message contact, undervoltage 

and any failures caused by overvoltage 

can be reported via the CMC in the network 

using an SNMP trap. 

Relay alarm output: RJ 10 jack 

Relay load capacity: 50 V DC, 100 mA 

10 A circuit-breaker 

Protects cables from short-circuit and overload. 

2-pole switching (thermal/magnetic). 

Tripping characteristic B. 

(32.3) 

(32.3) 273 88 57 (32.3) 

31.75 

44 

44 

44 

DK 7240.120 

DK 7240.201 

31.75 

44 

306.6 

276.5 


Power supply 

UPS strip 

With red socket inserts. These indicate the 

items of equipment protected by a UPS. 

Connection cable with IEC 320 connector. 

Cable: H05VV-F3G1.0/rated current: 10 A 

2 circuits 

Two circuits with two separate connection 

cables, 2.5 m. 

RCCB 

For personal protection. With residualcurrent 

circuit-breaker I∆n 30 mA to 

DIN VDE 0664 part 1/85. 

RCCB and line protection 

A combination of personal, overload and 

short-circuit protection. With residual-current 

circuit-breaker I∆n 30 mA to DIN VDE 0664 

part 1/85 and residual-current circuitbreaker 

to DIN VDE 0641/A 4/11.88 16 A/ 

250 V~. 

Version B/F (Belgium/France) 

With 7 or 12 sockets to CEE 7-V UTE, 

with child-proof system. 

IEC connector 

With connection sockets to IEC 320, 

connection cable, 2 metres or IEC 320 input 

in the connector panel. 

Cable: H05VV-F3G1.0/rated current: 10 A 

482.6 

452.5 

31.75 

44 

(32.3) 141 110 110 57 (32.3) 

DK 7240.510 

482.6 

452.5 

(32.3) 119 44 44 44 44 44 44 35 (32.3) 

44 

44 

329 

Power supply

Power supply 


Power supply 

Rittal Power Control Unit (PCU) 

IP-compatible socket strip 

The 1 U PCU socket strip has 8 current outlets 

with IEC 320 C13 slots. Each of the 8 slots is individually 

switchable (via the CMC-TC system). 

Furthermore, a current indicator is integrated into 

the module. The socket strip may be installed on 

the enclosure frame or in the 482.6 mm (19″) 

section (1 U) of a rack. 

Operate the socket strip without CMC-TC: 

For operation of the socket strip, power pack 

7201.210 and a connection cable (see page 167) 

are needed. Up to 4 socket strips may be operated 

with one power pack. 

Available functions: Current display, circuit display, 

automatic selective activation 

Operate the socket strip with CMC-TC: 

No additional power pack is needed; the PCU 

is supplied with power via the CMC-TC system. 

Up to 4 x 4 PCUs may be connected to one 

Processing Unit II. 

Available functions: Current display, automatic 

selective activation, via CMC-TC in the network: 

Individual switching of the 8 outlets, current limit 

monitoring, delayed switching of the individual 

current outlets, status display of the module. 

Recommended accessory list CMC-TC: 

● 7320.100 CMC-TC Processing Unit II 

● 7320.425 CMC-TC power pack 24 V, 

input 100 – 230 V AC 

● 7320.440 CMC-TC 1 U mounting unit 

● 7320.472 CMC-TC connection cable sensor 

unit 2 m 

● 7200.210 CMC-TC connection cable D 230 V 

AC (depending on country version) 

● 7200.221 CMC-TC programming cable 

Socket strips 230 Volt 


Rated voltage 250 V AC, 

maximum load 

CH 10 A, 

GB 13 A. 

No. of 

sockets 

UK, CH version 


8-way 7200.001 

Description of functions: 

● 2-digit local LED 7-segment current display 

on the PCU. Legibility rotates according to the 



PCU. Min./max. limits may be set. 


● Alarm indication via a flashing 7-segment 

display. 

● In conjunction with the CMC-TC, the 8 individual 

current outlets of the PCUs may be activated 

and deactivated individually via HTTP 

and SNMP. 

● 8 IEC 320 C13 slots per PCU. 

Material: 



1 socket strip PCU 1 U 

(max. 10 A per socket strip), 

1 bus cable, 


1 adaptor for power pack 24 V DC, 

1 connector for power supply. 




CMC-TC (7201.210) and the relevant connection 

cables, see page 167. 

Material: 

Plastic, halogen-free 

Connection cable, 2 m long, without connector 

H05VV-F3G1 (CH) 

H05VV-F3G1.5 (GB) 

Unrestricted use, including angular connectors, 

thanks to the long row arrangement of plug-type 

contacts. 

Model No. DK 

UK version 

Model No. DK 

CH version 


Length 

mm 

6 4701) 7404.000 7604.0002) 12 793 7408.510 7608.5102) 18 1153 7412.5102) – 

1) The socket strips can be mounted horizontally at the rear of the DK wall-mounted distributor based on EL/AE. 

2) Extended delivery times.


Socket strip TE 

8-way socket strip for earthing-pin plug/version D. 

The strip is made of plastic and may be mounted 

vertically on the TE frame or in the rear 482.6 mm 

(19″) section. In the 482.6 mm (19″) section, more 

than 2 U of space is required. The sockets are 

arranged at an angle of 45° so that angular connectors 

are also easily used. The socket strip is 

supplied with a 2 m connection cable. The connection 

cable is contacted in a terminal slot in the 

strip. 

The terminal slot is equipped with a separate 

cover, so that this connection point can always be 

quickly and easily accessed. Replacement of the 

connectionc cable is likewise simple. Furthermore, 

the socket strip has external terminals for 

separate earthing. 


Rated voltage: 230 Volt AC 

Rated current: max. 16 A 

Connection cable: Length 2 m, H05VV-F3G 

1.5 mm 2 , without connectors with wire end ferrules 

Junction box 

with multi-functional bracket 

The angle bracket can be installed in all network 

enclosures in a system-compatible design. The 

junction box serves as a transfer point for the 

power supply to all equipment (fans, lamps and 

socket strips). As well as being used as a junction 

box or interchange point, the bracket may 

also accommodate the thermostat (SK 3110.000) 

or the hygrostat (SK 3118.000) thanks to its integral 

holes. 


Power supply 

Socket strip TE Model No. DK 

8-way, earthing-pin 7000.630 


1 set 7280.035 

Material of bracket: 

Sheet steel 

Colour of bracket: 

RAL 7035 


1 bracket, 1 junction box, 

6 m connection cable 3 x1.5 mm2 (flexible). 

331 

Power supply

Power supply 


Power supply 

Energy-Box, 482.6 mm (19″) 


A depth-variable top hat rail for installed equipment 

to DIN 43 880, sizes 1 – 3 (e.g. to accommodate 

built-in sockets, miniature circuit-breakers 

etc.). Cable clamping at the rear, one N and one 

PE rail on an insulated plinth. Plastic cover including 

extension cover (UL 94-V0), maximum accommodation 

of 22 installed devices (width 18 mm). 

Maximum accommodation capacity = 22 HP 

(22 x 18 mm = 396 mm). 

Energy-Box, 482.6 mm (19″), 

pull-out 

This Energy-Box is designed to accommodate 

both DC and AC components. The pull-out component 

front affords optimum access to the wiring 

space from above and below. 

Connection clamps 

for DC current: 

2 clamps 35 mm2 , 

9 clamps 16 mm2 (per rail) 

for AC current: 

1 clamp 16 mm2 (PE or N), 

20 clamps 4 mm2 (per rail) 


Depth-adjustable top hat rail for snap-in attachment 

of installed equipment to DIN 43 880 in sizes 

1 – 3 (e.g. to accommodate built-in sockets, miniature 

circuit-breakers etc. or entire installation 

assemblies such as the ABB “smissline” system). 

Cable clamping at the rear, two power distribution 

rails with connection clamps on isolated base/ 

plinth. Plastic cover including extension cover, 

maximum accommodation of 22 installed devices 

(width 18 mm). 

Maximum accommodation capacity = 22 HP 

(22 x 18 mm = 396 mm). 

Depth: 220 mm. 

Packs of U Model No. DK 

1 3 7480.035 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Energy-Box with plastic blanking covers 

Note: 

Individual population with circuit-breakers at the 

factory available on request. 



3 7480.300 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Energy-Box with plastic blanking covers. 


A 

A Side attachment 

B Rear attachment 


Compact light 

Narrower – Faster – Brighter 

● Narrower: Around 50 % less height and depth 

and also around 75 % less volume than conventional 

lights. 

● Faster: Universal fast attachment via clips, 

screws, or powerful magnets (optional). Simply 

slide in at the side or rear, fit the light, and it’s 

done! 

● Brighter: Up to 75 % greater luminous efficiency 

from the lamp at the same output helps 

to cut electricity costs. 

● Door position switch can also be connected via 

a 2-pole connection 

● Cable routing on the back of the light enables 

deflection, e.g. when mounted vertically in a 

TS 8. 


Compact lights 

Material: 

Enclosure: 

PC-ABS (halogen-free) 

Light cover: 

Polycarbonate (halogen-free) 

Colour: 



IP 20 


Compact light with clip and screw mounting kits, 


Accessories: 

Mounting kit magnet, 

see below. 

Door-operated switch with connection cable, 

see below. 

Model No. SZ 4140.010 4140.020 

Power 8 W 14 W 

Protection category II (all-insulated) 

Connection cable 2 x 2 mm2 , 3 m (open end), sheathing colour yellow 

Rated voltage 100 – 240 V AC ±10 % at 50 – 60 Hz 

Rated current 

(at 230 V AC) 

(at 110 V AC) 

0.045 A – 0.088 A 

0.083 A – 0.149 A 

0.073 A – 0.127 A 

0.149 A – 0.216 A 

Light Fluorescent lamp T5 

Operating unit Wide-range supply unit (all-electronic) 

Switches Integral, on/off/door-operated switch mode 

Light cover Transparent, grooved on the inside 

B1 

A 

Mounting kit magnet 

For reliable adhesion on all sheet steel surfaces. 

H 

Door-operated switch 

with connection cable 

Colour: 

Yellow 

T 

B 

Clip/magnet 

attachment 

B2 B 

A 

Screw attachment 

B3 

A 

Ø 6.5 

SZ 4140.010 SZ 4140.020 

Width (B1) mm 455 705 

Height (H) mm 59 59 

Depth (T) mm 

Mounting distance 

24 24 

B2 mm 

Clip/magnet 

400 650 

Mounting distance 

B3 mm 

475 725 


2 4140.000 

Length 

mm 


600 1 4315.700 

B 

333 

Compact lights

System lights 


System lights 

System lights 

With assembly parts for mounting: 

● On the enclosure profile: 

For TS, horizontally (directly), or vertically in 

conjunction with an adaptor angle 

● Directly onto rail systems with 25 mm system 

punchings 

● In AE, AP and CM using universal bracket 

SZ 2373.000 

Light: 

Universal white 


IP 20 as per EN 60 529/10.91 

Components 


Connection accessories, 

see page 336. 

Accessories: 

Adaptor bracket, 

see page 310. 

Universal bracket, 


Standard 

light 

Courtesy 

light 

Universal 

light 

Sockets and connectors for: 

– Power supply 

– Through-wiring 

– Facility for connecting a door-operated switch 

Jack for normally open contact 

Motion sensor 

Interference suppression via: 

 

– Radio interference suppression capacitor 

– Full-electronic ballast 

Additional manual switching with rocker or slide switch 

Light cover 

Light cone adjustment 

Individual voltage supply 100/110 – 240 V 

Standard light 

Technical specifications Socket 


Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

14 kW, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes 452 117 50 

18 kW, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes 682 117 50 

30 kW, 230 V, 50 Hz Yes 987 117 50 

With fluorescent lamp, socket G 13, length 375/604/908 mm 

1) with door operated switch 

Courtesy light 

Technical specifications Socket 

14 W, 100 – 240 V, 

50/60 Hz 

18 W, 100 – 240 V, 

50/60 Hz 

30 W, 100 – 240 V, 

50/60 Hz 

Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Yes 452 117 50 

Yes 682 117 50 

Yes 987 117 50 

With fluorescent lamp, socket G 13, length 375/604/908 mm 

1) with door operated switch 

System 

light 

Model No. SZ Approvals 

4138.140 

4138.150 1) 

4138.180 

4138.190 1) 

4138.300 

4138.350 1) 

ENEC 

ENEC 

ENEC 

Model No. SZ Approvals 

4139.140 

4139.150 1) 

4139.180 

4139.190 1) 

4139.300 

4139.350 1) 

ENEC 

ENEC 

ENEC


Universal light 

System light with 

filament tube (Linestra) 


System lights 

Technical specifications Socket W mm H mm D mm Model No. SZ Approvals 

26 W, 110 – 240 V, 

50 – 60 Hz 

Yes 

No 

No 

345 

345 

345 

95 

95 

95 

55 

55 

55 

4155.100 

4155.000 

4155.500 

VDE 

VDE 

UL 

with compact fluorescent lamp, TC-DEL 26 W, base G24q-3, length 174 mm 

Technical specifications Socket W mm H mm D mm Model No. SZ 

35 W, 230 V AC/DC No 380 59 41 4103.3501) 60 W, 230 V AC/DC No 580 59 41 4103.600 2) 

with filament tube. 

1) base 35 S14s, length 300 mm 

2) base 60 S14s, length 500 mm 

Light 1 U 

Complete ready-to-connect light for installation in 

the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles. The slot 

attachment additionally allows it to be fastened to 

the 25 mm system punchings. 


8 W, 230 V, 50 Hz 

With mains switch and 2.5 m connection cable 

with fitted earthing-pin plug. 

Enclosure light 48 V DC 

Specifically designed for use in telecommunication 

when built-in equipment may require a 

battery back-up. For mounting on the 25 mm 

system punchings. 


14 W, 48 V DC, rated current: 0.38 A 

Connection cables 

for enclosure light 48 V DC 

Enclosure light 48 V DC 

with connection cable 

Robust light. For attachment vertically or horizontally 

in the frame section via spring brackets, or 

may be used as a direct light source during maintenance 

work by inserting the plastic swivel hook. 

Impact-resistant lamp housing of PMMA 

(polymethylmethacrylate) protection category II. 


IP 64 


2 spring brackets 



1 7109.200 

Material: 

Aluminium, anodised, 

plastic 

Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

452 117 50 

Model No. CS 

9765.100 

For 

Cable 

length m 

Packs 

of 

Model No. CS 

Power supply 3 1 9765.137 

Through-wiring 1 1 9765.138 

Packs of Model No. CS 

1 9765.150 


Luminosity: 11 W 

Luminous efficiency: 900 lm 

Fluorescent tube: TC-SEL 11 W, 4-pin 

Ambient temperature: –20°C to +40°C 

Voltage: 48 V DC ±10 % 

Supply lead 3000 mm, H05RN – 2 x 1 mm, 

without connectors, with crimped ferrules 

Length: 

450 mm overall 

Protective tube 320 mm 

Light outlet 195 mm 

Diameter: 

62 mm overall 

Protective tube 38 mm 

335 

System lights

System lights 


System lights 

1 Connector 

2 

Socket 

Connection accessories 

The following components can be used for timesaving 

and simple installation of the lights: 


for 

Power supply 

(with socket, without connector) 

Power supply 

(with jack and strain relief, 

without connector) 

Accessories: 

Cable ties for quick assembly, 

see page 353. 


UL 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

orange 

Model No. SZ 

yellow grey 

3000 5 4315.100 4315.110 – 

3000 1 – – 4315.150 

Through-wiring (with jack and connector) 600 1 – – 4315.450 

Power infeed via connection component/ 

through-wiring (with jack and connector) 


With mounting accessories 


With toggle 

Without connection cable, for TS enclosures with installed large swing 

frame. The toggle is actuated via the tubular door frame of the sheet 

steel door, or in the case of glazed doors, via an adaptor included with 

the supply. 

Connection component with circuit-breaker 10 A 

600 

1000 

5 

4315.400 

4315.200 

4315.410 

4315.210 

– 

– 

4000 1 4315.600 4315.610 – 

Technical 

specifications 

230 V AC, 6 A 

24 V DC, 10 A 

Reduce assembly costs: 

Power is supplied rapidly and reliably to system lights and workstation via connection cables. 

For independently configured cables, connector SZ 2507.200 must be used. 

Connection component to be snapped onto the top hat rail. 

UL 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. SZ 

orange yellow 

With connection cable 

600 

1000 1 

4315.500 

4315.300 

4315.510 

4315.310 

Without connection cable – 4127.000 


Model No. FR 

Mounting kit for installation in TE 

7952.100 

1 

2 

1 

2 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

SZ 

1 4127.200 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

SZ 

1 2507.500 

For self-assembly Packs of Model No. SZ 

Sockets for power supply Through-wiring 

2507.100 

Connectors for connection component Through-wiring 

T distributor with 2 sockets, 1 connector 

5 

2507.200 

2507.300 

Connector for door operated switch cable 2507.400


Earth straps 

For configuring a reliable earthing connection with 

perfect contact. 

● With ring terminals in M6 and M8 to match the 

earthing screw. 

● Length-optimised and ready to install. 

For 

KL, EB, 

Door/lid Enclosure 

AE 1032.XXX, 

AE 1035.XXX 

M6 M6 

AE, AP M6 M8 

TS, ES, PC, 

AP universal console, KE 

M8 M8 

Earthing strap 

Tin-plated copper, in various lengths and crosssections 

with press-fitted contact rings. Earthing 

straps counteract the current displacement effect 

at high frequencies, whilst at the same time offering 

highly flexible connection opportunities. 

Assembly parts 

For fastening the earth straps and earthing braids 

to: 

● Horizontal TS enclosure sections 

● RS rail system 

● ES system punchings 

Contact washers 

Toothed contact washers facilitate secure PE 

conductor connection. As a result, there is no 

need to manually strip paint in the connection 

area. 


Connection 

Crosssection 

mm 2 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Earthing 

Model No. 

SZ 

M8 – M8 4 170 5 2564.000 

M6 – M8 4 170 5 2564.010 

M6 – M6 4 170 5 2564.020 

M8 – M8 16 170 5 2565.000 

M8 – M8 25 170 5 2566.000 

M6 – M6 10 200 5 2565.100 

M8 – M8 4 300 5 2567.000 

M6 – M8 10 300 5 2565.110 

M8 – M8 10 300 5 2565.120 

M8 – M8 16 300 5 2568.000 

M8 – M8 25 300 5 2569.000 

For 

Crosssection 

mm 2 

Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

SZ 

M6 10 200 10 2412.210 

M8 16 200 10 2412.216 

M8 25 200 10 2412.225 

M6 10 300 10 2412.310 

M8 16 300 10 2412.316 

M8 25 300 10 2412.325 

Size Packs of Model No. SZ 

M6 10 set 2570.000 

M8 10 set 2559.000 


For mounting on the horizontal TS enclosure 

section: 

Captive nut, 

see page 314. 

Size Packs of Model No. SZ 

M5 100 2343.000 

M6 100 2334.000 

M8 100 2335.000 

337 

Earthing

Earthing 


Earthing 

Central earthing point 

For connecting 

● Earth straps 

● Earthing braids 

to the vertical and horizontal enclosure profile. 

The connection bracket is connected to the 

enclosure frame with 2 screws and is securely 

contacted. 

Earth connection is carried out via the threaded 

bolt M8 x 20 mm. 

Material: 



1 connection bracket, 

2 screws 5.5 x 13 mm, 

2 serrated washers, 

1 nut M8, 

1 contact washer M8, 

1 washer. 

Potential equalisation star 

for 8 mm earthing bolt 

The earthing connector is used for simple 

potential equalisation on an 8 mm earthing bolt, 

or in conjunction with central earthing point 

DK 7829.200. Up to five flat connectors (6.3 mm) 

may be contacted on one earthing point. 

Earthing plate 

For installation in: 

● Command Panel 

● VIP 6000 

● Optipanel 

● TS 

● ES 

One earthing cable can be screw-fastened to the 

threaded bolt and can be distributed to up to 

8 components via 6.3 mm flat-pin connectors. 



Earth rail, horizontal 

for TS, FR(i) 

Potential equalisation rail 

Current carrying capacity approx. 200 A. 


Earth rail made from E-Cu 57 to DIN EN 12 163, 

DIN EN 13 601, 15 x 5 mm, 

20 connection points with M5 screws, 

2 earth connections 25 mm2 , 

2 isolators, including assembly parts. 


1 7829.200 


10 7548.210 


10 earthing connectors, including assembly parts. 


1 2570.500 

Length mm Packs of Model No. DK 

450 1 7113.000 



Complete earthing kit 

for DK-TS 

To DIN EN 60 950/VDE 0805, Ø 4 mm 2 , Imax. 40 A. 

For system-compatible earthing of all enclosure 

parts on the enclosure frame according to VDE. 

The earth conductors are pre-assembled ready 

for connection with connectors and cut to the right 

length. 



Complete earthing kit 

for TE 

To DIN EN 60 950/VDE 0805, Ø 4 mm 2 , Imax. 40 A. 

For system-compatible earthing of all enclosure 

parts on the enclosure frame according to VDE. 

The earth conductors are pre-assembled ready 

for connection with connectors and cut to the right 

length. 



Earthing kit 

for TC Rack 

To DIN EN 60 950/VDE 0805, Imax. 40 A. 

For star earthing. With the pre-assembled earth 

conductors, star potential equalisation is easily 

integrated. 


Earthing leads 6 mm 2 , 

assembly parts for earthing leads, 

earth rail. 

Earthing kit 

for QuickBox 

Earth straps in the appropriate lengths to match 

the enclosure depth are included in the earthing 

set, for earthing all enclosuore panels on the wall 

mounting part. The earth strap is a fast-on connector 

which is quickly disconnected and conveniently 

accessible when the door is open. 

In this way, the enclosure cover can be removed 

completely. 


5 earth leads, 1.5 mm 2 , 

4 cable retention clips, 



Earthing 


1 set 7829.150 

Packs of Model No. HP 

1 set 7000.675 


1 set 7277.000 

For enclosure depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

300/400 5 

Model No. QB 

7502.240 

500/600 5 7502.260 

339 

Earthing

Earthing 


Earthing 

Earthing kit, pre-assembled 

for DK-TS 

For star earthing. With the pre-assembled earth 

conductors on a potential equalisation rail, star 

potential equalisation is easily integrated into 

network enclosures. 


Earth rail made from E-Cu 57 to DIN 1759, 

earthing leads 6 mm 2 , 

2 isolators, including assembly parts. 

Earth rail, vertical 

for network enclosures 

Potential equalisation rails 

Easily fitted to the 25 mm DIN pitch pattern of 

distributors or to the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles. The supplied earth conductors facilitate 

star earthing of the cable clamp straps in the 

patch panels. 

The earth terminals are fully adjustable. 

Current carrying capacity of rail approx. 200 A. 


Earth rail made from E-Cu 57 to DIN 1759, 

DIN 40 500, 15 x 5 mm, 

16 conductor connection clamps 2.5 – 16 mm2 , 

15 earthing leads 6 mm2 , L = 500 mm, 


Expansion kit 

for earth rail, vertical 

For system-compatible expansion of the star 

earthing on the vertical potential equalisation rail. 


Earthing leads 6 mm 2 , pre-configured, 

with ring terminals and wire end ferrules, 

L = 500 mm, with earth terminals 

2.5 – 16 mm 2 , including assembly parts. 

ESD connection point 

During maintenance or conversion work on the 

enclosure, dangerously high potential differences 

can occur. To protect sensitive electronic components, 

this standardised connection point (pushon 

button) provides potential equalisation. The 

connection point is directly conductively connected 

to the enclosure frame via two screws. 

Material: 




For TS enclosures 

up to W x H x D mm 

Packs of 

Model No. 

DK 

800 x 2000 x 800 1 set 7829.100 

800 x 2200 x 1000 1 set 7829.110 

For 

enclosure 

height mm 


Length 

mm 

Packs of 

Model No. 

DK 

800 600 1 set 7541.000 

1000 800 1 set 7542.000 

1200 1000 1 set 7543.000 

1400 1200 1 set 7544.000 

1600 1400 1 set 7545.000 

1800 1600 1 set 7546.000 

2000 1800 1 set 7547.000 

2200 2000 1 set 7548.000 


10 7549.000 


1 7752.950


Section for cable entry, 

centre 

for TS, CM, FR(i) 

For top-mounting on the gland plates. The better 

alternative to the foam rubber cable clamp strip, 

thanks to: 

● Easier mounting 

● Full-surface support 

● High level of sealing of cables inserted into the 

enclosure 

Material: 


PU foam seal, 

cross-section: 30 x 25 mm 


IP 55 if mounted correctly. 


1 set = 

2 sections for base plate, 

each with bonded seal. 

Section for cable entry, rear 

for TS, CM, FR(i) 

Unlike the section for cable entry, centre, the rear 

section is mounted directly onto the base opening. 

In this way, when installing the mounting plate 

in the rearmost position (TS) or with CM, the 

cables may be routed directly on a cable clamping 

rail with no large radii. 

Material: 


PU foam seal, 




Foam rubber cable clamp strip 

For sealing the cable entry between the gland 

plates. Particularly suitable for identical cable 

cross-sections. 

Material: 

Seal PU foam, 





Cable entry/gland plates 

For 


mm 


600 1 set 8802.060 

800 1 set 8802.080 

1000 2 sets 8802.100 

1200 2 sets 8802.120 

Y 

129.5 

24.5 

30 x 25 

Y = Mounting plate depth-adjustable on a 

25 mm pitch pattern (final pitch 30 mm). 

For 


mm 


600 1 set 8802.065 

800 1 set 8802.085 

1000 2 sets 8802.105 

1200 2 sets 8802.125 


1 set = 

1 section for base opening, 

1 section for base plate, 

each with bonded seal. 

5 

25.5 


3 m 2573.000 

341 

Cable entry/gland plates

Gland plates 


Gland plates 

Size 1 

7 

70 

56 

Size 4 

8 

149 

133 

342 

25 

49.5 

160 

110 

120 

339 

120 

Plastic gland plates 

With pre-punched PG holes for cable glands. 

Used for sealing standard gland plates. 

Temperature range: 

suitable for use from –40°C to +70°C. 

Material: 

SZ 2560.000, SZ 2561.000 = PS 

SZ 2562.000 = ABS 

SZ 2563.000 = Polyamide, glass bead reinforced 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Size 3 

75 7.5 

90 

Size 5 

8 

149 

133 

45 120 

330 

120 

530 

45 110 110 110 110 

Pg 11 

Pg 13.5 

Pg 16 

Pg 21 

Pg 29 

Pg 36 


for KL and small fibre-optic distributors based 

on AE 

With pre-punched PG holes for cable glands. 

Used for sealing standard gland plates. 

Temperature range: 

suitable for use from –40°C to +70°C. 

Material: 

ABS 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Size For 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

SZ 

1 AE 1032.500, AE 1035.500 10 2560.000 

3 

AE 1030.500, AE 1031.500, 

AE 1038.500, AE 1380.500 

10 2561.000 

4 

5 

AE 1045.500, AE 1050.500, 

AE 1057.500, AE 1100.500, 

AE 1110.500, AE 1114.500, 

AE 1130.500, AE 1213.500, 

AE 1338.500, AE 1350.500, 

CS 9751.125, CS 9751.145, 

CS 9751.165, CS 9752.125, 

CS 9775.100, CS 9775.200, 

CS 9775.300, CS 9775.400 

AE 1039.500, AE 1058.500, 

AE 1060.500, AE 1073.500, 

AE 1076.500, AE 1077.500, 

AE 1090.500, AE 1180.500, 

AE 1260.500, AE 1280.500, 

AE 1339.500, AE 1360.500, 

AE 1376.500, AE 1919.500, 

EL 1920.500, EL 1926.500, 

DK 7011.535, DK 7012.535, 

DK 7013.535, DK 7014.535, 

DK 7641.000, DK 7643.000, 

DK 7644.000, DK 7645.000 

5 2562.000 

5 2563.000 

Size PG Number of Packs of Model No. KL 

2 

90 

72 

13.5 12 5 1581.000 

13.5 

16 

21 

6 

2 

2 

KL 1581.000 

Ø 5 

5 1582.000 

PG PG PG PG PG 

13.5 21 16 13.5 13.5 

PG 

13.5 

PG 

13.5 

KL 1582.000 

PG 

13.5 

PG 

16 

220 

202 

PG 

21 

PG 

13.5 

76 

Rittal IT catalogue/System accessories

Size 3 Size 4 

45 

7.5 

Size 5 

120 

Ø 7.2 

330 

120 

75 

90 

534 

47 110 110 110 110 

8 

Ø 7.2 



with membranes 

for AE, EL, DK, CS 

Simply pierce the plastic with a sharp object, 

and pull through the cable. 

Material: 

Plastic to UL 94-V2 

Colour: 



IP 65 with careful cable entry. 

49.5 120 

Ø 7.2 

8 

133 

149 

339 

120 

133 

149 


Size For 

3 

4 

5 

AE 1030.500, AE 1031.500, 

AE 1038.500, AE 1380.500 

AE 1045.500, AE 1050.500, 

AE 1057.500, AE 1100.500, 

AE 1110.500, AE 1114.500, 

AE 1130.500, AE 1213.500, 

AE 1338.500, AE 1350.500, 

CS 9751.125, CS 9751.145, 

CS 9751.165, CS 9752.125, 

CS 9775.100, CS 9775.200, 

CS 9775.300, CS 9775.400 

AE 1039.500, AE 1058.500, 

AE 1060.500, AE 1073.500, 

AE 1076.500, AE 1077.500, 

AE 1090.500, AE 1180.500, 

AE 1260.500, AE 1280.500, 

AE 1339.500, AE 1360.500, 

AE 1376.500, EL 1919.500, 

EL 1920.500, EL 1926.500, 

DK 7011.535, DK 7012.535, 

DK 7013.535, DK 7014.535, 

DK 7641.000, DK 7643.000, 

DK 7644.000, DK 7645.000 

Diameter 

mm 

Gland plates 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

SZ 

1 2561.500 

1 2562.500 

1 2563.500 

Number of cable entries for 

Model No. SZ 

2561.500 2562.500 2563.500 

5 – 9 – – 18 

6 – 11 17 – – 

7 – 12 – 24 16 

10 – 15 27 48 36 

15 – 21 2 4 – 

15 – 24 – – 6 

15 – 25 – 8 – 

16 – 25 4 – – 

19 – 34 2 – – 

23 – 30 – – 2 

26 – 35 – 4 2 

26 – 54 – – 4 

50 – 110 – – 1 

343 

Gland plates

Gland plates 


Gland plates 

344 

Metal gland plates 

pre-punched 

for KL, AE, EL, DK, CS 

Simply knock out the holes for the cable glands 

using a screwdriver. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 66 when mounting in the usual bottom position. 

Size 2 Size 3 

9 

90 

72 

9.5 

221 

101 101 

7 

76 

Size For 

2 

3 

4 

5 

KL 1530.510, KL 1531.510, 

KL 1532.510, KL 1533.510, 

KL 1534.510, KL 1535.510, 

KL 1536.510, KL 1537.510, 

KL 1538.510, KL 1539.510, 

KL 1540.510, KL 1541.510, 

KL 1542.510 

AE 1030.500, AE 1031.500, 

AE 1038.500, AE 1380.500 

AE 1045.500, AE 1050.500, 

AE 1057.500, AE 1100.500, 

AE 1110.500, AE 1114.500, 

AE 1130.500, AE 1213.500, 

AE 1338.500, AE 1350.500, 

CS 9751.125, CS 9751.145, 

CS 9751.165, CS 9752.125, 

CS 9775.100, CS 9775.200, 

CS 9775.300, CS 9775.400 

AE 1039.500, AE 1058.500, 

AE 1060.500, AE 1073.500, 

AE 1076.500, AE 1077.500, 

AE 1090.500, AE 1180.500, 

AE 1260.500, AE 1280.500, 

AE 1339.500, AE 1360.500, 

AE 1376.500, EL 1919.500, 

EL 1920.500, EL 1926.500, 

DK 7011.535, DK 7012.535, 

DK 7013.535, DK 7014.535, 

DK 7641.000, DK 7643.000, 

DK 7644.000, DK 7645.000 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

SZ 

1 1581.100 

1 2561.100 

1 2562.100 

1 2563.100 

Accessories: 

Cable glands made from polyamide or brass, 

see page 348. 

90 

75 7.5 

Size 4 Size 5 

8 

149 

133 

339 

49.5 120 

120 

45 

120 

330 

7.5 315 

8 323 8 

518 

149 

133 8 

Diameter 

Number of cable entries for 

Model No. SZ 

1581.100 2561.100 2562.100 2563.100 

M12 – – – 1 

M16 – – 2 – 

M20 12 9 5 12 

M25 – 4 13 11 

M32 – 2 2 8 

M40 – – 2 4 

47 

110 

120 

110 

534 

110 

110 


16.5 

Size Design For 

16.5 

3 

160 

133 

SZ 2561.400 

330 

303 

SZ 2562.400 

SZ 2563.150 

IN 2203.010 

SZ 2560.400 

339 

303 

534 

500 

534 

500 


43 

70 

Metal gland plates 

for AE, EL, DK, CS, IN 

As a spare/replacement part for gland plates 

supplied loose as standard, or for first-time 

installation of RiLAN industrial distributors. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 66 when mounting in the usual bottom position. 

63 

90 

113 

149 

36 33 33 33 

Ø 20.5 = 27x 

1 

69 

1 

1 

113 

149 

113 

149 

1 

1 

16.5 

3 

33 

33 

IN 2203.020 

36 33 33 

IN 2207.010 

IN 2207.020 


Gland plates 

Accessories: 

Cable glands made from polyamide or brass, 

see page 348. 

Rittal service: 

Cut-outs according to customer specifications. 

534 

500 

Ø 20.5 = 27x 

555 

527 

555 

46.5 33 33 33 

IN 2207.030 

46.5 33 33 

1 

555 

Ø 20.5 = 27x 

Ø 20.5 = 27x 

Knockout Ø M20 

Cable gland Ø M20 

Area available for population 

33 

33 

69 

79.5 

79.5 

113 

149 

64 

92 

92 

92 

Packs 

of 

1 

29 

1 

29 

Model No. 

SZ/IN 

1 Solid AE 1032.500, AE 1035.500 1 2560.400 

3 Solid AE 1030.500, AE 1031.500, AE 1038.500, AE 1380.500 

AE 1045.500, AE 1050.500, AE 1057.500, AE 1100.500, AE 1110.500, AE 1114.500, 

1 2561.400 

4 Solid 

AE 1130.500, AE 1213.500, AE 1338.500, AE 1350.500, CS 9751.125, CS 9751.145, 

CS 9751.165, CS 9752.125, CS 9775.100, CS 9775.200, CS 9775.300, CS 9775.400 

1 2562.400 

Solid AE 1039.500, AE 1058.500, AE 1060.500, AE 1073.500, AE 1076.500, AE 1077.500, 

5 

AE 1090.500, AE 1180.500, AE 1260.500, AE 1280.500, AE 1339.500, AE 1360.500, 

AE 1376.500, EL 1919.500, EL 1920.500, EL 1926.500, DK 7011.535, DK 7012.535, 

DK 7013.535, DK 7014.535, DK 7641.000, DK 7643.000, DK 7644.000, DK 7645.000, 

IN 1076.2901) 1 2563.150 

Pre-punched 27 x M20 

With 

27 cable glands M20 

1 

1 

2203.010 

2203.0202) Solid 

– 

IN 1510.2801) 1 2207.010 

Pre-punched 27 x M20 

With 

27 cable glands M20 

, BG 1559.510 

1 

1 

2207.020 

2207.0302) 1) Enclosure without gland plate as standard. 

2) Any cable glands that are not required must be sealed with sealing bungs SZ 2411.532 (see Innovations 2005/2006, page 189). 

1.5 

8.5 

1.5 

345 

Gland plates

Gland plates 


Gland plates 

346 

Gland plate 

solid, for QuickBox 

To conceal the cable entry openings. In exchange 

for the brush strip at the top and bottom that is 

used as standard. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Gland plate 

for metric cable glands, for EL 

Folded gland plate with foamed-in seal and prepunched, 

knock-out holes for metric cable glands 

M12, M20, M25, M32, M40. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 55 as per EN 60 529/10.91 

Gland plate 

solid, for EL 

Folded gland plate for the basic box, with 

foamed-in seal. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Gland plate 

with brush insert, for EL 

Folded gland plate with foamed-in seal and 

plastic brush inserts for simple cable entry. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 

133.5 

133.5 

40 

133.5 19 


2 7502.310 


1 7705.235 

27 

20.5 

(7 x) 

40.5 

(2 x) 

599 

599 

12.5 

(4 x) 

32.5 

(2 x) 

28 

25.5 

(5 x) 


1 2235.135 


1 7705.035 

390 

599 


19 

19


Gland plate 

for PG segments, for EL 

Folded gland plate with foamed-in seal and 

cut-outs for PG segments. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 

PG segments 

for EL 

Plastic segments with pre-punched, knock-out 

holes for cable glands. 

Suitable for retrospective screw-fastening to gland 

plate EL 2235.005. 

Material: 

ABS, self-extinguishing to UL 94-V0 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

EL 

2235.015 

EL 

2235.025 

EL 

2235.035 

EL 

2235.045 

Brush strip 

For individual installation of enclosure panels, 

gland plates and panels. Cut-outs for cable 

routing at any given positions in the side panel, 

rear panel, doors, roof and gland plate may be 

finished off attractively by simply attaching the 

brush strip. 

Edge protector 

For covering sharp edges of cut-outs. Provides 

protection from injuries and prevents damage to 

inserted cables. The edge protector is suitable 

for material thicknesses of approx. 1.0 – 2.0 mm, 

and may be cut to length individually. 

Material: 

Plastic PVC 

Colour: 

Black 

133.5 


65 

EL 

2235.055 

59 79 

4 x 79 = 316 

599 

Gland plates 


1 2235.005 

PG sizes Packs of Model No. EL 

29 5 2235.015 

21 5 2235.025 

21/11 5 2235.035 

16 5 2235.045 

16/13.5 5 2235.055 

13.5 5 2235.065 

11 5 2235.075 

neutral 5 2235.085 

EL 

2235.065 


Bristle length: 30 mm 

Plastic sheathing: 18 mm 

Snap-on surface: 10 mm 

Maximum cut-out height: 38 mm 

EL 

2235.075 


2 m 7072.200 


10 m 7072.100 

19 

EL 

2235.085 

347 

Gland plates

Cable gland 


Cable gland 

348 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

Cable gland, brass 

Benefits: 

● Because the gland and lock nut are sold 

together in a single pack, this saves additional 

ordering work and storage locations. 

● Clamping membranes for even tightening and 

strain relief which protects the cables. 

● Insulation via plastic insert. 

● Optimum seal on the connection thread, thanks 

to O-ring. 

● The lock nut cuts automatically into the sprayfinish, 

thereby creating a conductive connection. 

1 Cap nut 

2 Neoprene seal 

3 Plastic insert 

4 O-ring 

5 Lock nut 

Cable gland, polyamide 

Benefits: 

● Because the gland and lock nut are sold 

together in a single pack, this saves additional 

ordering work and storage locations. 

● Clamping membranes for even tightening and 

strain relief which protects the cables. 

● Spray-moulded sealing lip ensures an optimum 

seal against the enclosure. 

● Trapezoid thread for secure screw-fastening of 

the cap nut. 

1 Cap nut 

2 Neoprene seal 

3 Trapezoid thread 

4 Sealing lip 

5 Lock nut 

Size 

Cable 

diameter 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Material: 

Nickel-plated brass, neoprene seal 


IP 68 (5 bar, 30 min.) to EN 60 529/10.91 

IP 69K to DIN 40 050-9/5.93 

Approval: 

VDE tested to EN 50 262 

Model No. SZ 

M12 x 1.5 3 – 6.5 15 2411.800 

M16 x 1.5 4.5 – 10 15 2411.810 

M20 x 1.5 6 – 12 10 2411.820 

M25 x 1.5 11 – 17 10 2411.830 

M32 x 1.5 15 – 21 5 2411.840 

M40 x 1.5 19 – 28 4 2411.850 

M50 x 1.5 27 – 38 2 2411.860 

M63 x 1.5 34 – 44 1 2411.870 

Size 

Cable 

diameter 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Material: 

Polyamide 6, neoprene seal 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


IP 68 (5 bar, 30 min.) to EN 60 529/10.91 

IP 69K to DIN 40 050-9/5.93 

(except SZ 2411.660 and SZ 2411.670) 

Approval: 

CSA for USA and Canada 

Model No. SZ 

M12 x 1.5 3 – 6.5 50 2411.600 

M16 x 1.5 4.5 – 10 50 2411.610 

M20 x 1.5 6 – 12 50 2411.620 

M25 x 1.5 11 – 17 25 2411.630 

M32 x 1.5 15 – 21 15 2411.640 

M40 x 1.5 19 – 28 5 2411.650 

M50 x 1.5 27 – 38 5 2411.660 

M63 x 1.5 34 – 44 3 2411.670 



Multi-seal inserts 

For the secure entry of several individual cables 

into a single cable gland. 

Material: 

Neoprene 

Stoppers 

For the reliable sealing of unused cable entries. 

Simply insert into the multi-seal inserts instead of 

a cable, and clamp via the cable gland. 

length 14 mm. 

Material: 

Polyamide 6 

Double-membrane gland 

For wall thicknesses from 1.5 to 4.5 mm 

A high protection category can be achieved with 

cable entry, thanks to the double seal. 

Material: 

Plastic to UL 94-HB 



Stepped collar 

For wall thicknesses from 1.5 to 4.5 mm 

For cable entry, simply cut off at the required level 

to match the cable diameter. 

Material: 

Plastic to UL 94-HB 



Connector gland 

For connector cut-outs (24-pole) 

For the entry of 2 pre-assembled cables in the 

connector cut-out, without dismantling the connector. 

For cable diameter from 8 – 36 mm. 


Size 

M20 

M25 

M32 

Cable 

diameter 

mm 

Number of 

cables 

Cable gland 


3 4 25 2411.500 

4 3 25 2411.501 

5 3 25 2411.502 

6 2 25 2411.503 

3 7 25 2411.504 

4 6 25 2411.505 

5 4 25 2411.506 

6 3 25 2411.507 

3 9 25 2411.508 

4 9 25 2411.509 

5 6 25 2411.510 

6 6 25 2411.511 

Diameter 

mm 


3 25 2411.520 

4 25 2411.521 

5 25 2411.522 

6 25 2411.523 

For 

hole 

Sealing range 

mm 

Packs of 

Model No. 

SZ 

M16 5 – 9 50 2898.160 

M20 7 – 12 50 2898.200 

M25 9 – 16 50 2898.250 

M32 14 – 21 25 2898.320 

For 

hole 

Sealing range 

mm 

Packs of 

Model No. 

SZ 

M20 5 – 16 100 2899.200 

M25 5 – 21 50 2899.250 

M32 13 – 26.5 25 2899.320 

M40 13 – 34 20 2899.400 


1 set 2400.000 

Material: 

Plastic 

Clamp terminals: Sheet steel, zinc-plated, 

passivated 


1 set = 

2 half-shells, including seals, 

with fastening clamp. 

349 

Cable gland

Cable routing 


Cable routing 

2 

1600/1800 

1550 = 62 x 25/1750 = 70 x 25 

50 

25 

100 

8 

5 

6.5 

14 

Cable duct 

for vertical TS profile 

For direct mounting on the vertical enclosure 

section. 

Width 50 mm, 

For assembly on a vertical enclosure section in 

the area of the side panel. 

Width 100 mm, 

For assembly on two bayed enclosure profiles in 

the baying area. Baying brackets and baying 

clamps which have already been fitted can be 

covered over with the cable duct. 

The nominal break points of the members are also 

oriented towards combination with the cable 

ducts for mounting plates; in addition a further 

nominal break at the level of the mounting plate 

enables direct insertion into the cable duct. 

The cable duct fastening points are co-ordinated 

with the TS system hole pattern; elaborate drilling, 

as in the case of DIN ducts, is dispensed 

with. 

5.5 

4.5 

1600/1800 

1550 = 62 x 25/1750 = 70 x 25 

50 

25 

48 


Depth: 80 mm 

Length: 

● 1600 mm (for enclosure height 1800 mm) 

● 1800 mm (for enclosure height 2000 mm) 

can be shortened for other enclosure sizes. 

Member width: 5.5 mm 

Slot width: 4.5 mm 

Material: 

Hard PVC, hardly inflammable, 

self-extinguishing, 

temperature-resistant to +60°C. 

Colour: 



1 set = 

1 cable duct with cover. 

Accessories: 

Aluminium rivet for attachment, 

see page 351. 

Plastic rivet for attachment, 

see page 351. 


1 

72 

14 

6.5 

5 

8 

71 

5.5 

4.5 

Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 


50 1600 8 sets 8800.570 

50 1800 8 sets 8800.520 

100 1600 4 sets 8800.540 

100 1800 4 sets 8800.510 

1 TS 8800.570/TS 8800.520 

2 

TS 8800.540/TS 8800.510


Aluminium rivet 

For secure assembly of cable ducts in conformity 

with the relevant standards. Also suitable for 

mounting support rails and punched rails. Simple 

mounting using hand-held rivet tool TS 8800.532. 

To fit: 

● TS system punchings 

● Drilled hole Ø 4.5 mm. 

Hand-held rivet tool 

for aluminium rivets 

Reaches even poorly accessible rivet points in 

narrow or deep cable trunking. In conformity with 

the standard, the aluminium rivets are made without 

burrs, sharp edges or rough surfaces. 

Plastic rivet 

Easily mounted with a standard commercially 

available blind rivet tool. 

For fastening the cable ducts in the 

● TS system punchings 

● Drilled hole Ø 4.0 mm 

C rails 

may be found under rail systems 



see page 354. 


Accessories: 

Cable ducts for vertical TS section, 

see page 350. 

Cable ducts for mounting plate, 


Cable routing 


100 8800.531 


1 8800.532 


100 8800.530 

351 

Cable routing

Cable routing 


Cable routing 


for QB 

For cable clamping and routing. 

Cables and leads can be fastened to the hammer 

heads top and bottom with cable ties. In addition, 

the C section of the combination rail will accommodate 

cable clamps with inserts. For producing 

a contacting connection, the anodised coating of 

the rail must be broken. 

Material: 

Aluminium, anodised 



Cascade cable routing 


for TS, FR(i) 

Professional cable routing system for cascading 

of cables in several levels of the enclosure depth. 

The cables are attached to the C rail by means of 

clamps. Suitable for installation on the inner enclosure 

level. 

Material: 



6 mounting brackets and 3 C rails, 


Cable clamps 

for C rails 

For attaching the cables to the C rails. 

Material: 



Plastic insert. 

For 


mm 

Accessories: 

Cable ties, 

see page 353. 

Cable clamps, 

see page 352. 


Length 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. QB 

300/400 200 6 7502.302 

500/600 400 6 7502.304 

For 


mm 

Length 

mm 


600 400 6 7502.304 

For 


mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

600 3 7831.570 

800 3 7831.571 

Accessories: 

TS punched section with mounting flange for 

the inner attachment level, 

see page 299. 

PS punched section without mounting flange for 

vertical mounting in the enclosure frame, 

see page 304. 

Cable clamps, 

see page 352. 

For 

cable diameter 

mm 

Accessories: 

C rails, 

see page 306. 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

6 – 14 25 7077.000 

12 – 18 25 7078.000 

18 – 22 25 7097.000 

22 – 26 25 7097.220 

26 – 30 25 7097.260 

30 – 34 25 7097.300 

34 – 38 25 7097.340 

38 – 42 25 7098.000 

42 – 56 25 7098.100 

56 – 64 25 7099.000


Cable fastening 

For professional, secure fastening of cables and 

conduits. 

For fastening: 

● Slide into the mounting rail 23 x 23 mm, 

● screw-fasten onto the round punchings of the 

enclosures, as well as all punched rails and 

punched sections. 

As the fastening attachments are bayable, several 

fastening attachments, even those of different 

sizes, can be assembled using just 2 screws. 

Material: 

Polyamide 

Cable ties 

The super-fast solution for fastening cables to the 

enclosure profile or mounting system parts. 

Simply clip into the round system punchings. 

Nylon loop 

With the nylon loop, secured cables are easily 

released, allowing individual cables to be added 

or removed. Ideal for sensitive data cables (fibreoptic/Cu), 

as it avoids indentations on the cable 

sheathing. 

In addition, the nylon loop may be screw-fastened 

to the round system punchings or attached using 

a quick-release fastener. 

Colour: 

Black 


Nylon loop and quick-release fastener. 


For 

cable diameter 

from – to 

mm 

Cable routing 


Posidrive raised countersunk screw M5 x 12 mm, 

SZ 2488.000, for screw-fastening to the round 

system punchings, 

see page 315. 

Accessories: 

Punched rail 23 x 23 mm, 

see page 304. 

Width 

mm 


6 – 9 50 4319.090 

9 – 12 50 4319.120 

12 – 16 50 4319.160 

16 – 20 50 4319.200 

Length 

mm 


150 100 2597.000 

Length 

mm 

Max. cable 

diameter mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

20 130 30 10 7072.220 

20 200 50 10 7072.230 

20 300 90 10 7072.240 


Screw SZ 2486.500 for screw-fastening to the 

round system punchings, 

see page 315. 

353 

Cable routing

Cable routing 


Cable routing 

Cable tie fastener 

for round system punchings 

For all commercially available cable ties up to a 

tie width of 4.8 mm. 

Simply insert into the round system punchings or 

into the screw channel, and secure by hammering 

down the split rivet. 

Material: 

Polyamide 6.6 


for TS and 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames 

The cables may be attached to the cable clamp 

rails with cable ties or nylon tapes. The cable 

clamp rails are simply located onto the frame section 

and may additionally be secured with a 

screw. 

Material: 




Accessories: 

Cable ties, see page 353. 

Nylon loop, see page 353. 

Cable clamp rails, 


for TS and 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames 

For strain relief of the routed cables. The cables 

may be attached to the cable clamp rails with 

cable ties or nylon tapes. 

The cable clamp rails may be located directly on 

a 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame horizontally at 

the rear or in the enclosure depth between two 

mounting frames. An additional screw-fastening 

secures the unit. 

The depth variability of the rails facilitates flexible 

adaptation of their length to the existing attachment 

distance between the two 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frames. 

Material: 




Packs of Model No. CP 

100 6059.000 




Packs of 

Model No. 

DK 

600 600 4 7828.061 

800 800 4 7828.081 

900 900 4 7828.091 

1000 1000 4 7828.101 

1200 1200 4 7828.121 

For the outer mounting level 



Packs of 

Model No. 

DK 

600 600 4 7828.062 

800 800 4 7828.082 

900 900 4 7828.092 

1000 1000 4 7828.102 

1200 1200 4 7828.122 

Distance between 

19″ levels 

mm 


325 – 575 4 7858.160 

500 – 895 4 7858.162 

Accessories: 

Cable ties, 

see page 353. 

Nylon loop, 

see page 353. 



Shunting ring, plastic 

For flexible cable routing, in two materials and 

three size variants. 

Option of mounting to the 482.6 mm (19″) enclosure 

and swing frame profile of the data distributor, 

to the system strips of FM distribution enclosures, 

to all patch panels, to the Rittal Data Rack 

and all components on a 25 mm DIN pitch pattern. 

Polyamide version: 

Infinitely variable mounting thanks to a longitudinal 

slot. The shunting ring DK 7218.035 may also 

be used on 1 U patch panels. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Polycarbonate version: 

Variable mounting. With 45° attachment the cable 

shunting ring may be attached to a 1 U panel. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Cable shunting ring 

For flexible, system-compatible cable routing at 

the side of the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame. 


Cable routing 

Material 

Dimensions 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

Polyamide 70 x 44 10 7218.0351) Polyamide 105 x 70 10 7219.0351) Polycarbonate 95 x 50 10 7228.035 

1) German patent no. 44 13 124 

Possible 

alternative: 

Cable management panel, 1 U 

see page 361. 

External dimensions 

mm 

Packs 

of 

125 x 85 10 

Model No. DK 

7111.900 

125 x 65 10 7111.000 

Material: 


85 x 43 10 7112.000 


Assembly parts. German patent no. 38 13 002 

Shunting ring 

To accommodate large quantities of cables. 

Shunting ring for side attachment to 482.6 mm 

(19″) sections and mounting frames in 800 mm 

wide network enclosures. The ring is attached 

asymmetrically providing approx. 110 mm free 

space in front of the 482.6 mm (19″) level. 

In this way, even large quantities of cables can 

be effectively managed. 

Material: 

Round steel, zinc-plated, passivated 



Dimensions 

mm 

Packs 

of 

330 x 90 4 

Model No. DK 

7220.600 

355 

Cable routing

Cable routing 


Cable routing 

1 2 

3 4 

Cable clamp straps 

for patch panels 

To provide strain relief of incoming or outgoing 

data cables. Optionally available with spring 

brackets for accommodating and contacting the 

cable screen. Connection to the patch panel is by 

means of bolts on the panel itself. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 2 mm, zinc-plated, passivated 



Fibre-optic shunting rings 

The inner body is grooved, and fibre-optic shunting 

or jumper cables can be inserted into these. 

A rubber ring holds different fibre-optic cables 

with diameters of up to 4.5 mm. Strain relief and 

bending radius are ensured. 


Material: 

Dual compound plastic 

Colour: 

Outside: RAL 7035 

Inner body: Black 


2 shunting rings, 

2 rubber rings, 

baying kit, 


Assembly: 

The supplied mouting brackets are suitable for 

universal use; the fibre-optic cables can be routed 

to the patch panel in all directions in various 

mounting positions: 

1 At the side, directly on the patch panel 

2 In front of the patch panel 

3 At the side next to the patch panel 

4 Behind the patch panel 

Cable route 

for TS 

For cable routing between two 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting angles in bayed enclosure suites 

(enclosure width 800 mm, mounting angles fitted 

centrally). Suitable for L-shaped and cranked 


Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 




Without 

cable screen contact 

7610.000 

With spring clips 

for contacting the cable screen 

7611.000 


2 7116.500 



Possible 

alternative: 

Fibre-optic cable management panel, 1 U, 

see page 363. 


1 7827.050 



Surplus cable holder 

For fastening at the rear area of the enclosure, or 

at the side of network enclosures. The surplus 

cable holder can be attached to all depth stays or 

to punched sections and rails with a 25 mm pitch 

pattern – mounting dimension 150 mm. Units may 

also be fastened to each other. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Cable management duct 

for TS 

For side cable routing. The cable management 

duct is attached to 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles at the sides of the 800 mm wide TS 

network enclosure. For this purpose, the mounting 

angles must be mounted on installation 

brackets. Thanks to the removable front trim panel 

equipped with quick-release fasteners, cables 

can also be retrospectively removed or added. 

Dimensions: 

W x D: 95 x 94 mm 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 



Cable routing components 

for FR (i) 

For snap-fastening into the vertical frame channel. 

Type 1: 

With horizontal bar for attaching the cables in the 

frame channel. 

Type 2: 

Additionally with semi-circular bead for kink-free 

cable entry and exit. 


Cable routing 

W x H x D 

mm 

Model No. DK 

280 x 151 x 75 7220.500 

U 

For 


mm 

Model No. DK 

31 1600 7827.333 

36 1800 7827.338 

40 2000 7827.342 

45 2200 7827.347 


Installation brackets TS for mounting angles, 

see page 369. 

Material: 

Polycarbonate 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


1 10 7218.100 

2 10 7218.105 

357 

Cable routing

Cable routing 


Cable routing 

Extension kit 

horizontal cable mangement 

for FR(i) 

Allows the enclosure frame to be extended in the 

depth by approximately 100 mm. The space 

thereby acquired may be used for horizontal 

cable management between bayed enclosures. 

Material: 



1 set = 

8 spacer supports, including assembly parts. 

Mounting/cable management 

panel 

for QB 3 U, 6 U with vertical 482.6 mm (19″) 

level 

For structured cable routing or for mounting small 

components or distributors (such as hubs, 

switches etc.). The cable management panel is 

easily fitted in the front of the rear panel from the 

front. 

Material: 




Cable route 

Universal cable tray. Ideal for network enclosures 

with large quantities of cable. 

Extension kit 

Packs of Model No. FR 

1 set 7856.740 

Note: 

Combination of the extension kit with divided 

doors is not possible. 

Trim panels 

Enclosure height mm Packs of Model No. FR 

2000 2 7856.743 

2200 2 7856.746 

Note: 

Upon request, trim panels may be inserted on the 

outer sides of the bayed enclosure suites to protect 

the enclosures against unauthorised access. 

Width mm Length mm Packs of Model No. QB 

485 450 1 7502.270 

Accessories: 



Width mm Length mm Packs of Model No. DK 

150 1700 1 7858.150 

200 1700 1 7858.152 

Material: 



300 1700 1 7858.154 

Assembly parts. Accessories: 


see page 299. 





System supports 

for cable routes 

for TS, FR(i) 

The depth-variable support system may be 

attached to all 800 – 1200 mm deep enclosures 

and all FR(i) enclosures with external screwfastening 

of the roof plate. The integral system 

punchings, for screws or captive nuts, support the 

attachment of most common cable route systems. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 



Cable route 

on the mounting frame 

The mounting kit facilitates rear, side attachment 

of a cable tray to mounting frames inside enclosure 

systems TE 7000, TS and FR(i). This allows 

the integration of vertical cable management independently 

of the enclosure frame. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Cable glands 

for fibre-optic technology 

The standard sizes PG 7 and PG 13.5 have a 

slotted inner seal. This allows super-easy cable 

entry. Ideal for routing break-out cables, as this 

eliminates unnecessary bending of the fibre-optic 

cables. 

Material: 

Cable gland: brass, nickel-plated 

Inner seal: soft PVC insert 


Accessories: 

Metal multi-tooth screws 

5.5 x 13 mm, SZ 2486.500, 


Captive nuts M6, TS 8800.340, 


Cable routing 


2 7831.472 


1 set 7000.685 




1 cable route 100 mm wide, 1700 mm high, 

including mounting kit. 

Fibre-optic 

cable 

gland 

Cable 

diameter 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

PG 7 3 12 7455.0101) PG 13.5 2 x 3 12 7455.030 


359 

Cable routing

Cable routing 482.6 mm (19)″ 



1 

2 

3 

4 5 

1 

2 

Cable bars 

Material: 

Support: Sheet steel 

Cable routing bars, connection combs: Plastic 

Colour: 

RAL 9005 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

Cable bar, 4 U 

For vertical and horizontal cable routing inside 

the enclosure or within the distributor level. 

Cable bar, 1 U 

For routing individual cable bundles or for 

extending existing units by baying with a 

connection comb. 

Cable bar, cranked, 4 U 

For mounting angles and mounting frames. 

Horizontal, U-based cable routing to the 

distributor level. 

Cable bar, cranked, 1 U 


For routing individual cable bundles or for 

extending existing units by baying with a 

connection comb. 

Connection comb included with the supply. 

Distributor clip 

Material: 




1 

2 

Distributor clip 

For structured cable routing of entire cable 

bundles, the distributor clip may be secured 

to a variety of different positions inside the 

enclosure. It may be used for both horizontal 

and vertical distribution of the cables. 

Distributor clip, horizontal 


Distribution of cables among the various 

height units of the patch level. 

Packs of 

No. of connection 

combs 

Model No. DK 

4 2 7111.222 

10 5 7111.212 

4 2 7111.220 

10 5 7111.210 


1 

2 

3 

4 

1 

2 


4 7111.252 

4 7111.250



482.6 mm (19″) 

For horizontal management of the patch cables 

with 5 cable shunting rings, supplied loose. 

Material: 

Panel: Sheet steel 

Ring: Polyamide 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Material: 


Ring: Polycarbonate 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Material: 


Ring: Sheet steel, zinc-plated, passivated 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Material: 


Ring: Sheet steel, zinc-plated, passivated 

Colour: 

RAL 9005 


482.6 mm (19″) 

The cable routing chamber has cut-outs from 

above, into which the patch cables can be 

inserted. The cable management panel is 

equipped with a flap and quick-release fasteners 

at the front, for optimum access to the cables. 

From the rear, the cables can be inserted via a 

cut-out with brush strips. With accommodation 

facility for cable clamp straps DK 7610.000 or 

DK 7611.000. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 



U Ring size mm Model No. DK 

1 70 x 44 7159.035 


1 95 x 50 7255.035 


1 105 x 43 7257.035 

2 125 x 85 7257.100 


1 105 x 43 7257.005 

2 125 x 85 7257.1051) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

U Depth mm Model No. DK 

2 85 7158.035 

Accessories: 


see page 356. 

361 

Cable routing 482.6 mm (19)″




Cable routing channel 

482.6 mm (19″) 

To hold the patching cables. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


To accommodated fibre-optic and copper cables. 

Fibres from the patch panels are placed into the 

tray via openings and may be distributed at the 

sides. Rounded openings protect the cable 

sheathing. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Cable management duct, 

horizontal 

482.6 mm (19″) 

The duct facilitates concealed, simple cable routing 

of large quantities of cables to equipment 

within the 482.6 mm (19″) attachment level. Large 

cut-outs ensure convenient, kink-free cable routing 

to the cables top and bottom. 

For simple handling, the entire front panel may be 

removed via quick-release fasteners. After attaching 

the cables, these are held in position via nylon 

ties, whilst the duct may be resealed. 

Cable tray, 2 U 

For side routing and distribution of fibre-optic and 

copper cables. In this way, cables inserted into 

the roof area may be routed at the side of the 

mounting angles in the upper section of the rack. 

Depth 85 mm 

U Depth mm Model No. DK 

1 85 7149.135 

3 100 7149.035 

Other versions available on request. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


5 nylon loops. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


2 7269.135 


2 7158.100 

3 7158.150 


2 7269.235 



Fibre-optic cable management 

panel, 1 U 

482.6 mm (19″) 

The four fibre-optic cable shunting rings integrated 

into the front permit optimum management 

of up to 48 fibres. 

Material: 


Ring: Dual compound plastic 

Colour: 

Panel: RAL 7035 

Cable shunting rings on the outside: RAL 7035 

Black interior 

Cable entry panel 

482.6 mm (19″) 

Cut-out 390 x 40 mm (2 U) or 390 x 20 mm (1 U) 

with brush insert. With accommodation facility for 

cable clamp straps DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Cable routing across the 


C rail 

for fastening across all 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles. 


for fastening across all 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles, for cable ties. 

Cable clamp straps for large swing frames, 

and Data Rack, the cable clamp straps are 

mounted on the frame at the rear, whilst the 

cables are clamped 250 mm behind the 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles. 

Cable clamp straps for DK-TS mounting 

angles, with side lugs for suspending from the 

cranked 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles. Cable 

clamping is via cable ties. 

Material: 





1 7256.035 

Possible 

alternative: 

Fibre-optic support guide DK 7116.500, 

see page 356. 


1 7140.535 

2 7150.535 


Accessories: 


see page 356. 

There is a choice of five different cable clamping 

systems for system-compatible cable routing in 

482.6 mm (19″) systems with one or two pairs of 


C rail Depth in mm Model No. DK 

482.6 mm (19″) level – 7016.100 

Cable clamp rail Depth in mm Model No. DK 

482.6 mm (19″) level – 7016.110 

Cable clamp strap for Depth in mm 

Model No. 

DK/FR 

Data Rack and 

large swing frame 

250 7016.120 

DK-TS mounting angles 

Packs of 6 

100 7016.130 


With L-shaped TS mounting angles, adaptor 

DK 7827.300 is additionally required, 

see page 325. 

363 

Cable routing 482.6 mm (19)″




Explanation of the mounting dimensions in interior installations 

Cranked 

section 

A 

B 

C 

L-shaped 

section 

A = Clearance width 

B = Mounting dimension 

C = External dimension of the rack-mounted 

equipment or of the front panels 


482.6 mm (19″) 

for TS, FR(i) 

Mounting frame 

Available in two versions: 

Cranked 

The integral U markings in the front facilitate 

systematic assembly within the 482.6 mm (19″) 

attachment level. 

L-shaped 

The L-shaped mounting angles accommodate the 

installation kits of server systems. The integral U 

markings in the front facilitate systematic assembly 

within the 482.6 mm (19″) attachment level. 


2 mm sheet steel, with integral 482.6 mm (19″) 

punchings and side round and square holes. 

Zinc-plated, passivated for conductive connection 

of the 482.6 mm (19″) installed equipment. 



Explanation of the mounting dimensions in 

interior installations, see page 364. 


482.6 mm (19″) 

for FR(i), width 600 mm 

For the installation of 482.6 mm (19″) components 

in the foremost mounting position. 

The mounting angle may be rotated through 180°, 

so as to create additional free space for cable 

routing in the front section. Side openings allow 

the hollow section of the enclosure frame to continue 

being used for cable routing. 

Material: 






A 

B 

C 

Installation 

A B C 

width 

mm mm mm 

19″ 450 465 482.6 

21″ 500 515 533.4 

23″ 552 567 584.2 

24″ 577 592 609.6 

10″/39 HP 221.4 236 254 

1 

/2 19″/42 HP 236.6 251.2 269.2 

9.5″ 208.7 223.3 241.3 

18 SU 450 465 485 

20 SU 500 515 535 

Full installation 

rack height 

mm 

U 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

Cranked L-shaped 

600 11 2 – 7827.061 

800 15 2 7827.080 7827.081 

1000 20 2 7827.100 7827.101 

1200 24 2 7827.120 7827.121 

1400 29 2 7827.140 7827.141 

1600 33 2 7827.160 7827.161 

1800 38 2 7827.180 7827.181 

2000 42 2 7827.200 7827.201 

2200 47 2 7827.220 7827.221 

Note: 

The mounting angles can also be used to accommodate 

21″, 23″ and 24″ attachment dimensions. 

Note FR(i): 

Only full installation is possible in conjunction with 

the TS installation bracket (DK 7827.480), 

see page 369. 


Punched sections without mounting flanges or 

depth stays for TS as installation kit for mounting 

angles, see page 299 – 300. 

For L-shaped mounting angle variant: for 

mounting slide rails or component shelves: 

Adaptor DK 7827.300, see page 325. 

Enclosure 

height 

mm 

Usable U 

with full 

installation 


Packs 

of 

Model No. 

FR(i) 

600 11 2 7856.800 

1200 24 2 7856.803 

1800 38 2 7856.8061) 2000 42 2 7856.809 

2200 47 2 7856.8121) 1) Delivery times available on request.



for QuickBox 

For the installation of 482.6 mm (19″) rackmounted 

equipment. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 





Mounting angle kit 

for DK-EL 

This mounting angle kit allows you to integrate a 

second 482.6 mm (19″) level into EL enclosures. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 





T-slot mounting angles, 

482.6 mm (19″)/metric 

for TS, FR(i) 

With integral T-slot for U nuts. Holes on a U pitch 

pattern are integrated into the rear section of the 

T-slot. Round and square holes on a 25 mm 

DIN 43 660 pitch pattern of holes are provided 

for side attachment. The mounting angle may 

optionally be integrated using PS metric or 

482.6 mm (19″) depth stays. 

Material: 

Extruded aluminium section, pickled 





Depth stay for PS 

for TS, FR(i) 

● T-slot mounting angles 



For 

enclosures 

U 


6 2 7502.201 

9 2 7502.202 

12 2 7502.203 

15 2 7502.204 


U Packs of Model No. DK 

6 2 7705.706 

9 2 7705.709 

12 2 7705.712 

15 2 7705.715 

18 2 7705.718 

21 2 7705.721 


rack height 

mm 

U SU 

Packs 

of 

Note: 

In 600 mm wide enclosures, mounting angles may 

be alternatively depth-mounted on TS punched 

sections with mounting flanges. 


Punched section with mounting flange as 

installation kit for mounting angles, 

see page 299, 

or 

depth stay for PS, 

see page 365. 

Model No. 

DK 

800 15 26 2 7000.150 1) 

1000 20 35 2 7000.200 1) 

1200 24 42 2 7000.240 1) 

1400 29 51 2 7000.290 1) 

1600 33 58 2 7000.3301) 1800 38 67 2 7000.3801) 2000 42 74 2 7000.420 

2200 47 83 2 7000.4701) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Material: 


Note: 

Only full installation with FR(i). 

Enclosure width mm 600/1200 800 

Standards 482.6 mm (19″) 482.6 mm (19″)/metric (465 mm) metric (515 mm) 

Installation position central central side central 

Model No. DK Packs of 2 7696.000 7698.000 7697.000 7000.100 

365 

Mounting angles




Mounting frame, 

482.6 mm (19″) 

for TS, FR(i) 

The welded 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame may 

be attached with complete depth variability and is 

used to structure the front and rear 482.6 mm 

(19″) level. 

The mounting frame has the same system punchings 

as the TS 8 enclosure section at the sides 

and rear, and therefore supports the mounting of 

various TS 8 system accessories such as cable 

clamp rails, cable shunting rings etc. 


Up to 1000 kg static load, with even load distribution 

on two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames, with 

full installation. 

Material: 




Note: 

A combination of 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame 

plus fan mounting plate is not possible. For active 

ventilation, we recommend use with modular fan 

roof. 



Adaptor pieces, 482.6 mm (19″) 

for TS, ES 

The “1 U” sub-section of mounting angles. 

For the installation of individual subracks and 

other equipment. 




Accessories: 

Captive nuts, 

see page 381. 

Assembly screws, 

see page 382. 

Cable clamp rails TS, 

see page 354. 

C rails, 

see page 307. 

Component shelves, 

see page 316 and page 319. 

Fan roof, modular, 

see page 128. 


Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

U 

Model No. 

FR(i) 

600 600 11 7856.710 

600 1200 24 7856.713 

600 1800 38 7856.716 

600 2000 42 7856.719 

600 2200 47 7856.722 

800 1200 24 7856.725 

800 1800 38 7856.728 

800 2000 42 7856.731 

800 2200 47 7856.734 

For U Packs of Model No. TS Model No. PS 

TS 1 4 8613.010 – 

ES 1 8 – 4547.000 

Note: 

Assembly example, 

see page 367. 

Accessories: 

Captive nuts, 

see page 381. 


see page 382. 

Slide rails with one-sided mounting, 

see page 383.

1 

3 

43 

63 



482.6 mm (19″) 

for TS, ES 

For the installation of subracks and other equipment. 

Mounting angles are easily shortened for partial 

assemblies. 


Conductive, corrosion-protected coating. 



For 


mm 

Packs 

of 

For enclosure system 

TS 1) 

U 


Aluminium 

section 

U 


Note: 

Assembly example, 

see page 367. 

For the installation of the 482.6 mm (19″) 

component shelves, see page 319, 

the installation kits, see page 324, are required. 

Accessories: 

Infill panels, 

see page 380. 

Captive nuts, 

see page 381. 


see page 382. 

Slide rails with one-sided mounting, 

see page 383, 

Slide rails with two-sided mounting, 

see page 383. 

Aluminium 

section 

For enclosure system 

ES 

Sheet steel, 

spray-finished, 

RAL 7035 

Sheet steel, 

zinc-plated, 

passivated 

Model No. TS Model No. PS 

1600 4 33 8613.060 33 4389.000 – – 

1800 4 38 8613.080 37 – – – 

2000 4 42 8613.000 42 4391.000 4358.200 – 

2200 4 47 8613.020 46 – – 4358.700 

For PC enclosure2) 4 17 8613.070 17 4632.000 – – 

1) For the rear of electronic enclosures. 

2) Behind bottom door. 

Assembly examples of TS: 

Drawing 1 Drawing 2 Drawing 3 Drawing 5 

Drawing 1 and 2: 

Mounting angle or adaptor piece fitted in the foremost installation 

position, directly on the vertical section. 

When installing slide rails with two-sided mounting (see page 383), 

the same mounting angles or adaptor pieces must also be 

mounted on the vertical section at the rear. 

1 Mounting angles/piece 

2 Adaptor rail 

3 TS sheet steel door 

4 TS glazed door 

5 Punched section without mounting flange 

1 

4 

63 

75.5 

Drawing 4 

5 

2 

1 

3 

66 

86 

Drawing 3: 

Mounting on two vertically 

installed PS punched sections 

permits fully flexible use of the 

enclosure depths. 

1 

2 

4 

86 

98.5 

Drawing 4 and 5: 

Greater distance from the door 

is achieved by mounting on 

adaptor rails for PS compatibility. 

In this position, the slide rails 

can be fitted with one-sided 

mounting. 

367 

Mounting angles

Mounting angles/Installation kits for mounting angles 


Mounting angles/Installation kits for mounting angles 

Mounting angles, metric 

for TS 

The L-shaped mounting angles accommodate 

metric assemblies and components. Depending 

on the installation kit, mounting dimensions 

465 mm and 515 mm can be configured. 


rack height 

mm 

Material: 

1600 59 2 7794.740 


2000 76 2 7831.631 




2200 84 2 7831.641 

interior installations, see page 364. Also required: 

Mounting angles additional 

fastening attachment 

for 800 mm wide TS network enclosures 

The additional fastening attachment counteracts 

bending of the mounting angles mounted on installation 

brackets in case of unevenly distributed 

loads. It is attached directly to 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting angles and to the punched section with 

mounting flange fitted in the depth (inner mounting 

level). 

Material: 





mounting flange 

as installation kit 

for 

● Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″) 

● Mounting angles, metric, 

Mounting dimension 465 mm 

Installation in enclosure width 600 mm 

The installation kit consists of 4 TS punched sections 

with mounting flange 17 x 73 mm to accommodate 

mounting angles. One pack is sufficient 

for installing one or two 482.6 mm (19″) attachment 

levels. For exceptionally heavy installed 

equipment, we recommend the installation of 

additional punched sections. 

Punched sections wih mounting flange or depth 

stays for TS as installation kit for mounting angles, 

see page 299 – 300. 


SU 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

– 17 2 7831.611 

1000 37 2 7831.621 

1200 43 2 7794.420 


2 7284.135 



see page 299 – 300. 

Width 

mm 


Depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Material: 




Model No. 

TS 

600 600 4 8612.060 

600 800 4 8612.080 

600 900 4 8612.090 

600 1000 4 8612.000 

600 1200 4 8612.020


Depth stays as installation kit 

for mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″) 


One installation kit consists of 4 depth stays to 

accommodate mounting angles. One pack is 

sufficient for installing one or two 482.6 mm (19″) 

attachment levels. For exceptionally heavy 

installed equipment, we recommend the installation 

of an additional depth stay in the centre. The 

front cut-out makes cable routing easier with full 

configuration 

Material: 




Depth stays for TS 

for mounting angles, FR(i), 482.6 mm (19″) 


Depth stays are screw-fastened to the enclosure 

frame in the enclosure width. 

The mounting angle is attached to the depth stay 

at the top and bottom. The depth stay ensures 

optimum clearance at the sides for cable routing. 

For partial enclosure configuration, the depth 

stays may be attached to the TS punched sections 

with mounting flanges 17 x 73 mm on the 

outer attachment level of the enclosure frame. 

Fully depth-variable attachment is facilitated by 

the attachment slots. Either cranked or L-shaped 

mounting angles may be used. 

Material: 


(DK 7827.480) 


(DK 7827.490) 




Mounting kits for mounting angles 

Width 

mm 


Depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Possible 

alternative: 

Depth stays TS for mounting angles, 

see page 369. 

Model No. 

DK 

800 600 4 7827.600 

800 800 4 7827.800 

800 900 4 7827.900 

800 1000 4 7827.000 

Packs of 

Model No. DK 

Installation position 

central side 

2 7827.480 7827.490 

Accessories: 

For partial installation, 


17 x 73 mm, 

see page 299 – 300. 

Mounting angles, cranked or or L-shaped, 

see page 364. 

369 

Mounting kits for mounting angles





for 

● Mounting angles, metric, 

mounting dimension 515 mm 

● Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″), 

mounting dimension 21″ 


One installation kit consists of 4 depth stays to 

accommodate mounting angles. One pack is 

sufficient for installing one or two 482.6 mm (19″) 

attachment levels. For exceptionally heavy 

installed equipment, we recommend the installation 

of an additional depth stay in the centre. 

Material: 





for 

● Mounting angles, 482.6 mm (19″), 

mounting dimensions 23″ and 24″ 


When using depth stays in 800 mm wide enclosures, 

attachment spacings of 23″ and 24″ are 

achieved. Either cranked or L-shaped, 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles may be used. 

Material: 





Accessories: 

Mounting angles, metric, 

see page 368. 

Mounting angles 482.6 mm (19″), cranked 

or L-shaped, 

see page 364. 


Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

800 800 4 7794.330 


Width Depth 

Design 

mm mm 23″ 24″ 

800 800 7827.823 7827.824 

800 900 7827.923 7827.924 

800 1000 7827.023 7827.024 


Accessories: 

Mounting angles 482.6 mm (19″), 

cranked or L-shaped, 

see page 364.


Swing frame, small 

for 600 mm and 800 mm wide TS enclosures 

For mounting 482.6 mm (19″) equipment. 

The front mounting situation, at the top or bottom 

of the enclosure frame, is achieved with the installation 

kit. The installation accessories required for 

other installation variants are described separately 


With 800 mm wide enclosures, central or side-offset 

installation is possible. 


Torsionally stiff frame, welded from rectangular 

tube and triple folded support section. 

Material: 



Cam with double-bit lock insert and parts for 

attaching to the installation kit. 



Installation kit for swing frame, small, 

see page 372. 

Swing frames 

Accessories: 

PS punched section without mounting flange 

see page 304. 

Support bracket TS, 

see page 312. 

Lock inserts, type D, 

see page 285. 

Height units 3 U 6 U 9 U 12 U 15 U 18 U 

Model No. SR 2377.030 2377.060 2377.090 2377.120 2377.150 2377.180 

H1 mm 275 408 541 675 808 941 

H2 mm 217 350 483 617 750 883 

H3 mm 137 270 403 537 670 803 

Installation depth T max. = mm with dimension D1) of at least 45 mm 

Enclosure width mm 600 800 800 

Mounting central side central 

Enclosure depth mm 

400 

500 

≥ 600 

T max. 

185 

185 

185 

T max. 

310 

410 

500 

1) D = Distance from the inner edge of the door to the front edge of the swing frame may be installed deeper on a 25 mm pitch pattern. 

60 

D 

T max. 

D 

T max. 

For 600 mm wide enclosures For 800 mm wide enclosures 

optionally side or central 

25 

40 

8 

40 

597 

496 

31.75 

44.45 

450 

465 

25 

H3 

H2 

H1 

797 

60 160 

D 

T max. 

T max. 

310 

370 

370 

797 

371 

Swing frames

Swing frames 


Swing frames 

5 examples for TS 

Partial installation in 600 and 800 mm wide enclosures, 

in the foremost or rearmost position. 

1 

Partial installation, centre 

in 600 and 800 mm wide enclosures. 

1 

1 

1 

Front Set back 

Front 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

Set back 


for swing frame, small, or hinge attachment for 

partial mounting plate in TS 8. 

Material: 

Cross member: Sheet steel, passivated 

Support bracket TS: Die-cast zinc 


2 cross members, 


1 

2 

2 

2 

1 


Depending on the installation position: 

1 Installation kit for swing frame, small. 

2 PS punched section without mounting flange 

23 x 73 mm according to the enclosure depth 

in conjunction with 4 support brackets 

TS 8800.330 (2 included with the supply of the 

installation kit). 

Note: 

Height compensation between the 25 mm pitch 

pattern of holes in the enclosure and the height 

units of the swing frame is achieved by the support 

brackets TS (two are included with the supply 

of the installation kit). 

Side installation 

With an enclosure depth of 600 or 800 mm, 

side installation of a small swing frame is identical 

to installation parallel to the front. 

For access to the swing frame we recommend 

the hinges for the TS side panel, 

see page 265. 


1 

1 


mm 

Model No. SR 

600 2377.860 

800 2377.880 

Accessories: 

Depending on the installation position 

(see above): 

Support brackets TS 8800.330, 

see page 312, 

and PS punched sections without mounting 

flanges to match the enclosure depth, 

see page 304.


Swing frame, large 

without trim panel 

for TS, ES 


The installation accessories required for other 

installation variants are described separately 




tube and triple folded support section. 

Material: 



2 cams with double-bit lock insert and parts for 

attaching to the installation kit. 

Note: 

If the enclosure height is not fully utilised by the 

swing frame, additional mounting accessories – 

see page 374 – will be required. 



Installation kit for swing frame, large, 

see page 374. 

Swing frames 

Accessories: 



23 x 73 mm, 

see page 299. 


see page 302. 

Punched sections with mounting flanges, 


Width divider, 


Lock inserts, type D, 

see page 285. 

Height units 22 U 31 U 36 U 40 U 45 U 

Model No. SR 2322.700 2331.700 2336.700 2340.700 2345.700 

For enclosure height mm (or higher) 1200 1600 1800 2000 2200 

H1 mm 1061.5 1461.5 1684.5 1861.5 2084.0 

H2 mm 981.5 1381.5 1604.0 1781.5 2004.0 

Installation depth T max. = mm with dimension D1) of at least 49 mm 

Enclosure width mm 600 1200 1200 

Mounting central left or right left and right 


400 

500 

600 

800 

H1 

H2 

499 

465 

450 

X 

D 

12 

86.5 

19 

35 

T max. 

T max. 

185 

185 

185 

185 

80 

Cut-out “X” 

44.45 

7.5 

T max. 

295 

395 

495 

695 


D 

T max. 

□ 9 

15.9 

31.8 

D 

T max. 

T max. 

295 

365 

365 

365 

373 

Swing frames

Swing frames 


Swing frames 


1 

1 

1 

3 

3 

1 

3 

600 mm 

front 

3 

1 

3 

1 

3 

2 

1 

3 

3 

3 

2 

1200 mm 

front 

3 

1 

3 

1 

1 

3 

1 

1 

2 

3 

3 

3 

6 

1200 mm 

front with 

width divider 

Partial installation, top 

600 mm front 600 mm 

1200 mm 

set back 

front 

600 mm 

front 

600 mm 

set back 


Swedish patent no. 505 069 

Dutch patent no. 193 708 

(Patents do not apply to 

SR 1985.500/SR 1986.500) 



1200 mm 

front 

4 

2 

3 

2 

3 

2 

3 

1 

1 

2 

3 

3 

3 


6 

1200 mm 

set back with 

width divider 

1200 mm 

set back 

1200 mm 

set back 

Installation kits 

for swing frame, large 

With 800 mm wide enclosures, the swing frame 

may also be installed in the centre or offset to the 

side. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Installation kits for swing frame, large without trim panel 

For 

enclosure 

width 

mm 

600 

800 

1200 


TS ES 

4 

4 

2 

3 

2 

3 

2 

3 



Installation kit for 600 mm wide enclosures 

Installation kit for 1200 mm wide enclosures 

TS punched section with mounting flange 

23 x 73 mm for the inner mounting level in the 

respective enclosure depth, for installation in 

ES = PS punched sections with mounting 

flanges 

PS punched section without mounting flange 

in the respective enclosure depth in conjunction 


TS punched rail 18 x 38 mm in the 

corresponding enclosure depth1) Width divider (left-hand or right-hand angle) 1) 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

1) Not possible with ES, CM. 

Notes: 

● Height compensation between the 25 mm pitch 

pattern of holes in the enclosure and the height 

units of the swing frame is achieved by the 

upper installation kit. 

● Partial installation at the bottom matches partial 

installation at the top. 

● Only full installation at the front is possible with 

CM. 


With an enclosure depth of 600 mm, side installation 

of a large swing frame is identical to installation 

parallel to the front. 


the hinges for the TS side panel, see page 265. 

1 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Parts for attaching to the enclosure. 

Accessories: 

Swing frame stay, 

see page 377. 

With 130° hinge With 180° hinge 

Mounting plate slide rail1) Mounting plate slide rail1) without with without without with without 

< 800 N < 1500 N < 1500 N < 800 N < 1200 N < 1200 N 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

1 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

1994.835 1994.835 1994.635 – – – 

1994.835 1994.835 – – – – 

1985.500 – – – – – 

1995.235 1995.235 1995.835 1997.235 1997.235 1997.835 

1995.235 1995.235 – 1997.235 1997.235 – 

1986.500 – – – – – 

– – 1996.535 – – – 

1996.835 1996.835 – – – – 

1) For: TS screw-fastened, removable/ES welded.

Installation depth T max. = mm with dimension D1) of at least 49 mm with 130° hinge, 95 mm with 180° hinge 

Enclosure width mm 800 



with trim panel 

for TS, ES 


The installation accessories required for other 

installation variants are described separately 




tube and six-folded support section. The side trim 

panels are screw-fastened to the frame. The righthand 

trim panel has a handle strip at the side and 

is equipped with a locking rod system. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Frame, zinc-plated, passivated 

Trim panels spray-finished 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Locking rod system with double-bit lock insert and 

parts for attaching to the installation kit. 

D 


Mounting side central 

Hinge 130° 180° 180° 


T max. 

T max. 

T max. 

400 

295 

252 

252 

500 

395 

352 

345 

600 

470 

428 

345 

800 

470 

428 

345 


T max. 

D 

Swing frames 

Note: 

If the enclosure height is not fully utilised by the 

swing frame, additional mounting accessories – 

see page 376 – will be required. 

For two-door enclosures with height 1800 and 

2200 mm the next-smallest swing frame must be 

installed, due to collision with the lock. 


Installation kit for swing frame, large, 

see page 374. 

Accessories: 


23 x 73 mm, 

see page 299. 

Punched sections with mounting flanges, 


Lock inserts, version A, 

see page 285. 

Ergoform-S lock system, 

see page 284. 

Height units 22 U 31 U 36 U 40 U 45 U 

Trim panel side central side central side central side central side central 

Model No. SR RAL 7035 2323.235 2324.235 2332.235 2333.235 2337.235 2338.235 2341.235 2342.235 2346.235 2347.235 

For enclosure height mm (or higher) 1200 1600 1800 2000 2200 

H1 mm 1061.5 1461.5 1684.5 1861.5 2084.0 

H2 mm 981.5 1381.5 1604.0 1781.5 2004.0 

H1 

H2 

1 

1 

Installation components 

side 

32 

699 

485 182 

8.1 

44.45 

40 

465 

450 

X 

75 

Cut-out “X” 

44.45 

7.5 

□ 9 

15.9 

31.8 

44.45 

H1 

H2 

1 

1 

T max. 

Installation components 

centre 

699 

107 485 107 

40 

465 

450 

X 

75 

375 

Swing frames

Swing frames 


Swing frames 


2 

1 

2 

800 mm 

front 

1 

800 mm 

front 

800 mm 

front 


Swedish patent no. 505 069 

Dutch patent no. 193 708 

1 

Partial installation, top 

1 

2 


1 

1 

2 


2 

1 

2 

800 mm 

set back 

1 

800 mm 

set back 

800 mm 

set back 

Installation kits 

for swing frame, large 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Parts for attaching to the enclosure. 

Installation kits for swing frame, large with trim panel 

For 

enclosure 

width 

mm 

800 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 


2 

TS ES 



1 Installation kit for 800 mm wide enclosures 

2 TS punched section with mounting flange 

23 x 73 mm for the inner mounting level corresponding 

to the enclosure depth, for installation 

in ES = PS punched sections with 

mounting flanges 

Notes: 

● Height compensation between the 25 mm 

pitch pattern of holes in the enclosure and the 

height units of the swing frame is achieved by 

the upper installation kit. 

● Partial installation at the bottom matches partial 

installation at the top. 


With an enclosure depth of 800 mm, side installation 

of a large swing frame is identical to installation 

parallel to the front. 


the hinges for the TS side panel, 

see page 265. 


1 

Accessories: 

Swing frame stay, 

see page 377. 

With 130° hinge With 180° hinge 

Mounting plate slide rail1) Mounting plate slide rail1) without with without without with without 

< 800 N < 1500 N < 1500 N < 800 N < 1200 N < 1200 N 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

1 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

Model No. 

SR 

1995.235 1995.235 1995.835 1997.235 1997.235 1997.835 

1995.235 1995.235 – 1997.235 1997.235 – 

1) For: TS screw-fastened, removable/ES welded.


Swing frame, 

482.6 mm (19″) 

Heavy-duty version 

for 800 mm wide enclosures, based on TS 8 

The swing frame facilitates the accommodation 

of a wide range of 482.6 mm (19″) components 

up to a weight load of 350 kg. By swinging it out, 

access may be gained to the rear of the equipment 

and its cabling at any time. The maximum 

opening angle is 130°. 

At the side, the swing frame has a trim panel with 

integral handle strip and two-point locking bar. 

A semi-cylinder lock can be achieved by using 

the Ergoform-S handle system. 

Several openings in the trim panel permit convenient 

cable routing from the rear of the swing frame 

in the front section. The openings may also be 

optionally top-mounted with standard commercially 

available plastic cable ducts. 

An additional vertical row of holes integrated into 

the trim panel facilitates vertical and horizontal 

cable routing via cable shunting rings. 

Installation is only possible in the form of full 

enclosure installation. The installation position 

may be varied in the enclosure depth. 

Swing frame stay 

Holds the swing frame in the open position. 



● SR 1979.200, at the top of the enclosure 

● SR 1980.200, at the bottom of the enclosure 

(with safety catch at 160°) 


Swing frame, small 

● SR 1979.200, may be mounted at the top or 

bottom of the installation kit. 

Slide rails 

To support heavy slide-in electronic equipment, 

482.6 mm (19″) in the swing frame. 

Material: 



Swing frames 

U 


mm 

Model No. DK 

40 2000 7858.100 


350 kg 

Material: 

Swing frame: Sheet steel, zinc-plated, passivated 

Trim panel and installation kit: Sheet steel, 

spray-finished, RAL 7035 


Locking rod with double-bit lock insert, heavyduty 

installation kit and assembly parts. 

Note: 

Max. installation depth of the equipment Tmax., 

see page 375 (swing frame, large, with trim at 

the side). 

Packs of Model No. SR 

With 130° hinge 5 1979.200 

With 180° hinge 1 1980.200 

For equipment with a 

max. installation depth 

Packs of Model No. SR 

T max. < 190 mm 10 1962.200 

T max. > 190 mm 10 1963.200 

377 

Swing frames

Pull-out frame 


Pull-out frame 

Pull-out frame, 

482.6 mm (19″) 

for TS 

For the installation of a pull-out 482.6 mm (19″) 

front. For 600 and 800 mm wide TS enclosures, 

from a depth of 800 mm. 

Overall depth: 525 mm 

Extension piece: 500 mm 

Distance: 300 mm 

Load capacity: 50 kg. 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Telescopic slides and assembly parts. 


TS punched sections with 

mounting flanges 

as installation kit 

for pull-out frame 

Installation in enclosure width 600 mm. 

The installation kit comprises 4 TS punched sections 

with mounting flanges 17 x 73 mm. 

Material: 





for pull-out frame 

Installation in enclosure width 800 mm. 

The installation kit consists of 4 depth stays. 

Material: 


For U 

Height 

mm 

Model No. DK 

12 637 7124.035 



Installation kit according to the enclosure width. 

As installation kit for enclosure width 600 mm: 


17 x 73 mm, 

see page 299. 

As installation kit for enclosure width 800 mm: 

Depth stays, 

see page 378. 

Note: 

The slide rail DK 7963.310 (see page 384) can be 

mounted directly in the pull-out frame to support 

heavy equipment. 




Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

600 800 4 8612.080 

600 900 4 8612.090 

600 1000 4 8612.000 

600 1200 4 8612.020 


Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 


800 800 4 7827.800 

800 900 4 7827.900 

800 1000 4 7827.000


Adaptor, metric/482.6 mm (19″) 

21″/19″ 

With this adaptor, 482.6 mm (19″) assemblies 

may be fastened to metric (535 mm) mounting 

angles, or combined systems may be configured. 

Material: 




Adaptor kit 3 U 

for 800 mm wide TS enclosures 

For fastening individual 482.6 mm (19″) components, 

or as an additional mounting facility at the 

rear of the enclosure. The mounting level in the 

adaptor angle can be adjusted by 100 mm in the 

depth, leaving sufficient space for baying where 

patch panels or splicing boxes are used. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Mounting frame 54 U 

for TS, FR(i) 

The mounting frame allows configuration of a 

side-offset 482.6 mm (19″) level with 42 U useful 

installation space plus the additional integration of 

a further 12 U for vertical installation. The additional 

side extension is divided into three installation 

levels arranged on top of one another, each 

with 4 U. 

The mounting frame may be installed at either the 

front or rear. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


12 U mounting trim at the side. 


482.6 mm (19″)/metric installation 

SU U Packs of Model No. DK 

2 1 2 7246.010 

6 3 2 7246.030 

11 6 2 7246.060 

Height Mounting position Model No. DK 

3 U central 7246.100 


Adaptor rail, 

see page 303 or 

Assembly block, 

see page 303. 

For enclosures Additional 

Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

vertical 

installation area 



see page 364. 

Model No. 

DK 

800 2000 12 U 7827.554 


379 

482.6 mm (19″)/metric installation




Adaptor, 3 U 

Depth offset 100 mm 

This adaptor is used to recess 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting of equipment inside enclosures with 19″ 

installation in the foremost position, such as server 

or electronic enclosures. In this way, sufficient 

space can be gained in front of the mounting 

equipment to integrate patch panels or switches, 

whilst at the same time exploiting the maximum 

enclosure depth. 

Material: 




Mounting kit, 2 U 

For 482.6 mm (19″) equipment 

Facilitates fast, simple integration of additional 2 U 

mounting space within an enclosure by attaching 

to the enclosure frame or to the existing mounting 

angles at the sides. The flexible slot fastening of 

the brackets means that the distance between the 

two installation brackets may be freely selected, 

so that other 482.6 mm (19″) attachment dimensions 

may be implemented. 

The second row of holes is used for the optional 

configuration of additional mounting surfaces. 

Material: 




Infill panel, hinged 

for 800 mm wide TS network enclosures 

To cover the side cable chamber. The infill panel 

is attached to the vertical enclosure frame at the 

front. The generous curved design will conceal 

even large quantities of cables, and facilitates 

combined use with large-scale shunting rings 

DK 7220.600. 

The infill panel has a hinged design and allows 

easy access to the cabling level by simply swinging 

it out. Locating points keep the panel in its 

open and closed state. 

With an offset 482.6 mm (19″) mounting level the 

panel may likewise be offset in the enclosure 

depth and secured to TS punched sections with 

mounting flange on the inner mounting level. 

For mounting the 482.6 mm (19″) attachment level 

in front-most mounting position, version with 

straight trim panel. 

Material: 





2 7246.400 


2 7246.420 

For 

installation height 

U 

Accessories: 


see page 299. 

Note: 

The installation of depth stays, 

e.g. DK 7827.600/.800 is not possible. 


Packs 

of 

Trim panel 

curved 

Model No. TS 

Trim panel 

straight 

33 2 7827.530 – 

38 2 7827.532 7827.5181) 42 2 7827.534 7827.520 

47 2 7827.536 7827.5221) 1) Delivery times available on request.


Adhesive measuring strip, 

482.6 mm (19″) 

Of stable aluminium foil, guarantees simple 

processing and durability. With numerical labelling 

on an imperial pitch pattern for clear identification 

of the various height units. The doublesided 

labelling allows the counting direction to be 

freely selected, up to a maximum of 56 U. In this 

way, clear documentation of the various mounting 

parts is easily achieved. 

Material: 

Aluminium foil 

Captive nuts M5/M6 

For the attachment of rack-mounted electronic 

equipment, 482.6 mm (19″) installed equipment 

and blanking plates to mounting angles, 

482.6 mm (19″). 

For use with metal thickness from 0.8 – 2.0 mm. In 

areas of narrow tolerance, captive nuts for metal 

thicknesses of 1.2 – 1.5 mm should be used. 

Optionally with or without contact of the installed 

equipment to the 482.6 mm (19″) section/enclosure. 

Cage nut – front mounting, 

482.6 mm (19″) 

The cage nut consists of an expanding nut which 

is simply inserted into the square attachment hole 

at the front and then secured with the assembly 

screw. 

When tightening the screw, the cage expands 

and thus secures the required components. 

Clamping range from 1.2 – 4.5 mm. Multi-tooth 

screw head, bit size T 30. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Spring nuts with screws 

M5 x 10 mm/M6 x 10 mm for T-slot mounting 

angle 

The spring nuts ensure flexible, secure mounting 

of accessory components on the T-slot of the FR(i) 

frame and on the T-slot mounting angles. 


50 spring nuts, 

50 screws, 10 mm, self-locking. 



Labelling range U Packs of Model No. DK 

1 – 56 1 7950.100 

Captive nut M5 

Design 

Captive nut M6 

For metal 

thicknesses 

mm 

Packs of 

Model No. 

EL 

With contact 0.8 – 2.0 50 2094.500 

Without contact 0.8 – 2.0 50 2092.500 

Design 

For metal 

thicknesses 

mm 

Packs of 

Model No. 

EL 

With contact 0.8 – 2.0 50 2094.200 


With contact 1.2 – 1.5 50 2094.300 


Dimensions 

mm 

Size of mounting 

hole mm 

Packs 

of 

M6 x 16 9.5 x 9.5 50 

Model No. DK 

2094.400 




50 expanding nuts including assembly screws 

and plastic washers. 


Phillips-head, M6 50 7000.990 

381 

482.6 mm (19″)/metric installation




Assembly screws 

M5 x 16 mm/M6 x 16 mm 

For electronic equipment, 482.6 mm (19″) 

installed components and blanking plates. 


Plastic washers. 


M5 x 16 mm/M6 x 16 mm 

For optimum transmission of torques, an extended 

tool life and increased safety and reliability when 

tightening and loosening screw connections. 


Plastic washers. 

Design Packs of Model No. EL 

Phillips-head screw M5 100 2099.500 

Cheese-head screw M6 100 2093.200 

Phillips-head screw M6 100 2089.000 

Bit size Packs of Model No. DK 

M5 Multi-tooth 25 100 7094.500 

M6 Multi-tooth 30 100 7094.600 



Slide rails 

for TS mounting angles 

With one-sided mounting on the 482.6 mm (19″) 


Material: 




Slide rails 

for TS mounting angles 

With two-sided mounting between the 482.6 mm 

(19″) front and rear mounting angles or 482.6 mm 

(19″) adaptor pieces. 

Material: 




Slide rails, heavy-duty 

for TS network enclosures 

with two mounting levels 

To support heavy installed equipment. The slide 

rails are simply located into the cranked mounting 

angles and secured with screws. The combined 

use with additional depth stays or, in case 

of 80 mm wide enclosures, with the additional fastening 

attachment counteracts possible bending 

of the mounting angles in case of unevenly distributed 

loads. 


80 kg, static load 

Material: 







see page 367. 

Slide rails 

Length 

mm 


185 10 4530.000 

270 10 4531.000 

For 


mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

TS 



see page 367. 

Adaptor pieces, 482.6 mm (19″), 

see page 366. 

Model No. 

PS 

500 10 8613.150 – 

600 10 8613.160 4546.000 

800 10 8613.180 4549.000 

Distance 

between 

19″ levels 

mm 

Contact surface 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

298 55 261 2 7492.300 

398 55 361 2 7492.400 

498 55 461 2 7492.500 

598 55 561 2 7492.060 

698 55 661 2 7492.070 

Note: 

Not suitable for use in 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frames. 


For fastening to L-shaped TS mounting angles: 

Adaptor DK 7827.300, 

see page 325. 

Possible 

alternative: 

Slide rails SR 1962.200, 

see page 377. 

Mounting on the front and rear mounting angles. 

383 

Slide rails

Slide rails 


Slide rails 

11.5 7.5 


for TS, FR(i), TE 

With L-shaped mounting angles or 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting frame and a clearance between 

levels of 740 mm. 

Easily and quickly installed thanks to locating 

brackets for the rear level. 


100 kg static load 

Material: 




Slide rails, 

depth-variable, 1 U 

for server and network enclosures 

with two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting levels and 


The slide rail is pulled out to the required length 

and secured between the front and rear mounting 

level. Rear location lugs and front screw-fastening 

enable convenient one-man assembly. The 

mounting component to be integrated is inserted 

horizontally onto the slide rail and optionally 

secured to the mounting level via its attachment 

slots. 


80 kg/150 kg, static load 

Material: 




Slide rails 

for FR(i), TE and 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frames 

For mounting between a front and a rear pair of 

mounting angles. The slide rails can be used to 

support heavy 482.6 mm (19″) components. 



Material: 




Slide rails 

for EL 

For the installation of heavy slide-in equipment. 

Material: 


Distance 

between 

19″ levels 

mm 



Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

740 50 734 2 7063.740 

Length 

mm 

Load 

capacity 

kg 

Contact 

surface 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

390 – 600 80 50 2 7063.882 

590 – 930 80 50 2 7063.883 

590 – 930 150 25 2 7063.884 

Note: 

The super-slimline design of the slide rail allows 

it to be used in most integration cases for 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting components. Because 

it is secured to the standardised mounting level, 

it is manufacturer-independent. 

The slide rail slightly reduces the installation 

space below the slide rail so that the U below it 

is only available for limited use. 

Distance 

between 

19″ levels mm 


Width Depth 

mm mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

395 85 324 2 7963.310 

495 85 424 2 7963.410 

595 85 524 2 7963.510 

695 85 624 2 7963.610 

795 85 724 2 7963.710 

Possible 

alternative: 

Slide rail, depth-variable, 

see page 384. 

For centre part depth 

mm 


216 10 2240.000 

316 10 2250.000 

416 10 2260.000


Drawer, 2 U, 3 U 

for a 482.6 mm (19″) attachment level 

For front attachment to mounting angles, 

482.6 mm (19″). With cover and telescopic slides 

to accommodate assignment lists, operating manuals 

and small parts. The small version of the 2 U 

variant is also suitable for mounting inside a swing 

frame. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Fully assembled. 

Drawer for 482.6 mm (19″ ) 

with shelf 

For keyboards, operating manuals etc. The perforated 

plate in the base helps air to circulate in the 

enclosure. Load capacity 50 kg. The 1 U drawer 

can be installed rotated through 180°, allowing it 

to be used as a utility table. 

Material: 

Drawer: Aluminium, anodised. 

Telescopic slides: 



Telescopic slides. 

Drawer for 482.6 mm (19″ ) 

Frame open at the bottom 

For keyboards up to 440 mm width and maximum 

350 mm depth. 

Material: 

Drawer: Aluminium 

Telescopic slides: 



Telescopic slides. 

Installation kit, depth-variable 

for 482.6 mm (19″) component shelves and 

drawers 

Depending on the distance between the two 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting levels, the installation kit 

is screw-fastened in the depth between the 

cranked or L-shaped mounting angles. 

Material: 





Height 

Clearance openings Installation 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

depth 

mm 

Drawers 

Model No. 

DK 

2 U 411 242 250 7282.135 

2 U 411 419 427 7282.035 

3 U 411 419 427 7283.035 

U Model No. PS 

1 4541.000 

3 4542.000 


Installation kit, depth-variable, 

see page 385. 

U Model No. PS 

2 4548.000 


Installation kit, depth-variable, 

see page 385. 


44.45 

Distance between 19″ levels 

mm 

31.75 

10 

27.5 

R 2 

11.5 

i.l.W. 450 

2 

50.8 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

550 – 850 2 7063.850 

385 

Drawers

Drawers 


Drawers 

Keyboard drawer 2 U 

for a 482.6 mm (19″) attachment level 

For keyboards up to 430 mm wide and 250 mm 

deep with the front panel folded over. 

Material: 

Sheet steel with aluminium front, spray-finished in 

RAL 7035. 


Lockable drawer with handles, 

folding front, 

pull-out mouse pad, 

mouse support, 

practical cable entry 

and strain relief. 

Drawer 482.6 mm (19″) 

for keyboard 

For attaching to the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles front and rear. Suitable for standard keyboards 

larger than 482.6 mm (19″). Keyboard 

support with non-slip base, plus wrist support. 

Depth-variable installation from 610 – 950 mm. 

Clearance opening W x H x D: 

408 x 40 x 550 mm. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Assembly parts, excluding keyboard. 

Keyboard drawer 1 U 

for 482.6 mm (19″) attachment level 

This space-saving keyboard drawer is screwfastened 

to the front and rear 482.6 mm (19″) 


The installation spacing is infinitely adjustable 

from 460 – 800 mm. 

It is fully extendible, lockable, with strain relief and 

hinged cable support. 

The drawer is suitable to accommodate 482.6 mm 

(19″) keyboards. 

Interior dimensions: 

W x H x D approx. 420 x 40 x 220 mm 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Assembly parts, excluding keyboard. 

Note: 

Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U, 

see page 190. 

Height Model No. DK 

2 U 

Installation depth: 390 mm. 

7281.035 


1 7063.888 

Note: 

Installation only possible on L-shaped mounting 

angles and/or 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames. 

Distance between levels mm Model No. DK 

460 – 800 7281.200 

Accessories: 

482.6 mm (19″) long-stroke keyboard with 

numeric keypad and touchpad, connection cable 

(approx. 1.15 m) and PS/2 connector, 

colour RAL 7035. 

W x H x D mm Keyboard layout Model No. DK 

415 x 37 x 193 

German 9004.400 

US English 9004.402 

French 9004.403 

Spanish 9004.404 

Finnish 9004.406 

Swedish 9004.407 



Universal server installation 

kit, 482.6 mm (19″) 

for TS, FR(i) 

The universal server installation kit is ideally suited 

for integrating most standard server types into 

Rittal enclosures with L-shaped mounting angles 

or 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames and a minimum 

enclosure depth of 900 mm. The installation 

kit is specially designed to ensure free access to 

the 482.6 mm (19″) level, for securing the individual 

servers in the retracted position using the 

screws (M5) provided. 

Distance between angles: 750 mm 


The adaptors (additionally required) allow servers 

to be secured to the universal installation kit using 

the original installation kits supplied by the server 

manufacturers. The adaptor should be chosen 

according to the server type being installed. This 

specific mounting adaptor allows problem-free 

configuration of combined systems and facilitates 

flexible use of the individual enclosures in future. 


for FR(i) and 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames 

This installation kit makes it possible to mount the 

universal server installation kit DK 7063.100 both 

in FR(i) server racks and on two 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frames. 

Material: 



Server integration 

For Packs of Model No. DK 

all common server types 1 set 7063.100 



Material: 





Mounting adaptor depending on the server type. 

For FR(i) and enclosures with two 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frames: 

Installation kit DK 7063.102, 

see page 387. 

For server types Packs of Model No. DK 

With front 482.6 mm 

(19″) server attachment 

1 set 7063.110 

With side attachment (SUN) 1 set 7063.120 

With side attachment 

(HP rack system/E) 

1 set 7063.130 

Material: 



1 set of mounting adaptors, 

sufficient for integration of a server, 



1 set 7063.102 

387 

Server integration

Patch panels 


Patch panels 

Telephone and data distributor 

1 U ( 1 /2 19″) 42 HP 

Modular system 

Mini patch panels, fitted with RJ 45 snap-in 

through-connectors (for top-hat rails to 

DIN 50 002) with earth connection. 

LSA-plus system 

Telephone distributor: 

10 x RJ 45 jacks, unshielded, without cover, 

suitable for 4-pole assignment, with strain relief 

and earth connection. 

Data distributor: 

8 x RJ 45 jacks, shielded, cover with quickrelease 

fastener, suitable for 4-pole assignment, 

with strain relief and earth connection. 

Telephone and data distributor 

1 U (19″) 84 HP 

LSA-plus system 

Telephone distributor: 

25 x RJ 45 jacks, unshielded, without cover, 

suitable for 4-pole assignment, with strain relief 

and earth connection. 

Data distributor: 

24 x RJ 45 jacks, shielded, cover with quickrelease 

fastener, with strain relief and earth 

connection. 

Top-hat rail module 

Top-hat rail module with mounting clip for top-hat 

rails to DIN 50 002, robust metal housing, with 

strain relief. 

Cat. 6, 2 x RJ 45, System Corning Future Com 

S 250 (cables are attached without the use of 

tools). 

Design Cat. 

8 ports, UTP, modular, 

2 x RJ 45, including 

8 patch cables 0.25 m, 

blue 

8 ports, UTP, modular, 

2 x RJ 45, including 

8 patch cables 0.25 m, 

yellow 


3 

5 

Design Cat. 

10 ports, UTP, RJ 45/LSA, 

including 8 patch cables 

0.25 m, blue 



0.25 m, yellow 

3 

5 

Design Cat. 



0.6 m, blue 

3 

Design Cat. 

24 ports, STP, RJ 45/LSA, 


0.6 m, yellow 

6 

Design Cat. 

2 x Corning Future Com 

S 250 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

1 7870.800 

6 7870.580 

1 7870.820 

6 7870.595 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

1 7870.802 

6 7870.582 

1 7870.822 

6 7870.597 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

1 7870.810 

6 7870.590 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

1 7870.830 

6 7870.600 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

6 3 7870.614

L1 

L3 

13+0.1 

3.2 

14.8+0.1 

20.1+0.1 

L2 


11 

R1.5 

12+0.1 

For shielded 

RJ 45 modular jacks 

To accommodate screened RJ 45 jacks. 

Cut-outs and rear of patch panels electrically 

conductive to contact the fitted jacks with the 

patch panel and the zinc-plated, passivated 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles. 

With accommodation facility for cable clamp 

straps DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

Material: 


Colour: 

Front: RAL 7035 

Rear: Zinc-plated, passivated. 

For 24 V interfaces 

For the installation of 16 sub-D (trapezoid) jacks 

and connectors. 


straps DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

L1 mm L2 mm L3 mm 

25 21 16.5 9-pole 

33.3 29.2 24.7 15-pole 

47 43 38.5 25-pole 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

To accommodate 

BNC jacks (version E) 


straps DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

To accommodate the 

AT & T Connector System 110 

For the attachment of 2 wiring blocks each with 

100 paired wires and accommodation facility for 

2 cable holders (backboards). With rear accommodation 

facility for cable clamp straps 

DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


12 quick-release fasteners for wiring blocks and 

cable holders. 


Patch panels 

U 

No. of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

1 16 7394.035 

2 32 7395.035 


Accessories: 

Cable clamp strap DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000, 

see page 356. 

U 

For 

no. of poles 

No. of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

2 9 16 7087.535 

2 15 16 7086.535 

2 25 16 7089.535 


Accessories: 


see page 356. 

U 

No. of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

3 32 7069.535 


Accessories: 


see page 356. 

U Paired wires Model No. DK 

4 200 7049.035 

Accessories: 


see page 356. 

389 

Patch panels

Patch panels 


Patch panels 

Module panel, 482.6 mm (19″) 

3 U/84 HP 

To accommodate various partial front plates and 

hence for individual assembly of a patch panel 

with any given combination of data connectors 

and couplings. The useful width is 84 HP. 

Material: 

Aluminium 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Two 482.6 mm (19″) flanges, 

2 horizontal rails, 

including 2 tapped strips. 

Partial front plates 

To accommodate various data connectors and 

couplings in the module panel DK 7330.035. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


1 7330.035 


Partial front plates, 

see page 390. 

For socket/ 

Coupling 

Number 

of 

locations 

Note: 

For drawings of the cut-outs, 

see page 389 – 391. 


HP 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

C 4 4 2 7334.0351) BNC-E 4 6 2 7339.035 

D-Sub 9-pole 3 4 2 7342.035 

D-Sub 15-pole 2 4 2 7343.035 

D-Sub 25-pole 1 4 2 7344.035 

RJ 11 – 45 4 8 2 7349.0351) Filler panel – 4 2 7355.035 

Filler panel – 6 2 7356.0351) Filler panel – 8 2 7357.0351) Filler panel – 24 1 7359.0351) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

Other versions available on request.

18 

13.5+0.1 

4 

2.5 (6 x) 

9.6+0.1 

12.4 

7.8+0.1 

30-0.1 

22-0.2 

26.42 

30.8 

9.91 

2.4 

9.6+0.1 


To accommodate E-2000, 

E-2000 duplex or 

SC fibre-optic couplings 

For 1 U with accommodation facility for cable 

clamp straps DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


SC duplex fibre-optic couplings 


straps DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


ST fibre-optic couplings 


straps DK 7610.000 or DK 7611.000. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Identification strips 

for patch panels 

For individual labelling of different slots, 

self-adhesive. 

Length: 210 mm, height: 10 mm. 

Panel 1 U, 482.6 mm (19″) 

with solid tray 

For the storage of fibre-optic coupling covers or 


Depth: 100 mm 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Patch panels 

U 

Number of 

locations 

single/duplex 

Model No. DK 

1 16/8 7433.035 


Accessories: 


see page 356. 

U 

Number of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

1 12 7154.035 

2 24 7155.035 

Accessories: 


see page 356. 

U 

Number of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

1 16 7437.035 

2 24 7137.535 


Other designs available on request. 

Accessories: 


see page 356. 


32 7167.000 


1 7300.335 

391 

Patch panels

Patch panels 


Patch panels 

Blanking panel, 482.6 mm (19″) 

As an extension cover or for population as 

required. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Blanking panel, 1 U 

Toolless attachment, 482.6 mm (19″) 

The blanking panel is used to seal unused areas 

within the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting level. Quick 

toolless attachment means that it is easily integrated 

anywhere, and can also be removed again 

if necessary. Thanks to the consistent use of 

blanking panels, targeted air routing can be 

ensured in partially configured racks. 

Panel for monitors 

for monitors with screen diagonals of up to 17″ 

For mounting between 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles. Fitted with safety glass. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

U 

Installation 

height 

mm 

Packs 

of 

Model No. DK 

RAL 7035 RAL 9005 

1 44 2 7151.035 7151.005 

1,5 66 2 7157.035 – 

2 88 2 7152.035 7152.005 

3 132,5 2 7153.035 7153.0051) 6 266 2 7156.035 7156.0051) 1) Delivery times available on request. 


10 7151.110 

Material: 

Plastic 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


10 blanking panels with integral quick-fastening. 


9 7300.135 



Blanking plate, 482.6 mm (19″) 

For the installation in electronic enclosures or 

housings. 

Material: 

Aluminium, natural-anodised. 

Blanking plate, 

horizontally hinged 


housings. 

Material: 

3 mm aluminium, natural-anodised. 

Hinge: Die-cast zinc, zinc-plated 



Blanking plate, 

vertically hinged 


housings. 

Material: 

3 mm aluminium, natural-anodised. 

Hinge: Die-cast zinc, zinc-plated 



Hinge 

for blanking plates 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc, zinc-plated 



Ventilation front panels 

For venting enclosures and cases. 

Material: 

Aluminium, natural-anodised. 


U Packs of 

269.2 mm 

( 1 /2 19″) 

Patch panels 

Model No. VC 

482.6 mm 

(19″) 

1 3 3746.000 1931.200 

2 3 3747.000 1932.200 

3 3 3748.000 1933.200 

4 3 3749.000 1934.200 

6 3 – 1936.200 

7 3 – 1935.200 

9 3 – 1939.200 

12 3 – 1937.200 

Width U Packs of Model No. EL 

482.6 mm (19″) 3 1 1944.000 

482.6 mm (19″) 6 1 1945.000 


482.6 mm (19″) 3 1 1940.000 

482.6 mm (19″) 6 1 1941.000 


2 1950.000 



482.6 mm (19″) 1 3 2231.000 

482.6 mm (19″) 2 3 2232.000 

482.6 mm (19″) 3 3 2233.000 

393 

Patch panels

Splicing boxes 



Splicing cassette holder 

To accommodate differently sized splicing cassettes 

with variable cassette accommodation. Up 

to 8 splicing cassettes may be fitted in one holder. 

The splicing cassette holder can be flexibly 

secured to any mounting surface, and is particularly 

suitable for retro-fitting tor small fibre-optic 

distributors without patch panels. 

One extra holder may be fitted in small fibre-optic 

distributor DK 7452.035 

→ max.: 16 splicing cassettes. 

Two extra holders may be fitted in small fibreoptic 

distributor DK 7453.035 

→ max.: 32 splicing cassettes. 

Fibre-optic splicing box, 


The 482.6 mm (19″) splicing box is designed to 

accommodate splicing cassettes and can be 

installed in any network distributor with 482.6 mm 

(19″) accommodation and used as a fibre-optic 

termination or distributor. The variable cassette 

fixture permits twist-proof installation of all standard 

splicing cassettes. The rear section of the 

splicing box is completely open for cable entry; 

a rubber cable clamp strip provides protection 

against dust. The fibre-optic cables can be 

secured with cable ties or cable clamps. 

The splicing box is infinitely depth-adjustable up 

to 100 mm within the 482.6 mm (19″) flanges. In 

addition, the splicing box may be fully withdrawn 

from the 482.6 mm (19″) flanges. Two strain relief 

clips and cable routing clips for the fibre stock 

provide a solution to suit any fibre-optic wiring 

system. 

Patch panels 

for fibre-optic splicing box, depth-variable 

There is a choice of 9 panels with appropriate 

cut-outs for the installation of various fibre-optic 

couplings, together with 2 blanking panels for 

individual population or as a cover. 

The patch panels are fastened to the splicing box 

with quick-release fasteners. 

For coupling 

No. of 

locations 

Overall height 

mm 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Holder with threaded bolts, 

variable angle bracket, cassette cover, 

knurled nut and assembly parts. 


Height 

Threaded bolts 

mm 

Model No. DK 

93 85 7450.035 

U 

Maximum no. of 

splicing cassettes 

Model No. DK 

1 2 7241.005 

2 4 7242.005 



Installation depth: 

302 mm 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Splicing box, cable routing clips and cassette 

cover and assembly parts for patch panel. 

Note: 

Supplied without patch panel and splicing 

cassettes. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Model No. DK 

1 U 

No. of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

2 U 

ST 

12 

16 

7241.015 

7241.065 

24 7242.015 

E-2000, 

E-2000 Duplex2) or SC 

24 7241.024 – – 

SC Duplex 12 7241.045 24 7242.0451) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

2) For E-2000 Duplex only half of the locations are available. 

Other designs available on request.


Fibre-optic splicing box 

with telescopic pull-out 

lockable 

The 482.6 mm (19″) splicing box is designed to 

accommodate splicing cassettes and can be 

installed in any network distributor with 482.6 mm 

(19″) accommodation and used as a fibre-optic 

termination or distributor. The telescopic pull-out 

provides optimum access to the splicing cassettes 

and cable clamp. The variable cassette 

fixture permits twist-proof installation of all standard 

splicing cassettes. The security lock fitted at 

the front protects against unauthorised access. 

The rear section of the splicing box is completely 

open for cable entry; a rubber cable clamp strip 

provides protection against dust. The fibre-optic 

cables can be secured with cable ties or cable 

clamps; two strain relief clips and cable routing 

clips for the fibre stock provide a solution to suit 

any fibre-optic wiring system. 

Patch panels 

for fibre-optic splicing box, lockable 

There is a choice of 20 panels with appropriate 

cutouts for the installation of various fibre-optic 

couplings, together with 3 blanking panels for 

individual population or as a cover. 

For coupling 

Number 

of 

locations 


Model No. DK 

1 U 


U 

Maximum no. of 

splicing cassettes 

Model No. DK 

1 2 7170.535 

2 4 7470.535 

3 6 7570.5351) Other versions available on request. 

1) German patent no. 44 13 136 

Installation depth: 

363 mm 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Splicing box, cable routing clips, security lock 

and cassette cover, incl. assembly parts for patch 

panel. 

Note: 

Supplied without patch panel and splicing cassettes. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Number 

of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

2 U 

Number 

of 

locations 

Model No. DK 

3 U 

DIN 47 256 12 7173.535 1) – – – – 

ST 

12 

16 

7174.535 

7174.135 

24 7474.535 48 7574.535 

1) 

FC-PC 12 7175.5351) – – – – 

E-2000, 


20 7178.535 24 

7478.535 

48 7578.535 

SC Duplex 12 7169.535 24 7469.535 – – 

Blanking panel – 7179.535 – – – – 


2) For E-2000 Duplex only half of the locations are available. 



for fibre-optic cut-outs 

To cover unused cut-outs in patch panels. 

Material: 

Nylon 

Colour: 

Black 


SC, E-2000 

E-2000 Duplex 

20 

20 

7300.230 

SC Duplex 20 7300.240 

ST 20 7300.250 

395 

Splicing boxes




Fibre-optic breakout box 1 U 

For splice-free cabling of fibre-optic breakout 

cables. 

Cable bundles may be clamped on the hammer 

heads at the rear. 4 self-adhesive cable clips are 

supplied loose for cable clamping and for storing 

excess lengths inside the box. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Breakout box, 

cable routing clips, 

assembly parts for patch panel. 

Patch panels 

for fibre-optic breakout box 1 U 

There is a choice of 5 panels for the breakout box 

with appropriate cut-outs for the installation of 

various fibre-optic couplings, together with 

1 blanking panel for individual population or as 

a cover. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Fibre-optic splicing distributor 

Unlike the splicing box, the splicing distributor 

may optionally be installed inside or outside of 

network distribution enclosures. 

The splicing distributor is designed to accommodate 

fibre-optic splicing cassettes. These are 

mounted individually between mounting trays 

which can be stacked on top of one another as 

required. Strain relief for the cables and individual 

fibres is provided by cable ties. 

The basic unit can accommodated up to 

2 additional packs of 4 extension units 

DK 7381.035. 

Dimensions: 

W x H x D: 190 x 250 x 90 mm 

Threaded bolts: 

75 mm 

Fibre-optic splicing distributor 

extension unit 

Additional pairs of mounting trays, each of which 

can accommodate one splicing cassette and the 

fibre stock, are used to extend the splicing distributor. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Installation depth Model No. DK 

250 mm 7241.500 

For 

coupling 

No. of 

locations 

ST 12 

Model No. DK 

7241.015 

ST 

E-2000, 

16 7241.065 


24 7241.024 

SC Duplex 12 7241.045 

Blanking panel – 7241.0551) 1) Delivery times available on request. 

2) 10 installation positions are available for 

E-2000 Duplex. 


Fibre-optic splicing 

distributor 

Model No. DK 

7380.035 


Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


Base including one pair of mounting trays, lid 



2 7381.035 



Fixture with rods, 

3 U 

for LSA strips 


15 LSA profile dividing strips 2/10 on 2 rods, 

Ø 12 mm. 

The fixture unit may be integrated in all 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting levels. With cable clamp rail at the 

rear. 

Dimensions: 

W x H x D: 

482.6 mm (19″) x 132.5 mm (3 U) x 180 mm 

Support unit, 3 U 

for LSA-Plus strips, max. 150 paired wires 

To accommodate a maximum of 15 LSA-Plus 

strips (each with 10 paired wires). 3 x 5 LSA-Plus 

connection strips 2/10, series 2, may be installed 

horizontally. Strip length 124 mm, height pitch 

pattern 22.5 mm. The support unit may be integrated 

in all 482.6 mm (19″) mounting levels. The 

mounting level is recessed 75 mm behind the 

482.6 mm (19″) flanges. Integral shunting rings 

enable tidy routing and distribution of the telecommunication 

cables. 

Accommodation system, 2 U 

for LSA installation kit 

To accommodate LSA mounting troughs/cable 

retainers on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angle. 

Dimensions: 

Total depth: 98.5 mm 

Height: 2 U 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


LSA connection system 


3 7050.200 

Material: 

Side panels: Aluminium plates 

482.6 mm (19″) side panels/cross rail: 



Fixture with rods as modular system. 


3 7050.100 

Material: 



Support unit, 8 shunting rings. 


2 2 7050.035 

Accessories: 

FM universal mounting bracket, 

see page 230. 

397 

LSA connection system

Interface flaps 

Interfaces 



For universal use in all situations where rapid 

access to interfaces and sockets is needed. The 

affected enclosure remains closed and is therefore 

protected from ambient influences and unauthorised 

access. 

Space-saving installation e.g. 

● in small enclosures and compact enclosures 

as a programming interface for controllers 

● in IT and industrial enclosures as maintenance 

access for networks 

● in PC enclosures and console systems for 

the temporary connection of additional equipment 

● in mobile Industrial Workstations for rapid 

connection to existing network structures 

● in Command Panel systems for programming 

and maintenance of integral components. 

The mounting frame has a flap which snaps into 

position in various stages at opening angles of 

90 to 180°. A snap fastener ensures a reliable 

seal. This may be locked if required. 

An extensive selection of components facilitates 

individual configuration and provides the right 

solution to suit every application. 

Material: 

Mounting frame and metal flap: 

Fine die-cast zinc, matt nickel-plated 

Plastic flap: Polycarbonate (semi-transparent) 

Lock: Polycarbonate, RAL 7024 


IP 65 to EN 60 529 with sealed flap and proper 

assembly. 

Rittal service: 

Cut-outs and mounting in many Rittal enclosures. 

For detailed drawing and mounting 

dimensions, 

see page 420. 

Description 



1) 

Single, with plastic flap (semi-transparent) 1 2482.300 

Double, with plastic flap (semi-transparent) 1 2482.310 

Single, with metal flap 1 2482.320 

Double, with metal flap 1 2482.330 

Socket modules 

Germany (VDE), spring-action terminals max. 2 x 2.5 mm2 , connection at rear 1 2482.4003) Germany (VDE), screw terminals max. 6 mm2 , connection at rear, 

colour: yellow (RAL 1016), for installation in front of main switch 

1 2482.4103) Interface inserts 

2 x SUB-D9 (jack/pin) 1 2482.500 

SUB-D9 (jack/jack) 1 2482.510 

SUB-D9 (jack/pin), SUB-D25 (jack/pin) 1 2482.520 

SUB-D25 (jack/pin) 1 2482.530 

2 x USB version A (jack/jack) 1 2482.5402) RJ 45 (jack/jack, Cat. 5e), SUB-D9 (jack/jack), SUB-D9 (pin/pin) 1 2482.550 

2 x RJ 45 (jack/jack, Cat. 5e) 1 2482.5602) USB version A (jack/jack), RJ 45 (jack/jack, Cat. 5e), SUB-D9 (jack/pin) 1 2482.5702) 1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 RJ 45 (jack/jack, Cat. 5e), SUB-D9 (jack/pin), SUB-D25 (jack/pin) 1 2482.580 

16 

Blanking plate (slimline), for individual population, usable area: 45 x 75 mm 1 2482.590 

1) Electrically conductive. 

2) Conductively connected to mounting frame. 

3) Rated voltage: 250 V AC, rated voltage (DC/AC): 10 A/16 A 

All SUB-D interfaces may be rotated while in use. 

Other socket modules and interface inserts available on request. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 


399

400

Fully programmed 

for service 

Not only do Rittal develop convincing solutions; they have 

also developed a very special relationship with their custom- 

ers. This constructive dialogue from the very outset – from 

the initial idea through to its successful implementation – 

typifies the corporate culture at Rittal. At Rittal, we translate 

business-to-business as meaning face-to-face. Customers 

are our partners. Customer proximity is a living tradition. 

Pre-sales service, sales service, and after-sales service are 

a given. At every step of the way, we provide information and 

advice to help with planning and decision-making. En route 

to the perfect solution and long-term partnership, Rittal is 

measured in terms of its product and service performance. 

Moreover, important technical approvals provide protection 

from obsolescence. 

All this comes as standard at Rittal. 

EMC 

Play it safe with the Rittal range. 

Sophisticated standard products and 

accessory components protect from 

electromagnetic interference. 

Protection categories 

Every environment demands a specific 

type of protection – allow us to 

show you the current definitions. 

Rittal IT catalogue/Engineering/Consultancy 

Overview of standards 

Here, you will find the basic system for 

the mechanical configuration of electronic 

devices and their installation in 

data and telecommunications enclosures 

and cases. 

We show you the configuration for 

482.6 mm (19″) (to IEC 60 297) and 

metric (to IEC 60 917). 

Approvals from page 402 

Engineering and consultancy from page 407 

Heat dissipation ..............................................................................407 

EMC shielding.................................................................................409 

Server safety and security ..............................................................411 

Server configuration/integration......................................................412 

Server integration............................................................................413 

Load information for 482.6 mm (19″) racks ....................................414 

UPS .................................................................................................415 

Overview of standards 482.6 mm (19″)/metric ...............................418 

Overview of standards ETS 300 119-3 ...........................................419 

Overview of standards EIA-310-D/ 

Detailed drawing of interface flaps.................................................420 

Protection categories/NEMA classification.....................................421 

Protection 

Enclosures which are exposed to 

extreme dynamic loads such as earthquakes 

pose special requirements on the 

stability and strength of the enclosure 

construction, especially when these 

enclosures are populated with active 

components. We show you the potential 

risks and the corresponding solutions. 

401 

Engineering and consultancy

Approvals 

Approvals 



Approvals: 

● UL 

● C-UL 

Dimensions 

mm U 

Model No. 

Page 

Width Height Depth Type 2 

600 800 600 15 7821.100 38 

600 1000 600 20 7821.200 38 

800 1000 600 20 7821.240 38 

600 1200 600 24 7821.300 38 

800 1200 600 24 7821.340 38 

800 1200 800 24 – 

800 1200 900 24 7821.355 38 

800 1200 1000 24 – 

600 1400 600 29 7821.400 38 

600 1400 800 29 7821.410 38 

800 1400 600 29 7821.440 38 

600 1600 600 33 7821.500 38 

600 1600 800 33 7821.510 38 

800 1600 600 33 7821.540 38 

600 1800 600 38 7821.600 38 

600 1800 800 38 7821.610 38 

600 1800 900 38 7821.620 39 

800 1800 600 38 7821.640 39 

800 1800 800 38 7821.650 39 

800 1800 1000 38 7821.670 39 

600 2000 600 42 7821.700 39 

600 2000 800 42 7821.710 39 

600 2000 900 42 7821.720 39 

600 2000 1000 42 7821.730 39 

800 2000 600 42 7821.740 39 

800 2000 800 42 7821.750 39 

800 2000 900 42 7821.760 39 

800 2000 1000 42 7821.770 39 

600 2200 600 47 7821.800 39 

600 2200 800 47 7821.810 39 

800 2200 600 47 7821.840 39 

800 2200 800 47 7821.850 39 

800 2200 900 47 7821.860 39 

800 2200 1000 47 7821.870 39 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal AE 

Dimensions 

mm U Model No. DK Page 

Width Height Depth 

600 380 350 8 7641.000 60 

600 600 350 13 7643.000 60 

600 760 350 16 7645.000 60 

Approvals: 

● UL 

● CSA 


● BV 

● DNV 

● GL 

● MRS 

● TÜV 

● VDE 

402 Rittal IT catalogue/Engineering/Consultancy



Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part, pre-configured, depth 573 

Approvals: 

● UL 

● C-UL 

Approvals 

Dimensions 

mm U 

Model No. DK 

Page 

Width Height Depth With glazed door 

600 478 572.5 9 7709.735 62 

600 746 572.5 15 7715.735 62 

600 1012 572.5 21 7721.735 62 

Additional features of the pre-configured wall-mounted enclosure: 

Earth rail with star earthing, one outlet filter on both the left and right, 4 wall-mounting brackets. 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part, with punched rails, depth 473 

Dimensions 

mm U Model No. DK Page 


600 345 472.5 6 7706.135 63 

600 478 472.5 9 7709.135 63 

Approvals: 

● UL 

● C-UL 

600 612 472.5 12 7712.135 63 

600 746 472.5 15 7715.135 63 

600 878 472.5 18 7718.135 63 

600 1012 472.5 21 7721.135 63 

Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 3-part, with mounting plate, depth 373 and 473 

Approvals: 

● UL 

● C-UL 

● BV 

● CSA 

● DNV 

Dimensions 

mm U 

Model No. DK 

Page 

Model No. DK 

Page 

Width Height Depth 373 mm Depth 473 mm 

600 212 3 2243.605 64 2253.605 65 

600 345 6 2246.605 64 2256.605 65 

600 478 9 2249.605 64 2259.605 65 

600 612 12 2252.605 64 2262.605 65 

600 746 15 2255.605 64 2265.605 65 

600 878 18 2258.605 64 2268.605 65 

600 1012 21 2261.605 64 2271.605 65 

EMC wall-mounted enclosure, based on Rittal 

EL, 3-part 

Approvals: 

● TÜV 

● Norske Veritas 

● Russian Maritime Register of Shipping 

● BV 

● CSA 

● GL 

● LR 

● MRS 

● TÜV 

● VDE 

Dimensions 

mm U Model No. EL Page 


600 345 515 6 2256.7051) 67 


● GL 


● VDE 

● UL – Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 

for USA and Canada 

403 

Approvals

Approvals 

Approvals 


Wall-mounted enclosures, based on Rittal EL, 2-part, depth 369 

Dimensions 

mm U Model No. EL Page 


600 380 369 6 1919.500 66 

600 600 369 11 1920.500 66 

600 760 369 14 1926.500 66 

Approvals: 

● TÜV 

● Russian Maritime Register of Shipping 


● VDE 

Power 

● BV 

● DNV 

● GL 

Approvals Model No. DK Page 

Power Distribution Rack PDR DIN EN 60 439-1 

7857.300 

7857.310 

97 

Power Distribution Module PDM DIN EN 60 439-1 7857.320 97 

Power System Module PSM DIN EN 60 439-1 and UL 60 950-1 

Plug-in modules PSM 

Cooling 

Rack-mounted fans 

Air throughput 

unimpeded 

air flow 

320 m 3 /h 

480 m 3 /h 

No. of 

fans 

Distance 

between 

axes 

mm 

7856.010 

7856.020 

UL 60 950-1 

7856.070 

7856.080 100 

DIN EN 60 950-1 7856.100 

404 Rittal IT catalogue/Engineering/Consultancy 

Voltage 

V, Hz 

Model No. 

SK 

Approvals 

UL CUL VDE CCC 

2 85 24 (DC) 3340.024 1) 121 

2 85 115 (AC), 50/60 3340.115 1) 121 

2 85 230 (AC), 50/60 3340.230 121 

99 

Page 

3 85 24 (DC) 3341.0241) 121 

3 105 24 (DC) 3342.024 121 

3 85 115 (AC), 50/60 3341.115 121 

3 105 115 (AC), 50/60 3342.1151) 121 

3 85 230 (AC), 50/60 3341.230 121 

3 105 230 (AC), 50/60 3342.230 121 

3 105 


24 (DC) 

115 – 230 (AC), 

50/60 

3342.500 121


Cooling 

Vario rack-mounted fans 


unimpeded 

air flow 

320 m 3 /h 

480 m 3 /h 

No. of 

fans 

Distance 

between 

axes 

mm 

Voltage 

V, Hz 

Model No. 

SK 

Approvals 

Approvals 

UL CUL VDE CCC 

2 85 24 (DC) 3350.024 1) 121 

2 85 115 (AC), 50/60 3350.115 1) 121 

2 85 230 (AC), 50/60 3350.230 121 

Page 

3 85 24 (DC) 3351.0241) 121 

3 105 24 (DC) 3352.0241) 121 

3 85 115 (AC), 50/60 3351.1151) 121 

3 105 115 (AC), 50/60 3352.1151) 121 

3 85 230 (AC), 50/60 3351.230 121 

3 105 230 (AC), 50/60 3352.230 121 

3 105 


Liquid cooling package 

Cooling output 

Dimensions 

W x H x D 

mm 

24 (DC) 

115 – 230 (AC), 

50/60 

Voltage 

V, Hz 

3352.500 1) 121 

Model No. SK 

Approvals 

UL CUL GS 

LCP Standard (enclosure + 1 module) 

4000 W 300 x 2000 x 1000 230, 50/60 3301.230 130 

4000 W 300 x 2000 x 1000 115, 50/60 3301.210 130 

Fan-and-filter units 


unimpeded air flow 

105/120 m 3 /h 

105 m 3 /h 

180/160 m 3 /h 

180 m 3 /h 

230/265 m 3 /h 

230 m 3 /h 

550/600 m 3 /h 

700/720 m 3 /h 

Voltage 

V, Hz 


Model No. SK 

RAL 7035 

Approvals 

UL CUL CCC 

Page 

Page 

230, 50/60 3323.107 135 

115, 50/60 3323.117 135 

24 (DC) 3323.027 135 

48 (DC) 3323.0471) 135 

230, 50/60 3324.107 135 

115, 50/60 3324.117 135 

24 (DC) 3324.027 135 

48 (DC) 3324.0471) 135 

230, 50/60 3325.107 136 

115, 50/60 3325.117 136 

24 (DC) 3325.027 136 

48 (DC) 3325.0471) 136 

230, 50/60 3326.107 137 

115, 50/60 3326.117 137 

230, 50/60 3327.107 137 

115, 50/60 3327.117 137 

400/460, 3~, 50/60 3327.147 137 

405 

Approvals

Approvals 

Approvals 

Security 

Computer Multi Control Top Concept CMC-TC 

CMC-TC main products Packs of Model No. DK Page 

CMC-TC monitoring system Processing Unit II 1 7320.100 158 

CMC-TC sensor unit I/O Unit 1 7320.210 160 

CMC-TC sensor unit Access Unit 1 7320.220 161 

CMC-TC sensor unit Climate Unit 1 7320.230 161 

Approvals: 

● UL 60 950-1 

● CUL C 22.2 

Telecom 

Modular FM wall-mounted distributors 

Dimensions 

mm FM systems Paired wires Model No. DK Page 


600 600 350 2 sets max. 340 7011.535 227 

760 760 300 2 sets max. 500 7012.535 227 

800 1000 300 3 sets max. 990 7013.535 227 

800 1200 300 3 sets max. 1170 7014.535 227 

Approvals: 

● UL 

● CSA 


● DN 

Mobile workstations, Rittal RiLab II 

Dimensions 

mm Model No. DK Page 


Type 1 

714 820 625 7602.100 234 

Type 2 

Type 3 

714 1108 625 7602.200 234 

714 1428 625 7602.300 234 

Approvals: 

● TÜV tested safety 

● according to EU directive for medical products 

Fuel cell 

Width 

Dimensions 

mm 

Height Depth 

Approvals: 

● CE 

● NEBS Level 3 

● ANSI/CSA FC-1 

Power 

scalable 

W 


Voltage 

output 

Model No. CS Page 

694 1403 675 1000 – 3000 –48 V DC 9782.030 251 

694 1403 675 1000 – 5000 –48 V DC 9782.050 251

Basic guide to the selection 

of climate control components. 

The following information is required as the minimum: 

● The required temperature inside the ● The heat loss of the components . 

enclosure Titarget 

installed in the enclosure QV 

● The maximum ambient temperature ● The required protection category of the 

Tumax. 

enclosure (IP rating) 

● The size of the enclosure, the material 

from which it is made and the type of 

installation 

Basic selection: 

Titarget > Tumax 

Protection category 

IP 54 important 

Yes 

Titarget < or = Tumax. 

Cooling water circuit 

available at 

installation site 

No 

No 

Yes 

Ti = Required internal temperature of enclosure [°C] 

Tu = Ambient temperature of enclosure [°C] 

Design: 

● of the correct climate control component 

via calculation, according to the relevant 

formulae 


or 

● using a PC program (such as Rittal 

Therm) 

Engineering and consultancy 

Integrated louvres, air inlet/outlet grille 

Roof ventilation, fan-and-filter units 

Air/air heat exchanger 


Cooling unit 

Heat dissipation 

In order to achieve targeted, effective cooling, 

it is important to ensure correct calculation of the 

required climate control components and possible 

thermal analysis using computer-assisted flow 

models (CFD – Computational Fluid Dynamics). 

In this way, the risk of failure is reduced to a minimum. 

Rittal climate control components in conjunction 

with central monitoring and control via the 

CMC-TC monitoring system are a particularly 

effective way of achieving this. 

Basis for calculating 

enclosure climate control 

= Heat loss installed in the enclosure [W] 

= Heat emitted by the enclosure surface [W] 

> 0: Radiation (Ti > Tu) 

< 0: Irradiation (Ti < Tu) 

= Required cooling output of an enclosure 

cooling unit [W] 

= Required thermal output of an enclosure 

heater [W] 

= Specific thermal output of a heat exchanger 

[W/K] 

= Required volumetric airflow of a fan-andfilter 

unit to fall within the max. permissible 

temperature difference between air intake 

and air outlet [m3 /h] 

=Ti – Tu = Max. admissible temperature 

difference [K] 

= Effective, heat loss-dissipating enclosure 

surface area to IEC 890 [m2 ] 

= Heat transfer coefficient [W/m2K] in still air for sheet steel 

k = 5.5 W/m2 . 

QV 

. 

QS . 

QS . 

QS 

. 

QK 

. 

QH 

qw 

. 

V 

∆T 

A 

k 

K 

407 




Heat dissipation 

Fan-and-filter units 

Super-slimline, aesthetic, low-noise, fast assembly and high output – the super-slimline 

fan-and-filter units from Rittal. 

The requirement for use is that the ambient temperature must be lower than the desired 

enclosure internal temperature. 

The enclosure interior is cooled via the inflow of filtered external air and the dissipation 

of heated enclosure interior air. 

Heat exchanger 

Air/air heat exchangers utilise the ambient air to cool the air in the enclosure interior. 

Based on the counterflow principle, the completely separate airflows are routed through 

the heat exchanger module via high-performance fans. This prevents the ingress of 

dust from the environment into the enclosure interior. 

Cooling units 

By using modern cooling units, the enclosure internal temperature can be kept constant, 

irrespective of the ambient temperature. It is also possible to cool to below the 

ambient temperature. 

Optimum air circulation, leading to even temperature distribution inside the enclosure, 

is ensured thanks to the flow-optimised arrangement of the air inlet and outlet openings 

in the inner and outer air circuit of the cooling units. 

Recooling systems with air/water heat exchangers 

Recooling systems can be used in all situations where a high cooling output is required. 

They are tailored to the heat load of the equipment being cooled, in accordance with 

the customer’s specifications. 

Recooling systems are used for the dissipation of heat loss, for process and machine 

cooling, and for media cooling. Air/water heat exchangers cool the enclosure internal air 

via integration into an existing cooling water circuit or connection to a recooling system. 


What is meant by EMC? 

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the 

ability of an electrical appliance to operate 

satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment 

without adversely affecting this environment, 

which may also contain other 

equipment. 

High packaging densities in electronic 

assemblies and ever-increasing signal 

processing speeds often cause faults in 

complex electronic equipment, measurement 

and control systems, data processing 

and transmission systems and communications 

technology, which are attributable to 

electromagnetic influences. 

There are fundamental requirements for 

● Prevention/reduction of interference 

emissions 

● Defined immunity to interference 



The following definitions 

apply to immunity to 

interference: 

An item of electrical equipment is said to be 

immune to interference if interference factors 

(up to a certain limit) do not lead to malfunctions: 

● Function impairment: An impairment to 

proper functioning which is still permissible. 

● Malfunction: An impermissible impairment 

to proper functioning. The malfunction 

ends when the interference factor 

subsides. 

● Function failure: An impairment to proper 

functioning which is no longer permissible 

and which can only be eliminated e.g. 

by means of repair. 

Basic 

EMC terminology 

● Electromagnetic influence 

is the effect of electromagnetic factors on 

circuits, appliances, systems or living 

creatures. 

● Interference source refers to the origin of 

interference. 

● Potentially susceptible equipment refers 

to electrical equipment whose function 

may be affected by interference factors. 

● Coupling refers to the interaction between 

circuits, where energy can be transmitted 

from one circuit to another. Interference is 

the electromagnetic factor which may 

induce an undesirable influence in an 

electrical installation (interference voltage, 

current or field strength). 

EMC shielding 

Rittal’s extensive 

EMC range 

Interference can be fatal. Play it safe with the 

Rittal EMC range. Sophisticated standard 

products for EMC-compatible packaging of 

electrical, electronic and data communication 

components provide reliable protection 

against electromagnetic interference. 

Rittal EMC solutions are available as: 

● EMC subracks 

● EMC instrument cases 

● EMC wall-mounted enclosures 

● EMC enclosure systems 

and with a wide range of EMC accessories. 

Interference sources and 

interference 

Interference sources may be divided into: 

● Internal sources of interference 

− Artificial, i.e. technically induced 

● External sources of interference 

− Natural, e.g. lightning, electrostatic 

discharges 

− Artificial, i.e. technically induced 

With technically induced sources of interference, 

we distinguish between the effects 

of electromagnetic factors created and used 

for business factors (such as radio transmitters, 

radar etc.) and electromagnetic factors 

which occur within the context of business or 

in the event of a failure which are not generated 

for the purpose of use (e.g. spark discharges 

on switch contacts, magnetic fields 

around heavy currents etc.). 

Interference may take the form of voltages, 

currents, electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic 

fields which may either occur continuously, 

periodically, or randomly in a 

pulse shape. 

● The most interference-intensive temporary 

events are caused in low-voltage networks 

by the switching of inductive loads, 

e.g. power tools, household electrical 

appliances, fluorescent lamps. 

● The most dangerous overvoltages 

(according to level, duration and power 

content) are caused by deactivating fuses 

in the event of a short-circuit (duration in 

the millisecond range). 

409 




EMC shielding 

Electrostatic discharges 

When solid materials rub against one 

another, electrostatic charges may arise 

which are rapidly discharged on conductive 

surfaces but which may persist for a long 

time on less conductive surfaces. 

Upon contact with conductive parts, the 

electrostatic voltages associated with such 

charges in non-conductors may cause interference 

or even destruction in electronic 

components as discharge current (conducted 

interference). Additionally, during 

Source of 

interference 

Enclosure/RF shielding 

High-frequency electrical currents and voltages 

in electronic circuits may initiate electromagnetic 

waves (e.g. mobile radio transmission 

stations, radar, as well as industrial 

high-frequency installations such as microwave 

drying, bonding and welding). 

These, in turn, may generate interference 

voltage in cables or directly in electronic 

assemblies via enclosure openings. 

Every metal enclosure already offers good 

basic shielding within a broad frequency 

range, i.e. attenuation of electromagnetic 

fields. 

High shielding attenuation levels in the frequency 

range above approx. 5 MHz can be 

achieved via special seals which conductively 

connect the conductive inner surfaces 

of doors and removable panels, roof and 

gland plates to the conductive sealing 

edges of the enclosure body or frame, 

largely in a slot-free manner. The higher the 

frequencies occurring, the more critical 

openings in the enclosure become. 

Radiation 

discharge, an electromagnetic pulse is 

irradiated, representing field-bound interference. 

Electrostatic discharges from humans onto 

control components and enclosures are particularly 

significant. The voltages occurring 

in such cases may be up to 15000 V, with 

discharge currents of up to 5 A, and current 

rise rates of up to 5 kA/µs. 

The risk of malfunctions or damage is increased 

by poorly conductive floor coverings 

and low air humidity. 

Conductance 

Coupling 

Potentially 

susceptible 

equipment 

Field-bound interference (low frequency) 

Very low-frequency currents cause a lowfrequency 

magnetic field which may induce 

interference voltage or initiate interference 

via direct magnetic effects (magnetic memory 

in computers, sensitive electromagnetic 

test equipment such as EEG). Low-frequency 

electric fields of high intensity may 

be generated by low-frequency high voltages 

(high-voltage overhead cables), resulting 

in interference voltage (capacitive interference). 

Of practical significance are magnetic 

fields, the effects of which can be 

reduced via 

● Shielded cables 

● Shielding enclosures (the decisive material 

property is that of permeability, which 

is too low in the case of sheet steel; nickel 

iron, for example, is much better). 

● Distance from the field source. 

Influence mechanisms and 

counter-measures 

Interference model 

Electrical devices which operate in an electromagnetic 

environment with other devices 

may be both transmitters and receivers of 

interference energy. The transmission of 

electrical energy from one circuit to another 

is known as coupling. 

We make a distinction between 

the following coupling mechanisms: 

● Conducted influence 

● Field-bound influence 

● Low-frequency field influence 

● Radiation influence 

Conducted interference 

refers to interference voltages and currents. 

The principal causes lie in the mechanical 

switching of electrical equipment (particularly 

inductive loads such as motors, transformers, 

throttling via electronic systems). 

Coupling of interference source and potentially 

susceptible equipment can occur via 

various “routes”. Galvanic, inductive, capacitive 

or wave interference are the relevant 

terms. 

Interference radiation (high-frequency) 

Interference can be reduced via: 

● Shielded cables 

● Shielding enclosures (Faraday cage!) 

Radiation of security-relevant data 

(TEMPEST temporary emanation and 

spurious transmission) 

The electromagnetic transmission of messages 

and data which must be protected 

from unauthorised access and the risk of 

accidental destruction can likewise be 

significantly minimised by a high shielding 

effect. 


Earthquake risk 

Enclosures which are subject to extreme 

dynamic loads, such as earthquakes, place 

correspondingly high demands on the stability 

and strength of the enclosure design, 

especially where the enclosures accommodate 

active components. 

In connection with earthquake risks, the 

standards applied by the American telephone 

companies – Network Equipment- 

Building System (NEBS), Telcordia Technologies 

(formerly BELLCORE) Generic 

Requirements GR-63-CORE – have become 

established worldwide, since their test 

specifications cover practically the whole 

contents of other standards. 

The geographical regions of a country are 

allocated to an appropriate earthquake risk 

zone. The Telcordia risk zones (see below) 

refer to the United States and divide the 

country into zones numbered 0 – 4. Zone 0 

designates regions with no earthquake risk, 

zone 4 regions where considerable earthquake 

activity is to be expected. 

We generally recommend that earthquakeproof 

enclosures should be tested on a 

customer-specific basis, i.e. using the customer’s 

own installed equipment. Important 

information for the design and testing of 

earthquake-proof enclosures include: 

● Earthquake zone in which the enclosure 

is to be used 

● Max. weight of the installed components 

● Method of component installation (mounting 

plate, 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles, etc.) 

● Are there any limitations with regard to 

dimensions? (earthquake resistance often 

entails selection of a wider or deeper 

enclosure version) 

Rittal will be happy to advise you on the 

configuration of your earthquake-proof 

enclosure. 


2 

2 


The German standards, on the other hand, 

define only three zones, though these are 

essentially equivalent to the zones 1 and 2 of 

the Telcordia specifications. 

1 

3 

3 

4 

3 

4 

1 Zone 4 door reinforcement 

2 TS 8 standard frame 

3 Zone 4 corner reinforcement 

4 Zone 4 diagonal reinforcement 

5 Zone 4 horizontal reinforcement 

6 

Zone 4 base/plinth 

3 

4 

2 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

2 

2 

Server safety and security 

Rittal TS 8 standard enclosures with mounting 

plates were tested at the University of 

Bristol by the independent institute EQE 

International Ltd. on the basis of Telcordia 

GR-63-CORE. TS 8 standard enclosures with 

a weight load of 150 kg (installed on the 

mounting plate) subsequently received certification 

of their suitability for use up to zone 

3. Certification for zone 4 with up to 490 kg 

was obtained by fitting special earthquake 

accessories. 

1 

4 

2 

3 

0 

0 

2 

1 

2 

2 

4 

5 

6 

1 

411 




Server configuration/integration 

Configuration of a server 

rack 

The following points need to be considered 

when selecting a suitable rack for the integration 

of servers and other active components, 

in order to guarantee an optimum 

solution for the individual customer-specific 

application. 

Rack configuration 

Rittal offers pre-configured server racks 

which are tailored especially to the demands 

of server integration: 

● Vented doors for optimum server ventilation 

● Roof plate for cable entry 

● Quick-release side panels (optional in 

some cases) 

● 19″ attachment levels 

● Levelling feet 

● Castors (optional in some cases) 

● Stabilisers (optional in some cases) 

Rittal also offers a comprehensive range of 

accessories which enable each customer to 

configure an individual server rack. 

Rack dimensions 

The server depth is a particularly important 

criterion for rack selection. The depths 

900 mm, 1000 mm and 1200 mm have 

proven particularly suitable for the installation 

of most models. These depths not only 

accommodate the server itself, but also provide 

the necessary space for cable management 

to the rear of the rack. 

The rack dimensions (height x width x 

depth) must also be matched to the available 

floor space. 

Server integration accessories 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Universal server installation kit, 482.6 mm (19″) 

● for distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels 

of 750 mm 

Various mounting adaptors for accommodating 

customer-specific installation kits 

Depth-variable slide rail, 1 U 


of 390 – 930 mm 

Telescopic slides (for full withdrawal) 

Depth-variable mounting kit 



of 390 – 1000 mm 

482.6 mm (19″) component shelves 

● for static installation 

● for full extension 

(additionally with telescopic slide) 

Manufacturer-specific installation kit 

19″ mounting level 

Servers are generally installed in the rack on 

the front and rear 482.6 mm (19″) levels, 

whereby L-shaped 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles or 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frames are preferable for attachment purposes. 

Cranked mounting angles are not 

generally suitable for server installation. 

The integrated U markings on the mounting 

angles serve to facilitate installation within 

the 482.6 mm (19″) level. 


Cable entry into a rack can be from below, 

from above or from the sides. It is furthermore 

important to bundle the cables in the 

rack itself and to route them in such a way 

that any heat build-up and the resultant 

server failures can be reliably avoided. To 

this end, Rittal offers an extensive range of 

cable management products, 

including: 

● Roof and gland plates with cable routing 

options 

● Protected cable routing via cable ducts 

in co-location racks 

● Partitions with openings for cable entry 

● Cable shunting rings, clamp rails, cable 

management ducts etc. 


In order to avoid heat accumulation inside 

the server rack, heat dissipation must be 

ensured, and can be additionally assisted: 

● Passive enclosure ventilation with slotted 

front and rear doors to the server rack. 

● Active enclosure ventilation – the Rittal fan 

cross member provides for selective ventilation 

of critical hot-spots in the server 

rack. It is mounted directly on the slotted 

server door. 

● Climate management for the server rack 

via CMC-TC to monitor temperature limit 

values and to control fan and cooling units 

to maintain as constant a temperature as 

possible. 

● High Performance Cooling Racks (HPC) 

in conjunction with heavy-duty heat 

exchangers for climate management in 

the high-performance range. 


Most standard server models are supplied 

with manufacturer-specific installation kits, 

which are then generally attached to the 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles at the front 

and rear of the rack. Not all installation kits, 

however, are depth-variable, and some 

manufacturers offer housings which cannot 

be mounted on the front and rear 482.6 mm 

(19″) angles. The following Rittal products, 

furthermore, can be used to enable mixed 

configurations of different types in one rack: 

● Universal server installation kit with mounting 

adaptor for different servers and 482.6 

mm (19″) distance between levels 

● Depth-variable slide rails 

● Depth-variable installation kits for 

482.6 mm (19″) component shelves 

● 19″ component shelves, 50 kg, 80 kg and 

100 kg load capacity 


1 

6 

2 

7 

3 

4 

5


Z 

V 

V V 

Y 

W 

Cranked 

section 

U 


A 

B 

C 


A 

B 

C 

Y 

Installation dimensions 

(Y) 

(X) 

L-shaped 

section 

X 

(Y) 

W 

X 

Z 

A Inner clearance width 

B Mounting dimension of the 

equipment 

C External dimension of the 

equipment or front panels 

Section dimensions 

L-shaped section 



mm 


Installation widths 

Installation 

A B C 

width 

mm mm mm 

19″ 450 465 482.6 

21″ 500 515 533.4 

23″ 552 567 584.2 

24″ 577 592 609.6 

10″/39 HP 221.4 236 254 

1 

/2 19″/42 HP 236.6 251.2 269.2 

9.5″ 208.7 223.3 241.3 

18 SU 450 465 485 

20 SU 500 515 535 

Material 

TS 8 600/800 Steel 2 19.5 29 – 61.5 

Cranked section 


mm 

Material 

TS 8 600/800 Steel 2 19.5 29 20 61.5 



mm 

Material 

TS 8/FR(i)/TE 600/800 Steel 30.5 2 43 52.5 41.5 68.5 

TS 8 

Enclosure 

width 

mm 

Enclosure 

depth 

mm 

Max. distance 

between 482.6 mm 

(19″) levels (X) 

mm 

V 

mm 

V 

mm 

U 

mm 

Min. clearance (Y) 

front mm rear mm 

600 600 512 42.5 42.5 

600 800 712 42.5 42.5 

600 900 812 42.5 42.5 

800 600 512 42.5 42.5 

800 800 712 42.5 42.5 

800 900 812 42.5 42.5 

800 1000 912 42.5 42.5 

800 800 674 61.5 61.5 

800 600 474 61.5 61.5 

800 1000 874 61.5 61.5 

800 1200 1074 61.5 61.5 

600 900 851 23 23 

600 1000 951 23 23 

600 1200 1151 23 23 

600 600 468.5 64.2 64.2 

600 800 668.5 64.2 64.2 

600 900 768.5 64.2 64.2 

600 1000 868.5 64.2 64.2 

600 1200 1068.5 64.2 64.2 

800 600 468.5 64.2 64.2 

800 800 668.5 64.2 64.2 

800 1000 868.5 64.2 64.2 

800 

FR(i) 

1200 1068.5 64.2 64.2 

600 800 634 42 121 

TE 

600 1000 836 42 119 

600 1200 1036 42 119 

800 800 559 119 119 

800 1000 759 119 119 

600 600 495 47 52 

600 800 695 47 52 

600 900 795 47 52 

600 1000 895 47 52 

800 600 495 47 52 

800 800 695 47 52 

800 900 795 47 52 

800 1000 895 47 52 

W 

mm 

W 

mm 

V 

mm 

W 

mm 

X 

mm 

X 

mm 

X 

mm 

Y 

mm 

Y 

mm 

Attachment 

Y 

mm 

to TS punched section 

with mounting flange, 

17 x 73 mm, inner level 

on support strips 

on installation brackets 

to TS punched section 

with mounting flange, 

17 x 73 mm, with slot 


Mounting frame/ 

mounting angle 



Z 

mm 

Z 

mm 

Z 

mm 

413 




Load information for 482.6 mm (19″) racks 

TS 8 

800 mm wide 600 mm wide 

4/6 depth stays1) Depth stays1) Holder Holder 

19″ levels 4 6 7827.480 7698.000 Castors Levelling feet 

Bracket 

7496 – 7498.000/7396 – 7698.000 

600 mm 

800 mm 

Installation at the 

centre/side 

600/800 mm wide 

with levelling feet 

with mounting frame 

7856.7XX 

1 1500 N 1750 N 2000 N 500 N 2000 N 4000/5000 N 1500 N 800 N 800 N 5000 N 

2 3000 N 3500 N 4000 N 1000 N 2000 N2) 8000/10000 N 3000 N 1600 N 1600 N 10000 N 

FR(i) 800 mm wide 

600 mm wide 

Inner level 

19″ levels Holder 7827.480 Castors Levelling feet 

600/800 mm wide 

with levelling feet 

with mounting frame 

7856.7XX 

1 2000 N 2000 N 5000 N 5000 N 

2 4000 N 2000 N 10000 N 10000 N 

TE 7000 

800 mm 

wide 

600 mm 

wide 

TE 7000 

Server Rack 

19″ levels 2 2 2 

1 2000 N 2000 N 3500 N 

2 4000 N 4000 N 7000 N 

1) Theoretical value, because the torsion of the mounting angles in an attachment level depends to a large extent on the centre of gravity of the installed device 

and hence becomes the actual weak point. No significant increase in load can be achieved through the use of additional depth stays. 

The general load data of 50 N/U per attachment level is not met by all enclosures shown here! 

2) 7500 N with transport kit DK 7825.900 


Clarification of the term 

“UPS” 

UPS stands for uninterrupted power supply. 

UPS classification to 

IEC 62 040-3 

The standard IEC 62 040-3 is a classification 

system for the unique classification of 

both current and future UPS technologies. 

As the UPS classifications to IEC 62 040-3 

are not yet widely known among those interested 

in UPS systems, here is a brief introduction 

to this topic. 

The first of three stages in the standard 

addresses the dependency of the UPS 

output on the input, i.e. the mains current. 

There are three categories in this level, 

which largely correspond to the old classification 

of stand-by, line-interactive and 

online/double-conversion. 

The second and third stages of the IEC 

standard define the voltage curve and the 

dynamic tolerance curves of the UPS output. 

Each of these stages has three values 

to allow a more detailed classification of the 

UPS. 

Criteria for 

UPS classification 

As a general rule, IEC 62 040-3 only 

assesses the dependency of the output on 

the input. The decisive factor is the voltage 

quality obtained at the supply output under 

certain operating conditions. 

VFD: 

Voltage and Frequency Dependent 

VI: 

Voltage Independent 

VFI: 

Voltage and Frequency Independent 



UPSs are used to stabilise the supply network 

of critical equipment. The quality of the 

supply voltage is decisively linked to the 

stability of a productive environment. A UPS 

prevents the failure of the supply voltage 

ΥΠΣ 

as well as undervoltage, overvoltage and 

supply fluctuations. If a high autonomy is 

required, a generator is connected to the 

UPS. 

Voltage problems Time IEC 62 040-3 UPS solution 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

UPS classification: Code 

Stage 1: 

Dependency 

of the output on 

the input 

UPS classification: Typical values 

V 

F 

I 

Maximum category, ideal! 

V 

V 

Power failure 

Voltage fluctuations 

Voltage peaks 

Undervoltage 

Overvoltage 

Voltage transients 

Voltage surges 

Frequency fluctuations 

Voltage distortions 

Harmonics 

I 

F 

D 

> 10 ms 

< 16 ms 

< 16 ms 

continuous 

continuous 

intermittent 

< 4 ms 

intermittent 

periodic 

continuous 

Stage 2: 


wave form 

S 

S 

S 

S 

X 

Y 

VFD 

VI 

VFI 

Stage 3: 

Dynamic 

response at 

the output 

1 

1 

3 

Class 3 

Off-line 

Class 2 

Line-interactive 

Delta conversion 

Class 1 

On-line 

Double conversion 

1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

415 




UPS 

1. VFD-UPS, old: Off-line (standby) UPS 

Functional description: 

In undisturbed operation, the current is 

conveyed from the mains to the connected 

devices (computers) by the UPS with no 

voltage conversion. Parallel to this, the batteries 

are charged via a rectifier. If voltage 

fluctuations or power failures occur, the offline 

UPS automatically switches to battery 

mode, and from the energy in the batteries a 

supply voltage is formed via the inverter. The 

changeover to battery mode occurs within 

approx. 2 – 4 ms, i.e. virtually without interruption. 

Protection from: 

● Power failure/mains failure 

● Voltage drop/voltage dip 

● Voltage surges 

1 

1 Mains 

2 Rectifier 

3 Inverter 

4 Changeover switch 

5 Battery 

6 Equipment 

2. VI-UPS, old: Line-interactive UPS (off-line UPS + AVR) 


Unlike the off-line UPS the line-interactive 

UPS offers a more stable output voltage, 

thanks to the additional use of an AVR unit 

(automatic voltage regulator). 





● Undervoltage 

● Overvoltage 

1 

1 Mains 

2 Rectifier 

3 Inverter 


5 Battery 

6 Equipment 

~/= =/~ 


2 

2 

5 

AVR 

Application area: 

● PCs and peripheral devices 

● Emergency lights 

● Small TC installations 

~/= =/~ 

5 

3 

Normal operation 

In case of mains failure 


● PCs and small servers 

● Larger telecommunications systems 

● Smaller server systems and networks 

3 



4 

4 

6 

6



3. VFI-UPS, old: On-line UPS, or also: Continuous converter/double converter 

(double-conversion) UPS 


On-line UPSs continuously supply the connected 

equipment (PC/server) with converted 

voltage. The voltage is converted 

from AC to DC, which is also used to charge 

the batteries, and back again. In normal 

mode (even in the event of mains malfunctions), 

this ensures that the equipment has 

a constant supply, and for this reason, online 

UPSs are also known as continuous converters. 

In the event of a UPS overload or 

malfunction only, the equipment is linked 

directly to the mains via the “by-pass”. 





● Undervoltage 

● Overvoltage 

● Frequency fluctuations 

● Switching peaks 

● Harmonics 

● Interference voltage 

1 

1 Mains 

2 Rectifier 

3 Inverter 


5 Battery 

6 Equipment 

2 

~/= =/~ 

5 

3 

4 

UPS 


● Protection of high-risk applications in an 

environment with frequent interference to 

the supply network 

● Highly-sensitive network servers and data 

communication systems 



In case of a UPS malfunction/ 

overload 

6 

417 




Overview of standards 482.6 mm (19″)/metric 

19 ″ Metric 

19″ system to 

IEC 60 297 

(482.6 mm 

system) 

Y 

Metric 

system 

to IEC 60 917 

(25 mm system) 

IEC 60 297-1/2 

Enclosures 

IEC 60 917-2-1 

DIN 41 494 Cases 

IEC 60 297-3 

Subrack 

IEC 60 917-2-2 

DIN 41 494 System enclosures 

IEC 60 297-3 

Plug-in assemblies 

IEC 60 917-2-2 

DIN 41 494 Box type plug-in units 

IEC 60 297 IEC 60 297 Cards 

IEC 60 603-2 IEC 61 076-4-100 Connectors 

DIN 41 494 

Part 8 

Front units 

IEC 60 297-3 IEC 60 917-2-2 Backplanes 

31.75 – 0.4 

12.7 – 0.4 

12.7 – 0.4 

44.45 = 1 HE 

Below, we outline the basic system for the mechanical configuration 

of electronic devices and their installation in data and telecommunications 

enclosures and cases. There are two international standards 

series available. 

Y = Pitch pattern of holes to DIN 41 494, part 1 and IEC 60 297-1 

additionally with universal holes to EIA-RS-310-D 


D max. 

D3 min. D4 min. 

S 

R 

1 

1 

W2 

W3 

Section showing standard dimensions 

W2 min. 

W1 min. 

1 Space for door or trim panel 

2 Space for external cable entry 

3 Rail level 

1) Space for possible accessories 

Dimensions for universal racks 

H Height 1800/2000/2200 1800/2000/2200 

W Width 600 600 

D Depth 300 600 

H1 Mounting height of the assembly 1600/1800/2000 1600/1800/2000 

SU 66/74/82 66/74/82 

W1 Installation width for the assembly 535 535 

W2 Distance between mounting angles 500 500 

W3 Hole-centre distance 515 515 

D1 Mounting depth for the assembly (front) 40 75 

D2 Mounting depth for the assembly (rear) 240 470 

R Mounting position 12.5 12.5 

S Hole distance (centered) 25 25 

D3 Mounting depth for the door or trim panel (front) 10 25 

D4 Mounting depth for the door or trim panel (rear) 5 25 


2 

D1 

min. 1) D2 min. 1) 

3 


Overview of standards ETS 300 119-3 

H1/SU 

H 

D 

W1 

W 

419 




Overview of standards EIA-310-D/detailed drawing 

EIA-310-D (Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment) 

The EIA-310-D standard sets out general 

design requirements for cabinets, panels, 

racks and subracks. Essentially, these are 

the inner and outer dimensions in order to 

ensure exchangeability of the accommodation 

systems. 


Page 398 

open 

lock 

52 

For enclosures and open frames, the standard 

describes three types: 

● Type A: without restrictions to the external 

dimensions width, height, depth, with 

25 mm pitch patterns, the internal widths 

and heights should conform to IEC. 

● Type B: Restriction of the external and 

internal dimensions, all accessories (walls 

+ mounting parts, roof + feet/castors, 

doors + locks) must remain within the 

specified dimensions. 

1 91 

● Type C: Restriction only in relation to the 

width dimensions; deviations in the height 

and depth for the accessories are admissible. 

All Rittal IT cases conform to the EIA-310-D 

standard as Type A enclosures. 

Interface flap, single Mounting cut-out 

Interface flap, double Mounting cut-out 

Approx. 120 

Approx. 116 

Approx. 65 

Appr. 

21 

Appr. 38 

Permissible material thickness: 1 – 5 mm 

1 Contact surface 

Approx. 16 

Appr. 7 

max. R2 

Appr. 12 

Appr. 7 

Approx. 120 

Approx. 116 


open 

lock 

Approx. 130 

open 

lock 

Approx. 61 Approx. 61 

Appr. 

21 

Appr. 35 

Approx. 16 

max. R2 

Approx. 7 

117 

Appr. 12 

1 91 

Appr. 7 

Appr. 12

Protection categories to EN 60 529/IEC 60 529 



Protection categories 

The IP protection category is characterised by 2 numbers. 

Degrees of protection for protection against contact and foreign bodies: 

Degrees of protection for protection against water: 

First characteristic numeral 

Second characteristic numeral 

First 

charac- 

Degree of protection 

Second 

charac- 

Degree of protection 

teristic 

numeral 

Description Explanation 

teristic 

numeral 

Description Explanation 

0 Non-protected – 0 Non-protected – 

1 Protected against solid foreign The object probe, a sphere 

objects with a diameter of 50 mm in diameter, must not 

50 mm and greater 

penetrate fully1) 1 Protected against vertically Vertically falling drops shall 

falling water drops 

have no harmful effects. 

. 

2 Protected against solid foreign The object probe, a sphere 

objects with a diameter of 12.5 mm in diameter, must not 

12.5 mm and greater 

penetrate fully1) 2 Protected against vertically Vertically falling drops must not 

falling water drops when the have any harmful effects when 

. 

enclosure is tilted up to 15° the enclosure is tilted up to 15° 

The articulated test finger may 

in both directions from the ver- 

penetrate up to its length of 

80 mm, but adequate clearance 

distance must be adhered 

to. 

tical. 

3 Protected against solid foreign 

objects with a diameter of 


4 Protected against solid foreign 

objects with a diameter of 


The object probe, a sphere 

2.5 mm in diameter, must not 

penetrate at all 1) . 

The object probe, a sphere 

1.0 mm in diameter, must not 

penetrate at all 1) . 

5 Dust-protected The ingress of dust is not fully 

prevented, but dust must not 

enter to such an extent as to 

interfere satisfactory operation 

of the device or safety. 

6 Dust-tight No ingress of dust at a partial 

vacuum of 20 mbar inside the 

enclosure. 

1) Note: The full diameter of the object probe shall not pass through an opening of the enclosure. 

3 Protected against spraying 

water 

4 Protected against splashing 

water 

Water sprayed at an angle of 

up to 60° on either side of the 

vertical shall have no harmful 

effects. 

Water splashed on the enclosure 

from every direction must 

not have any adverse effects. 

5 Protected against water jets Water directed at the enclosure 

from every direction in a jet 

must not have any harmful 

effects. 

6 Protected against powerful 

water jets 

NEMA and IP protection categories are not comparable with one another, because they use completely different test criteria. 

NEMA 1 

Indoor siting: Protects against falling dirt. 

NEMA 2 

Indoor siting: Protects against falling dirt, 

dripping and lightly splashed liquids. 

NEMA 3 

Indoor or outdoor siting: Protects against 

falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow and windblown 

dust; also protects against damage from 

external icing on the enclosure. 

NEMA 3R 


falling dirt, rain, sleet and snow; also protects 

against damage from external icing on 


NEMA 3S 


falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow and windblown 

dust; the external mechanisms also remain 

operational when ice laden. 

NEMA 4 


falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow, wind-driven 

dust, splashing and hose-directed water; 

also protects against damage from external 

icing on the enclosure. 

NEMA 4x 


falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow, windblown dust, 

splashing and hose-directed water, and corrosion; 

also protects against damage from 

external icing on the enclosure. 

NEMA 5 


settling airborne dust, lint, fibres and airborne 

cotton dust as well as dripping and 

light splashing of liquids. 

NEMA 6 


falling dirt, hose-directed water and the 

ingress of water during occasional, temporary 

submersion at a certain depth; also protects 

against damage from external icing on 


Water directed at the enclosure 

from every direction in a powerful 

jet must not have any harmful 

effects. 

NEMA classification 

The National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) is a standards organisation in Washington, USA, which publishes a number of 

technical standards but does not test or certify products itself. 

The following NEMA classifications outline the protection of individuals from unintentional contact with equipment and the protection of an 

enclosure from external factors. 

NEMA 6P 


falling dirt, hose-directed water and the 

ingress of water during protracted submersion 

at a certain depth; also protects against 

damage from external icing on the enclosure. 

NEMA 12 


circulating dust, lint, fibres and air-borne 

cotton dust as well as dripping and light 

splashing of liquids. 

NEMA 13 


circulating dust, lint, fibres and air-borne 

cotton dust and against spraying, splashing 

and seepage of water, oil and non-corrosive 

coolants. 

421 


Rittal – Global IT News 2007 

New solutions to improve your IT performance 

Progress is a dynamic process. To remain perfect, things 

need to evolve. There is no perfection without optimisation. 

Rittal repeatedly sets new standards when it comes to 

improving your IT performance. The philosophy is clear: 

Optimum solutions are not considered relevant unless their 

development incorporates the technical requirements of the 

future. Thinking ahead, rather than playing catch-up, is the 

best way of helping customers to move forward. 

With this in mind, Rittal offers permanent progress to optimise 

your IT performance at every stage. Innovative solutions 

provide the foundation in every area. Comprehensive 

monitoring and top-of-the-range security are essentials. 

Rittal offers smart packaging, UPS, open distribution frames, 

FlatBox, wireless sensor technology and video monitoring 

for the future – scalable and modular. 

CONTENT 

IT News from page 423 

Networking..................................................................................... 423 

Server racks................................................................................... 429 

Power ............................................................................................. 432 

Cooling........................................................................................... 435 

Security .......................................................................................... 436 

Monitoring ...................................................................................... 445 

System accessoires....................................................................... 448 


Benefits: 

● Configured to order 

● No frame structure, maximum 

cable routing 


Material: 

Sheet steel 

Rittal IT News/Networking 


Network enclosures, based on Rittal TE 7000, metric attachment levels 


Nanoceramic coating, electrophoretic 

dipcoat-priming, 

powder-coating in RAL 7035. 


Self-supporting metric frame 

structure, 




T 

B 

H 

SU 

20 SU 

sheet steel door at the rear, 



plug-in side panels with security 

lock 3524 E, 

base frame with maximum cutout 

(for optional population with 

module plates), roof plate for 

cable entry with concealed cutout 

for fan, spacers for raising 

the cover plate, levelling feet. 

A 



SU 76 82 

Width (B) mm 2) 600 600 

Height (H) mm 2) 2000 2200 

Depth (T) mm 2) 600 600 

Metric distance between levels as delivered A 

495 495 

Model No. TE 7000.508 1) 7000.568 1) 

Model No. TE as bayed enclosure without side panels, including baying kit 7000.504 1) 7000.564 1) 

1) Delivery times on request. 2) All sizes given are nominal dimensions. For absolute dimensions, please refer to the detailed drawing on the Internet. 

A 495 mm – This is the dis- Size systems 

Explanation of the mounting dimensions 

tance between the two metric 

levels for all enclosure formats 

in their delivered state. 



The distance between levels 

is freely selectable via the 

slot fastening. 


600 

600 

A 

25 

12.5 

A 

B 

Installation 

width 

A 

B 

C 

A 

mm 

B 

mm 

C 

mm 

20 SU 500 515 535 

A = Clearance width 

B = Mounting dimension 

C = External dimension of slide-in equipment 

or front panel 

423 

Innovations

Innovations 



Material: 

Sheet steel 












Enclosure frame with doors or 

rear panel, roof plate, vented 

base/plinth 100 mm, 

earthing of all enclosure panels 

424 Rittal IT News/Networking 

T1 

H3 

B2 

T2 

B1 

H1 

H2 



adaptor, 



frame level, 





V7 

Glazed front door, vertically 

divided, 180°, sheet steel rear 

door, vertically divided, 180°. 



between levels pre-configured at 

498 mm. 

Cranked mounting angles screwfastened 

to installation brackets 

approx. 150 mm behind the 

frame front edge. 

Gland plate at the front, fitted as 

an infill panel. 



U 42 

Width (B1) mm 800 

Height (H1 + H2) mm 2000 + 100 


Clearance width (B2) mm 712 

Clearance height (H3) mm 1912 

Clearance depth (T2) mm 712 

Model No. DK as bayed enclosure without side panels, including baying kit TS 8800.500 V7 7830.260 

Accessories Page 

Two plug-in side panels, with security lock 3524 E 7824.208 266 

Wall-mounted enclosure, 

based on Rittal EL, 3-part, 

pre-configured, depth 673 

Material: 




3 mm safety glass. 

Colour: 

Wall and hinged part: Powder-coated in RAL 7035 

Glazed door: RAL 7035/7015 (slate grey). 


Max. IP 43 to EN 60 529/10.91 

when using solid gland plates. 




Wall section: 

With vertical punched rails and C rail mounted 

horizontally for cable clamping, top cable gland 

plate solid, bottom cable gland plate with brush 

strips, earthing rail with star earthing, wall mounting 

bracket 10 mm. 

Hinged part: 

With 25 mm pitch pattern of holes in the front and 

rear frame, two 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 

mounted on C rails, infinitely depth-variable, one 

outlet filter each on the left and right side. 


With 3 mm single-pane safety glass window, 

9 + 15 U with mini comfort handle for lock inserts, 

21 U with comfort handle and 2-point locking, 


U Packs of 9 15 21 

Width (B1) mm 600 600 600 

Height (H1) mm 478 746 1012 

Depth (T1) mm 673 673 673 



Depth of wall section (T2) mm 135 135 135 

Depth of hinged part (T3) mm 516 516 516 


Model No. DK 1 7709.535 7715.535 7721.535 

Load capacity, hinged part (kg) 45 75 75

Benefits: 

Unlimited applications covering 

all tasks in the IT sector. Both as 

a network distribution frame with 

maximum accessibility from all 

sides for assembly and installation, 

and as a server rack with a 

high load capacity of up to 

700 kg. Unrestricted airflow, 

thanks to the open design. 

The standard cable trays in the 

roof area mean that even large 

quantities of cables are easily 

routed to the various levels without 

kinks. 


In a bayed configuration, the 

800 mm width in particular 

offers plenty of space for cable 

routing between units. 

There is an extensive range of 

accessories available for individual 

cable management solutions. 

The distance between attachment 

levels is infinitely variable. 

HE/SU 

19 /535 

T 

B 

H 

Material: 

Sheet steel 




700 kg 

HE 

19 


T 

TE 7000 open 

B 

H 


Self-supporting frame structure, 

with a 482.6 mm (19″) or metric 

attachment level front and rear 

depending on the design. 

Open roof frame for cable entry, 

3 cable routing trays. Open 

base frame with 2 punched 

sections with mounting flanges 

for individual configuration in the 

width, levelling feet. 



U/SU 42/76 47/82 42/– 47/– 

Width (B) mm 600 600 800 800 

Height 3) (H) mm 2000 2200 2000 2200 

Depth (T) mm 1000 1000 1000 1000 

Distance between levels (mm) as delivered 745 745 745 745 

Model No. TE with 482.6 mm (19″) attachment level 7000.940 7000.942 7000.944 7000.946 

Model No. TE with metric (535 mm) attachment level 7000.9601) 7000.9621) – – 

482.6 mm (19″) accessories Packs of 

Cable management panel 482.6 mm (19″), 1 U for horizontal cable routing, 

with 5 steel rings, zinc-plated, passivated, size 100 x 37 mm 

1 7257.035 7257.035 7257.035 7257.035 


with 5 steel rings, zinc-plated, passivated, size 120 x 80 mm 

1 7257.100 7257.100 7257.100 7257.100 

Shunting rings to accommodate large quantities of cables, 

for mounting on the side of the mounting frame, dimension 300 x 90 mm 

2 7220.600 7220.600 7220.600 7220.600 


with removable front panel 

1 7158.100 7158.100 7158.100 7158.100 

Component shelf 482.6 mm (19″), 1 /2 U static installation, 

depth-variable in the range from 600 – 900 mm 

1 7063.720 7063.7202) 7063.720 7063.720 

Slide rail 482.6 mm (19″), load capacity 100 kg, 

for distance between 482.6 mm (19″) levels (internal) 740 mm 

2 7063.740 7063.7402) 7063.740 7063.740 

Slide rail 482.6 mm (19″), 

depth-variable in the range from 390 – 600 mm, load capacity 80 kg 

2 7063.882 7063.8822) 7063.882 7063.882 

Slide rail 482.6 mm (19″), 

depth-variable in the range from 590 – 930 mm, load capacity 80 kg 

2 7063.883 7063.8832) 7063.883 7063.883 

C rail, variable within the range 450 – 850 mm 1 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 

T-head rail, variable within the range 450 – 850 mm 1 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 

Cable route for vertical cable management, for mounting at the side rear 

of the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame, W = 100 mm, H = 1700 mm 

1 set 7000.685 7000.685 7000.685 7000.685 


2) Not suitable for use with a metric attachment level. 

3) Plus 100 mm roof-mounting/cable-routing trays. 

425 

Innovations

Innovations 


FlatBox features 

Pre-assemble the base frame, locate into 

the attachment points on the wall, and 

secure. 

The levelling feet allow the FlatBox to be 

used as a desktop enclosure, e.g. in measurement 

and control technology, or as an 

underdesk enclosure in the form of a small 

network node. 

The innovative concept behind the FlatBox unites optimised 

storage and shipping costs with cleverly designed, tool- 

less, fast one-person assembly. As you would expect, 

Rittal prides itself on details. Compatible with the extensive 

range of existing system accessories, it can be used as a 

wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure. Unrestricted 

accessibility during the installation of network components. 

The width and depth dimension of 700 mm provides plenty 

of space for use as a patch distributor. Small networks with 

active technology are also ideal for climate control via the 

fan panels (maximum of 8). 

Configuration of the open enclosure is now 

possible. 

Slide the roof and base plates into position, 

Optimum cable entry via brush strips top 

and bottom, plus plenty of space for cable 

distribution in the enclosure depth. Even 

active components with pre-assembled 

connectors may be routed. 

insert the side panels, locate and lock the 

door, and it’s done! 

If the FlatBox is used as a floor-standing 

enclosure, levelling feet are fastened to the 

base. 

The snap connection system facilitates 

toolless enclosure assembly. Once 

clipped into place, a very stable enclosure 

is created with a high static load capacity 

of 5 kg/U or a maximum of 75 kg. 

426 Rittal IT News/Networking

Material: 

Sheet steel 



With 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles at the front 

and glazed door 



Flat-packed enclosure, 

1 wall section, 2 basic supports, 

2 roof/base plates, with cut-outs 

for cable entry, with brush strips, 

2 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

angles (for 6 U and 9 U), 

Packs 

of 

T 

B 

H 

1 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frame (from 12 U), 

4 levelling feet (from 12 U), 

2 side panels, lockable, 

1 glazed door, lockable, 

door hinge point selectable. 

U 6 9 6 9 

Width (B) mm 600 600 600 600 

Height (H) mm 358 492 358 492 

Depth (T) mm 400 400 600 600 


FlatBox 

Earthing kit for system-compatible 

earthing of the enclosure 

panels. 

Components for toolless, fast 

assembly. 

Model No. DK 1 7507.000 7507.010 7507.100 7507.110 

Accessories 

19″ mounting angles as 2nd attachment level, 6 U 2 7507.706 – 7507.706 – 428 

19″ mounting angles as 2nd attachment level, 9 U 2 – 7507.709 – 7507.709 428 

Levelling feet 4 7507.740 7507.740 7507.740 7507.740 428 

Cover plates for fan panels 6 7507.760 7507.760 7507.760 7507.760 428 

Earth rail 1 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 338 

C rail for cable clamping 1 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 456 

T-head rail for cable clamping 1 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 456 

Fan, 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 117/135 m3 /h, 

air throughput, unimpeded airflow 

1 7980.100 7980.100 7980.100 7980.100 127 

Fan, 48 V DC, 184 m3 /h, air throughput, unimpeded airflow 1 7980.148 7980.148 7980.148 7980.148 127 

Thermostat 1 3110.000 3110.000 3110.000 3110.000 144 

With 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame at the front 

and glazed door 

Packs 

of 

U 12 15 12 15 18 21 

Width (B) mm 600 600 600 700 700 700 

Height (H) mm 625 758 625 758 892 1025 

Depth (T) mm 400 400 600 700 700 700 

Model No. DK 1 7507.020 7507.030 7507.120 7507.200 1) 7507.210 1) 7507.220 1) 

Accessories 

19″ mounting angles as 2nd attachment level, 12 U 2 7507.712 – 7507.712 – – – 428 

19″ mounting angles as 2nd attachment level, 15 U 2 – 7507.715 – 7507.715 – – 428 

19″ mounting angles as 2nd attachment level, 18 U 2 – – – – 7507.718 – 428 

19″ mounting angles as 2nd attachment level, 21 U 2 – – – – – 7507.721 428 

Cover plates for fan panels 6 7507.760 7507.760 7507.760 7507.760 7507.760 7507.760 428 

Earth rail 1 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 7113.000 338 

C rail for cable clamping 1 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 7016.140 456 

T-head rail for cable clamping 1 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 7016.150 456 

Fan, 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 117/135 m3 /h, 

air throughput, unimpeded airflow 

1 7980.100 7980.100 7980.100 7980.100 7980.100 7980.100 127 

Fan, 48 V DC, 184 m3 /h, air throughput, unimpeded airflow 1 7980.148 7980.148 7980.148 7980.148 7980.148 7980.148 127 

Thermostat 

1) Pre-configured variant available on request. 

1 3110.000 3110.000 3110.000 3110.000 3110.000 3110.000 144 

Page 

Page 

427 

Innovations

Innovations 


Accessories for FlatBox 


L-shaped bracket as 2nd attachment level. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Assembly parts for fast, toolless assembly. 


M10 x 20 mm 

For fastening onto the enclosure base when used 

as a floor-standing or desktop enclosure. 

Width across flats 17, mounting thread multi-tooth 

30. 

Cover plates for fan panels 

To cover unused fan panels when using fans in 

the FlatBox. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 






6 2 7507.706 

9 2 7507.709 

12 2 7507.712 

15 2 7507.715 

18 2 7507.718 

21 2 7507.721 

Note: 

The 2nd attachment level should always be 

ordered in the same height as the basic enclosure. 

Partial configuration is not possible. 


4 7507.740 


6 7507.760 

428 Rittal IT News/Networking

Material: 

Sheet steel 







or RAL 9005 



Rittal IT News/Server racks 


Enclosure frame TS 8 with sheet 

steel doors, vertically divided, 

vented front and rear, 

depth-variable 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frame front and rear, 

levelling feet, comfort handle 

with security lock and 4-point 

lock. 

T 

Server racks 


1 

B 

H 

Fitted with standard lock 3524 E. 

Enclosure panel earthing 

already prefitted. Two-piece roof 

plate, with sliding plate and 

rubber cable clamp strip for 

cable entry. Without or with side 

panels in colours RAL 7035 and 

RAL 9005. 

Design features: 



vented; 180°; vented surface 

area 78 % perforated 

● 4-point locking 


to opposite side without any 

machining 


base 





1 Optimised air flow. 

Open surface area 78 % 

perforated. 

Number of front and rear doors 2 (vertically divided) 2 (vertically divided) 2 (vertically divided) 2 (vertically divided) 

U 42 42 42 42 

Width (B) mm 800 800 800 800 

Height (H) mm 2000 2000 2000 2000 

Depth (T) mm 1200 1200 1200 1200 

Model No. DK 7831.489 7831.499 7831.580 2) 7831.590 2) 

RAL colour 

Doors 

7035 7035 9005 9005 

Sheet steel doors, vented, front and rear1) 

Plug-in side panels with T lock 

Roof 

– – 

Roof plate, two-piece with rubber cable clamp strip for cable entry 

Base 

 

Open base, without base frame 



 

482.6 mm (19″) level, front and rear 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames, front and rear 

Load capacity 1000 kg 

Panel earthing, fitted 

Accessories 

 

Security lock for side panels 7824.500 7824.500 8601.802 7824.500 

Base/plinth components, front and rear, solid 8601.805 8601.805 8601.802 8601.802 

Base/plinth trims 8601.025 8601.025 8601.026 8601.026 

Base mounting bracket 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 8800.210 

Stabiliser, pull-out 7825.260 7825.260 7825.260 7825.260 

Included with the supply. 1) Open surface area in perforated plate part 78 %. 2) Delivery times available on request. 

429 

Innovations

Innovations 

Server racks 

Smart Package, pre-configured 

2 

3 

1 Roof plate for cable entry, two-piece 

2 Comfort handle 

3 Sheet steel door, vented 

4 Base/plinth with levelling feet 

5 482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames 

6 

PSM busbar with plug-in modules 

5 

6 

1 

4 

3 

The Smart Package racks based on the successful TS 8 

enclosure system provide the ideal basis for your IT infra- 

structure. 

These server racks are equipped with the power distribution 

concept PSM (Power System Module). 

Additional accessories for assembly and cable routing are 

supplied loose. 


frame 

Thanks to the two 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting frames, the rack 

has a high load capacity of 

1000 kg in the 482.6 mm (19″) 

level. The distance between 

levels of the two 482.6 mm (19″) 

frames are adjustable to the 

required dimensions of the 

installation kits supplied by the 

server manufacturers, enabling 

the installation of virtually any 

type of server. 

Doors/walls 

The fully vented front and rear 

doors with an open surface area 

of 78 % in the perforated plate 

part ensure that the air path of 

the servers is not restricted. Hot 

air is able to escape easily at the 

rear. Thanks to the 4-point locking 

of the doors (door hinge may 

be swapped for 130° hinges) 

and the screw-fastened side 

panels, the installed equipment 

is protected from unauthorised 

access. 

With the TS comfort handle system 

for semi-cylinders, the lock 

supplied may be exchanged at 

any time for a customer-specific 

model. 

Plug and play 

power distribution 

The plug & play power distribution 

concept PSM (Power System 

Module) is pre-integrated 

and fitted with selected modules 

in the factory. It may be 

extended at any time with up to 

4 modules with various connector 

configurations. The required 

connection cables to supply the 

busbar with power are also 

included with the supply. 


Cable entry is via the base/plinth 

or the divided roof plate. In 

order to be able to begin server 

integration immediately, additional 

accessories for assembly, 

cable routing and attachment 

are supplied loose. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 




enclosure panels dipcoatprimed 

and powder-coated in 

RAL 7035 (light grey) 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame: 


Design features: 



vented; open surface area 

78 % in the perforated plate 

part 

● 4-point locking of the doors 



● Side panels screw-fastened 

from the inside 

● Cable routing via the roof and 

base 



● PSM busbar 2 m, for up to 

7 PSM modules 

430 Rittal IT News/Server racks

Rittal IT News/Server racks 

Server racks 

Smart Package, pre-configured 

Smart Package – pre-configured server racks with power distribution concept PSM 

(Power System Module) 

A4 A5 A6 A7 

U 42 42 42 42 

Width mm 600 800 600 800 

Height mm 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 2000 + 100 

Depth mm 1000 1000 1200 1200 

Model No. DK (German version, with earthing-pin plug-in module) 7337.440 7337.450 7337.460 7337.470 

Model No. DK (international version, without earthing-pin plug-in module) 


Doors 

7337.445 7337.455 7337.465 7337.475 

Sheet steel doors, vented, front and rear1) 

Comfort handle for semi-cylinder front and rear, including security lock 3524 E 

Side panel 

 

Side panels, screw-fastened 

Roof 

 

Roof plate with rubber cable clamp strip for cable entry, two-piece 

Base 

 

Base/plinth, solid, with levelling feet 

Base frame to accommodate optional gland plates 

Interior installation Model No. DK 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frames front and rear 

Central earthing connection point 7829.200 

Earthing of all enclosure panels 7529.150 

PSM busbar (Power System Module) 7856.020 

Mounting kit for PSM busbar 7856.011 

2 x plug-in modules EN 60 320 C13 (IEC 320 connector) 7856.080 

1 x plug-in module, earthing-pin type (German version only) 

Supplied loose 

7856.100 

PSM connection cable, 3-phase 7856.025 7856.025 7856.025 7856.025 

PSM connection cable, single-phase 7856.026 7856.026 7856.026 7856.026 

10 x cable shunting rings 125 x 65 mm/nylon loops 200 mm 7072.230 7111.000 7072.230 7111.000 

10 x 1 U blanking panel, toolless attachment 7151.110 7151.110 7151.110 7151.110 

2 x 1 U cable management panel 7257.035 7257.035 7257.035 7257.035 

20 x cable lock for EN 60 320 C13/C14 connectors 7856.013 7856.013 7856.013 7856.013 

50 x 482.6 mm (19″) slot-in cable gland 2094.400 2094.400 2094.400 2094.400 

Accessories (available to order separately) 

Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U with 15″ TFT display, touchpad (German) 9055.100 9055.100 9055.100 9055.100 

Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U with 15″ TFT display, touchpad (English) 9055.102 9055.102 9055.102 9055.102 

SSC compact, Economy 8-port KVM switch 7552.010 7552.010 7552.010 7552.010 

Supply connection cable for SSC compact 7200.210 7200.210 7200.210 7200.210 

CPU cable 2 m (with interlocking PS/2 connectors) for SSC compact 7552.120 7552.120 7552.120 7552.120 

CPU cable 4 m for SSC compact 7552.140 7552.140 7552.140 7552.140 

Component shelf 700 mm, 482.6 mm (19″) population, heavy duty, 100 kg 7063.897 7063.897 7063.897 7063.897 

Installation kit, depth-variable, for component shelf, 100 kg 7063.890 7063.890 7063.890 7063.890 

Telescopic slide, 100 kg 7066.700 7066.700 7066.700 7066.700 

Slide rail, depth-variable, 590 – 930 mm, 50 kg 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 

1/2 U component shelf, pull-out, 600 – 900 mm, static installation 7063.720 7063.720 7063.720 7063.720 

PSM plug-in module, 6 x EN 60 320 C13 IEC 320 equipment 7856.080 7856.080 7856.080 7856.080 

PSM plug-in module, EN 60 320 C19 x 4 7856.230 7856.230 7856.230 7856.230 

PSM plug-in module, 4 x earthing-pin 7856.100 7856.100 7856.100 7856.100 

PSM light module (portable light) 

Pre-configured. 

7856.210 7856.210 7856.210 7856.210 

1) Open space in the perforated plate part 78 %. 

431 

Innovations

Innovations 

Power 

Power System Module PSM/Power Distribution Module PDM 

PSM busbar 

Single- and three-phase design with 32 A 

phase current. 


● Single- and three-phase design with a max. 

current of 32 A per phase, 1 x 32 A or 

3 x 32 A, 400/230 V, 50/60 Hz 

● Accommodates up to 6 passive PSM modules 

● Integral circuit-breaker 16 A, Class C 

● Modules may be retrofitted whilst the system is 

operational 


Busbar with CEE-conforming connector, 

assembly parts, instructions. 

Active PSM 6-way, 

individually switchable 

For further details, see page 101. 

Material: 




1 bus cable, 

1 infeed cable 24 V DC. 

PDM socket strip 

Socket strip for the direct connection of 

single-phase equipment to a 

Power Distribution Module PDM 

482.6 mm (19″) power distributor with threephase 

infeed. The standard plug & play connection 

cables may be used. Each group of three colour-coded 

connectors is supplied by one phase. 

Benefits: 

● Simple connection of single-phase equipment 

when using PDM 

● Compatible with standard plug & play connection 

cables 

● Prepared for the connection of LCP, CMC-TC, 

SSC etc. 

Enclosure 

height 

mm 

Number 

of modules 

Model No. DK 

single-phase three-phase 

2000 6 7856.321 7856.323 


Mounting kit, 

see page 99. 

PSM plug-in module, 

see page 100. 

Accessories: 

PSM cable lock, 

see page 100. 


2 x C13 and 4 x C19 7856.204 

2 x C13 and 4 x earthing-pin 7856.203 


In stand-alone mode without CMC-TC, a separate 

power pack (100 – 240 V AC/24 V DC) is required 

(DK 7201.210) 

together with the corresponding connection 

cables, see page 102. 


6 x C13/3 x earthing-pin 7857.325 


Input: 

Mains voltage: 400 V/50 Hz, three-phase 

Rated current: 16 A per phase 

Connection: X-Com connector 

Output: 

Mains voltage: 230 V/50 Hz, single-phase 

Rated current: 10 A per phase 

432 Rittal IT News/Power

DK 7857.430, DK 7857.431, 

DK 7857.432 


Single-phase UPS systems in 

double-conversion technology 

(VFI-SS 111) with internal “hot 

swap” compatible batteries, 

USB and serial interface. 

Rittal IT News/Power 

Power 

UPS, single-phase, output range 1 – 12 kVA N+1 redundant 

DK 7857.433, DK 7857.434 


Single-phase UPS systems in 

double-conversion technology 

(VFI-SS 111), USB and serial 

interface. 


Replacement battery packs and 

AS 400 interface adaptor. 

UPS for 482.6 mm (19″) racks 

or as floor-standing enclosures 

UPS with integral battery UPS control unit 

Model No. DK 7857.430 7857.431 7857.432 7857.433 7857.434 

VA 1000 2000 3000 4500 6000 

Power 

Watts 700 1400 2100 3150 4200 

Max. heat loss (W) 105 210 252 315 420 

Rated voltage 230 V (160 – 288 V) 

Input 

Frequency 50/60 Hz ±5 % 

Power factor > 0.99 with linear load 

Voltage 230 V ð ±1 % (200/208/220/230/240 V adjustable) 

Frequency, synchronised ± 1 Hz 

Frequency, asynchronous ±0.1 % ±0.1 % ±0.1 % ±0.2 % ±0.2 % 

Crest factor 3 : 1 

Output 

Non-linear distortion ð 7 % ð 7 % ð 7 % ð 6 % ð 6 % 

Wave shape ð 3% 

Operating ratio, AC mode 85 % 85 % 88 % 90 % 90 % 

Operating ratio, battery mode 83 % 83 % 85 % 87 % 87 % 

Power factor 0.7 

Battery 

Overload 

Communication 

Mechanics 

Operating environment 

Standards and 

certifications 

5 years EUROBAT 5 years EUROBAT 5 years EUROBAT 5 years EUROBAT 5 years EUROBAT 

Autonomy at 100 % load Š 7 min Š 7 min Š 5 min Š 12 min Š 8 min 

105 % continuous 

120 % 30 sec 30 sec 30 sec 160 sec 160 sec 

150 % 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 160 sec 160 sec 

Interface 1 x USB, 1 x RS232 

SNMP Optional SNMP card DK 7857.420 

Operating systems supported Windows, Unix, Linux, OS/2, Novell, Apple; RCCMD shutdown licence DK 7857.421 

Emergency Power Off (EPO) 

Width mm 440 

Height mm 88 

Depth mm 405 650 650 660 660 

Weight kg 15.7 29.4 29.7 24 24 

Input connection 230 V 10 A C14 10 A C20 Compact connector Compact connector 

Output connection 230 V 6 x 10 A, C13, 2 units switched 

The UPS is distinguished by 

the use of double-conversion 

technology. 

Double-conversion technology 

provides the basis for an optimum 

supply voltage to all connected 

loads. This means that 

the Rittal PMC 12 UPS is ideally 

suited to all applications in the 

IT environment, as well as for all 

other requirements such as 

medical technology, automation 

technology, plant control etc. 

A scalable autonomy of up to 2 h 

at 100 % load ensures a broad 

spectrum of applications. 


Country-specific connection 

cables and slide rails are 

required to operate the UPS 

systems. 

4 x 10 A, C13, 

2 units switched 

1 x 16 A, C19 

Humidity 0 – 90 %, non-condensing 

Noise level 50 db (A) 

Safety IEC/EN 62 040-1, EN 60 950-1 

Rittal Power Modular Concept 

PMC 12 

● Double conversion technology 

VFI-SS 111 

● For use as a rack or floorstanding 

enclosure with 90° 

rotating LCD display 

● 2 U high 

● Serial/USB interface and 

Emergency Power Off (EPO) 

contact 

● Batteries “hot swap” compatible, 

may be exchanged from 

the front 

● Integral batteries with 1– 3 kVA 

● External batteries with 4.5 kVA 

and 6 kVA 

● Parallel switching 4.5 kVA and 

6 kVA UPS up to 12 kVA N+1 

redundant 

● Optional SNMP card 

For DK 7857.433, DK 7857.434 

Parallel Hot Swap Chassis 

(DK 7857.443 or DK 7857.444). 

External 3 U battery pack 

(DK 7857.442). 

Compact connector Compact connector 

Power IEC/EN 62 040-3 

EMC EN 50 091-2/EN 62 040-2 class A, EN 61 000-4-2/-3/-4/-6-8/-11, EN 61 000-3-2/-3 

Labelling CE, FCC, cUL 

433 

Innovations

Innovations 

Power 

UPS, single-phase, output range 1 – 12 kVA N+1 redundant 

Accessories for Model No. DK 7857.430 7857.431 7857.432 7857.433 7857.434 

External bypass1) 6) 7857.439 7857.440 7857.441 – – 

Battery pack2) 7857.435 7857.436 7857.437 7857.442 7857.442 

Parallel Hot Swap Chassis for 2 UPS systems3) – – – 7857.443 7857.443 

Parallel Hot Swap Chassis for 3 UPS systems3) – – – 7857.444 7857.444 

PDM for PMC 124) – – – – 7857.445 

SNMP card 7857.420 7857.420 7857.420 7857.420 7857.420 

RCCMD shutdown licence 7857.421 7857.421 7857.421 7857.421 7857.421 

Connection cable for 4.6 and 6 KVA5) – – – 7857.446 7857.446 

Connection cable, UPS, single-phase 7856.027 7856.027 – – – 

Connection cable, UPS, single-phase, C20 – – 7856.030 – – 

Slide rail, depth-variable 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 7063.883 

5) Not required when using the Hot Swap Chassis – see 3) . 6) Extended delivery times. 

Block diagram parallel redundant UPS DK 7857.433/.434 

Source Load 

Sub-distributor 482.6 mm (19″) 

UPS, modular 

The distributor may be fitted directly in the UPS 

PMC 200 rack. This allows a compact complete 

system to be realised with a 0.6 m 2 footprint that 

contains a rack-mounted modular UPS PMC 200, 

batteries and distributor. 

The sub-distributor is installed in the rear area of 

the rack where the PSM busbars (installed in the 

racks) are attached directly using connectors. 

Twelve three-phase outlets are available on the 

distributor, meaning that a maximum of twelve 

racks can be supplied. In addition, 10 A circuitbreakers 

are integrated for each phase. These 

components are perfectly tailored to the UPS systems 

PMC 200 up to 20 kW N+1. The 12-way subdistributor 

is designed for use in conjunction with 

the modular UPS systems PMC 200. The server 

racks can be attached directly using plug & play 

technology with connection cables DK 7857.1XX. 

1) External bypass: 

The external bypass allows the UPS to be 

swapped with the system operational. 

2) Autonomy (min.) at 100 % load: 

UPS type 

In 

supplied state 1 

Battery packs 

2 3 

1 kVA 7 min 1:09 h 2:13 h – 

2 kVA 7 min 34 min 1:09 h – 

3 kVA 5 min 30 min 1:02 h – 

4.5 kVA – 12 min 31 min 54 min 

6 kVA – 8 min 20 min 36 min 

3) Parallel Hot Swap Chassis: 

The Parallel Hot Swap Chassis for the 4.5 kVA and 

6 kVA module allows up to 3 UPS systems to be 

connected together. This can be used to boost 

output and to achieve N+1 redundancy. An external 

bypass is additionally integrated into the 

Parallel Hot Swap Chassis. 

4) PDM for PMC 12: 

Single-phase power distribution for use with the 

Parallel Hot Swap Chassis DK 7857.444. The PDM 

offers the opportunity of connecting two singlephase 

32 A CEE connectors and four 

EN 60 320 C19 16 A connectors. All outputs have 

pre-fuses. 


19″, 6 U 7857.372 


UPS systems Rittal Power Modular Concept 

PMC 200 up to 20 kW N+1, 

see page 104. 


● 482.6 mm (19″), 6 U 

● 12 outlets, 3-phase 400 V/50 Hz with 10 A 

● On-load isolator for disconnecting 

● Circuit-breaker 10 A per phase 


482.6 mm (19″) modules, 6 U, instructions 

Note: 



Plug & play connection cable to the server racks: 


3 m 1 7857.130 

5 m 1 7857.150 

8 m 1 7857.180 

9 m 1 7857.190 

434 Rittal IT News/Power

For office applications. 

Special internal air routing conveys 

the cold air directly from 

the front 482.6 mm (19″) level 

and can then be drawn in 

directly by the active installed 

equipment. The cold air temperature-dependent 

control effectively 

prevents condensation. 


Cooling 

Roof-mounted cooling unit, useful cooling output 3000 W 


Nano-coated condenser and 

integral condensate evaporation. 

Fully wired ready for connection, 

including drilling template, 

eyebolt and assembly 

parts. 

Model No. SK with Comfort controller 3301.800 

Rated operating voltage V, Hz 230, 50/60 


. 

Useful cooling output QK 

to DIN 3168 

WHD 

L 35 L 35 

L 35 L 50 

515 x 400 x 990 

3000 W/3200 W 

2400 W/2550 W 

Rated current max. 10.7 A/10.2 A 

Start-up current 19.0 A/19.0 A 

Pre-fuse gG Motor circuit breaker 10.0 A/10.0 A 


L 35 L 35 1200 W/1500 W 

to DIN 3168 

. 


L 35 L 50 

L 35 L 35 

1400 W/1750 W 

2.5 







IP 34 

IP 54 



Weight 80 kg 



/h 

1420 m3 /h 



Filter mats 3 3286.600 148 

Metal filters 1 3286.610 Cat. 31, p. 669 

Quick-change frame 1 3286.900 146 



RiDiag II including cables for Comfort controller 1 3159.100 Cat. 31, p. 1063 





Delivery times on request. Special voltages available on request. Technical modifications reserved. 

392 

990 

692 

515 

400 

435 

Innovations

Innovations 

Security 


Increasingly complex IT infrastructures demand innovative 

security systems. Rittal offers a wireless sensor network for 

wireless security. The sensors are encrypted and operate in 

the 2.4 GHz ISM band with innovative chirp technology. 

Benefits: 

● Cabling to the sensor is 

eliminated 

● Large range of applications 

thanks to high IP protection 

category and temperature 

range 

● Secure, encrypted radio transmission 

● ISM band (2.4 GHz) suitable 

for universal use 

● Networking capabilities (TCP- 

IP, SNMP, Web etc.) with the 


● Flexible, modular design 

● Maintenance-free with long 

battery operating period 

● Simple installation based 

on the plug & play system 

● Monitoring of the radio 

connection to the sensor 

● Monitoring of the battery 

status 

Wireless I/O Unit/ 

repeater 

2 

1 

Humidity sensor 

Temperature sensor Access sensor 

1 Processing Unit II (PU II) 

2 Sensor Unit 

3 

Wireless I/O Unit 

3 

LAN 

Thanks to the CMC-TC system concept, all security-relevant 

information may be incorporated into the network manage- 

ment system or is available on the intranet/Internet. 

Modular 

The wireless sensor network is comprised of a central Wireless 

I/O Unit, and the wireless sensors. One Wireless I/O Unit is capable 

of managing up to 16 wireless sensors via radio. Users can choose 

between 4 sensors with different monitoring functions, in any given 

combination. 

The wireless sensor network is compatible with the CMC-TC monitoring 

system, which is based on Processing Unit II (PU II). 

Several sensor units (I/O Unit, Access Unit, Climate Unit, FCS, 

socket strips, etc.) are available for the PU II. Up to 4 sensor units 

may be connected to one PU II. 

The Wireless I/O Unit is connected to the PU II via a Cat 5 cable and 

can also be mixed with the existing sensor units. Up to a maximum 

of 4 Wireless I/O Units may be connected to one PU II. In total, therefore, 

up to 64 wireless sensors (4 x 16) may be operated with one 

PU II. The CMC-TC system with the PU II is always required in order 

to operate the wireless sensor network. In this way, the monitoring 

information may be processed and displayed in the Ethernet via 

SNMP, Web, FTP etc. It is also possible to connect cabled sensors 

to wireless sensors and compile modular, application-specific monitoring 

functions. 

436 Rittal IT News/Security

The wireless access sensor reports any 

unauthorised access. 

The modular CMC-TC system allows security 

solutions to be compiled individually, including 

the use of wireless sensors. 

Rittal IT News/Security 

The sensors may be protected from humidity 

via the IP protective cover. 

Flexible 

The use of radio sensors is appropriate whenever direct cabling 

between the sensor and I/O Unit is too time-consuming or too difficult 

to implement, e.g. for outdoor cabling, or in inaccessible places 

in the server rack or within the IT infrastructure of data centres 

(indoors). This eliminates the need for cabling, and the system is 

easily retrofitted while operational. There is no need to lay any cable 

trunking or modify the IT infrastructure. The position of the measuring 

point may also be altered retrospectively by simply moving the 

sensor. 

By connecting the Wireless I/O Unit to the existing CMC-TC monitoring 

system, the system may be extended in a modular and flexible 

manner. In order to optimise radio links, an external aerial may 

optionally be used on the Wireless I/O Unit. Similarly, the transmission 

and reception range may be flexibly extended using additional 

Wireless I/O Units as repeaters. 

Plug and play compatibility system 

The wireless sensor network is easily set up using plug & play installation. 

By means of a simple commissioning procedure comprised of a 

learning mode and learning key, the sensors are taught by the Wireless 

I/O Unit via plug & play. Rittal offers a wireless measurement 

system with digital display for identifying the optimum radio connection 

for the assembly site. This measurement system has the same 

design as the sensors and may be connected to the reference location 

of the sensor for test purposes. 

Security 


Robust 

The wireless sensor network may be used in racks, bayed enclosure 

suites, IT rooms, buildings, production plants, storage halls, 

industrial plant or outdoors. It is also suitable for use in inter-disciplinary 

applications. 

The Wireless I/O Unit and the CMC-TC monitoring system must be 

installed in a Rittal enclosure with a corresponding protection category 

to suit the application. The sensors may be used with the IT 

protective cover. 

Long service life 

The wireless sensors have a high-capacitive, long-life 3.6 V lithium 

primary cell. Depending on the sensor type, application and ambient 

temperature, a battery life of up to 5 years is achievable. The 

battery cell is continually monitored by the system. It is also possible 

to replace the battery. 

Thanks to the modern chirp radio transmission system, an exceptionally 

low level of energy consumption is achieved; while in sleep 

mode, the current rating is in the micro-ampere range, thereby facilitating 

a long battery life. 

Secure 

Radio transmission occurs within the ISM band of 2.4 – 2.48 GHz, 

which is not subject to licensing by the end user. 

Using so-called chirp impulses (broadband transmission) for radio 

transmission produces a high level of protection from interference 

with other radio systems on the same frequency range, such as 

WLAN, ZigBee, Bluetooth. Additionally, the integral encryption of 

radio telegrams offers a suitable level of protection from unauthorised 

monitoring of the data transmission. 

437 

Innovations

Innovations 

Security 


1 4 

Power 

24 V DC 

max. 2 A 

2 

ISM band 2.4 GHz 

3 

Wireless I/O Unit 

The Wireless I/O Unit forms the basis of the Rittal 

wireless sensor network. For operating purposes, 

the unit must be cabled to Processing Unit II 

(PU II) DK 7320.100. This can be achieved via the 

connection cables for sensor units or via a Cat 5 

cable (max. 50 m). Data exchange and power 

supply to the Wireless I/O Unit occurs via this connection. 

Up to 4 Wireless I/O Units may be connected 

to one PU II. 

The Wireless I/O Unit has an aerial attached to the 

enclosure which may be directed according to the 

installation position. This aerial may optionally be 

replaced with an external version. The external 

aerial is available separately as an accessory. 

The system is attached via the 1 U mounting unit 

or the individual mounting unit. 

A Wireless I/O Unit is capable of managing up to 

16 wireless sensors. There is a choice of 4 different 

sensor types. These are also available as 

accessories. The sensors may be used in any 

given combination. 

The sensors are commissioned using the button 

on the Wireless I/O Unit and the sensor button. 

The wireless measurement system should be 

used to determine adequate radio connection 

quality. 

Option for a wider reception range: 

If the radio range of the Wireless I/O Unit connected 

to the PU II is not adequate, additional 

Wireless I/O Units may be used as repeaters 

(maximum of 10 repeaters). These I/O Units used 

as repeaters do not require any further cable 

connection to the PU, but merely need to be 

supplied with power via a separate power pack 

with country-specific connection cables. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Standard system aerial 

The external aerial DK 7320.241 may optionally 

be connected here. 

Socket for power supply to the I/O Unit as 

repeater. The power pack output DK 7320.425 

is connected to this socket. A country-specific 

connection cable should be used at the primary 

end (not necessary if the Wireless 

I/O Unit is connected directly to the PU II). 

RJ 45 connection to PU II 7320.100 via 

connection cable 7320.470/.472/.481. 

The unit is also supplied with power via this 

connection. A separate power pack is not 

required. 

Mounting attachments 

For attachment with individual mounting unit 

DK 7320.450 or 1 U mounting unit 

DK 7320.440. 

External aerial 

The external aerial may be used in exchange for 

the standard aerial of the Wireless I/O Unit. 

If a Wireless I/O Unit is used in a shielded area, 

improved radio connection to the wireless sensors 

can be achieved by altering the mounting 

position of the external aerial. The connection 

cable supports flexible positioning. The base of 

the external aerial is equipped with a magnet to 

facilitate mounting on metal. 

Model No. DK 

Wireless I/O Unit 7320.240 


Range in rooms: 

up to 50 m1) Range in the open with visual connection: 

up to 200 m1) Rated voltage: 24 V DC 

1 port RJ 45 for the PU II 

16 wireless access points for Rittal wireless 

sensors 

Protection category: IP 40 to EN 60 529 


1) If the ranges are not adequate, they may be 

extended with the Wireless I/O Unit as repeater 

or with the external aerial. The range information 

depends on the conditions of use and may vary 

according to the application. 

Accessories: 

Description Model No. DK 

CMC-TC Processing Unit II – the basic 

system for the CMC-TC application 

7320.100 

CMC-TC 1 U mounting unit for the 

attachment of WL I/O Unit 

7320.440 

CMC-TC individual mounting unit for 

the attachment of WL I/O unit 

7320.450 

CMC-TC connection cable sensor unit 

0.5 m for connecting to the PU II 

7320.470 


2 m for connecting to the PU II 

7320.472 


10 m for connecting to the PU II 

CMC-TC power pack 24 V, input 

7320.481 

100 – 230 V AC, only for the repeater 

application of the Wireless I/O Unit 

7320.425 

CMC connection cable D 230 V AC 

for the power pack 

7200.210 

Model No. DK 

External aerial 7320.241 

Available on request: Outdoor aerial. 


Length of aerial: 240 mm 

Connection cable: 1.5 m 





Wireless measurement system 

The wireless measurement system has a digital 

display with a display range from 0 to 9. The 

reading on the display indicates the quality of the 

radio connection. The wireless measurement 

system has the same design as the wireless sensors. 

This means that the measurement system 

may be fitted instead of sensors, in order to 

assess the quality of the radio connection. 

A measurement system should be available when 

commissioning the wireless sensor network. After 

commissioning, the measurement system may be 

used for further installations, e.g. during system 

expansions or modifications. The wireless measurement 

system has a long-life 3.6 V lithium primary 

cell. The battery may be replaced if necessary. 

IP protective cover 

for wireless temperature/humidity/ 

access sensor 

The IP protective cover allows the IP protection 

category of the following sensors to be increased: 

● Wireless temperature sensor DK 7320.505 

● Wireless humidity sensor DK 7320.515 

● Wireless access sensor DK 7320.535 

The corresponding IP protection categories are 

listed for the sensors. 

The cover is made from flexible plastic and simply 

slides over the enclosure of the sensor. 

This gives the wireless sensors protection from 

humidity plus increased protection from dust. 

Wireless digital input 

The wireless digital input is used for monitoring 

messages from external systems. It may be operated 

with the Wireless I/O Unit. In the event of 

status changes, a message is sent to the central 

wireless base system. The digital input is capable 

of handling message signals of between 

10 – 30 V DC. 

The signal must be made available via the external 

system. If the system to be monitored only has 

a floating contact, the 24 V DC Rittal CMC-TC 

power pack may be used. The 10 – 30 V DC message 

signal must always be provided externally. 

The function Normally Open (NO) (normally open 

alarm contact) or Normally Closed (NC) (normally 

closed alarm contact) may be selected in the software 

of the CMC-TC system. The sensor contains 

a long-life 3.6 V lithium primary cell. The battery 

may be replaced if necessary. It is mounted using 

the mounting bracket enclosed with the supply 

which may be secured e.g. to the enclosure 

frame. The sensor is simply mounted on the 

bracket. The battery and the radio connection 

quality of the sensor are monitored. 

Security 


Wireless measurement 

system 

Model No. DK 

7320.242 


Rated voltage: 3.6 V DC 



Model No. DK 

IP protective cover 7320.245 

Model No. DK 

Wireless digital input 7320.585 



External message signal: 10 – 30 V DC 

(must be provided externally) 



Battery service life: 

up to 5 years at –5°C to +25°C1) 1) Depending on the temperature range and alarm 

frequency. 


for wireless digital input: 

CMC-TC power pack 24 V, input 100 – 230 V AC 

for external signal 

Model No. 7320.425 

CMC connection cable D 230 V AC 


Model No. 7200.210 

439 

Innovations

Innovations 

Security 


Wireless temperature sensor 

The wireless temperature sensor is required for 

monitoring temperatures. It may be operated with 

the Wireless I/O Unit. Every 60 seconds, a measurement 

is sent to the central wireless base system. 

The temperature sensor is accommodated 

behind a protective membrane and contains a 

long-life 3.6 V lithium primary cell which may be 

replaced if necessary. It is mounted using the 

mounting bracket enclosed with the supply which 

may be secured e.g. to the enclosure frame. 

The sensor is simply mounted on the bracket. 

If a higher IP protection category is required, 

the sensor may be retrofitted with the IP protective 

cover. 

The battery and the radio connection quality of the 

sensor are monitored. 

Wireless humidity sensor 

The wireless humidity sensor is used for monitoring 

relative humidity levels. It may be operated 

with the Wireless I/O Unit. Every 120 seconds, a 

measurement is sent to the central wireless base 

system. The humidity sensor is accommodated 

behind a protective membrane and contains a 

long-life 3.6 V lithium primary cell which may be 

replaced if necessary. It is mounted using the 

mounting bracket enclosed with the supply which 

may be secured e.g. to the enclosure frame. 

The sensor is simply mounted on the bracket. 

If a higher IP protection category is required, the 

sensor may be retrofitted with the IP protective 

cover. 



Wireless access sensor 

The wireless access sensor is used for monitoring 

doors. It may be operated with the Wireless 

I/O Unit. In the event of a status change, a message 

is sent to the central Wireless I/O Unit. The 

access sensor is equipped with a Hall sensor 

which monitors the position of the magnet on the 

door. The sensor contains a long-life 3.6 V lithium 

primary cell; the battery may be replaced if necessary. 

It is mounted using a mounting bracket 

and a universal mounting bracket for various 

Rittal racks. The sensor is simply mounted on the 

bracket. If a higher IP protection category is 

required, the sensor is easily retrofitted with the 

IP protective cover. 



Model No. DK 

Wireless temperature sensor 7320.505 




Protection category with protective cover: 

IP 54 to EN 60 529 


Measurement tolerance: ±2°K 


up to 5 years at –5°C to +25°C1) 1) Depending on the temperature range. 

Model No. DK 

Wireless humidity sensor 7320.515 





IP 54 to EN 60 529 


Measuring range: 10 – 90 % relative humidity. 

Measurement tolerance: ±3 % rel. hum. (at 20°C) 


up to 5 years at –5°C to +25°C1) 1) Depending on the temperature range. 

Model No. DK 

Wireless access sensor 7320.535 





IP 54 to EN 60 529 



up to 5 years at –5°C to +25°C1) 1) Depending on the temperature range and door 

opening frequency. 


USB web camera available on 

request. 

3 

3 


2 

2 


Master II 

Benefits: 

● Centralised administration 

● Network connection 10/100BaseT 

● Central web server for configuration 

● Local administration via console VGA/PS/2 

● Logging function for alarm messages 

● Link for USB web camera 

● Free function selection for monitoring 

● Ideal for large data centres 

● Web access via SSL 3.0 

128 bit encryption 

● Remote administration via SSH 

● Monitoring functions may be linked together 

● E-mail function via SMTP 

● Video monitoring may be linked to the CMC-TC 

monitoring functions 

The CMC-TC Master II is an optional component 

in the CMC-TC system. The master allows the 

alarm data of up to 10 PU II systems to be linked 

and displayed. Special features of this system 

include its superior flexibility and performance. Up 

to 10 PU II systems may be distributed directly in 

the customer’s intranet. Like the PU II, the Master 

II may be placed at any position within the network. 

LAN 

1 

2 

3 

1 Master II 

2 Processing Unit II 

(PU II) 

3 Sensor unit 


for attachment of the CMC-TC Master II 

The 2 U component shelf serves to accommodate 

the CMC-TC Master II in a 482.6 mm (19″) 

rack. 

Depth: 

400 mm 



Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

Security 

Monitoring system CMC-TC Master II 

It is possible to directly access the web pages of 

the PU II or the web page of the Master II, where 

all data is combined and linked. The PU II transmits 

all monitoring-related data and messages to 

the master system via TCP/IP, SNMP. The master 

unit has a 10BaseT/100BaseT network interface 

for network integration. 

All monitoring data is provided in a separate MIB 

via TCP/IP, SNMP. The system may be configured 

remotely via the integral web server. Basic 

settings can also be implemented serially via 

RS232 or Telnet. A Telnet routing function to the 

individual Processing Units II is also pre-integrated. 

This provides the user with a clear central 

monitoring facility. For example, up to 160 temperature 

sensors may be accessed or up to 80 enclosure 

doors may be monitored and activated via 

one 

IP address. Combined applications are also possible, 

and may be compiled individually from PU II 

and sensor units. Functional upgrades for the 

CMC-TC Master II are available on request in the 

form of a software update. Images may be 

archived on the hard drive via an optional web 

camera. Up to two USB cameras may be connected. 

USB web camera available on request. 


Network 

interface 

Protocols 


via 10BaseT/100BaseT, 

10/100 Mbit/s 

TCP/IP, SNMP V1.0, TELNET, SSH, 

TFTP, HTTPS 

Rated voltage 100 – 240 Volt AC, 50/60 Hz 

Serial 

interfaces 

2 D-SUB 9 jacks RS232 

USB Standard 2.0 for Rittal USB webcams 

Time function 

Temperature 

Real-time clock 

application 

range 

+5°C to +35°C 

Humidity appli- 5 % to 80 % relative humidity, 

cation range non-condensing 


A component shelf must also be ordered for each 

CMC-TC Master II, see page 441. 

Component shelf Model No. DK 

2 U 7119.400 

441 

Innovations

Innovations 

Security 

Monitoring system Processing Unit II 


Processing Unit II (PU II) 

The Processing Unit II (PU II) is the central control 

of the CMC-TC system. This unit is required 

for every monitoring application in the CMC-TC 

system. The PU II contains a powerful computer 

with modern network technology. On the basis of 

the PU II hardware (hardware version 3.01), new 

software functions may be utilised via the update 

routine. These applications are listed below. 

The update software with new software 

functions may be downloaded from 


Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) 

The new PU II update software supports the sending 

of e-mails via SMTP in the event of an alarm. 

If an SMTP e-mail server is operated in the user 

network, the PU II is able to send alarm e-mails 

via the server. The e-mails contain the date, time, 

Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) 

The PU II supports the protocol FTP. This means 

that the log alarm file or access code list may be 

transmitted from and to the PU II. The files may be 

transmitted in encrypted form for added security. 

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv3) 

The PU II supports the protocol SNMPv1. With this 

protocol, data from the security system may be 

polled, limits set, and a trap alarm system implemented. 

SNMP is the most important interface 

from the PU II to the user with a network management 

system (NMS). In order to improve security, 

Rittal has integrated the protocol SNMPv3 with the 

new PU II update software. 

Model No. DK 


Ethernet to IEEE 802.3 via 10/100BaseT full 

duplex is available as the network interface. The 

basic protocols are TCP/IP, SNMPv1, Telnet, FTP, 

HTTP, HTTPS, NTP, SSH, DHCP. 

Rittal sensors, door systems, fans, climate control 

units, extinguisher systems, LCP air/water heat 

exchangers and socket strips may be connected 

as applications. 

system name, system location, system contact 

and alarm text. The PU II may be operated with 

or without authentication for SMTP. 

The new PU II update software supports SFTP 

(SSH). This means that sensitive data content is 

protected during transmission. 

The protocol may be used in conjunction with a 

network management system (NMS) with SNMPv3 

support. 

The SNMPv3 specifications were approved as 

a full Internet Standard in March 2002 by the Internet 

Engineering Steering Group (IESG). The 

SNMPv3 specifications essentially add security 

and remote configuration capabilities for SNMP. 



CMC-TC leak sensor, 15 m 

The leak sensor is able to detect electrically 

conductive fluids such as freshwater, salt water, 

glycol solutions etc. over a distance of 15 m. The 

sensor may be fitted underneath water pipelines, 

LCP applications, climate control applications in 

bayed enclosure suites etc., preferably on the 

floor. Attachment on or close to the floor allows 

the system to detect even tiny quantities of fluid. 

The sensor may be connected directly to the 

I/O Unit using the patch cable supplied loose via 

plug & play. The sensor contains an identifier 

allowing it to be automatically detected and set up 

by the CMC-TC system. 

The 15 m long sensor cable is connected to an 

enclosure with the evaluation electronics via a 

3.5 m long connection cable. The enclosure must 

be correctly installed according to the IP protection 

category, e.g. in a Rittal rack. The sensor 

cable is colour-coded to distinguish it from other 

cables in the monitoring area. The carrier material 

PEHD is chemically neutral with long-term stability. 

The PHLD sensor cable is very robust and 

protects the measurement wires inside from damage 

and accidental activation. The sensor cable is 

liquid-repelling and can therefore be quickly 

reused following a leak. 

CMC-TC acoustic antivandalism 

sensor 

The CMC-TC acoustic sensor may be used in all 

situations where protection from vandalism is 

required. The sensor responds to loud mechanical 

noises such as those associated with a breakin. 

The sensitivity of the sensor is adjustable. The 

sensor contains an identifier allowing it to be automatically 


system. 

Security 

Accessories for the CMC-TC system 

Model No. DK 

Leak sensor 7320.631 



I/O Unit 

 

Access Unit Climate Unit 


Monitoring: Conductive sensor cable 

Length of sensor cable: 15 m 

Connection cable to electronics: 3.5 m 

Patch cable to I/O Unit: 2 m 


Protection category of electronics with enclosure: 

IP 40 to EN 60 529 


Model No. DK 

Acoustic sensor 7320.640 



I/O Unit 

 

Access Unit Climate Unit 


Sensor: Microphone 

Frequency range: 50 Hz – 10 kHz 

Noise level: 60 – 100 dB (A) 

Response time: 20 ms 

Patch cable to I/O Unit: 2 m 


Protection category of electronics with enclosure: 

IP 40 to EN 60 529 


443 

Innovations

Innovations 

Security 

Rack extinguisher system 

Rack extinguisher system 

DET-AC Plus, 1 U 

With integral early fire detection 

This compact rack extinguisher system DET-AC 

Plus (Detection Active Plus) is designed for use in 

the Rittal IT rack, fitted in the 482.6 mm (19″) 

level. The system is equipped with a 2-stage 

smoke analysis extractor system. A bayed rack 

may optionally be included in the monitoring and 

extinguisher 

system. The system is also suitable for 

use in racks with bayed air/water heat exchangers 

(Liquid Cooling Package, LCP). The ecofriendly, 

non-toxic Novec 1) 1230 is used as the 

extinguisher medium, which means that this extinguisher 

system is suitable for universal use. 

Sensitive hardware such as servers, storage and 

switches are not impaired by the extinguisher 

medium. 

Thanks to the extremely sensitive detection of 

smoke, even in racks with a high level of climate 

control (airflow speed), this ensures that there is 

plenty of time to forward an alarm message either 

acoustically, optically via the LC display on the 

enclosure front, or by connecting the integral 

floating contacts to the building management 

system or fire alarm centre and to the Rittal monitoring 

system CMC-TC. When opening an enclosure 

door, activation of the extinguisher system is 

blocked by the two access sensors (door monitoring). 

In order to ensure that proper functioning of the 

system is maintained even in the event of a power 

failure, an emergency back-up power supply with 

a stored energy time of 4 hours is integrated into 

the system. 

The system can also be supplied purely as an 

early fire detection system without the extinguisher 

medium tank. 

1) Novec is a registered trademark of 3M. 

Early smoke detection: 

Thanks to the two highly sensitive optical sensors, 

minute particles of smoke may be detected 

even in the early stages of a fire (pyrolysis phase) 

via the active smoke extraction. If the 1st alarm 

detects smoke aerosols, a pre-alarm is triggered, 

and if the 2nd alarm likewise detects smoke, the 

extinguisher system is activated. This prevents 

major fires from developing. 

Rack requirements: 

As a general principle, the racks must meet protection 

category IP 55, i.e. with sealed doors and 

screw-fastened side panels. Use of an air/water 

heat exchanger (LCP) is supported. 

Optional smoke analysis, extension for bayed 

racks: 

The basic DET-AC Plus system is designed for a 

single rack, but neighbouring enclosures may 

also be incorporated via an additional pipe kit, 

provided the total interior enclosure volume to be 

extinguished does not exceed 3 m3 . Several extinguisher 

systems may also be linked together in 

the bayed enclosure suites, so that all systems 

may be activated jointly. 

Automatic system deactivation 

(compulsory deactivation): 

In conjunction with the Rittal enclosure monitoring 

system CMC-TC plus suitable switchable Rittal 

socket strips (Power System Module PSM/Power 

Control Unit PCU with active current measurement, 

display and switching options), in the event 

of an alarm, compulsory deactivation of the components 

installed in the rack may be triggered. 

This ensures that the servers are protected from 

further destruction. 

The alarms (pre-alarm, main alarm) may be transmitted 

via any given IP networks and processed in 

corresponding monitoring programs. The extinguisher 

system is supplied complete with mounting 

accessories. 


Protection/rack volume: 3.0 m3 Extinguisher medium: Novec1) 1230 

Weight of extinguisher medium: 3.2 kg 

Power supply: 115 – 230 V AC/50 – 60 Hz 

Emergency power supply (integral battery): 

max. 4 h 

Contact rating (pre-alarm, alarm, blocking): 

max. 30 V DC/1 A 

Sensors: 2x sensitive sensors, one each for 

pre-alarm/main alarm 

Ambient temperature: 10 – 35°C 

Display: LCD display with plain text information 

Protection category: IP 30 

Material of enclosure: sheet steel, spray-finished 

Material of extinguisher tank: Aluminium 

Dimensions (W x H x D): 447 x 1 U x 780 mm 

Description 

Note: 

The extinguisher system must be installed and 

maintained by qualified experts. Rittal is happy 

to offer such a service. 

When baying several different IT racks together, 

a combined enclosure interior volume of 3 m3 must not be exceeded! 

Enclosure interior volume of popular Rittal IT racks 

444 Rittal IT News/Security 

Packs 

of 

Model No. 

DK 

DET-AC Plus extinguisher system 

with early fire detection 

1 7338.100 

DET-AC Plus early fire detection 1 7338.200 

DET-AC pipe kit 

for bayed rack 


1 7338.310 


(only with extinguisher system) 

2 7320.530 

Mains connection cable 

(earthing-pin, German) 


1 7200.210 

Width Height Depth Enclosure interior volume 

mm mm mm per rack/m3 300 2000 1000 0.6 

300 2000 1200 0.72 

600 2000 1000 1.2 

600 2000 1200 1.44 

600 2200 1000 1.32 

600 2200 1200 1.584 

800 2000 1000 1.6 

800 2000 1200 1.92 

800 2200 1000 1.76 

800 2200 1200 2.112 

Extinguisher system for use in 800 mm deep racks 

available on request.

IP-Cam CMC-TC 

TCP/IP 

Rittal IT News/Monitoring 

TCP/IP 

Video clients 

1 Event messaging 

2 CMC-TC alarm processing 

3 Start recording 

4 Client visualisation 

5 

Motion detection 


for sensor units 



Up to 4 sensor units 

Video server 

Power pack 



Rittal network video monitoring 

for your data centre and building management 

The Rittal IP monitoring solution supports extensive 

visual and alarm-controlled monitoring. Unlike 

standard analog video monitoring solutions, digital 

video systems offer a more extensive range of 

functions and additional benefits. 

Rittal IP-Cams may be integrated into any existing 

network. Separate structured cabling, as 

required in analog systems, is not necessary. 

This considerably reduces the costs associated 

with the required infrastructure, because modern 

Power over Ethernet technology (PoE to IEEE 

802.3af) means that a separate power supply 

to the camera installation side is not required. 

Benefits: 

● Discovery function: The cameras installed in the 

network are automatically detected and set up. 

● Overview/room plan with drag & drop positioning 

of the cameras. By double-clicking on the 

relevant camera symbol, the live image is displayed 

in a window. 

● Linking of individual cameras to all CMC-TC 

sensors such as access, temperature, smoke, 

humidity etc. 

● Optical alarm representation with highlighted 

live image. 

● Multi-view display: Several live images (4/9) 

may be displayed on the screen. 

● The software has an integral video player to 

play the recorded files. 

● All video files are time stamped and stored in 

MJPEG format. 

Monitoring 

Video technology 

The Rittal video monitoring system is modular and 

is able to grow dynamically along with your 

requirements or data centre. One IP-Cam is sufficient 

for a basic system. This is easily configured 

and operated via the integral Web interface. 

No further hardware is required. If the data is to 

be permanently backed up onto external data carriers, 

the Rittal software RiWatchIT “Video Edition”, 

which is exclusively available for Rittal IP- 

Cams, should be used. This converts a powerful 

PC with MS Windows or Linux operating system 

into a video server with video archive, which 

stores alarm-controlled images onto the hard disk 

or an external network drive. 

A combination of video monitoring with the CMC- 

TC enclosure monitoring system ensures even 

more extensive monitoring. This ensures that no 

actions are concealed. All standard CMC-TC sensors 

such as access, smoke or temperature sensors 

are supported. In short, the Rittal video monitoring 

solution affords perfect all-round protection 

for a secure data centre. 

Video monitoring in combination with the 


The Rittal monitoring system CMC-TC comprises 

a broad range of modules and functions. It is possible, 

for example, to control access to the data 

centre or the equipment racks, with personalised 

access monitoring achieved by way of smart 

cards, magnetic cards or transponders. This 

access security can be enhanced significantly 

by incorporating video monitoring, as all activities 

or alarms in the data centre can be recorded 

automatically. Furthermore, the video monitoring 

function can be linked with all CMC-TC accessory 

sensors (including the assignment of different 

camera systems). If an alarm then occurs, 

e.g. impermissible temperatures in the racks or 

triggering of an extinguisher system connected 

to CMC-TC (such as DET-AC Plus), an automatic 

video recording is started. With this combination 

of active security technology and video monitoring, 

Rittal offers unique, all-round protection for 

your data centre. 

● Extensive security functions: 

− The video files are stored in an encrypted 

format via an individual system key. Reproduction 

is only possible using the video 

player integrated into the software. 

− “Four-eyes” principle: Upon request, access 

to the cameras and video recordings may be 

protected with passwords, so that at least two 

people must be present at all times. 

● Export functions: These facilitate the unencrypted 

storage of video sequences or individual 

images in MJPEG/JPG format e.g. on 

CD-ROM. 

● Multi-config in administrator mode: Global camera 

settings may be transmitted to all Rittal IP- 

Cams available in the network (clone function). 

● Simultaneous access to the video server with 

several clients is supported. 

445 

Innovations

Innovations 

Monitoring 

Video technology 

Rittal IP-Cam 

Rittal IP-Cam is ideal for use in the data centre 

and for indoor room monitoring. This compact 

camera may be fitted quickly and easily wherever 

there is an IP network connection close at hand. 

The magnetic base facilitates toolless installation 

e.g. on an enclosure roof. PoE compatibility of this 

camera is also possible by means of an adaptor. 

Model No. DK 

Functions 

7555.100 

Video sensor (MegaPixel) 0.3 

Focus 

Video 

manual 

Live camera display 

Adjustable HTML pages (ActiveX required) 

Security functions 

 

Alarm recording via motion detection or external authorisation 

E-mail forwarding 


 

Video sensor CMOS 

Light sensitivity 1 lux 

Maximum resolution (progressive scan) 640 x 480 pixels 

Video streams Motion JPEG and MPEG4 simultaneous, bandwidth 

controllable (various compression stages) 

Image settings 

 

Compression 

Colour, contrast, brightness 

White balance 

Overlays (time, date, text) 

Password protection (restricted access) 

Connections 

 

Network (10BaseT/100BaseTX) RJ 45 

Power supply Hollow connector 

Long-range power pack (connector acc. to version) 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 

Supply includes Camera, power pack, base 

Assembly parts supplied loose 

Technical modifications reserved. 

 

RiWatchIT 

Video edition (for Rittal IP-Cam) 

This client/server application is the management 

centre for the Rittal video monitoring system. This 

software allows several cameras to be monitored, 

controlled, and on request linked to CMC-TC 

sensors. 

Note: 

The RiWatchIT “Video Edition” software can only 

be used with the Rittal IP-Cam (DK 7555.xxx)! 

Further information: 


Model No. DK 

RiWatchIT Video Edition 7555.300 

Benefits and functions: 

● Cost-effective, because it uses the existing 

network infrastructure 

● Future-proof IP technology 

● Flexible use for data centre and indoor building 

monitoring 

● Global access is supported via IP networks 

● Scalability – the system grows along with your 

requirements 

● Free monitoring software for Rittal IP-Cam 

● Supports a unique link with the CMC-TC 

sensors 

● 16 cameras are supported 

446 Rittal IT News/Monitoring

Rittal IT News/Monitoring 

SSC Connect 

for SSC view 32 Cat/compact 32 Cat 

These converters connect the KVM switches to 

the computers. The signals for keyboard, mouse 

and video are transposed onto the Cat cables and 

transmitted to the SSC compact 32 Cat/view 32 

Cat up to a length of 30 m. Two versions with PS/2 

connection for keyboard/mouse and with USB 

connection (connector type A) are available. The 

video signal (VGA) is picked off from the graphics 

card via a Sub-HD15 connector. Power supply 

to the converters is ensured via the PS/2 

or USB interface directly from the computer. 


Video resolution: 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz 

Power supply: 5 V DC/approx. 150 mA 

(from the computer) 

Certification: CE 

Dimensions: approx. 65 x 45 x 20 mm 

Note: 

The SSC Connect cannot be used 

with the SSC premium KVM system. 

The SSC converters (DK 7552.20x) 

are available for this purpose, 

see page 196. 

Monitoring 

KVM switches 


SSC Connect PS/2 1 7552.421 

SSC Connect USB 1 7552.422 

447 

Innovations

Innovations 


Base/plinth, vented 

for TE 7000 

For easier cable routing between bayed enclosure 

systems or as additional storage space 

beneath the enclosure, this vented complete 

base/plinth is easily screwed underneath. The 

trim panels may be removed on all sides to allow 

cable routing in all directions. 

Base/plinth height: 

100 mm 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035/9005 


1 base/plinth, vented 


Base/plinth trim, solid 

for base/plinth, vented 

To be used in exchange for the existing trim 

panel. If a solid design is required for the base/ 

plinth for TE, the vented front and rear trim panels 

should be exchanged for solid trim panels. 

Material: 


Colour: 

RAL 7035 


2 base/plinth trim panels 


Base frame, divided 

for server racks DK-TS, FR(i) 

For retro-fitting a base frame 

Particularly for the use of gland plates or base 

modules within TS server enclosures, it is necessary 

to fit this base frame first in order to accommodate 

the base elements. The divided design 

also allows it to be retro-fitted. Suitable for combining 

with the pull-out stabiliser. 

Material: 



Packs of 1 set 

Frame elements 

including ssembly parts. 


Accessories: 

Filter mat for base/plinth, vented, 

600 mm wide DK 7561.500 and 

800 mm wide DK 7581.500, 

see page 258. 

448 Rittal IT News/System accessories 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Colour 

RAL 

Model No. TS 

600 1000 9005 7000.686 

800 1000 9005 7000.687 

600 600 7035 7000.690 

600 800 7035 7000.691 

600 1000 7035 7000.692 

800 600 7035 7000.693 

800 800 7035 7000.694 

800 1000 7035 7000.695 


mm 

Colour 

RAL 

600 7035 

Model No. TS 

7000.696 

800 7035 7000.698 

Width 

mm 


Note: 

Transport kit: 

For optional use of the transport kit TS 7825.900 

(see page 261) the front and rear frame elements 

may be temporarily removed and then re-fitted to 

the transport. 

Stabiliser: 

see page 260. 

Accessories: 

Gland plate, multi-piece, 

see page 449. 

Depth 

mm 

Model No. TS 

600 900 7825.341 

600 1000 7825.342 

600 1200 7825.343 

800 1000 7825.344 

800 1200 7825.345

Rittal IT News/System accessories 

One-piece gland plate 

Vented 

for TS, FR(i) 

The slotted gland plate has a cut-out in the rear 

for cable entry, which is concealed with brush 

strips. 

Material: 



Gland plate 


Gland plate, multi-piece 

for TS, FR(i) 

For optional sealing of the base area. 

Any combination of gland plates is supported. 

Gland plates including mounting clamps; the 

additional installation of PE conductors is not 

required. 

Material: 



Packs of 1 set 

Gland plates including sliding plate for cable 

entry, including sealing tape and assembly parts. 

Note: 

For the size variant 800 x 800 mm, the gland plate 

included with the supply for pre-configured network 

enclosures should be additionally used. 

Gland plate modules, vented 

with air volume regulator 


Allows controlled air routing from the twin base to 

the installed components. Individually adjustable 

membranes facilitate control of the air inlet opening 

between 10 % and 80 % free space. 

If the rear area of the enclosure is partitioned by 

base/gland plates, the required volumetric airflow 

may be individually regulated, and distribution of 

the airflow inside the twin base adapted to suit the 

requirements of each enclosure. 

The gland plate module may be combined with 

all gland plates as required. Gland plate module 

including contacting assembly screws; the additional 

installation of PE conductors is not required. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 


Packs of 1 

Gland plate module, vented, filter mat, 



Width 

mm 


Depth 

mm 

Accessories: 

Filter mat for gland plate DK 7825.620, 

see page 263. 

Model No. TS 

600 1200 7825.612 

800 1200 7825.812 

Width 

mm 


Depth 

mm 

Model No. TS 

600 900 7825.363 

600 1000 7825.364 

600 1200 7825.365 

800 800 7825.382 

800 900 7825.383 

800 1000 7825.384 

800 1200 7825.385 


For integration of the gland plates, there must be 

a base frame inside enclosure. 

Base frame, divided, for retro-fitting, 

see page 448. 

Accessories: 

All gland plates with a depth of 237.5 mm may be 

exchanged for gland plate modules on request. 

Gland plate modules, see page 263. 

Gland plate modules, vented 

with air volume regulator, see below. 

Base module for cable entry, 

see page 451. 

Extrusions for cable entry, 

see page 341. 


mm 

Model No. DK 

600 7825.366 

800 7825.386 


For integration of the gland plates, there must be 

a base frame inside enclosure. 

Base frame, divided, for retro-fitting, 

see page 448. 

Accessories: 

Spare filter mat, 

see page 450. 

449 

Innovations

Innovations 


T 

B1 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

B 

T1 


for gland plate modules, vented 

see page 263. 

To be used in exchange for the existing filter mat. 

Material: 

PPI 35-15 


2 filter mats 



for gland plate modules, vented, 

with air volume regulator 

To be used in exchange for the existing filter mat. 

Easily exchanged thanks to front operation via 

guides. 

Material: 



1 filter mat 


Module plate, solid 

for TE 

Compensating panels in 2 new sizes. 

The base area of the TE may be varied as 

required using the module plates. 

Material: 




Note: New base cut-out dimensions 

Enclosure dimensions 

mm 

Base cut-out dimensions 

mm 


2 7825.350 


1 7825.622 

Note: 

For a completely sealed base assembly, the 

module plates should be combined with the 

compensating panels. 


Design 

Compensating 

panel 

Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Model No. 

TE 

450 150 7526.755 

650 150 7526.795 

B 600 600 600 800 800 800 

T 600 800 1000 600 800 1000 

B1 450 450 450 650 650 650 

T1 550 750 950 550 750 950


Base module 


super-sealed 


The two-part base module has a special cable 

entry with alternate offset brush strips which guarantee 

an excellent seal even with large cable 

quantities. This minimises the possible ingress of 

inappropriate air or the unintentional escape of 

extinguisher gas or coolant. 

The two-part design allows the module plate to 

be removed at any time, even when cables have 

already been inserted, to provide access to the 

level beneath the rack. Base module with contacting 

mounting clamps; the additional installation of 

PE conductors is not required. 


18 – 63 mm high, with hex socket 

for baying system TS 8, FR(i) 

To compensate for floor irregularities. 

Particularly in confined spaces, adjustments can 

be made quickly and easily from the enclosure 

interior. 

Mounting thread: M12 

Hex socket: 6 mm 

Thread length: 60 mm 


300 kg/levelling foot 


with vibration dampening 

For vibration insulation of enclosures and to compensate 

for floor irregularities. 

The levelling foot is comprised of a disc of reinforced 

polyamide and an M12 screw, zinc-plated, 

with ball joint pendulum plus anti-slip and insulating 

plate for buffering. 

The insulating plate is resistant to water, mineral 

oils, petrol, alkaline and acid solutions, salts, soap 

lye and detergents. 

Also suitable for special applications such as 

chemical and laboratory environments. 

Thread length: 50 mm 


150/300 kg per levelling foot 



mm 

Packs 

of 

600 1 

Model No. DK 

7825.367 

800 1 7825.387 

Material: 

Module plate: Sheet steel, zinc-plated, passivated 

Brush strip: Plastic, UL 94-V0 


Brush strip and assembly parts. 




see page 262. 

SW 19 


4 7493.100 

M12 

60 

18 

78 

Maximum permissible 

static load per 

levelling foot 

Ø 48 




see page 262. 

95 

45 50 

30 

Packs 

of 

SW19 

M12 

50 

Model No. DK 

150 kg 4 7493.210 

300 kg 4 7493.230 

451 

Innovations

Innovations 



for TS 

With 180° hinges and swivel handle with security 

lock no. 3524 E, in exchange for comfort handle. 

Vented version: For optimum air throughput in network 

enclosures with a high proportion of active 

equipment. Slotted surface (SWG-6.7 hexagon) 

with air inlet openings >78 %. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 




IP 55 to EN 60 529/10.91 (unvented) 

IP 20 to EN 60 529/10.91 (vented) 

Designer handle 

for DK-TS network and server enclosures 

To be used in exchange for the existing handle 

system. Prepared for the installation of standard 

commercial semi-cylinders, cylinder length 30/ 

10 mm or 35/10 mm, to DIN 18 254, as well as 

lock and push-button inserts. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 


Powder-coated 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 


for designer glazed door, 180° 

For the attachment of 

● Comfort handle, 

● Comfort handle with coded lock or 

● Electromagnetic comfort handle 

A mounting adaptor is required on the designer 

glazed door. 

This mounting adaptor allows installation of the 

comfort handle series by simply snapping into 

position instead of the existing handle system. 

Material: 

Die-cast zinc 

Hinges 180° 

for TS 

Now also available in RAL 9005. 

For detailed information see page 289. 


Accessories: 

Comfort handle, see page 281. 




Width 

mm 

Height 

mm 

Vented Solid 

800 1200 7824.124 7824.127 


1 7824.600 

Accessories: 

Lock and push-button inserts, 

see page 282. 

Semi-cylinder with interchangeable lock, 

see page 287. 


1 7824.610 


RAL 9005 4 8800.950

13 

= 

B1 

B = Width 

T = Depth 

B2 


= 

T2 T3 

T1 

Alternate frame, magnetic 

For individual marking or labelling of the existing 

network infrastructure. 

The magnetic surface facilitates flexible mounting 

on all magnetisable surfaces. Adhesive strips are 

supplied for non-magnetic surfaces. 

The maximum size of the labels is 130 x 50 mm. 

Material: 

Plastic 


Alternate frame, magnetic, 

labels, 

double-sided adhesive tape. 

Document clip, magnetic 

For simple attachment of installation documentation 

as a reminder or for flexible accommodation 

of a wide range of documents, measurement 

records, test reports etc. May be attached to any 

magnetisable surface via a permanent magnet. 

Material: 

Plastic: transparent 

Grips: black 


2 mounting clamps 

including permanent magnet. 

Roof plates DK-TS 


● TopTherm roof-mounted cooling units 

● Vent attachment TS 

The cut-outs in the roof plate are arranged so that 

the TopTherm roof-mounted cooling units are 

positioned centrally on the enclosure. 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 

For mounting TopTherm 

SK 3273.5XX 

SK 3384.XXX 

SK 3385.XXX 

B1 

mm 


B2 

mm 


10 7950.150 


2 7950.200 


W x D 

mm 

800 x 800 

T1 

mm 

Suitable for 

mounting 

TopTherm 

SK 3273.5XX 

SK 3384.XXX 

SK 3385.XXX 

T2 

mm 

T3 

mm 

Model No. TS 

8801.920 

Model No. TS 

767.5 490 767.5 390 161.3 8801.920 

453 

Innovations

Innovations 



for TS 

Detailed information, see page 128. 


Width 

mm 

Depth 

mm 

Roof plate 

TS 

With 

cut-out 

Model No. DK 

Cover plate 





160/180 m 3 /h at 50/60 Hz 


Solid Vented Fan insert 

Fan insert 


Fans 

wired 

Maximum no. 

of fans 

600 1200 7826.362 2102.190 2102.410 2102.490 2 6 

800 1200 7826.382 7886.100 7886.200 7886.000 2 8 

Aisle cover 

for server rack series 

This aisle cover is used to cover the “cold aisle” 

between two server racks in a data centre. This 

serves to increase the effectiveness of the hot 

aisle/cold aisle cooling method. The expelled cold 

air is no longer able to escape upwards into the 

room, and is prevented from mixing with existing 

warm air. In this way, the cold airflow is available 

to the active 482.6 mm (19″) installed equipment 

without restriction. The aisle cover is extendible 

for aisle widths up to a maximum of 1.80 m. 

Brush strip, vertical 

for TS, TE 

Within the network distributor, this serves as a 

flexible infill panel which stylishly conceals the 

cable management area to the side of the 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting level. The brush strip 

facilitates convenient cable routing from the side 

and rear distributor area to the front connection 

level. The clearance required in front of the 

mounting level is at least 75 mm. 

Within the TS, the brush strip is mounted at the 

side on the vertical frame section, on horizontal 

or vertical punched sections. It may also be 

mounted directly on the mounting level of the TS 

or TE 7000. For direct mounting on the 482.6 mm 

(19″) mounting frame of the TS or TE, the brush 

strip should be cut to length accordingly. 

Material: 

Aluminium section with brush strip: 

Plastic, UL 94-V0 


1 set = 4 brush strips, 

length 950 mm each. 

For server racks Packs of Model No. SK 

600 mm wide 1 3301.430 

800 mm wide 1 3301.440 


mm 


2000 1 set 7827.544

1 

2 

3 


Brush strip, super-airtight 

For individual installation of enclosure panels, 

gland plates and panels. Cut-outs for cable routing 

at any position in the side panel, rear panel, 

doors, roof and base plate. 

These special brush strips may be used to create 

airtight entries for cable sections and conductors. 

The brush strips arranged in an offset configuration 

ensure good sealing from the routed cables 

even with large quantities of cables. In this way, 

unwanted system losses may be reduced to a 

minimum. 

Cable routing bars 

for 482.6 mm (19″) system punchings 

For structured cable routing of entire cable bundles, 

the cable bars may be secured to a variety 

of different positions inside the enclosure. These 

routing bar elements are particularly suitable for 

use in 600 mm wide server racks or in bayed 

systems where side access is restricted. 

Thanks to their open mounting holes, they can 

also be retrospectively slotted onto the 482.6 mm 

(19″) system punchings of the mounting level at 

any time and secured with the existing mounting 

screws of the installed components. 

Individual cable routing bars may be extended by 

baying to create entire systems using a connection 

comb. 

1 

2 

3 

Cable routing bar, 4 U 

for 482.6 mm (19″) system attachment 

For horizontal cable routing within the distributor 

level. 

Cable routing bar, 1 U 

for 482.6 mm (19″) system attachment 

For cable routing of individual cable bundles 

within the mounting level or to the installed 

components. 

Connection comb 

For connecting individual cable routing bars 

into complete systems. 



2 x 1 m 7825.375 

Material: 

Brush strip: Plastic, UL 94-V0 


Each 1 brush strip, 

1 m in length, right-hand and left-hand version. 

Packs of 

3 

No. of 

connection combs 

Model No. DK 

1 4 2 7111.224 

2 10 5 7111.214 

Material: 

Support: Sheet steel 

Cable routing bars, connection combs: Plastic 

Colour: 

RAL 9005 


Cable routing bars and connection combs. 

455 

Innovations

Innovations 


1 

2 

Cable clamp, variable 

for enclosure-independent mounting 

Variable attachment of 450 to 800 mm for flexible 

cable clamping in two variants. 

Supports attachment to punched sections with 

and without mounting flanges and direct screwfastening 

onto mounting plates and other flat 

surfaces. 

Material: 




1 C rail 

2 T-head rail 

Cable deflector 

for 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 

For kink-free routing of fibre-optic cables from the 

482.6 mm (19″) level around the mounting angle. 

The open 482.6 mm (19″) attachment facilitates 

screw-fastening together with the patch panel. 

The cable deflector may additionally be screwfastened 

to the side edge fold. 

Material: 

Sheet steel, 

RAL 7035 


1 set = 

4 right-hand cable deflectors, 

4 left-hand cable deflectors, 

assembly parts 

for screw-fastening at the side. 

Snap-in cable routing 

for clipping into the system punchings. 

Cable routing suitable for universal use, 

for toolless, fast assembly, in two variants: 

For locking: 

● User-friendly opening for cable management 

via locating points 

● For cable diameters 14 – 19 mm 

● For system punchings 6.2 mm 

For twisting: 

● User-friendly opening for cable management 

● For cable diameters 10.2 – 12.7 mm 

● For system punchings 4.7 mm 

Material: 

Polyamide 6.6, 

Self-extinguishing to UL 94 V-2 

Colour: 

Natural 


C rail 1 7016.140 

T-head rail 1 7016.150 


mm 


600 1 set 7111.460 

800 1 set 7111.480 

Design 

For locking 


For system punchings 

6.2 mm 

For twisting 

10 7111.300 

For system punchings 

4.7 mm 

10 7111.310 

456 Rittal IT News/System accessories


Nylon loop cable holder 

self-adhesive 

Suitable for universal use in all network enclosures 

and server racks, wall-mounted enclosures, 

mounting plates and gland plates. 

Material: 

Woven polyamide 6.6 

Colour: 

Black 

Cover section 

for cable duct, designer glazed door, 180° 

For optional sealing of the cable duct within the 

designer glazed door, 180°. 

The pack is comprised of various pieces which 

together are sufficient to seal the cable duct of a 

door with the dimensions H x W 2200 x 800. 

Other sizes can be achieved by cutting to length. 

Connection is toolless by simply clipping into the 

strip. 

Material: 

Plastic, RAL 7035 


6 pieces of 1000 mm, for cutting to length and 

combining. 

Blanking panel 1 U 

Toolless attachment, 482.6 mm (19″) 

Now also available in RAL 9005. 

For further details, see page 392. 

Drawer 482.6 mm (19″) 

to accommodate excess cable length 

The 1 U drawer offers a convenient opportunity for 

storing excess length in an organised, compact 

and secure way within the 482.6 mm (19″) levels. 

● With brush strip at the front for cable entry 

● T-head rail in the rear section for cable clamping 

● Ring-shaped kink-free routing of the conductors 

on adjustable elements in the interior 

● May be fitted between two 482.6 mm (19″) 

levels at a distance of 435 – 750 mm 

● Independent from the enclosure system 

● Both on L-shaped and cranked mounting 

angles and mounting frames 

Material: 

Sheet steel 

Colour: 

RAL 7035 




Size 

length x width 

mm 


70 x 16 10 7111.350 


1 set 7824.850 


10 7151.105 

Packs of 

Distance between angles 

mm 

Model No. DK 

1 435 – 750 7063.200 

Accessories: 

Nylon loop DK 7072.220/DK 7072.230, 

see page 353. 

457 

Innovations

Innovations 


Service socket 

for enclosure frame attachment 

Integration of a service socket within a separate 

supply circuit, independently of the IT network 

and UPS. 

Simple installation via an angle bracket for 

attaching to the enclosure frame. 

Material: 

Angle bracket: Sheet steel, zinc-plated, 

passivated 

Socket: Plastic 


Angle bracket, damp-proof socket (IP 44), 

German version, 



complete set, pull-out 

for TE 7000 

Tailored to the distance between levels in enclosures 

as per their supplied state of 495 mm, this 

complete set contains a vented component shelf, 

telescopic slides and a mounting kit for direct 

attachment. 

The mounting kit also offers depth-variable attachment 

within 200 mm with a 25 mm pitch pattern. 


50 kg, static 

Material: 

Base: Sheet steel, spray-finished in RAL 7035 

Mounting kit/telescopic slides: 



1 component shelf, telescopic slides and 

mounting kit. 


1 set 7280.100 

Base depth 

mm 


500 1 set 7000.625 

Accessories: 

Handles for component shelf, 

see page 327. 

458 Rittal IT News/System accessories


Socket strip, 482.6 mm (19″) 

with optional locking of the cable outlets 

The socket strip is constructed from an aluminium 

channel and is 482.6 mm (19″) wide and 

1 U high and may be integrated into all standard 

482.6 mm (19″) enclosures. With this in mind, 

special attention has been devoted to practical, 

universal fastening. The universal mounting 

bracket creates variable mounting opportunities. 

For example, the 439 mm long socket strip may 

optionally be mounted on the 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting angle or on the punched section with 

mounting flange and enclosure frame. 

Additionally, a locking option for the outgoing 

cables to the equipment has now been integrated. 

This protects the cables from unintentional 

loosening, which in turn increases the 

security and availability of applications. 

Socket strips 

with ammeter 

The socket strip with ammeter measures the 

active power of the connected equipment. The 

two variants “earthing pin contact” and “IEC 320 

socket C13” provide the most commonly used 

plug-in contacts in data centres. The 482.6 mm 

(19″) long socket strip may optionally be mounted 

on the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles, on the 

482.6 mm (19″) mounting frame, on the enclosure 

frame or in the rear section of wall-mounted 

distributors. The installation bracket may be 

mounted in four different positions for variable 

mounting. Without additional mounting accessories, 

the socket strip may be inserted into all sections 

with a 25 mm pitch pattern. 

Design 

No. of 

sockets 

Frame 



Mains voltage: 250 V 

Rated current: 10/16 A 



Socket strip, two mounting brackets 


Accessories: 

PSM cable lock, 

see page 100. 

Power supply 


12 x C13 7240.600 

Material: 

Aluminium section: Natural-anodised 

Socket inserts: Polycarbonate 


Socket strip with two installation brackets 

including assembly parts, 

1.5 m connection cable with open ends. 


Mains voltage: 250 V 

Rated current: 10/16 A, C13 earthing-pin 


Attachment 

Wall-mounted 

distributor, 

horizontal 

482.6 mm 

(19″) level 

Length 

mm 

Mounting 

dimensions 

mm 1) 

Model No. 

DK 

Earthing-pin socket 6 482.6 452.5 7240.300 

C13 IEC 320 socket 8 482.6 452.5 7240.305 

1) Variable mounting distance within a range of 25 mm, the dimension given is hole centre – hole centre 

of the mounting bracket. 

459 

Innovations

Innovations 


Power supply 

DK 7240.130 

Socket strips 

With C13/19 sockets 

Design 

No. of 

sockets 

Attachment 

Detailed information, see page 328. 


Frame 

Wall-mounted 

distributor, 

horizontal 

482.6 mm 

(19″) level 

Length 

mm 

Mounting 

dimensions 

mm 1) 

Model No. 

DK 

C13 IEC 320 socket 15 592.6 562.5 7240.130 

C13 IEC 320 socket 

with RC protection 

15 724.6 694.5 7240.140 


with 22) infeeds 

9 + 9 764.6 734.5 7240.150 



6 452.5 482.6 7240.160 

with overvoltage 

protection device 

4 452.5 482.6 7240.170 


with RC protection 

4 452.5 482.6 7240.180 


with 22) infeeds 

3 + 3 448.5 478.6 7240.190 

All socket strips may also be ordered with a Wieland GST infeed. 

1) Variable mounting distance within a range of 25 mm, the dimension given is hole centre – hole centre 

of the mounting bracket. 

2) In order to make allowance for the higher output density e.g. in an IT environment, the socket strips are equipped 

with 2 independent infeeds. This means it is possible to supply 2 x 16 A/250 V with one socket strip. 

592.6 

562.5 

(32.3) 120.5 

88 

88 88 88 55.5 (32.3) 

DK 7240.140 

724.6 

694.5 

(32.3) 252.5 

88 88 88 88 55.5 (32.3) 

DK 7240.150 

(32.3) 

120.5 

DK 7240.160 

764.6 

734.5 

88 88 107 

88 88 

482.6 

452.5 

(32.3) 102.5 55 55 55 55 55 40.5 

DK 7240.180 

482.6 

452.5 

(32.3) 

(32.3) 212.5 

55 55 55 40.5 (32.3) 

31.75 

44 

31.75 

44 

31.75 

44 

120.5 

DK 7240.170 

31.75 

44 

(32.3) 

31.75 

44 

482.6 

452.5 

(32.3) 212.5 

55 55 55 40.5 (32.3) 

DK 7240.190 

478.6 

448.5 

(32.3) 58.5 55 55 77 55 55 58.5 

(32.3) 

31.75 

44 

31.75 

44

Model No. Page 

1101.800 289 

1581.000 342 

1581.100 344 

1582.000 342 

1919.500 66 

1920.500 66 

1926.500 66 

1931.200 393 

1932.200 393 

1933.200 393 

1934.200 393 

1935.200 393 

1936.200 393 

1937.200 393 

1939.200 393 

1940.000 393 

1941.000 393 

1944.000 393 

1945.000 393 

1950.000 393 

1962.200 377 

1963.200 377 

1978.200 376 

1979.200 377 

1980.200 377 

1985.500 374 

1986.500 374, 376 

1994.635 374 

1994.835 374 

1995.235 374, 376 

1995.835 374, 376 

1996.535 374 

1996.835 374 

1997.235 374, 376 

1997.835 374, 376 

2089.000 382 

2092.200 381 

2092.300 381 

2092.500 381 

2093.200 382 

2094.200 381 

2094.300 381 

2094.400 381 

2094.500 381 

2099.500 382 

2102.180 128 

2102.190 128, 454 

2102.320 128 

2102.400 128 

2102.410 128, 454 

2102.490 128, 454 

2102.500 224 

2203.010 345 

2203.020 345 

2207.010 345 

2207.020 345 

2207.030 345 

2231.000 393 

2232.000 393 

2233.000 393 

2235.005 347 

2235.015 347 

2235.025 347 

2235.035 347 

2235.045 347 

2235.055 347 



2235.065 347 

2235.075 347 

2235.085 347 

2235.135 346 

2237.000 307 

2238.000 307 

2239.000 307 

2240.000 384 

2243.605 64 

2246.605 64 

2249.605 64 

2250.000 384 

2252.605 64 

2253.605 65 

2255.605 64 

2256.605 65 

2256.705 67 

2258.605 64 

2259.605 65 

2260.000 384 

2261.605 64 

2262.605 65 

2265.605 65 

2268.605 65 

2271.605 65 

2307.000 285 

2308.000 287 

2309.000 306 

2313.150 306 

2313.750 306 

2314.000 306 

2315.000 306 

2316.000 306 

2317.000 306 

2318.000 306 

2319.000 306 

2322.700 373 

2323.235 375 

2324.235 375 

2331.700 373 

2332.235 375 

2333.235 375 

2334.000 337 

2335.000 337 

2336.700 373 

2337.235 375 

2338.235 375 

2340.700 373 

2341.235 375 

2342.235 375 

2343.000 337 

2345.700 373 

2346.235 375 

2347.235 375 

2368.010 171 

2372.000 171 

2377.030 371 

2377.060 371 

2377.090 371 

2377.120 371 

2377.150 371 

2377.180 371 

2377.860 372 

2377.880 372 

2400.000 349 

2411.500 349 

List of model numbers 


2411.501 349 

2411.502 349 

2411.503 349 

2411.504 349 

2411.505 349 

2411.506 349 

2411.507 349 

2411.508 349 

2411.509 349 

2411.510 349 

2411.511 349 

2411.520 349 

2411.521 349 

2411.522 349 

2411.523 349 

2411.600 348 

2411.610 348 

2411.620 348 

2411.630 348 

2411.640 348 

2411.650 348 

2411.660 348 

2411.670 348 

2411.800 348 

2411.810 348 

2411.820 348 

2411.830 348 

2411.840 348 

2411.850 348 

2411.860 348 

2411.870 348 

2412.210 337 

2412.216 337 

2412.225 337 

2412.310 337 

2412.316 337 

2412.325 337 

2420.000 285 

2422.000 293 

2423.000 293 

2424.100 290 

2425.100 290 

2426.100 290 

2426.500 290 

2427.100 290 

2430.000 285 

2433.000 294 

2435.000 284 

2436.732 269 

2436.735 269 

2436.905 269 

2437.000 269 

2438.000 269 

2438.735 269 

2439.000 286 

2440.735 269 

2440.905 269 

2450.000 284 

2451.000 284 

2452.000 284 

2454.000 284 

2455.000 284 

2460.000 285 

2460.650 285 

2461.000 285 

2462.000 285 

1101.800 to 2559.000 


2463.000 285 

2464.000 285 

2465.000 285 

2466.000 285 

2467.000 282 

2468.000 282 

2469.000 282 

2482.300 398 

2482.310 398 

2482.320 398 

2482.330 398 

2482.400 398 

2482.410 398 

2482.500 398 

2482.510 398 

2482.520 398 

2482.530 398 

2482.540 398 

2482.550 398 

2482.560 398 

2482.570 398 

2482.580 398 

2482.590 398 

2484.000 285 

2485.000 286 

2485.100 286 

2486.300 315 

2486.500 315 

2487.000 315 

2488.000 315 

2489.000 315 

2489.500 315 

2503.000 294 

2503.010 294 

2504.000 315 

2504.500 315 

2504.800 315 

2507.100 336 

2507.200 336 

2507.300 336 

2507.400 336 

2507.500 336 

2508.000 294 

2508.010 294 

2518.000 289 

2519.000 289 

2521.000 287 

2525.000 286 

2531.000 287 

2532.000 287, 288 

2533.000 286 

2534.000 287 

2534.100 287 

2534.500 287 

2545.000 287 

2546.000 287 

2547.000 287 

2548.000 287 

2549.000 288 

2549.500 287 

2554.000 285 

2555.000 285 

2556.000 285 

2557.000 285 

2558.000 285 

2559.000 337 

461


2560.000 to 4138.140 


2560.000 342 

2560.400 345 

2561.000 342 

2561.100 344 

2561.400 345 

2561.500 343 

2562.000 342 

2562.100 344 

2562.400 345 

2562.500 343 

2563.000 342 

2563.100 344 

2563.150 345 

2563.500 343 

2564.000 337 

2564.010 337 

2564.020 337 

2565.000 337 

2565.100 337 

2565.110 337 

2565.120 337 

2566.000 337 

2567.000 337 

2568.000 337 

2569.000 337 

2570.000 337 

2570.500 338 

2571.000 286 

2572.000 285 

2573.000 341 

2575.000 285 

2576.000 286 

2581.000 269 

2597.000 353 

2730.000 280 

2731.000 280 

2732.000 280 

2733.000 280 

2734.000 280 

2760.000 280 

2761.000 280 

2762.000 280 

2763.000 280 

2817.000 257 

2819.000 257 

2819.200 257 

2859.000 260 

2898.160 349 

2898.200 349 

2898.250 349 

2898.320 349 

2899.200 349 

2899.250 349 

2899.320 349 

2899.400 349 

3110.000 144 

3110.200 144 

3114.024 143 

3114.100 143 

3114.115 143 

3118.000 144 

3120.000 145 

3120.115 145 

3121.000 151 

3124.000 145 

3124.100 145 


3124.200 145, 163 

3144.000 122 

3145.000 122 

3148.007 123 

3149.007 123 

3149.410 123 

3149.420 123 

3149.440 123 

3149.810 123 

3149.820 123 

3149.840 123 

3164.115 126 

3164.230 126 

3164.610 126 

3164.620 126 

3164.810 126 

3164.820 126 

3165.024 125 

3165.048 125 

3165.115 125 

3165.230 125 

3165.615 125 

3165.624 125 

3165.630 125 

3165.648 125 

3165.815 125 

3165.824 125 

3165.830 125 

3165.848 125 

3169.007 123 

3171.100 149 

3172.100 149 

3173.100 149 

3174.000 149 

3175.000 148 

3176.000 148 

3177.000 149 

3181.100 149 

3182.100 149 

3183.100 149 

3209.100 139 

3209.104 139 

3209.110 139 

3209.114 139 

3209.140 139 

3209.144 139 

3209.500 139 

3209.504 139 

3209.510 139 

3209.514 139 

3209.540 139 

3209.544 139 

3210.100 140 

3210.104 140 

3210.110 140 

3210.114 140 

3210.140 140 

3210.144 140 

3210.500 140 

3210.504 140 

3210.510 140 

3210.514 140 

3210.540 140 

3210.544 140 

3220.000 142 

3253.000 148 


3253.010 148 

3254.000 148 

3259.000 142 

3267.100 148 

3273.500 138 

3273.515 138 

3278.134 120 

3285.000 148 

3286.000 148 

3286.100 148 

3286.110 148 

3286.300 148 

3286.400 148 

3286.500 148 

3286.600 148 

3286.700 146 

3286.780 141 

3286.800 146 

3286.870 141 

3286.880 141 

3286.900 146 

3286.970 141 

3286.980 141 

3286.990 141 

3292.134 120 

3294.100 148 

3300.001 150 

3300.900 133 

3300.901 133 

3300.902 133 

3300.905 133 

3300.910 133 

3300.912 134 

3300.915 134 

3300.920 134 

3300.925 134 

3300.930 134 

3301.221 132 

3301.230 130 

3301.310 131 

3301.320 131 

3301.330 131 

3301.340 131 

3301.350 132 

3301.351 132 

3301.360 132 

3301.370 131 

3301.380 131 

3301.390 131 

3301.400 131 

3301.420 130 

3301.421 132 

3301.430 454 

3301.440 454 

3301.480 130 

3301.490 130 

3301.560 147 

3301.570 147 

3301.580 147 

3301.590 147 

3301.600 147 

3301.608 147 

3301.610 147 

3301.612 147 

3301.800 435 

3301.950 147 


3301.955 147 

3301.957 147 

3301.960 147 

3301.965 147 

3301.967 147 

3321.700 149 

3322.700 149 

3323.027 135 

3323.047 135 

3323.107 135 

3323.117 135 

3323.207 135 

3324.027 135 

3324.047 135 

3324.107 135 

3324.117 135 

3325.027 136 

3325.047 136 

3325.107 136 

3325.117 136 

3325.207 135, 136 

3326.107 137 

3326.117 137 

3326.207 137 

3327.107 137 

3327.117 137 

3327.147 137 

3327.700 149 

3340.024 121 

3340.115 121 

3340.230 121 

3341.024 121 

3341.115 121 

3341.230 121 

3342.024 121 

3342.115 121 

3342.230 121 

3342.500 121 

3350.024 121 

3350.115 121 

3350.230 121 

3351.024 121 

3351.115 121 

3351.230 121 

3352.024 121 

3352.115 121 

3352.230 121 

3352.500 121 

3355.100 121 

3356.100 121 

3357.100 121 

3636.010 327 

3746.000 393 

3747.000 393 

3748.000 393 

3749.000 393 

3805.500 259 

3861.580 322 

4103.350 335 

4103.600 335 

4119.000 314 

4127.000 336 

4127.200 336 

4133.000 313 

4134.000 313 

4138.140 334 



4138.150 334 

4138.180 334 

4138.190 334 

4138.300 334 

4138.350 334 

4139.140 334 

4139.150 334 

4139.180 334 

4139.190 334 

4139.300 334 

4139.350 334 

4140.000 333 

4140.010 333 

4140.020 333 

4155.000 335 

4155.100 335 

4155.500 335 

4157.000 314 

4162.000 314 

4163.000 314 

4164.000 314 

4165.000 314 

4169.000 304 

4170.000 304 

4171.000 304 

4172.000 304 

4173.000 304 

4174.000 304 

4175.000 304 

4176.000 304 

4177.000 304 

4178.000 304 

4179.000 314 

4180.000 314 

4181.000 312 

4182.000 311 

4183.000 312 

4199.000 313 

4309.000 303 

4315.100 336 

4315.110 336 

4315.150 336 

4315.200 336 

4315.210 336 

4315.300 336 

4315.310 336 

4315.400 336 

4315.410 336 

4315.450 336 

4315.500 336 

4315.510 336 

4315.600 336 

4315.610 336 

4315.700 333 

4319.090 353 

4319.120 353 

4319.160 353 

4319.200 353 

4347.000 305 

4358.200 367 

4358.700 367 

4361.000 305 

4362.000 305 

4363.000 305 

4374.000 304 

4375.000 304 



4376.000 304 

4377.000 304 

4378.000 304 

4379.000 304 

4380.000 304 

4381.000 304 

4382.000 304 

4389.000 367 

4391.000 367 

4393.000 304 

4394.000 305 

4394.500 305 

4395.000 305 

4395.500 305 

4396.000 305 

4396.500 305 

4398.000 305 

4398.500 305 

4530.000 383 

4531.000 383 

4532.000 308 

4538.000 289 

4540.000 275 

4541.000 385 

4542.000 385 

4546.000 383 

4547.000 366 

4548.000 385 

4549.000 383 

4568.000 294 

4579.000 303 

4582.000 275 

4582.500 274 

4583.000 289 

4594.000 303 

4595.000 294 

4596.000 303 

4597.000 309 

4598.000 303 

4599.000 303 

4611.000 261 

4612.000 260 

4632.000 367 

4634.500 261 

4694.000 303 

4695.000 303 

4696.000 303 

4697.000 303 

4933.000 306 

4934.000 306 

4935.000 306 

4937.000 306 

4943.000 306 

4944.000 306 

4945.000 306 

4946.000 306 

4947.000 306 

6059.000 354 

6148.000 261 

6903.170 278 

7000.100 365 

7000.150 365 

7000.200 365 

7000.240 365 

7000.290 365 

7000.330 365 



7000.380 365 

7000.390 27, 28 

7000.410 27, 28 

7000.420 365 

7000.430 27, 28 

7000.440 27, 28 

7000.450 30, 31 

7000.460 30, 31 

7000.470 365 

7000.500 27, 29 

7000.502 27, 29 

7000.504 423 

7000.505 27, 29 

7000.508 423 

7000.510 27, 29 

7000.515 27, 29 

7000.520 30, 31 

7000.525 30, 31 

7000.530 30, 31 

7000.532 30, 31 

7000.535 30, 31 

7000.560 27, 29 

7000.562 27, 29 

7000.564 423 

7000.568 423 

7000.570 27, 29 

7000.580 30, 31 

7000.590 30, 31 

7000.592 30, 31 

7000.620 320 

7000.625 458 

7000.630 331 

7000.640 276 

7000.642 267 

7000.644 267 

7000.650 267 

7000.652 267 

7000.653 84 

7000.654 267 

7000.656 267 

7000.663 84 

7000.670 128 

7000.672 261 

7000.675 339 

7000.676 299 

7000.678 299 

7000.680 128 

7000.684 99, 103 

7000.685 359 

7000.686 448 

7000.687 448 

7000.690 448 

7000.691 448 

7000.692 448 

7000.693 448 

7000.694 448 

7000.695 448 

7000.696 448 

7000.698 448 

7000.840 26 

7000.850 26 

7000.852 26 

7000.882 84 

7000.885 84 

7000.892 84 

7000.895 84 

4138.150 to 7072.230 


7000.940 425 

7000.942 425 

7000.944 425 

7000.946 425 

7000.960 425 

7000.962 425 

7000.990 381 

7011.535 227 

7012.535 227 

7013.535 227 

7014.535 227 

7016.100 363 

7016.110 363 

7016.120 363 

7016.130 363 

7016.140 456 

7016.150 456 

7031.100 230 

7032.500 229 

7033.500 229 

7034.500 229 

7035.500 229 

7038.500 229 

7039.500 229 

7049.035 389 

7050.035 397 

7050.100 397 

7050.200 397 

7051.000 326 

7052.035 226 

7053.035 226 

7054.035 226 

7055.035 226 

7061.000 326 

7063.100 387 

7063.102 387 

7063.110 387 

7063.120 387 

7063.130 387 

7063.200 457 

7063.710 322 

7063.720 90, 322 

7063.740 384 

7063.835 321 

7063.837 321 

7063.850 385 

7063.858 324 

7063.860 324 

7063.882 384 

7063.883 384, 434 

7063.884 90, 384 

7063.888 386 

7063.890 90, 324 

7063.895 90, 321 

7063.897 321 

7064.000 326 

7065.000 90, 326 

7066.000 326 

7066.700 326 

7067.100 276 

7067.200 276 

7069.535 389 

7072.100 347 

7072.200 347 

7072.220 353 

7072.230 353 

463


7072.240 to 7320.620 


7072.240 353 

7077.000 352 

7078.000 352 

7081.000 326 

7086.535 389 

7087.535 389 

7089.535 389 

7090.000 224 

7091.000 307 

7092.000 307 

7094.500 382 

7094.600 382 

7095.000 307 

7096.000 307 

7097.000 352 

7097.220 352 

7097.260 352 

7097.300 352 

7097.340 352 

7098.000 352 

7098.100 352 

7099.000 352 

7100.000 307 

7101.000 224 

7102.000 307 

7107.000 224 

7109.035 143 

7109.200 90, 335 

7111.000 355 

7111.210 360 

7111.212 360 

7111.214 455 

7111.220 360 

7111.222 360 

7111.224 455 

7111.250 360 

7111.252 360 

7111.300 456 

7111.310 456 

7111.350 457 

7111.460 456 

7111.480 456 

7111.900 355 

7112.000 355 

7113.000 338 

7115.000 327 

7116.500 356 

7119.140 322 

7119.155 322 

7119.250 90, 323 

7119.255 323 

7119.400 90, 159, 323, 441 

7119.455 323 

7124.035 378 

7125.035 378 

7126.035 378 

7128.000 224 

7129.000 224 

7137.535 391 

7140.535 363 

7143.035 319 

7144.035 319 

7145.005 319 

7145.035 319 

7145.535 320 

7145.605 319 


7145.635 319 

7145.705 319 

7145.735 319 

7147.035 325 

7148.035 321 

7149.035 362 

7149.135 362 

7150.535 363 

7151.005 392 

7151.035 392 

7151.105 457 

7151.110 392 

7152.005 392 

7152.035 392 

7153.005 392 

7153.035 392 

7154.035 391 

7155.035 391 

7156.005 392 

7156.035 392 

7157.035 392 

7158.035 361 

7158.100 362 

7158.150 362 

7159.035 361 

7161.000 326 

7161.700 326 

7163.500 326 

7163.550 326 

7163.560 326 

7163.565 326 

7164.035 316 

7165.035 316 

7166.035 316 

7166.735 316 

7167.000 391 

7169.535 395 

7170.535 395 

7173.535 395 

7174.135 395 

7174.535 395 

7175.535 395 

7178.535 395 

7179.535 395 

7183.100 323 

7184.035 317 

7185.035 317 

7186.035 317 

7186.735 317 

7200.001 330 

7200.210 166, 167, 438, 444 

7200.211 167 

7200.213 167 

7200.214 167 

7200.215 166, 167 

7200.216 167 

7200.217 102, 167 

7200.221 166, 169 

7200.371 179 

7200.372 179 

7200.420 169 

7200.430 169 

7200.450 169 

7200.490 171 

7200.520 175 

7200.630 176, 328 


7200.800 283 

7200.810 283 

7218.035 355 

7218.100 357 

7218.105 357 

7219.035 355 

7220.500 357 

7220.600 90, 355 

7228.035 355 

7233.000 230 

7234.000 230 

7235.000 230 

7236.000 230 

7238.000 230 

7239.000 230 

7240.110 328 

7240.120 328 

7240.130 460 

7240.140 460 

7240.150 460 

7240.160 460 

7240.170 460 

7240.180 460 

7240.190 460 

7240.200 328 

7240.201 328 

7240.205 328 

7240.210 328 

7240.220 328 

7240.230 328 

7240.240 328 

7240.250 328 

7240.260 328 

7240.280 328 

7240.290 328 

7240.300 459 

7240.305 459 

7240.310 328 

7240.330 328 

7240.370 328 

7240.510 328 

7240.512 328 

7240.600 459 

7241.005 394 

7241.015 394, 396 

7241.024 394, 396 

7241.045 394, 396 

7241.055 396 

7241.065 394, 396 

7241.500 396 

7242.005 394 

7242.015 394 

7242.045 394 

7246.010 379 

7246.030 379 

7246.060 379 

7246.100 379 

7246.400 380 

7246.420 380 

7247.000 70 

7247.010 70 

7247.020 70 

7247.030 70 

7255.035 361 

7256.035 363 

7257.005 361 


7257.035 361 

7257.100 361 

7257.105 361 

7264.035 316 

7265.035 316 

7266.035 316 

7269.135 362 

7269.235 362 

7277.000 339 

7280.035 331 

7280.100 458 

7281.035 386 

7281.200 386 

7282.035 385 

7282.135 385 

7283.035 385 

7284.135 368 

7296.000 232 

7297.000 232 

7298.000 232 

7299.000 232 

7300.135 392 

7300.230 395 

7300.240 395 

7300.250 395 

7300.335 391 

7320.005 159, 441 

7320.100 158, 166, 438, 442 

7320.210 160, 166 

7320.220 161, 166 

7320.230 161 

7320.240 438 

7320.241 438 

7320.242 439 

7320.245 439 

7320.425 166, 167, 438 

7320.426 166, 168 

7320.435 167 

7320.440 166, 170, 438 

7320.441 170 

7320.445 171 

7320.450 170, 438 

7320.470 166, 169, 197, 438 

7320.472 169, 197, 438 

7320.475 169, 197 

7320.481 169, 197, 438 

7320.485 169, 197 

7320.491 164, 166 

7320.500 166, 172 

7320.505 440 

7320.510 166, 172 

7320.515 440 

7320.520 174 

7320.530 166, 177, 444 

7320.535 440 

7320.540 177 

7320.550 173 

7320.560 166, 173 

7320.570 177 

7320.580 174 

7320.585 439 

7320.590 174 

7320.600 175 

7320.610 175 

7320.611 176 

7320.620 176 



7320.630 172 

7320.631 443 

7320.640 443 

7320.700 179 

7320.721 166, 178 

7320.730 180 

7320.740 178 

7320.750 182 

7320.760 182 

7320.770 166, 182 

7320.781 181 

7320.810 162, 166 

7320.812 163, 166 

7320.813 166, 167 

7320.814 166, 169 

7320.820 165, 166 

7320.830 164 

7320.831 165 

7320.950 179 

7320.960 180 

7320.961 180 

7320.962 180 

7320.963 180 

7330.035 390 

7334.035 390 

7337.100 90, 91 

7337.200 90, 91 

7337.300 90, 91 

7337.440 431 

7337.445 431 

7337.450 431 

7337.455 431 

7337.460 431 

7337.465 431 

7337.470 431 

7337.475 431 

7338.100 444 

7338.200 444 

7338.310 444 

7339.035 390 

7342.035 390 

7343.035 390 

7344.035 390 

7349.035 390 

7355.035 390 

7356.035 390 

7357.035 390 

7359.035 390 

7380.035 396 

7381.035 396 

7391.000 231 

7394.035 389 

7395.035 389 

7396.000 231 

7400.000 231 

7401.000 233 

7402.000 233 

7404.000 330 

7408.510 330 

7411.000 232 

7412.510 330 

7433.035 391 

7437.035 391 

7445.000 231 

7450.035 68, 394 

7451.000 71 



7452.035 68 

7453.035 68 

7454.000 69 

7455.010 359 

7455.030 359 

7456.035 68 

7457.035 68 

7458.035 68 

7459.035 68 

7460.035 68 

7460.135 68 

7461.000 71 

7462.000 69, 71 

7463.100 69, 71 

7463.200 69, 71 

7464.035 316 

7465.035 316 

7466.035 316 

7466.735 316 

7469.535 395 

7470.535 395 

7474.535 395 

7478.535 395 

7480.035 332 

7480.300 332 

7484.035 317 

7485.035 317 

7486.035 317 

7486.735 317 

7492.060 383 

7492.070 383 

7492.300 383 

7492.400 383 

7492.500 383 

7493.000 233 

7493.100 451 

7493.210 451 

7493.230 451 

7494.000 232 

7495.000 261 

7502.013 57 

7502.014 57 

7502.016 57 

7502.024 57 

7502.026 57 

7502.034 57 

7502.035 57 

7502.036 57 

7502.044 58 

7502.045 58 

7502.046 58 

7502.054 58 

7502.056 58 

7502.064 58 

7502.066 58 

7502.114 57 

7502.124 57 

7502.126 57 

7502.136 57 

7502.144 58 

7502.146 58 

7502.166 58 

7502.201 365 

7502.202 365 

7502.203 365 

7502.204 365 



7502.205 365 

7502.206 365 

7502.220 288 

7502.240 339 

7502.260 339 

7502.270 358 

7502.302 352 

7502.304 352 

7502.310 346 

7502.600 323 

7502.610 56 

7502.630 59 

7502.660 59 

7505.300 259 

7505.400 259 

7507.000 427 

7507.010 427 

7507.020 427 

7507.030 427 

7507.100 427 

7507.110 427 

7507.120 427 

7507.200 427 

7507.210 427 

7507.220 427 

7507.706 428 

7507.709 428 

7507.712 428 

7507.715 428 

7507.718 428 

7507.721 428 

7507.740 428 

7507.760 428 

7526.050 288 

7526.750 264 

7526.755 450 

7526.760 264 

7526.770 264 

7526.780 264 

7526.785 264 

7526.790 264 

7526.795 450 

7526.800 264 

7526.820 264 

7526.829 264 

7526.834 264 

7526.850 264 

7526.860 264 

7526.963 294 

7526.964 145 

7533.000 230 

7534.000 230 

7535.000 230 

7536.000 230 

7538.000 230 

7539.000 230 

7541.000 340 

7542.000 340 

7543.000 340 

7544.000 340 

7545.000 340 

7546.000 340 

7547.000 340 

7548.000 340 

7548.210 338 

7549.000 340 

7320.630 to 7705.709 


7552.000 90, 191 

7552.010 192 

7552.020 194 

7552.030 194 

7552.040 194 

7552.100 191 

7552.110 192 

7552.120 90, 196 

7552.140 90, 196 

7552.200 195 

7552.201 196 

7552.202 196 

7552.203 196 

7552.204 196 

7552.205 197 

7552.212 195 

7552.214 196 

7552.220 197 

7552.420 197 

7552.421 447 

7552.422 447 

7555.100 446 

7555.300 446 

7561.500 258 

7570.535 395 

7574.535 395 

7578.535 395 

7581.500 258 

7582.500 258 

7600.600 237 

7602.100 234 

7602.200 234 

7602.300 234 

7602.500 235 

7602.510 235 

7602.512 235 

7602.520 236 

7602.530 236 

7602.540 235 

7602.542 236 

7602.550 237 

7602.552 237 

7602.554 237 

7602.590 237 

7604.000 330 

7608.510 330 

7610.000 356 

7611.000 356 

7637.035 391 

7641.000 60 

7643.000 60 

7644.000 61 

7644.400 324 

7645.000 60 

7696.000 365 

7697.000 365 

7698.000 365 

7701.035 223 

7702.035 223 

7703.035 223 

7705.035 346 

7705.110 284 

7705.120 284 

7705.235 346 

7705.706 365 

7705.709 365 

465


7705.712 to 7827.121 


7705.712 365 

7705.715 365 

7705.718 365 

7705.721 365 

7706.135 63 

7709.135 63 

7709.535 424 

7709.735 62 

7712.135 63 

7713.235 223 

7715.135 63 

7715.535 424 

7715.735 62 

7716.235 223 

7718.135 63 

7719.000 223 

7720.035 223 

7721.135 63 

7721.535 424 

7721.735 62 

7722.035 223 

7723.035 222 

7725.035 223 

7726.035 222 

7729.235 223 

7752.950 340 

7758.000 224 

7758.100 224 

7760.000 224 

7760.100 224 

7766.500 126 

7766.520 126 

7766.522 126 

7794.330 370 

7794.420 368 

7794.740 368 

7816.120 266 

7816.129 266 

7816.200 266 

7816.209 266 

7816.220 266 

7816.229 266 

7816.360 280 

7816.362 280 

7816.380 280 

7816.382 280 

7821.100 38, 40 

7821.200 38, 40 

7821.240 38, 40 

7821.300 38, 41 

7821.340 38, 41 

7821.355 38, 41 

7821.400 38, 42 

7821.410 38, 42 

7821.440 38, 42 

7821.500 38, 42 

7821.510 38, 43 

7821.540 38, 43 

7821.600 38, 43 

7821.610 38, 43 

7821.620 39, 44 

7821.640 39, 44 

7821.650 39, 44 

7821.670 39, 44 

7821.700 39, 45 

7821.710 39, 45 


7821.720 39, 45 

7821.730 39, 45 

7821.740 39, 45 

7821.750 39, 46 

7821.760 39, 46 

7821.770 39, 46 

7821.800 39, 46 

7821.810 39, 46 

7821.840 39, 47 

7821.850 39, 47 

7821.860 39, 47 

7821.870 39, 47 

7824.086 266 

7824.106 266 

7824.120 266 

7824.121 279 

7824.123 279 

7824.124 452 

7824.126 266 

7824.127 452 

7824.128 266 

7824.129 266 

7824.130 281 

7824.132 281 

7824.146 266 

7824.148 266 

7824.166 266 

7824.168 266 

7824.180 266 

7824.181 279 

7824.182 279 

7824.183 279 

7824.184 279 

7824.186 266 

7824.188 266 

7824.189 266 

7824.200 266 

7824.201 279 

7824.202 279 

7824.203 279 

7824.204 279 

7824.205 130, 277 

7824.206 266 

7824.207 130, 277 

7824.208 266 

7824.209 266 

7824.220 266 

7824.221 279 

7824.222 279 

7824.223 279 

7824.224 279 

7824.225 277 

7824.226 266 

7824.227 277 

7824.228 266 

7824.229 266 

7824.360 280 

7824.362 280 

7824.380 280 

7824.382 280 

7824.490 280 

7824.500 266 

7824.510 266 

7824.520 289 

7824.522 289 

7824.525 289 


7824.540 276 

7824.560 267 

7824.580 267 

7824.590 267 

7824.600 452 

7824.610 452 

7824.628 277 

7824.630 277 

7824.632 277 

7824.634 277 

7824.636 277 

7824.638 277 

7824.640 277 

7824.642 277 

7824.780 279 

7824.830 277 

7824.832 277 

7824.834 277 

7824.836 277 

7824.838 277 

7824.840 277 

7824.842 277 

7824.850 457 

7825.150 259 

7825.200 260 

7825.250 260 

7825.260 260 

7825.300 130 

7825.302 130 

7825.341 448 

7825.342 448 

7825.343 448 

7825.344 448 

7825.345 448 

7825.350 450 

7825.360 263 

7825.361 263 

7825.363 449 

7825.364 449 

7825.365 449 

7825.366 449 

7825.367 451 

7825.375 455 

7825.380 263 

7825.381 263 

7825.382 263, 449 

7825.383 263, 449 

7825.384 263, 449 

7825.385 449 

7825.386 449 

7825.387 451 

7825.601 255 

7825.603 255 

7825.605 255 

7825.607 258 

7825.608 258 

7825.610 263 

7825.612 449 

7825.620 149, 263 

7825.622 450 

7825.660 263 

7825.680 263 

7825.690 263 

7825.801 255 

7825.803 255 

7825.805 255 


7825.807 258 

7825.808 258 

7825.810 263 

7825.812 449 

7825.860 263 

7825.880 263 

7825.890 263 

7825.900 261 

7826.245 292 

7826.360 128 

7826.362 454 

7826.366 128 

7826.368 128 

7826.369 128 

7826.382 454 

7826.480 128 

7826.486 128 

7826.488 128 

7826.489 128 

7826.588 292 

7826.589 292 

7826.605 130, 292 

7826.609 293 

7826.625 292 

7826.645 292 

7826.665 292 

7826.669 293 

7826.685 292 

7826.689 293 

7826.695 292 

7826.699 293 

7826.760 293 

7826.766 293 

7826.768 293 

7826.769 293 

7826.780 293 

7826.786 293 

7826.788 293 

7826.789 293 

7826.805 130, 292 

7826.806 293 

7826.809 293 

7826.825 292 

7826.845 292 

7826.865 292 

7826.866 293 

7826.869 293 

7826.884 292 

7826.885 292 

7826.886 293 

7826.889 293 

7826.894 292 

7826.895 292 

7826.896 293 

7826.899 293 

7827.000 369, 378 

7827.023 370 

7827.024 370 

7827.050 356 

7827.061 364 

7827.080 364 

7827.081 364 

7827.100 364 

7827.101 364 

7827.120 364 

7827.121 364 



7827.140 364 

7827.141 364 

7827.160 364 

7827.161 364 

7827.180 364 

7827.181 364 

7827.200 364 

7827.201 364 

7827.220 364 

7827.221 364 

7827.300 325 

7827.333 357 

7827.338 357 

7827.342 357 

7827.347 357 

7827.480 369 

7827.490 369 

7827.518 380 

7827.520 380 

7827.522 380 

7827.530 380 

7827.532 380 

7827.534 380 

7827.536 380 

7827.544 454 

7827.554 379 

7827.600 369 

7827.800 369, 378 

7827.823 370 

7827.824 370 

7827.900 369, 378 

7827.923 370 

7827.924 370 

7828.040 307 

7828.050 307 

7828.060 307 

7828.061 354 

7828.062 354 

7828.064 299 

7828.080 307 

7828.081 354 

7828.082 354 

7828.084 299 

7828.090 307 

7828.091 354 

7828.092 354 

7828.094 299 

7828.095 300 

7828.100 307 

7828.101 354 

7828.102 354 

7828.104 299 

7828.105 300 

7828.120 307 

7828.121 354 

7828.122 354 

7828.124 299 

7828.125 300 

7828.600 318 

7828.660 318 

7828.680 318 

7828.690 318 

7828.800 318 

7828.880 318 

7828.890 318 

7828.950 320 



7828.951 321 

7828.960 320 

7828.961 321 

7828.970 320 

7828.971 321 

7829.100 340 

7829.110 340 

7829.150 339 

7829.200 338 

7829.300 283 

7829.400 315 

7830.120 34, 35 

7830.260 424 

7830.300 34, 35 

7830.320 34, 35 

7830.330 34, 35 

7830.335 34, 35 

7830.340 34, 35 

7830.350 34, 35 

7830.370 34, 35 

7830.380 34, 35 

7831.431 85 

7831.432 85 

7831.433 85 

7831.434 85 

7831.436 85 

7831.437 85 

7831.438 85 

7831.439 85 

7831.440 85 

7831.441 85 

7831.442 85 

7831.443 85 

7831.446 86 

7831.450 86 

7831.451 86 

7831.460 86 

7831.461 86 

7831.472 359 

7831.481 85 

7831.482 85 

7831.483 85 

7831.484 85 

7831.485 86 

7831.486 86 

7831.487 86 

7831.488 86 

7831.489 429 

7831.491 85 

7831.492 85 

7831.493 85 

7831.494 85 

7831.495 86 

7831.496 86 

7831.497 86 

7831.498 86 

7831.499 429 

7831.570 352 

7831.571 352 

7831.580 429 

7831.590 429 

7831.611 368 

7831.621 368 

7831.631 368 

7831.641 368 

7831.715 269 



7831.721 269 

7831.723 269 

7831.724 269 

7831.726 269 

7834.060 228 

7834.080 228 

7834.120 228 

7855.310 87 

7855.312 87 

7855.330 87 

7855.332 87 

7855.340 259 

7855.342 259 

7855.480 48, 49 

7855.500 48, 49 

7855.510 48, 49 

7855.540 48, 49 

7855.550 48, 49 

7855.560 48, 49 

7855.570 48, 49 

7855.610 50, 51 

7855.620 50, 51 

7855.630 50, 51 

7855.640 50, 51 

7855.650 50, 51 

7855.660 50, 51 

7855.670 50, 51 

7855.680 50, 51 

7855.690 50, 52 

7855.700 50, 52 

7855.710 50, 52 

7855.720 50, 52 

7855.730 50, 52 

7855.740 50, 52 

7856.010 99 

7856.013 100 

7856.014 100, 102 

7856.015 103 

7856.016 99 

7856.017 103 

7856.018 103 

7856.019 102 

7856.020 99 

7856.022 99, 103 

7856.023 99, 103 

7856.025 102 

7856.026 102 

7856.027 102, 434 

7856.030 434 

7856.050 99 

7856.051 100 

7856.052 100 

7856.053 100 

7856.055 102 

7856.060 99 

7856.070 100 

7856.080 100 

7856.081 103 

7856.082 100 

7856.090 100 

7856.100 100 

7856.101 103 

7856.110 100 

7856.120 100 

7856.130 100 

7856.140 100 

7827.140 to 7857.310 


7856.150 100 

7856.160 100 

7856.170 102 

7856.180 100 

7856.190 100 

7856.200 101 

7856.201 90, 101 

7856.203 432 

7856.204 432 

7856.210 90, 100 

7856.220 100 

7856.230 90, 100 

7856.231 103 

7856.240 100 

7856.321 432 

7856.323 432 

7856.360 128 

7856.362 128 

7856.366 128 

7856.368 128 

7856.380 128 

7856.388 128 

7856.660 267 

7856.663 267 

7856.666 267 

7856.669 267 

7856.672 267 

7856.673 267 

7856.675 267 

7856.678 267 

7856.681 267 

7856.684 267 

7856.687 267 

7856.688 267 

7856.693 267 

7856.696 267 

7856.700 266 

7856.710 366 

7856.713 366 

7856.716 366 

7856.719 366 

7856.722 366 

7856.725 366 

7856.728 366 

7856.731 366 

7856.734 366 

7856.740 358 

7856.743 358 

7856.746 358 

7856.752 276 

7856.760 309 

7856.800 364 

7856.803 364 

7856.806 364 

7856.809 364 

7856.812 364 

7857.070 110 

7857.080 110 

7857.090 110 

7857.100 110 

7857.130 97, 434 

7857.150 97, 434 

7857.180 97, 434 

7857.190 97, 434 

7857.300 97 

7857.310 97 

467


7857.320 to 8611.360 


7857.320 97 

7857.321 97 

7857.325 432 

7857.350 97 

7857.372 434 

7857.420 434 

7857.421 90, 434 

7857.430 433 

7857.431 433 

7857.432 433 

7857.433 433 

7857.434 433 

7857.435 434 

7857.436 434 

7857.437 434 

7857.439 434 

7857.440 434 

7857.441 434 

7857.442 434 

7857.443 434 

7857.444 434 

7857.445 434 

7857.446 434 

7858.100 377 

7858.150 358 

7858.152 358 

7858.154 358 

7858.160 354 

7858.162 354 

7858.488 124 

7870.100 53 

7870.200 53 

7870.300 53 

7870.350 54 

7870.580 388 

7870.582 388 

7870.590 388 

7870.595 388 

7870.597 388 

7870.600 388 

7870.614 388 

7870.701 55 

7870.706 55 

7870.710 55 

7870.715 55 

7870.720 55 

7870.730 56 

7870.760 56 

7870.765 56 

7870.800 388 

7870.802 388 

7870.810 388 

7870.820 388 

7870.822 53, 388 

7870.830 388 

7885.000 128 

7885.100 128 

7885.200 128 

7886.000 128, 454 

7886.100 128, 454 

7886.200 128, 454 

7920.100 38, 40 

7920.200 38, 40 

7920.240 38, 40 

7920.300 38, 41 

7920.340 38, 41 


7920.350 38, 41 

7920.355 38, 41 

7920.360 38, 41 

7920.400 38, 42 

7920.410 38, 42 

7920.440 38, 42 

7920.500 38, 42 

7920.510 38, 43 

7920.540 38, 43 

7920.600 38, 43 

7920.610 38, 43 

7920.620 39, 44 

7920.640 39, 44 

7920.650 39, 44 

7920.670 39, 44 

7920.700 39, 45 

7920.710 39, 45 

7920.720 39, 45 

7920.730 39, 45 

7920.740 39, 45 

7920.750 39, 46 

7920.760 39, 46 

7920.770 39, 46 

7920.800 39, 46 

7920.810 39, 46 

7920.840 39, 47 

7920.850 39, 47 

7920.860 39, 47 

7920.870 39, 47 

7930.100 32, 33 

7930.200 32, 33 

7930.220 32, 33 

7930.250 32, 33 

7930.270 32, 33 

7930.400 36, 37 

7930.500 36, 37 

7930.550 36, 37 

7930.660 36, 37 

7930.670 36, 37 

7930.800 32, 33 

7930.850 32, 33 

7931.800 88 

7931.802 88 

7931.803 88 

7931.810 88 

7931.812 88 

7931.813 88 

7950.100 381 

7950.150 453 

7950.200 453 

7952.100 336 

7963.310 384 

7963.410 384 

7963.510 384 

7963.610 384 

7963.710 384 

7966.035 127 

7967.000 293 

7968.035 127 

7980.000 127 

7980.100 127 

7980.148 127 

7986.035 127 

7988.035 127 

8100.235 130, 265 

8104.235 265 


8105.235 265 

8106.235 265 

8108.235 265 

8109.235 265 

8115.235 265 

8126.235 265 

8128.235 265 

8129.235 265 

8145.235 265 

8146.235 265 

8148.235 265 

8165.235 265 

8166.235 265 

8168.235 265 

8170.235 265 

8173.235 265 

8174.235 265 

8175.235 265 

8176.235 265 

8180.235 265 

8184.235 265 

8185.235 265 

8186.235 265 

8188.235 265 

8189.235 265 

8601.000 255 

8601.010 255 

8601.015 255 

8601.025 255 

8601.026 255 

8601.030 255 

8601.040 255 

8601.050 255 

8601.060 255 

8601.065 255 

8601.080 255 

8601.085 255 

8601.086 255 

8601.092 255 

8601.095 255 

8601.100 257 

8601.110 258 

8601.115 258 

8601.120 258 

8601.125 258 

8601.130 257 

8601.140 257 

8601.200 255 

8601.300 255 

8601.400 255 

8601.500 255 

8601.600 255 

8601.602 255 

8601.605 255 

8601.610 258 

8601.615 258 

8601.800 255 

8601.802 255 

8601.805 255 

8601.810 258 

8601.815 258 

8601.850 255 

8601.905 255 

8602.000 255 

8602.015 255 

8602.025 255 


8602.030 255 

8602.040 255 

8602.050 255 

8602.060 255 

8602.065 255 

8602.080 255 

8602.085 255 

8602.095 255 

8602.100 255 

8602.200 255 

8602.400 255 

8602.500 255 

8602.600 255 

8602.605 255 

8602.800 255 

8602.805 255 

8602.850 255 

8602.905 255 

8609.040 268 

8609.050 268 

8609.060 268 

8609.080 268 

8609.260 268 

8609.450 268 

8609.650 268 

8609.840 268 

8609.850 268 

8609.860 268 

8610.600 130, 278 

8610.620 278 

8610.680 278 

8610.800 130, 278 

8610.820 278 

8610.880 278 

8611.010 281 

8611.020 281 

8611.030 281 

8611.040 282 

8611.045 282 

8611.050 283 

8611.060 282 

8611.070 282 

8611.080 278 

8611.090 278 

8611.100 282 

8611.110 282 

8611.120 282 

8611.130 282 

8611.140 282 

8611.150 282 

8611.160 282 

8611.170 282 

8611.180 282 

8611.190 282 

8611.200 282 

8611.220 282 

8611.250 281 

8611.260 281 

8611.270 282 

8611.280 283 

8611.290 281 

8611.300 278 

8611.330 281 

8611.340 282 

8611.350 281 

8611.360 282 



8612.000 299, 324, 368, 378 

8612.020 299, 324, 368, 378 

8612.040 299 

8612.050 299, 324 

8612.060 299, 324, 368 

8612.065 299 

8612.080 299, 324, 368, 378 

8612.090 299, 324, 368, 378 

8612.100 299, 324 

8612.120 299 

8612.130 299 

8612.140 299, 324 

8612.150 299 

8612.160 299, 324 

8612.165 299 

8612.180 299, 324 

8612.240 302 

8612.250 302 

8612.260 302 

8612.280 302 

8612.400 308 

8612.410 308 

8612.500 300 

8612.520 300 

8612.550 300 

8612.560 300 

8612.580 300 

8612.590 300 

8612.650 301 

8612.660 301 

8612.680 301 

8612.740 302 

8612.750 302 

8612.760 302 

8612.780 302 

8612.960 305 

8612.980 305 

8613.000 367 

8613.010 366 

8613.020 367 

8613.060 367 

8613.070 367 

8613.080 367 

8613.150 383 

8613.160 383 

8613.180 383 

8700.000 273 

8700.140 276 

8700.150 276 

8700.160 276 

8701.180 288 

8800.010 265 

8800.020 288 

8800.030 288 

8800.040 278 

8800.070 284 

8800.110 265 

8800.130 303 

8800.170 275 

8800.190 288 

8800.210 262 

8800.220 262 

8800.230 288 

8800.270 284 

8800.290 262 

8800.300 303 



8800.310 303 

8800.320 303 

8800.330 312 

8800.340 314 

8800.350 314 

8800.360 310 

8800.370 311 

8800.380 303 

8800.390 256 

8800.400 272 

8800.410 272 

8800.420 273 

8800.430 274 

8800.440 276 

8800.450 276 

8800.460 276 

8800.470 275 

8800.480 276 

8800.490 273 

8800.500 272 

8800.510 350 

8800.520 350 

8800.530 351 

8800.531 351 

8800.532 351 

8800.540 350 

8800.560 325 

8800.570 350 

8800.580 325 

8800.590 272 

8800.670 275 

8800.806 310 

8800.808 310 

8800.840 276 

8800.850 276 

8800.860 276 

8800.880 276 

8800.890 276 

8800.892 276 

8800.950 452 

8801.300 146 

8801.310 146 

8801.320 146 

8801.330 146 

8801.340 146 

8801.350 146 

8801.360 146 

8801.380 123, 146 

8801.410 146 

8801.420 146 

8801.430 146 

8801.440 146 

8801.720 291 

8801.725 291 

8801.730 291 

8801.735 291 

8801.740 291 

8801.745 291 

8801.750 291 

8801.755 291 

8801.760 291 

8801.765 291 

8801.770 291 

8801.775 291 

8801.920 453 

8802.060 341 



8802.065 341 

8802.080 341 

8802.085 341 

8802.100 341 

8802.105 341 

8802.120 341 

8802.125 341 

9004.400 386 

9004.402 386 

9004.403 386 

9004.404 386 

9004.406 386 

9004.407 386 

9055.100 190 

9055.102 190 

9055.103 190 

9055.150 190 

9055.151 190 

9055.200 190 

9055.202 190 

9055.203 190 

9055.250 190 

9055.251 190 

9055.300 90, 190 

9055.302 190 

9055.303 190 

9055.350 190 

9055.351 190 

9055.400 190 

9055.402 190 

9055.403 190 

9055.450 190 

9055.451 190 

9583.000 71 

9765.100 335 

9765.137 335 

9765.138 335 

9765.150 335 

9769.002 121 

9782.030 251 

9782.050 251 

9785.040 287 

9790.003 225 

9790.042 225 

9790.043 225 

8612.000 to 9790.043 

469

Index 

A 

Access sensor 177 

Accessories 

– for climate control 141 – 149 

– for Data Rack 232, 233 

– for FM distribution racks 229 – 230 

– for RiLab II 235 – 237 

– for Rittal TC rack 223, 224 

– for RNC 55, 56 

– System accessories 252 – 398 

Accommodation system, 2 U 

– for LSA installation kit 397 

Active kit for TE 128 

Active PSM 

– 4-way 101 

– 6-way 432 

– 8-way 101 

Adaptor 

– 3 U 380 

– CMC-TC 168 

– for front air supply 142 

– for levelling feet 262 

– for L-shaped mounting angles 325 

– for RNC 56 

– for twin castors 262 

– metric/482.6 mm (19″) 379 

Adaptor bracket 

– for TS 310 

Adaptor cable for analog modems 165 

Adaptor door 

– for DK-TS 279 

Adaptor kit 

– 3 U 379 

– for RiCase 237 

Adaptor piece, 482.6 mm (19″) 366, 367 

Adaptor rail 

– for PS compatibility 303 

Additives for recooling systems 147 

Add-on cover 132 

Add-on drawer unit for RiLab II 236 

Adhesive measurement strip, 

482.6 mm (19″) 381 

Air baffle system TS 8 126 

Air duct for discharge of waste air 142 

Air duct system 

– TopTherm roof-mounted cooling units 141 

Air/water heat exchangers 139, 140 

Airflow monitor 173 

Aisle cover for server racks 454 

Alarm signal lamp, CMC-TC 171 

All-glass door 

– for TS 280 

Alternate frame, magnetic 453 

Aluminium rivet 351 

Analog sensor input module 174 

Angle bracket 


Angle bracket PS 312 

Angle piece 313 

Angular baying brackets 274, 275 

Approvals 402 – 406 

Assembly block 

– for TS 303 

Assembly components 310 – 315 

Assembly parts 337 

Assembly screws 382 

Assembly tool 

– for spring washers 284 

Attachment of the CMC-TC Master II 159, 441 

B 

Base assembly bracket 262 

Base assembly plate 

– for base/plinth 257 

Base frame, divided 448 

Base module for cable entry 451 

Base/plinth 254 – 260 

– baying brackets 257 

– for EL 259 


– vented, for TE 7000 448 


– for levelling feet 262 

– for twin castors 262 

Base/plinth cap 257 


– front and rear, sheet steel 255 

Base/plinth insert for TC rack 223 

Base/plinth trims 

– side, sheet steel 255 

– solid 448 

– with brush strip for base/plinth TS 258 

Basic drawer unit for RiLab II 235 

Basic module CMC-TC 158 

Baying attachment, vertical 275 

Baying brackets 

– for base/plinth TS 257 

– for TS/TS and TS/PS 274 

Baying clamp 272, 273, 275 


– for Data Rack 232 

– for TS 273, 276 

Baying kit 

– for FR(i) 276 

– for TE/TE 276 

– for TE/TE 276 

Baying system 270 – 276 


– for fibre-optic cut-outs 395 

Blanking panel, 19″, 1 U, 

toolless attachment 392, 457 

Blanking panel 55, 392 


– 482.6 mm (19″) 393 

– horizontally hinged 393 

– vertically hinged 393 

Bottom-mounted adaptor 

– for enclosure internal thermostat 

and hygrostat 144 

Bracket, wall bracket 294 

Brush strip 347 

– super-airtight 455 

– vertical 454 

Busbar 99, 100 

– Plug-in modules 103 

– PSM 432 

Busbar support 291 

C 

C rails 306, 307, 363 

Cable 

– Adaptor cable for analog modems 165 

– C19/C20 167 


– depth-variable 354 

– for TC rack 224 

– for TS and 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

frames 354 


– for patch panels 356 

Cable clamp, variable 456 

Cable clamps 352 

Cable deflector 

– for 482.6 mm (19″) mounting angles 456 

Cable duct 

– for RiLab II 236 

– for vertical TS profile 350 

Cable entry 

– on gland plate for TS 341 

Cable fastening 353 

Cable gland panel 

– 482.6 mm (19″) 363 

Cable gland plates 

– Plastic 342, 343 

Cable glands 

– Brass 348 

– for fibre-optic technology 359 

– Polyamide 348 

Cable lock for PSM 100 

Cable management duct 

– for TS 357 

– horizontal, 482.6 mm (19″) 362 


– 1 U 361 

– 2 U 361 

– for QuickBox 358 


– for TS 267 

Cable management roof plate 

– for TS, FR(i) 292 

Cable management 341 – 363 

Cable route 358 

– for TS 356 

– on the mounting frame 359 

Cable routing 

– across the 482.6 mm (19″) mounting 

level 363 

– cascaded 352 




– snap-in 456 

Cable routing bars 360 

– for 482.6 mm (19″) 

system punchings 455 

Cable routing components for FR(i) 357 

Cable shunting ring 355 

Cable support, hinged 326 

Cable tie fastener 354 

Cable ties 353 

Cable tray, 2 U 362 

Cage nut – front mounting, 482.6 mm (19″) 381 

Cage nuts/threaded blocks 314 

Cam locks 285 

Captive nuts M5/M6 381 

Captive nuts/threaded blocks 314 

Castors 261 

Cat 5 patch cable 197 

Ceiling fastening TC rack 223 

Central earthing point 338 

Centrifugal fan 122 

Circuit-breaker 10 A, connection 

component 336 

Clamp strip, foam rubber 341 

Climate control checks 150 

Clip-on nuts for TC rack 224 

CMC-TC monitoring system 152 – 185 

– Acoustic sensor 443 

– Alarm signal lamp 171 

– Configurator 183 

– Extension unit 175 

– Leak sensor, 15 m 443 

– Manager 184 

– Master II 441 

– Motion detector 177 

– Mounting module 170 

– Processing Unit II (PU II) 158, 442 

– Redundant power supply 168 

– Sensor mounting 171 

– Socket strip 176 

– Software 183, 184 

– Wireless sensor network 436 – 440 

CMC-TC sensor units 160 – 163 

– Access unit 161 

– Climate unit 161 

– I/O unit 160 

CMC-TC supplementary unit 

– GSM unit 165 

– ISDN unit 164 

Coded lock 182 

Combination angle 275 

Combination rail for QuickBox 352 

Comfort handle 281, 282, 283 

– for TS 8 with Legic Unit 181 

– Mini 284 

– with master key function 178 

Compact light 333 

Compensating panel 

– for TS 276 

Complete earthing kit 339 

Component shelf 316 – 327 

– for attachment of the CMC-TC Master II 441 

– Heavy duty 321 

– Installation kits 324, 325 

Component shelf, pull-out, 

complete set for TE 7000 458 

Condensate collecting bottle 147 

Condensate hose 147 

Connecting plinth trim 258 

Connection accessories 

– for system lights 336 

Connection cables 197 

– C19/C20 167 

– for enclosure light 48 V DC 335 

– for PSM rail 102 

– for system lights 336 

– Plug & play 97 

– RJ 12 169 

– RJ 45 169 

– UPS, single-phase 102 

Connection component 

– with circuit-breaker 10 A 336 

Connection hose 132 

Connector gland 349 

Console 

– Cat 5 for SSC 195 

– IP for SSC 196 

– local for SSC 195 

Contact washers 337 

Converter for SSC 197 

Cooling 112 – 151, 435 

Courtesy light 334 

Cover 

– for 1 U mounting unit 170 

– for baying at the top 276 

Cover bungs 


Cover cap 

– for base/plinth components TS 257 

Cover plates for fan panels 428 

Cover section for cable duct 457 

Covers 131 

CPU cable 

– for SSC view 8/SSC compact 8 196 


CS 

– Enclosure light 48 V DC 335 

– Fuel cell 251 

– Indoor Rack 225 

– Outdoor 248 – 251 

– Semi-cylinder 287 

Cylinder inserts 286 

D 

Data distributors 388 

Data Rack 231 – 233 

DC fan mounting plate for TS 124 

Deflector for air duct system 90° 141 

Depth extension for FR(i) 358 

Depth stay for mounting angles 

– PS 365 

Depth stays 




– for mounting angles 369, 370 

– for pull-out frame 378 

Depth stays for mounting angles 

– TS 369 

Designer glass door 

– 180°, for TS 277 

Designer handle 452 

Digital enclosure internal temperature 

display and thermostat 143 

Digital sensor input module 174 

Display Unit II 164 

Distributor clip 360 

Distributor frame TE 7000 open 425 


– Data Rack 231 – 233 

– Modular FM distributor racks 228 – 230 

Divider panel 

– for TS 268 

Document clip, magnetic 453 

Door stay 289 

Door variants 277 – 289 

Door-mounted fan 

– for server enclosures TS, TE 125 

Door-operated switch 333, 336 

Doors 277 – 289 


Double-membrane gland 349 

Drawer 482.6 mm (19″) 385, 386 

– to accommodate excess cable length 457 

Dust guard trim 290 

E 

Earth rail 338, 340 

Earth straps 337 

Earthing 337 – 340 

Earthing kit 



– pre-assembled, for DK-TS 340 

Earthing kit, complete 


– for TE 339 

Earthing plate 338 

Earthing point, central 338 

Earthing strap 337 

Edge protector 347 

EL wall-mounted enclosures 62 – 66, 424 

Electronic condensate evaporator 147 

Electronic Packaging 240 – 243 

EMC shielding 409, 410 

EMC wall-mounted enclosure 67 

Enclosure internal temperature display 

and thermostat, digital 143 

Enclosure internal thermostat 144 

Enclosure key 287 

Enclosure light 333, 335 

Energy-Box 332 

Engineering and consultancy 400 – 421 

Entry panel 56 

Ergoform-S handle 179 

Ergoform-S lock system 284 

ESD connection point 340 

ETSI rack 222 – 224 

Expansion kit 

– for earth rail, vertical 340 

Explanation of the fastening dimensions 

in interior installations 364 


– C19/C20 167 

– RJ 12 169 

Extension kit 

– for horizontal cable management 358 


Extension unit, CMC-TC 175 

External aerial 438 

Eyebolts 294 

F 

Fan 24 V DC with speed control 163 

Fan Control System FCS 162 


– for door mounted fan TS 125 

Fan expansion kit 127 

Fan mounting plate 

– DC for TS 124 

– for TS 127 


– for TS 8, FR(i) 128, 454 

Fan systems 123 – 128 

Fan unit, active for TE 128 

Fan-and-filter units 135 – 137 


– for base/plinth 257 

– for component shelves 327 

Feet 233, 260 

Fibre-optic 

– Blanking cover 395 

– Breakout box 1 U 396 

– Cable management panel 1 U 363 

– Extension unit 396 

– Marshalling enclosure 70 

– Patch panels 391, 395 

– Shunting ring 356 

– Small distributor, polycarbonate 71 

– Small distributors 68, 69 

– Splicing boxes and accessories 394 – 396 

– Splicing cassette holder 394 

– Splicing distributor 396 

Filter holder for roof ventilation 148 

Filter mats 

– for base/plinth component, vented 258 

– for centrifugal fans/front outlet grilles 149 

– for discontinued cooling units 148 

– for one-piece gland plate 149, 263 

– for TopTherm cooling units 148 

Fine filter mats 

– for fan-and-filter units/outlet filters 149 

Fixture unit 1 U 

– for CMC-TC sensors 171 

Fixture with rods, 3 U 

– for LSA strips 397 

FlatBox 426 – 428 

flexRack(i) 

– Network enclosures 48 – 52 

– Server enclosures 87 

FM 

– Cable shunting strips 230 

– Distributor racks 228 – 230 

– Modular wall-mounted distributors 227 

– Small distributors 226 

– System rods 230 

– System strips 229 

– Universal mounting bracket 230 

Foam rubber cable clamp strip 341 

Front outlet grille 2 U 

– for centrifugal fans 148 

Fuel cell CS 251 

G 

Gland plate modules 449 


Gland plates 341 – 347 

– Metal 344, 345 

– Multi-piece 263, 449 

– One-piece 263 

– Plastic 342, 343 

– with membranes 343 

Glass door 

– Aluminium, 180°, for TS 277 

Glazed door 

– for DK-TS, vented 279 

– for TS 278 

Grooved cable routing panel 

– 482.6 mm (19″) 362 

GSM unit 165 

Index 

H 

Hand-held rivet tool for aluminium rivets 351 

Handle adaptor 278 

Handle systems 

– for universal installation 179 

– with eletromagnetic lock 179 

Handles 

– Comfort handle for TS 8 with 

Legic Unit 181 

– Comfort handle 281, 282, 283 

– Ergoform-S handle 284 


– Mini-comfort handle 284 

– Plastic handles 286 

– Security handle with code 283 

– Swivel handle 283 

– T handles 285 

– Transponder handle 180 

Heat dissipation 407, 408 

Heat exchanger 

– Air/water, roof-mounted 139, 140 

– LCP 129 

Heavy-duty component shelves 320, 321 

High-performance cooling 116 

Hinged cable support 326 

Hinged lid for interfaces 398 

Hinges 

– for blanking plates 393 

– for side panel TS 265 

Hinges 130°, for TS 288 

Hinges 180°, for TS 288, 289, 452 

Holder for flat screen 


HPC racks 

– for high performance cooling 88 

Humidity sensor 172 

Hygrostat 144 

I 

Identification strips 

– for patch panels 391 

Identification strips 290 

Infill panel, hinged 380 

Infrared motion detector 177 

Input module 

– for analog sensor 174 

– for digital sensor 174 

Installation, 482.6 mm (19″) 364 – 397 


– Depth-variable 385 

– Depth-variable 324 

– for component shelves 324, 325 

– for FR(i) and 482.6 mm (19″) 

mounting frames 387 

– for mounting angles 365, 369, 370 

– for pull-out frame 378 

– for servers 387 

– for swing frame, large 374, 376 

– for swing frame, small 372 

Interactive Terminal Systems 244 

Interface card for TopTherm 145 

Interface flaps 398 

Interference suppression capacitors 

for fans 171 

Interior installation 295 – 340 


– for side panel, plug-type 266 

IP console 

– for SSC premium 196 

IP protective cover 439 

ISDN unit 164 

IT infrastructure 202 

J 

Junction box with multi-functional bracket 331 

K 

Keyboard drawer 386 

Keyboard rack 190 

Keys for QB, FR(i) 288 

Kit for separate frame 315 

KVM accessories 195 – 197 

KVM switches 191 – 197 

471

Index 

L 

Laboratory workstations 

– see RiLab II mobile workstations 234 

Lampertz 212 – 219 

Leak sensor 172 



– for FlatBox 428 

– with hex socket 451 

– with vibration dampening 451 

Levelling feet 260 

Lid for interfaces 398 

Light module PSM 100 

Lights 333 – 335 

Liquid cooling package 129 – 132 

Litcos 210, 211 

Lock 

– for side panel, plug-in 266 

Lock and push-button inserts 282 

Lock components 

– for frame TS 278 

Lock inserts 282, 285 

LSA connection system 397 

M 

Magnetic card reader 182 

Management system 

Spectrum Enterprise Manager 183 

Marshalling enclosure, fibre-optic 70 

Measurement module PSM 102 

Membrane gland plate 343 

Metal gland plates 344, 345 

Mini-comfort handle 284 

Mobile workstation RiLab II 234 – 237 

Modular Power Concept PMC 104 

Modular Power Concept PMC 109 

Module panel 390 

Module plates 264 

– Solid for TE 450 

Monitor switches 191 – 193 

Monitor/keyboard unit, 1 U 190 

Monitoring 186 – 201, 445 – 447 

– KVM switches 191 – 197 

– UPS, static transfer switch 111 

Monitoring & Remote Management 187 – 201 

Monitoring system 

– Master II 159, 441 

– Processing Unit II 158 

Motion detector, CMC-TC 177 

Mounting adaptor 387 

– for designer glazed door 452 

– for speed control 145 

Mounting angle kit 

– for DK-EL 365 

Mounting angles 364 – 370 

– 482.6 mm (19″) for FR(i) 364 

– 482.6 mm (19″) for TS, FR(i) 364 

– Additional fastening attachment 368 

– C rails 306, 307 

– for FlatBox 428 



– Installation kits 368, 369, 370 

– metric for TS 368 

– T-slot, for TS, FR(i) 365 

Mounting bracket 309 

– PS 311 

– TS 311 

Mounting clip for support rails 306 


– 482.6 mm (19″) for TS, FR(i) 366 

Mounting frame 54 U 


Mounting kit 

– 2 U 380 

– for cable routes 359 

– Magnet 333 

Mounting module CMC-TC 170 

Mounting plates 308 

Mounting unit, 1 U, CMC-TC 170 

Mounting/cable management panel QB 358 

Multi-seal inserts 349 

Multi-tooth screws 315, 382 

N 

Network cable 197 


– Based on Rittal flexRack(i) 48 – 52 

– Based on Rittal TE 7000 open 425 

– Based on Rittal TE 7000, 

metric attachment level 423 

– Based on Rittal TE 7000 26 – 31 

– Based on Rittal TS 8 32 – 47, 424 

Network management systems 183 

Nuts 314 

– for TS section 310 

Nylon loop cable holder, self-adhesive 457 

Nylon loop 353 

O 

One-piece gland plate 449 

Outdoor enclosures 248, 249 

Outlet filter 135 – 137 

Output moduel for room door 178 

Overvoltage protection PSM 102 

P 

Panel 

– for cable routing 362 

– for monitors 392 

– with solid tray 391 

Partial front plates 390 

Partition 269 

Patch cable 197 

Patch panels 388 – 393 

– for copper technology 388 – 390 

– for fibre-optic breakout box 396 

– for fibre-optic splicing box 394, 395 

– for fibre-optic technology 391 

PDM socket strip 432 

PG segments 347 

Plastic 

– Cable gland plates 342 

– Gland plates 343 

– Handles 286 

– Rivet 351 

Plate 

– for base mounting 257 

Plug and play connection cable 97 

Plug-in for HP Open View 184 

Plug-in modules PSM for busbar 100, 103 

PMC 200 104 – 109 

Potential equalisation rail 338, 340 

Potential equalisation star 338 

Potential equalisation 338 

Power Control for SSC 197 

Power Distribution Module PDM 97 

Power Distribution Rack PDR 97 

Power Distribution 98 – 101 

Power pack for PU, FCS 167 

Power Rack for SSC 197 

Power System Module PSM 96, 99 – 103 

PowerDecider 106 

Power 92 – 111, 432 – 434 

Primer/paint 269 

Processing Unit II (PU II) 442 

Programming cable 169 

PSM 

– Active 101 

– Light module 100 

– Plus/current splitting 103 

PSM busbar 99, 100, 103, 432 

PSM rail 

– for 120/208 V 100 

– with measurement 99 

Pull-out frame, 482.6 mm (19″) 378 

Punched rail 

– PS 304 

– TS 302 

Punched section with mounting flange 

– for TS 299, 300 

Punched section without mounting flange 

– 23 x 73 mm, PS 304 

– 45 x 88 mm, TS 301 

Push-button and lock inserts 282 

Q 

Quick-assembly block 313 

QuickBox wall-mounted enclosures 57 – 59 

Quick-change frame 


Quick-fit baying clamps 272 

Quick-release fastener 132 


R 

Rack extinguisher system 444 

Rack-mounted cooling units 120 

Rack-mounted fan module 121 

Rail systems 295 – 309 

Rear panel for TC rack 223 

Recooling systems 133 – 134 

Redundant power supply 

– CMC-TC Y-adaptor 168 

Relay output module 174 

Ride-up roller 

– for TS, ES, PC 289 

RiLab II mobile workstation 234 – 237 

RimatriX5 202 – 209 

RiWatchIT 200, 201, 446 

RNC enclosure 53 

– Universal enclosure 54 

Roof insert for TC rack 223 

Roof plates 

– DK-TS 453 


– TS 146 

Roof plates 292, 293 

Roof/wall mounting 290 – 294 

Roof-mounted 

– Cooling units 138, 435 

– Heat exchanger air/water 139, 140 

Roof-mounted fan 123 

– for the office sector 126 

Room door output module 178 

RTT I/O unit 163 

S 

Screws 

– Multi-tooth 315 

Screws 382 

Section for cable entry 

– for TS, CM, FR(i) 341 

Security handle 

– with code 283 

Security 152 – 185 

Self-tapping screws 315 

Semi-cylinder CS 287 

Semi-cylinder lock 287 

Sensor 

– for access 177 

– for airflow 173 

– for humidity 172 

– for leakage 172 

– for smoke 173 

– for temperature 172 

– for vandalism 177 

– for voltage 175 

Sensor units CMC-TC 160 – 163 

Server installation kits 387 

Server integration 387, 411 – 413 

Server racks 72 – 91, 429 – 431 

– Based on Rittal flexRack(i) 87 

– Based on Rittal TE 7000 84 

– Based on Rittal TS 8 85, 86, 429 

– Smart Package, 

pre-configured 89, 91, 430, 431 

Server Switch Control 191 – 193 

Service socket 458 


– for DK/TS 277, 280 

– vertically divided for TS 452 

Shelf 

– for AE with pull-out frame 324 


Shelves 

– see component shelves 316 – 327 

Shielding 

– horizontal 131 

– vertical 131 

Shunting panel 

– Fibre-optic 363 

Shunting ring fibre-optic 356 

Shunting ring 355 


Side panels 265 – 267 


– for TE 267 

– for top mounting module 291 

– plug-type, for FR(i) 267 

– plug-type, for TS 266 

– screw-fastened, for TS 265 

Side parts 

– for static installation of 

component shelves 325 

Single cover 

– for 1 U mounting unit 170 

Single-phase connection cable 102 

SK Bus system 145 

Slide rails 

– Depth-variable, 1 U 384 


– for EL 384 

– for FR(i), TE 384 

– for swing frames 377 

– for TS mounting angles 383 

– with one-sided mounting 383 

– with two-sided mounting 383 


– for TS network enclosures 383 

– for TS, FR(i), TE 384 

Slide rails 383, 384 

Small distributors 

– Fibre optic, polycarbonate 71 

– Fibre-optic 68, 69 

– FM 226 

Smart card reader 182 

Smart Package 89 – 91, 430 – 431 

Smoke alarm 173 

Snap-in cable routing 

– for clipping into the system punching 456 

Snap-on nut TS 310 

SNMP-OPC server 184 

Socket strips 99 – 101, 328 – 331 

– 482.6 mm (19″) 459 

– 6-way, with switch 237 

– CMC 176 

– PDM 432 

– TE 331 

– with ammeter 459 

– with C13/19 sockets 460 

Socket strips 230 V 328, 330 

Software 

– for CMC-TC 183, 184 

– RiGetIT 198, 199 

– RiWatchIT 200, 201 

– Therm 151 

– UPS, STS 111 

Spacer brackets 313 

Spacers 

– for cover plates TE 294 

– for roof plate TS 293 

Spare filter mat 149, 450 

Spare key 288 

Speed control 145 

Splicing cassette holder 394 

Spring nuts with screws 381 

Spring washer 284 

SSC 

– compact 192 

– Connect 447 

– Console Cat 5 195 

– Console IP 196 

– Console local 195 

– Converter VT100 197 

– Converter 196 

– Power Control for SSC premium 197 

– Power Pack 197 

– premium accessories 195 – 197 

– premium 193 

– view 191 

Stabiliser 

– for server racks 260 

Stabiliser bracket 


Standard light 334 

Static transfer switch 110 

– Monitoring 111 

Stay for door 289 

Stepped collar 349 

Stoppers 349 

Straps 

– Earth straps 337 

Sub-distributor 482.6 mm (19″) UPS, 

modular 434 

Supplementary unit 

– GSM unit 165 

– ISDN unit 164 

Supply connection cable 

– for PU II/FCS 167 

Support arm for flat screen 



Support bracket 

– PS 312 

– TS 312 

Support bracket or spacer 313 

Support rails 305, 306 

Support strips 

– for TS, CM, ES 303 

– TS 299, 300 

Support unit, 3 U 

– for LSA-Plus strips 397 

Surplus cable holder 357 

Swing frame 371 – 377 

– Installation kit 372, 374 

– Stay 377 

Switches 191 – 193 

Swivel handle 

– for sheet steel door TS 283 

System accessories 252 – 398, 448 – 460 

– for climate control 141 – 149 

– for Data Rack 232, 233 

– for FM distribution racks 229 – 230 

– for RiLab II 235 – 237 

– for RNC 55, 56 

System adaptor 

– for FR(i) 309 

System lights 334, 335 

System network analysis 98 

System strips, FM 229 

System support for cable routes 


System support rails 305 

T 

T handles 285 

TC rack system 222 – 224 

TE 7000 

– Metric attachment level 423 

– Network enclosures 26 – 31 

– Open, distributor frame 425 

– Server racks 84 

Telecom rack 222 – 224 

Telephone distributor 388 

Telephone/data distributor 388 

Telescopic slides 


Temperature display and thermostat, 

digital, enclosure internal 143 

Temperature sensor 172 

Terminals, ITS 244 – 247 

TFT display 190 

Thermostat 

– Digital 143 

Thermostat 144 

Three-phase connection cable for PSM rail 102 

Toolless attachment blanking panel 392 

Top mounting module 


Top-hat rail module 388 

Top-hat rails 306 

Transponder comfort handle 181 

Transponder handle TS 8 180 

Transport bracket 275 



– for TE 261 

Transport kit 


Trim frame 

– for TS 8 281 

TS 

– Air baffle system 126 

– Assembly block 303 

– Comfort handle with Legic Unit 181 

– Network enclosures 32 – 47, 423 – 425 

– Punched rail 302 

– Punched section with mounting 

flange 299, 300 

– Punched section without mounting 

flange 301 

– Punched sections with mounting flange 

as installation kit for mounting angles 368 

– Server racks 85, 86, 88, 429 – 431 

– Support strips 303 

– Transponder handle 180 

Tubular handle for RiLab II 236 

Twin castors 261 

Index 

U 

U nut 314 

Under-floor frame 

– for DK-TS, FR(i) 259 

Universal enclosure key 288 

Universal handle 179 

Universal key 287 

Universal light 335 

Universal lock unit 180 

Universal mounting bracket FM 230 

Universal server installation kit 387 

UPS, single-phase, PMC 12 433, 434 

UPS, three-phase, PMC 200 104 – 109 

Utility table for 482.6 mm (19″) 323 

V 

Vandalism sensor 177 

Vent attachment 123 

– TS 146 

Vent valve 131 

Ventilated front panels 393 

Video technology 445, 446 

Viewing window 280 

Voltage monitor 175, 176 

Voltage supply 328 – 331, 459, 460 

W 

Wall bracket 

– for TS, ES 294 

Wall-mounted distributors, FM 227 

Wall-mounted enclosures 53 – 67, 426 – 428 

– Based on Rittal AE 60, 61 

– Based on Rittal EL, pre-configured 62, 424 

– EL 62 – 66 

– EMC 67 

– Fibre-optic marshalling enclosure 70 

– QuickBox 57 – 59 

– RNC 53 – 56 

– Small fibre-optic distributors 68 – 71 

Walls 265 – 269 

– Divider panels 268, 269 


– Side panels 265 – 266 

Washers, contact washers 337 

Wireless 

– Access sensor 440 

– Digital input 439 

– Humidity sensor 440 

– I/O Unit 438 

– Measurement system 439 

– Sensor network 436 – 440 

– Temperature sensor 440 

Y 

Y-adaptor CMC-TC 168 

473

Glossary 

Glossary 

Abbreviations Full name Description 

CMC-TC Computer Multi Control-Top Concept SNMP monitoring system 

CMC-TC manager Computer Multi Control-Top Concept Manager Software for the CMC-TC monitoring system 

CS Communication systems Outdoor enclosures 

DET-AC Detection-Active Active smoke analysis 

EL Electronic wall-mounted/free-standing enclosure 

FCS Fan Control System Speed-controlled fan system 

FM distributor Telecommunications distributor Telephone distributor cabinet 

FlatBox Free-standing/wall-mounted enclosure which may be dismantled 

FR(i) flexRack(i) enclosure system 

HPC High Performance Cooling 

I/O unit Input/Output Unit Alarm and message sensor unit 

ITS Interactive Terminal System Kiosk systems 

A/A-HE Air/air heat exchanger 

A/W-HE Air/water heat exchanger 

LCP Liquid Cooling Package Modular, liquid-based, scalable cooling concept 

LCP Extend Liquid Cooling Package Extend Liquid-based cooling concept for rear door installation 

MTE Monitor/keyboard unit 1 U display/keyboard unit with telescopic extension 

PCS Power Cooling System Liquid-based, direct CPU cooling 

PCU Power Control Unit 19″ socket strip, controllable 

PDM Power Distribution Module 19″ subrack for power distribution 

PDR Power Distribution Rack Low-voltage distributor with integral 250 A power circuit-breaker 

PMC Modular Power Concept Modular, N+1 redundant UPS technology 

PSM Power System Module Modular, 3-phase socket strip 

PU Processing unit Basic unit of the CMC-TC monitoring system 

QuickBox Wall-mounted enclosure system 

RiGetIT RimatriX5 configuration software Planning software 

RiLab Rittal mobile workstation 

RiWatchIT RimatriX5 remote management software SNMP software 

RNC Rittal-Net.Com Enclosure for the small office/home office sector (SoHo) 

Smart Package Pre-configured server racks, ready to use with plug & play compatibility 

SSC Server Switch Control Keyboard Video Mouse (KVM) switch 

STS Static Transfer Switch Switches between two independent infeeds 

TC rack Telecommunications rack Rack to standard ETS 300-119-3 

TE Top Efficiency enclosure system 

TS Top enclosure system 

RAL colours 

Colour RAL Description 

3001 signal red 

5002 ultramarine blue 

5005 signal blue 

5018 turquoise blue 

7015 slate grey 

7022 umbra grey 

7024 graphite grey 

7030 stone grey 

7032 pebble grey 

Colour RAL Description 

7033 cement grey 

7035 pale grey 

7044 silky grey 

8019 grey brown 

9005 jet black 

9006 white aluminium 

9011 graphite black 

9017 traffic black 

The CE symbol 

All Rittal products subject to an EU Directive 

which envisages labelling are labelled CE. 

Up-to-date manufacturer declarations for 

the respective products are available on the 

Internet at: www.rittal.com 

Note: 

The CE symbol is not a quality symbol. 

Conformity is certified by the manufacturer 

on an independent basis. This distinguishes 

CE labelling of approvals issued by independent 

bodies. 

We reserve the right to further developments 

and technical modifications of 

our products. Such modifications, along 

with errors and printing errata, shall not 

constitute grounds for compensation. 

We refer customers to our Terms of Sale 

and Delivery. 


Germany 

Rittal GmbH & Co. KG 

Postfach 16 62 

D-35726 Herborn 

Tel.: +49 (27 72) 5 05-0 

Fax: +49 (27 72) 5 05-2319 

email: info@rittal.de 

www.rittal.com 

Argentina 

Rittal S.A. 

Esteban Echeverría 1814 

1602 Florida 

Prov. de Buenos Aires 

Tel.: +54(11) 4760 6660 

Fax: +54(11) 4730 4670 

Australia 

Rittal Pty. Ltd. 

130 – 140 Parraweena Rd. 

Taren Point NSW 2229 

Tel.: +61(2) 95 25 27 66 

Fax: +61(2) 95 25 28 88 

Free Call 1800 350 665 

email: info@rittal.com.au 

Austria 

Rittal-Schaltschränke 

Ges.m.b.H. 

Laxenburger Straße 246a 

A-1239 Wien 

Tel.: +43(1) 610 09-0 

Fax: +43(1) 610 09-21 

email: info@rittal.at 

Bahrain 

Please contact 

Rittal Middle East FZE 

Dubai/U.A.E. 

Belarus 

PNS 

Timiriazeva str. 65A of 19 

220036 Minsk 

Tel./Fax: +3 75(17)2096169 

2504421 

email: info@pns.by 

Belgium 

Rittal nv/sa 

Industrieterrein E17/3206 

Stokkelaar 8 

B-9160 Lokeren 

Tel.: +32(9) 3 53 91 11 

Fax: +32(9) 3 55 68 62 

email: info@rittal.be 

Bosnia-Herzegovina 

SYS Company d.o.o. 

Sibenska b.b. 

BiH-71000 Sarajevo 

Tel.: +3 87/33/27 70 90 

Fax: +3 87/33/27 70 92 

email: sys@sys.ba 

Brazil 

Rittal Sist. Eletrom. Ltda. 

Av. Cândido Portinari, 

no. 1.174 

Vila Jaguara 

05114-001 São Paulo-SP 

Tel.: +55(11) 36 22 23 77 

Fax: +55(11) 36 22 23 99 

email: info@rittal.com.br 

Bulgaria 

RITTBUL Ltd. 

56 Gorski patnik Str. Office 5 

BG-1421 Sofia 

Tel.: +359(2) 65 10 66 

Fax: +359(2) 96 32 516 

email: bojkov@rittbul.bg 

Canada 

Rittal Systems Ltd. 

7320 Pacific Circle 

Mississauga, Ontario 

L5T 1V1 

Tel.: +1(9 05) 7 95 07 77 

Fax: +1(9 05) 7 95 95 48 

email: rittal.systems@rittal.ca 

Chile 

Rittal 

Electromecánicos Ltda. 

Avenida 11 de Septiembre 

1881, of. 720 

Providencia, 

Santiago de Chile 

Tel.: +56 2 7843550 

Fax: +56 2 2318204 

email: info@rittal.cl 

China 

Rittal Electro-Mechanical 

Technology (Shanghai) 

Co. Ltd. 

No. 1658 Minyi Road 

Songjiang District 

Shanghai, 201612 

Tel.: (021) 5115 7799 

Fax: (021) 5115 7788 

email: marketing@rittal.cn 

Rittal international 

Agencies worldwide 

Colombia 

COLSEIN Ltda. 

Medición y Automatización 

Calle 82 No. 5 – 48 

Apartado Aereo 55479 

Santafé de Bogotá, 

D.C. Columbia 

Tel.: +57(1) 6 10 26 74 

Fax: +57(1) 6 10 78 68 

email: info@colsein.com.co 

Costa Rica 

Elvatron 

400 metros norte 

de la agencia del 

Banco de Costa Rica 

San José 

Tel.: +5 06 (2 96) 10 60 

Fax: +5 06 (2 32) 60 71 

Croatia 

Rittal d.o.o. 

Jankomir, Josipa Loncara bb 

10020 Zagreb 

Tel.: +385/1/34 64 034 

Fax: +385/1/34 64 013 

e-mail: boris.sugar@rittal.hr 

Czech Republic 

Rittal Czech, s.r.o. 

Ke Zdibsku 182 

250 66 Zdiby u Prahy 

Tel.: +420 234 099 000 

Fax: +420 234 099 099 

email: info@rittal.cz 

Denmark 

Rittal A/S 

Holtvej 8 – 10 

Høruphav 

6400 Sønderborg 

Tel.: +45 70 25 59 00 

Fax: +45 70 25 59 01 

email: info@rittal.dk 

Dubai/U.A.E. 


Warehouse GC2 

P.O. Box 17 599 

Jebel Ali Free Zone – Dubai 

U.A.E. 

Tel.: +971-4-3416855 

Fax: +971-4-3416856 

email: 

info@rittal-middle-east.com 

Estonia 

Rittal UAB branch in Estonia 

Peterburi str. 49 

11415 Tallinn 

Tel.: +372(6)052531 

Fax: +372(6)052532 

email: heiki@rittal.ee 

Finland 

Rittal Oy 

Valimotie 35 

PL 134 

01510 Vantaa 

Tel.: +3 58 9 4 13 44 00 

Fax: +3 58 9 4 13 44 410 

email: infokeskus@rittal.fi 

France 

Rittal France SAS 

Z.A. des Grands Godets 

880 rue Marcel Paul 

94507 Champigny 

sur Marne Cedex 

Tel.: +33(1) 49 83 60 00 

Fax: +33(1) 49 83 82 06 

email: info@rittal.fr 

France-East 

Sermes S.A. 

14, rue des Frères Eberts 

Boîte Postale 177 

67025 Strasbourg-Cedex 

Tel.: +33(3) 88 40 72 00 

Fax: +33(3) 88 40 72 49 

email: 

appareillage@sermes.fr 

Great Britain 

Rittal Limited 

Braithwell Way 

Hellaby Industrial Estate 

Hellaby 

Rotherham 

S Yorks, S66 8QY 

Tel.: +44(17 09) 70 40 00 

Fax: +44(17 09) 70 12 17 

email: 

information@rittal.co.uk 

Greece 

RITTAL EPE 

Thessalonikis 98 

14342 Nea Philadelphia, 

Athen 

Tel.: +30/210/27 17950 

Fax: +30/210/27 12398 

email: info@rittal.gr 

Guatemala 

INTEK 

Ingeniería y Tecnología 

Via 5 y Ruta 3, 

Zona 4 Esquina 

01004 Guatemala, C.A. 

Tel.: +50(2) 332 1489 

332 4336 

Fax: +50(2) 334 4338 

email: 

jmguzman@intek-ca.com 

Hong Kong 

Ranger 

Enterprise Co. Ltd. 

Units A-B, 8/F, Block 1 

Tai Ping Industrial Center 

57 Ting Kok Road 

Tai Po, N. T. 

Hong Kong 

Tel.: +8 52 24 20 89 28 

Fax: +8 52 24 94 92 28 

email: 

sales@ranger.com.hk 

Hungary 

Rittal Kereskedelmi Kft. 

1044-Budapest 

Ipari Park u.1. 

Tel.: (061) 399 8000 

Fax: (061) 399 8009 

e-mail: rittal@rittal.hu 

Iceland 

Smith & Norland 

Noatuni 4 

105 Reykjavik 

Tel.: +354 520 3000 

Fax: +354 520 3011 

email: sminor@sminor.is 

India 

Rittal India Pvt. Ltd. 

Nos. 23 & 24 Kiadb 

Industrial Area 

Veerapura 

Doddaballapur – 561203 

Bangalore District 

Tel.: +91(80) 276 22 335 

228 90 700 

Fax: +91(80) 276 23 343 

e-mail: info@rittal-india.com 

www.rittal-india.com 

Indonesia 

PT Zuellig Services 

Indonesia 

Wisma Budi, 2/F Suite 202 

J.l. H.R. Rasuna Said 

Kav. C-6 

Jakarta 12940 

Tel.: 

+62(21) 5296 1448 /58 /68 

Fax: 

+62(21) 5296 1450 /60 /70 

email: electrical@zi-id.com 

Ireland 

Rittal Ltd. 

Sleaty Road 

Graiguecullen 

Carlow 

Ireland 

Tel.: +353(599) 182 100 

Fax: +353(599) 132 090 

email: sales@rittal.ie 

Israel 

Rittal Enclosure Systems Ltd. 

15, Hatarshish St. Zone 29 

P.O. Box 3597 

Industrial Park 

Caesarea 38900 

Tel.: +9 72(4) 6 27 55 05 

Fax: +9 72(4) 6 27 55 35 

Italy 

Rittal S.p.A. 

S.P. n.14 Rivoltana-Km 9,5 

20060 Vignate (MI) 

Tel.: +39(02) 95 93 01 

Fax: +39(02) 95 36 02 09 

email: info@rittal.it 

Japan 

Rittal K.K. 

Sales & Marketing/ 

Tokyo Branch Office 

Shin-Yokohama Tobu AK 

Bldg. 2F 

3-23-3, Shin-Yokohama, 

Kohoku-ku 

Kanagawa 222-0033 

Tel.: +81 (45) 478-6801 

Fax: +81 (45) 478-6880 

email: hotline@rittal.co.jp 

Jordan 



Dubai/U.A.E. 

Kazakhstan 

Rittal UAB 

Representative Office 

in Kazakhstan 

Seifullin ave. 404/67-303 

050004 Almaty 

Tel.: +7 (3272) 662156 

Fax: +7 (3272) 662757 

email: 

a.skotselyas@rittal.kz 

Kuwait 



Dubai/U.A.E. 

Latvia 

Rittal UAB branch in Latvia 

Araisu str. 37 

1039 Riga 

Tel.: +371(7)80 1615 

Fax: +371(7)80 1616 

email: a.rudas@rittal.lv 

Lebanon 



Dubai/U.A.E. 

Lithuania 

Rittal UAB 

Meistru 8 

02189 Vilnius 

Tel.: +370/ 5 2105 720 

5 2306 669 

Fax: +370/ 5 2306 665 

email: info@rittal.lt 

Luxembourg 

D.M.E. s.a.r.l. 

Distribution de matériel 

électrique 

Z.A.R.E. Ouest 

4384 Ehlerange 

Tel.: +3 52-57 43 44 

Fax: +3 52-57 43 57 

email: dme@dme.lu 

Macedonia 

Siskon System Engineering 

Taskenska 4A 

MK-91000 Skopje 

Tel.: +389/2/3062 423 

Fax: +389/2/3061 250 

email: siskon@mt.net.mk 

Malaysia 

Rittal Systems Sdn Bhd 

No. 7, Jalan TPP 1/1A 

Taman Industri Puchong 

Batu 12, Jalan Puchong 

47100 Selangor, Malaysia 

Tel.: +60 (3) 8060 6688 

Fax: +60 (3) 8060 8866 

Email: sales@rittal.com.my 

Mexico 

Rittal S.A. de C.V. 

Roberto Gayol 

No. 1219-1B 

Col Del Valle Sur 03104 

México D.F. 

Tel.: +52 (55) 5559.5369/70 

Fax: +52 (55) 5559.4887 

Morocco 

S.M.R.I. 

Société Marocaine de 

Réalisations Industrielles 

109, Rue Abou Ishak 

Al Marouni Maârif 

20100 Casablanca 

Tel.: (00 212) 22 25 94 90 

(00 212) 22 23 82 67 

(00 212) 22 23 75 60 

Fax: (00 212) 22 23 77 08 

email: smri@menara.ma 

smri-maroc@hotmail.fr 

Netherlands 

Rittal bv 

Hengelder 56 

Postbus 246 

6900 AE Zevenaar 

Tel.: +31(3 16) 59 19 11 

Fax: +31(3 16) 52 51 45 

eMail: sales@rittal.nl 

New Zealand 

Rittal Ltd. 

5 Pretoria Street 

P.O. Box 30-453 

Lower Hutt 

Wellington 

Tel.: +64(4) 5 66 76 30 

Fax: +64(4) 5 66 92 19 

email: 

enquiries@rittal.co.nz 

Norway 

Rittal AS 

Regnbuveien 10 

1405 Langhus 

Tel.: +47-64 85 13 00 

Fax: +47-64 85 13 01 

email: rittal@rittal.no 

Oman 



Dubai/U.A.E. 

Peru 

CEYESA 

Ingeniería Eléctrica S.A. 

Av. Enrique Meiggs 255 

Parque Internacional 

de la Industria y Comercio 

Callao – Perú 

Tel.: +51(1) 4 51 7936 

Fax: +51(1) 4 51 7272 

email: 

ceyesacomercial@ 

rednextel.com.pe 

Philippines 

Enclosure Systems 

Specialist Incorporated 

G/F, GE Phils Building 

2291 Pasong Tamo 

Extension 

Makati City 1231 

Philippines 

Tel.: +63(2) 8 13 85 80 

Fax: +63(2) 8 13 85 96 

email: gardex@ 

mydestiney.net 

Poland 

Rittal Sp. z o.o. 

ul. Królewska 6 

05-825 Grodzisk Maz. 

k/Warszawy 

Tel.: +48(22) 724 27 84 

Fax: +48(22) 724 08 52 

Tech Info 0 801 380 320 

email: rittal@rittal.pl 

Portugal 

Rittal Sis – 

Sistemas Eléctricos 

e Electrónicos, Lda 

Z.I. de Rio Meão 

Rua 8, nº 228 

4520-475 – Rio Meão 

St a Maria da Feira 

Tel.: +351 25678 0210 

Fax: +351 25678 0219 

email: info@rittal.pt 

Qatar 



Dubai/U.A.E. 

Republic of Slovakia 

Rittal s.r.o. 

Plynárenská 1 

SK-82109 Bratislava 

Tel.: +421(2) 5363 0651 

Fax: +421(2) 5363 0951 

email: rittal@rittalsro.sk 

Romania 

Rittal Sisteme SRL 

Otopeni, 

Str. Ardealului, nr. 11A 

Judetul Ilfov – Romania 

Tel.: +4021/351 76 47 

Fax: +4021/351 76 45 

email: info@rittal.ro 

Russia 

Rittal OOO 

Russian Federation 

Moscow, 123007 

4-th Magistralnaya st. 11, 

bld. 1 

Tel.: +7 (495) 775 02 30 

Fax: +7 (495) 775 02 39 

email: info@rittal.ru 

Saudi Arabia 

A. Abunayyan Electric 

Corp. 

King Abdulaziz Street 

P.O. Box 321 

Riyadh 11411 

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 

Tel.: +966(1) 477 91 11 

Fax: +966(1) 479 33 12 

email: 

aec@abunayyangroup.com 

Singapore 

Rittal Pte. Ltd. 

7 Loyang Street 

Loyang Industrial Estate 

Singapore 508842 

Tel.: +65-65 42 68 18 

Fax: +65-65 42 68 33 

email: sales@rittal.com.sg 

Slovenia 

Rittal d.o.o. 

Smartinska 152 

SLO-1533 Ljubljana 

Tel.: +386/1/5466370 

Fax.: +386/1/5411710 

email: info@rittal.si 

South Africa 

Rittal Pty. Ltd. 

123, Terrace Road 

Sebenza 

P.O. Box 462 

Edenvale, 1610 

Johannesburg 

Tel.: +27(11) 6 09-82 94 

Fax: +27(11) 4 52-58 16 

email: info@rittal.co.za 

South Korea 

Rittal Co. Ltd. 

Seoul Head Office 

3rd Floor Asan Venture 

Tower B/D 

315-6 Yangjae-Dong 

Seocho-Gu 

Seoul 137-896 Korea 

Tel.: +82 (0)2-577-6525 

Fax: +82 (0)2-577-6526 

email: rittal@rittal.co.kr 

Spain 

Rittal Disprel S.A. 

Mas Baiona, 40 

Polígono Industrial 

Can Roqueta 

08202 Sabadell 

(Barcelona) 

Tel.: +34(93) 700 13 00 

Fax: +34(93) 700 13 01 

email: info@rittal.es 

S. R. Vietnam 

ESACO Ltd. 

15 – 17 Tran Quoc 

Thao Street 

District 3 

Hochiminh City 

Socialist Republic 

of Vietnam 

Tel.: +84(8) 9 30 50 80 

Fax: +84(8) 9 30 31 93 

email: esaco@hcm.vnn.vn 

Sweden 

Rittal Scandinavian ab 

Rittalgatan 1 

26273 Ängelholm 

Tel.: +46(4 31) 44 26 00 

Fax: +46(4 31) 44 26 37 

email: info@rittal.se 

Switzerland 

Rittal AG 

Ringstrasse 1 

5432 Neuenhof 

Tel.: +41 (0) 56 416 06 00 

Fax: +41(0) 56 416 06 66 

email: rittal@rittal.ch 

Syria 



Dubai/U.A.E. 

Taiwan 

Rittal Systems Taiwan Ltd. 

13 – 1 Fl., No. 87, 

Wen Hua 3rd Rd. 

Kuei Shan, Taoyuan Hsien 

Taiwan 

Tel.: +8 86 (3) 397-1745 

(3) 327-8871 

Fax: +8 86 (3) 397-2019 

email: 

sales.inform@rittal.com.tw 

Thailand 

Rittal Ltd. 

No. 6 Soi Pattanakarn 20 

Yaek 7 

Pattanakarn Road 

Kwaeng Suanluang 

Khet Suanluang 

Bangkok 10250 

Tel.: +66 (2) 369 2896-99 

Fax: +66 (2) 369 2883 

email: info@rittal.co.th 

Turkey 

Rittal Pano Sistemleri 

Ticaret Ltd. Sti. 

Yunus Emre mah. Barbaros 

Bulvari No: 58 

34791 Yenidogan Ümraniye 

Istanbul 

Tel.: +90 216 430 86 06/07/08 

Fax: +90 216 430 88 61 

email: info@rittal.com.tr 

Ukraine 

Rittal TOV 

Lineynaya str. 17 

03038 Kiev 

Tel.: +38 (44) 585 5210 

Fax: +38 (44) 585 5212 

email: 

office@rittal.com.ua 

USA 

Rittal Corporation 

One Rittal Place 

Springfield, OH 45504 

Tel.: (937) 399-0500 

Fax: (937) 390-5599 

Toll-free: 1-800-477-4000 

email: rittal@rittal-corp.com 

Venezuela 

EMI 

Equipos y Sistemas C. A. 

Edificio Centro Industrial 

Martinisi 

Local Piso 3 

10 de la Urbanización 

La Urbina – Caracas 

Tel.: +58(212) 243 6401 

5072 

Fax: +58(212) 243 6401 

Yugoslavia 

Vesimpex d.o.o. 

Petra Konjovica 12 v 

11090 Belgrade 

Tel./Fax: 

+3 81/11/35 10 683 

email: 

info@vesimpex.co.yu

Rittal GmbH & Co. KG Postfach 1662 D-35726 Herborn 

Telephone: +49(0)2772 505-0 Telefax: +49(0)2772 505-2319 eMail: info@rittal.de www.rittal.com 

Switch to perfection 

08/07 E578 

R

Networking

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?